JP2018140020A - Game machine - Google Patents

Abstract

PROBLEM TO BE SOLVED: To provide a game machine having features on display means.SOLUTION: A pachinko machine 100 comprises a decorative symbol display device 208. The decorative symbol display device 208 can display a word advance notice display k1. The word advance notice display k1 includes a display of characters "The load is the eighth shogun." indicating the words of a character, and the display of characters includes contents regarding the lord character. Further, in some cases, a mini game consisting of a mini game o1 may be started in relation to the word advance notice display k1.SELECTED DRAWING: Figure 16

Description

  The present invention relates to a game table represented by a ball game machine (pachinko machine), a spinning cylinder game machine (slot machine), or an enclosed game machine.

  2. Description of the Related Art Conventionally, a gaming table provided with a display means is known.

JP 2008-200302 A

  However, there is room for improvement in display means in the conventional game machine.

  An object of the present invention is to provide a game machine having a feature in display means.

The above purpose is
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a certain type of line notice display,
The certain type of notice notice display is a display that may include a character display of contents related to a certain character,
A mini-game may be started in connection with the certain type of dialogue notice display.
This is achieved by a game stand characterized by that.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to realize a game machine having a feature in display means.

It is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the front side (player side). It is the external view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention from the back side. 1 is a schematic front view of a game board 200 of a pachinko machine 100 according to an embodiment of the present invention as viewed from the front. It is a circuit block diagram of the control part of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is an example of the display symbol in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, Comprising: (a) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 1, (b) shows an example of the stop display symbol of special figure 2 (C) shows an example of a decorative design, and (d) shows an example of a normal stop display design. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part main process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the main control part timer interruption process of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. (A) is a flowchart which shows an example of the flow of the special figure prefetch process in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. (B)-(e) is a figure which shows an example of the prefetch result memory | storage part for special figures 1 and the special figure 2 with which the main control part 300 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention was equipped. It is a figure which shows the determination table for common use in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and the example of symbol distribution and the operation at the time of winning. It is a figure which shows the example of the determination table for the special figure in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for the special figure 1 in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and operation | movement at the time of big hit. It is a figure which shows the example of the symbol distribution table for the special figure 2 in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and operation | movement at the time of big hit. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of the process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 1st sub control part main process, (b) is the 1st. 1 shows a flow of 1 sub-control unit command reception interrupt processing, (c) shows a flow of first sub-control unit timer interrupt processing, and (d) shows a flow of image control processing. It is a figure explaining the electric long opening effect performed by the effect control process of the main process in the 1st sub control part 400 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. (A) shows the flow of the electric long opening effect, and (b) shows an example of the electric long opening effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is a flowchart which shows the flow of a process in the 2nd sub control part 500 of the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, (a) shows the flow of the 2nd sub control part main process, (b) is the 2nd. 2 shows the flow of the second sub-control unit command reception interrupt process, and (c) shows the flow of the second sub-control unit timer interrupt process. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure explaining the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention, and the movable body 700,702. It is a figure explaining the serif notice display in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of the present invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows an example of the preliminary notice effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the preparation notice effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the preparation notice effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the preliminary notice effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows the example of a display in the tutorial display part TT1 applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the preparation notice effect applicable to this embodiment. It is a figure which shows an example of the timer notice effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the button repeated striking effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect by the description display applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows in stepwise another example of the effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows another example of the preliminary announcement effect in preparation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure explaining another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. It is a figure which shows another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the pseudo-continuous production applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the button notice effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the production | presentation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows another example of the production | presentation applicable to this embodiment in steps. It is a figure shown in steps about an example of the expansion effect of a hold display frame. It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball removal error display. It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball removal error display. It is a figure shown about the example of a display of a ball removal error display. 1 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable. FIG. 4 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side). It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is a figure which shows the example of an effect in the pachinko machine 100 by one embodiment of this invention. It is the figure which showed an example of the item. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production which concerns on Example 1, and the item provision production in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and the item provision production which concern on Example 2 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production which concerns on Example 3, and the item provision production in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 4 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and the item provision production which concern on Example 5 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 6 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production which concerns on Example 7, and the item provision production in time series. 6 is a transition diagram showing an example of screen transition in the pachinko machine 100. FIG. It is the figure which showed an example of real screen transition in time series. It is the figure which showed an example of the screen transition when various menus are selected on the menu screen. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production which concerns on Example 8, and the item provision production in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 9 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production which concerns on Example 10, and the item provision production in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 11 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 12 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 13 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 14 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on Example 15 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and the item provision production based on Example 16 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and the item provision production based on Example 17 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and the item provision production which concern on Example 18 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on the modification 1 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on the modification 2 in time series. It is the figure which showed the meter increase production and item provision production which concern on the modification 3 in time series. It is a figure explaining the example of production using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect using the movable body 90 and the movable body 90. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using structure 247. FIG. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of production using a hold icon and a change icon. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure explaining the example of an effect of a balloon display. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a figure which shows an example of the effect centering on image display apparatus 208 'of the pachinko machine 100 concerning this embodiment in steps. It is a schematic diagram which shows an example of the image control of the pachinko machine 100 which concerns on this embodiment. It is the schematic front view which looked at the slot machine 2000 as a game stand by the modification of this invention from the front. It is a figure which shows the game stand by the modification of this invention, (a) shows the casino machine 3000, (b) shows the mobile telephone 4000 provided with the memory | storage part which memorize | stores the electronic data which implement | achieves this invention, (C) shows a portable game machine 5000 having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention, and (d) shows a home television set having a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention. A game machine 6000 is shown, and (e) shows a data server 7000 storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  Hereinafter, a gaming machine (for example, a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine or a spinning game machine such as a slot machine) according to an embodiment of the present invention will be described with reference to the drawings. First, the overall configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. In addition, the figure is the external appearance perspective view which looked at the pachinko machine 100 from the front side (player side). As an external structure, the pachinko machine 100 includes an outer frame 102, a main body 104, a front frame door 106, a launching device 110, and a game board 200 on the front surface.

  The outer frame 102 is a wooden frame member having a vertical rectangular shape for fixing to an installation location (island facilities or the like) provided in a gaming machine installation sales shop. The main body 104 is referred to as an inner frame, and is a member that is provided inside the outer frame 102 and serves as a longitudinal rectangular gaming machine base body that is rotatably attached to the outer frame 102 via a hinge portion 112. The main body 104 is formed in a frame shape and has a space 114 inside. In addition, when the main body 104 is opened, an inner frame opening sensor (not shown) that detects the opening of the main body 104 is provided.

  The front frame door 106 is attached to the front surface of the main body 104 on the front side of the pachinko machine 100 so as to be openable and closable with a lock function, and is configured in a frame shape so as to be inside thereof. Is a door member having an opening 116. The front frame door 106 is provided with a transparent plate member 118 made of glass or resin at the opening 116, and a speaker 120 and a frame lamp 122 are attached to the front side. A game area 124 is defined by the rear surface of the front frame door 106 and the front surface of the game board 200. Further, a front frame door opening sensor (not shown) that detects opening of the front frame door 106 when the front frame door 106 is opened is provided.

  The front frame door 106 can store a plurality of game balls (hereinafter sometimes simply referred to as “balls”) in a portion below the opening 116 and guide the game balls to the launching device 110. The upper plate 126 is provided, the lower plate 128 that stores game balls that cannot be stored in the upper plate 126, and the game balls stored in the upper plate 126 by the player's operation are discharged to the lower plate 128. A ball release button 130, a ball discharge lever 132 for discharging game balls stored in the lower plate 128 by a player's operation to a game ball collection container (common name, dollar box), and a player's operation to the launcher 110. The ball launching handle 134 that launches the guided game ball to the game area 124 of the game board 200, and the chance to change the effect mode of various effect devices 206 (not shown in FIG. 1) by the player's operation. To the button 136, a chance button lamp 138 that causes the chance button 136 to emit light, a setting operation unit 137 that can be set by a setting person (for example, a player or a game clerk), and a card unit (CR unit) A ball lending operation button 140 for instructing ball lending, a return operation button 142 for instructing the card unit to return the player's balance, and a ball lending display section for displaying the player's balance and card unit status ( (Not shown). In addition, a lower plate full tank sensor (not shown) that detects that the lower plate 128 is full is provided.

  The launching device 110 is attached to the lower side of the main body 104, and a launching rod 146 that rotates when the ball launching handle 134 is operated by the player, and a launching rod 148 that strikes the game ball at the tip of the launching rod 146. .

  The setting operation unit 137 is a push button type switch that can be pressed by the setter, and a confirm (OK) button, an upper button positioned above the confirm button, a lower button positioned below the confirm button, and confirm A right button positioned to the right of the button, a left button positioned to the left of the confirm button, and a cancel (C) button positioned further to the right of the right button. The setting operation unit 137 includes an operation unit sensor that detects the pressing of each button. The setting operation unit 137 of this example has a unit structure in which buttons and operation unit sensors are integrated. At least one of the buttons of the setting operation unit 137 functions as a chance button that changes the effect mode of the various effect devices 206 (see FIG. 3) by the player's operation when a predetermined condition is satisfied. It may be.

  The game board 200 has a game area 124 on the front surface, and is detachably attached to the main body 104 using a predetermined fixing member so as to face the space 114 of the main body 104. The game area 124 can be observed from the opening 116 after the game board 200 is mounted on the main body 104.

  FIG. 2 is an external view of the pachinko machine 100 of FIG. 1 viewed from the back side. The upper part of the back surface of the pachinko machine 100 has an opening that opens upward, a ball tank 150 for temporarily storing game balls, and a lower part of the ball tank 150 that is formed at the bottom of the ball tank 150. A tank rail 154 for guiding a ball that has passed through the communicating hole and dropped to the dispensing device 152 located on the right side of the back surface is provided.

  The payout device 152 is formed of a cylindrical member, and includes a payout motor, a sprocket, and a payout sensor (not shown) inside. The sprocket is configured to be rotatable by a payout motor. The sprocket that temporarily passes through the tank rail 154 and flows down into the payout device 152 is temporarily retained, and the payout motor is driven to rotate by a predetermined angle. Thus, the temporarily accumulated game balls are sent one by one downward to the payout device 152.

  The payout sensor is a sensor for detecting the passage of the game ball sent out by the sprocket. When the game ball is passing, either the high or low signal is passed, Either the high signal or the low signal is output to the payout controller 600 (see FIG. 4). The game ball that has passed through the payout sensor passes through a ball rail (not shown) and reaches the upper plate 126 disposed on the front side of the pachinko machine 100. The pachinko machine 100 has this configuration. To pay out the ball to the player.

  On the left side of the payout device 152 in the drawing, the main board case 158 that houses the main board 156 that constitutes the main control unit 300 that performs control processing for the entire game, and the production based on the processing information generated by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs the control process and the first sub-board 160 that houses the first sub-board 160 that includes the rotary volume control switch 161 that adjusts the volume output from the pachinko machine 100 by the operation of the game shop clerk. A second sub-board case 166 that houses the second sub-board 164 that constitutes the second sub-control unit 500 that performs a control process related to the production based on the processing information generated by the first sub-control unit 400; An error release switch that constitutes a payout control unit 600 that performs control processing related to payout of game balls and that releases an error by the operation of a game store clerk 68, a payout board case 172 for storing a payout board 170, a launch board case 176 for housing a launch board 174 that constitutes a launch control unit 630 for performing a control process relating to the launch of a game ball, and a power source for various electrical gaming machines. And a power switch 178 that turns the power on and off by the operation of a game clerk and an RWM clear switch 180 that outputs an RWM clear signal to the main control unit 300 when the power is turned on. A power board case 184 that houses the power board 182, a CR interface unit 186 that transmits and receives signals between the dispensing control unit 600 and the card unit, and a main board for outputting information of the pachinko machine 100 to an external hall computer or the like 156, the first sub-board 160, etc. and the hall computer, etc. It is provided with a relay substrate 188, the to relay.

  The main board 156, the first sub board 160, the second sub board 164 and the like are provided on the back surface of the game board 200 because they need to be changed for each model, and the payout board 170, the launch board 174, the power board 182 and the like are provided. Since it is used in common by a plurality of models, the outer frame 102 is provided.

  FIG. 3 is a schematic front view of the game board 200 as viewed from the front. In the game board 200, an outer rail 202 and an inner rail 204 are arranged, and a game area 124 in which a game ball can roll is defined. An effect device 206 is disposed in the approximate center of the game area 124. The effect device 206 is provided with a decorative symbol display device 208 at substantially the center. The effect device 206 performs the effect by operating the effect movable body 224, and details thereof will be described later.

  The game board 200 of this example is a so-called game board for right-handed machines. In the right-handed machine, by changing the launch strength of the game ball by operating the ball launching handle 134, the falling path of the game ball is divided into a right path on the right side from the effect device 206 and a left path on the left side from the effect device 206. be able to. In this example, to a normal symbol starting port 228, a normal symbol starting port 229, a first special symbol starting port 230, a second special symbol starting port 232 (open state), variable winning ports 234, 235 (open state), etc., which will be described later. The ease of entering the ball differs between a game ball that falls on the right path and a game ball that falls on the left path.

  For each of the normal symbol start port 229, the second special symbol start port 232 and the variable winning port 235, the normal symbol start port 229, the second special symbol start port 232 and the variable winning port 235 are arranged on the right path. Therefore, it is relatively easy to enter the game ball falling on the right path, and it is relatively difficult or impossible to enter the game ball falling on the left path. On the other hand, for each of the normal symbol starting port 228, the first special symbol starting port 230, and the variable winning port 234, a game that falls on the left path due to the influence of the arrangement pattern of the game nails 238, the warp device 242, and the like. It is relatively easy to enter a ball, and it is relatively difficult to enter a game ball that falls on the right path. In the present embodiment, a right-handed machine is taken as an example, but a right-handed machine may be used.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 is a display device for displaying decorative images and various images (moving images or still images) used for production. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol display device 208 is configured by a liquid crystal display device (Liquid Crystal Display). The decorative symbol display device 208 is divided into four display areas, a left symbol display area 208a, a middle symbol display area 208b, a right symbol display area 208c, and an effect display area 208d, and the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and The right symbol display area 208c displays different decorative symbols, and the effect display area 208d displays an image used for the effect. Furthermore, the position and size of each display area 208a, 208b, 208c, 208d can be freely changed within the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, although the liquid crystal display device is employ | adopted as the decoration symbol display apparatus 208, it is not a liquid crystal display device, What is necessary is just the structure which can display various effects and various game information, for example, a dot matrix display device Other display devices including a 7-segment display device, an organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display device, a reel (drum) display device, a leaf display device, a plasma display, and a projector may be adopted.

  Below the gaming area 124, a first special symbol display device 212, a second special symbol display device 214, a normal symbol display device 210, a first special symbol hold lamp 218, and a second special symbol hold lamp 220 A normal symbol holding lamp 216 and a high-probability medium lamp 222 are provided. In addition, hereinafter, the normal symbol may be referred to as “general symbol”, the special symbol as “special symbol”, the first special symbol as “special symbol 1”, and the second special symbol as “special symbol 2”.

  The general map display device 210 is a display device for displaying a general map, and is configured by a 7-segment LED in the present embodiment. The special figure 1 display device 212 and the special figure 2 display device 214 are display devices for displaying the special figure, and are configured by 7 segment LEDs in the present embodiment.

  The universal figure holding lamp 216 is a lamp for indicating the number of universal figure floating games (details will be described later) that are on hold. It is possible to hold. The special figure 1 holding lamp 218 and the special figure 2 holding lamp 220 are lamps for indicating the number of special figure variable games that are held (details will be described later). In the present embodiment, the special figure variable games are predetermined. It is possible to hold up to a number (for example, 4). The high-probability medium lamp 222 is a lamp for indicating that the gaming state is a high probability state in which a big hit is likely to occur or a high probability state, and the gaming state is changed from a low probability state in which a big hit is unlikely to occur. Turns on when switching to the probability state, and turns off when switching from the high probability state to the low probability state.

  In addition, a predetermined ball entrance, for example, a general winning opening 226, a normal start port 228, 229, a special view 1 start port 230, and a special view 2 start port 232, are variable around the rendering device 206. Winning ports 234 and 235 are arranged.

  In the present embodiment, a plurality of general winning holes 226 are provided on the game board 200, and when a predetermined ball detection sensor (not shown) detects a ball entering the general winning holes 226 (in the general winning holes 226). In the case of winning, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 10 balls) of balls are discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. The player can freely take out the balls discharged to the upper plate 126. With these configurations, the player can pay out the winning balls to the player based on winning. The ball that has entered the general winning opening 226 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side. In the present embodiment, a game ball is paid out to a player as a consideration for winning (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “prize ball”) and a ball lent to a player (hereinafter referred to as “lending ball”). May be included).

  The general map start port 228 and the general map start port 229 are configured by a device called a gate or a through chucker for determining whether or not a ball has passed through a predetermined area of the game area 124. In the embodiment, one general-purpose start port 228 is disposed on the left path of the game board 200, and one general-purpose start port 229 is disposed on the right path. Unlike the ball that entered the general winning opening 226, the ball that has passed through the ordinary drawing starting port 228 or the universal drawing starting port 229 is not discharged to the amusement island side. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects that a ball has passed through the general map start port 228 or the general map start port 229, the pachinko machine 100 starts a general map variable game by the general map display device 210.

  In the present embodiment, only one special figure 1 starting port 230 is provided at the center of the game board 200. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 1 starting port 230, the payout device 152 is driven to discharge a predetermined number (for example, three) of balls as prize balls to the upper plate 126. Then, the special figure variable game (hereinafter sometimes referred to as “special figure 1 variable game”) by the special figure 1 display device 212 is started. Note that the ball that has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The special figure 2 starting port 232 is called an electric tulip (electrical chew), and in this embodiment, only one is provided on the right path. The special figure 2 starting port 232 is provided with a pair of blade members 232a that can be opened and closed to the left and right. When the blade members 232a are closed, it is impossible to enter a ball. When 210 hits and stops and displays the symbol, the blade member 232a opens and closes at a predetermined time interval and a predetermined number of times. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the special opening 2 232, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, four) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as prize balls. Then, a special figure variable game (hereinafter, also referred to as “special figure 2 variable game”) by the special figure 2 display device 214 is started. The ball that has entered the special figure 2 starting port 232 is guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are called a large winning opening or an attacker. In the present embodiment, only one variable winning opening 234 is provided below the center of the game board 200, and the variable winning opening 235 is on the right path. Only one is provided. The variable winning openings 234 and 235 are each provided with a door member that can be freely opened and closed, and a ball cannot be entered while the door member is closed. If the special figure display device stops and displays the jackpot symbol after winning the special figure variation game, for example, one door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 is closed at a predetermined time interval (for example, opening time 29 seconds, closing time) It opens and closes at a predetermined number of times (for example, 15 times) for a time of 1.5 seconds. When a predetermined ball detection sensor detects a ball entering the variable winning opening 234, 235, the payout device 152 is driven, and a predetermined number (for example, 15) of balls is discharged to the upper plate 126 as a winning ball. The balls that have entered the variable winning openings 234 and 235 are guided to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharged to the amusement island side.

  Further, a plurality of disk-shaped hitting direction changing members 236 called a windmill and a plurality of game nails 238 are arranged in the vicinity of these winning openings and starting openings, and at the bottom of the inner rail 204, An out port 240 is provided for guiding a ball that has not won a prize or starting port to the back side of the pachinko machine 100 and then discharging it to the game island side.

  The pachinko machine 100 supplies the ball stored in the upper plate 126 by the player to the launch position of the launch rail, drives the launch motor with strength according to the operation amount of the player's ball launch handle 134, and The outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 are made to pass through the outer rail 202 and the inner rail 204 by the 146 and the launcher 148, and are launched into the game area 124. Then, the ball that has reached the upper part of the game area 124 falls downward while changing the direction of travel by the batting direction changing member 236, the game nail 238, etc., and a winning port (general winning port 226, variable winning ports 234, 235) or Wins at the starting port (Special Figure 1 starting port 230, Special Figure 2 starting port 232), or wins without winning any of the winning port or starting port, or just passing through the normal starting ports 228, 229 Reach mouth 240.

  Next, the rendering device 206 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. On the front side of the stage device 206, a warp device 242 (242a, 242b) and a front stage 244 are arranged in an area where the game ball can roll, and an effect movable body 224 is placed in the area where the game ball cannot roll. It is arranged. Further, a fourth symbol display device 248 for displaying the fourth symbol is disposed on the upper right side of the effect movable body 224. The 4th symbol display device 248 includes two square lamps. The two lamps are arranged side by side. For example, LEDs are used as the light sources of these two lamps. The upper lamp corresponds to FIG. 1 and the lower lamp corresponds to FIG. The fourth symbol display device 248 may include only one common lamp corresponding to both the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. Further, the fourth symbol may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Moreover, the 4th symbol display apparatus may be provided in the production | presentation apparatus 206 (center accessory) like this example. In addition, a decorative symbol display device 208 and a shielding device 246 (hereinafter sometimes referred to as a door or a shutter) are disposed on the back side of the effect device 206. That is, in the effect device 206, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the shielding device 246 are positioned behind the warp device 242, the front stage 244, and the effect movable body 224. The warp device 242 discharges the game ball that has entered the warp inlet 242a provided at the upper left of the effect device 206 to the front stage 244 below the front surface of the effect device 206 from the warp outlet 242b. The front stage 244 can roll a ball discharged from the warp outlet 242b or a ball carried by a nail of the game board 200, and the passed ball is in the center of the front stage 244. A special route 244a is provided to facilitate entry to 230.

  The effect movable body 224 of this example includes a horizontally long flat panel on which the model name of the pachinko machine 100 and the like are displayed. The effect movable body 224 is movable by a stepping motor (not shown) so that the front of the decorative symbol display device 208 can be moved in the vertical direction within a plane substantially parallel to the display screen.

  The shielding device 246 includes a lattice-like left door 246a and right door 246b, and is disposed between the decorative symbol display device 208 and the front stage 244. Belts wound around two pulleys (not shown) are fixed to the upper portions of the left door 246a and the right door 246b, respectively. That is, the left door 246a and the right door 246b move to the left and right as the belt driven by the motor through the pulley moves. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are closed, the shielding device 246 covers the inner end portions of the shielding device 246 so that it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state where the left door 246a and the right door 246b are opened, each inner end portion slightly overlaps the outer end portion of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208, but the player can visually recognize all of the display of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b can be stopped at arbitrary positions, respectively, for example, only a part of the decorative design so that the player can identify which decorative design the displayed decorative design is. Can be shielded. In addition, the left door 246a and the right door 246b may be configured so that a part of the decorative symbol display device 208 behind the lattice hole can be visually recognized, or the shoji part of the lattice hole is closed with a translucent lens body. The display by the decorative symbol display device 208 may be made vaguely visible to the player, or the shoji part of the holes in the lattice is completely blocked (shielded), and the decorative symbol display device 208 behind is made completely invisible. Also good.

  Next, the circuit configuration of the control unit of the pachinko machine 100 will be described in detail with reference to FIG. This figure shows a circuit block diagram of the control unit. The control unit of the pachinko machine 100 can be roughly divided into a main control unit 300 that controls the central part of the game and a command signal (hereinafter simply referred to as “command”) transmitted by the main control unit 300. The first sub-control unit 400 that performs control, the second sub-control unit 500 that controls various devices based on the command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400, and the main control unit 300 according to the command transmitted by the main control unit 300 The payout control unit 600 controls the game ball payout, the launch control unit 630 performs the game ball launch control, and the power supply control unit 660 controls the power supplied to the pachinko machine 100. .

  First, the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The main control unit 300 includes a basic circuit 302 that controls the entire main control unit 300. The basic circuit 302 includes a CPU 304, a ROM 306 for storing control programs and various data, a RAM 308 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 310 for controlling input / output of various devices, a time And a counter timer 312 for measuring the number of times and a WDT 314 for monitoring an abnormality in the program processing. Note that other storage devices may be used for the ROM 306 and the RAM 308, and this is the same for the first sub-control unit 400 and the second sub-control unit 500 described later. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 316b as a system clock.

  The basic circuit 302 has a random value generation circuit (counter circuit) 318 (a counter circuit) 318 (used as a hardware random number counter that changes a numerical value in the range of 0 to 65535 every time a clock signal output from the crystal oscillator 316a is received. This circuit includes two counters) and a predetermined ball detection sensor, for example, a sensor for detecting a game ball passing through each start port, winning port, variable winning port, or opening the front frame door A sensor circuit for receiving signals output from various sensors 320 including a sensor, an inner frame opening sensor, and a lower plate full sensor, and outputting an amplification result and a comparison result with a reference voltage to the random value generation circuit 318 and the basic circuit 302 322, a drive circuit 324 for performing display control of a predetermined symbol display device such as the special figure 1 display device 212 or the special figure 2 display device 214, and a predetermined figure A drive circuit 326 for performing display control of the display device, for example, the general map display device 210, and various status display units 328 (for example, the general map hold lamp 216, the special figure 1 hold lamp 218, the special figure 2 hold lamp 220, the high Driving circuit 330 for performing display control of the center lamp 222 and the like, and various movable members such as a blade member 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 and door members of the variable winning ports 234 and 235 are opened and closed. A drive circuit 334 for controlling the solenoid 332 is connected. In this example, the crystal oscillator 316a and the random value generation circuit 318 are provided separately, but the crystal oscillator 316a may be included in the random value generation circuit 318.

  When the sphere detection sensor 320 detects that a sphere is won at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the sensor circuit 322 outputs a signal indicating that the sphere has been detected to the random value generation circuit 318. Upon receiving this signal, the random value generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230, and stores the latched value in the built-in counter value corresponding to the special figure 1 starting port 230. Store in the register. Similarly, when the random value generation circuit 318 receives a signal indicating that the ball has won the special figure 2 starting port 232, the random number generation circuit 318 latches the value at the timing of the counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232. The latched value is stored in a built-in counter value storage register corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232.

  Further, an information output circuit 336 is connected to the basic circuit 302, and the main control unit 300 is connected to an information input circuit 350 provided in an external hall computer (not shown) or the like via this information output circuit 336. The game information (for example, game state) of the machine 100 is output.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a voltage monitoring circuit 338 that monitors the voltage value of the power source supplied from the power source control unit 660 to the main control unit 300. The voltage monitoring circuit 338 is a voltage value of the power source. Is lower than a predetermined value (9 V in this example), a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output to the basic circuit 302.

  In addition, the main control unit 300 is provided with a start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs a start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. When an activation signal is input, game control is started (main control section main processing described later is started).

  The main control unit 300 includes an output interface for transmitting a command to the first sub-control unit 400 and an output interface for transmitting a command to the payout control unit 600. Communication with the 1 sub control part 400 and the payout control part 600 is enabled. Information communication between the main control unit 300 and the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 is one-way communication. The main control unit 300 sends commands and the like to the first sub-control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600. The first sub control unit 400 and the payout control unit 600 are configured such that signals such as commands cannot be transmitted to the main control unit 300. However, the information communication between the main control unit 300, the first sub control unit 400, and the payout control unit 600 may be performed by bidirectional communication.

  Next, the first sub control unit 400 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a basic circuit 402 that controls the entire first sub-control unit 400 based mainly on commands transmitted from the main control unit 300. The basic circuit 402 includes a CPU 404, a RAM 408 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 410 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 412 for measuring time and frequency. It is installed. The CPU 404 of the basic circuit 402 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 414 as a system clock. The basic circuit 402 is provided with a ROM 406 for storing a control program and various effect data. The ROM 406 may store the control program and various effect data in separate ROMs.

  The basic circuit 402 includes a sound source IC (S-ROM) 416 for controlling the speaker 120 (and amplifier) and a drive circuit 420 for controlling various lamps 418 (for example, the chance button lamp 138). A driving circuit 432 for controlling the driving of the shielding device 246, a shielding device sensor 430 for detecting the current position of the shielding device 246, a chance button sensor 426 for detecting pressing of the chance button 136, and an output from the speaker 120. A volume adjustment switch 161 (not shown in FIG. 4) for adjusting the volume to be operated, an operation unit sensor (not shown) for detecting depression of each button of the setting operation unit 137, and detection signals from these sensors An image stored in the ROM 406 based on a sensor circuit 428 output to the basic circuit 402 and a signal from the CPU 404 Are connected to the VDP (Video Display Processor) 434 which generates display image using a work area of VRAM436 reads over data or the like to display an image on the decorative pattern display unit 208, a.

  Next, the second sub control unit 500 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a basic circuit 502 that receives the control command transmitted from the first sub-control unit 400 via the input interface and controls the entire second sub-control unit 500 based on the control command. ing. The basic circuit 502 includes a CPU 504, a RAM 508 for temporarily storing data, an I / O 510 for controlling input / output of various devices, and a counter timer 512 for measuring time, the number of times, and the like. doing. The CPU 504 of the basic circuit 502 operates by inputting a clock signal of a predetermined period output from the crystal oscillator 514 as a system clock. The basic circuit 502 is provided with a ROM 506 in which a control program and data for controlling the entire second sub-control unit 500, data for image display, and the like are stored.

  The basic circuit 502 includes a drive circuit 516 for controlling the drive of the effect movable body 224, an effect movable body sensor 424 that detects the current position of the effect movable body 224, and a detection signal from the effect movable body sensor 424. Is output to the basic circuit 502, a game board lamp drive circuit 530 for controlling the game board lamp 532, and a game table frame lamp drive for controlling the game table frame lamp 542 The circuit 540 is connected to a serial communication control circuit 520 that performs lighting control by serial communication between the game board lamp drive circuit 530 and the game stand frame lamp drive circuit 540.

  Next, the payout control unit 600, the launch control unit 630, and the power supply control unit 660 of the pachinko machine 100 will be described. The payout control unit 600 controls the payout motor 602 of the payout device 152 mainly based on a command signal or the like transmitted from the main control unit 300, and wins or rents a ball based on a control signal output from the payout sensor 604. It is detected whether or not the payout has been completed. Further, the payout control unit 600 communicates with a card unit 608 provided separately from the pachinko machine 100 via the interface unit 606.

  The launch control unit 630 outputs a control signal output from the payout control unit 600 to permit or stop the launch, or a launch intensity output circuit provided in the ball launch handle 134 to operate the ball launch handle 134 by the player. Control of the launch motor 632 that drives the launcher 146 and launcher 148, and control of the ball feeder 634 that supplies the launcher 110 with a ball from the upper plate 126 based on a control signal that indicates the launch intensity according to the amount. I do.

  The power control unit 660 converts the AC power supplied from the outside to the pachinko machine 100 into a DC voltage, converts it to a predetermined voltage, and controls each control unit such as the main control unit 300 and the first sub control unit 400, the payout device 152, etc. Supply to each device. Further, the power supply control unit 660 supplies a power storage circuit (for example, a power supply circuit) for supplying power to a predetermined part (for example, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300) for a predetermined period (for example, 10 days) even after the external power supply is cut off. , Capacitor). In the present embodiment, a predetermined voltage is supplied from the power supply control unit 660 to the payout control unit 600 and the second sub control unit 500, and the main control unit 300, the second sub control unit 500, and the launch control are supplied from the payout control unit 600. Although the predetermined voltage is supplied to the unit 630, the predetermined voltage may be supplied to each control unit and each device through another power supply path.

  Next, using FIG. 5A to FIG. 5D, the special figure 1 display device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the universal figure display device 210 of the pachinko machine 100 are stopped and displayed. The types of figures and ordinary drawings will be described. FIG. 5 (a) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of FIG. 1, and FIG. 5 (b) shows an example of the stop symbol aspect of FIG. The special figure 1 variable game is started on the condition that the first start port sensor detects that the ball has entered the special figure 1 start opening 230, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 indicates that the ball has entered 2 The special figure 2 variable game is started on condition that the start sensor is detected. When the special figure 1 variable game is started, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs “variable display of special figure 1” which repeats lighting of all seven segments and lighting of one central segment. When the special figure 2 variable game is started, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs “variable display of special figure 2” by repeating all lighting of the seven segments and lighting of the central one segment. . These “variation display of special figure 1” and “variation display of special figure 2” correspond to an example of the symbol fluctuation display in the present embodiment. When the fluctuation time determined before the start of the fluctuation in FIG. 1 elapses, the special figure 1 display device 212 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 1 and the fluctuation time determined before the fluctuation starts in the special figure 2. After the elapse, the special figure 2 display device 214 stops and displays the stop symbol form of the special figure 2. Therefore, from the start of “figure display of special figure 1” until the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is stopped, or after the start of “fluctuation display of special figure 2”, the stop symbol form of special figure 2 is displayed. Until stop display corresponds to an example of the symbol fluctuation stop display referred to in the present embodiment, the stop symbol mode of special figure 1 or 2 is stopped and displayed after the "fluctuation display of special figure 1 or 2" is started. A series of displays until this is done is referred to as symbol variation stop display. The symbol variation stop display may be continuously performed a plurality of times.

  FIG. 5 (a) shows seven types of special maps “Special Figure A” to “Special Figure G” as stop symbol forms in the symbol variation stop display of Special FIG. In FIG. 5A, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is turned off, and the black portions indicate the location where the segments are turned on. "Special Figure A" is a 15 round (15R) special jackpot symbol, "Special Figure B" is a 7R special jackpot symbol, and "Special Figure C" is a 7R jackpot symbol. In the pachinko machine 100 of the present embodiment, whether or not a big hit in the special figure variable game is determined by lottery of hardware random numbers, and whether or not a special big hit is determined and the number of rounds are determined by lottery of software random numbers. The difference between the jackpot and the special jackpot is a special figure variation game after the jackpot game ends, and the difference in probability of winning the jackpot is high (special jackpot) or low (jackpot). Hereinafter, a state with a high probability of winning the jackpot is referred to as a special figure high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “special figure certain change” or simply “probable change”), and a state with a low probability is specially designated. This is called a low probability state. In addition, after the 15R special jackpot game ends, after the 7R special jackpot game ends and after the 7R jackpot game ends, the state shifts to the time-saving state (electric support state). Although the short time will be described in detail later, the short time state is referred to as a normal high probability state (hereinafter, sometimes referred to as “general probability change”), and the non-short time state is referred to as a general low probability state. “Special Figure A”, which is a 15R special jackpot symbol, and “Special Figure B”, which is a 7R special jackpot symbol, are symbols that become a special figure high probability common figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends, and are 7R jackpot symbols. “Special figure C” is a symbol that becomes a special figure low probability normal figure high probability state after the end of the big hit game. These “special drawing A”, “special drawing B”, and “special drawing C” are symbols that have a relatively large advantage over the player.

  "Special figure D" is a 2R jackpot symbol called sudden probability change, and is a symbol that becomes a special figure high probability ordinary figure high probability state after the jackpot game ends. That is, “Special Figure D” is 2R compared to “Special Figure A” which is 15R and “Special Figure B” which is 7R.

  “Special figure E” is a 2R jackpot symbol called latent probability variation or hidden probability variation. As will be described later, when “Special Figure E” is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the special figure high probability normal figure low probability state (so-called “open” time 100 ms × 2R) ends. If the special figure E is stopped and displayed in a state other than the low probability state, the special figure high probability will be displayed after the big hit game (opening time 29000 ms × 2R). Transition to the high probability state shown in FIG. 11 (see FIGS. 11A and 11B). In other words, the “special figure E” indicates that the action during the big hit game and the game state to be shifted thereafter are determined according to the game state when the stop display is made (in this example, whether or not the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state). It is a different design.

  “Special figure F” is a small hit symbol, and is a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state. Further, the “special chart G” is an off-line symbol, and is a symbol that is relatively less advantageous to the player.

  FIG. 5 (b) shows four types of special figures “Special figure a” to “Special figure d” as stop symbol forms in the symbol fluctuation stop display of Special figure 2. “Special figure a” is a 15R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure b” is a 7R special jackpot symbol, “Special figure c” is a 7R jackpot symbol, and “Special figure d” is a missed symbol. In the present embodiment, seven types of special maps (of which five types are big hits) are used as the special symbol 2 as the special symbols 1 to 7 as shown in FIG. As the stop symbol pattern, four types of special maps (three of which are big hits) are used. By configuring in this way, there is a case where it is possible to provide a difference between the advantages of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 without changing the probability of being a big hit and the probability of being probable among the big wins. In this example, the big hit of Special Figure 1 includes sudden probability changes and latent probability changes that hardly give out balls, whereas the big hit of Special Figure 2 does not include sudden probability changes and latent probability changes. The advantage of special figure 2 is higher than that of special figure 1.

  FIG. 5 (c) shows an example of a decorative design. There are 10 types of decoration patterns of the present embodiment: “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 10”. “Decoration 1” to “Decoration 9” and “Decoration 10” represent the numbers “1” to “9” and “0”, respectively. The first start port sensor detects that a ball has won the special figure 1 starting port 230 or the special figure 2 starting port 232, that is, the ball has entered the special figure 1 starting port 230, or the special figure 2 Each of the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208 is provided on the condition that the second start port sensor detects that a ball has entered the start port 232. In the symbol display area, “decoration 1” → “decoration 2” → “decoration 3” →... → “decoration 9” → “decoration 10” → “decoration 1” →. “Change design of symbols”.

  And then, "Special Figure A" 15R special jackpot, "Special Figure B" 7R special jackpot, "Special Figure C" 7R big jackpot, "Special Figure a" 15R special jackpot, "Special Figure b" 7R special jackpot When the 7R jackpot of “special drawing c” is notified, a combination of symbols in which three same decorative symbols are arranged in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (for example, “decoration 1—decoration 1—decoration 1” or “decoration 2— Display “decoration 2—decoration 2”). When the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure A” and the 15R special jackpot of “Special Figure a” are explicitly notified, a combination of three symbols with the same odd number of decorative symbols (for example, “Decoration 3-Decoration 3- “Decoration 3”, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”, etc.) are stopped and displayed.

  In addition, when notifying 2R big hit called “special drawing E” latent probability change (hidden probability change) or “special drawing F” small hit, “decoration 1-decoration 2-decoration 3” is stopped and displayed. To do. When a 2R jackpot called “sudden change” of “special drawing D” is notified, “decoration 1-decoration 3—decoration 5” is stopped and displayed. On the other hand, when notifying of the difference between “Special Figure G” and “Special Figure d”, symbol combinations other than the symbol combinations shown in FIG. 5C are stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  FIG.5 (d) shows an example of the usual stop display symbol. In this embodiment, there are three types of stop-display modes for normal maps: “general map A” and “general map B” which are hit symbols, and “general map C” which is a misplaced symbol. Based on the fact that the above-mentioned gate sensor has detected that the sphere has passed through the general map start port 228 and the general map start port 229, the general map display device 210 turns on all seven segments and displays one in the center. Repeatedly turn on the segment of “Usual change display”. Then, when notifying the winning of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure A” or “special figure B” is stopped and displayed, and when notifying the deviation of the common figure variable game, the “normal figure C” is stopped and displayed. To do. Also in FIG. 5D, the white portions in the figure indicate the segment locations where the light is extinguished, and the black portions indicate the location of the segments where the light is illuminated.

  Next, main control unit main processing executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of main processing of the main control unit. As described above, the main control unit 300 is provided with the start signal output circuit (reset signal output circuit) 340 that outputs the start signal (reset signal) when the power is turned on. The CPU 304 of the basic circuit 302 to which this activation signal is input executes a main control unit main process according to a control program stored in advance in the ROM 306 after resetting by a reset interrupt.

  First, in step S101, initial setting 1 is performed. In the initial setting 1, the stack initial value is set in the stack pointer (SP) of the CPU 304 (temporary setting), the interrupt mask is set, the I / O 310 is initialized, the various variables stored in the RAM 308 are initialized, and the WDT 314 is set. Enable operation, set initial values, etc. In this embodiment, a numerical value corresponding to 32.8 ms is set in WDT 314 as an initial value.

  In step S103 following step S101, the value of the counter of WDT 314 is cleared, and the time measurement by WDT 314 is restarted. In step S105 subsequent to step S103, whether or not the low voltage signal is ON, that is, the voltage value of the power supply that the voltage monitoring circuit 338 supplies from the power supply control unit 660 to the main control unit 300 is a predetermined value. When it is less than (9 V in this example), it is monitored whether or not a low voltage signal indicating that the voltage has dropped is output. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when the CPU 304 detects that the power supply is cut off), the process returns to step S103, and when the low voltage signal is off (when the CPU 304 does not detect that the power supply is cut off), The process proceeds to S107. Even when the predetermined value (9 V) is not yet reached immediately after the power is turned on, the process returns to step S103, and step S105 is repeatedly executed until the supply voltage becomes equal to or higher than the predetermined value.

  In step S107, initial setting 2 is performed. In the initial setting 2, a process for setting a numerical value for determining a cycle for executing a main control unit timer interrupt process, which will be described later, in the counter timer 312, a predetermined port of the I / O 310 (for example, a test output port, a second output port, etc.) 1) a process of outputting a clear signal from the output port 1), a setting for permitting writing to the RAM 308, and the like.

  In step S109 subsequent to step S107, it is determined whether or not the state before power interruption (before power interruption) is restored. If the state before power interruption is not restored (the basic circuit 302 of the main control unit 300 is changed). In the case of initializing), the process proceeds to initialization processing (step S113). Specifically, first, a RAM clear signal transmitted when an RWM clear switch 180 provided on the power supply board 182 is operated by a store clerk or the like is on (indicating that there has been an operation). That is, it is determined whether or not RAM clear is necessary. If the RAM clear signal is on (RAM clear is necessary), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. On the other hand, when the RAM clear signal is OFF (when the RAM clear is not necessary), the power status information stored in the power status storage area provided in the RAM 308 is read, and the power status information is information indicating suspend. It is determined whether or not. If the power status information is not information indicating suspend, the process proceeds to step S113 to set the basic circuit 302 to the initial state. If the power status information is information indicating suspend, all 1-byte data stored in a predetermined area (for example, all areas) of the RAM 308 is added to a 1-byte register whose initial value is 0. Thus, the checksum is calculated, and it is determined whether or not the calculated checksum result is a specific value (for example, 0) (whether or not the checksum result is normal). When the checksum result is a specific value (eg, 0) (when the checksum result is normal), the process proceeds to step S111 to return to the state before the power interruption, and the checksum result is a specific value. If the value is other than 0 (for example, 0) (if the result of the checksum is abnormal), the process proceeds to step S113 to set the pachinko machine 100 to the initial state.

  In step S111, power recovery processing is performed. In this power recovery process, the value of the stack pointer stored in the stack pointer save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power failure is read and reset to the stack pointer (this setting). In addition, the value of each register stored in the register save area provided in the RAM 308 at the time of power interruption is read out and reset in each register, and then the interrupt permission is set. Thereafter, as a result of the CPU 304 executing the control program based on the reset stack pointer and registers, the pachinko machine 100 returns to the state when the power is turned off. That is, the processing is resumed from the instruction next to the instruction (predetermined in step S115) performed immediately before branching to the timer interrupt process (described later) immediately before the power interruption. The RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a transmission information storage area. In step S111, a power recovery command is set in the transmission information storage area. This power recovery command is a command indicating that the power has been restored to the state at the time of power-off. In the command setting transmission process (step S233) in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300, which will be described later, the first sub control unit 400. Sent to.

  In step S113, initialization processing is performed. In this initialization process, interrupt prohibition setting, stack initial value setting to the stack pointer (this setting), initialization of all storage areas of the RAM 308, and the like are performed. Further, here, a normal return command is set in the transmission information storage area provided in the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300. This normal return command is a command indicating that the initialization process (step S113) of the main control unit 300 has been performed, and, like the power recovery command, the command setting transmission process (in the timer interrupt process of the main control unit 300) ( In step S233), it is transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400.

  In step S115 subsequent to step S113, the basic random number initial value updating process is performed after setting the interrupt prohibition. In this basic random number initial value update process, the initial values of four random number counters for generating the normal winning random number, the special random number, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value are generated. The four initial value generation random number counters and the two random number counters for generating each of the normal figure variation time determination random value and the special figure variation time determination random value are updated. For example, if the numerical value range that can be taken as the random number value for determining the normal time variation is 0 to 100, the value is acquired from the random number counter storage area for generating the random value for determining the normal time variation time provided in the RAM 308 and acquired. Then, 1 is added to the obtained value and stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. Other initial value generation random number counters and random number counters are similarly updated. The initial value generation random number counter is also updated in a basic random number initial value update process (step S207) described later. The main control unit 300 repeatedly executes the process of step S115 except during a timer interrupt process that starts every predetermined period.

  Next, the main control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 304 of the main control unit 300 will be described with reference to FIG. This figure is a flowchart showing the flow of the main control unit timer interrupt process. The main control unit 300 includes a counter timer 312 that generates a timer interrupt signal at a predetermined cycle (in this example, about once every 2 ms), and the main control unit timer interrupt processing is triggered by this timer interrupt signal. At a predetermined cycle.

  First, in step S201, a timer interrupt start process is performed. In this timer interrupt start process, a process of temporarily saving each register value of the CPU 304 to the stack area is performed. In step S203 following step S201, the WDT 314 is periodically updated so that the WDT 314 count value exceeds the initial setting value (32.8 ms in this example) and no WDT interruption occurs (so as not to detect a processing abnormality). Therefore (in this example, the restart is performed once in about 2 ms, which is the period of the main control unit timer interrupt).

  In step S205 subsequent to step S203, input port state update processing is performed. In this input port state update process, the detection signals of various sensors 320 including the above-mentioned front frame door open sensor, inner frame open sensor, lower pan full sensor, and various ball detection sensors are input via the input port of the I / O 310. The input is monitored for the presence or absence of a detection signal, and stored in a signal state storage area provided for each of the various sensors 320 in the RAM 308. If the detection signal of the sphere detection sensor is described as an example, information on the presence / absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected in the timer interruption process (about 4 ms before) is stored in the RAM 308 for each sphere detection sensor. This information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area partitioned and stored in the RAM 308 in the previous detection signal storage area partitioned for each sphere detection sensor, and the previous timer interrupt processing (about 2 ms before) ) Is read from the current detection signal storage area provided for each sphere detection sensor in the RAM 308, and this information is read out from the previous detection signal storage area described above. To remember. Further, the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor detected this time is stored in the above-described current detection signal storage area.

  Further, in step S205, the information on the presence or absence of the detection signal of each sphere detection sensor stored in each storage area of the above-mentioned detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area is compared. It is determined whether or not the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in the ball detection sensor matches the winning determination pattern information. This main control unit timer interrupt process that is repeatedly started at a very short interval of about 2 ms while one game ball passes one ball detection sensor is started several times. For this reason, every time the main control unit timer interruption process is started, in step S205, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is confirmed. As a result, a detection signal indicating that the same game ball has passed the same ball detection sensor is stored in each of the detection signal storage area, the previous detection signal storage area, and the current detection signal storage area. That is, when the game ball starts to pass through the ball detection sensor, there is no detection signal before, a previous detection signal, and a current detection signal. In the present embodiment, in consideration of erroneous detection and noise of the sphere detection sensor, it is determined that there is a prize when the detection signal is stored twice continuously after no detection signal.

  In the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is no previous detection signal, that there is a previous detection signal, and that there is a current detection signal) is stored. In step S205, information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times in each sphere detection sensor is pre-determined winning determination pattern information (in this embodiment, no previous detection signal, previous detection signal present, current detection signal present). In the case of the general winning opening 226, the variable winning openings 234, 235, the special figure 1 starting opening 230, and the special figure 2 starting opening 232, or the ordinary drawing starting opening 228. 229, it is determined that there was a passage. In other words, it is determined that a prize has been received at these winning ports 226, 234, 235 and the starting ports 230, 232, 228, 229. For example, when the information on the presence / absence of the detection signals for the past three matches with the above-described winning determination pattern information in the general winning opening sensor for detecting the winning at the general winning opening 226, there is a winning at the general winning opening 226. If the information on the presence / absence of detection signals for the past three times does not match the above-described winning determination pattern information, the subsequent general winnings are performed. The process branches to the subsequent process without performing the process associated with winning the prize to the mouth 226.

  The ROM 306 of the main control unit 300 stores winning determination clear pattern information (in this embodiment, information indicating that there is a detection signal before, no previous detection signal, no current detection signal). After it is determined that there has been a single win, it is not determined that there has been a win until the information on the presence or absence of detection signals for the past three times matches the winning determination clear pattern information in each ball detection sensor, and the winning determination is cleared. If it matches the pattern information, it is next determined whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information.

  In step S207 subsequent to step S205, a basic random number initial value update process is performed, and in the next step S209, a basic random number update process is performed. In these basic random number initial value update processing and basic random number update processing, the initial value generation random number counter updated in step S115 is updated, and then used in the main control unit 300. Four random number counters for generating the random value, the special figure 1 random value, and the special figure 2 random value are updated. For example, if the range of values that can be taken as a random number value for a normal winning number is 0 to 100, a value is acquired from a random number counter storage area for generating a normal winning random number value provided in the RAM 308, and 1 is added to the acquired value. Then, it is stored in the original random number counter storage area. At this time, if the result of adding 1 to the acquired value is 101, 0 is stored in the original random number counter storage area. If it is determined that the random number counter has made a round as a result of adding 1 to the acquired value, the value of the initial value generating random number counter corresponding to each random number counter is acquired, and the random number counter storage area Set to.

  For example, a value is acquired from a random number counter for generating a regular winning random number that fluctuates in a numerical range of 0 to 100, and a result obtained by adding 1 to the acquired value is stored in a predetermined initial value storage area provided in the RAM 308. If the value is equal to the previously set initial value (for example, 7), the value is acquired as an initial value from the initial value generation random number counter corresponding to the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal number, The initial value set this time is stored in the above-mentioned initial value storage area in order to determine that the random number counter for generating a normal winning random value has made one round next, in addition to setting the random number counter for generating a winning random value Keep it. In addition to the above initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal signal has made one round next, the random number counter for generating the random number value for the normal value, generating the random number value for the special figure 1 The RAM 308 is provided with an initial value storage area for determining that the random number counter for use and the random number counter for generating the special figure 2 random number value have made one round each. In the present embodiment, the counter for acquiring the special figure 1 random value and the counter for acquiring the special figure 2 random value are provided separately, but the same counter may be used.

  In step S211 following step S209, effect random number update processing is performed. In this effect random number update process, a random number counter for generating an effect random number used by the main control unit 300 is updated.

  In step S213 following step S211, timer update processing is performed. In this timer update process, the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 and the time for displaying and changing the symbol on the special symbol display device 212 are counted. Special figure 1 display symbol update timer, Special figure 2 display symbol update timer for measuring the time for the symbol to be changed / stopped on the special figure 2 display device 214, a predetermined winning effect time, a predetermined opening time, a predetermined time Various timers including a timer for counting the closing time, a predetermined end effect period, and the like are updated.

  In step S215 subsequent to step S213, a winning opening counter updating process is performed. In this winning opening counter updating process, when the winning holes 226, 234, 235 and the starting holes 230, 232, 228, 229 have been won, a prize ball provided in the RAM 308 for each winning hole or for each starting hole. The value in the number storage area is read out, and 1 is added to set the original prize ball number storage area.

  In step S217 following step S215, a winning acceptance process is performed. In this winning acceptance process, it is determined whether or not there has been a prize at the special figure 1 starting port 230, the special figure 2 starting port 232, the ordinary drawing starting ports 228 and 229, and the variable winning ports 234 and 235. Here, the determination is made using the determination result of whether or not it matches the winning determination pattern information in step S205.

  When the special figure 1 starting port 230 is won and the corresponding special figure 1 holding number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the special figure 1 starting port 230 of the random number generation circuit (hard random number circuit) 318 A special figure 1 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on a value stored in a corresponding built-in counter value storage register is acquired, and a special figure is generated from a special figure 1 random number generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. One random value is acquired and stored in the special figure 1 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 1 winning random number values and the special figure 1 random number values in the special figure 1 random value storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 1 reservation number stored in the special figure 1 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 1 random value storage area, each time the special figure 1 holding number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number and the special figure 1 random value having the highest holding order (first) is deleted. At the same time, processing is performed so that the data holding order of the remaining special figure 1 winning random number value and special figure 1 random value group is incremented by one. Also, each time the special figure 1 holding number increases, a new special figure 1 is added to the next holding order of the data of the combination of the special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random value having the lowest (last) holding order. The data of a set of winning random numbers and special figure 1 random values is written.

  When the special figure 2 starting port 232 is won and the corresponding special figure 2 reserved number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, a built-in counter corresponding to the special figure 2 starting port 232 of the random number generation circuit 318 The special figure 2 winning random number value generated by performing predetermined processing on the value stored in the value storage register is acquired, and the special figure 2 random number value is acquired from the special figure 2 random value generation random number counter provided in the RAM 308. Then, they are stored in the special figure 2 random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The special figure 2 winning random number values and the special figure 2 random number values in the special figure 2 random number storage area are stored in the same number as the special figure 2 reservation number stored in the special figure 2 reservation number storage area. In the special figure 2 random value storage area, each time the special figure 2 hold number decreases, the data of the combination of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 2 random value with the highest holding order is deleted, and the remainder The special ranking 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value set data are processed so that the holding order is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 hold number increases by one, a special special figure 2 winning random number value is added to the next holding rank of the data of the special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random value group having the lowest holding order. And special figure 2 random value set data is written.

  Also, special figure 1 starting information (a pair of special figure 1 winning random value and special figure 1 random value) or special figure 2 starting information (a pair of special figure 2 winning random value and special figure 2 random value) has been newly acquired. In this case, the special figure prefetching process is executed using the start information. Details of the special figure prefetching process will be described later.

  If there is a winning at the general chart start port 228 or the general map start slot 229, and the corresponding general map hold number storage area provided in the RAM 308 is not full, the value is automatically displayed from the random number counter for generating the random number for winning the normal chart. Obtained as a winning random number value, obtains a regular random number value from a random number counter for generating a regular random number value provided in the RAM 308, and stores it in a regular random value storage area in the order of acquisition. The number of combinations of the random numbers and the common random numbers in the random number value storage area is stored in the same number as the number of reserved general numbers stored in the general number hold number storage area. In the standard random number storage area, each time the number of pending charts decreases by one, the data of the combination of the random number value and the random number value with the highest ranking (first) in the ranking is deleted and the remaining Is processed so that the holding order of the data of the pair of the common figure winning random number and the common figure random number is incremented by one. In addition, each time the number of pending orders increases by one, a new winning figure random number value and a new standing figure winning random number value in the next holding rank of the data of the combination of the random number value and the random number value with the lowest ranking (last) Data of a set of regular random numbers is written. When there is a winning at the variable winning opening 234, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 234 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 234. When a winning is made at the variable winning opening 235, information indicating that a ball has entered the variable winning opening 235 is stored in the winning storage area for the variable winning opening 235.

  In step S219 following step S217, a payout request number transmission process is performed. Note that the output schedule information and the payout request information output to the payout control unit 600 are composed of, for example, 1 byte, strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bit 6 Power-on information (if turned on, indicates that this is the first command transmission after power-on), bits 4-5 indicate the current processing type for encryption (0-3), and bits 0-3 indicate encryption The number of payout requests after processing is shown.

  In step S221 following step S219, a normal state update process is performed. This normal state update process performs one of a plurality of processes corresponding to the normal state. For example, in the general diagram state update process in the middle of the normal map change display (the value of the above-described general map display symbol update timer is 1 or more), the 7 segment LED constituting the general map display device 210 is repeatedly turned on and off. Turns off drive control. By performing this control, the general map display device 210 performs normal variable display (normal map variable game).

  Also, in the general state update process at the timing when the normal map change display time has elapsed (the timing at which the value of the general map display symbol update timer has changed from 1 to 0), When the 7-segment LED constituting the general-purpose display device 210 is turned on / off to control the display mode, and the normal-map hit flag is off, the general-purpose display is displayed so that the display mode of the off symbol is displayed. The 7 segment LED constituting the device 210 is controlled to be turned on / off. Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with a setting area for performing various settings in various processes, not limited to the normal state update process. Here, the above-described lighting / extinguishing drive control is performed, and the setting area is set to indicate that the normal stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the general-purpose display device 210 is either one of the winning symbols (the common diagram A or B shown in FIG. 5D) and the off symbol (the common diagram C shown in FIG. 5D). The final symbol is displayed. Thereafter, information indicating the stop period is set in a storage area of a normal stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308 to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms). With this setting, the symbol that has been confirmed and displayed is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the player is notified of the result of the normal game.

  Further, if the result of the usual figure variable game is a hit, the usual figure hit flag is turned on. When the usual figure hit flag is on, in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (when the usual figure stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), A normal operation is set in the setting area, and a predetermined open period (for example, 2 seconds), a solenoid for driving to open / close the blade member 232a of the special opening 2 232 (a part of various solenoids 332), A signal for holding 232a in the open state is output, and information indicating the open period is set in the storage area of the blade open time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the usual state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the value of the blade opening time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 500 ms), A signal for holding the blade member in the closed state is output to the solenoid 332 for opening and closing driving, and information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area of the blade closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308.

  Further, in the normal state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined closing period ends (when the value of the blade closing time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), the non-operating state is set in the setting area of the RAM 308. To do. Furthermore, if the result of the usual figure fluctuation game is out of place, the usual figure flag is turned off. In the case where the usual figure hit flag is off, even in the usual figure state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (when the value of the usual figure stop time management timer is changed from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, normal operation inactive is set. In the general state update process in the case where the general map is not operating, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S223.

  In step S223, a general drawing related lottery process is performed. In this general map-related lottery process, the open / close control of the general map variable game and the special map 2 start port 232 is not performed (the state of the normal map is inactive), and the number of the general map variable games that are on hold Is set to be 1 or more, and is executed using a pair of the first ordinary winning random number value and the ordinary random number value in the ordinary random number value storage area.

  The main control unit 300 obtains the normal start information (a combination of the normal winning random number and the normal random number) from the earliest (most recently stored) holding position in the normal random number storage area. On the basis of the obtained normal figure winning random number value in the obtained ordinary figure starting information, the value of the ordinary figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, etc., the determination table for the success / failure stored in the ROM 306 (FIGS. 9A and 9B described later). (Ref.) Is used to determine whether or not to win or not (determination of success / failure). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the general random number value in the acquired general map start information and the determined success / failure determination result, etc., the general map determination table stored in the ROM 306 (the hit shown in FIG. 9C). The symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the normal variation display is determined using the hour action table). Next, the main control unit 300, for example, selects various tables (for example, timer number selection (not shown)) stored in the ROM 306 based on the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the acquired random number for determining the normal time change time, and the like. The normal fluctuation display time (timer number) is determined using a table, and the fluctuation display time is stored in the normal figure fluctuation time storage area provided in the RAM 308 as the normal figure fluctuation display time.

  The main control unit 300 extracts the earliest general chart start information from the normal random number value storage area, erases the earliest general chart start information from the normal random number value storage area, and Decrease the number of reserved maps in the area by 1. At this time, the general chart start information taken out from the standard random number storage area is stored in a temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-mentioned determination is made based on the general chart start information stored in the temporary area. Also good.

  The main control unit 300 sets the common figure flag provided in the RAM 308 to ON when the determination result is successful (winning), and sets the common figure flag to OFF when not successful.

  Next, the special figure state update process for each of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 is performed. First, the special figure state update process (the special figure 2 state update process) for the special figure 2 is performed (step S225). In the special figure 2 state update process, one of the following processes is performed according to the state of the special figure 2.

  For example, in the special figure 2 state update process in the middle of the special figure 2 fluctuation display (the value of the special figure 2 display symbol update timer described above is 1 or more), the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is turned on and off. Repeatedly turn on / off drive control. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs the special figure 2 variable display (special figure 2 variable game). In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the rotation start setting transmission process is to be executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the process ends.

  Further, the RAM 308 of the main control unit 300 is provided with flags such as a 15R big hit flag, a 7R big hit flag, a 2R big hit flag, a small hit flag, a loss flag, a special figure probability fluctuation flag, and a normal figure probability fluctuation flag. . These flags are set to ON or OFF based on the stop symbol determined in the special figure 2 related lottery process described later. In the special figure 2 state update process starting at the timing when the special figure 2 variable display time has elapsed (the timing when the special figure 2 display symbol update timer value has changed from 1 to 0), for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on 5 (b) shows that the special figure a, the 7R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure b, the 7R big hit flag is on, and the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off. When the special flag c and the off flag are turned on, the 7-segment LED constituting the special figure 2 display device 214 is controlled to be turned on / off so that the special figure d is displayed. 2 is set to indicate that the stop display is being performed. By performing this control, the special figure 2 display device 214 performs fixed display of any one of the special figures a to d.

  Thereafter, in order to maintain the display for a predetermined stop display period (for example, 500 ms), information indicating the stop period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 stop time management timer provided in the RAM 308. With this setting, the specially displayed special figure 2 is stopped and displayed for a predetermined period, and the result of the special figure 2 variable game is notified to the player. In addition, if the time reduction number stored in the time reduction number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the time reduction number. If not, turn off the time flag. Further, the hourly flag is also turned off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Also, if the probability variation number stored in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 is 1 or more, 1 is subtracted from the probability variation number, and if the subtraction result is 1 to 0, the special figure probability variation flag. Turn off.

  Further, the special transmission information indicating that the rotation stop setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the above-described transmission information storage area, and the design for stopping the variable display is shown in FIG. The special figure 2 identification information indicating the presence is additionally stored in the RAM 308 as information to be included in command data, which will be described later, and the processing is terminated.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the big hit flag is turned on. When the big hit flag is on, in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period ends (the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the setting of the RAM 308 is set. In order to set a special figure 2 in operation in the area and wait for a predetermined winning effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period during which an image for notifying the player that a big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is started is displayed. In addition, information indicating the winning effect period is set in the storage area of the special figure 2 standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the winning effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Further, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined winning effect period ends (the timing when the value of the special figure 2 standby time management timer changes from 1 to 0), a predetermined release period (for example, 29 seconds) Or until the opening of the door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 (a part of various solenoids 332). In addition, a signal for holding the door member in the opened state is output, and information indicating the opening period is set in the storage area of the door opening time management timer provided in the RAM 308. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening release setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined opening period ends (the timing when the door opening time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the predetermined closing period (for example, 1.5 seconds) A signal for holding the door member in a closed state is output to a solenoid for opening / closing the door member of the variable prize opening 234, 235 (a part of various solenoids 332), and a door closing time management timer provided in the RAM 308 is used. Information indicating the closing period is set in the storage area. In addition, predetermined transmission information indicating that the special winning opening closing setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  In addition, the door member opening / closing control is repeated a predetermined number of times (in this embodiment, 15 rounds or 7 rounds in the case of Special Figure 2, 15 rounds, 7 rounds or 2 rounds in the case of Special Figure 1) and finished. In the special figure 2 state update process started at the timing, a predetermined end effect period (for example, 3 seconds), that is, a period in which an image for informing the player that the big hit by the decorative symbol display device 208 is ended is displayed. Therefore, information indicating the effect standby period is set in the storage area of the effect standby time management timer provided in the RAM 308. Also, if the normal probability fluctuation flag is set to ON, at the same time as the end of the big hit game, the hour / hour number (for example, 100 times) is set in the hour / hour number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 and provided in the RAM 308. Turn on the short time flag. If the ordinary probability fluctuation flag is set to OFF, the number of time reductions is not set in the time reduction number storage unit, and the time reduction flag is not turned on.

  The short time here means that the pachinko machine is in an advantageous state for the player in order to shorten the time from the end of the big hit game to the start of the next big hit game. When the time reduction flag is set to ON, the normal figure high probability state (normal figure certain change) is established. There is a higher probability of hitting in the general-game variable game in the high-probability state than in the normal-game low-probability state. In addition, in the normal figure high probability state, the fluctuation time of the general figure variable game is shorter than in the normal figure low probability state (normal figure variable short). Furthermore, in the normal high probability state, compared to the normal low probability state, the opening time in one opening of the pair of blade members 232a of the special drawing 2 starting port 232 is likely to be longer (electrical chew extension). In addition, the pair of blade members 232a are more likely to open in the normal high probability state than in the normal low probability state. The state in which any one of these ordinary figure change, universal figure change, and electric Chu extension is set is referred to as an electric support (starting prize winning support by electric tulip) state.

  In addition, as described above, the hourly flag is set to off during the big hit game (in the special game state). Therefore, the normal low probability state is maintained during the big hit game. This is because, if the game is in a high probability state during a big hit game, a predetermined number of variable winning holes 234 and 235 will be placed in the special figure 2 start opening 232 during the big hit game until a game ball enters. There is a problem that game balls enter and the number of game balls that can be acquired during a big hit increases, resulting in an increase in euphoria. This is to solve this problem.

  If the special figure probability variation flag is set to ON, the probability variation number (for example, 10,000 times) is set in the probability variation number storage unit provided in the RAM 308 simultaneously with the end of the big hit game.

  Further, predetermined transmission information indicating that the end effect setting transmission process is executed in the command setting transmission process (step S233) is additionally stored in the transmission information storage area.

  Also, in the special figure 2 state update process that starts at the timing when the predetermined end production period ends (when the production standby time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), the special figure 2 is not activated in the setting area of the RAM 308. Set medium.

  Further, if the result of the special figure 2 variable game is out of order, the out-of-game flag is turned on. In the case where the miss flag is on, even in the special figure 2 state update process at the timing when the predetermined stop display period described above ends (the timing when the special figure 2 stop time management timer value changes from 1 to 0), In the setting area of the RAM 308, special figure 2 inactive is set. In the special figure 2 state update process when the special figure 2 is not in operation, nothing is done and the process proceeds to the next step S227.

  Subsequently, special figure state update processing (special figure 1 state update process) for special figure 1 is performed (step S227). In the special figure 1 state update process, each process described in the special figure 2 state update process is performed according to the state of the special figure 1. Each process performed in the special figure 1 state update process is the same as the process in which “special figure 2” in the contents described in the special figure 2 state update process is replaced with “special figure 1”. Omitted. However, in this example, since the stop symbol form of special figure 1 is different from the stop symbol aspect of special figure 2, the timing at which the special figure 1 variable display time has elapsed (the value of the special figure 1 display symbol update timer becomes 1 to 0) The special figure 1 state update process starting at the same time) is different from the special figure 2 state update process. In the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, for example, when the 15R big hit flag is on and the special figure probability variation flag is on, the special figure A shown in FIG. When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure B, the 7R big hit flag is on, when the special figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure C, the 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, When the figure probability fluctuation flag is on, the special figure D, 2R big hit flag is on, the special figure probability fluctuation flag is on, and when the common figure probability fluctuation flag is off, the special figure E, the small hit flag is on The special segment F is controlled to turn on / off the 7-segment LED constituting the special diagram 1 display device 212 so that the special flag F is turned on and the special flag G is turned on. Special figure 1 stop table To set indicating that it is in. By performing this control in the special figure 1 state update process started at the above timing, the special figure 1 display device 212 performs a fixed display of any one of the special figures A to G. The order of the special figure 2 state update process and the special figure 1 state update process may be reversed.

  When the special figure state update process in step S225 and step S227 is completed, a special figure related lottery process for each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is performed. Also here, first, a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 2 (a special drawing 2 related lottery process) is performed (step S229), and then a special drawing related lottery process for special figure 1 (a special drawing 1 related lottery process). ) Is performed (step S231). In the special drawing 2 related lottery process, the floating game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 is not performed, and the state of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2 are both inactive and is held. The game is executed using the first special figure 2 winning random number value and the special figure 2 random number value in the special figure 2 random value storage area, starting from the fact that the number of variable games is 1 or more. The special figure 1 related lottery process does not perform the floating game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, the state of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 are both inactive, and is suspended. The game is executed using the first special figure 1 winning random number value and the special figure 1 random number value in the special figure 1 random value storage area as a starting condition that the number of variable games is 1 or more.

  Also for these special drawing related lottery processes, the main control unit 300 performs the special figure 2 related lottery processing before the special figure 1 related lottery processing, so that the special figure 2 variable game start condition and the special figure 1 fluctuation Even if the game start conditions are satisfied at the same time, since the special figure 2 variable game is changing first, the special figure 1 variable game does not start changing. In addition, when the number of reserved special figure 2 variable games is 1 or more, the lottery process and the variable game related to the special figure 1 variable game hold are not performed. In addition, the notification of the result of the special symbol variable game success / failure determination by the decorative symbol display device 208 is performed by the first sub-control unit 400, and the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning at the special symbol 2 starting port 232 is notified. Priority is given to the notification of the lottery result of the lottery based on the winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230. In the present embodiment, a special figure variable game with a high advantage (in this example, special figure 2 variable game) is given priority over a low special figure variable game (in this example, special figure 1 variable game). . For this reason, it may be easy to give a difference in the advantage of the gaming state.

  In the case of the special figure 2 related lottery process in step S229, the main control unit 300 starts the special figure 2 start information (special) from the earliest (most previously stored) holding position in the special figure 2 random value storage area. 2), and based on the special figure 2 winning random number value in the obtained special figure 2 start information, the value of the special figure probability variation flag in the RAM 308, and the like. Is used as a big hit or a small hit (in this example, the small hit can be selected only in FIG. 1) using the determination table (see FIGS. 10 (a) to 10 (d) described later). Or whether it is determined to be out of place (judgment determination). Next, the main control unit 300, based on the special figure 2 random value in the acquired special figure 2 start information and the determined success / failure determination result, etc., the special figure determination table (FIG. 11 (a), Using the symbol distribution table shown in FIG. 12A, the symbol (stop symbol) to be stopped and displayed after the variation display of the special diagram 2 is determined. Next, the main control unit 300 is stored in the ROM 306 based on, for example, the determined success / failure determination result, the stop symbol, the special figure 2 holding number at the time of the determination, the acquired special figure variation time determination random number value, and the like. The variable display time (timer number) in FIG. 2 is determined using various tables (for example, a timer number selection table not shown).

  The main control unit 300 extracts the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, erases the first special figure 2 start information from the special figure 2 random value storage area, 2 is subtracted from the special figure 2 hold number in the hold number storage area. At this time, the special figure 2 start information extracted from the special figure 2 random value storage area is stored in the temporary area provided in the RAM 308, and the above-described determination is performed based on the special figure 2 start information stored in the temporary area. You may do it.

  After the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229) as described above, the special figure 1 related lottery process (step S231) is performed in the same manner.

  In the above description, the special figure 2 variable game having a high advantage is started in preference to the special figure 1 variable game having a low advantage, and the special figure 2 hold is prioritized over the special figure 1 hold. Special figure 2 priority fluctuation is given as an example, but special figure 1 variable game with low advantage is started over special figure 2 variable game with high advantage, and special figure 1 suspension is The special figure 1 priority fluctuation | variation digested preferentially over hold may be sufficient. In addition, priority is not given to special figure 2 variable game and special figure 1 variable game, and the start opening prize is started in the order in which the special figure variable games related to the holding of each of special figure 1 and special figure 2 are held at the start opening. It may be a forward variation. In the starting order winning order variation, the upper limit number of holds is 8 regardless of the special figures 1 and 2, and compared with the priority fluctuation in which the upper limit number of holds is 4 in each of the special figures 1 and 2 In some cases, the substantial upper limit of the number of holds can be increased.

  In the above description, it is assumed that the lottery process and the variable game relating to the holding of the other special figure are not performed according to the state of the special figure, but the invention is not limited to this, and the special figure state update described above is not performed. The process and the special figure related lottery process may be performed independently in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, respectively, so that a plurality of special figures may be changed simultaneously. In addition, when a plurality of special figures are changed at the same time, a plurality of areas for displaying the lottery results of each special figure are provided on the decorative symbol display device 208 or the lottery results of each special figure are displayed. A plurality of decorative symbol display devices may be provided, and the lottery results may be displayed separately, or the lottery results of a plurality of special drawings may be displayed in one area. In addition, when fluctuations related to a plurality of special figures are performed simultaneously, the lottery result of the special figure that stopped the fluctuation may affect the lottery result of the special figure that stops the fluctuation later.

  In step S233 following step S231, command setting transmission processing is performed. In this command setting transmission process, various commands are transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400. The output schedule information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 is composed of 16 bits, for example, bit 15 is strobe information (indicating that data is set when ON), bits 11 to 14 are Command type (in this embodiment, basic command, symbol variation start command, symbol variation stop command, winning effect start command, end effect start command, jackpot round number designation command, power recovery command, RAM clear command, prefetch result information command Information that can specify the type of command, etc.), bits 0 to 10 are constituted by command data (predetermined information corresponding to the command type). Further, in the present embodiment, a symbol variation start command and a symbol variation stop command related to a common symbol are also included as command types.

  Specifically, the strobe information is turned on or off by the command transmission process described above. In addition, if the command type is a special symbol design change start (rotation start) command, the command data includes various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability fluctuation flags, and special drawing related lottery processing. In the case of the symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, including information indicating the timer number selected in, including the values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, outlier flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. In the case of a start command and an end production start command, information including the value of a special figure probability variation flag, etc., and in the case of a jackpot round number designation command, information indicating the value of a special figure probability variation flag, the number of big hit rounds, etc. Is included. When the command type indicates a basic command, device information in the command data, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 1 starting port 230, presence / absence of winning in the special figure 2 starting port 232, winning in the variable winning ports 234 and 235 Contains information indicating presence or absence. In the case of a prefetch result information command, information indicating the types of special figure 1 and special figure 2, the prefetch number stored in the prefetch number storage area described later, the stop symbol stored in the prefetch result storage unit, etc. Included.

  In addition, if the command type is a normal symbol variation start (rotation start) command, the command data includes values such as a universal symbol per unit flag, a general symbol deviation flag, a general symbol probability variation flag, etc. Information that includes information about the determined stop symbol and variation time, and in the case of a regular symbol variation stop (rotation stop) command, information indicating the value of the universal symbol per unit flag, the usual symbol deviation flag, the common symbol probability variation flag, etc. Is included.

  In the rotation start setting transmission process described above, the command data includes values such as various big hit flags, small hit flags, off-set flags, and special figure probability variation flags stored in the RAM 308, special figure 1 related lottery processes, and special figures. Information indicating the timer number selected in the FIG. 2 related lottery process, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the rotation stop setting transmission process described above, information indicating values of various big hit flags, small hit flags, loss flags, special figure probability variation flags, etc. stored in the RAM 308 is set in the command data.

  In the winning effect setting transmission process described above, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the winning effect period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described end effect setting transmission process, the command control data stored in the RAM 308, the effect control information output to the decorative symbol display device 208, various lamps 418, and the speaker 120 during the effect standby period, the special figure probability variation flag Information indicating the value, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game being held, etc. is set. In the above-described special winning opening release setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hits stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates. In the above-mentioned special winning opening closing setting transmission process, the command data includes the number of big hit rounds stored in the RAM 308, the value of the special figure probability variation flag, the number of the special figure 1 variable game or the special figure 2 variable game held. Set the information that indicates.

  In step S233, general command special figure hold increase processing is also performed. In this general command special figure pending increase process, special figure identification information (information showing special figure 1 or special figure 2) stored in the transmission information storage area of the RAM 308, command notice information (preliminary notice information, false) Set either advance notice information or no advance notice information).

  In the first sub-control unit 400, it is possible to determine the production control according to the change of the game control in the main control unit 300 by the command type included in the received output schedule information, and it is included in the output schedule information. Based on the information of the command data, the contents of effect control can be determined.

  In step S235 following step S233, external output signal setting processing is performed. In this external output signal setting process, the game information stored in the RAM 308 is output to the information input circuit 350 separate from the pachinko machine 100 via the information output circuit 336.

  In step S237 following step S235, device monitoring processing is performed. In this device monitoring process, the signal states of the various sensors stored in the signal state storage area in step S205 are read, and the presence or absence of a predetermined error, for example, the presence or absence of a front frame door opening error or the presence or absence of a bottom pan full error is monitored. . When a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error is detected, the transmission information to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 includes device information indicating whether there is a front frame door open error or a lower pan full error. Set. Further, various solenoids 332 are driven to control the opening and closing of the special figure 2 starting port 232 and the variable prize winning ports 234 and 235, and the general diagram display device 210 and the special figure 1 display via the drive circuits 324, 326 and 330. Display data to be output to the device 212, the special figure 2 display device 214, various status display units 328, and the like is set in the output port of the I / O 310. Further, the output schedule information set in the payout request number transmission process (step S219) is output to the payout control unit 600 via the output port of the I / O 310.

  In step S239 following step S237, it is monitored whether or not the low voltage signal is ON. Then, when the low voltage signal is on (when power supply cutoff is detected), the process proceeds to step S243, and when the low voltage signal is off (when power supply cutoff is not detected), the process proceeds to step S241. In step S241, timer interrupt end processing is performed. In this timer interrupt end process, the value of each register temporarily saved in step S201 is set in each original register, interrupt permission is set, etc., and then the main control unit main process shown in FIG. Return to. On the other hand, in step S243, a specific variable or stack pointer for returning to the power-off state at the time of power recovery is saved in a predetermined area of the RAM 308 as return data, and power-off processing such as initialization of input / output ports is performed. After that, the process returns to the main process of the main control unit shown in FIG.

  FIG. 8A is a flowchart showing an example of the flow of the special figure prefetching process executed in the winning acceptance process (step S217). In the special figure prefetching process, the main control unit 300 prefetches the increased start information (newly acquired start information) in each of special figure 1 and special figure 2, and pre-stops the stop symbol before the success / failure determination process. The predetermination result (special drawing prefetching result) is stored in the prefetching result storage unit (see FIGS. 8B to 8E) in the RAM 308.

  Here, in the RAM 308, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 1 prefetch result and the number of special figure 1 prefetch results stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit are specially displayed. A special figure 1 pre-reading number storage area for storing as one pre-reading number is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 1 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 1 prefetching result with the highest rank (first) is erased and the remaining special figure 1 prefetching result Are processed so that the rank of the data is incremented by one. Each time the special figure 1 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 1 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 1 prefetch result data of the lowest rank (last).

  Also, in the RAM 308, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit for storing the special figure 2 prefetch result and the number of special figure 2 prefetch results stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit are stored in the special figure 2 prefetch. A special figure 2 look-ahead number storage area for storing numbers is provided. The prefetch result storage unit for special figure 2 can store up to four prefetch results in this example. In the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit, every time the number of special figure 2 prefetching decreases by one, the data of the special figure 2 prefetching result having the highest rank is deleted and the order of the remaining special figure 2 prefetching result data Are processed so that they are incremented by one. Each time the special figure 2 prefetch number increases by one, new special figure 2 prefetch result data is written in the next rank of the special figure 2 prefetch data having the lowest rank.

  In the special figure prefetching process, first, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased (step S301). The determination as to whether or not the start information of the special figure 2 has increased is made, for example, by referring to the special figure 2 hold number stored in the special figure 2 hold number storage area and the special figure 2 prefetch number storage area. The comparison is made with the number of pre-reads in FIG. The main control unit 300 determines that the start information of the special figure 2 has increased when the special figure 2 hold number is larger than the special figure 2 prefetch number, and the special figure 2 hold number is equal to the special figure 2 prefetch number. It is determined that the starting information in Fig. 2 has not increased. When it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has increased, the process proceeds to step S303, and when it is determined that the start information of FIG. 2 has not increased, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S303, the increased special figure 2 starting information (a special figure 2 winning random value and a set of special figure 2 random values) is processed before the success / failure determination process in the special figure 2 related lottery process (step S229). FIG. 2 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 2 start information and the determination table for special determination 2 and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 2 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S229). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S305 subsequent to step S303, the stop symbol information as the special figure 2 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 2 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the process proceeds to step S307.

  In step S307, the main control unit 300 determines whether or not the start information of FIG. 1 has increased. The determination as to whether or not the start information of FIG. 1 has increased is made, for example, in the same way as in FIG. 2, the special figure 1 hold number stored in the special figure 1 hold number storage area and the special figure 1 prefetch number storage area This is done by comparing the special figure 1 pre-reading number stored in. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. 1 has increased, the process proceeds to step S309. If it is determined that the start information of FIG. Return to the winning acceptance process (step S217).

  In step S309, it is determined based on various flags in the RAM 308 whether or not non-electric support is in progress. If it is determined that the non-electric support is being performed, the process proceeds to step S311. If it is determined that the non-electric support is not being performed (the electric support is being performed), the process proceeds to step S315. In this example, it is determined whether or not non-electric support is being performed, but it may be determined in step S309 whether or not the execution condition of the special figure 1 prefetch notice is satisfied. For example, the execution conditions of the special figure 1 pre-reading notice include conditions such as not being in a big hit game other than being in non-electric support.

  In step S311, the increased special figure 1 start information (a special figure 1 winning random value and a pair of special figure 1 random value) is processed before the success determination process in the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). FIG. 1 Read ahead from the random value storage area. Then, using the pre-read special figure 1 start information and the determination table for special determination and the special figure determination table used at the time of determination, for example, the special figure 1 variable game stop symbol related to the start information is selected as the special figure 1 related lottery. Prior determination is made before the success / failure determination process in the process (step S231). Note that this pre-determination process may be performed using a special table for pre-determination instead of the table used at the time of determination.

  In step S313 following step S311, the stop symbol information as the special figure 1 prefetching result obtained in the prior determination is stored in the earliest free area of the special figure 1 prefetching result storage unit in the RAM 308. Thereafter, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In step S315, the pre-read result for the special figure 1 in the RAM 308 is stored in the RAM 308 in place of the stop symbol information instead of pre-reading the increased special figure 1 start information and indicating that the start information is not pre-read. Stored in the earliest free area of the copy. Thereafter, the special figure prefetching process is terminated, and the process returns to the winning acceptance process (step S217) of the main control unit timer interruption process.

  In the present embodiment, only the increased start information is pre-read and pre-determined. However, all start information may be pre-read and pre-determined. Further, in the above-described command setting transmission process (step S233), only the pre-read result of the starting information for the increase may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, or the pre-read result storage for special figure 1 and special figure 2 All the prefetching results in the section may be transmitted to the first sub-control section 400.

  In the present embodiment, pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 2, and pre-reading is always executed for the increased starting information of Special Figure 1 except during the electric support. Further, it may be determined by lottery whether to pre-read the starting information of the increased special figure 1 and special figure 2. Alternatively, in the first sub-control unit 400 that has received the prefetch result from the main control unit 300, for example, it may be determined by lottery whether to perform prefetch notification for each hold. Regardless of the gaming state (for example, whether or not non-electric support is in progress), when the start information increases, prefetching is always executed and the prefetching result is stored in the prefetching result storage unit. The result may be configured to be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400, and the first sub-control unit 400 may determine whether or not to execute the lottery and effect using the pre-read result.

  FIGS. 8B to 8E illustrate a state in which the prefetch result information and the like are stored in the prefetch result storage unit in the RAM 308. FIG. 8B shows an example of a state in which the special figure 1 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 8B, the special figure 1 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 1 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 1 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of Special Figure 1 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 8B, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special chart G” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage area “hold 2” stores “special chart G” as stop symbol information. "(Out of line)" is stored, "Special Figure F" (small hit) is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 3", and "Special Figure A" is stored as stop symbol information in the storage area "Hold 4". (15R special jackpot) is stored.

  FIG. 8C shows an example of a state in which the special figure 2 prefetch result information is stored in the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit. As shown in FIG. 8C, the special figure 2 prefetch result storage unit has, for example, the same number (four in the present embodiment) of storage areas as the special figure 2 variable game holdable number. . Each storage area is associated with the hold order (hold 1 to hold 4) of the special figure 2 random value storage area. In each of the storage areas, the stop symbol information of the special figure 2 is stored. In the example shown in FIG. 8C, the storage area “hold 1” stores “special drawing d” (out of line) as stop symbol information, and the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4” have stop symbols. Information is not stored. In FIG. 8C, the state where the stop symbol information is not stored in the storage area is described as “none”.

  FIG. 8 (d) shows an example of the prefetch result storage unit for special figure 1 during the electric support. As shown in FIG. 8D, “undecided” information is stored in the storage area “hold 1” instead of the stopped symbol information. In the storage areas “hold 2” to “hold 4”, neither stop symbol information nor “undecided” information is stored.

  As shown in FIG. 8E, in each storage area of the special chart 1 prefetch result storage section, “timer number” indicating the fluctuation time of the special figure 1 variable game is not the stop symbol information but the prefetch result. May be stored. In the example shown in FIG. 8E, the storage area “pending 1” stores “timer 3” as timer number information, the storage area “pending 2” stores “timer 5” as timer number information, No timer number information is stored in the storage areas “hold 3” and “hold 4”. In FIG. 8E, a state in which the timer number information is not stored is expressed as “none”. In addition, when timer number information is stored in each storage area of the special chart 1 prefetch result storage unit, the timer number may be set so as to correspond to the success / failure result.

  In the above description, an example is given in which stop symbols and timer numbers are pre-determined, and stop symbol information and timer number information are stored in the prefetch result storage unit. While being stored in the result storage unit, it may be transmitted to the first sub-control unit 400 as prefetching result information.

  Next, various tables used in the main control unit 300 of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. Various tables shown in FIGS. 9 to 12 are stored in the ROM 306 of the main control unit 300, for example.

  FIGS. 9A and 9B show an example of the success / failure determination table used when the success / failure determination is performed in the common drawing related lottery process (step S223). The success / failure determination table shown in FIGS. 9A and 9B includes items of “normal probability”, “random number range”, and “correction result”. The item “normal figure probability” indicates the normal figure probability (ordinary figure low probability or common figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “Random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired normal winning random number value. Here, the possible range of the normal winning random number in this example is 0 to 99 (the range of the numerical range is 100).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 9A is a normal / failure determination table used when the probability of normalization at the time of determination of success / failure is low. As shown in FIG. 9A, when this success / failure determination table is used, the winning probability is 1/100 (that is, 1%), and the probability of losing is 99/100.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 9B is a normal / failure determination table used in the case where the normal probability at the time of determination is high. As shown in FIG. 9B, when this success / failure determination table is used, the probability of winning is about 100/100 (that is, 100%), and the probability of loss is 0%. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 9A, the winning probability is 100 times. In this way, it is possible to design so that only the hit is selected in the usual high probability state (during short-time operation). Further, the probability of deviation may be higher than 0% at the time of short-time operation, but the probability of hit selection being higher at the time of short-time operation than at the time of short-time operation (ordinary low probability state).

  FIG. 9C shows a table for symbol allocation and hit operation for ordinary use. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is the random number range distribution rate for each symbol (that is, the symbol of each symbol, which is compared with the general random number value when the stop symbol is determined in the general symbol related lottery process (step S223)). Equal to selection probability). As shown in FIG. 9 (c), in the case where the result of determining whether or not the normal-game variable game is successful, the allocation ratio of each winning symbol is 50% for the normal-game A and 50% for the normal-game B. Normal maps A and B are symbols in which the electric chew release operation is executed after the normal variable game. It should be noted that when the determination result is out of order, only one out of the ordinary figure C is selected as the out of order symbol, so in the case of out of place, the ordinary figure C is selected with a probability of 100%. When the general figure C is selected, the electric chew release operation is not executed after the universal figure variable game.

  As shown in FIG. 9C, after the general map A is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electrical chew) 232 is executed. When the game state at the time of the stop display of FIG. A is not operating for a short time, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 100 ms, then closed for 5000 to 10000 ms, and then opened for 5400 ms. To do. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. A is short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 1800 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened again for 1800 ms, It closes for about 2000 ms and opens again for 1800 ms.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 9C, after the general map B is stopped and displayed, the opening operation of the special figure 2 starting port (electrical chew) 232 is executed. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. B is not operating for a short time, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is opened only once for 100 ms. When the game state at the time of the stop display in FIG. B is short-time operation, the blade member 232a of the electric Chu 232 is first opened for 2400 ms, then closed for about 2000 ms, then opened for about 1450 ms, and again It closes for about 2000 ms and opens again for 1450 ms.

  FIGS. 10A to 10D show an example of the determination table used when determining whether or not the lottery process is related to the special figure 2 lottery process (step S229) or the special figure 1 lottery process (step S231). Yes. The success / failure determination table shown in FIGS. 10A to 10D includes items of “special figure probability”, “random number range”, and “correction determination result”. The item “special figure probability” indicates a special figure probability (special figure low probability or special figure high probability) at the time of determination of success or failure. The item “random number range” indicates a numerical range to be compared with the acquired special figure 2 winning random value or the special figure 1 winning random value. Here, the possible range of the special figure 2 winning random value and the special figure 1 winning random value of this example is 0 to 65535 (the range of the numerical value range is 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (a) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is low. As shown in FIG. 10A, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 (= 219/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399 (= 165 / 65536).

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (b) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 1 used when the special figure probability at the time of the validity determination is high. As shown in FIG. 10B, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/30 (= 2185/65536), and the small hit probability is about 1/399. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (a), the big hit probability is about 10 times and the small hit probability is the same.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (c) is the success / failure determination table for special figure 2 used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is low. As shown in FIG. 10C, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/299 and the small hit probability is zero.

  The success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (d) is a success / failure determination table for special figure 2 that is used when the special figure probability at the time of success / failure determination is high. As shown in FIG. 10D, when this success / failure determination table is used, the big hit probability is about 1/30 and the small hit probability is zero. When this success / failure determination table is compared with the success / failure determination table shown in FIG. 10 (c), the probability of jackpot is about 10 times.

  Fig.11 (a) has shown the symbol distribution table for the special figure 1. FIG. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is a distribution ratio of random numbers for each symbol (that is, each symbol) compared with the special symbol 1 random value when determining the stop symbol in the special symbol 1 related lottery process (step S231). It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 11 (a), when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is the big hit, the special symbol A (15R special big hit) is 30%, and the special figure B (7R special big hit) is 25%, special figure C (7R big hit) is 25%, special figure D (sudden probability big hit) is 10%, special figure E (latent probability big hit) is 10% is there. Special drawings A, B, D, and E, excluding special drawing C, are symbols for which the probability change is activated after the big hit game ends. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special drawings A, B, D, E) in the jackpot of the special figure 1 variable game, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%.

  Special illustrations A, B, and D are the gaming state (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, normal figure high probability (during short-time operation), normal figure low probability (due to short-time inactive) at the time of determination of success / failure (during symbol stop display) Regardless of the time)), the time is shortened (no time reduction is set) after the big hit game ends. The special figure C is a symbol in which the time is shortened (the number of time reductions is 100 times) after the big hit game is finished, regardless of the game state at the time of the determination of success or failure. The special figure E is a symbol in which the short time is activated after the big hit game is completed only when the gaming state at the time of the determination is a special figure high probability state or a normal figure high probability state. That is, when special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the big hit game ends. For example, when special figure E is stopped and displayed as a big hit symbol continuously several times from a special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the time reduction does not operate after the first stop display (special figure high probability normal figure) However, after the second and subsequent stops, the short time is activated (the special figure high probability normal figure high probability state is entered). In the special figure 1 variable game jackpot, the probability of time reduction is 90% in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state and 100% in the other game states.

  In this example, there is only one kind of small hits symbol and off symbol in the special figure 1 variable game. Therefore, when the result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined to be a small hit, the special figure F is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random value, and the result of the special figure 1 variable game is determined. If it is out of place, the special figure G is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 1 random value. However, a plurality of types of small hit symbols and outlier symbols may be provided in the same manner as the big hit symbols, and may be determined by lottery using special figure 1 random numbers.

  FIG.11 (b) has shown the example of the operation | movement at the time of the big hit in each symbol of the special figure 1. FIG. As shown in FIG. 11B, in the jackpot game after the special figure A is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R. Similarly, in the jackpot game after special figure B or special figure C is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 7R at 29000 ms per 1R, and in the jackpot game after special figure D is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released. Is performed 2R at 29000 ms per 1R.

  As for special figure E, the operation of the big hit game differs depending on the game state at the time of the symbol stop display. In the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, the attacker is released 2R at 100 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is difficult to enter a game ball because the opening time is short. On the other hand, in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in a game state other than the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state, 2R is played at 29000 ms per 1R. In this big hit game, it is easy to enter a game ball because the opening time is relatively long.

  In the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed, the 100 ms attacker release is performed twice in one release opportunity. That is, the attacker operates in the same manner in the big hit game after the special figure E is stopped and displayed in the special figure low probability normal figure low probability state and the small hit game after the special figure F is stopped and displayed.

  Fig.12 (a) has shown the symbol distribution table for the special figure 2. FIG. The numerical value in the “distribution” column in the table is the distribution ratio of the random number range for each symbol (that is, each symbol) that is compared with the special symbol 2 random value when determining the stop symbol in the special symbol 2 related lottery process (step S229). It is equal to the symbol selection probability). As shown in FIG. 12 (a), in the case where the determination result of the special figure 2 variable game is a big hit, the distribution ratio of each big hit symbol is 70% for the special figure a (15R special big hit), and the special figure b (7R special big hit) is 5%, special figure c (7R big hit) is 25%. Special figures a and b are symbols for which the probability change is activated after the big hit game ends. The ratio of probability variation jackpots (special figures a and b) in the special figure 2 variable game jackpot, that is, the probability variation probability is 75%, which is the same as the probability variation probability of the special figure 1 variable game.

  Special illustrations a and b indicate the game state at the time of the success / failure determination (design stop display) (special figure high probability, special figure low probability, normal figure high probability (during short-time operation), normal figure low probability (during short-time inactive) Regardless of the), the time is shortened (no time reduction setting is set) after the big hit game ends. The special figure c is a symbol in which the time is shortened (the number of time reductions is 100 times) after the big hit game is finished, regardless of the game state at the time of determination of success / failure. The probability that the time is given in the big hit of the special figure 2 variable game is 100% regardless of the game state.

  In this example, there is only one type of outlier symbol in the special figure 2 variable game. Accordingly, when the result of determining whether or not the special figure 2 variable game is correct is out of order, the special figure d is selected with a probability of 100% regardless of the special figure 2 random value. However, a plurality of types of missing symbols may be provided in the same manner as the jackpot symbol, and may be determined by lottery using special figure 2 random values.

  FIG.12 (b) has shown the example of the operation | movement at the time of the big hit in each symbol of the special figure 2. FIG. As shown in FIG. 12B, in the jackpot game after the special figure a is stopped and displayed, the attacker is released for 15R at 29000 ms per 1R, and after the special figure b or the special figure c is stopped and displayed. In the big hit game, the attacker is released 7R at 29000ms per 1R.

  As shown in FIG. 11 and FIG. 12, the special figure 2 has a higher probability of being given a shorter time than the special figure 1 and has a longer open time of the attacker (or a larger R number). Therefore, it can be considered that the special figure 2 is more advantageous than the special figure 1.

  Next, processing of the first sub control unit 400 will be described with reference to FIGS. 13 and 14. FIG. 13A is a flowchart showing a flow of main processing executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. First, in step S401 in FIG. 13A, various initial settings are performed. When the power is turned on, an initialization process is first executed in step S401. In this initialization processing, initialization of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 408, and the like are performed.

  In step S403 following step S401, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more, and this process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10. When the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S405. . In step S405, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S407 following step S405, command processing is performed. The CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400 determines whether a command has been received from the main control unit 300.

  In step S409 following step S407, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S407, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 406 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated. Among the various processes executed in the effect control process, the electric long open effect will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In step S411 following step S409, a chance button control process is performed. In the chance button control process, when the pressing of the chance button 136 is detected, the effect data updated in step S409 is changed to the effect data corresponding to the pressing of the chance button 136.

  In step S413 subsequent to step S411, image control processing is performed. In the image control process, when there is a command to the VDP 434 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the VDP 434 (details will be described later).

  In step S415 following step S413, sound control processing is performed. In the sound control process, if there is a command to the sound source IC 416 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the sound source IC 416.

  In step S417 following step S415, lamp control processing is performed. In the lamp control process, if there is a command to various lamps 418 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 420.

  In step S419 following step S417, shutter control processing is performed. In the shutter control process, if there is a command to the shielding device 246 in the effect data read in step S409, this command is output to the drive circuit 432.

  In step S421 following step S419, information transmission processing is performed. In the information transmission process, when there is a control command to be transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 in the effect data read in step S409, a setting is made to output this control command. Thereafter, the process returns to step S403.

  FIG. 13B is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit command reception interrupt process (strobe interrupt process) executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the first sub-control unit 400 detects a strobe signal from the main control unit 300. In step S501 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the main control unit 300 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 408 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 13C is a flowchart showing the flow of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process executed by the CPU 404 of the first sub control unit 400. The first sub-control unit 400 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S601 of the first sub control unit timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 408 described in step S403 of the first sub control unit main process, and the result is stored in the original timer variable storage area. To do. Therefore, in step S403, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10).

  In step S603 following step S601, a control command is transmitted to the second sub-control unit 500 set in the information transmission process (step S421) of the first sub-control unit main process, and other random number values for effects are updated. Etc.

  FIG. 13D is a flowchart showing the flow of the image control process (step S413) of the first sub-control unit main process. In step S701, an instruction to transfer image data is issued. Here, the CPU 404 first swaps the designation of the display areas A and B in the VRAM 436. As a result, an image of one frame stored in the display area not designated as the drawing area is displayed on the decorative design display device 208. Next, the CPU 404 sets ROM coordinates (transfer source address of the ROM 406), VRAM coordinates (transfer destination address of the VRAM 436) and the like in the attribute register of the VDP 434 based on the position information table and the like, and then the image from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436. Set an instruction to start data transfer. The VDP 434 transfers the image data from the ROM 406 to the VRAM 436 based on the command set in the attribute register. Thereafter, the VDP 434 outputs a transfer end interrupt signal to the CPU 404.

  In step S703 following step S701, it is determined whether or not a transfer end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 is input. If a transfer end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S705. Wait for the input signal to be input.

  In step S705, parameters are set based on the production scenario configuration table and attribute data. Here, in order to form a display image in the display area A or B of the VRAM 436 based on the image data transferred to the VRAM 436 in step S701, the CPU 404 has information on the image data constituting the display image (coordinate axis and image size of the VRAM 436). , VRAM coordinates (arrangement coordinates, etc.) are instructed to the VDP 434. The VDP 434 performs parameter setting according to the attribute based on the instruction stored in the attribute register.

  In step S707 following step S705, a drawing instruction is performed. In this drawing instruction, the CPU 404 instructs the VDP 434 to start drawing an image. The VDP 434 starts drawing an image in the frame buffer in accordance with an instruction from the CPU 404.

  In step S709 following step S707, it is determined whether or not a generation end interrupt signal from the VDP 434 based on the end of image drawing is input. If a generation end interrupt signal is input, the process proceeds to step S711. Waits for the generation end interrupt signal to be input.

  In step S711, a scene display counter which is set in a predetermined area of the RAM 408 and counts how many scene images have been generated is incremented (+1), and the process ends.

  FIG. 14A shows the flow of the electric long opening effect process executed in the effect control process of the main process in the first sub-control unit 400. FIG. 14 (b) shows an example of an electric long open effect on the decorative symbol display device 208. The electric-chu-long opening effect is an effect that can be executed during a normal-game variable game, and the special-image 2 start opening (electric-chu) 232 is opened for a long time and / or multiple times (hereinafter referred to as a multi-game variable game). This may be referred to as long open). It should be noted that, even after the normal fluctuation stop, the electric-chu-long opening effect (for example, a notification effect such as “electric-chu-opening!”) May be continued based on the normal signal stop symbol.

  The electric long-long opening effect process shown in FIG. 14 (a) is a normal symbol change start from the main control unit 300 in the command process (step S407) of the main process of the first sub-control unit 400 in FIG. 13 (a). This is executed when a (start rotation) command is received.

  First, sub-control unit 400 first determines whether or not the electric long opening effect execution restriction flag for restricting the execution of electric long opening effect is off (step S801). The first sub-control unit 400 refers to the value of the electric long open effect execution restriction flag stored in a predetermined area in the RAM 408 and determines whether or not the execution of the electric long open effect is restricted. For example, even when the electric tulong release effect is executed during display darkness in which the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is black, the player cannot visually recognize the effect and the effect of the electric chew long release effect cannot be obtained. . Therefore, in such a case, the electric long-long opening effect execution restriction flag is turned on based on the effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game during display darkening. In addition, when the entire image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is not dark-displayed and the fluctuation time of the normal figure fluctuation game is long enough to execute the electric-chu-long opening effect, It is possible to perform an electric Chulong opening effect that can entertain the user. Therefore, in such a case, the electric long-long opening effect execution restriction flag is turned off based on the effect or demonstration effect based on the determination result of the special figure fluctuation game.

  If the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is on in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric-chu-long opening effect is restricted, and controls the electric-chu-long opening effect. Other control processes are executed, this process is terminated, and the process returns to the main process effect control process (step S409).

  If the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is off in step S801, the first sub-control unit 400 determines that the electric-chu long opening effect can be executed, and proceeds to step S803 to start the usual symbol variation (start rotation). It is determined whether or not the result of determining whether or not the normal-game variable game is successful by referring to information about the normal-game hit flag and the normal-use flag from the command data of the command.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the result of determining whether or not the normal figure variation game is successful, the process proceeds to step S805, where the first sub-control unit 400 determines the normal figure from the command data of the normal symbol change start (rotation start) command. With reference to the information regarding the stop symbol, it is determined whether or not the stop symbol of the normal figure variable game is the normal symbol A.

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the stop symbol of the usual figure variable game is the usual figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S807, selects the effect whose effect type is “success pattern”, and opens the electric tulong. Set as production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric long open effect based on the “success pattern”, ends this processing, and performs the main process effect control. The process returns to the process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S805 that the usual variable game is not the usual figure A, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S811, selects an effect whose effect type is “failure pattern A”, and releases the electric tulong. Set as production. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric-chu-long opening effect based on “failure pattern A”, ends this processing, and produces the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S803 that the result of determining whether or not the normal game is a winning game is not successful, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S815 and executes an electric tulong opening false (gasse) effect execution lottery process. In the electric long open false effect execution lottery process, a random value is extracted from the random counter for electric long open false effect execution lottery provided in the RAM 408, and the electric long open false effect execution lottery table stored in the ROM 406 is stored. Is used to determine whether or not the random number value is a hit.

  The first sub-control unit 400 determines whether or not to execute the electric long open false effect based on the result of the determination in step S815 (step S817).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 to execute the electric-chu-long opening false effect, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S821, selects an effect whose effect type is “failed pattern B”, and sets it as an electric-chu-long opening effect. Next, the first sub-control unit 400 proceeds to step S809, executes other control processing for the electric-chu-long opening effect based on “failure pattern B”, ends this processing, and produces the main processing effect. The process returns to the control process (step S409).

  If the first sub-control unit 400 determines in step S817 that the electric-chu-long opening false effect is not executed, the first sub-control unit 400 executes another control process for not executing the electric-chu-long opening effect, ends this processing, and performs the main processing. The process returns to the effect control process (step S409).

  In the process of the electric-chu-long opening effect shown in FIG. 14, when the electric-chu-long opening effect execution restriction flag is off, the electric-chu-long opening effect is always performed if it is a win. The lottery may be performed in the same manner as when the game is off, and the presentation may be performed only when the lottery is won. Also, in this example, when the electric chew is open for a short time (short open) (general figure B), the production of “failure pattern A” is set, and when the electric chew is not released (general figure C), “failure pattern A” is set. The effect “B” is set, but the same effect may be performed with a deviation (common figure B) from the hit (normal figure B).

  FIG. 14B shows an example of the electric tulong opening effect. FIG. 14B shows a display effect being executed in the image display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire surface of the image display area becomes the effect display area 208d, and for example, a background effect named “Land Stage” is executed. In the front of the background effect, the decoration display of the decoration pattern in which “decoration 1” to “decoration 10” sequentially move from top to bottom in the left middle right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, 208c (indicated by a downward arrow in the figure). Is running. A change icon display area a is arranged on the lower left side in the effect display area 208d, and a change icon of a pattern imitating a car is displayed. On the right side of the fluctuation icon display area a, a special figure hold display area c for displaying special figure hold is arranged, and a hold icon b having a pattern imitating an automobile is displayed. On the lower right side in the effect display area 208d, an electric long open effect area d is arranged. An ordinary figure display device 210 (not shown) starts the ordinary figure variation game, the execution of the electric-chu-long opening effect is not restricted, and the electric-chu-long opening effect area d is executed. As an electric Chu-long opening effect, an image of a samurai character operating the lottery machine is displayed along with a display of “help chance drawing”, and the special figure 2 start opening 232 is won by winning the ordinary figure variable game. There is a roaring effect that makes the player expect that it may be released long. As shown in FIG. 14 (b), a part of the right symbol display area 208c is hidden by the electric tulong opening effect. In addition, a part of the right side area of the special figure hold display area c is also hidden. As described above, when the electric-chu-long opening effect may make it difficult to confirm at least part of the decorative symbol variation display, or when the decorative symbol variation display makes it difficult to confirm at least part of the electric-chu long opening effect. There may be.

  Next, the processing of the second sub control unit 500 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 15A is a flowchart of main processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. First, in step S901 in FIG. 15A, various initial settings are performed. When power is turned on, initialization processing is first executed in step S901. In this initialization processing, initial setting of input / output ports, initialization processing of a storage area in the RAM 508, and the like are performed.

  In step S903 following step S901, it is determined whether or not the timer variable is 10 or more. This process is repeated until the timer variable becomes 10, and when the timer variable becomes 10 or more, the process proceeds to step S905. . In step S905, 0 is assigned to the timer variable.

  In step S907 following step S905, command processing is performed. The CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500 determines whether a command has been received from the first sub control unit 400.

  In step S909 following step S907, an effect control process is performed. For example, when there is a new command in step S907, processing such as reading the effect data corresponding to this command from the ROM 506 is performed, and when the effect data needs to be updated, the effect data is updated.

  In step S911 following step S909, lamp control processing is performed. For example, if there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the game board lamp 532 or the game table frame lamp 542, this command is output to the serial communication control circuit 520.

  In step S913 following step S911, a movable body control process is performed. For example, when there is a command from the first sub-control unit 400 to the effect movable body 224, this command is output to the drive circuit 516. Thereafter, the process returns to step S903.

  FIG. 15B is a flowchart of command reception interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub-control unit 500. This command reception interrupt process is a process executed when the second sub control unit 500 detects a strobe signal from the first sub control unit 400. In step S1001 of the command reception interrupt process, the command received from the first sub control unit 400 is stored in the command storage area provided in the RAM 508 as an unprocessed command.

  FIG. 15C is a flowchart of timer interrupt processing executed by the CPU 504 of the second sub control unit 500. The second sub-control unit 500 includes a hardware timer that generates a timer interrupt at a predetermined cycle (in this example, once every 2 ms). The timer interrupt process is triggered by this timer interrupt. Run in cycles. In step S1101 of the timer interrupt process, 1 is added to the value of the timer variable storage area of the RAM 508 described in step S903 of the second sub-control unit main process, and the original timer variable storage area is stored. Therefore, in step S903, the value of the timer variable is determined to be 10 or more every 20 ms (2 ms × 10). In step S1103 following step S1101, an effect random number update process or the like is performed.

  Next, specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. First, the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIGS. 16 to 34 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 16A and each drawing described later show the decorative symbol display device 208 in the center. In the example shown in FIG. 16A, “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed (determined display) in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the ornamental symbol display device 208. 16 to 34, even-numbered decorative symbols (“decoration 2”, “decoration 4”, “decoration 6”, “decoration 8”, “decoration 10”) are displayed surrounded by a vertically-long rectangular frame display. The inside of the frame display is mode 3 (shown by right-upward hatching in FIGS. 16 to 34 (for example, blue)). 16 to 34, odd-numbered decorative symbols (“decoration 1”, “decoration 3”, “decoration 5”, “decoration 7”, “decoration 9”) are surrounded by a vertically-long rectangular frame display. The inside of the frame display is Aspect 5 (indicated by lattice hatching in FIGS. 16 to 34 (for example, red)). In addition, the frame display surrounding the odd number of decorative symbols is displayed so that the display size is larger than that of the frame display, and the lower right corners of the frame display are matched in the vertically long frame display including the character image in the frame. For example, as shown in FIG. 16A, “decoration 7” is displayed in a frame display including a character image of Yoshimune. The pachinko machine 100 displays the frame display surrounding the three decorative symbols displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c in the mode 3 or the mode 5, thereby determining whether or not the special figure variable game is successful by a predetermined jackpot reliability (expected degree). ) Can be executed, and a character image can be displayed in a frame display surrounding an odd number of decorative symbols. The display of the pre-reading notice in which the inside of the frame display surrounding the three decorative symbols is displayed in the form 3 is the display of the pre-reading notice in the chance of the aspect 3, and the inside of the frame display surrounding the three decorative symbols is displayed in the form 5. The display of the pre-reading notice is the display of the pre-reading notice of the chance of the fifth aspect. The big hit reliability (expected degree) in the prefetching notice of the chance is set higher in the aspect 5 than in the aspect 3. Note that the pachinko machine 100 may display the decorative symbol itself in red or blue to execute a pre-reading notice for the chance. Further, the odd number of decorative symbols may include a character image. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays, for example, an aspect 1 (for example, white), an aspect 2 (for example, white blinking), an aspect 3 (for example, blue), an aspect 4 (for example, green), an aspect 5 (for example, It can be displayed in seven types: red), aspect 6 (for example, gold), and aspect 7 (for example, gold).

  In the lower center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a variable icon display area e capable of displaying a variable icon is provided. When the hold is digested and the special figure variable game is started, the hold icon corresponding to the special figure variable game becomes the variable icon. The variation icon is displayed so as to be placed on the upper surface of the cylindrical pedestal image (table) displayed in the variation icon display area e. By changing the mode (display mode) of the variation icon, it is possible to execute the advance notice of the variation with a predetermined jackpot reliability regarding whether or not the special figure variation game is successful.

  A special figure 1 hold icon display area f is provided on the left side of the fluctuation icon display area e. In the special figure 1 holding icon display area f, the number of holding icons of the special figure 1 corresponding to the number of holdings of the special figure 1 can be displayed. The pachinko machine 100 can notify the special figure 1 on-hold icon display area f of the number of special icons 1 on-line game according to the number of the special icons on the special figure 1 and also put on hold according to the mode of each on-hold icon. It is possible to execute a pre-reading notice with a predetermined jackpot reliability regarding whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful. The special figure 1 hold icon display area f is roughly divided into four areas of a first area, a second area, a third area, and a fourth area from right to left. An elliptical pedestal image indicating the display position of the hold icon in FIG. 1 is displayed at the bottom of each of the first to fourth areas. The first to fourth areas correspond to the first to fourth holding ranks, respectively. In the first area, the hold icon of FIG. 1 corresponding to the earliest (most recently stored) hold is displayed. Similarly, in the second to fourth areas, the hold icons corresponding to the second to fourth hold are displayed. The hold icons in FIG. 1 are displayed respectively. In the example shown in FIG. 16 (1), the number of holds in FIG. 1 is 2, and the hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in the first area and the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f, respectively. . The hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed overlapping the upper end portion of the pedestal image. Further, in the example shown in FIG. 16A, the hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in a circular form of mode 1 (shown by dot hatching (for example, white) in FIGS. 16 to 34). Aspect 1 A circular aspect is a default aspect, and is the aspect with the lowest jackpot reliability among a plurality of aspects. Note that the default mode may be a mode of a hold icon corresponding to a hold whose special figure 1 prefetch result is “undecided”, and the reliability of the default mode in this case is not set.

  In addition, three meter images (gauge images) g1, g2, and g3 are displayed on the right side of the variation icon display area e. Meter images g1, g2, and g3 are displayed side by side in this order from the left. The meter image g1 includes three horizontally-long rectangular frame images arranged at the lower end, a character image of “爺” arranged in the frame image, and a horizontally-long rectangular shape stacked vertically from the upper end of the frame image. Segmented images. The meter image g2 includes three horizontally-long rectangular frame images arranged at the lower end, “Princess” character images arranged in the frame image, and three horizontally-oriented rectangular shapes stacked vertically from the upper end of the frame image. Segmented images. The meter image g3 includes three horizontally-long rectangular frame images arranged at the lower end, a character image of “dono” arranged in the frame image, and a horizontally-long rectangular shape stacked vertically from the upper end of the frame image. Segmented images. In the initial state, the segment images of the meter images g1, g2, and g3 are displayed in white. Meter images g1, g2, and g3 are displayed in red one segment at a time. The state where all segments of the meter image g1 are displayed in red is a state where the meter image g1 is full, and the state where all the segments of the meter image g2 are displayed in the mode 5 is that the meter image g2 is full. The state in which all segments of the meter image g3 are displayed in red is a state in which the meter image g3 is full. When all the segment-like images of the meter image g1 are displayed in red and the meter image g1 is full, an effect that promotes the title color at the start of the effect is executed. When all the segment images of the meter image g2 are displayed in red and the meter image g2 is full, it is determined that the effect that the movable body (movable means) operates is executed. When all the segment images of the meter image g3 are displayed in red and the meter image g3 is full, it is determined that the strong button effect is executed. Details of these effects will be described later.

  A special figure 2 hold icon display area may be provided on the right side of the fluctuation icon display area e. In the special figure 2 holding icon display area, the number of holding icons of the special figure 2 corresponding to the number of holdings of the special figure 2 can be displayed. When the special figure 2 hold icon display area is provided, the meter images g1, g2, and g3 may be displayed or may not be displayed. The special figure 2 hold icon display area may be provided above the special figure 1 hold icon display area f.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 16A, a fifth symbol display area h capable of displaying the fifth symbol is provided at the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The fifth symbol is displayed by combining the three symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol. During execution of special figure 1 or special figure 2 variable game, the symbols in the middle left and right of the fifth symbol are “1” → “2” → “3” → ... → “9” → “0” → “ Fluctuation display of the fifth symbol is performed in the order of “1” →... In the example shown in FIG. 16 (1), the fifth symbol of the combination “2-4-7” is displayed. In the fifth symbol, as in the case of the decorative symbol, it is possible to stop and display the three symbols of the left symbol, the middle symbol, and the right symbol to notify the result of the special symbol variation game.

  In addition, as shown in FIG. 16 (1), an image of the sun pattern is displayed in the upper left corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The image of the sun pattern is displayed when the production stage is a fine stage. Although illustration is omitted, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a background image corresponding to the effect stage.

  Also, in FIG. 16A and each drawing described later, a configuration necessary for the description of the embodiment is extracted from the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 in the region on the paper surface separated by a one-dot chain line. In FIG. 16A and each of the drawings to be described later, a speaker 120, a movable body 700, a movable body 702, a chance button 136, a chance button 704, and a setting operation unit 137 are arranged in a region on a paper surface separated by a constant chain line. And the fourth pattern lamps i1 and i2 are schematically shown. The pachinko machine 100 includes a movable body 700 and a movable body 702 as movable means. Details of the movable bodies 700 and 702 will be described later.

  A predetermined BGM (background music) is output from the speaker 120 during the game. The chance button 704 is an operation means that is disposed on the front side of the front frame door 106 and can be operated by the player. The fourth symbol lamps i1 and i2 are lamps for informing the fourth symbol, and are arranged at predetermined positions on the board of the game board 200 shown in FIG. 3, for example. The fourth symbol is a symbol indicating whether or not a special figure variable game is being executed. The fourth symbol lamp i1 has a square external shape, and notifies the fourth symbol for the special symbol 1. The fourth symbol lamp i2 has a circular appearance, and notifies the fourth symbol for the special symbol 2. The fourth symbol lamp i1 blinks white when the special figure 1 variable game is executed, and turns off when the special figure 1 variable game is not executed. Similarly, the fourth symbol lamp i2 blinks white when turned on during execution of the special figure 2 variable game, and turns off while the special figure 2 variable game is not executed. The fourth symbol may be displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  Moreover, the downward arrow shown in the center lower end part of FIG. 16 (1) has shown that the state shown in FIG. 16 (1) and the state shown in FIG. 16 (2) continue in time series. . Also in each figure mentioned later, the downward arrow shown in the center lower end part of each figure has shown that it continues with the following figure in time series.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 16 (1) to (9) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 16 (1) shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7” in the case of a loss is shown, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct. Stop display (confirmation display, permanent stop display). Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “2-4-7” is stopped and displayed in the fifth symbol display area h. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 16A, the hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in a circular form of aspect 1. Aspect 1 A circular aspect is a default aspect and is the aspect with the lowest jackpot reliability among a plurality of aspects.

  In FIG. 16 (2), the special symbol 1 display device 212 (not shown) starts the special symbol 1 variable game, and the decorative symbol variable display, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol variable display are started. The state is shown. The downward arrows shown in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c indicate a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, and the downward arrows illustrated in the fifth symbol display region h indicate the fifth symbol variation display. Indicates the displayed state. Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e1 and the change icon. Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 16 (2), the hold icon reduction animation is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icon f2 is completed. Further, as shown in FIG. 16B, the variation icon is displayed in a larger display size than the hold icon. This may facilitate identification of the variation icon and the hold icon.

  FIG. 16 (3) shows a state in which the display j1 that can specify the mode (for example, color) of the serif notice display is displayed before the serif notice display is started. The display j1 is moved and displayed from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower right. In the figure, a downward-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the display j1 represents the locus and the moving direction of the display j1. The display j1 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed in a transparent manner, and the lower half is displayed in an aspect 3 (for example, blue). The mode 3 in the lower half of the display j1 corresponds to the mode of the serif notice display k1 started in FIG. 16 (4) described later, and the display j1 is a display related to the mode of the serif notice display. The serif notice display is a notice display of the change, and the jackpot reliability is set according to the mode. By the display j1, the player can know the mode of the serif notice display before the display of the serif notice display is started. Note that the display j1 may not include a display in a form corresponding to the form of the line notice display.

  FIG. 16 (4) shows a state in which the display of the dialogue notice display k1 is started. In this example, the display of the line advance notice k1 is started after the display j1 is deleted. However, the display of the line advance notice k1 may be started while the display j1 is displayed. The display k1 may be displayed. The display j1 may be erased after stopping in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may continue to move to the lower right and move out of the display area to be erased. In addition, as shown in FIG. 16 (4), the serif notice display k1 is a scroll picture, and the serif notice display k1 is displayed as a picture in which the scroll is wound at the beginning of display. Further, the serif notice display k1 is aspect 3.

  FIG. 16 (5) shows a state in which the serif notice display k1 is displayed in an animation in which the scroll is opened in the right direction.

  FIG. 16 (6) shows a state where a serif notice display k 1 in which the scroll is completely opened is displayed. The serif notice display k1 in which the scroll is completely opened has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the character's serif is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the balloon display of the serif notice display k1 is mode 3.

  In FIG. 16 (7), a character image display n1 including a character image of a heel (hereinafter referred to as “婆”) m1 and a character image of “婆” is displayed overlapping the left end portion of the serif notice display k1. It shows the state that was done. The serif notice display k1 may be a display including 婆 m1 and character name display n1.

  FIG. 16 (8) shows a state where the display of the mini game display o1 is started. In this example, the mini game display o1 is displayed on the right side of the serif notice display k1 so as to overlap the serif notice display k1. The mini game display o1 may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the serif notice display k1, or may be displayed without overlapping the serif notice display k1. The mini game (sub game) based on the mini game display o1 is started in association with the serif notice display k1. The mini game display o1 includes an inverted triangular arrow image and four circular images. The four circular images are displayed in a line in the horizontal direction, and from the left, the aspect 1 circular image, the aspect 4 circular image (shown by cross-hatching in FIGS. 16 to 34 (for example, green)), aspect 1 A circular image and an aspect 5 circular image are arranged in this order. The arrow image of the mini game display o1 is displayed on the left side of the leftmost aspect 1 circular image at the beginning of display. The mini game based on the mini game display o1 is executed in such a manner that the arrow image moves to the right. The mini game is a winning acquisition corresponding to the winning image displayed to the left from the position where the arrow image is stopped. The aspect 1 circular image is an outlier image, and the aspect 4 circular image and the aspect 5 circular image are winning images. More specifically, the mini-game is lost when the arrow image stops above the leftmost aspect 1 circular image, and the arrow image stops when the arrow image stops above the second aspect 4 circular image from the left. When the arrow image is stopped above the third aspect 1 circular image from the left, the winning acquisition corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is obtained, and the arrow image is positioned at the rightmost position. Stopping above the aspect 5 circular image results in winning corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and winning corresponding to the aspect 5 circular image.

  FIG. 16 (9) shows a state in which a character string image “Tono is Yatsushiro Shogun” is displayed in the serif notice display k 1. The character string image of “Tono is Yatsushiro Shogun” is a character display of the character display indicating the words of 婆 m1. In the state shown in FIG. 16 (9), the mini game with the mini game display o1 is ended. In this example, the mini-game is started after the character string image is displayed in the serif notice display k1. The start of the movement of the arrow image is the start of the mini game. The mini-game may be started before the character string image is displayed in the serif notice display k1, or displayed at the same time as the character string image is displayed in the serif notice display k1. The display may be started, or may be started while the character string image is being displayed in the serif notice display k1. In this example, since the arrow image of the mini game display o1 is stopped above the leftmost aspect 1 circular image, the result of the mini game is out of place. For this reason, the effect display started when winning in the mini game is not started after this.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example can display a certain type of line notice display k1. The serif notice display k1 is a display including a character display (in this example, “Tono is Yatsushiro Shogun”) representing the line of 婆 m1. The character display of this example is a character display including the contents related to the character of Tono. In addition, there is a case where a mini game with the mini game display o is started in association with the serif notice display k1. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, by displaying the serif notice display k1 including the character display of the contents related to the character, the serif notice display k1 can be noticed by a novice player, and the serif notice display k1. In some cases, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the mini-game by playing the mini-game in relation to the game.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 16 (10) to 16 (17) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 16 (10) shows a state in which the speech advance notice k 1 is displayed during the execution of the special figure variable game. In this example, as shown in FIG. 16 (10), a character string image of “tea is delicious” is displayed in the line notice display k1. The character string image of “tea is delicious” is a character display of the character display representing the words of 婆 m1. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 16 (10), the mini game with the mini game display o1 is ended. In this example, since the arrow image of the mini game display o1 is stopped above the second aspect 4 circular image from the left, the result of the mini game is a winning acquisition corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image. In this example, when the winning result corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is derived as a result of the mini game, the display of the serif notice display k2 is started as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 16 (11) shows a state in which the display j2 that can specify the color of the serif notice display k2 is displayed before the display of the serif notice display k2 is started. The display j2 is moved and displayed from the vicinity of the aspect 4 circular image of the mini game display o1 to the upper right. The display j2 in this example appears from the vicinity of the aspect 4 circular image of the mini game display o1 and starts to be displayed. In the drawing, an upper right arrow shown at the lower left of the display j2 represents the locus and the moving direction of the display j2. The display j2 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed in a transparent manner, and the lower half is displayed in an aspect 3. The mode 3 in the lower half of the display j1 corresponds to the mode (for example, color) of the serif notice display k2 started in FIG. 16 (12) to be described later, and the display j2 is related to the mode of the serif notice display k2. It is a display. The serif notice display k2 is a notice display of the change, and the jackpot reliability is set according to the mode. By the display j2, the player can know the mode of the speech advance notice display before the display of the notice advance notice k2 is started.

  FIG. 16 (12) shows a state in which the display of the dialogue notice display k2 is started. In this example, the display of the line advance notice k2 is started after the display j2 is deleted. However, the display of the line advance notice k2 may be started while the display j2 is being displayed, or the line advance notice is displayed simultaneously with the deletion of the display j2. The display k1 may be displayed. The display j2 may be erased after stopping in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may be erased by moving to the upper right and moving outside the display area. Also, as shown in FIG. 16 (12), the serif notice display k2 is a scroll picture, and the serif notice display k2 is displayed as a picture in which the scroll is wound at the beginning of display. Further, the serif notice display k2 is an aspect of aspect 3.

  FIG. 16 (13) shows a state in which the serif notice display k 2 is displayed with an animation in which the scroll opens leftward.

  FIG. 16 (14) shows a state in which a serif notice display k2 in which the scroll is completely opened is displayed. The serif notice display k2 in which the scroll is completely opened has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display indicating the character's serif is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the speech balloon display of the serif notice display k2 is mode 3.

  FIG. 16 (15) shows a state where 婆 m2 and a character name display n2 including a character image of “婆” are displayed so as to overlap the right end portion of the serif notice display k2. The serif notice display k2 may be a display including 婆 m2 and character name display n2.

  FIG. 16 (16) shows a state in which the display of the mini game display o2 is started. In this example, the mini game display o2 is displayed on the left side of the serif notice display k2 so as to overlap the serif notice display k2. The mini game display o2 may be displayed so as to overlap at least part of the serif notice display k2, or may be displayed without overlapping the serif notice display k2. The mini game by the mini game display o2 is started in association with the serif notice display k2. Similar to the mini game display o1, the mini game display o2 includes an inverted triangular arrow image and four circular images. The four circular images are displayed in a line in the horizontal direction, and are arranged in the order of the mode 1 circular image, the mode 4 circular image, the mode 1 circular image, and the mode 5 circular image from the right. The arrow image of the mini game display o2 is displayed on the right side of the rightmost mode 1 circular image at the beginning of display. The mini game based on the mini game display o2 is executed with the arrow image moved to the left. The mini game is a winning game corresponding to the winning image displayed to the right from the position where the arrow image is stopped. The aspect 1 circular image is an outlier image, and the aspect 4 circular image and the aspect 5 circular image are winning images. More specifically, the mini-game is lost when the arrow image stops above the rightmost aspect 1 circular image, and when the arrow image stops above the second aspect 4 circular image from the right, When the arrow image is stopped above the third aspect 1 circular image from the right, the winning acquisition corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is obtained, and the arrow image is leftmost. Stopping above the aspect 5 circular image results in winning corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and winning corresponding to the aspect 5 circular image.

  FIG. 16 (17) shows a state in which a character string image “suitable for Daifuku” is displayed in the serif notice display k 2. The character string image “fits well with Daifuku” is a character display in the character display representing the words of 婆 m2. In addition, in the state shown in FIG. 16 (17), the mini game with the mini game display o2 is ended. In this example, the mini game is started after the character string image is displayed in the serif notice display k2. The start of the movement of the arrow image is the start of the mini game. The mini-game may be started before the character string image starts to be displayed in the serif notice display k2, or displayed at the same time as the character string image is started to be displayed in the serif notice display k2. The display may be started, or may be started while the character string image is being displayed in the serif notice display k2. In this example, since the arrow image of the mini game display o2 stops above the rightmost mode 1 circular image, the result of the mini game is out of place. For this reason, the effect display started when winning in the mini game is not started after this.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present example derives the hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image as a result of the mini game by the mini game display o1 started in association with a certain type of notice notice display k1. Then, the display of the notice advance notice k2 is started. The result of the mini game on the mini game display o1 can be derived without operating the chance button 136. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 has a variation display (a special display variation display) in which display of a certain effect display (for example, the second speech advance notice display k2) is not started by derivation of the result of the mini-game misalignment. The variation display (display of the special figure variation) in which the display of a certain effect display is started by deriving the result of winning the mini game is configured to be easier to be finalized and displayed in a big hit mode. For example, rather than the variable display in which the dialogue notice display of “Tono is Yatsushiro Shoja” is displayed as the first dialogue notice display instead of the line notice notice display of “Daifuku Well Fit” as the second dialogue notice display, The variable display in which the line notice display “suitable for Daifuku” is displayed as the second line notice display is configured to be more easily finalized and displayed in a big hit mode.

  In addition, a mini game different from the mini games of the mini game displays o1 and o2 may be executed. There may be a case where at least a part of the mini game execution period of the mini game display o1, o2 overlaps with at least a part of the other mini game execution period.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 16 (18) to (25) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 16 (16) shows a state in which the display j3 is displayed during the execution of the special figure variable game. The display j3 is a display that can specify the mode (for example, color) of the serif notice display k3 before the display of the serif notice display k3 shown in FIG. The display j3 is moved and displayed from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower right. In the figure, a downward-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the display j3 represents the locus and the moving direction of the display j3. The display j3 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed in a transparent manner, and the lower half is displayed in the form 1. The mode 1 in the lower half of the display j3 corresponds to the mode of the serif notice display k3 started in FIG. 16 (19) described later, and the display j3 is a display related to the mode of the serif notice display. The serif notice display k3 is a look-ahead notice display. With the display j3, the player can know the mode of the serif notice display k3 before the display of the serif notice display k3 is started.

  FIG. 16 (19) shows a state in which the display of the dialog notice display k3 is started. In this example, the display of the line advance notice k3 is started after the display j3 is deleted. However, the display of the line advance notice k3 may be started while the display j3 is displayed, or the display of the line advance notice k3 may be simultaneously performed. The display k3 may be started. The display j3 may be erased after stopping in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may continue to move to the lower right and move outside the display area to be erased. Also, as shown in FIG. 16 (19), the serif notice display k3 is a scroll picture, and the serif notice display k3 is displayed with a picture of the scroll being wound at the beginning of display. Further, the serif notice display k3 is an aspect of aspect 1.

  FIG. 16 (20) shows a state in which the dialogue advance notice k3 is displayed as an animation in which the scroll is opened in the right direction.

  FIG. 16 (21) shows a state where a serif notice display k3 in which the scroll is completely opened is displayed. The serif notice display k3 in which the scroll is completely opened has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the character's serif is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the balloon display of the serif notice display k3 is mode 1.

  In FIG. 16 (22), a character name display n3 including a character image of a girl (hereinafter referred to as “girl”) m3 and a character image of “girl” is displayed overlapping the left end portion of the line notice display k3. It shows the state that was done. The serif notice display k3 may be a display including the girl m3 and the character name display n3.

  FIG. 16 (23) shows a state where the display of the mini game display o1 is started. In this example, the mini game display o1 is displayed, but the mini game by the mini game display o1 is not started. When the mini game is not started, the mini game display o1 may not be displayed.

  FIG. 16 (24) shows a state in which a character string image of “blue preparation” is displayed in the serif notice display k3. The character string image of “blue preparation” is a character display of the character display representing the line of the girl m3.

  FIG. 16 (25) shows a state in which the mode of the hold icon f2 is changed from the mode 1 circle to the mode 3 circle. The character string image of “blue preparation” in the serif notice display k3 is a display for notifying that the mode of the hold icon changes to the mode 3. Further, the jackpot reliability of the hold icon is, in order from the lowest, Aspect 1 (for example, white), Aspect 3 (for example, blue), Aspect 4 (for example, green), Aspect 5 (for example, red), Aspect 6 (for example, red) , Gold) and aspect 7 (for example, iridescent). Further, even after the character string image is displayed in the serif notice display k3, the mini game by the mini game display o1 is not performed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present example can display a serif notice display k3 as a display of a certain kind of serif notice. The serif notice display k3 is a display including a certain character display (in this example, “blue preparation”) among the character displays representing the lines of the girl m3. Further, the serif notice display k3 is a display as a prefetch notice. The mini game by the mini game display o1 is not executed in association with the serif notice display k3 which is the pre-read notice display.

  According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, in order to confirm whether the mini game is successful, the player is instantly focused on the speech balloon of the dialogue notice display, and the game in which the characters of the dialogue notice display are displayed in the eyes The player sees the serif notice display, and through the serif notice display, the player can deepen the understanding of the production and double the enjoyment of the game.

The serif notice display is necessary to deepen the understanding of the characters and production.
The serif notice display is not used as a notice with a relatively high expectation of the big hit, so it can be displayed frequently and has a role of having a gap between games.
However, in recent game machines, there are an increasing number of players who are tired of the conventional dialogue notice display.
Even if a hot notice display is occasionally made with a line notice display, there is no point for a player who is not looking at the line notice display in the first place.
If you don't look at the serif notices that have the above-mentioned role, it will be a monotonous game of whether or not you win big.
In addition, a game machine equipped with a mini game is also known as a new production, but the player pays attention to the mini game, and the player who does not see the serif notice display is increasingly not seeing the serif notice display End up.
However, mini-games can be anything other than jackpots, and play a role of having a gap between games, so it is good to pay attention to mini-games. The pachinko machine 100 of this example will deepen and deepen the game so that the players who have moved their interest in mini-games will be able to entertain the full effect of the game table by focusing attention on the serif notice display again. .

In addition, for example, when the speech announcement display balloon has a relatively high reliability level, the mini game may have a success pattern and a failure pattern. If the speech balloon is a mode with relatively high jackpot reliability, it will always be a win in the mini game, and if the speech warning display speech is in a mode with relatively low jackpot reliability, be sure to It may be off.
In the case where the speech announcement display balloon is in a mode with relatively high jackpot reliability, even if it is a pattern in which the mini game fails, the expectation degree of jackpot may be higher than when the mini game is not performed.
The position at which the mini game is displayed overlaps at least a part of the speech announcement display speech balloon, and may be the head side or the tail side of the text in the speech balloon display. Further, the position where the mini game is displayed may be, for example, outside the speech notice display balloon.
The character display of the serif notice display may be displayed step by step gradually from the beginning of the character.
The type of mini game (successful success, success and great success, etc.) varies depending on the content of speech, the manner of speech balloons, and the character. For example, if the Tono character display is displayed, it is a gambling tic content that will be a great success or failure in a mini game, and if a princess character is displayed, there is no great success but it is a reliable type with many successes It may be content.
There may be a case in which a pre-reading notice is given in the second notice notice display.
The character of the first serif notice display may move to the second serif notice display, and the first serif notice display may be erased.
In addition to characters, the speech notice display may include voice or animation that moves the mouth of the character, for example. For example, there is no animation in which a speech or character's mouth moves, which will be described later, even if the speech preview display shown in FIG. 18 such as the speech preview display k1 and k2 and the speech preview display s1 occur simultaneously, FIG. In some cases, the notice notice display shown in FIG. Note that there is no sound effect related to the mini game while the mini game is running, and the sound effect may or may not be output when the result of the mini game is derived.

  Next, the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable bodies 700 and 702 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17A is a diagram illustrating the positional relationship in the front-rear direction of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable bodies 700 and 702 included in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. Thereafter, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in, for example, an island facility, the player side facing the pachinko machine 100 is referred to as “front” (front, front side, front surface, etc.), and vice versa. Side, rear surface, etc.). In addition, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in, for example, an island facility, the vertical upper direction is “up” (upper, upper, upper, upper end, etc.) when viewed from the player, and the opposite is “lower” (lower, lower, Lower, lower end, etc.). In addition, when the pachinko machine 100 is installed in, for example, an island facility, the horizontal left when viewed from the player is “left” (left, left, left end, etc.), and the opposite is “right” (right, right, Right end).

  FIG. 17A shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable bodies 700 and 702 are viewed from the front upper right to the rear lower left. The front-rear positions of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable bodies 700 and 702 are in the order of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 702, and the movable body 700 from the rear side. The movable bodies 700 and 702 are arranged in the effect device 206 of the game board 200 shown in FIG.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 17A, the movable body 702 has movable portions 702a and 702b. The movable portion 702a is disposed on the left side of the movable body 702, and the movable portion 702b is disposed on the right side of the movable body 702. The movable part 702a has a horizontally long rectangular flat plate, and is arranged so that the surface of the flat plate is orthogonal to a virtual straight line extending in the front-rear direction. Similarly, it has a horizontally long rectangular flat plate, and is arranged so that the surface of the flat plate is orthogonal to a virtual straight line extending in the front-rear direction. A part of the model name of the pachinko machine 100 (in this example, “Yatsushiro”) is written on the flat surface of the movable part 702a, and the model name of the pachinko machine 100 is displayed on the flat surface of the effect movable body 702b. A part (in this example, “General”) is written. Moreover, full color LED is arrange | positioned at the flat plate surface of movable part 702a, 702b, and movable body 702 is the aspect 1 (for example, white), aspect 2 (for example, white blinking), aspect 3 (for example, for example). Blue, Aspect 4 (for example, green), Aspect 5 (for example, red), Aspect 6 (for example, gold), Aspect 7 (for example, iridescent) can emit light. In the state shown in FIG. 17A, the movable body 702 emits light in the mode 1. Further, the right end portion of the movable portion 702a located at the initial position and the left end portion of the movable portion 702b located at the initial position are in contact with each other, and the movable portion 702a is movable to the left from the initial position, and the movable portion 702b. Can move to the right from the initial position. For example, a stepping motor is used as a drive source for the movable parts 702a and 702b. In the state shown in FIG. 17A, the movable portion 702a is located at the left end of the moving range, and the movable portion 702b is located at the right end of the moving range.

  The movable body 700 has a circular shape and is decorated with a family crest on the front surface. Moreover, the movable body 700 has a full color LED, for example, aspect 1 (for example, white), aspect 2 (for example, white blinking), aspect 3 (for example, blue), aspect 4 (for example, green), It is possible to emit light in a plurality of colors of Aspect 5 (for example, red), Aspect 6 (for example, gold), and Aspect 7 (for example, iridescent). In the state shown in FIG. 17A, the movable body 700 emits light in the mode 1.

  Drive control (movement control) of the movable bodies 70 and 702 is executed by the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG. Further, the light emission control of the LEDs provided in the movable bodies 700 and 702 is executed by the second sub-control unit 500 shown in FIG.

  Next, the operation of the movable body 700 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 (2a) and (2b). FIG. 17 (2a) shows a state in which the movable body 700 is located at the initial position. The initial position of the movable body 700 is below the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 700 is driven by, for example, a stepping motor or the like, and can move up and down in a plane in front of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and parallel to the display screen.

  FIG. 17 (2b) shows a state in which the movable body 700 has moved upward. An upward arrow shown below the movable body 700 represents a locus and a moving direction of the movable body 700. In addition, a circular diagram shown below in the drawing represents an initial position of the movable body 700. In the state shown in FIG. 17 (2b), the movable body 700 is located at the upper end of the movement range. The movable body 700 may be movable upward from the position in FIG. 17 (2b).

  Next, the operation of the movable body 702 will be described with reference to FIGS. 17 (3a) to (3c). FIG. 17 (3a) shows a state in which the movable body 702 is located at the initial position. In the state shown in FIG. 17 (3a), the movable portions 702a and 702b are located at the initial position, and the right end portion of the movable portion 702a and the left end portion of the movable portion 702b are in contact with each other. The initial position of the movable body 702 is above the decorative symbol display device 208. The movable body 702 is driven by, for example, a stepping motor or the like, and can move up and down in a plane in front of the display screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 and parallel to the display screen.

  FIG. 17 (3b) shows a state in which the movable body 702 has moved downward. A downward arrow shown below the movable body 702 represents the trajectory and moving direction of the movable body 702. In addition, a rectangular diagram shown in the upper part of the drawing represents an initial position of the movable body 702. In the state shown in FIG. 17 (3b), the movable body 702 is located at the lower end of the movement range. Note that the movable body 702 may be movable downward from the position in FIG. 17 (3b).

  FIG. 17 (3c) shows a state where the movable part 702a has moved to the left and the movable part 702b has moved to the right. A left-pointing arrow illustrated on the movable portion 702a indicates a locus and a moving direction of the movable portion 702a, and a left-pointing arrow illustrated on the movable portion 702a indicates a locus and a moving direction of the movable portion 702a. In the state shown in FIG. 17 (3c), the movable portion 702a is located at the left end of the moving range, and the movable portion 702b is located at the right end of the moving range. In the state shown in FIG. 17 (3c), the moving length from the initial position of the movable portion 702a and the moving length from the initial position of the movable portion 702b are the same length. Note that the movable portion 702a may be moved leftward from the position in FIG. 17 (3c), and the movable portion 702b is movable rightward from the position in FIG. 17 (3c). Also good.

  FIG. 17 (4) shows a state in which the movable bodies 700 and 702 are started from the initial position. In the drawing, a circular diagram illustrated below represents an initial position of the movable body 700, and a rectangular diagram illustrated above represents an initial position of the movable body 702. In the state shown in FIG. 17 (4), the movable body 700 stops at the uppermost position of the movement range, and the movable body 702 stops at the lowermost position of the movement range. The movable body 702a is located at the left end of the movement range, and the movable body 702b is located at the right end of the movement range. When the movable body 700 and the movable body 702 overlap in the front-rear direction, if the movable portions 702a, 702b of the movable body 702 are positioned at the initial position, almost the entire movable portions 702a, 702b are in the front-rear direction. Since it overlaps, it becomes invisible to the player. By moving the movable parts 702a and 702b to the left and right, when the movable body 700 and the movable body 702 overlap in the front-rear direction, the movable parts 702a and 702b can be moved to the left and right to be visible to the player. .

  Next, the display of the decorative symbol display device 208 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 17 (5) shows a display example of the decorative symbol display device 208 during execution of the special figure 1 variable game. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208b, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, and in the fifth symbol display region h, the fifth symbol variation display is displayed. The variation icon display area e displays a variation icon e0 having a circular shape 1 and the special icons 1 hold icon display area f displays hold icons f1 and f2. In addition, below, although the example of the effect performed in relation to execution of special figure 1 variable game is demonstrated, these effects may be performed in connection with execution of special figure 2 variable game. Further, the pachinko machine 100 may have a movable body in addition to the movable bodies 700 and 702. A display device such as a liquid crystal display device may be disposed on these movable bodies.

  In addition, the decorative symbols shown in FIGS. 16 and 17 and FIGS. 19 to 34 to be described later can be displayed in a production mode such as a fine stage, a cloudy stage, a dragonfly ZONE, and a super dragonfly ZONE. The decoration pattern may be different depending on the production mode. The decorative symbol display device 208 can display a decorative symbol of a certain aspect in at least a part of stages and production modes, and can display a decorative symbol of a different aspect from a certain aspect in a different stage or production mode. It may be.

  Next, the dialogue notice display will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 18 is a table for explaining the serif notice display. The table shown in FIG. 18 includes items “NO”, “first serif notice display”, and “second serif notice display”. The item “NO” indicates the identification number of the line notice display. In this example, 21 line notice display of “NO01” to “NO21” is provided.

  The item of “first serif notice display” is, for example, the first serif notice display performed in a state where no serif notice display such as the serif notice display k1 shown in FIGS. 16 (5) to (9) is performed. Show. The item of “first line notice display” is composed of items of “character”, “speech mode”, “mini game”, and “line contents”. The item “Character” indicates a character displayed during the line preview display. The item “balloon mode” indicates the mode (for example, display color) of the speech balloon display of the speech notice display. “Aspect 1” is, for example, white, “Aspect 3” is, for example, blue, “Aspect 4” is, for example, green, and “Aspect 5” is, for example, red. “Aspect 2” is not provided, but “Aspect 2” may be provided. For example, “mode 2” is a mode of white blinking. The item “mini game” indicates whether or not the mini game is started in connection with the line notice display. When the item “mini game” is “◯”, the mini game is started, and when the item “mini game” is “×”, the mini game is not started. As shown in FIG. 18, the mini-game is started in association with the first dialogue notice display of “NO01” to “NO17”, but the first dialogue notice display of “NO18” to “NO21” is displayed. Relatedly, the mini game is configured not to be started. The item “line contents” indicates the contents of the character display indicating the lines of the characters in the line notice display. For example, in the case of the “NO01” line notice display, the character string image “I welcome” is displayed as the character display indicating the line of “Character A (Staff)”.

  The item of “second serif notice display” is, for example, the second that is performed in a state where the first serif notice display such as the serif notice display k2 shown in FIGS. 16 (12) to (17) is performed. It shows about the notice notice display. The item “second line notice display” is composed of items of “character”, “speech mode”, “mini game”, and “line contents”. “-” Of each item indicates that the second serif notice display is not displayed. As shown in FIG. 18, the second line notice display is not displayed in the line notice display of “NO01”, “NO02”, “NO04”, “NO07”, “NO18” to “NO21”. Whether or not the second serif notice display is displayed may be based on the result of the mini-game started in connection with the first serif notice display, or the first serif notice display or The second notice warning display is always displayed in the case of the notice notice display (for example, “NO03”, “NO05”, “NO06”, “NO08” to “NO17”). May be. The item “Character” indicates a character displayed during the line preview display. The item “balloon mode” indicates the display mode (for example, display color) of the speech balloon display of the speech notice display. In the second serif notice display, modes “mode 3” to “mode 5” are provided. “Aspect 3” is, for example, blue, “Aspect 4” is green, and “Aspect 5” is red. In addition, although “mode 1” and “mode 2” are not provided in the second serif notice display, “mode 1” and “mode 2” may be provided. The item “mini game” indicates whether or not the mini game is started in connection with the line notice display. When the item “mini game” is “◯”, the mini game is started, and when the item “mini game” is “×”, the mini game is not started. As shown in FIG. 18, since the mini game is started in association with the second line notice display of “NO03”, “NO05”, “NO06”, “NO08” to “NO17”, the second When the line notice display is displayed, the mini game is always started in association with the second line notice display. A serif notice display may be provided in which the mini-game is not started when the second serif notice display is displayed. If a win is made in the mini-game started in connection with the second dialog notice display, an advantageous effect for the player is started. Details of this effect will be described later. The item “line contents” indicates the contents of the character display indicating the lines of the characters in the line notice display. For example, in the case of the “NO3” line notice display, a character string image “suitable for Daifuku” is displayed as a character display indicating the line of “Character B (婆)”.

  Also, as shown in FIG. 18, when the second serif notice display is displayed, the “character” in the first serif notice display is different from the “character” in the second serif notice display. In such a case, the first and second serif notice displays are conversation notice notices. For example, in the case of the “NO08” line notice display, the first line notice display is “Character” is “Character D (Echigoya)”, “Line contents” is “Smell”, and 2 The first dialogue notice display is “Character” is “Character F (爺)”, “Self content” is “Is it a thing?”, And the first dialogue notice display is Echigoya's dialogue and 2 A conversation is established with the first line warning display, and the first and second lines are displayed.

  Further, the “NO01” to “NO17” line notice display is a notice display of the change, and the jackpot reliability differs for each mode. The jackpot reliability is aspect 3, aspect 4, and aspect 5 in ascending order. For example, in a mini-game, a hit result is displayed when a relatively high hit reliability display is displayed, rather than when a relatively low hit reliability display is displayed. May be easily derived. For example, it may be easier to derive the winning result when the dialogue notice display of the aspect of the aspect 4 is displayed than when the dialogue notice display of the aspect of the aspect 3 is displayed.

  Also, “NO18” to “NO21” lines are displayed in advance, and the jackpot reliability is “NO18”, “NO19”, “NO20”, and “NO21” in descending order.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 19 (1) to (21) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 19 (1) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7” in the case of a loss is shown, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct. Stop is displayed. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “2-4-7” is stopped and displayed in the fifth symbol display area h. In the state shown in FIG. 19 (1), the hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in the circular form of aspect 1. Aspect 1 A circular aspect is a default aspect and is the aspect with the lowest jackpot reliability among a plurality of aspects.

  In FIG. 19 (2), in accordance with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), the decorative symbol variation display, the fourth symbol variation display, and the fifth symbol variation display are started. The state is shown. Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e1 and the change icon. Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 19 (2), the hold icon reduction animation is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icon f2 is completed.

  FIG. 19 (3) shows a state in which the display j1 that can specify the mode of the serif notice display is displayed before the display of the serif notice display is started. The display j1 is displayed in such a manner that the display j1 moves downward from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the figure, a downward-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the display j1 represents the locus and the moving direction of the display j1. The display j1 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed in a transparent manner, and the lower half is displayed in an aspect 3. The mode 3 in the lower half of the display j1 corresponds to the mode of the serif notice display k1 started in FIG. 19 (4) described later, and the display j1 is a display related to the mode of the serif notice display. The serif notice display is a notice display of the change, and the jackpot reliability is set according to the mode. By the display j1, the player can know the mode of the serif notice display before the display of the serif notice display is started.

  FIG. 19 (4) shows a state in which the display of the dialog notice display k1 is started. In this example, after the display j1 is erased, the line notice display k1 is displayed. The serif notice display k1 is a scroll pattern, and the serif notice display k1 is displayed as a picture in which the scroll is wound at the beginning of display. Further, the serif notice display k1 is an aspect of aspect 3.

  FIG. 19 (5) shows a state in which the serif notice display k1 is displayed in an animation mode in which the scroll opens in the right direction.

  FIG. 19 (6) shows a state where a serif notice display k 1 in which the scroll is completely opened is displayed. The serif notice display k1 in which the scroll is completely opened has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the character's serif is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the balloon display of the serif notice display k1 is mode 3.

  FIG. 19 (7) shows a state where 婆 m1 and a character name display n1 including a character image of “婆” are displayed overlapping the left end portion of the serif notice display k1. The serif notice display k1 may be a display including 婆 m1 and character name display n1.

  FIG. 19 (8) shows a state in which the display of the mini game display o1 is started. In this example, the mini game display o1 is displayed on the right side of the serif notice display k1 so as to overlap the serif notice display k1.

  FIG. 19 (9) shows a state in which a character string image “Tono is Yatsushiro Shogun” is displayed in the serif notice display k 1. The character string image of “Tono is Yatsushiro Shogun” is a character display of the character display indicating the words of 婆 m1. In the state shown in FIG. 19 (9), the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. In this example, the mini-game is started after the character string image is displayed in the serif notice display k1. The start of the movement of the arrow image is the start of the mini game.

  FIG. 19 (10) shows a state in which a mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image of the mini game display o1 is just before the stop.

  FIG. 19 (11) shows a state in which the mini game with the mini game display o1 is completed. The stop of the arrow image on the mini game display o1 is the end of the mini game. Since the arrow image of the mini game display o1 is stopped above the leftmost aspect 1 circular image, the result of the mini game is out of place. For this reason, the effect display started when winning in the mini game is not started after this.

  FIG. 19 (12) shows a state where 婆 m1 and character name display n1 are deleted. In this example, 婆 m1 and character name display n1 are erased at the same time, but either one of these displays may be erased first.

  FIG. 19 (13) shows a state in which the character string image of “Tono is Yatsushiro Shogun” in the serif notice display k1 has been deleted.

  FIG. 19 (14) shows a state in which the mini game display o1 is deleted.

  FIG. 19 (15) shows a state in which the erasing animation of the speech notice display k1 is started. The erase animation of the serif notice display k1 displays a display in which the scroll is wound leftward.

  FIG. 19 (16) shows a state where the scroll of the serif notice display k1 is completely wound. The serif notice display k1 is erased after being completely wound.

  FIG. 19 (17) shows a state where the serif notice display k1 is deleted. In this example, the character (in this example, 婆 m1) and the character name display n1, the character string image of the dialogue (in this example, “Tono is Yatsushiro Shogun”), the mini-game display o1, and the dialogue notice display k1 are deleted in this order. Is done. Note that these erasing orders can be arbitrarily set.

  FIG. 19 (18) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation display) in a manner in which “decoration 6” slightly swings up and down in the left symbol display area 208 a. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 19 (19) shows a state where “decoration 8” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208 c so as to slightly swing up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 8” indicate that “decoration 8” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 19 (20) shows a state in which “decoration 5” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b so as to slightly swing up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 5” indicate that “decoration 5” slightly fluctuates up and down. In the frame display surrounding “decoration 5”, a character image of a frog is displayed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6—decoration 5—decoration 8” which is a shifted symbol form is temporarily displayed.

  FIG. 19 (21) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of date ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6—decoration 5—decoration 8”, which is an outlier design mode indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful, is stopped. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination “6-5-8” is stopped and displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example can display a certain type of line notice display k1. The serif notice display of this example is a "NO02" serif notice display shown in FIG. The serif notice display k1 is a display including a character display (in this example, “Tono is Yatsushiro Shogun”) representing the line of 婆 m1. The character display of this example is a character display including the contents related to the character of Tono. In addition, there is a case where a mini game with the mini game display o is started in association with the serif notice display k1. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, by displaying the serif notice display k1 including the character display of the contents related to the character, the serif notice display k1 can be noticed by a novice player, and the serif notice display k1. In some cases, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the mini-game by playing the mini-game in relation to the game.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 19 (22) to 20 (19) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 19 (22) shows a state continued from FIG. 19 (6). In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a serif notice display k1, 婆 m1, and a character name display n1 are displayed.

  FIG. 19 (23) shows a state where the display of the mini game display o1 is started. In this example, the mini game display o1 is displayed on the right side of the serif notice display k1 so as to overlap the serif notice display k1.

  FIG. 19 (24) shows a state in which a character string image of “Brown is delicious” is displayed in the serif notice display k1. The character string image of “Tono is Yatsushiro Shogun” is a character display of the character display indicating the words of 婆 m1. In the state shown in FIG. 19 (24), the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. In this example, the mini-game is started after the character string image is displayed in the serif notice display k1. The start of the movement of the arrow image is the start of the mini game.

  FIG. 19 (25) shows a state where the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1.

  FIG. 19 (26) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image of the mini game display o1 is just before the stop.

  FIG. 19 (27) shows a state in which the mini game with the mini game display o1 is completed. The stop of the arrow image on the mini game display o1 is the end of the mini game. Since the arrow image of the mini game display o1 is stopped above the aspect 4 circular image, the result of the mini game is a winning acquisition corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image. In this example, when the winning result corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is derived as a result of the mini game, the display of the serif notice display k2 is started as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 20 (1) shows a state continued from FIG. 19 (27), and the state in which the display j2 that can specify the mode of the serif notice display k2 is displayed before the display of the serif notice display k2 is started. Show. The display j2 is displayed in a manner of moving to the upper right from the vicinity of the aspect 4 circular image of the mini game display o1. The display j2 in this example appears from the vicinity of the aspect 4 circular image of the mini game display o1 and starts to be displayed. In the drawing, an upper right arrow shown at the lower left of the display j2 represents the locus and the moving direction of the display j2. The display j2 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed in a transparent manner, and the lower half is displayed in an aspect 3. The mode 3 in the lower half of the display j1 corresponds to the mode of the serif notice display k2 started in FIG. 20 (2) described later, and the display j2 is a display related to the mode of the serif notice display k2. The serif notice display k2 is a notice display of the change, and the jackpot reliability is set according to the mode. By the display j2, the player can know the mode of the speech advance notice display before the display of the notice advance notice k2 is started.

  FIG. 20 (2) shows a state in which the display of the dialogue notice display k2 is started. In this example, after the display j2 is erased, the display of the dialog notice display k2 is started. The serif notice display k2 is a picture of a scroll, and the serif notice display k2 is displayed as a picture in a state in which the scroll is wound at the beginning of display. Further, the serif notice display k2 is an aspect of aspect 3.

  FIG. 20 (3) shows a state in which the serif notice display k2 is displayed in an animation in which the scroll opens leftward.

  FIG. 20 (4) shows a state where a serif notice display k2 in which the scroll is completely opened is displayed. The serif notice display k2 in which the scroll is completely opened has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display indicating the character's serif is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the speech balloon display of the serif notice display k2 is mode 3.

  FIG. 20 (5) shows a state where 婆 m2 and a character name display n2 including a character image of “婆” are displayed so as to overlap the right end portion of the serif notice display k2. The serif notice display k2 may be a display including 婆 m2 and character name display n2.

  FIG. 20 (6) shows a state in which the mini game display o2 has started to be displayed. In this example, the mini game display o2 is displayed on the left side of the serif notice display k2 so as to overlap the serif notice display k2.

  FIG. 20 (7) shows a state in which a character string image “suitable for Daifuku” is displayed in the line notice display k2. The character string image “fits well with Daifuku” is a character display in the character display representing the words of 婆 m2. In addition, a mini game based on the mini game display o2 is being performed.

  FIG. 20 (8) shows a state in which a mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image of the mini game display o2 is just before the stop.

  FIG. 20 (9) shows a state in which the mini game with the mini game display o2 is completed. In this example, since the arrow image of the mini game display o2 stops above the rightmost mode 1 circular image, the result of the mini game is out of place. For this reason, the effect display started when winning in the mini game is not started after this.

  FIG. 20 (10) shows a state in which 婆 m1, character name display n1, 婆 m2, and character name display n2 are erased. In this example, these displays are erased at the same time, but these displays may be erased in any order.

  FIG. 20 (11) shows a state in which the character string image “tea is delicious” in the serif notice display k1 and “suitable for Daifuku” in the serif notice display k2 are deleted. These character string images are erased at the same time, but either one may be erased first.

  FIG. 20 (12) shows a state in which the mini game displays o1 and o2 are erased. These displays are erased at the same time, but either one may be erased first.

  FIG. 20 (13) shows a state in which the deletion animation of the line notice indications k1 and k2 is started. The erase animation of the serif notices k1 and k2 is displayed in a display in which the scroll is wound.

  FIG. 20 (14) shows a state in which the scrolls of the serif notice indications k1 and k2 are completely wound. The serif notices k1 and k2 are erased after being completely wound.

  FIG. 20 (15) shows a state in which the line notice notices k1 and k2 are deleted. In this example, a character (in this example, 婆 m1, m2) and character name display n1, n2, a character string image of lines (in this example, “tea is delicious”, “suitable for Daifuku”), mini game display O1, o2, and serif notice display k1, k2 are deleted in this order. Note that these erasing orders can be arbitrarily set.

  FIG. 20 (16) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped (swaying fluctuation display) in a manner in which “decoration 6” slightly swings up and down in the left symbol display area 208 a. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 20 (17) shows a state in which “decoration 8” is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner in which the “decoration 8” slightly swings up and down in the right symbol display area 208 c. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 8” indicate that “decoration 8” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 20 (18) shows a state where “decoration 5” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208 b in a manner that slightly swings up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 5” indicate that “decoration 5” slightly fluctuates up and down. In the frame display surrounding “decoration 5”, a character image of a frog is displayed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6—decoration 5—decoration 8” which is a shifted symbol form is temporarily displayed.

  FIG. 20 (19) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of date ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6—decoration 5—decoration 8”, which is an outlier design mode indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful, is stopped. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination “6-5-8” is stopped and displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present example derives the hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image as a result of the mini game by the mini game display o1 started in association with a certain type of notice notice display k1. Then, the display of the notice advance notice k2 is started. The serif notice display of this example is a notice notice display of “NO03” shown in FIG. The result of the mini game on the mini game display o1 can be derived without operating the chance button 136.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 21 (1) to (20) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 21 (1) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7” in the case of a loss is shown, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct. Stop is displayed. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “2-4-7” is stopped and displayed in the fifth symbol display area h. In the state shown in FIG. 21 (1), the hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in the circular form of aspect 1.

  In FIG. 21 (2), the special symbol 1 variable game is started by the special graphic 1 display device 212 (not shown), and the decorative symbol variable display, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol variable display are started. The state is shown. Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e1 and the change icon. Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 21 (2), the hold icon reduction animation is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icon f2 is completed.

  FIG. 21 (3) shows a state in which the display j3 is displayed during the execution of the special figure variable game. The display j3 is a display that can specify the mode of the serif notice display k3 before the display of the serif notice display k3 shown in FIG. The display j3 is moved and displayed from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower right. In the figure, a downward-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the display j3 represents the locus and the moving direction of the display j3. The display j3 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed in a transparent manner, and the lower half is displayed in the form 1. The mode 1 in the lower half of the display j3 corresponds to the mode of the serif notice display k3 started in FIG. 21 (4) described later, and the display j3 is a display related to the mode of the serif notice display. The serif notice display k3 is a look-ahead notice display. With the display j3, the player can know the mode of the serif notice display k3 before the display of the serif notice display k3 is started.

  FIG. 21 (4) shows a state in which the display of the dialog notice display k3 is started. In this example, after the display j3 is erased, the display of the dialog notice display k3 is started. The serif notice display k3 is a scroll picture, and the serif notice display k3 is displayed as a picture in which the scroll is wound at the beginning of display. Further, the serif notice display k3 is an aspect of aspect 1.

  FIG. 21 (5) shows a state in which a serif notice display k3 is displayed in an animation in which the scroll is opened in the right direction.

  FIG. 21 (6) shows a state in which a serif notice display k3 in which the scroll is completely opened is displayed. The serif notice display k3 in which the scroll is completely opened has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the character's serif is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the balloon display of the serif notice display k3 is mode 1.

  FIG. 21 (7) shows a state in which a character name display n3 including a character image of “girl” and a girl m3 is displayed overlapping the left end portion of the line notice display k3. The serif notice display k3 may be a display including the girl m3 and the character name display n3.

  FIG. 21 (8) shows a state where the display of the mini game display o1 is started. In this example, the mini game display o1 is displayed, but the mini game by the mini game display o1 is not started. When the mini game is not started, the mini game display o1 may not be displayed.

  FIG. 21 (9) shows a state in which a character string image of “blue preparation” is displayed in the serif notice display k 3. The character string image of “blue preparation” is a character display of the character display representing the line of the girl m3.

  FIG. 21 (10) shows a state in which the mode of the hold icon f2 is changed from the mode 1 circle to the mode 3 circle. The character string image of “blue preparation” in the serif notice display k3 is a display for notifying that the mode of the hold icon changes to the mode 3. Further, even after the character string image is displayed in the serif notice display k3, the mini game by the mini game display o1 is not performed.

  FIG. 21 (11) shows a state where the girl m3 and the character name display n3 are deleted. In this example, the girl 婆 m3 and the character name display n3 are erased at the same time, but one of these displays may be erased first.

  FIG. 21 (12) shows a state where the character string image of “blue preparation” in the serif notice display k 3 has been deleted.

  FIG. 21 (13) shows a state where the mini game display o1 is deleted.

  FIG. 21 (14) shows a state in which the erase animation of the speech notice display k3 is started. The erase animation of the serif notice display k3 displays a display in which the scroll is wound leftward.

  FIG. 21 (15) shows a state where the scroll of the serif notice display k3 is completely wound. The serif notice display k3 is erased after being completely wound.

  FIG. 21 (16) shows a state where the serif notice display k3 is deleted. In this example, the character (in this example, girl m3) and the character name display n3, the character string image of the line (in this example, “blue preparation”), the mini game display o1, and the line notice display k3 are deleted in this order. . Note that these erasing orders can be arbitrarily set.

  FIG. 21 (17) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped (swaying fluctuation display) in a manner in which “decoration 6” slightly swings up and down in the left symbol display area 208 a. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 21 (18) shows a state in which “decoration 8” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c in such a manner that it slightly swings up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 8” indicate that “decoration 8” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 21 (19) shows a state in which “decoration 5” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208 b so as to slightly swing up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 5” indicate that “decoration 5” slightly fluctuates up and down. In the frame display surrounding “decoration 5”, a character image of a frog is displayed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6—decoration 5—decoration 8” which is a shifted symbol form is temporarily displayed.

  FIG. 21 (20) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of date ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6—decoration 5—decoration 8”, which is an outlier design mode indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful, is stopped. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination “6-5-8” is stopped and displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present example can display a serif notice display k3 as a display of a certain kind of serif notice. The serif notice display k3 is a display including a certain character display (in this example, “blue preparation”) among the character displays representing the lines of the girl m3. Further, the serif notice display k3 is a display as a prefetch notice, and is a notice notice display of “NO18” shown in FIG. The mini game by the mini game display o1 is not executed in association with the serif notice display k3 which is the pre-read notice display.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 22 (1) to FIG. 24 (9) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 22 (1) shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7” in the case of a loss is shown, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct. Stop is displayed. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “2-4-7” is stopped and displayed in the fifth symbol display area h. Further, in the state shown in FIG. 22 (1), the hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in a circular form of aspect 1.

  In FIG. 22 (2), the special symbol 1 display device 212 (not shown) starts the special symbol 1 variable game, and the decorative symbol variable display, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol variable display are started. Shows the state. Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e1 and the change icon. Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 22 (2), the hold icon reduction animation is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icon f2 is completed.

  FIG. 22 (3) shows a state in which the display j4 that can specify the mode of the serif notice display is displayed before the display of the serif notice display is started. The display j4 is moved and displayed from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower right. In the drawing, a downward-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the display j4 represents the locus and the moving direction of the display j4. The display j4 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed in a transparent manner, and the lower half is displayed in an aspect 4. The lower half mode 4 of the display j4 corresponds to the mode 4 of the serif notice display k4 started in FIG. 22 (4) described later, and the display j4 is a display related to the mode of the serif notice display. The serif notice display is a notice display of the change, and the jackpot reliability is set according to the mode. With the display j4, the player can know the mode of the line notice display before the line notice display is started.

  FIG. 22 (4) shows a state in which the display of the dialog notice display k4 is started. In this example, after the display j4 is erased, the display of the dialog notice display k4 is started. The serif notice display k4 is a picture of a scroll, and the serif notice display k4 is displayed as a picture in a state where the scroll is wound at the beginning of display. Further, the serif notice display k4 is an aspect of aspect 4.

  FIG. 22 (5) shows a state in which the serif notice display k4 is displayed as an animation in which the scroll opens in the right direction.

  FIG. 22 (6) shows a state where a serif notice display k 4 in which the scroll is completely opened is displayed. The serif notice display k4 in which the scroll is completely opened has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the character's serif is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the speech balloon display of the serif notice display k4 is mode 4.

  In FIG. 22 (7), a character name display n4 including a princess character image (hereinafter referred to as “princess”) m4 and a character image of “princess” is displayed overlapping the left end portion of the line notice display k4. It shows the state that was done. The serif notice display k4 may be a display including the princess m4 and the character name display n4.

  FIG. 22 (8) shows a state where the display of the mini game display o1 is started. In this example, the mini game display o1 is displayed on the right side in the serif notice display k4 so as to overlap the serif notice display k4.

  FIG. 22 (9) shows a state in which a character string image “Now” is displayed in the line notice display k 4. The character string image of “Now” is a character display of the character display representing the line of the princess m4. In the state shown in FIG. 22 (9), the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. In this example, the mini-game is started after the character string image is displayed in the serif notice display k4. The start of the movement of the arrow image is the start of the mini game.

  FIG. 22 (10) shows a state in which a mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image has moved to the right.

  FIG. 22 (11) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image has moved to the right.

  FIG. 22 (12) shows a state where the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image has moved to the right.

  FIG. 22 (13) shows a state in which a mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image is just before stopping.

  FIG. 22 (14) shows a state in which the mini game based on the mini game display o1 is completed. The stop of the arrow image on the mini game display o1 is the end of the mini game. Since the arrow image of the mini game display o1 is stopped above the aspect 5 circular image, the result of the mini game is a winning corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and a winning corresponding to the aspect 5 circular image. The hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is the start of the second serif notice display, and the hit corresponding to the aspect 5 circular image is the aspect of the second serif notice display. In this example, when the winning results corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and the aspect 5 circular image are derived as a result of the mini-game, as shown in FIG. Is displayed. The serif notice display of this example is a notice notice display of “NO16” shown in FIG.

  FIG. 22 (15) shows a state in which the display j5 that can specify the mode of the serif notice display k5 is displayed before the serif notice display k5 that is the second serif notice display is started. The display j5 is moved and displayed from the vicinity of the aspect 4 circular image of the mini game display o1 to the upper right. The display j5 of this example appears from the vicinity of the aspect 4 circular image of the mini game display o1 and starts to be displayed. In the figure, an upper right arrow shown at the lower left of the display j5 represents the locus and the moving direction of the display j5. The display j5 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed in a transparent manner, and the lower half is displayed in the form 5. The lower half mode 5 of the display j5 corresponds to the mode of the serif notice display k5 started in FIG. 22 (16) described later, and the display j5 is a display related to the mode of the serif notice display k5. The serif notice display k5 is a notice display of the change, and the jackpot reliability is set according to the mode. With the display j5, the player can know the mode of the speech advance notice display before the display of the notice advance notice k5 is started.

  FIG. 22 (16) shows a state in which the display of the notice advance notice k5 is started. In this example, after the display j5 is erased, the display of the dialog notice display k5 is started. The serif notice display k5 is a scroll pattern, and the serif notice display k5 is displayed as a scrolled picture at the beginning of display. Further, the serif notice display k5 is an aspect of aspect 5.

  FIG. 22 (17) shows a state where the serif notice display k <b> 5 is displayed in an animation in which the scroll opens leftward.

  FIG. 22 (18) shows a state where a serif notice display k5 in which the scroll is completely opened is displayed. The serif notice display k5 in which the scroll is completely opened has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the character's serif is displayed in the rectangle. The speech balloon display mode of the speech notice display k5 is mode 5.

  In FIG. 22 (19), a character image display n5 including a character image of “dono” (hereinafter referred to as “dono”) m5 and a character name display “n” including the character image of “dono” is displayed overlapping the right end portion of the line notice display k5. Is done. The serif notice display k5 may be a display including a lord m5 and a character name display n5.

  FIG. 22 (20) shows a state where the display of the mini game display o2 is started. In this example, the mini game display o2 is displayed on the left side in the serif notice display k5 so as to overlap the serif notice display k5. In addition, a character string image of “strategy start” is displayed in the serif notice display k5. The character string image of “strategy is start” is a character display of the character display indicating the line of the m5.

  FIG. 22 (21) shows a state where a mini game is started by the mini game display o2.

  FIG. 22 (22) shows a state in which a mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image has moved to the left.

  FIG. 22 (23) shows a state where the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image has moved to the left.

  FIG. 22 (24) shows a state where the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image has moved to the left.

  FIG. 22 (25) shows a state in which the mini game with the mini game display o2 is completed. In this example, since the arrow image of the mini game display o2 stops above the leftmost aspect 5 circular image, the result of the mini game corresponds to the hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and the aspect 5 circular image. Earn per hit. The hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is that one gauge image g3 is accumulated, and the hit corresponding to the aspect 5 circular image is that one gauge image g3 is accumulated. When the winning results corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and the aspect 5 circular image are derived as a result of the mini game, an effect display in which two gauge images g3 are accumulated is started as shown in FIG. The

  FIG. 22 (26) shows a state in which the effect display in which two gauge images g3 are accumulated is started. An animation in which the p1 and p2 move from the circular image of the aspect 5 circular image of the mini game display o2 to the gauge image g3 is displayed. In the figure, a lower right arrow shown in the upper left of the ridges p1 and p2 indicates the trajectory and moving direction of the ridges p1 and p2.

  FIG. 22 (27) shows a state in which the effect display in which two gauge images g3 are accumulated is completed. Two segment images of the gauge image g3 are displayed in red, and two gauge images g3 are accumulated.

  FIG. 22 (28) shows a state where two gauge images g3 are accumulated.

  FIG. 23 (1) shows a state continued from FIG. 22 (28), and shows a state where the princess m4, the character name display n4, the lord m5, and the character name display n5 are deleted. In this example, these displays are erased at the same time, but these displays may be erased in any order.

  FIG. 23 (2) shows a state in which the character string image of “finally” in the serif notice display k4 and “operation start” in the serif notice display k5 are deleted. These character string images are erased at the same time, but either one may be erased first.

  FIG. 23 (3) shows a state where the mini game displays o1 and o2 are erased. These displays are erased at the same time, but either one may be erased first.

  FIG. 23 (4) shows a state in which the erase animation of the line notice notices k4 and k5 is started. In the erase animation of the serif advance notices k4 and k5, an indication that the scroll is wound is displayed.

  FIG. 23 (5) shows a state where the scrolls of the serif notices k4 and k5 are completely wound. The serif notice indications k4 and k5 are erased after being completely wound.

  FIG. 23 (6) shows a state in which the line preview notices k4 and k5 are deleted. In this example, a character (in this example, princess m4, lord m5) and character name display n4, n5, a character string image (in this example, “Now”, “Operation start”), mini game display o1, It is erased in the order of o2 and serif notice display k4, k5. Note that these erasing orders can be arbitrarily set.

  FIG. 23 (7) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation display) in a manner in which “decoration 6” slightly swings up and down in the left symbol display area 208 a. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 23 (8) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208 c so as to slightly swing up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 23 (9) shows a state in which the normal reach effect is started. During the normal reach effect and the super reach effect described later, the decorative symbol variation display in the symbol display areas 208a to 208 is deleted. A liquor barrel image is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is suggested that a normal reach effect compared to drinking is started when a final display of the liquor barrel image is performed.

  FIG. 23 (10) shows a state in which an enemy character image (hereinafter referred to as “enemy”) is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 without the final display of the sake barrel image. . It is suggested that the normal reach production of enemy annihilation starts when the enemy confirmation display is performed.

  FIG. 23 (11) shows a state in which the enemy image is not displayed and the boss character image (hereinafter referred to as “boss”) is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is suggested that the normal reach production of the boss confrontation is started when the boss confirmation display is performed.

  FIG. 23 (12) shows a state where the confirmation display of the boss is performed. In the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of “boss confrontation reach” is displayed in a rectangular frame display, and a part of the frame display is overlapped to display the boss. Has been.

  FIG. 23 (13) shows a state in which the boss confrontation reach is started. A character string image of “-Development with victory over the boss” is displayed in the upper part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is suggested that when the boss wins the boss, the super reach production starts. Has been. During normal reach production such as boss confrontation reach, the special figure 1 hold icon display area f and all special figure 1 hold icons (in this example, the hold icon f1) are erased.

  FIG. 23 (14) shows a state in which an effect display in which one gauge image g3 is accumulated is started during the boss confrontation reach. The gauge images g1 to g3 may accumulate irregularly. An animation is displayed in which the p3 that appears in the upper left part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the gauge image g3. In the figure, the arrow shown above the ridge p3 indicates the locus and movement direction of the ridge p3.

  FIG. 23 (15) shows a state where the effect display in which one gauge image g3 is accumulated is finished. Three segment images of the gauge image g3 are displayed in red, and the gauge image g3 is full. A character string image “Preparation OK” is displayed above the gauge image g3.

  FIG. 23 (16) shows a state where the player has won the boss confrontation reach. A character string image of “win” is displayed at the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a lost boss is displayed below the character string image.

  FIG. 23 (17) shows a state in which the start effect of the strong button effect is started. The strong button effect is an effect that prompts the player to press the chance button 136 whose pressing surface protrudes upward, and the start effect of the strong button effect is an effect that is performed before the strong button effect is started. In the start effect of the strong button effect, four wavy effect images are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 23 (18) shows a state in which the start effect of the strong button effect is being performed. An animation is displayed in which an effect image having an elliptical shape and a jagged edge jumps out from the gauge image g3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the drawing, the arrow shown above the gauge image g3 represents the locus and moving direction of the jagged effect image.

  FIG. 23 (19) shows a state in which a button image simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image indicating the operation effective period of the chance button 136 are displayed below and a strong button effect is started. The pressing surface of the chance button 136 protrudes upward, and the button image is displayed in a manner corresponding to a state where the pressing surface of the chance button 136 protrudes upward. Further, the button image is displayed in the form of aspect 5. In addition, a downward arrow image and a character string image of “Press!” Are displayed above the button image, and the chance button 136 emits light in the mode 5, and the pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. Further, the entire segment-like image of the gauge image g3 is displayed in black, and a character string image of “completed” is displayed overlapping the segment-like image, and the gauge image g3 is fully filled. It is notified that the button production has started.

  FIG. 23 (20) shows a state in which the operation valid period is started. The meter of the meter image indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period has decreased.

  FIG. 23 (21) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed during the operation effective period. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed during the strong button effect, the movable body 700 emits light in the aspect 5, moves upward, and stops. In the strong button effect, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation effective period, the operation effective period ends.

  FIG. 23 (22) shows a state in which the movable body 702 has moved downward and the movable portions 702a and 702b have moved left and right. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed during the strong button effect, the movable body 702 emits light in the aspect 5, moves downward, and stops.

  FIG. 23 (23) shows a state in which the swordsman reach of super reach production is started after the movable bodies 700 and 702 are moved to the initial positions. The movable bodies 700 and 702 are turned on in the mode 1 after moving to the initial position. In the swordsman reach production, the background image of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is night, and a crescent moon image is displayed in the upper left of the display area. In addition, a character string image of “Swordsman Reach” is displayed in a rectangular frame display at the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. A character image of a swordsman (hereinafter referred to as “swordsman”) is displayed.

  FIG. 23 (24) shows a state in which a swordsman's reach performance is being performed.

  FIG. 23 (25) shows a state where a balloon display is displayed. The balloon display is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular shape below the lord and the swordsman, and is an aspect of aspect 1. In the balloon display, a character string image of “[Swordsman] Fufufu” is displayed as a dialogue display of the swordsman.

  FIG. 23 (26) shows a state in which a balloon display is displayed. The balloon display is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular shape below the lord and the swordsman, and is an aspect of aspect 1. In the balloon display, a character string image of “[Mr.

  FIG. 23 (27) shows a state in which an animation in which the sword and the swordsman cut each other is displayed.

FIG. 23 (28) shows a state in which the button introduction animation is displayed. The button introduction animation is an effect display that may be displayed before the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. In the button introduction animation of this example, for example, an animation in which button images q1 and q2 having a transmittance of 50% move from the left and right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the center of the display area is displayed.

  FIG. 24 (1) shows a state continued from FIG. 23 (28), and shows a state where a button introduction animation is displayed. The button images q1 and q2 have moved to the vicinity of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button introduction animation of this example ends when the button images q1 and q2 completely overlap.

  FIG. 24 (2) shows a state where the button introduction animation is finished. After the button images q1 and q2 overlap, a button image and a meter image indicating the operation effective period are displayed below the button image. In addition, a downward arrow image and a character string image of “Press!” Are displayed on the upper part of the button image, the chance button 136 emits light in the mode 5, and the pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. Further, the button image is displayed in the form of aspect 5.

  FIG. 24 (3) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. The meter of the meter image indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period has decreased.

  FIG. 24 (4) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the button image and the meter image are deleted, and the result of the swordsman reach is displayed. In this example, since the lord loses to the swordsman, an animation that the lord falls is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation effective period of this example, the operation effective period ends.

  FIG. 24 (5) shows a state in which the display of the decorative symbol variation display is resumed and “decoration 8” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b in a manner that slightly fluctuates up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 8” indicate that “decoration 8” slightly fluctuates up and down. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6—decoration 8—decoration 6” which is a shifted symbol form is temporarily displayed.

  FIG. 24 (6) shows a state where the wipe effect display is displayed. In the wipe effect display of this example, the wipe display is displayed so as to wipe off areas other than the fifth symbol display area of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the wipe display of this example includes a rider riding a motorcycle and a character string image of “CR XXXX (for example, the title name of the pachinko machine 100)”.

  FIG. 24 (7) shows a state where the wipe effect display is displayed. During the wipe effect display, an animation is displayed in which the rider on the motorcycle moves from left to right.

  FIG. 24 (8) shows a state in which the wipe effect display is finished. The erase of the wipe display is the end of the wipe effect display. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of the sun pattern and a background image corresponding to the sunny stage are displayed.

  FIG. 24 (9) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of date ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6—decoration 8—decoration 6”, which is an off symbol pattern indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful, is stopped. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination “6-8-6” is stopped and displayed.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present example derives the hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image as a result of the mini game by the mini game display o1 started in association with a certain type of notice notice display k1. Then, the display of the notice advance notice k2 is started. The serif notice display of this example is a notice notice display of “NO16” shown in FIG. The result of the mini game on the mini game display o1 can be derived without operating the chance button 136.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 24 (10) to 24 (15) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 24 (10) shows a state continued from FIG. 22 (21).

  FIG. 24 (10) shows a state in which a mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image has moved to the left.

  FIG. 24 (11) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image has moved to the left.

  FIG. 24 (12) shows a state where the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image is in the state just before stopping.

  FIG. 24 (13) shows a state in which the mini game with the mini game display o2 is completed. In this example, since the arrow image of the mini game display o2 stops above the third aspect 1 circular image from the right, the result of the mini game is a win corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image. The hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is that one gauge image g3 is accumulated. In this example, when the winning result corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is derived as a result of the mini game, an effect display in which two gauge images g3 are accumulated as shown in FIG. 24 (14) described later is started.

  FIG. 24 (14) shows a state in which the effect display in which one gauge image g3 is accumulated is started. An animation in which the p1 p4 moves from the circular image of the aspect 1 circular image of the mini game display o2 to the gauge image g3 is displayed. In the drawing, a downward-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the ridge p4 indicates the locus and movement direction of the ridge p4.

  FIG. 24 (15) shows a state where the effect display in which one gauge image g3 is accumulated is finished. One segment image of the gauge image g3 is displayed in red, and one gauge image g3 is accumulated. Thus, in the mini game based on the mini game display o2, there is a case where the arrow image stops on the third aspect 1 circular image from the left and the winning corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is obtained.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 (1) to 25 (11) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 25 (1) shows a state where the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7” in the case of a loss is shown, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct. Stop is displayed. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “2-4-7” is stopped and displayed in the fifth symbol display area h. In addition, the hold icons f1 and f2 having the circular form 1 are displayed.

  In FIG. 25 (2), as the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown) starts the special figure 1 variable game, the decorative symbol variable display, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol variable display are started. Shows the state. The downward arrows shown in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c indicate a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, and the downward arrows illustrated in the fifth symbol display region h indicate the fifth symbol variation display. Indicates the displayed state. Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e1 and the change icon. Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 25 (2), the hold icon reduction animation is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icon f2 is completed.

  FIG. 25 (3) shows a state in which the step-up notice is started. The step-up notice is a notice of the change. In the step-up notice in this example, the character images are sequentially switched, and when a certain character image is stopped and displayed, an effect display next to the step-up notice is started. In FIG. 25 (3), a character image of Princess Chibi (hereinafter referred to as “Chibi Princess”) r1 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a character string image of “SU1” is displayed above it. ing. “SU1” indicates Step 1 of the step-up notice.

  FIG. 25 (4) shows a state in which the step-up notice is being executed. In place of the little princess r1 on the right side of the center of the display area of the decorative design display device 208, a character image (hereinafter referred to as “爺”) r2 of a frog and a character string image of “SU2” are displayed above it. . “SU2” indicates step 2 of the step-up notice.

  FIG. 25 (5) shows a state in which a step-up notice is being executed. A princess r3 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the heel r2, and a character string image of “SU3” is displayed above the princess r3. “SU3” indicates that step 3 is a step-up notice.

  FIG. 25 (6) shows a state in which the step-up notice is being executed. Instead of the princess r3 on the right side of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a princess r4 and a character string image of “SU4” are displayed above it. “SU4” indicates step 4 of the step-up notice.

  FIG. 25 (7) shows a state in which the step-up notice is finished. In the step-up advance notice in this example, the stop display is not performed for a certain character image, so the effect display following the step-up advance notice is not started.

  FIG. 25 (8) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped (swaying fluctuation display) in a manner in which “decoration 6” slightly swings up and down in the left symbol display area 208a. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 25 (9) shows a state in which “decoration 8” is temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode in which the “decoration 8” slightly swings up and down in the right symbol display area 208c. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 8” indicate that “decoration 8” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 25 (10) shows a state in which “decoration 5” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b in a manner that slightly swings up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 5” indicate that “decoration 5” slightly fluctuates up and down. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6—decoration 5—decoration 8” which is a shifted symbol form is temporarily displayed.

  FIG. 25 (11) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of date ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6—decoration 5—decoration 8”, which is an outlier design mode indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful, is stopped. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination “6-5-8” is stopped and displayed.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 25 (12) to 26 (22). FIG. 25 (12) to FIG. 26 (22) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 25 (12) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7” in the case of a loss is shown, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct. Stop is displayed. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “2-4-7” is stopped and displayed in the fifth symbol display area h. In addition, the hold icons f1 and f2 having the circular form 1 are displayed.

  In FIG. 25 (13), the special symbol 1 display device 212 (not shown) starts the special symbol 1 variable game, and the decorative symbol variable display, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol variable display are started. Shows the state. The downward arrows shown in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c indicate a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, and the downward arrows illustrated in the fifth symbol display region h indicate the fifth symbol variation display. Indicates the displayed state. Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e1 and the change icon. Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. In the state shown in FIG. 25 (13), the hold icon reduction animation is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icon f2 is completed.

  FIG. 25 (14) shows a state in which the step-up notice is started. Princess Chibi r1 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the character string image “SU1” is displayed above it. “SU1” indicates Step 1 of the step-up notice.

  FIG. 25 (15) shows a state in which a step-up notice is being executed. In place of the little princess r1 on the right side of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a heel r2 and a character string image of “SU2” are displayed above it. “SU2” indicates step 2 of the step-up notice.

  FIG. 25 (16) shows a state in which the step-up notice is being executed. A princess r3 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the heel r2, and a character string image of “SU3” is displayed above the princess r3. “SU3” indicates that step 3 is a step-up notice.

  FIG. 25 (17) shows a state in which the step-up notice is being executed. Instead of the princess r3 on the right side of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a princess r4 and a character string image of “SU4” are displayed above it. “SU4” indicates step 4 of the step-up notice. In the present example, since the step 4 of the step 4 is stopped and displayed, the next effect display of the step-up notice is started. In addition, if it progresses to step 4 of step-up, it will become easy to perform a swordsman reach in the said special figure fluctuation game.

  FIG. 25 (18) shows a state in which the dialogue advance notice display is started as the effect display next to the step up notice. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol r4 and a serif notice display s1 are displayed. In the serif notice display s1, a character string image of “I will come to mind” is displayed as a serif of r4. Further, the serif notice display s1 is an aspect of aspect 5. The serif notice display s1 is a different kind of serif notice display from the serif notice display shown in FIG. Further, the serif notice display s1 and the lord r4 are notice notices of the change.

  FIG. 25 (19) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation display) in a manner in which “decoration 6” slightly swings up and down in the left symbol display area 208 a. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 25 (20) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner in which the “decoration 6” slightly swings up and down in the right symbol display area 208c. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 25 (21) shows a state in which the normal reach effect is started. During the normal reach effect and the super reach effect described later, the decorative symbol variation display in the symbol display areas 208a to 208 is deleted. A liquor barrel image is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is suggested that a normal reach effect compared to drinking is started when a final display of the liquor barrel image is performed.

  FIG. 25 (22) shows a state in which the enemy character image (hereinafter referred to as “enemy”) is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 without the sake barrel image being displayed. . It is suggested that the normal reach production of enemy annihilation starts when the enemy confirmation display is performed.

  FIG. 25 (23) shows a state in which the enemy image is not displayed and the boss character image (hereinafter referred to as “boss”) is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is suggested that the normal reach production of the boss confrontation is started when the boss confirmation display is performed.

  FIG. 25 (24) shows a state where the confirmation display of the boss is performed. In the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of “boss confrontation reach” is displayed in a rectangular frame display, and a part of the frame display is overlapped to display the boss. Has been.

  FIG. 25 (25) shows a state in which the boss confrontation reach is started. A character string image of “-Development with victory over the boss” is displayed in the upper part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is suggested that when the boss wins the boss, the super reach production starts. Has been. During normal reach production such as boss confrontation reach, the special figure 1 hold icon display area f and all special figure 1 hold icons (in this example, the hold icon f1) are erased.

  FIG. 26 (1) shows a state continued from FIG. 25 (25), and shows a state in which a boss confrontation reach effect is being executed.

  FIG. 26 (2) shows a state where the boss confrontation reach is won. A character string image of “win” is displayed at the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a lost boss is displayed below the character string image.

  FIG. 26 (3) shows a state where the start effect of the button effect is started. The button effect is an effect that prompts the player to press the chance button 136, and the start effect of the button effect is an effect that is performed before the button effect is started. In the start effect of the button effect, four wavy effect images are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 26 (4) shows a state in which a strong button effect is started by displaying a button image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image indicating the operation valid period of the chance button 136 below the button image. In addition, a downward arrow image and a character string image of “Press!” Are displayed above the button image. The chance button 136 emits light in the mode 5 and the pressing of the chance button 136 is prompted.

  FIG. 26 (5) shows a state in which the operation valid period is started. The meter of the meter image indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period has decreased.

  FIG. 26 (6) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed during the operation effective period. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed during the button production, the movable body 700 emits light in the aspect 5, moves upward, and stops. In the button effect of this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation effective period, the operation effective period ends.

  FIG. 26 (7) shows a state in which the movable body 702 has moved downward and the movable portions 702a and 702b have moved left and right. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed during the button effect, the movable body 702 emits light in the mode 5 and moves downward to stop.

  FIG. 26 (8) shows a state in which the super reach production swordsman reach is started after the movable bodies 700 and 702 are moved to the initial positions. The movable bodies 700 and 702 are turned on in the mode 1 after moving to the initial position. In the swordsman reach production, the background image of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is night, and a crescent moon image is displayed in the upper left of the display area. In addition, a character string image of “Swordsman Reach” is displayed in a rectangular frame display at the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Shows a swordsman.

  FIG. 26 (9) shows a state in which the reach effect of the swordsman is being performed.

  FIG. 26 (10) shows a state where a balloon display is displayed. The balloon display is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular shape below the lord and the swordsman, and is an aspect of aspect 1. In the balloon display, a character string image of “[Swordsman] Fufufu” is displayed as a dialogue display of the swordsman.

  FIG. 26 (11) shows a state in which a balloon display is displayed. The balloon display is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular shape below the lord and the swordsman, and is an aspect of aspect 1. In the balloon display, a character string image of “[Mr.

  FIG. 26 (12) shows a state in which an animation in which the swordsman and the swordsman cut each other is displayed.

FIG. 26 (13) shows a state in which the button introduction animation is displayed. The button introduction animation is an effect display that may be displayed before the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. In the button introduction animation of this example, for example, an animation in which button images q1 and q2 having a transmittance of 50% move from the left and right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the center of the display area is displayed.

  FIG. 26 (14) shows a state where the button introduction animation is displayed. The button images q1 and q2 have moved to the vicinity of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The button introduction animation of this example ends when the button images q1 and q2 completely overlap.

  FIG. 26 (15) shows a state where the button introduction animation is finished. After the button images q1 and q2 overlap, a button image and a meter image indicating the operation effective period are displayed below the button image. In addition, a downward arrow image and a character string image of “Press!” Are displayed on the upper part of the button image, the chance button 136 emits light in the mode 5, and the pressing of the chance button 136 is urged. Further, the button image is displayed in the form of aspect 5.

  FIG. 26 (16) shows a state in which the operation valid period of the chance button 136 has been started. The meter of the meter image indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period has decreased.

  FIG. 26 (17) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the button image and the meter image are deleted, and the result of the swordsman reach is displayed. In this example, since the lord loses to the swordsman, an animation that the lord falls is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation effective period of this example, the operation effective period ends.

  FIG. 26 (18) shows a state in which the display of the variation display of the decorative symbol is resumed and “decoration 8” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b in a manner that slightly swings up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 8” indicate that “decoration 8” slightly fluctuates up and down. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6—decoration 8—decoration 6” which is a shifted symbol form is temporarily displayed.

  FIG. 26 (19) shows a state where the wipe effect display is displayed. In the wipe effect display of this example, the wipe display is displayed so as to wipe off areas other than the fifth symbol display area of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Further, the wipe display of this example includes a rider riding a motorcycle and a character string image of “CR XXXX (for example, the title name of the pachinko machine 100)”.

  FIG. 26 (20) shows a state where the wipe effect display is displayed. During the wipe effect display, an animation is displayed in which the rider on the motorcycle moves from left to right.

  FIG. 26 (21) shows a state where the wipe effect display is finished. The erase of the wipe display is the end of the wipe effect display. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of the sun pattern and a background image corresponding to the sunny stage are displayed.

  FIG. 26 (22) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of date ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6—decoration 8—decoration 6”, which is an off symbol pattern indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful, is stopped. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination “6-8-6” is stopped and displayed.

  The pachinko machine 100 of this example may be configured to start display of a speech advance notice such as a speech advance notice s1 for a step-up advance notice as a response display of the operation of the chance button 136 or the chance button 700. In this case, if the operation of the chance button 136 or the chance button 700 is performed in a state where the button image (operation display) representing the appearance of the chance button 136 or the chance button 700 is displayed, a step-up notice is given as a response display. A serif notice display may be started. In this case, there are cases where serif notice displays k1, k2, k4, k5, etc. are displayed, and at least a part of the serif notice displays such as serif notice displays k1, k2, k4, k5, etc. are displayed as operation indications. Is overlapped by.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 27 (1) to 29 (9), an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 27 (1) to 29 (9) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 27 (1) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7” in the case of a loss is shown, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct. Stop is displayed. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “2-4-7” is stopped and displayed in the fifth symbol display area h. A hold icon f1, f2 is displayed in a circular form.

  In FIG. 27 (2), in accordance with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), the decorative display of the variable display, the fourth graphic, and the fifth graphic of the variable display are started. Shows the state. Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e1 and the change icon. Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f. The hold icon decreasing animation is finished, and the movement of the fluctuation icon e1 and the hold icon f2 is completed.

  FIG. 27 (3) shows a state in which the display j4 that can specify the mode of the serif notice display is displayed before the serif notice display is started. The display j4 is moved and displayed from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower right. In the drawing, a downward-pointing arrow shown at the upper left of the display j4 represents the locus and the moving direction of the display j4. The display j4 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed in a transparent manner, and the lower half is displayed in an aspect 4. A mode 4 in the lower half of the display j4 corresponds to a mode of a serif notice display k4 started in FIG. 27 (4) described later, and the display j4 is a display related to the mode of the serif notice display. The serif notice display is a notice display of the change, and the jackpot reliability is set according to the mode. With the display j4, the player can know the mode of the line notice display before the line notice display is started.

  FIG. 27 (4) shows a state in which the display of the dialog notice display k4 is started. In this example, after the display j4 is erased, the display of the dialog notice display k4 is started. The serif notice display k4 is a picture of a scroll, and the serif notice display k4 is displayed as a picture in a state where the scroll is wound at the beginning of display. Further, the serif notice display k4 is an aspect of aspect 4.

  FIG. 27 (5) shows a state in which the serif notice display k4 is displayed in an animation in which the scroll is opened in the right direction.

  FIG. 27 (6) shows a state in which a serif notice display k4 in which the scroll is completely opened is displayed. The serif notice display k4 in which the scroll is completely opened has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the character's serif is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the speech balloon display of the serif notice display k4 is mode 4.

  FIG. 27 (7) shows a state where a character name display n4 including a princess m4 and a character image of “princess” is displayed overlapping the left end portion of the serif notice display k4. The serif notice display k4 may be a display including the princess m4 and the character name display n4.

  FIG. 27 (8) shows a state where the display of the mini game display o1 is started. In this example, the mini game display o1 is displayed on the right side in the serif notice display k4 so as to overlap the serif notice display k4.

  FIG. 27 (9) shows a state in which a character string image “Now” is displayed in the line notice display k 4. The character string image of “Now” is a character display of the character display representing the line of the princess m4. In the state shown in FIG. 27 (9), the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. In this example, the mini-game is started after the character string image is displayed in the serif notice display k4. The start of the movement of the arrow image is the start of the mini game.

  FIG. 27 (10) shows a state in which a mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image has moved to the right.

  FIG. 27 (11) shows a state in which a mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image has moved to the right.

  FIG. 27 (12) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image has moved to the right.

  FIG. 27 (13) shows a state in which the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image is just before stopping.

  FIG. 27 (14) shows a state in which the mini game with the mini game display o1 is completed. The stop of the arrow image on the mini game display o1 is the end of the mini game. Since the mini-game display o1 is stopped above the aspect 5 circular image of the arrow image, the result of the mini game is a winning corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and a winning corresponding to the aspect 5 circular image. The hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is the start of the second serif notice display, and the hit corresponding to the aspect 5 circular image is the aspect of the second serif notice display. In this example, when the winning results corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and the aspect 5 circular image are derived as a result of the mini-game, as shown in FIG. Is displayed. The serif notice display of this example is a notice notice display of “NO16” shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 27 (14), step-up notice is started. Princess Chibi r1 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the character string image “SU1” is displayed above it. As described above, the step-up notice may be performed during the display of the line notice display.

  FIG. 27 (15) shows a state where the display j5 that can specify the mode of the serif notice display k5 is displayed before the serif notice display k5 that is the second serif notice display is started. The display j5 is moved and displayed from the vicinity of the aspect 4 circular image of the mini game display o1 to the upper right. The display j5 of this example appears from the vicinity of the aspect 4 circular image of the mini game display o1 and starts to be displayed. In the figure, an upper right arrow shown at the lower left of the display j5 represents the locus and the moving direction of the display j5. The display j5 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed in a transparent manner, and the lower half is displayed in the form 5. The mode 3 in the lower half of the display j5 corresponds to the mode of the serif notice display k5 started in FIG. 22 (16) described later, and the display j5 is a display related to the mode of the serif notice display k5. The serif notice display k5 is a notice display of the change, and the jackpot reliability is set according to the mode. With the display j5, the player can know the mode of the speech advance notice display before the display of the notice advance notice k5 is started.

  In FIG. 27 (15), a step-up notice is executed. In place of the little princess r1 on the right side of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a heel r2 and a character string image of “SU2” are displayed above it.

  FIG. 27 (16) shows a state in which the display of the dialogue advance notice k5 is started. In this example, after the display j5 is erased, the display of the dialog notice display k5 is started. The serif notice display k5 is a scroll pattern, and the serif notice display k5 is displayed as a scrolled picture at the beginning of display. Further, the serif notice display k5 is an aspect of aspect 5.

  In FIG. 27 (16), a step-up notice is executed. A princess r3 is displayed on the right side of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 instead of the heel r2, and a character string image of “SU3” is displayed above the princess r3. “SU3” indicates that step 3 is a step-up notice.

  FIG. 27 (17) shows a state where the serif notice display k <b> 5 is displayed in an animation in which the scroll opens leftward. In addition, a step-up notice is being executed, and a lord r4 is displayed instead of the princess r3 on the right side of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The upper part of the lord r4 is displayed so as to overlap with the serif notice display k5. Further, the entire character string image of “SU4” is overlapped with the serif notice display k5 and thus cannot be visually recognized.

  FIG. 27 (18) shows a state where a serif notice display k5 in which the scroll is completely opened is displayed. The serif notice display k5 in which the scroll is completely opened has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the character's serif is displayed in the rectangle. The speech balloon display mode of the speech notice display k5 is mode 5.

  Further, in FIG. 27 (18), since step 4 of step 4 is stopped and displayed, an effect display next to the step-up notice is started. Dialog notice display is started as an effect display next to the step-up notice. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol r4 and a serif notice display s1 are displayed. In the serif notice display s1, a character string image of “I will come to mind” is displayed as a serif of r4. Further, the serif notice display s1 is an aspect of aspect 5. In this example, the line advance notice display s1 for the step up advance notice is displayed during the display of the notice advance notices k4 and k5. A part of the serif notice display s1 and a part of the character r4 are displayed so as to overlap with the serif notice displays k4 and k5. Thus, during the display of the serif notice display shown in FIG. 18, a serif notice display different from the type shown in FIG. 18 (in this example, the serif notice display of the step-up notice) may be displayed. In addition, when the dialogue notice display shown in FIG. 18 is overlapped with the step advance notice display, the dialogue notice display shown in FIG. 18 is not displayed as shown in FIG. When the line advance notice display of the step up notice is displayed or when the line advance notice display shown in FIG. 18 is displayed and the line advance notice display of the step up notice is not displayed as shown in FIG. The big hit symbol pattern is easily displayed in a fixed symbol variation display during execution. In addition, when the line notice display shown in FIG. 18 overlaps with the line advance notice display of the step-up notice, it is easy to win in the mini games o1 and o2. Further, even if the mini game o1 or o2 is out of place, the second notice notice k5 shown in FIG. 18 is displayed overlapping the notice notice s1 of the step-up notice. The display of the big hit symbol may be easier to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display during the execution than in the case where the display of the dialogue advance notice k5 is not started and the line advance notice display s1 is displayed.

  In FIG. 27 (19), the serif notice display s 1 and the shrine r 4 are erased, and overlap with the right end of the serif notice display k 5, and the shrine character image (hereinafter referred to as “dono”) m 5 and “dono” A character name display n5 including the character image is displayed. The serif notice display k5 may be a display including a lord m5 and a character name display n5.

  FIG. 27 (20) shows a state where the display of the mini game display o2 is started. In this example, the mini game display o2 is displayed on the left side in the serif notice display k5 so as to overlap the serif notice display k5. In addition, a character string image of “strategy start” is displayed in the serif notice display k5. The divided character string image of “Operation start” is a character display of the character display indicating the line of the m5.

  FIG. 27 (21) shows a state where a mini game is started by the mini game display o2.

  FIG. 27 (22) shows a state where the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image has moved to the left.

  FIG. 27 (23) shows a state where the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image has moved to the left.

  FIG. 27 (24) shows a state where the mini game is being executed by the mini game display o2. The arrow image has moved to the left.

  FIG. 27 (25) shows a state in which the mini game with the mini game display o2 is completed. In this example, since the arrow image of the mini game display o2 stops above the leftmost aspect 5 circular image, the result of the mini game corresponds to the hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and the aspect 5 circular image. Earn per hit. The hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is that one gauge image g3 is accumulated, and the hit corresponding to the aspect 5 circular image is that one gauge image g3 is accumulated. When the winning results corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and the aspect 5 circular image are derived as a result of the mini game, an effect display in which two gauge images g3 are accumulated as shown in FIG. 27 (26) described later is started. The

  FIG. 27 (26) shows a state in which the effect display in which two gauge images g3 are accumulated is started. An animation in which the p1 and p2 move from the circular image of the aspect 5 circular image of the mini game display o2 to the gauge image g3 is displayed. In the figure, a lower right arrow shown in the upper left of the ridges p1 and p2 indicates the trajectory and moving direction of the ridges p1 and p2.

  FIG. 27 (27) shows a state where the effect display in which two gauge images g3 are accumulated is completed. Two segment images of the gauge image g3 are displayed in red, and two gauge images g3 are accumulated.

  FIG. 27 (28) shows a state where two gauge images g3 are accumulated.

  FIG. 28 (1) shows a state continued from FIG. 27 (28), and shows a state in which the princess m4, the character name display n4, the shrine m5, and the character name display n5 are deleted. In this example, these displays are erased at the same time, but these displays may be erased in any order.

  FIG. 28 (2) shows a state where the character string image of “finally” in the serif notice display k4 and “operation start” in the serif notice display k5 are deleted. These character string images are erased at the same time, but either one may be erased first.

  FIG. 28 (3) shows a state where the mini game displays o1 and o2 are erased. These displays are erased at the same time, but either one may be erased first.

  FIG. 28 (4) shows a state in which the erasing animation of the line notice indications k4 and k5 is started. The erase animation of the serif notices k4 and k5 is displayed in a display in which the scroll is wound.

  FIG. 28 (5) shows a state in which the scrolls of the line notice notices k4 and k5 are completely wound. The serif notice indications k4 and k5 are erased after being completely wound.

  FIG. 28 (6) shows a state in which the line notice notices k4 and k5 are deleted. In this example, a character (in this example, princess m4, lord m5) and character name display n4, n5, a character string image (in this example, “Now”, “Operation start”), mini game display o1, It is erased in the order of o2 and serif notice display k4, k5. Note that these erasing orders can be arbitrarily set.

  FIG. 28 (7) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped (swing fluctuation display) in a manner in which “decoration 6” slightly swings up and down in the left symbol display area 208 a. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 28 (8) shows a state in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped and displayed in a mode in which the “decoration 6” slightly swings up and down in the right symbol display area 208 c. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down.

  FIG. 28 (9) shows a state in which the normal reach effect has been started. During the normal reach effect and the super reach effect described later, the decorative symbol variation display in the symbol display areas 208a to 208 is deleted. A liquor barrel image is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is suggested that a normal reach effect compared to drinking is started when a final display of the liquor barrel image is performed.

  FIG. 28 (10) shows a state in which the enemy character image (hereinafter referred to as “enemy”) is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 without performing the final display of the sake barrel image. . It is suggested that the normal reach production of enemy annihilation starts when the enemy confirmation display is performed.

  FIG. 28 (11) shows a state in which the enemy image is not displayed and the boss character image (hereinafter referred to as “boss”) is displayed in the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. It is suggested that the normal reach production of the boss confrontation is started when the boss confirmation display is performed.

  FIG. 28 (12) shows a state where the boss confirmation display is performed. In the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of “boss confrontation reach” is displayed in a rectangular frame display, and a part of the frame display is overlapped to display the boss. Has been.

  FIG. 28 (13) shows a state in which the boss confrontation reach is started. A character string image of “-Development with victory over the boss” is displayed in the upper part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and it is suggested that when the boss wins the boss, the super reach production starts. Has been. During normal reach production such as boss confrontation reach, the special figure 1 hold icon display area f and all special figure 1 hold icons (in this example, the hold icon f1) are erased.

  FIG. 28 (14) shows a state in which an effect display in which one gauge image g3 is accumulated is started during the boss confrontation reach. The gauge images g1 to g3 may accumulate irregularly. An animation is displayed in which the p3 that appears in the upper left part of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 moves to the gauge image g3. In the figure, the arrow shown above the ridge p3 indicates the locus and movement direction of the ridge p3.

  FIG. 28 (15) shows a state where the effect display in which one gauge image g3 is accumulated is finished. Three segment images of the gauge image g3 are displayed in red, and the gauge image g3 is full. A character string image “Preparation OK” is displayed above the gauge image g3.

  FIG. 28 (16) shows a state in which the boss confrontation reach is won. A character string image of “win” is displayed at the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a lost boss is displayed below the character string image.

  FIG. 28 (17) shows a state in which the start effect of the button effect is started. The button effect is an effect that prompts the player to press the chance button 136, and the start effect of the button effect is an effect that is performed before the button effect is started. In the start effect of the button effect, four wavy effect images are displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 28 (18) shows a state in which a button effect is started by displaying a button image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image indicating the operation valid period of the chance button 136 below the button image. The button image is displayed in the aspect 5. In addition, a downward arrow image and a character string image of “Press!” Are displayed above the button image. The chance button 136 emits light in the mode 5 and the pressing of the chance button 136 is prompted.

  FIG. 28 (19) shows a state in which the operation valid period has started. The meter of the meter image indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period has decreased.

  FIG. 28 (20) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed during the operation effective period. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed during the button production, the movable body 700 emits light in the aspect 5, moves upward, and stops. In the button effect of this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation effective period, the operation effective period ends.

  FIG. 28 (21) shows a state in which the movable body 702 has moved downward and the movable portions 702a and 702b have moved left and right. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed during the button effect, the movable body 702 emits light in the mode 5 and moves downward to stop.

  FIG. 28 (22) shows a state in which the swordsman reach of super reach production is started after the movable bodies 700 and 702 are moved to the initial positions. The movable bodies 700 and 702 are turned on in the mode 1 after moving to the initial position. In the swordsman reach production, the background image of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is night, and a crescent moon image is displayed in the upper left of the display area. In addition, a character string image of “Swordsman Reach” is displayed in a rectangular frame display at the upper center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Shows a swordsman.

  FIG. 28 (23) shows a state in which the reach effect of the swordsman is being performed.

  FIG. 28 (24) shows a state in which a balloon display is displayed. The balloon display is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular shape below the lord and the swordsman, and is an aspect of aspect 1. In the balloon display, a character string image of “[Swordsman] Fufufu” is displayed as a dialogue display of the swordsman.

  FIG. 28 (25) shows a state in which a balloon display is displayed. The balloon display is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular shape below the lord and the swordsman, and is an aspect of aspect 1. In the balloon display, a character string image of “[Mr.

  FIG. 28 (26) shows a state in which an animation in which the swordsman and the swordsman slashed is displayed.

FIG. 28 (27) shows a state where the button introduction animation is displayed. The button introduction animation is an effect display that may be displayed before the operation valid period of the chance button 136 is started. In the button introduction animation of this example, for example, an animation in which button images q1 and q2 having a transmittance of 50% move from the left and right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the center of the display area is displayed.

  FIG. 28 (28) shows a state where the button introduction animation is displayed. The button images q1 and q2 have moved to the vicinity of the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 29 (1) shows a state continued from FIG. 28 (28), and shows a state in which the start effect of the strong button effect is started before the button images q1 and q2 are completely overlapped. An animation is displayed in which an effect image having an elliptical shape and a jagged edge jumps out from the gauge image g3 to the center of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the drawing, the arrow shown above the gauge image g3 represents the locus and moving direction of the jagged effect image.

  FIG. 29 (1) shows a state in which a strong button effect is started by displaying a button image imitating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image indicating the operation valid period of the chance button 136 below the button image. The pressing surface of the chance button 136 protrudes upward, and the button image is displayed in a manner corresponding to a state where the pressing surface of the chance button 136 protrudes upward. Further, the button image is displayed in the form of aspect 5. In addition, a downward arrow image and a character string image of “Press!” Are displayed above the button image. The chance button 136 emits light in the mode 5 and the pressing of the chance button 136 is prompted. Further, the entire segment-like image of the gauge image g3 is displayed in black, and a character string image of “completed” is displayed overlapping the segment-like image, and the gauge image g3 is fully filled. It is notified that the button production has started.

  FIG. 29 (3) shows a state in which the operation valid period is started. The meter of the meter image indicating the remaining time of the operation valid period has decreased.

  FIG. 29 (4) shows a state immediately after the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation effective period during the strong button production, the button image and the meter image are deleted, and the result of the swordsman reach is displayed. In this example, since the lord processes the swordsman, an animation of a scene where the lord wins the swordsman is displayed in the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In addition, in the upper left corner of the display area, a balloon image including a character image of “celebration” is displayed instead of the attached image, and it is congratulated to win a big hit. In addition, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation effective period during the strong button production, the operation effective period ends.

  FIG. 29 (5) shows a state in which the movable body 700 emits light in the aspect 7 (for example, rainbow color), moves upward and stops after the end of the swordsman reach. In this example, when the images of the swordsman and the swordsman are deleted and the swordsman reach is finished, the effect that the movable body 700 moves is executed. An effect that the movable body 700 moves during execution of the swordsman reach may be executed.

  FIG. 29 (6) shows a state in which the movable body 702 emits light in the mode 7, moves downward, and the movable portions 702a and 702b move to the left and right. In this example, when the images of the lord and the swordsman are erased and the swordsman reach is finished, an effect of moving the movable body 702 is executed. An effect that the movable body 702 moves during execution of the swordsman reach may be executed.

  FIG. 29 (7) shows a state in which the display of the decorative symbol variation display is resumed after the movable bodies 700 and 702 are moved to the initial positions. “Decoration 6” was temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b in a manner that slightly swings up and down. In the figure, two wavy lines illustrated in the upper left and lower right of “decoration 6” indicate that “decoration 6” slightly fluctuates up and down. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”, which is a jackpot symbol, is temporarily displayed.

  FIG. 29 (8) shows a state where the background display has returned to normal. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, an image of the sun pattern and a background image corresponding to the sunny stage are displayed.

  FIG. 29 (9) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit ("Special figure B"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”, which is a big hit symbol form, indicating that the determination result of the special figure 1 variable game is a big hit is stopped and displayed. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination of “6-6-6” is stopped and displayed.

  In this example, the step-up notice is executed in a state where the dialog notice display shown in FIG. 18 is displayed. In the step-up advance notice in this example, if the stop display is not performed for a certain character image, the next effect display (in this example, the line advance notice display s1) is not performed, and the mini-game display o1 performed in relation to the line advance notice display is performed. In the mini game executed by o2, when the arrow image passes the winning image (aspect 4 circular image), the winning is obtained, and a certain effect display (in this example, a serif notice display k5) is displayed. . In this way, an effect (in this example, a step-up notice) that is not advantageous to the player unless stopped by a certain pattern, and an effect (in this example, it may be advantageous even if an arrow passes through an image) Mini-game) may be performed during the same symbol variation display. It should be noted that at least a part of the period in which an effect that is not advantageous to the player unless stopped by a pattern and an effect that may be advantageous even if an arrow passes through an image may overlap. .

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 30 (1) to 30 (19) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 30 (1) shows a state where the special figure variable game is being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, and in the fifth symbol display region h, the fifth symbol variation display is displayed. In addition, the variation icon display area e displays a variation icon e1 having a circular shape 1 and the special figure 1 holding icon display region f displays a holding icon f2 having a circular shape 1.

  FIG. 30 (2) shows a state in which “decoration 2” is temporarily stopped and displayed in a manner in which the “decoration 2” slightly swings up and down in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 30 (3) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208 c so as to slightly swing up and down.

  FIG. 30 (4) shows a state in which “decoration 5” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208c so as to slightly swing up and down.

  FIG. 30 (5) shows a state in which Yoshimune t1 who presses “decoration 2” in the left symbol display area 208a is displayed. By the Yoshimune t1, the display in which “decoration 2” in the right symbol display area 208a is changed to the ornament symbol including the character image is performed. In this example, the odd-numbered decorative symbols include character images, “decoration 3” includes a princess, “decoration 5” includes a spear, and “decoration 7” includes a shrine.

  FIG. 30 (6) shows a state in which “decoration 3” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a. “Decoration 3” includes the princess. As a result, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, a decorative symbol having a combination of “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed. The decoration symbol of the combination of “decoration 3—decoration 5—decoration 7” is a red chance eye, and the pre-reading notice target is a symbol variation display corresponding to the hold icon f2.

  FIG. 30 (7) shows a state in which the special figure 1 variable game is completed. The result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is successful is out of date ("special figure G"). In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 5—decoration 7”, which is an out symbol design, indicating that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct is out of display. In the fifth symbol display area, the fifth symbol of the combination “3-5-7” is stopped and displayed.

  In FIG. 30 (8), in accordance with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), the decorative symbol fluctuation display, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol fluctuation display are started. Shows the state. Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e2 and the change icon. It has moved to the display area e. In the left symbol display area 208a, the princess t2 included in the “decoration 3” is continuously displayed. The princess t2 is a display related to the serif notice display k6 started in FIG. 30 (10) described later.

  FIG. 30 (9) shows a state immediately before the princess t2 starts moving downward. A downward arrow illustrated on the left side of the princess t2 indicates the moving direction of the princess t2.

  FIG. 30 (10) shows a state in which the display of the dialog notice display k6 is started. In this example, the princess t2 moves downward to become the princess m6, and a serif notice display k6 indicating the serif of the princess m6 is displayed. The mode of the serif notice display k6 is mode 4. In addition, a character name display n6 including a princess m6 and a character image of “princess” is displayed overlapping the left end portion of the serif notice display k6. The serif notice display k6 may be a display including a princess m6 and a character name display n6. In addition, a character string image of “this time live is” is displayed in the serif notice display k6. The character string image of “this time is live” is a character display of the character display representing the line of the princess m6. In addition, a mini game based on the mini game display o1 is being executed.

  FIG. 30 (11) shows a state in which a mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image has moved to the right.

  FIG. 30 (12) shows a state in which a mini game is being executed by the mini game display o1. The arrow image is just before stopping.

  FIG. 30 (13) shows a state in which the mini game with the mini game display o1 is completed. The stop of the arrow image on the mini game display o1 is the end of the mini game. Since the arrow image of the mini game display o1 is stopped above the aspect 4 circular image, the result of the mini game is a win corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image. The hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is the start of the second dialogue notice display. In this example, when the winning result corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is derived as the result of the mini game, the display of the second serif notice display k7 is started as shown in FIG. The serif notice display in this example is a "NO15" serif notice display shown in FIG.

  FIG. 30 (14) shows a state in which the display j7 that can specify the mode of the serif notice display k7 is displayed before the serif notice display k7 that is the second serif notice display is started. The display j7 is moved and displayed from the vicinity of the aspect 4 circular image of the mini game display o1 to the upper right. The display j7 of this example appears from the vicinity of the aspect 4 circular image of the mini game display o1 and starts to be displayed. In the figure, an arrow pointing to the upper right shown in the lower left of the display j7 represents the locus and the moving direction of the display j7. The display j7 has a circular shape, the upper half is displayed in a transparent manner, and the lower half is displayed in an aspect 4. The lower half mode 4 of the display j7 corresponds to the mode of the serif notice display k7 started in FIG. 30 (15) described later, and the display j7 is a display related to the mode of the serif notice display k7. The serif notice display k7 is a notice display of the change, and the jackpot reliability is set according to the mode. With the display j7, the player can know the mode of the serif notice display before the display of the serif notice display k7 is started.

  FIG. 30 (15) shows a state in which the display of the dialogue advance notice k7 is started. In this example, after the display j7 is erased, the display of the dialog notice display k7 is started. The serif notice display k7 is a picture of a scroll, and the serif notice display k7 is displayed as a picture in a state where the scroll is wound at the beginning of display. Further, the serif notice display k7 is an aspect of aspect 4.

  FIG. 30 (16) shows a state in which the serif notice display k5 is displayed in an animation in which the scroll opens leftward.

  FIG. 30 (17) shows a state where a serif notice display k 7 in which the scroll is completely opened is displayed. The serif notice display k7 in which the scroll is completely opened has a horizontally long rectangular shape, and becomes a balloon display in which a character display representing the character's serif is displayed in the rectangle. The balloon mode of the balloon display of the line preview k7 is mode 4.

  In FIG. 30 (18), a character name display n7 including a character image of “爺” and “爺” is displayed overlapping the right end portion of the line notice display k7. The serif notice display k7 may be a display including 爺 m7 and character name display n7.

  FIG. 30 (19) shows a state where the display of the mini game display o2 is started. In this example, the mini game display o2 is displayed on the left side in the serif notice display k7 so as to overlap the serif notice display k7. In addition, a character string image of “when” is displayed in the serif notice display k7. The character string image of “when” is a character display of the character display indicating the line of 爺 m7. In this example, description of the effects ahead of this is omitted, but after that, a super reach effect such as Hime Live Reach is executed, and the jackpot symbol form is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 (1a) and (1b). 31 (1a) and (1b) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 31 (1a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is being executed. In this example, a tutorial display (description display) u1 of a book pattern is displayed at the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The tutorial display u1 displays a game method, a description of a production, a description of a character, and the like. In this example, a character string image of “swordsman is a lord of the lord” is displayed in the tutorial display u1, and an explanation display of the swordsman is displayed.

The black dots shown between FIG. 31 (1a) and FIG. 31 (1b) indicate the passage of time.
FIG. 31 (1b) shows a state in which the speech advance notice k1 is displayed. In this example, the serif notice display k1 is displayed overlapping with a part of the tutorial display u1. In this manner, the serif notice display may be displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the character display related to the character such as the tutorial display.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 (2a) to (2c). FIGS. 31 (2a) to (2c) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 31 (2a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is being executed. In this example, a character string image of “Now” is displayed in the serif notice display k4. The character string image of “Now” is a character display of the character display representing the line of the princess m4. Further, in the mini game based on the mini game display o1, since the arrow image is stopped above the aspect 5 circular image, the result of the mini game is a hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and the hit corresponding to the aspect 5 circular image. Will be acquired. The hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is the start of the second serif notice display, and the hit corresponding to the aspect 5 circular image is that the second serif notice display is displayed in the serif notice display k4. In this example, when the winning results corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image and the aspect 5 circular image are derived as a result of the mini game, the second time is displayed in the line notice display k4 as shown in FIG. 31 (2c) described later. The line notice display starts.

  FIG. 31 (2b) shows a state in which the character string image in the serif notice display k4 has been erased.

  FIG. 31 (2 c) shows a state in which the character string image “Continue !!” is displayed in the line notice display k 4. The character string image of “Continue !!” is a character display of the character display representing the line of the princess m4 and is a second line notice display.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 (3a) to (3d). FIGS. 31 (3a) to (3d) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 31 (3a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is being executed. In this example, a level display u2 indicating the degree of the player's pachinko machine 100 is displayed in the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The level of this example is “LV: 10”. When the gauge in the level display u2 is full, the level is increased by one.

  FIG. 31 (3b) shows a state in which the mini game based on the mini game display o1 is completed. Since the arrow image is stopped above the aspect 4 circular image, the result of the mini-game is a winning acquisition corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image. The hit corresponding to the aspect 4 circular image is to obtain 10 points for the experience value for raising the level of the player.

  FIG. 31 (3c) shows a state where the player has acquired 10 points. The experience value display u3 is moving from the vicinity of the mini game display o toward the level display u2. The experience value display u3 includes the character “+10” in the oval frame display, and notifies that 10 experience values have been acquired.

  FIG. 31 (3c) shows a state where the player has acquired 10 points. The gauge in the level display u2 is increased by the experience value 10.

  In the above production example, when a win is made in a mini-game, the second serif notice display, meter-up of gauge images g1 to g3, changes in the contents of the serif notice display (FIGS. 31 (2a) to (2c)), experience value increase An effect display is performed. When a win is made in a mini game, at least two of these effects may be combined. The level display u2 may always be displayed. Further, the level display u2 may not be provided or may not be displayed.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 31 (4a) to (4d). FIGS. 31 (4a) to (4d) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 31 (4a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is being executed. In the lower right of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, history displays v1, v2, and v3 for notifying the history of the dialog notice display are displayed. The history displays v1 to v3 have a substantially square shape, and are displayed side by side in the order of the history display v1, the history display v2, and the history display v3 from the left side. The history display v1 displays the character image of the previous serif notice display, the history display v2 displays the character image of the previous serif notice display, and the history display v3 displays the previous three serif notice display. The character image is displayed. In FIG. 31 (4a), princesses are displayed in the history displays v1 and v2, and 爺 is displayed in the history display v3.

  FIG. 31 (4b) shows a state in which the speech advance notice k4 is displayed as a history. The princess who is the character of the serif notice display k4 is moving from the princess m4 toward the history display v1. In the drawing, a downward-pointing arrow shown on the left side of the moving princess indicates the locus and moving direction of the princess. In addition, the princess in the history display v1 moves toward the history display v2 and the princess in the history display v2 moves toward the history display v3 so as to be pushed out by the princess. The wrinkles displayed in the history display v3 are deleted.

  FIG. 31 (4c) shows a state in which the movement of the princess has been completed. Princesses are displayed in the history displays v1 to v3. In this example, when the same character image is displayed in the history displays v1 to v3, the advance notice item is acquired.

  FIG. 31 (4d) shows a state in which the advance notice item u1 has been acquired. The notice item u1 has a treasure chest pattern, and is displayed in stock in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The notice item includes, for example, a pseudo-ream item in which the pseudo-ream effect starts, a promotion item that is promoted so that the title mode (color) of the effect display is a higher-hit reliability, and a cut-in effect is a higher-hit reliability There is a promotion item that becomes a high aspect. Further, a specific character (for example, the staff shown in FIG. 18) may not be displayed as a history in the history displays v1 to v3, and the second serif notice display is not displayed as a history in the history displays v1 to v3. May be.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 32 (1) to 32 (4) show example effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 32 (1) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7” in the case of a loss is shown, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct. Stop is displayed. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “2-4-7” is stopped and displayed in the fifth symbol display area h. In addition, the hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in a circular form. The production stage is a sunny stage.

  In FIG. 32 (2), in accordance with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), the decorative pattern fluctuation display, the fourth symbol, and the fifth symbol fluctuation display are started. Shows the state. Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e1 and the change icon. Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f.

  FIG. 32 (3) shows a state where the movable body 700 moves upward and rotates clockwise. The movable body 700 may be rotatable. In addition, the movable body 700 emits light in the aspect 3.

  FIG. 32 (4) shows a state where the effect stage has changed to a cloudy stage. In this example, the movable body 700 is moved before the effect stage is changed. Since it becomes a cloudy stage, the sun image on the decorative symbol display device 208 is switched to a cloud image, and the background image corresponding to the cloudy stage is switched. In this example, the effect stage changes after the movable body 700 returns to the initial position. The production stage may change while the movable body 700 moves to the initial position, or may change at the same time as the movement to the initial position is completed. When the movable body 700 returns to the initial position, it returns to the light emission of aspect 1.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 32 (5) to (7) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 32 (5) shows a state in which the movable body 700 is rotating while the special figure variable game is being executed. The production stage is a sunny stage.

FIG. 32 (6) shows a state where the production stage is changed to the Tono ZONE stage. In this example, the movable body 700 is moved before the effect stage is changed. Since it becomes the Tono ZONE stage, the sun image on the decorative symbol display device 208 is switched to a cloud and lightning image,
A character string image of “~ Moto ZONE ~” and “Moto ZONE” is displayed and switched to a background image corresponding to the Tono ZONE stage. Tono ZONE is a stage for notice, and is a stage with higher reliability than a sunny stage or a cloudy stage. Note that the advance notice of Tono ZONE may be a notice of the change or a prefetch notice. In this example, the effect stage changes after the movable body 700 returns to the initial position. The production stage may change while the movable body 700 moves to the initial position, or may change at the same time as the movement to the initial position is completed. When the movable body 700 returns to the initial position, it returns to the light emission of aspect 1.

  FIG. 32 (7) shows a state in which the stage stage of Tono ZONE is being executed. In the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, a character string image of “you can expect in the order of super-don ZONE> don ZONE” is displayed, and the super-don ZONE has higher jackpot reliability than the super-ZONE Is informed. In this way, a plurality of stage stages dedicated to the notice may be provided.

  Next, with reference to FIGS. 32 (8) to (11), an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described. FIGS. 32 (8) to (11) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 32 (8) shows a state in which the speech advance notice k4 is displayed while the special figure variable game is being executed. The production stage is a sunny stage.

  FIG. 32 (9) shows a state where the movable body 700 moves upward and rotates clockwise. In addition, the movable body 700 emits light in the aspect 3. In addition, a mini game is played by the mini game display o1.

  FIG. 32 (10) shows a state in which the production stage is changed to the ZONE stage. In this example, the production stage is switched during the display of the dialogue notice display. When the effect stage is switched to Tono ZONE, the serif notice display k4, the princess m4, the character name display n4, and the mini game display o1 are deleted. For this reason, the mini game is canceled before the result of the mini game on the mini game display o1 is derived.

  FIG. 32 (11) shows a state in which the stage stage of Tono ZONE is being executed. As in this example, the mini-game display may be erased before the mini-game result is derived. As described above, the display about the mini game may be deleted before the result of losing the result of the mini game is derived.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 32 (12) to (15). FIGS. 32 (12) to (15) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 32 (12) shows a state in which the speech advance notice k4 is displayed while the special figure variable game is being executed. The production stage is a sunny stage.

  FIG. 32 (13) shows a state in which the movable body 700 moves upward and rotates clockwise. In addition, the movable body 700 emits light in the aspect 3. In addition, a mini game is played by the mini game display o1.

  FIG. 32 (14) shows a state in which an effect display is displayed indicating that the effect stage may change to the ZONE stage. In this example, during the effect display in which the effect stage may be switched to Tono ZONE, the serif notice display k4, the princess m4, the character name display n4, and the mini game display o1 are deleted. For this reason, the mini game is interrupted before the result of the mini game on the mini game display o1 is derived.

  FIG. 32 (15) shows a state in which the stage is continued on a fine stage without the stage being shifted to Tono ZONE. As in this example, when the effect display that may be switched to the lord ZONE is finished, the display of the serif notice display k4, the princess m4, the character name display n4, and the mini game display o1 is resumed. The mini game is resumed from the point of interruption. In this way, the mini game may be interrupted and then resumed.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 (1a) to (1d). 33 (1a) to (1d) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 33 (1a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is being executed. In this example, a character string image of “Now” is displayed in the serif notice display k4. The character string image of “Now” is a character display of the character display representing the line of the princess m4. In addition, a mini game based on the mini game display o1 is being executed.

  FIG. 33 (1b) shows a state in which the button image u4 is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the speech notice display k4. The button image u4 is an image that mimics the appearance of the chance button 136, and is an image that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136. Further, the button image is displayed in the form of aspect 5. In addition, a downward arrow image and a character string image of “Press!” Are displayed above the button image. The chance button 136 emits light in the mode 5 and the pressing of the chance button 136 is prompted. In this example, the meter image indicating the operation valid period is not displayed.

  FIG. 33 (1c) shows a state in which the mini game on the mini game display o1 is finished. The arrow image stops above the rightmost aspect 5 circular image.

  FIG. 33 (1d) shows a state where the chance button 136 is pressed. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed, the item u5 is acquired. The item u5 is an item related to the change of the hold icon.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 (2a) to (2c). 33 (2a) to (2c) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 33 (2a) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is being executed. In this example, a character string image of “Now” is displayed in the serif notice display k4. In addition, a mini game based on the mini game display o1 is being executed.

  FIG. 33 (2b) shows a state in which a button image u4 is overlapped with a part of the serif notice display k4 and a meter image indicating the operation effective period is displayed below the button image u4. Yes. Further, from the left, an image corresponding to the “A” option, an image corresponding to the “B” option, and an image corresponding to the “C” option are displayed above the button image u4. In FIG. 33 (2b), the option “A” is selected, and a cursor display is displayed on the image corresponding to the option “A”. The player can select the selection of “A”, “B”, and “C” by operating the left and right keys of the setting operation unit 137 to move the cursor display. For example, when the chance button 136 is pressed while the cursor is displayed on the option “A”, “A” is selected. Further, the button image is displayed in the form of aspect 5. Further, a downward arrow image and a character string image of “Choose!” Are displayed above the button image, and the chance button 136 emits light in the mode 5 and the pressing of the chance button 136 is urged.

  FIG. 33 (2 c) shows a state where an image corresponding to the option “B” is selected. The player can move the cursor display to the image corresponding to the option “B” by operating the right button of the setting operation unit 137 once from the state of FIG. 33 (2b). Note that the operations of the setting operation unit 137 and the chance button 136 are valid during the operation valid period indicated by the meter image.

  As described above, the button image and the meter image may be displayed so as to overlap the dialogue notice display. The options “A” to “C” may be selection of items that can be acquired or selection of reach production. It should be noted that the cursor display is automatically moved and displayed in the order of “A”, “B”, and “C”, and when the chance button 136 is pressed, the cursor display is stopped and the option may be determined. In this case, the option selected depending on the pressing timing of the chance button 136 may be different, or the option selected regardless of the pressing timing of the chance button 136 may be determined by lottery.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 33 (3a) to (3d). 33 (3a) to (3d) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 33 (3a) shows a state in which the notice advance notices k4 and k5 are displayed while the special figure variable game is being executed. A character string image of “Join the Tono ZONE” is displayed in the serif notice display k5, and it is predicted that the character will enter the Tono ZONE. Further, the mini game with the mini game display o2 is not started. The production stage is a sunny stage.

  FIG. 33 (3 b) shows a state where the movable body 700 moves upward and rotates clockwise. In addition, the movable body 700 emits light in the aspect 3. Also, the mini game with the mini game display o2 is not started. As in this example, the mini-game is not started immediately before entering the palace ZONE.

  FIG. 33 (3 c) shows a state where the production stage is changed to the ZONE stage. In this example, the production stage is switched during the display of the dialogue notice display. When the effect stage is switched to Tono ZONE, the serif notice display k4, k5, princess m4, Tono m5, character name display n4, n5, mini game display o1, 02 are deleted. For this reason, the mini game display o2 is erased without starting the mini game.

  FIG. 33 (3d) shows a state in which the stage stage of Tono ZONE is being executed. As in this example, the display of the mini game may be erased before the mini game is started.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 33 (4a) to (4c). 33 (4a) to (4c) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 33 (4a) shows a state in which the speech advance notice k4 is displayed while the special figure variable game is being executed. In the mini game of the mini game display o1, the result of the mini game is a hit since the arrow is stopped on the aspect 5 circular image. For this reason, since the second line notice display is displayed, the line notice display k5 is started to be displayed. In addition, a star-shaped mark display u7 including a ridge is displayed in the upper right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The mark display u7 is an item display for notifying the transition to the lord ZONE.

The black dots shown between FIG. 33 (4a) and FIG. 33 (4b) represent the passage of time.
FIG. 33 (4b) shows a state in which the dialogue notice display k5 is displayed. A character string image of “Join the Tono ZONE” is displayed in the serif notice display k5. Further, an effect image u8 is displayed overlapping the mark display u7. The effect image u8 is displayed when the item of the mark display u7 is used. In this example, the transition to Tone ZONE is foretold in the second serif notice display k5 and the mark display u7.

  FIG. 33 (4c) shows a state in which the mini game display o2 is displayed. In this example, the mini-game with the mini-game display o2 is not started since the process moves to Tono ZONE. Note that after this, even in the case of transition to Tono ZONE, the mini game with the mini game display o2 may be started. In this case, when the mini-game display o2 is a win in the mini-game, a character string image of “Let's rush into ZONE ZONE” may be displayed in the serif notice display k5.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 34 (1) to (5) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 34 (1) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the decorative symbol display device 208, a symbol combination “decoration 2-decoration 4-decoration 7” in the case of a loss is shown, which indicates that the result of determining whether or not the special figure 1 variable game is correct. Stop is displayed. Further, the fifth symbol of the combination “2-4-7” is stopped and displayed in the fifth symbol display area h. In addition, the hold icons f1 and f2 are displayed in a circular form.

  In FIG. 34 (2), in accordance with the start of the special figure 1 variable game by the special figure 1 display device 212 (not shown), the decorative display, the fourth graphic, and the fifth graphic of the variable display are started. Shows the state. Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the hold icon f1 displayed in the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f becomes the change icon e1 and the change icon. Moving to the display area e, the hold icon f2 displayed in the second area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f moves to the first area of the special figure 1 hold icon display area f.

  In FIG. 34 (2), a timer notice display u9 is displayed. The timer notice display u9 displays a countdown for a predetermined time, and when the time reaches 0, a predetermined effect in which the movable body or the like operates is executed. The timer notice display u9 is an aspect 6 (indicated by vertical hatching (for example, gold) in FIG. 34). The jackpot reliability of the timer notice display u9 is in the order of mode 1, blinking white, mode 3, mode 4, mode 5, mode 6, and mode 7 from the lowest. The timer notice display is displayed in a larger display size as the jackpot reliability is higher. Since the timer notice display u9 of this example is aspect 7, it is displayed in a relatively large display size. In FIG. 34 (2), a character string image “in preparation” is displayed in the timer advance notice display u9, and the timer advance notice display u9 is a display in preparation before the countdown starts. The timer notice display u9 is a display corresponding to the first image RDY being prepared shown in FIGS. 43B and 67A2, the third image RDY3 being prepared shown in FIG. 67A2, and the like. The pachinko machine 100 of this example can display the timer notice effect shown in FIG. 43 and FIG. 67 (a2).

  FIG. 34 (3) shows a state in which the display j4 that can specify the mode of the serif notice display is displayed before the display of the serif notice display is started. A part of the display j4 is displayed overlapping the timer notice display u9. Note that the entire display j4 may overlap the timer notice display u9.

  FIG. 34 (4) shows a state in which the display of the dialog notice display k4 is started. A part of the serif notice display k4 is displayed overlapping the timer notice display u9.

  FIG. 34 (5) shows a state in which the dialogue advance notice k4 is displayed as an animation in which the scroll is opened in the right direction. A part of the serif notice display k4 is displayed overlapping the timer notice display u9.

The black dots shown between FIG. 34 (5) and FIG. 34 (6) represent the passage of time.
FIG. 34 (6) shows a state in which a character name display n4 including a princess m4 and a character image of “princess” is displayed overlapping the left end portion of the serif notice display k4. A part of the serif notice display k4, a part of the princess m4, and a part of the character name display n4 are displayed overlapping the timer notice display u9.

  FIG. 34 (7) shows a state in which the timer notice display u9 has moved downward. The timer preview display u9 is moved and displayed before the countdown display of the timer preview display u9 is started.

  FIG. 34 (7) shows a state in which the countdown display of the timer notice display u9 is started. In this example, 99 seconds are counted down.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. FIGS. 34 (9) to (13) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 34 (9) shows a state in which the speech advance notice k 4 is displayed while the special figure variable game is being executed.

  FIG. 34 (10) shows a state in which the freeze effect display is started. The freeze effect display of this example is an effect display that makes the player feel as if the time has stopped due to the freeze of the display other than the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation display of the fifth symbol. When the freeze effect display is started, a clock display u10 is displayed, and the execution time of the freeze effect display is measured and displayed. The clock display u10 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the serif notice display k4.

  FIG. 34 (11) shows a state in which the freeze effect display is being executed.

The black dots shown between FIG. 34 (11) and FIG. 34 (12) represent the passage of time.
FIG. 34 (12) shows a state in which the freeze effect display is being executed.

  FIG. 34 (12) shows a state in which the freeze effect display is finished. The freeze effect display in this example is performed for 1 minute. Since the serif notice display k4 is the time during which the freeze effect display is ended, it is deleted after the freeze effect display ends. Further, only the result of the mini game that should have been played during the freeze effect display is reflected. For this reason, two gauge images g3 are collected. Note that the length of the freeze effect display is 1 minute as in this example, longer than 1 minute, less than 1 minute, or relatively short called short freeze (for example, A few seconds). In the case of a short freeze, the movement display of the arrow of the mini game is not omitted, and the execution time of the freeze effect display is not measured and displayed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display a serif notice display as shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can execute the preliminary notice effect during preparation shown in FIG. 35 and the timer notice effect shown in FIG. For example, the preliminary notice effect or the timer notice effect may be executed during display of the serif notice display or within the same symbol variation display as the display of the serif notice display. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present example is in preparation for preliminary announcement shown in FIGS. 36 to 40, 42, 44 to 46, 48, and 50 to 55 related to the preliminary announcement for preparation shown in FIG. 35. The preliminary notice effect during preparation may be executed within the same symbol variation display as the display of the speech advance notice display or the display of the speech advance notice display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display a serif notice display as shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can execute the conversation notice display shown in FIG. For example, the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 71 may be executed while the line notice display is being displayed or within the same symbol variation display as the line notice display. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display a suggestion of a character included in the serif notice display as shown in FIG. 71 (6) before the display of the serif notice display is started. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can execute the conversation notice display shown in FIGS. 72 to 90 related to the conversation notice display shown in FIG. These conversation notice displays may be executed within the variable display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display a serif notice display as shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can execute the meter increase effect and the item provision effect shown in FIG. For example, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect may be executed during display of the serif notice display or within the same symbol variation display as the display of the serif notice display. Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to this example can execute the meter increase effect and the item provision effect shown in FIGS. 93 to 98 and FIGS. 102 to 115 related to the meter increase effect and the item provision effect shown in FIG. Yes, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect may be executed during display of the serif notice display or within the same symbol variation display as the serif notice display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display a serif notice display as shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can execute the operation effects of the movable bodies 1 and 2 that are also executed during the display of the balloon display shown in FIG. For example, the movable bodies 1 and 2 shown in FIG. 116 are operated during the display of the line advance notice display or within the same symbol variation display as the display of the line advance notice display. An effect operation that overlaps with each other may be executed. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can execute the rendering operation of the movable bodies 1 and 2 shown in FIGS. 117 and 118 related to the rendering operation of the movable bodies 1 and 2 shown in FIG. These effects may be executed during the display or within the same symbol variation display as the speech advance notice display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display a serif notice display as shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can execute the effect display of the balloon display shown in FIG. For example, the effect display of the balloon display shown in FIG. 149 may be executed during the display of the speech advance notice display or within the same symbol variation display as the display of the speech advance notice display. Further, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can execute the effect display of the speech balloon display shown in FIGS. 150 to 169 related to the effect display of the speech balloon display shown in FIG. These balloon display effects may be displayed within the same symbol variation display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can display a serif notice display as shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can execute the pseudo-continuous effects shown in (g) to (p) of FIG. For example, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed during display of the serif notice display or within the same symbol variation display as the display of the serif notice display. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 according to the present example can execute the effect display shown in FIGS. 170 to 184 related to the pseudo-continuous effect shown in FIG. These effects may be displayed within the display.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 34 again.

(A1)
A game machine provided with a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means is a means capable of displaying a certain type of serif notice display (for example, serif notice display k1, k4, k6),
The certain type of notice notice display is a display that may include a character display of contents related to a certain character,
There may be a case where a certain mini game (for example, a mini game by the mini game display o1) is started in connection with the certain type of line notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming table having the configuration, by displaying the first display k1 including the character display of the contents relating to the character, the first display can be noticed by a novice player, and the first display In some cases, it is possible to make it easier for the player to pay attention to the mini-game by playing the mini-game in relation to the game.

(A2)
The game stand according to A1 above,
Operating means (for example, a chance button 136),
The result of a certain mini game can be derived without operation of the operation means,
When a certain result (for example, a winning result) (hereinafter referred to as a “first result”) is derived as a result of a certain mini-game, display of a certain effect display is started. And
When a certain result (for example, a result of loss) (hereinafter referred to as “second result”) different from the first result is derived as a result of a certain mini game, a certain effect display is displayed. Is configured not to start,
The variation display in which the display of a certain effect display is started by the derivation of the first result is more final than the variable display in which the display of a certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result. It is configured to be confirmed and displayed in a big hit mode.
A game stand characterized by that.

(A3)
The game stand according to A2 above,
The certain type of notice notice display is a display including a speech balloon (for example, speech notice display of speech notice k1, k4, k6),
The balloon may be displayed in a plurality of types,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect (for example, aspect 3),
One aspect of the plurality of kinds of aspects is a second aspect (for example, aspect 4),
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
Rather than a certain mini-game in which the balloon mode is started in connection with the certain type of serif notice display of the first mode, the balloon mode is the certain type of serif of the second mode. A certain mini-game started in connection with the notice display is configured such that the first result is more easily derived.
A game stand characterized by that.

(A4)
The game stand according to A3 above,
A certain mini game (for example, a mini game with a mini game display o1) is configured to be played in the balloon.
A game stand characterized by that.

(A5)
The game table according to A3 or A4 above,
A certain type of character display representing the lines of characters (for example, 婆, 爺, 殿) is configured to be displayed in the balloon.
A plurality of types of character display can be displayed as the certain type of character display,
One character display of the plurality of types of character display is a first character display (for example, “Tono is Yatsushiro Shogun”),
One character display of the plurality of types of character display is a second character display (for example, “fits well with Daifuku”),
The first character display and the second character display are different character displays,
The variable display in which the second character display is displayed is finally displayed in the big hit mode rather than the variable display in which the first character display is displayed without displaying the second character display. Is structured easily,
A game stand characterized by that.

(A6)
The game stand according to any one of A3 to A5 above,
Before the display of the certain type of notice notice display is started, a display (for example, displays j1 and j4) suggesting the mode of the balloon is configured to be performed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(A7)
The game stand according to any one of A2 to A6 above,
A certain effect display is a display of the certain type of line notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(A8)
The game stand according to any one of A2 to A7 above,
After a certain mini game is started and before the result is derived, the display about the certain mini game may be erased (see, for example, FIG. 32 (10)).
A game stand characterized by that.

(A9)
The game stand according to any one of A2 to A8 above,
A symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212 or special figure 2 table device 214) capable of displaying a symbol variation display is provided,
The display means is configured to be able to display a decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the symbol variation display,
The symbol display means is configured to be able to display a symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “losing symbol variation display”) in which the final symbol pattern is finally displayed.
The symbol display means is configured to be able to display a symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as a “hit symbol variation display”) in which the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed.
The display means is configured to be able to display a decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as a “loss variation variation display”) displayed in correspondence with the loss symbol variation display.
The display means is configured to be able to display a decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as a “hit variation variation display”) displayed corresponding to the jackpot symbol variation display.
The loss variation display is a variation display that finally displays a fixed display (hereinafter, referred to as a “first fixed display”) of a certain combination (for example, a combination in the case of disparity) decorative symbols,
The big hit variation display is finally referred to as a fixed display (hereinafter, “second fixed display”) of a decorative pattern of a certain combination (for example, a combination in the case of winning) different from the first fixed display. ) Is a variable display,
The display of the first fixed display is started in response to the end of the loss symbol variation display,
In response to the end of the jackpot symbol variation display, the display of the second confirmation display is started,
3. The variation in which the display of a certain effect display is started by the derivation of the first result, rather than the variable display in which the display of the certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result. “The display is configured so that it is easier to be finalized and displayed in a big win mode” means that “the display of a certain effect display was not started by the derivation of the second result” Also, the decorative symbol variation display in which display of a certain effect display is started by derivation of the first result is configured such that the second fixed display is more easily displayed.
That is,
A game stand characterized by that.

(A10)
The game stand according to any one of A2 to A9 above,
It is configured to be able to display a display (for example, display j2) that suggests that a certain effect display is displayed before a certain mini game is started.
A game stand characterized by that.

(A11)
The game stand according to any one of A2 to A10 above,
Timer notice effect (for example, timer notice effect of timer notice display u9) can be executed,
In relation to the timer notice effect, the certain effect display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(A12)
The game stand according to any one of A2 to A11 above,
A certain effect display is a display whose display is started only by derivation of the first result.
A game stand characterized by that.

(A13)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A12 above,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display representing a plurality of types of certain characters,
One of the displays representing the plurality of types of characters is a first character display (for example, a princess),
One of the displays representing the plurality of types of characters is a second character display (for example, Tono),
The first character display and the second character display are separate displays,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of decorative symbols,
One of the plurality of types of decorative symbols is a decorative symbol including the first character display (hereinafter referred to as “certain decorative symbol”).
Among the certain types of serif notice displays, a serif notice display (for example, the princess m6 serif notice display k6 shown in FIG. 30 (10)) includes a display including the second character display (hereinafter, “or” "Serial notice display"),
A certain chance including the certain decorative design (hereinafter referred to as “certain chance”) is configured to be displayed,
After the certain chance is stopped and displayed, the certain line notice display is displayed (for example, see FIGS. 30 (7) to (10)).
A game stand characterized by that.

(A14)
The game stand according to A13 above,
Before a certain chance eye is stopped and displayed, a display of a combination of decorative symbols that are not chance eyes (for example, “decoration 2—decoration 5—decoration 7” shown in FIG. 30 (5)) ”Opportunity Eye”) may stop appearing,
An effect (for example, an effect shown in FIG. 30 (5)) for changing the non-certain chance to the certain chance is configured to be executable.
A game stand characterized by that.

(A15)
The game stand according to A13 or A14 above,
In a certain production state among a plurality of types of production states, the certain chance eyes are configured to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(A16)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A15,
The certain type of dialogue notice display is a display including any one of a plurality of types of characters,
Before the display of the certain type of line notice display is started, a display (for example, the character image g2 shown in FIG. 71) suggesting a character included in the certain type of line notice display can be displayed. It is configured,
A game stand characterized by that.

(A17)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A16 above,
“A certain mini-game may be started in connection with the certain kind of serif notice display” described in A1 above means “after the display of the certain kind of notice notice display is started” , A certain mini-game may be started before the display of the certain type of notice notice display is ended. "
A game stand characterized by that.

(A18)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A17,
A certain type of serif notice display (hereinafter referred to as “second type serif notice display”) is different from the certain type of serif notice display (hereinafter referred to as “first type serif notice display”). Configured to be viewable,
Both the first type of serif notice display (for example, serif notice display k1, k2, k4, k5, 6) and the second type of serif notice display (for example, serif notice display s1) are displayed. There is a state that is displayed,
A configuration in which a certain mini-game is not started when only the second type serif notice display of the first type serif notice display and the second type serif notice display is displayed. (For example, see FIG. 25 (18)),
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, if a mini-game is always started in connection with the serif notice display, players who have become accustomed to the game tend not to pay attention to the serif notice display. In some cases, the mini-game may not be started when displaying the serif notice display, so that a player who has become accustomed to the game may be allowed to focus on the serif notice display.

(A19)
The game stand according to A18 above,
With operating means,
As the response display of the operation of the operation means, the display of a certain serif notice display of the second type serif notice display is started,
When an operation of the operation means is performed in a state where a display indicating the appearance of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation display”) is displayed, a response display of the second type serif notice display It is configured to start the display of a certain dialog notice display,
At least a part of the display of the first type of dialogue notice display is overlapped by the operation display,
A game stand characterized by that.

(A20)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A19 above,
Some mini-games include variable displays (eg, moving arrow images)
A game stand characterized by that.

(A21)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A20 above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

(A22)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A20 above,
The game machine is a slot machine (for example, slot machines 1000 and 2000).
A game stand characterized by that.

When the effect of reaching a big hit (reach effect) is regarded as a main game, a mini game that can be executed in parallel with the main game can also be called a sub game.
As a mini-game, the target TGT effect shown in FIG. 36 (a4), the effect that the drum (roulette) rotates to notify the predetermined result, the effect of defeating the enemy, and the little princess shown in FIG. Chibi Hime Musou's production with the mission of annihilating the subordinates, a comparison of Tono and Udon's drink shown in Fig. 53 (b), a bowling chance production shown in Fig. 56 (a3), and a golf shown in Fig. 56 (b4) A game effect may be executed.
The display of the mini game includes at least an animation display with an image other than characters (including variable display), and a result of success (winning) or failure (out of) is derived (for example, heat → hot → hot? When the result of success is derived, another effect (a certain effect display) is started.
A conversation notice display is established when a conversation between two or more characters is established. The 1 line notice display is also referred to as a comment notice.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. Moreover, the effect display shown below may be performed by animation. Needless to say, the embodiments described below can be applied to any of the embodiments described so far. That is, each effect shown in FIGS. 35 to 68 is an effect that is performed when the display screen of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is in an opaque state, and can be executed by each effect shown in FIGS. In the pachinko machine 100, the effect tangled with the transmission effect and the effect means on the back side is the effect described with reference to FIGS. Note that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 35 to 68 are used only in the description of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 35 to 68 in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, Priority is given to the code | symbol shown in 35-68.

  FIG. 35 to FIG. 68 are diagrams showing stepwise modification examples of effects centering on the decorative symbol display device of the pachinko machine 100 applicable to this embodiment. 35 to 68, the first special figure display device 212, the second special figure display device 214, the universal figure display device 210, the first special figure hold lamp 218, the second special figure hold lamp 220, and the universal figure hold. The lamp 216 is not shown. 35 to 68 show an example in which three decorative symbol display devices are arranged side by side. That is, the first decorative symbol display device 208L disposed at the center of the three decorative symbol display devices, the second decorative symbol display device 208M disposed on the left side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the first decoration. The display is performed by the third decorative symbol display device 208N arranged on the right side of the symbol display device 208L. The first decorative symbol display device 208L may be referred to as a main display device, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be referred to as sub-display devices. The length in the width direction of 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N is shorter than the half of the length of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the height is slightly shorter. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M has its right end side portion overlapped with the front side of the left end side portion of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N has the left end side portion thereof as the first end portion. One decorative symbol display device 208N overlaps the front side of the right end side portion. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are configured to be slidable in directions close to each other along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N can rotate integrally along the display surface of the first decorative symbol display device 208L when they are closest to each other. It is configured to be able to. The names of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are not necessarily displayed in a variable manner with respect to each display device. However, it is added here just in case that the interpretation of the display device is not narrowed. Further, a combination of these decorative symbol display devices (first decorative symbol display device 208L, second decorative symbol display device 208M, and third decorative symbol display device 208N) is used as an effect display means, and the effect display means is a decoration symbol. It is also possible to display various fluctuations or to display a plurality of types of effects. In the present embodiment, an example is shown in which various images are displayed on each of the plurality of decorative symbol display devices. However, all of them may be displayed on one decorative symbol display device. . In addition, a transparent light guide plate is arranged on the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the player can visually recognize the display state of the first decorative symbol display device 208L through the light guide plate. . The light guide plate has a predetermined lens cut in the transmission region. A light emitter such as an LED is provided at an appropriate position near the side edge of the light guide plate, and light from the light emitter is reflected forward by the lens cut portion, so that the transmission region emits light in a predetermined pattern. It is configured so that it can appear to be. In the embodiment shown in FIGS. 35 to 68, the light guide plate is subjected to a lens cut having a pattern imitating a predetermined effect image. Note that the light guide plate is configured such that the thickness of the portion of the region where light is refracted toward the player side is thinner than the thickness of light irradiation. Therefore, the display states of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N may be easily visible. Further, the light guide plate may be movable. Further, the light guide plate may be provided on the near side of at least one of the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. 35 to 68 show the states of the fourth symbol display devices 284a1 and 284a2, and the special symbol 1 and the fourth symbol display device 284a1 corresponding to the special symbol 1 have a rectangular shape. It blinks during the fluctuation display of FIG. 1, and lights up in the lighting mode of loss or the jackpot lighting mode during the stop display of FIG. Further, the special figure 2 4th symbol display device 284a2 corresponding to the special figure 2 has a circular shape, blinks during the fluctuation display of the special figure 2, and lights up the losing state during the stop display of the special figure 2. Or it lights in the lighting mode of jackpot. 35 to 68 show the speaker 120 and the effect buttons 136 and 136z.

  FIG. 35 is a diagram showing step by step an example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  As shown in FIG. 35 (a), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a user interface (UI) unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a change icon at the center thereof. h0 is displayed in a state of being placed on a pedestal, and a hold icon display area in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed is formed on the left side of the variation icon h0. At the timing shown in FIG. 35 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode (white circular display mode). Further, a tutorial display section TT1 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and various information relating to games and effects is displayed (tutorial display), and the contents are updated at an appropriate timing. Is done. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 35A, “Panda is a Tono-sama teacher” is displayed, and the relationship between the panda character and the Tono-sama character is described. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not limited to the explanation display, but may be a notice display or a demonstration effect display, or may not be displayed. Here, as a tutorial display, an explanation about the character that appears, an explanation about a notice (for example, a timer notice), and the like are displayed. Note that the jackpot expectation degree may be notified according to a display mode of the tutorial display (for example, displayed in blue or displayed in red). In this case, this tutorial display may be a notice display of a position in the notice display. In the present specification, for the sake of convenience, the displayed display is described as a tutorial display. That is, it can be said that the tutorial display part TT1 in this effect example is an area for displaying something. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. The UI unit UI3 is preferentially displayed during the display of the decorative symbols in a variable manner and is provided in an area that does not overlap with the display area of the decorative symbols, but may overlap with the display area of the decorative symbols. As described above, the UI unit UI3 functions as a display frame that configures the hold icon display region, the variable icon display region, and the tutorial display unit TT1. In addition, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 35A has a default display mode displayed in blue, and the display mode may change according to the progress of the game.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 as an explanation display unit for displaying the name of the stage and reach currently being performed is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 35A, “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, a reception number display 850 indicating the number of receptions of the operation of the effect button 136 is displayed at the center of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M. In the example shown in FIG. 35 (a), the character string image reception count display 850 of “0 more” is displayed, and the operation button 136 has been operated for 0 times. A stock button image 852 simulating the effect button 136 is displayed below the reception count display 850. The stock button image 852 has three lines drawn at equal intervals in the vertical direction, and the stock button image 852 is divided into four regions. The stock button image 852 also functions as a meter by changing the display color of these divided areas from white to, for example, green. In the example shown in FIG. 35A, all four areas of the stock button image 852 are displayed in white, and the meter is zero.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. This Tono-sama character may be called a navigation character. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. Note that the Tono-sama character may or may not be displayed at all times. Further, the stage name display unit ST1 and the character of Tono-sama may be configured to be a display included in the UI part UI3, or to be displayed so that at least a part thereof overlaps the front side of the UI part UI3.

  Further, a family crest member 224E, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and can move in the vertical direction and rotate according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. Further, the family crest member 224E includes a light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes depending on the contents of the production. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged, and each moves in the vertical direction according to the effect contents. It is configured to be able to. In addition, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa and the shogun character 224Fb each have a built-in light emitting means such as a full color LED, and can emit light in various light emission modes according to the contents of the production.

  As shown in FIG. 35B, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state in which the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is closed by a shutter image. In other words, a display (shutter image display) before another display (display of “in preparation”) is performed instead of a certain display (explanation display) in a certain area (tutorial display section TT1). It can be said. Note that at least a part of the character display that was displayed before the shutter image was displayed during the display of the shutter image may be displayed.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (c), the state in which the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image is shown. This shutter image can be said to be a pre-preparation image preview display that is displayed before the display of the pre-preparation image RDY, which will be described later, is started. In addition, the shutter image may be displayed when the notice display is performed on the tutorial display unit TT1. Further, the shutter image may be configured to be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes so that the big hit expectation varies depending on the display mode of the shutter image. The display mode of the shutter image may be displayed in only one type. It may be configured not to show the big hit expectation degree only.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35D, a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 that has been closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is displayed open by a predetermined open animation. When the shutter image is released, the tutorial display unit TT1 displays a preparing image RDY on which characters “preparing” are displayed. In other words, the image RDY in preparation is displayed so as to overlap the display area of the tutorial display unit TT1, and can be said to overlap the UI unit UI3. At the timing shown in FIG. 35D, the background color of the image RDY being prepared is green, that is, the display mode of the image RDY being prepared shown in FIG. 35D is the default display mode. . Note that the image RDY being prepared can be changed to a plurality of types of display modes, and even when the image RDY being prepared is displayed in a display mode different from the default display mode (for example, the background color is red) when the display of the image RDY being prepared It may be possible to change to another display mode after the display is started in the default display mode. In the case where the shutter image described above can be displayed in a plurality of types of display modes, it may be related to the display mode of the image being prepared RDY. For example, when the shutter image is red, a red preparing image RDY may be displayed (easy to be displayed). This effect example is configured such that a certain effect (for example, a timer notice, a mini game, or the like) may be performed on the tutorial display unit TT1 by displaying the image RDY in preparation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (e), the UI unit UI3 is shown changing from a blue display mode to a gold display mode. In this effect example, it is suggested that the display mode of the hold icon is easily changed by setting the display mode of the UI unit UI3 to the golden display mode. That is, the UI part UI3 in the golden display mode functions as a pre-reading notice. As described above, when the UI unit UI3 is displayed in the gold display mode, the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when it is displayed in the blue display mode. Note that the UI part UI3 in the gold display mode may function as a notice of the symbol variation display, or function as a direct pre-read notice display, not as a change notice of the display mode of the hold icon. There may be cases. Further, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 may be configured to be in a default mode before the hold icon (pre-read target hold icon) whose display mode has changed is digested, or whether or not the pre-read target change has been determined. It may be configured so as to be in a default mode after a display (for example, display of a decorative symbol indicating a big hit or a loss) is performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (f), a ninja character NJ4 is displayed in the upper right part of the tutorial display portion TT1. The ninja character NJ4 is a character that may be displayed when the display mode of the hold icon is changed. In this production example, the ninja character NJ4 is displayed so as to overlap the tutorial display portion TT1 on which the image RDY being prepared is displayed. Therefore, when the image RDY being prepared and the character NJ4 of the ninja can be noted. There is.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (g), the on-hold change animation has started, and the ninja character NJ4 throws a shuriken toward the first on-hold icon h11. A state of hitting the hold icon h11 is shown. At this time, the entire first hold icon h11 is covered by the effect EF4, and is in a state of difficulty in visual recognition as compared with a state where the effect EF4 is not covered. Note that the effect EF4 is also displayed on the hold icon adjacent to the target hold icon, and as a result, as shown in FIG. 35 (g), the effect 2 is arranged next to the first hold icon h11. A part of the first hold icon h12 is also overlapped with the effect EF4. In this effect example, it can be said that the hold change animation performed before the hold icon changes functions as the hold change pre-effect display. The hold change prior effect display may include the display of the ninja character NJ4, that is, a series of animations from when the display of the hold icon is changed after the display of the ninja character NJ4 is started. May be used as a pending change prior effect display. Moreover, it is good also as a pending | holding change prior effect display only with the display of ninja character NJ4. In addition, the display of the ninja character NJ4 displayed after the hold change may or may not be included in the hold change prior effect display. Note that the display mode of the hold icon may not change even if the hold change animation is performed. Moreover, the structure by which the display of the image RDY in preparation is started after the effect display regarding Ninja character NJ4 may be sufficient. Conversely, the ninja character NJ4 may be configured not to display the image RDY being prepared. Moreover, it may be configured such that the image RDY being prepared is more likely to appear when there is a hold icon displayed in the pre-read mode than when there is no hold icon. According to this configuration, the state in which the hold icon has changed after the appearance of the ninja character NJ4 can be expected to appear in the image RDY being prepared. It may function as a prior notification of a different object, such as an icon change and a ready image RDY, or a subject change different from the pre-reading notice and the notice.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (h) shows a state in which the effect EF4 is deleted and the first hold icon h11 is displayed in a state in which the display mode is changed. The first hold icon h11 shown in FIG. 35 (h) has been changed from the default display mode to the red display mode. The family crest member 224E also emits red light in accordance with the display mode of the first hold icon h11. Note that the crest character 224E may be emitted in red after the first hold icon h11 starts to be displayed in red, or the first crest icon 224E may be emitted in red. The hold icon h11 may start displaying in a red display mode, or the crest character 224E may emit red light at the timing when the first hold icon h11 starts displaying in a red display mode.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 35 (i), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the pending change animation ends, and the ninja character NJ4 is erased. In addition, the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol, the right symbol, and the middle symbol, and are stopped and displayed with the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7”. This “decoration 3—decoration 5—decoration 7” combination of decorative symbols is a combination of loses, but is also a chance eye combination. That is, the pre-reading notice is performed by deriving and displaying the combination of chances. Opportunities are easily derived and displayed when the hold icon is displayed in the pre-read display mode, but the chances are displayed with an appropriate probability regardless of the display mode of the hold icon. May be. Further, it may be configured such that when the chance eyes are displayed, the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the chance eyes are not displayed. It should be noted that after the ninja character NJ4 is erased, the decorative symbol stop display may be performed sequentially, or after the decorative symbol sequential stop display is started, the ninja character NJ4 may be erased. Further, the decorative symbols may be sequentially stopped and displayed at the timing when the ninja character NJ4 is deleted. Although the variation icon h0 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 35 (i), the variation icon h0 may be deleted at the timing when the symbol is fixedly displayed.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 35 (j), the hold icons h11 and h12 are respectively moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the display of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The hold icon at the position is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed and becomes the change icon h0, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11. , Move on the corresponding pedestal. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (j), the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the tutorial display unit TT1, the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed, that is, the image RDY being prepared is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. On the other hand, the ninja character NJ4 displayed in the previous symbol variation display is a display that is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, but may be displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays. . On the other hand, the Tono-sama character displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N can be said to be a character displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (k), a state where “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol respectively and a reach state is formed is shown. The “decoration 4” displayed on the left and right are respectively swaying fluctuations, and the middle symbols are variably displayed at high speed. Note that the display screen may be darkened as a notice effect before reaching the reach state, and the UI unit UI3 may be temporarily hidden. However, until the super reach is started, the UI unit UI3 is basically It is not hidden.

  After that, FIG. 35 (l) shows a state of transition to super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the image RDY being prepared. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. Note that the operation of the crest character 224E may be started after the super reach transition display is started, or the super reach transition display may be started after the operation of the crest character 224E is started. The operation of the family crest character 224E may be started at the timing when the reach shift display is started. Also, in this production example, when transitioning to at least swordsman reach among the super reach, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI part UI3 is framed out together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display part TT1. , Hidden. The UI unit UI3 may be hidden before the super reach transition display is started. Thus, in this effect example, when shifting to a specific super reach, the UI unit UI3 is hidden, and at least the hold icon is hidden. Moreover, the structure which displays the reach name (title) of SP reach may be sufficient, and you may comprise so that UI part UI3 may be non-displayed in the state in which the reach name of SP reach is displayed at least. In addition, in the configuration in which a frame is displayed around the image being prepared RDY, the display of the frame may be a part of the UI unit UI3. In this configuration, it can be said that not all of the UI unit UI3 is hidden, but a part of the UI unit UI3 is hidden. In addition, when the image RDY being prepared is not displayed, the surrounding frame is not displayed. In this case, it can be said that all of the UI unit UI3 is not displayed. That is, it can be said that the non-display range of the UI part UI3 after the super reach transition is different depending on whether or not the image RDY being prepared is displayed in the state before the transition to the super reach. The display of the image RDY being prepared is not configured to be able to specify a certain notice display or a certain aspect of the effect. Note that the UI unit UI3 may not be hidden even when the swordsman reach is reached.

  FIG. 35 (m) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Further, when the image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, only the image RDY being prepared is displayed, and the tutorial display unit TT1 itself is framed out together with the UI unit UI3. That is, in the image RDY in preparation, the display position in the state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed and the display position after being hidden are the same position. The family crest member 224E is moved downward and returned to the initial position. Here, the crestman 224E may return to the initial position after the start of the swordsman reach, the swordsman reach may start after the crestman 224E returns to the initial position, or the crestman 224E. The swordsman reach may be started at the timing when returns to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (n), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to visually recognize than the state where it is not overlapped with the effect EF5. . That is, it can be said that the display of the image RDY in preparation is finished, and it can also be said that the display before the start of a certain notice display is started. Furthermore, it can be said that a certain notice display itself is started by the display of the effect EF5. Furthermore, in this effect example, it can also be said that the image RDY being prepared is displayed (hidden) when the hold icon is in the non-display state (the UI unit UI3 is in the display state).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (o), a state is shown in which the mini game is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. This mini game is an example of a notice display that is started after the display of the image RDY in preparation is finished, but the mini game may be started without going through the display of the image RDY in preparation. In this case, the big win symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the case of passing through the display of the image RDY in preparation than in the case of not passing through the display of the image RDY in preparation. In this example, the display of the image being prepared RDY is ended and the mini game is started. However, the display of the image RDY being prepared may be ended and the timer notice effect may be started. Further, the result of the determination of success / failure may be displayed suddenly, for example, the characters “iron plate” are displayed without the mini game or the timer notice effect. When the mini game is started, Tono-sama's mini character MC1 and target TGT are displayed. The target TGT is configured by an area divided into four equal parts, and at least one of the four areas (the upper area in the production example shown in FIG. 35 (o)) is the winning area. The hit area is hit with an arrow, and a reliable announcement of the jackpot is made. Note that the number of hit areas is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit areas, the entire area may be hit, or the entire area may be a non-hit area. In a configuration in which there are a plurality of types of mini games and timer notices, a certain type of mini game and timer notice may be configured to always pass through the display of the image RDY being prepared (Configuration 1). Conversely, another type of mini game or timer notice may be configured (configuration 2) so as not to go through the display of the image RDY being prepared. Both Configuration 1 and Configuration 2 may be provided, or either one may be provided.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (p), the state where the arrow emitted by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 is stuck in the area hitting the target TGT is shown. That is, a state of great success as a result of the mini game as the notice display is shown. In addition, you may comprise so that the display which shows the result of a mini game may be displayed by the cut different from the cut shown in FIG.35 (p). It should be noted that the display of another cut may be performed regardless of success or failure, or may be configured to be performed only in the case of a specific result. In this effect example, when a certain notice display is a mini game, the result display part of the mini game may be a certain effect. In the case where a certain notice display is a mini game, the display of “iron plate” may be a second certain effect, or may be configured such that a second certain effect is performed after a certain effect.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 35 (q), the characters “iron plate” are displayed on the square background, and the iron plate image TP tilted about 15 degrees counterclockwise is displayed. . This iron plate image TP is a notice display for notifying that the big hit is confirmed. Thus, in this production example, it can be said that the notice display according to the result of the mini game is performed, that is, another notice display according to the result of the notice display is performed. Further, in this effect example, when the timer notice effect is performed instead of the mini game, it can be said that the notice display is performed when the countdown of the timer display is completed and becomes zero. In addition, when a timer notice effect is performed, another notice display may be displayed in the state after the countdown is completed and becomes 0 in one cushion (for example, the countdown is completed). Including the start of another notice immediately before it reaches 0).

  FIG. 36 is a diagram showing step by step another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. Note that at least one example of a plurality of other examples may be provided, or conversely, at least one example may be omitted. The same applies to the following drawings.

  FIG. 36 (a1) is an effect following FIG. 35 (l). In the description of the present embodiment, the exemplification is illustrated as a continuation of the production example in FIG. 35, but the production may be performed in another scene, or may be performed only as a continuation of the production example in FIG. Also good. The same applies to the following drawings. 36 (a1) to FIG. 36 (a3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 35 (m) to FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 36 (a4), a state is shown in which the arrow emitted by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 deviates from the target TGT and flies to a region different from the target TGT. That is, a state in which the mini-game as the notice display has failed is displayed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (a5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L does not display the iron plate image TP, and shows that the swordsman reach is continuously performed. In this production example, when only the difference between failure or success of the mini game is made, it is easier to finally determine and display the jackpot symbol when the mini game is successful. In addition, a timer notice effect may be performed instead of a mini game, for example, a false timer notice effect that displays nothing even when the countdown of the timer display is completed and becomes 0 may be displayed. When the countdown is completed and becomes 0, an effect with low reliability (for example, a character “chance” is displayed somewhere small) may be performed.

  FIG. 36 (b1) is also an effect following FIG. 35 (l). 36 (b1) to FIG. 36 (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 35 (m) to FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 36 (b4), the arrow emitted by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 hits the target TGT but shows a state where it is stuck in the non-contact area. In other words, this production example shows that the mini-game is successful but not very successful.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (b5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a princess cut-in image HCI on which a “chance” character and a princess character are displayed on a background of horizontal stripes. ing. In this production example, if you compare the success of the mini game or the great success, it will be easier to finally display the big hit symbol when it is a great success than when it is a success. .

  FIG. 36 (c1) is also an effect following FIG. 35 (l). 36 (c1) to FIG. 36 (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 35 (m) to FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 36 (c3), a mini-game different from the mini-game shown in FIG. 35 (o) is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It is shown. The mini game shown in FIG. 36 (c3) is also an example of a notice display that starts after the display of the image RDY in preparation is finished. When the mini game is started, the cylindrical drum DRM extending in the horizontal direction starts to rotate with the horizontal direction as a rotation axis. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed. In this production example, the mini game shown in FIG. 36 (c3) is started more easily than the mini game shown in FIG. 35 (o). The mini game shown in (o) may be configured to be more successful. In addition, when the mini game shown in FIG. 36 (c3) is started, the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the mini game shown in FIG. 35 (o) is started. However, the mini game shown in FIG. 35 (o) may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 36 (c4), the drum DRM is stopped and the symbol on which the characters “iron plate” are displayed is derived, and a state in which the mini game is very successful is shown.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 36 (c5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the iron plate image TP is displayed, and a state in which a notice effect of confirming the big hit is being performed is shown.

  35, the mini game is performed in the effect shown in FIG. 35, but the timer notice effect may be performed in the effect example shown in FIG. 36, or vice versa. . Moreover, both timer notice effects may be performed, and in this case, the background color and the countdown time may be different.

  FIG. 37 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  FIG. 37 (a1) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In this effect example, unlike FIG. 35 (m), the image RDY in preparation is not displayed. In FIG. 37 (a1), the change icon h0 is in a red display mode, and accordingly, the crest character 224E is also in a red light emission mode.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 37 (a2), a state in which the mini game is started is shown. This effect example shows a state in which the mini game is started without going through the display of the image RDY being prepared. In this case, the big win symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed in the case of passing through the display of the image RDY in preparation than in the case of not passing through the display of the image RDY in preparation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 37 (a3), a state in which the arrow emitted by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 is stuck in the target area of the target TGT is shown. That is, a state of great success as a result of the mini game as the notice display is shown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 37 (a4), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed.

  As described above, in this production example, the example in which the mini game is started without displaying the image RDY in preparation is shown, but this may be executed only during super reach, It may be executed not only during the super reach, but may be configured to be executed even during the super reach. In addition, after the third display is finished in the first state, there may be a pattern in which a certain notice display (a certain effect) is performed from the first state to the second state. Also good. In addition, a certain notice display (a certain effect) performed after the third display is finished in the first state may extend over the next change. And after a 3rd display is complete | finished in a 2nd state, a certain notice display (especially a certain production | presentation) may start at least in this 2nd state, and may be complete | finished.

  FIG. 37 (b1) is an effect following FIG. 35 (l). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 37 (b1) to (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 35 (m) to (n), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 37 (b3), a state in which a timer notice effect is started instead of the mini game is shown in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. This timer notice effect is also an example of a notice display that is started after the display of the image RDY in preparation is finished. When the timer notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of the countdown, when “0:00” indicating 0 second is reached, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 37 (b3), “10:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. In addition, after the countdown is started, there may be a case where a fake timer notice effect is started in which the timer notice effect ends before “0:00”. In addition, it may be easier for the jackpot symbol to be finally displayed when the timer notice effect is started than when the mini game is started, or it may be easier than when the timer notice effect is started. In the event that is started, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily. Note that the timer notice effect in the present embodiment is a certain effect display (for example, in a display area different from the display area in which the timer display is performed after “0:00” indicating 0 second is obtained as a result of the countdown. , The iron plate image TP) is performed, but after “0:00” indicating 0 second is reached, another effect display (for example, “iron plate” is displayed in the display area where the timer display is performed). Display in a display area that is different from the display area in which the timer display is performed after performing a display capable of specifying a certain effect display or a display related to a certain effect display such as “chance”. You may comprise so that effect display (for example, iron plate image TP) may be performed. Further, the timer notice effect in the present embodiment is configured to display up to “0:00” indicating 0 seconds as a result of the countdown, but displays up to “1” indicating 1 second, or , “00:01” may be displayed. Specifically, “10” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. Then, after “1” is displayed, another effect display (for example, a certain effect display such as “iron plate” can be specified in the display area where the timer display has been performed, or “chance” is displayed. After performing such a display related to a certain effect display), a certain effect display (for example, iron plate image TP) may be performed in a display area different from the display area where the timer display is performed ( Here, the countdown display may be until “1” is displayed, until just before another effect display is displayed, or until another effect display is displayed. ). The time from when “1” is displayed until the display of another effect display is started is the same (substantially the same) as the time from when “2” is displayed until the display of “1” is started. (That is, it is displayed at the timing of “0” in “2” → “1” → “0”) or may be different. In addition, when a pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed as a certain effect display, a display indicating “NEXT” or “continuation” may be displayed as another effect display. In addition, a timer display (for example, “10:00”) is displayed immediately after the display of the image RDY in preparation is completed, but after the display of the image RDY in preparation is completed, another display is displayed. (For example, a display indicating that the timer display is counted up from 0 or a display related to the timer display such as “until the next chance increases, after”) is displayed. You may comprise so that another display may not be displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 37 (b4), as a result of the countdown, the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 37 (b5), the iron plate image TP as the notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the timer notice effect is a notice display of displaying the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In each effect example shown in the present embodiment, effects other than the iron plate image TP may be performed as a certain effect.

  FIG. 37 (c1) to FIG. 37 (c3) are effects following FIG. 37 (b2). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 37 (c1), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. In the timer notice effect shown in FIG. 37 (c1), in addition to the timer display, the remaining time display meter MT4 is displayed in a region different from the region where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. The display mode of the remaining time display meter MT4 changes so as to gradually become shorter corresponding to the remaining time of the timer display. Then, the remaining time display meter MT4 disappears at the timing when the timer display becomes “0:00”. In this effect example, a state in which the timer notice effect is performed is shown by the display by numbers in the timer display and the display in a display mode other than the numbers. Note that only a decrease display of the meter by the remaining time display meter MT4 is first performed, and for example, when the remaining time becomes 3 seconds, a countdown by a timer display may be started. In this case, the decrease rate of the remaining time display meter MT4 may change before and after the countdown by the timer display starts. In addition, two or more remaining time display meters having different remaining times may be provided, each of which may be displayed in a length corresponding to the remaining time, or two or more remaining time display meters having the same remaining time but different lengths may be provided. It may be displayed. In this case, for example, the decrease rate of the longer remaining time display meter may be faster than the decrease rate of the shorter remaining time display meter. In addition, when a plurality of remaining time display meters are displayed, different notice displays may be performed when the remaining time display meters disappear. Further, two or more remaining time display meters having the same length may be provided so that the decreasing speeds thereof are different.

  Further, in this effect example, an effect of extending the execution time of the timer notice effect may be performed. For example, when the effect is extended, the number 0 may be deleted and the meter may be restored again. Further, the length of the meter may be different depending on the timer notice time. Moreover, the decreasing speed of the meter may not be constant, and for example, it may not decrease at a constant speed at a certain timing. Also, a plurality of meters may be displayed, and the length of a certain meter is long. For example, the rate of decrease may be increased from the middle, so that it may be shorter than the length of the other meter. Moreover, the rate of decrease of the meter may not be constant. For example, the rate of decrease may be faster or slower in a state where numbers are also displayed.

  FIG. 38 is a diagram showing an example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment in a stepwise manner.

  FIG. 38 (a1) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In this effect example, unlike FIG. 35 (m), the image RDY in preparation is not displayed. Thereafter, after the reach effect is performed as shown in FIGS. 38 (a2) to (a3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. A pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are displayed from the upper left and right of the screen. Here, the united animation may be referred to as button production introduction animation or fade-in animation (IN animation). This semi-transparent button image 136q notifies that the button image 136a is materialized and the button notice effect is started by being combined. Here, the introduction animation may be included in the button notice effect. The pair of semi-transparent button images 136q move toward the center while being close to each other. In this example, the example in which the two translucent button images 136q are combined has been described. For example, an effect in which the four translucent button images 136q are combined may be performed. In this case, two translucent buttons are displayed. The button image 136a is instantiated and the button notice effect is more easily started when the effect that the four translucent button images 136q are combined is performed than when the effect that the image 136q is combined is performed. It may be. Note that the operation of the effect button 136 is not yet accepted during the display of the combined animation. In addition, when a deca button image 136aL, which will be described later, is displayed and a button notice effect is started, a merge animation may be performed using the same translucent button image 136q, or by a translucent button image corresponding to the deca button image 136aL. A coalesced animation may be performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 38 (a5), a pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are shown closer together.

  When the coalesced animation is successful, as shown in FIG. 38 (a6), the button image 136a is materialized and the button notice effect is started. When the button notice effect is started, the operation of the effect button 136 is accepted, a character “press” is displayed together with an animation indicating that the button image 136a is pressed, and the button image 136a is further left below. A time meter MT is displayed to notify the remaining time of the operation reception period. The effect button lamp 138 provided on the effect button 136 also emits red light in response to the start of the operation valid period. The button notice effect may be started after the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is started, or the operation reception period of the effect button 136 may be started after the button notice effect is started.

  FIG. 38 (b1) to FIG. 38 (b6) show modified examples of the effects shown in FIG. 37 (b1) to FIG. 37 (b5). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 38 (b1) to (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 37 (b1) to (b3), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 38 (b4) shows a state in which the above-described combined animation starts when the timer display countdown is performed in the timer notice effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer preview display indicates “2:00”, indicating that a preview display corresponding to the timer preview effect is performed after 2 seconds. Here, the timing at which the translucent button image 136q is merged by the merge animation corresponds to the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed. And the timer notice effect indicate that the start of the button notice effect has been announced. In addition, even if the timer notice effect is started and the timer display is displayed, the countdown may not be started immediately, and the timer display may be counted down in accordance with the start of the combined animation. According to this, there is a case where the notice effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect being performed can be easily specified. In addition, during the display of the combined animation, the display of the image being prepared RDY may be terminated and the timer notice effect may be started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 38 (b5), a pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are closer to each other, and a state immediately before the combination is completed is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer notice display is “0:00”, indicating that the countdown is completed. Note that the timer display may be “0:00” after the merge animation is completed, or the timer display may be “0:00” at the timing when the merge animation is completed.

  FIG. 38 (b6) shows a state in which the united animation is successful, the deca button image 136aL is materialized, the button notice effect is started, and the operation acceptance state is started. In this effect example, the deca button image 136aL is more easily displayed when both the timer notice effect and the united animation are performed than when only one of the timer notice effect and the united animation is performed. It has become. Further, in this effect example, when the effect button 136 is operated in a state where the deca button image 136aL is displayed, for example, the iron plate image TP is displayed.

  FIG. 38 (c1) is a modification of the effects shown in FIGS. 38 (b3) to (b6). The effects shown in FIGS. 38 (c1) to (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 38 (b3) to (b4).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 38 (c3), a state immediately before the pairing of semi-transparent button images 136q comes close to each other and the combination is completed is shown. In the effect example shown in FIG. 38 (c3), when the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q come close to each other, the effect EF6 overlaps at least part of the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q, rather than the state where they do not overlap. The translucent button image 136q is difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, the player may have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the combined animation is successful.

  When the combined animation is successful, the button notice effect by the big button image 136aL is started as shown in FIG. 38 (c4). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 38 (c4) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 38 (b6), and thus detailed description thereof is omitted.

  As described above, the effect example shown in FIG. 38 is also shown for an example in which the image RDY in preparation ends during execution of super reach. Note that there may or may not be a pattern in which the display of the preparing image RDY ends and the timer notice starts while the introductory animation is displayed.

  FIG. 39 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 39 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 39 (a), since one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode, that is, a display mode for the change notice, and the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the image RDY being prepared is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. In this preparing image RDY, the background color is red, and the jackpot symbol is easier to be finally displayed than in the case of the green background color which is the default display mode. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 39A is in a default display form displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 39A, “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is informed that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Further, a family crest member 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and a red light emission mode is set in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 39B, the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to visually recognize than the state where it is not overlapped with the effect EF5. . That is, the end effect of displaying the image RDY in preparation is started. Thus, in this effect example, it can be said that the display of the image RDY in preparation other than the super reach is finished.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 39 (c), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 (that is, the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed). ing. When the timer notice effect is started, a timer display is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, and then the countdown starts. In the effect example shown in FIG. 39C, “90:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. The background color of the timer display is red following the background color of the image RDY being prepared. In this production example, a state in which the timer notice production is started before the super reach is developed is shown. The timer display that is displayed when the timer notice effect is started is a long time of “90:00”, and it can be estimated that the symbol variation display time is long, so that the expectation for the big hit may be improved. Thus, in this effect example, when the displayed timer display time is displayed for a long time (long time) such as “90:00”, the time is relatively short such as “10:00”. It is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than when it is displayed with (short time). In this effect example, since the background color of the image RDY being prepared is red, the timer display is likely to be started in a long time in the timer notice effect. Further, in this effect example, since the timer display is long time and the background is red, the reliability of the big hit is dramatically improved.

  FIG. 39 (d) shows a state of transition to super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. For this reason, the fluctuation icon h0 and a part of the hold icon (for example, the hold icon h11) are difficult to visually recognize because the family crest member 224E is overlapped. Also, the family crest character 224E overlaps with a part of the timer notice display during the countdown display of the timer display. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 39D, the timer display is “30:00”.

  FIG. 39 (e) shows a state in which the above-described combined animation starts when the timer display countdown is performed in the timer notice effect. At this time, the timer display in the timer preview display indicates “2:00”, indicating that a preview display corresponding to the timer preview effect is performed after 2 seconds. Again, the timing at which the translucent button image 136q is merged by the merge animation corresponds to the timing at which the countdown of the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed. And the timer notice effect indicate that the start of the button notice effect is forewarned.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 39 (f), a pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are closer to each other, and a state immediately before the combination is completed is shown. At this time, the timer display of the timer notice display is “0:00”, indicating that the countdown is completed. In this production example, the background color of the timer notice display is red, and the jackpot symbol is easier to be confirmed and displayed than when the default background color is displayed, but it may be the same. Note that the reliability of the jackpot may be the same when the timer notice display is the default background color and when the timer background display color is the red background color.

  FIG. 39 (g) shows a state in which the coalesced animation is successful, the deca button image 136aL is materialized and the button notice effect is started, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed to start the operation acceptance state. Yes. In this effect example, the longer the time for which the timer counts down in the timer display, the easier it is to win.

  FIG. 40 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 40 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 40 (a1), since one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode, that is, a display mode for the change notice, and the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. The family crest character 224E has a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the image RDY being prepared is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 40 (a1). This preparing image RDY has a green background and is in a default display mode. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 40A1 has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 40 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight-generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 40 (a2), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to visually recognize than the state where it is not overlapped with the effect EF5. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 40 (a3), a state is shown in which the mini game is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. When the mini game is started, Tono-sama's mini character MC1 and target TGT are displayed. The target TGT is made up of regions divided into four equal parts, and the upper region of the four regions is the winning region. High notice is being made. In this production example, a state in which a mini game is being performed before the transition to super reach is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 40 (a4), a state where an arrow emitted by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 is stuck in a target area of the target TGT is shown. That is, a state of great success as a result of the mini game as the notice display is shown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 40 (a5), since the mini game was very successful, the display mode of the change icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode, that is, the change icon h0. The notice by is ranked up. The family crest member 224E also emits light in gold according to the display color of the variation icon h0. Note that the crest character 224E may be changed from the red light emission mode to the gold light emission mode after the change icon h0 changes from the red display mode to the gold display mode, or the family crest character 224E emits red light. The change icon h0 may change from a red display mode to a gold display mode after changing to a mode or a gold light emission mode, or the timing at which the change icon h0 changes from a red display mode to a gold display mode Thus, the family crest character 224E may be changed from a red light emission mode to a gold light emission mode. In the tutorial display unit TT1, the closing operation using the shutter image is started, and the display of the displayed mini game is shifted to a state where it cannot be visually recognized using the shutter image. Note that the closing operation by the shutter image may be started after the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed, or the display mode of the variation icon h0 may be changed after the closing operation by the shutter image is started. The closing operation by the shutter image may be started at a timing when the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 changes. In this example, the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed as a result of the mini game. However, the hold icon may be changed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 40 (a6), the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. Thereby, the display of the mini game is completely erased by the shutter image.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 40 (a7), a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 closed by the shutter image. At this time, the tutorial display unit TT1 is in a non-display state in which no display is performed. Note that when the shutter image is released, the tutorial display may be started, or another notice display, timer notice display, or mini-game may be started. Alternatively, a grayed-out display may be performed after the shutter image is released.

  Subsequently, an example showing a state in which the mini game is started without displaying the image RDY being prepared will be described with reference to FIGS. 40 (b1) to (b8).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 40 (b1), since one variable display of Special Figure 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 is in a red display mode and is displayed as a notice. The hold icon h11 is in a default display mode. In the tutorial display section TT1, “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed, and the relationship between the panda character and the lord of the character is described. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 40B1 has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 40 (b2), a state is shown in which the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is closed by the shutter image. Thereby, the explanation display displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 is hidden.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 40 (b3), the state in which the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image is shown. This shutter image can be said to be a mini-game notice display that is displayed before the display of a mini-game to be described later is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 40 (b4), a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 that has been closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is displayed open by a predetermined open animation. In this effect example, when the shutter image is released, a mini game is started on the tutorial display section TT1. That is, in this production example, a state in which the mini game starts is shown instead of the explanation display that has been performed so far. It can also be said that the mini game starts without displaying the image RDY in preparation. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 40 (b4) to (b8) are performed. 40 (b4) to FIG. 40 (b8) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 40 (a3) to FIG. It should be noted that after the mini game is over, explanation display may be performed on the tutorial display unit TT1, or grayed out display may be performed.

  FIG. 41 is a diagram showing stepwise display examples in the tutorial display unit TT1 applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 41 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 41 (a1), since one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode, that is, a display mode for the change notice, and the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. The family crest character 224E has a red light emission mode in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. Further, a tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. And the relationship between Tono-sama's character. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 41A1 has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 41 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight-generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  As shown in FIG. 41 (a2), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the tutorial display unit TT1 of the UI unit UI3 is closed by the shutter image. That is, it can be said that display (shutter image display) before another display (preliminary display) is performed instead of a certain display (explanation display) in a certain region (tutorial display section TT1). . Note that at least a part of the character display that was displayed before the shutter image was displayed during the display of the shutter image may be displayed.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 41 (a3), the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This shutter image can be said to be a display before the notice display that is displayed before the notice display described later is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 41 (a4), a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display portion TT1 closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is displayed open by a predetermined open animation. In the tutorial display section TT1, when the shutter image is released, a notice display made up of the characters “Intense heat” is displayed instead of the image RDY being prepared, the mini game, and the timer notice effect. The notice display of “Intense heat” may be displayed as a result of a mini game or a timer notice effect. In this case, if the mini-game or timer notice effect is displayed as a result, the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed than when the mini-game or timer notice effect is displayed. Good. In addition, the notice display of “extreme heat” may not be displayed as a result of the mini game or the timer notice effect. Further, in this effect example, it is not necessary to perform an effect of closing the tutorial display portion TT1 with a shutter image before performing a notice display such as “Intense heat”.

  41 (b1) to FIG. 41 (b8) show an effect example showing how the notice icon appears in the tutorial display unit TT1. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 41 (b1) to (b3) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 41 (a1) to (a3), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 41 (b4), a state in which the shutter image is opened is shown in the tutorial display unit TT1 closed by the shutter image. At this time, the shutter image is displayed open by a predetermined open animation. The tutorial display unit TT1 shows a state in which a timer notice notice icon I81 appears to notify that the timer notice effect is performed when the shutter image is released. Thereby, it is foretold that the timer notice effect will be performed. Other notice icons may appear.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 41 (b5), the timer notice notice icon I81 displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 jumps out of the tutorial display section TT1 and moves upward while expanding. The situation is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 41 (b6), the closing operation using the shutter image is started in the tutorial display unit TT1.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 41 (b7), the tutorial display portion TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. This makes it difficult to visually recognize the display state in the tutorial display unit TT1. In this production example, until the shutter image is completely closed, the state in which the timer notice notice icon I81 is displayed is informed that the timer notice notice icon I81 is stocked. The image may be deleted when the closing operation by the shutter image is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 41 (b8), a state in which the shutter image is opened in the tutorial display unit TT1 that has been closed by the shutter image is shown. At this time, the shutter image is displayed open by a predetermined open animation. The tutorial display unit TT1 displays a ready image RDY when the shutter image is released. At the timing shown in FIG. 41 (b8), the image RDY in preparation is in a default display mode. This in-preparation image RDY is displayed when the timer notice notice icon I81 is stocked. That is, the start of the timer notice effect is notified by displaying the image RDY in preparation. In this example, the display mode of the image being prepared RDY for notifying the start of the timer preview effect is the same as the display mode of the image RDY being prepared for notifying the start of the mini game. It may be. In addition, a mini game or a timer notice effect may be started without displaying the in-preparation image RDY.

  FIG. 42 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. Here, even if the end timing of the third display, the start and end timing of a certain notice display, and the start and end timing of a certain effect are different states among the subdivided states of the second state It may be the same state.

  FIG. 42 (a1) is an effect following FIG. 35 (l). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 36 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 35 (m), and a description thereof will be omitted. Note that, in the effect shown in FIG. 42 (a1), display may be started after the image RDY being prepared has developed into super reach.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 42 (a2), the animation of the duel scene continues, and then, as shown in FIG. 42 (a3), the main character Tono wins the enemy swordsman, A combination of decorative patterns of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4” is derived, and fluctuation fluctuation is started. At this time, the image RDY in preparation is still displayed. In other words, it can be said that the image RDY being prepared is displayed in a state where the display indicating that it is a big hit is being made. In order to congratulate that it is a big hit, the family crest character 224E, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, and the general character 224Fb emit light in a rainbow display manner that emits light in multiple colors.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 42 (a4), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, and the display state is more difficult to visually recognize than the state where it is not overlapped with the effect EF5. ing.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (a5), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the timer notice effect is started in the area where the image RDY in preparation is displayed. When the timer notice effect is started, the timer display is displayed in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed, and then the countdown starts. As a result of the countdown, when “0:00” indicating 0 second is reached, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 42 (a5), “3:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started. In addition, after the countdown is started, there may be a case where a fake timer notice effect is started in which the timer notice effect ends before “0:00”.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 42 (a6), as a result of the countdown, the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 42 (a7), the character “Go” is displayed in the display area where the timer display is performed, and a notice effect is started. Yes. The display of the character “Go” may or may not be performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 42 (a8), a state in which the promotion effect of the big hit symbol is started is shown. Then, as shown in FIG. 42 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the deca button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT to notify that the operation effective period of the effect button 136 has started. The display of the big button image 136aL corresponds to a certain notice effect, that is, corresponds to the notice effect executed as a result of the timer notice effect being performed. Here, for example, when the timer notice effect is not performed, the jackpot symbol promotion effect may not be started, and when the jackpot symbol promotion effect is started, the default display is displayed instead of the deca button image 136aL. The mode button image 136a may be displayed. Also, a mini game may be played instead of the timer notice effect. Further, even when the timer notice effect or the mini game is not performed, the big button image 136aL may be displayed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (a9), the big hit of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is obtained from the combination of the ornamental symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 4” It is notified that the probabilistic big hit has been confirmed. That is, it is notified that the jackpot symbol has been promoted.

  42 (b1) to 42 (b4) show a state in which the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect is started during the continuation of the duel scene animation in the super reach.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 42 (b1) shows that the duel scene animation continues. At this time, the timer notice effect is started, and the timer notice display is displayed in the display area where the tutorial display unit TT1 was displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 42 (b1), “10:00” is displayed as the timer display on the timer notice display, and then the countdown is started. Note that the time when the countdown is started may be before the development of super reach, after the development of super reach, or at the timing of development of super reach. It may be before the transition to the state, or after the transition to the reach state and before the development to the super reach.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 42 (b2), a button notice effect is started, and a state in which the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT is shown. That is, a state in which the final judge effect is started is shown. On the other hand, in the timer advance notice display, the countdown of the timer display continues, and at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (b2), the timer display indicates “9:00”. That is, in this effect example, a state in which the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect is performed during the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is shown. Here, the operation reception period of the effect button 136 is longer than the length of the operation reception period of the effect button 136 in the final judge effect and the length of the countdown in the timer notice effect.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 42 (b3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 42 (b4), the protagonist wins over the enemy swordsman, “Decoration 4”. The combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 4—decoration 4” is derived, and fluctuation fluctuation is started. On the other hand, in the timer notice display, it is suggested that the countdown of the timer display is still continued, that is, the promotion effect of the jackpot symbol may be performed after that. In this effect example, the timer display is not set to “0:00” even when the effect button 136 is not operated in the final judge effect. This is because, for example, a combination of lost decorative symbols is displayed in the final judge effect, and then the revival effect is performed at the timing when the timer display becomes “0:00”. Conversely, the count may be zero when the effect button 136 is not operated in the final judge effect.

  FIG. 43 is a diagram showing an example of a timer notice effect applicable to the present embodiment step by step. The effect shown in FIG. 43 (a) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 41 (a1), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 43 (b), a state in which the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the ready image RDY is shown. In the preparation example image RDY in this effect example, only one type of display mode is prepared, and change display to other display modes is not performed. As described above, in this effect example, the reliability of the big hit is not known in the display mode of the image RDY being prepared. In addition, when there are a plurality of types of a certain notice display or a certain effect, it is not possible to know which certain notice display or a certain effect is performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 43 (c), a state in which the timer preview display is started by switching from the ready image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 to the timer preview display is shown. . In this effect example, one of the background colors in the timer notice display is selected from a plurality of colors, and the reliability of the jackpot is indicated by the background color. In the effect example shown in FIG. 43 (c), the background color of the timer notice display is blue, which is a mode with low reliability. In addition, the timer display in the timer preview display is “10:00”, and it is notified that a certain preview display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown starts. In addition, before or after the timer display countdown starts, an effect may be performed in which the background color of the timer notice display changes and the reliability is improved in the middle.

  Thereafter, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display starts, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 43 (d) shows that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed. Further, the decoration symbol is shown in a state where “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is reached. It should be noted that the reach state may be reached after the timer display becomes “0:00”, the timer display may become “0:00” after the reach state is reached, or the timer display is “ The reach state may be reached at the time of “0:00”. In this production example, when the countdown of the timer display becomes 0, there is a corresponding relationship with the display indicating that the timer display is developed to super reach, and the display always develops to super reach.

  When the countdown of the timer display is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 43 (e), the text “Go” is displayed instead of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1, and a certain notice display is displayed. It is informing that it will start.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 43 (f), the button notice effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. The situation is shown. In the tutorial display section TT1, the display of “Go” is erased and is not displayed. In this effect example, the start of the button notice effect is not a notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect, but a notice that is displayed when the result button 136 is operated as a result of the button notice effect being operated. The display corresponds to a notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect. The tutorial display section TT1 may be in a non-display state after the button notice effect is started, or the button notice effect may be started after the tutorial display portion TT1 is in a non-display state. The tutorial display unit TT1 may be hidden at the timing when the button notice effect is started. By not displaying the tutorial display after the display of “Go”, there is a case where the effect of concentrating on other effects (for example, button effects) may be achieved.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 43 (g), a state in which the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button notice effect is started and the operation effective period is started is shown. ing.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 43 (h), it is determined that the button notice effect is successful, and the process proceeds to super reach (swordsman reach) as shown in FIG. 43 (i). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display portion TT1. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. Also, in this production example, when transitioning to at least swordsman reach among the super reach, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI part UI3 is framed out together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display part TT1. , Hidden. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that a certain notice display performed as a result of the timer notice effect corresponds to the development of super reach.

  FIG. 43 (j) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. Since the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed, no display is performed after the tutorial display unit TT1 is framed out together with the UI unit UI3. The family crest member 224E is moved downward and returned to the initial position.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 43 (k) shows a state in which the princess cut-in image HCI is displayed. This princess cut-in image HCI is displayed suddenly without going through the button notice effect, timer notice effect, or mini-game, and has low reliability, but the button notice effect or timer notice effect or You may make it display as a result of having played the mini game. Further, instead of the princess cut-in image HCI, for example, an iron plate image TP may be displayed.

  FIG. 44 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 44A to 44C are the same as those in FIGS. 43A to 43C, and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 44 (d) shows a state where an animation in which a character of Tono-sama as a navigation character throws a bomb is performed. Specifically, the character of Tono-sama displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N throws a bomb while screaming “not yet”, and this bomb is displayed from the third decorative symbol display device 208N on the first decorative symbol display. Move across device 208L. Then, this bomb heads to the tutorial display portion TT1 where the timer display is being counted down, and bursts in the vicinity above the tutorial display portion TT1.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 44 (e), the state in which the timer display countdown is interrupted and the image RDY in preparation is displayed again is shown. At the time when the timer notice effect is started, the timer display is “10:00”, and the timing at which the button notice effect is started is notified, but when the timer notice effect is interrupted, It may be recognized that it did not correspond to the button notice effect. It should be noted that the jackpot symbol may be more easily confirmed and displayed when the timer notice effect interruption effect by the navigation character is performed than when the timer notice effect interruption effect by the navigation character is not performed. When an effect that interrupts the countdown of the timer display is performed, the time until the timer counts up by extending the timer display time instead of displaying the image RDY in preparation may be extended. Good or the countdown speed may be slow. In addition, for example, the timer notice has an advantage that it is easy to predict the timing of 0 because the countdown speed does not change, which is why the future is determined by the end timing of the image RDY being prepared (that is, the start timing of the timer notice). There is a case.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 44 (f), the state in which the button notice effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. It is shown. In the tutorial display unit TT1, the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 44 (g), a state in which the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button notice effect is started and the operation effective period is started is shown. ing.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 44 (h), it is determined that the button notice effect has been successful, and the process proceeds to super reach (swordsman reach) as shown in FIG. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display portion TT1 on which the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. Also, in this production example, when transitioning to at least swordsman reach among the super reach, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI part UI3 is framed out together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display part TT1. , Hidden.

  FIG. 44 (j) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed together with the UI unit UI3, but the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed. The family crest member 224E is moved downward and returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 44 (k), a state in which the timer preview display is switched from the preparatory image RDY to the timer preview display is shown. Specifically, the timer notice display after the restart is changed to a golden background color, which indicates that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. In FIG. 44 (k), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates “10:00”, and it is notified that a notice notice may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is restarted. Has been. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer display countdown by the timer notice production is being performed during super reach (swordsman reach). In addition, the start timing of the timer notice effect is set to an appropriate timing. For example, before the start of super reach, after the start of super reach, before reaching the reach state, or after reaching the reach state, the super reach starts. May also be started at the previous timing. In addition, the timer display when the timer notice effect is resumed can be appropriately set to time, and may be started from “9:00” indicating the time at the time of interruption, for example.

  Thereafter, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display starts, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 44 (l) shows that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  When the countdown of the timer display is completed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 44 (m) displays the letters “Go” instead of the timer display, and starts a notice display. We are reporting.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 44 (n), the iron plate image TP as the notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the timer notice effect corresponds to the notice display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this effect example, as shown in FIG. 43, the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is not developed to super reach, and the cut-in image displayed during super reach as a result of the timer notice effect being extended. As a result, the cut-in image has high reliability. As described above, in this production example, the countdown is “0:00” at a good location in super reach, and an example in which a good production is performed is shown. In addition, the expectation degree of jackpot is higher as the end timing of the image RDY in preparation (start timing of a certain notice display) is later in a certain fluctuation.

  FIG. 45 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. The effect shown in FIG. 45A is the same as that shown in FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 45 (b), a state in which the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the image RDY in preparation is shown. At this time, “TIMER × 2” is displayed above the tutorial display portion TT1 on which the image RDY being prepared is displayed, indicating that the timer notice effect is performed twice. The display of “TIMER × 2” may be displayed simultaneously with the display of the image being prepared RDY, or may be displayed after the image being prepared RDY is displayed. You may make it produce that it is performed twice, thinking that it will be performed once. Instead of displaying “TIMER × 2”, for example, two images RDY in preparation may be displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 45 (c), a state in which the timer notice display is started by switching from the preparatory image RDY displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 to the timer notice display is shown. . The background color of the timer notice display is blue, which has a low reliability. Here, the default display mode in which the background color of the timer notice display is green may be used. In addition, the timer display in the timer preview display is “10:00”, and it is notified that a certain preview display may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown starts.

  Thereafter, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display starts, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 45 (d), the timer display becomes “0:00” and the countdown is completed. Further, the decoration symbol is shown in a state where “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed in the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and the reach state is reached. When the countdown of the timer display is completed, the display of “TIMER × 2” displayed above the tutorial display section TT1 is erased, and it is notified that the first timer notice effect has been consumed and ended. ing. Note that the display of “TIMER × 2” may be difficult to visually recognize by displaying the effect when the timer display becomes “0:00”. Further, the display of “TIMER × 2” may be left without being erased. In addition, when a plurality of preparation displays are displayed, a state in which the display related to the preparation display is once hidden after the first preparation display is completed may be provided.

  When the timer display countdown is completed, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 45 (e), the character “Go” is displayed instead of the timer display in the tutorial display area TT1, and a notice display is displayed. It is informing that it will start.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 45 (f), the button notice effect is started, the default button image 136a is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the operation acceptance state of the effect button 136 is started. The situation is shown. At this time, the button image 136a and the remaining time meter MT overlap the decorative design. In the tutorial display section TT1, the display of “Go” is erased and is not displayed. Therefore, it may appear that there is no stock for the timer notice effect. In this effect example, the start of the button notice effect is not a notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect, but a notice that is displayed when the result button 136 is operated as a result of the button notice effect being operated. The display corresponds to a notice display that starts as a result of the timer notice effect.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 45 (g), a state in which the gauge of the remaining time meter is reduced according to the time after the button notice effect is started and the operation effective period is started is shown. ing. At this time, the ready image RDY is displayed again on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the second timer notice effect is started. However, when the ready image RDY is displayed again, the first ready image RDY is displayed. It is displayed enlarged compared to when it is displayed. Therefore, the fluctuation icon h0 and a part of the decorative design may be overlapped by the preparing image RDY. In this way, there is a case where the image RDY being prepared is temporarily hidden and further overlapped, thereby causing more attention.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 45 (h), it is determined that the button notice effect has been successful, and as shown in FIG. 45 (i), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shifts to super reach. Display is made and it develops into super reach (swordsman reach). Further, the family crest member 224E rises and rotates and overlaps the front side of the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Also, the family crest member 224E overlaps with a part of the enlarged image RDY in preparation, and is more difficult to see than a state where it is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E. Note that the image RDY in preparation may be overlapped with the family crest actor 224E only when it is enlarged and not overlapped when it is not enlarged. Further, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI part UI3 is framed downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display part TT1, and is not displayed. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that a certain notice display performed as a result of the timer notice effect corresponds to the development of super reach.

  FIG. 45 (j) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed together with the UI unit UI3, but the image RDY being prepared is continuously displayed. Since the image RDY in preparation is enlarged and displayed, a part of the fluctuation icon h0 is overlapped, and the swordsman character in the reach effect display is also overlapped. As described above, the preparation-in-progress image RDY that is enlarged may be displayed even during execution of super reach. The family crest member 224E is moved downward and returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 45 (k), a state is shown in which the timer preview display is switched from the preparatory image RDY to the timer preview display and the second timer preview effect is started. Specifically, the timer notice display after the start is changed to a golden background color, which indicates that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. Further, in FIG. 45 (k), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates “3:00”, and it is notified that a notice notice may be displayed 3 seconds after the countdown is started. Has been. That is, in this production example, it is shown that the timer display countdown by the timer notice production is being performed during super reach (swordsman reach). Further, in this effect example, the size of the timer preview display is set to be the same as the size of the preparatory image RDY that is displayed in an enlarged manner. The symbols are easy to confirm. Further, when the background color of the timer notice display is gold, it may be displayed in an enlarged manner. Moreover, even if the background color of the timer notice display is a color other than gold, it may be displayed enlarged. Also, in this effect example, the background color of the second timer notice effect is more reliable than the first timer notice effect, but the timer display time is shorter. Note that the timer display time may be longer for the second timer notice effect than for the first timer notice effect.

  Thereafter, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display starts, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 45 (l) shows that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  When the countdown of the timer display is completed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 45 (m) displays the letters “Go” instead of the timer display, and starts a notice display. We are reporting.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 45 (n), the iron plate image TP as the notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the second timer notice effect corresponds to the notice display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this effect example, there may be a case where it is possible to dramatically improve the expectation for the big hit by informing in advance that the timer notice effect will be performed twice.

  Thus, in this effect example, when the image RDY being prepared is displayed as the number of clothes, when one image RDY is digested, all the images RDY being prepared are displayed in the same symbol variation display. Shown to be digested.

  FIG. 46 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. The effects shown in FIGS. 46 (a1) to (a2) are the same as those in FIGS. 42 (a1) to (a2), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (a3), a state in which the display of the long press effect by the long press effect display is started is shown. In the long press effect display, an area where the Tono-sama character is drawn is arranged above, and an area where the swordsman character is drawn below is arranged. According to the operation amount of the long press operation of the effect button 136 , The size of both areas is displayed so as to change relatively. The ready image RDY is also displayed when the long press effect is started. It should be noted that the operation valid period of the effect button 136 has not started at the timing shown in FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (a4), a state in which acceptance of a long press operation by a long press effect is started is shown. That is, a state in which the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is started is shown. In this long press effect, the remaining time gauge MT is not displayed but may be displayed. In addition, a state in which the timer notice display is switched from the image RDY in preparation to the timer notice display is shown. Specifically, the timer notice display is changed to a green background color, indicating that the reliability is not so high. Further, in FIG. 46 (a4), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates “5:00”, and it is notified that a notice notice may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown is started. Has been. That is, in this effect example, the operation valid period and the countdown time of the timer display coincide. Note that they do not have to match completely. The timer notice effect may be started after the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started, the operation valid period of the effect button 136 may be started after the timer notice effect is started, The timer notice effect may be started at the timing when the operation valid period of the effect button 136 is started.

  FIG. 46 (a5) shows a state in which a long press operation of the effect button 136 by the player is performed. At the timing shown in FIG. 46 (a5), the timer display in the timer notice display is “4:00”.

  FIG. 46 (a6) shows a state in which a long press operation of the effect button 136 by the player is continued. At this time, in the effect display for long press, the area where the character of the lord placed above is drawn is enlarged, and the area where the character of the swordsman placed below is reduced accordingly, This character is shown to be dominant. This has been suggested to tend to produce advantageous results. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (a6), the timer display in the timer notice display is “3:00”.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (a7), the timer display is “0:00”, the countdown is completed, and the character “Go” is displayed. Further, the long press effect is continuously performed, and the operation effective period of the effect button 136 is still continuing. That is, it can be said that the character display of “Go” is displayed during the operation effective period of the effect button 136. Also, in the effect display for long press, the area where the Tono-sama character arranged above is further expanded, and the area where the swordsman character arranged below is further reduced, It has been shown that Tonosama's character is by far the dominant. The long press effect may be ended after the character “Go” is displayed, the character “Go” may be displayed after the long press effect is ended, or “Go” may be displayed. The long press effect may end at the timing when the character “is displayed. Further, the operation valid period may end after the character “Go” is displayed, the character “Go” may be displayed after the operation effective period ends, or “Go” may be displayed. The operation valid period may end at the timing when the character "" is displayed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (a8), the characters “one blow” are displayed, and the deca button image 136aL is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, and the button notice effect is started, and the operation is effective. It shows how the period has been set again. That is, this button notice effect can be said to be an example of a button operation effect performed following the long press effect. In other words, it can be said that a plurality (types) of button effects are continuously performed. Here, the set operation valid period may be set again after the operation valid period in the long press effect is once ended, or may be set continuously after the operation valid period in the long press effect. May be.

  Thereafter, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (a9), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (a10), the protagonist wins over the enemy swordsman, “Decoration 4”. The combination of the decorative pattern of “decoration 4—decoration 4” is derived, and fluctuation fluctuation is started. At this time, the family crest character 224E, the Yatsushiro character 224Fa, and the general character 224Fb emit light in a rainbow light-emitting manner so as to congratulate them on the big hit.

  Thus, in this production example, the long-press part finishes the preparation display and the timer display countdown starts, and the countdown is completed between the long-press part and the next part or at the end of the long-press part. Thus, “0:00” is shown, and an example in which the button effect performed in the next part is good is shown.

  46 (b1) to 46 (b5) show a state in which a long press effect is performed in the swordsman reach, but a timer notice effect is not performed.

  Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (b1), after the long press effect by the long press effect display is started, the reception of the long press operation is started, and the effect button 136 is displayed. A state in which a long press operation is performed is shown. In this example, the timer notice effect is not performed.

  However, in this effect example, as shown in FIG. 46 (b2), the long press operation of the effect button 136 is continued, but in the effect display for long press, the Tono-like character arranged above is drawn. The area is reduced, and the area where the swordsman character placed below is drawn is enlarged, indicating that Tono-sama's character is inferior (adversary character swordsman character dominance) . This suggests that it is difficult to achieve advantageous results.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (b3), the characters “one blow” are displayed, and the button image 136a in the default display mode is displayed together with the remaining time meter MT, thereby providing a button notice effect. It is shown that the operation valid period has been set again. As described above, when the timer notice effect is not performed when the long press effect is performed, the deca button image 136aL is not easily displayed, and the button image 136a in the default display mode is easily displayed. In addition, when the long notice effect is not performed when the long press effect is performed, the deca button image 136aL may not be displayed.

  After that, when the effect button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 46 (b4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 46 (b5), the protagonist loses to the enemy swordsman, “decoration 4- The combination of the decorative pattern of the decoration “decoration 5—decoration 4” is derived, and fluctuation fluctuation is started. Note that the flow may be a case where it does not go through the mini game or the timer notice effect, and may be a big hit.

  FIG. 47 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example of a button repeated striking effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47A, the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 47 (a), one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, so one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode. A tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 47 (a), “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed. And the relationship between Tono-sama's character. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (a), the button repeated striking effect has been started, and the explanation of “Make the meter MAX within the time by repeated button striking” is performed. A button image 136a is displayed together with the letters “preparation”, and an operation amount meter MT11 in which five memories are arranged in the vertical direction is displayed on the left side of the display screen. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (a), before the start of the acceptance of the continuous operation of the effect button 136, that is, before the start of the operation valid period, the effect button lamp 138 is also lit in white. In this effect example, it can be said that the display of “preparation” displayed above the button image 136a is a display corresponding to the image RDY being prepared (preparation effect display of button striking effect). When the button repeated striking effect is started, the decorative symbol that has been subjected to the variable display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L moves to the upper side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M and is displayed in a reduced manner. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 47A has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 47A, “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is the castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight-generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (b), a state in which the acceptance of the continuous operation of the effect button 136 is started is shown. Specifically, the character “preparation” displayed above the button image 136a is changed to the character “start”, and the remaining time meter MT is displayed below the button image 136a, so that the operation effective period is started. The effect button lamp 138 emits red light. In this effect example, it can also be said that the button repeated effect (the main effect) is started at the timing when the operation effective period is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (c), the gauge of the remaining time meter MT is displayed in accordance with the passage of time from the operation effective period, and on the right side of the button image 136a, A countdown display with numbers is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 47 (c), “5” is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that the time until the operation valid period ends is 5 seconds. When the countdown in the countdown display is completed, there is a possibility that a certain notice effect is performed. Therefore, it can be said that the countdown effect by the countdown display corresponds to the timer notice effect.

  FIG. 47 (d) shows a state in which the player has started a continuous hitting operation of the effect button 136. At the timing shown in FIG. 47 (d), “4” is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that there are four seconds until the operation valid period ends.

  In FIG. 47 (e), the player continuously performs the striking operation of the effect button 136. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the operation amount meter MT11 has one red memory according to the number of repeated striking operations. It is displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 47 (e), “3” is displayed as the countdown display, and it is notified that there are three seconds until the operation valid period ends.

  FIG. 47 (f) shows that the player continuously performs the striking operation of the effect button 136, and in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, three memories of the operation amount meter MT11 are displayed in red. Has been. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 47 (f), “1” is displayed as the countdown display, and it is informed that one second is left until the operation valid period ends.

  FIG. 47 (g) shows a state in which the countdown display on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is “0”, the operation valid period ends, and the player performs the continuous operation of the effect button 136. In addition, the memory of the operation amount meter MT11 is displayed in red three, that is, it is indicated that the button striking effect has failed. The effect button lamp 138 is lit in red, but the lighting state may be switched from red to white at the timing when the operation effective period ends, or before the operation effective period ends. The lighting state of the effect button lamp 138 may be switched from red to white.

  If the button repeated strike effect fails, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 47 (h) displays "Sorry ..." to notify that the button repeated strike effect has failed. In this example, in a pachinko machine that can execute a countdown display-like effect in addition to the timer notice, a certain notice display may not include this countdown display.

  FIG. 48 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device shown in FIG. 48A, the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 48 (a), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 48 (a), the first image RDY1 in preparation is displayed. The function of the first image RDY being prepared is the same as that of the image RDY being prepared. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 48A is in a default display form displayed in blue. In this example, the second image RDY is displayed above the first image RDY1, and a plurality of images are displayed at the same time. The first preparation image RDY1 and the second preparation image RDY2 are each provided with a corresponding effect (such as a timer notice effect or a mini game). These images in preparation (the first image RDY1 and the second image RDY2) function as pre-reading notices. In addition, any of the images being prepared has a green background color and is in a default display mode. In addition, these images in preparation may be displayed at the same time, or may be displayed after the other image is displayed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 48A, “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  FIG. 48B shows a state in which the symbol variation display shown in FIG. 48A is finished and the next symbol variation display is started. Specifically, when the symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the movement animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h11 is displayed. The change icon h0 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed, and the hold icon at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes the first hold icon h11, and each moves onto the corresponding pedestal. To do. In addition, the variable display of decorative symbols has been started. Note that the first image RDY1 and the second image RDY2 are continuously displayed, that is, it can be said that these images being prepared are displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48C, the first preliminary image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is switched to the timer notice display, and the timer notice effect is started. ing. Note that the background color of the timer notice display corresponding to the first image RDY1 being prepared is green, which is the default display mode. In addition, the timer display in the timer notice display is “5:00”, and it is reported that a notice notice may be displayed 5 seconds after the countdown starts. In this effect example, when one of a plurality of images in preparation is activated (digested) and the effect is started, all other images in preparation are digested. Note that the images in preparation are all digested in one symbol variation display, but the notice icon may be carried over until the next symbol variation display.

  FIG. 48D shows a state in which the timer display in the timer notice display corresponding to the first image RDY1 being prepared is “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 48 (e), the characters “Go” are displayed in the area where the timer notice display corresponding to the first image RDY1 being prepared is displayed, and the timer notice effect related to this timer notice display is displayed. It is informed that a corresponding notice display is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (f), the characters “Go” are deleted together with the display area, and the second image RDY2 is slid downward and moved to the position of the tutorial display portion TT1. Image moving animation is being made in preparation. In addition, a notice effect (preceding start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect corresponding to the first image RDY1 in preparation is started, and a state where the ninja character NJ4 appears is shown. Has been. The ninja character NJ4 displayed here is the same as the ninja character NJ4 that may be displayed when the display mode of the hold icon described above with reference to FIG. It may be a character. In addition, in this effect, the image moving animation in preparation may start after the preceding start notice effect starts, or the advance start notice effect may start after the image moving animation in preparation starts, The image moving animation in preparation may start at the timing when the preceding start notice effect starts. Further, the ninja character NJ4 shown in FIG. 48 (f) overlaps with the second image RDY2 being prepared, but may be overlapped with the second image RDY2 being prepared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (g), the pending change animation is started, and the ninja character NJ4 throws a shuriken toward the change icon h0 and hits the change icon h0. Has been. At this time, the entire variation icon h0 is covered by the effect EF4, and the state is difficult to visually recognize compared to the state where the effect EF4 is not covered.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (h), as a result of the pending change animation, the change icon h0 changes from the default display form to a red display form, and the change notice is started.

  FIG. 48 (i) shows a state in which “decoration 4” is stopped and displayed on the left symbol and the right symbol, respectively, and after reaching the reach state, the state shifts to super reach (swordsman reach). Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. The number-of-receptions display 850 and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M are deleted at the timing of transition to super reach. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the second image RDY2 in preparation. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. Further, in this effect example, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI unit UI3 is framed downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display unit TT1, and is not displayed.

  FIG. 48 (j) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. The tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed together with the UI unit UI3, but the display of the second preparing image RDY2 is continuously maintained. The family crest member 224E is moved downward and returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (k), the second preliminary image RDY2 is switched to the timer warning display, and the timer warning effect is started. The timer notice display has a golden background color, indicating that the reliability of the jackpot is improved. Further, in FIG. 48 (k), the timer display in the timer notice display indicates “10:00”, and it is notified that a notice notice may be displayed 10 seconds after the countdown is restarted. Has been. Note that the timer notice display is a default display mode at the start of display, and there is a case where a promotion display such as a change to a golden background color is performed after the display is started (for example, after the countdown is started). Also good.

  Thereafter, the timer display countdown in the timer notice display starts, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (l) shows that the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed.

  When the countdown of the timer display is completed, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (m) displays the letters “Go” instead of the timer display, and starts a notice display. We are reporting.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 48 (n), the iron plate image TP as a notice display is displayed, and it is notified that the big hit is confirmed. That is, it can be said that the timer notice effect corresponding to the second preparation image RDY2 corresponds to the notice display of the iron plate image TP as a certain notice display. In this production example, after one of the plurality of images in preparation is digested, a new image in preparation is not displayed, but after one of the plurality of images in preparation is digested, a new preparation is performed. A middle image may be displayed.

  FIG. 49 is a diagram showing, in a stepwise manner, an example of effects by explanation display applicable to this embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 49A1 is the same as the effect shown in FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 49 (a2), the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT1 is changed from “Panda is Tono-sama's master” to “Tosama is Yatsushiro general”. . In this effect example, when the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT1 is switched, the above-described opening / closing display by the shutter image is not performed, but is performed by the switching display between the explanation displays. In this effect example, in one symbol variation display, when the explanation display is switched, the opening / closing display by the shutter image is not performed and the switching display between the explanation displays is performed.

  49 (b1) to 49 (b3) illustrate a state in which opening / closing display by a shutter image is performed when the explanation display is switched. 49 (b1) to FIG. 49 (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 35 (a) to FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 49 (b3), the shutter image is opened before the tutorial display portion TT1 based on the shutter image is completely closed, and an explanation display of “Tosama is Yatsushiro general” is displayed. The state of being done is shown. That is, it is shown that the open / close display by the shutter image is not a precursor display in which a preview display is performed, but a false precursor display. Here, the shutter image may be opened after the tutorial display unit TT1 is completely closed by the shutter image. Although it was expected that the notice display would be started by such an effect, the display of the shutter image could be opened and closed by disappointing the player because the explanation display was made without the notice display being started. You may be able to have expectations.

  FIG. 50 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. FIG. 50 (a1) to FIG. 50 (a3) show another example of effects following FIG. 35 (e). 50 (a1) to FIG. 50 (a2) are the same as the effects shown in FIG. 35 (f) to FIG.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 50 (a3), the effect EF4 is erased, but the display mode of the first hold icon h11 remains the default display mode. . Thus, even if the pending change animation described above with reference to FIG. 35 is performed, a failure effect that does not change the display mode may be performed. A plurality of types of characters appearing in the pending change animation may be prepared, and the rate at which the display mode of the pending icon changes varies depending on the characters appearing in the pending change animation.

  In the above-described pending change animation, the ninja character NJ4 is displayed overlapping the UI part UI3. For example, as shown in FIG. 50 (b1), the ninja character NJ4 is displayed above the UI part UI3. The portion UI3 may not overlap. In this case, in the pending change animation, the ninja character NJ4 may or may not overlap the UI part UI3.

  FIG. 51 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 51 (a1), since one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 and the hold icon h11 are both in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 51 (a1), “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed, and the panda character And the relationship between Tono-sama's character. In this example effect, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. Further, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 51A1 has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 51 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight-generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a2), a state in which a roulette effect as a mini game is started is shown. In this roulette effect, a circular roulette wheel RR is divided into three equal sections. A cocoon region is arranged above the three sections, a princess region is arranged at the lower left, and a little princess region is arranged at the lower right. When the roulette effect is started, each region is displayed in a flashing manner by blinking in red, and a notice display corresponding to the region that is finally lit in red is prepared. It should be noted that the symbol variation display at which the roulette effect starts and the symbol variation display at which the preparation-in-progress display or the like ends may be the same or different. In a configuration in which a display indicating that the roulette effect is started is performed, the symbol variation display in which the display is performed may be the same as the symbol variation display in which the preparation in progress display or the like ends. There may be. By the combination of the above description, the display can be referred to as a pre-reading notice display.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a3), a state in which all the regions are lit in red as a result of the variable display of the roulette effect is shown. That is, it is informed that a notice display corresponding to the character of the samurai, a notice display corresponding to the princess character, and a notice display corresponding to the princess Chibi character are prepared.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a4), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right portion thereof, and is displayed on the upper left of the display screen. Is displayed such that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the frog character GII, and the Chibi princess character CHM is displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. That is, when a character is caused to appear, each character appears at a position corresponding to the character, and when a preparatory image is displayed, the character is displayed at a position corresponding to the character. It can also be said that the appearing character itself may correspond to the image being prepared. Further, the relationship between the appearing character and the effect to be executed may be 1: 1 or 1: N (N> 1). In addition, a certain effect may be executed by digesting a plurality of characters (the relationship between the character and the effect may be N (N> 1): 1).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a5), the Chibi princess character CHM moves upward and overlaps the lower left corner of the third preparing image RDY3. That is, it can be said that a certain notice display overlaps with another notice display. Thereby, it is informed that the notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Chibi princess starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a6), a state is shown in which an animation is performed in which the princess Chibi character CHM throws an object toward the variation icon h0. When the object reaches the fluctuation icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is difficult to view. That is, the notice display corresponding to the princess Chibi character CMH is a notice display by changing the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a7), the effect EF7 is deleted, and the change icon h0 is easily visible. At this time, the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and a state in which the change notice by the change icon h0 is started is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a8), display is started in a manner in which the frog character GII vibrates. Thereby, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the character GII of the heel starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a9), the mini game is started in the area where the third image RDY3 being prepared arranged adjacent to the frog character GII is displayed. Has been. When the mini game is started, the cylindrical drum DRM extending in the horizontal direction starts to rotate with the horizontal direction as a rotation axis. A plurality of symbols (identification information) are displayed on the surface of the drum DRM, and the success or failure of the mini game is displayed by the identification information displayed when the drum DRM is stopped and displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a10), the drum DRM is stopped and the symbol with the characters “Intense heat” is derived, which suggests that there is a high possibility of a big hit. Yes. In other words, the change notice is made by deriving the characters “Intense Heat” from the drum DRM. It can be said that this effect is not an effect that changes the display mode of something, but an effect that makes a big hit announcement.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a11), display is started in such a manner that the princess character HME vibrates. Thereby, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the princess character HME starts. Since the princess character HME is displayed overlapping the UI part UI3, the display of the UI part UI3 may be noticed by the vibration display of the princess character HME.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a12), a state in which the timer notice effect is started is shown in the area where the first image RDY1 in preparation is displayed. The notice display corresponding to the princess character HME is a timer notice effect. When the timer notice effect is started, a timer display is displayed in the area where the first image RDY1 being prepared is displayed, and then the countdown starts. When the result of the countdown is “0:00”, a certain notice display is started. In the effect example shown in FIG. 51 (a12), “30:00” is displayed as the timer display, and then the countdown is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a13), as a result of the countdown, the timer display is “0:00” and the countdown is completed. Then, the princess character HME ascends and moves to a position different from the first preparing image RDY1 to notify that the notice display corresponding to the timer notice effect is started. That is, it can be said that an effect similar to the display of “Go” shown in FIG.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (a14), a super reach transition display is performed, and a state of developing into a super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. The notice display corresponding to the princess character HME corresponds to the development to the swordsman reach. Although not shown, the family crest member 224E rises and rotates and overlaps the front side of the lower center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Further, in this effect example, the background color of the super reach transition display is gold, and it is reported that the reliability of the big hit is high. Further, the tutorial display unit TT1 is not displayed because the countdown by the timer display is completed. Further, after the super reach transition display is started, the UI part UI3 is framed downward together with the hold icon h11 and the tutorial display part TT1, and is not displayed.

  In this production example, all the images in preparation are digested before the development of super reach. However, at least one image may be digested after the development of super reach. For example, an iron plate image TP is displayed. A mini game or a timer notice effect may be performed.

  FIG. 51 (b1) shows a state in which only the eyelid region of the three regions is lit in red in the roulette effect described above with reference to FIG. 51 (a2). In other words, only the notice display corresponding to the frog character is prepared among the notice display corresponding to the character of the samurai, the notice display corresponding to the princess character, and the notice display corresponding to the princess Chibi character. Informed.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 51 (b2), the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed so that the character GII of the heel is adjacent. In other words, a spear character GII appears at a position corresponding to the spear character GII, and an image that is being prepared to appear along with the spear character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the spear character GII. Therefore, in this effect example, only a mini game by the drum DRM is performed.

  FIG. 52 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of a preliminary announcement effect that can be applied to this embodiment.

  The effect shown in FIG. 52 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 51 (a3), but “× 2” is displayed in the area of Princess Chibi, and a notice display corresponding to the character CHM of Princess Chibi is displayed. It will be prepared twice.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (a2), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right portion thereof, and is displayed on the upper left of the display screen. Is displayed such that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the frog character GII, and below the third preparing image RDY3, two Chibi princess characters CHM1 and CHM2 are displayed. Note that when a plurality of effects by the samurai character GII and the princess character HME are prepared, for example, two identical characters can be displayed on one image being prepared. Specifically, when a plurality of effects by the princess character HME are prepared, this can be realized by displaying one first preparing image RDY1 and displaying two princess characters HME. Conversely, a single character may be used to display a plurality of images being prepared.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (a3), one of the two Chibi princess characters CHM1 moves upward and appears in the lower left corner of the third preparing image RDY3. The overlapping state is shown. Thereby, it is notified that the first notice display of the two notice displays corresponding to the princess Chibi character CHM1 starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (a4), a state is shown in which an animation is performed in which the princess Chibi character CHM1 casts an object toward the variation icon h0. When the object reaches the fluctuation icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is difficult to view. That is, it is notified that the notice display is started due to the change in the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 corresponding to the character CMH1 of the princess Chibi.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (a5), the effect EF7 is deleted, and the change icon h0 becomes easily visible. At this time, the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, and a state in which the change notice by the change icon h0 is started is shown.

  Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (a6), the other Chibi princess character CHM2 of the two Chibi princess characters moves upward, and the lower left corner of the third preparing image RDY3. It shows how it overlaps with the part. Thereby, it is informed that the second notice display corresponding to Princess Chibi character CHM2 starts.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (a7), a state is shown in which an animation is performed in which the princess Chibi character CHM2 casts an object toward the variation icon h0. When the object reaches the fluctuation icon h0, the effect EF7 is displayed, and the fluctuation icon h0 is difficult to view. That is, it is notified that the notice display by the variation icon is ranked up due to the change in the display mode of the variation icon h0 corresponding to the princess Chibi character CMH2.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (a8), the effect EF7 is erased and the change icon h0 is easily visible. At this time, the display mode of the change icon h0 is changed from the display mode of the red notice to the display form of the gold notice, and the change notice by the change icon h0 is ranked up.

  FIG. 52 (b1) to FIG. 52 (b4) show another effect example following FIG. 52 (a3). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 52 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 52 (a4), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (b2), after the object cast by the princess Chibi character CHM1 reaches the variation icon h0 and the effect EF7 is displayed, the dark display BL in which the entire display screen is darkened is displayed. The portion where the effect EF7 was displayed shines in white, and the display in such a manner that the light extends horizontally from there is performed. At this time, the first preparing image RDY1 and the second preparing image RDY3 displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L are not displayed. In addition, when another mini game is started while the change display of the display mode of the fluctuation icon h0 is being performed, the mini game is also temporarily hidden due to the darkness of the display screen. It may be. Further, when a plurality of images in preparation are displayed, all the images in preparation may be temporarily hidden, or only some images in preparation are temporarily hidden. You may make it do. As described above, the state where the dark display BL is displayed may be referred to as a fourth state. In this production example, the first state where the hold icon is displayed together with the UI part UI3 and the second state where the hold icon is hidden together with the UI part UI3 are referred to as the first state. From the state to the fourth state, it may be the second state after becoming the first state again, may be the second state from the first state, There may be a case where the first state changes to the fourth state and then the second state.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (b3), the state where the light of the portion where the effect EF7 was displayed is displayed in an enlarged manner.

  Thereafter, when the dark display is completed, as shown in FIG. 52 (b4), the change icon h0 changes from the default display mode to the red display mode, and the effect is resumed. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 52 (b4) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 52 (a5), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 52 (c1) to FIG. 52 (c3) show another effect example following FIG. 51 (a6). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 52 (c1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 51 (a7), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (c2), display in a manner in which the character GII of the heel is vibrating is started, and “Go” is displayed in the area where the third image RDY3 in preparation is displayed. A character is displayed to notify that a mini game is started. It should be noted that the display of “Go” may start after the heel character GII starts vibrating, or the heel character GII may start vibrating after the display of “Go” starts. The display of “Go” may be started at the timing when the samurai character GII starts to vibrate. Thereby, it is notified that the notice display corresponding to the character GII of the heel starts.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 52 (c3) shows that the mini game is started in the area where the third image RDY3 being prepared arranged adjacent to the frog character GII is displayed. Has been. In this effect example, when the mini game is started, the region where the third image RDY3 being prepared is displayed is enlarged and moved to the approximate center of the display screen, and the effect due to the rotation of the drum DRM is started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the area where the mini game is performed is performed in an area different from the area where the image being prepared is displayed. It should be noted that the case where the mini game is started after “Go” is displayed may be more likely to be a big hit than the case where the mini game is started without displaying “Go”. . Further, it may be more likely that the mini game will be a big hit than the case where the mini game is enlarged and displayed. Note that the display from the display of the image being prepared to the start of the mini game, the timer notice effect, or the like may be performed in another area. When the third display and a certain notice display (a certain effect) are performed in the same region, the place where the first display and the second display are performed is different, so the display of the third display system is easier to understand. There may be an effect.

  FIG. 53 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. Here, the display device (display device 1) on which the left effect display is performed and the display device (display device 2) on the right effect display may be separate display devices. In that case, a third display (a certain notice display) may be made on the display device 2.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (a), the UI part UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the fluctuation icon h0 is placed on the pedestal in the center of the UI part UI3. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 53 (a), since one variable display of FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode and is the display mode of the change notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the preparing image RDY is displayed in the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 53 (a). In this example effect, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 53A is in a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 53A, “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Further, a family crest member 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (b), a multi-chance up notice is started. When the multi-chance up notice is started, the display area of the first decorative symbol display device 208L is divided into left and right parts, and a left notice display area CUL and a right notice display area CUR are formed. In the left-hand notice display area CUL, “Chibi princess is in SP reach with annihilation” is displayed, and Chibi princess Musou directing is performed with the mission of annihilating a large number of children. In the display area CUR, “Tono is going to SP reach with victory” is displayed, and the drinking comparison is performed between the niece and Tono-sama and the mission is that Ton-sama wins the drinking comparison. In this production example, it is configured to shift to Super Reach when at least one of the missions in the Chibi Hime Musou production and the drinking comparison production is achieved, and the reliability increases when both missions are achieved. Has been. In addition, after the Chibi Hime Musou production is started, the drinking comparison production may be started, after the Drinking Comparison production is started, the Chibi Hime Musou production may be started, or both productions start simultaneously May be. Further, in this production example, when at least one of the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production and the mission in the drinking comparison production is achieved, it may be a big hit.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (c), a state in which a mini game is started in the tutorial display area TT1 is shown during the execution of both the Chibi Hime Musou effect and the drink comparison effect. Yes. When the mini game is started, Tono-sama's mini character MC1 and target TGT are displayed. The target TGT is composed of areas divided into four equal parts, and the upper area of the four areas is the winning area, and a chance-up notice is given when an arrow hits the winning area. It has come to be. Note that the number of hit areas is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit areas, the entire area may be hit, or the entire area may be a non-hit area.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (d), a state in which an arrow emitted by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 is stuck in the area hitting the target TGT is shown. That is, a state in which a mini game as a notice display is successful is shown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (e), the chance-up cut-in image WCI in which the characters “chance” are displayed in the left-hand notice display area CUL in which the Chibi princess Musou effect is performed is displayed. Thus, it is notified that the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production corresponding to the area where the chance-up cut-in image WCI is displayed has been easily achieved. As described above, in this effect example, the area in which the image RDY being prepared is displayed and the area in which the notice display is performed do not coincide with each other, and it may be possible to improve the interest by giving the player a sense of incongruity. . The chance up cut-in image WCI may be displayed in the right side notice display area CUR where the drinking comparison effect is performed, or the chance is increased in both the left side notice display area CUL and the right side notice display area CUR. A cut-in image WUI may be displayed. Note that the tutorial display section TT1 is not displayed when the mini game is completed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (f), a state is shown in which the child is completely annihilated and the mission is achieved in the Chibi Hime Musou effect displayed in the left notice display area CUL.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (g), the character “completely annihilated” is displayed along with the display of Princess Chibi in the left notice display area CUL, and the mission of the Princess Chibi Musou production has been achieved. Is informed. In the right notice display area CUR, the drinking comparison effect continues.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (h), the state that the lord won the bowl and the mission was achieved in the drinking comparison effect displayed in the right notice display area CUR is shown.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (i), the word “Victory” is displayed together with the display of Tono-sama in the right notice display area CUR to notify that the mission in the drinking comparison effect has been achieved. Has been.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (j), a state in which the swordsman reach is started is shown. In addition, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, but the display of the change icon h0 displayed on the UI unit UI3 is maintained by changing the display position downward. In this production example, the swordsman reach was started because the mission in the drinking comparison production was achieved, and the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production was achieved, so Princess Chibi appeared as a friend of Tonama. In addition, if the mission in the drinking comparison production is achieved and the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production fails, it shifts to Swordsman Reach, but Princess Chibi does not appear, the mission in the Chibi Hime Musou production is achieved, and the drinking comparison production If you fail to complete the mission, move to Super Reach for Princess Chibi. That is, in this effect, the contents of the effect to be developed afterwards differ depending on the success or failure of the two missions.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 53 (k), a princess cut-in image HCI on which a “chance” character and a princess character are displayed is displayed on a background of horizontal stripes. As a result, although the reliability of the jackpot is improved, it is suggested that the reliability is not so high because it is not a notice display started via a mini-game or timer notice effect that was started from the image RDY being prepared. ing.

  FIG. 54 is a diagram showing step by step another example of the effect shown in FIG. The effects shown in FIGS. 54A to 54B are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 53A to 53B, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (c), a state is shown in which the effects of both the Chibi Hime Musou effect and the drink comparison effect are performed. In this effect example, the display of the image RDY in preparation is continued, and the mini game has not yet started. That is, in this effect example, it is shown that the notice display corresponding to the image RDY being prepared is not started before the transition to super reach. This effect continues from FIG. 54 (c) to FIG. 54 (e). In FIG. 54 (e), the chance up cut-in image WCI corresponding to the success of the mini game is not displayed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIG. 54 (f) to FIG. 54 (j) are performed. 54 (f) to FIG. 54 (j) are different from the effects shown in FIG. 53 (f) to FIG. 54 (j) in that the image RDY being prepared is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. Since it is the same except for it, explanation is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (k), the image RDY being prepared is overlapped with the effect EF5, the display of the image RDY being prepared is terminated, and a notice display corresponding to the image RDY being prepared is displayed. It is informed that it will start.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (l), a state is shown in which the mini game is started in the area where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. When the mini game is started, Tono-sama's mini character MC1 and target TGT are displayed. The target TGT is composed of areas divided into four equal parts, and the upper area of the four areas is the winning area, and a chance-up notice is given when an arrow hits the winning area. It has come to be. Note that the number of hit areas is not limited to one, and there may be a plurality of hit areas, the entire area may be hit, or the entire area may be a non-hit area.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (m), a state in which the arrow emitted by the Tono-sama mini character MC1 is stuck in the area hitting the target TGT is shown. That is, a state in which a mini game as a notice display is successful is shown.

  Then, on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 54 (n), the iron plate image TP is displayed. This iron plate image TP is a notice display for notifying that the big hit is confirmed. Thus, in this production example, the mini game is started after the transition to the super reach, and the reliability is higher than the case where the mini game is started and the corresponding notice is displayed before the transition to the super reach. There is a high notice display.

  FIG. 55 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of a preliminary announcement effect applicable to the present embodiment. The effect shown in FIG. 55 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 51 (a1), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (a2), a “reach when caught” display is performed, and a state in which a chase effect with the mission that Tono-sama catches Echigoya is started is shown. Yes. When the chase effect is started, the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 55 (a1) (main display). Is displayed. As described above, in this effect example, there is a case where the state of the symbol variation display can be grasped in the background before a certain effect is executed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (a3), the state that Tono-sama is close to Echigoya is shown. On the other hand, in the sub-window WP3, the main display is continuously performed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (a4), Tono-sama captured Echigo-ya and the mission was achieved. Thereby, it will be notified that it will reach. At this time, the image RDY being prepared may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 to indicate that the reach is being prepared. Thereby, by displaying the notice display corresponding to the result of the mission (mini game) in stock, it may be possible for the player to easily recognize that the reach as the notice display occurs.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (a5), the chasing effect is finished, the main display displayed in the sub-window WP3 is displayed again on the entire display screen, and then the “decoration 4” is reached. The situation is shown. In this production example, it is indicated that the reach has occurred due to the success of the mission in the chase production. In addition, when displaying the main display in full screen, it may be performed by enlarging the subwindow WP3 (wipe display), or may be switched and displayed. Further, when the main display becomes a full screen display, the image RDY in preparation may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  FIG. 55 (b1) to FIG. 55 (b2) show another effect example related to the display of the subwindow during the execution of the chase effect shown in FIG. 55 (a1) to FIG. 55 (a5).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 55 (b1), since one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 has a red display mode and is the display mode of the notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and the first image RDY1 being displayed is displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 55 (b1). Further, the third image RDY3 being prepared is displayed in the upper left part of the display screen. In this example effect, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 55 (b1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 53A, “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Further, a family crest member 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (b2), the chasing effect described above is started. When the chase effect is started, the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variation display of the decorative symbols displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 55 (b1) (main display). Is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, only the first image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 of the two images RDY1 and RDY3 is displayed on the subwindow WP3 in the subwindow WP3, and the third image RDY3 is prepared. Is not displayed in the sub-window WP3. As described above, even in this effect example, there are cases where the state of the symbol variation display can be grasped in the background before a certain effect (chasing effect) is executed. In this effect example, the sub window WP3 and the image being prepared are displayed at positions that do not overlap each other, but the image being prepared may overlap the sub window WP3 and the image being prepared may overlap the sub window WP3. You may make it overlap.

  FIGS. 55 (c1) to (c2) show other examples of effects shown in FIGS. 55 (b1) to (b2). The effect shown in FIG. 55 (c1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 55 (b1), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (c2), the chasing effect described above is started. When the chase effect is started, the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variation display of the decorative symbols displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 55 (c1) (main display). Is displayed. In this production example, among the first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3, the third preparing image RDY3 is continuously displayed without changing the display position, but the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed only in the subwindow WP3 as the main display is displayed in the subwindow WP3, and the first image RDY1 displayed at the position where it has been displayed is deleted.

  FIG. 55 (d1) to FIG. 55 (d2) show the display mode of the image being prepared when the background display is displayed tilted. Note that the effect example shown in FIG. 55 (d1) is the same as the effect example shown in FIG. 53 (a), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 55 (d2), the background display is reduced to about 3/4 and a shake vision effect is performed in which the reduced background image is inclined about 10 degrees counterclockwise. The situation is shown. In this case, the in-preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared does not tilt with the background display.

  FIG. 56 is a diagram showing step by step an example of a step-up notice effect applicable to this embodiment. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 56 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 51 (a1), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (a2), a state is shown in which the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is lifted to display the UI unit UI3. Yes. Specifically, the first step-up display unit SUA has the same width as the UI unit UI3, and a character “A” indicating that it is the first stage of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side. A mini game display area for performing a mini game as a step-up notice is formed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (a3), a state in which a mini game is started in the mini game display area is shown. When the mini-game is started, “Striking” is displayed in the mini-game display area, and a display indicating that the Tono-sama character throws a bowling ball is performed. In other words, this mini game is a bowling chance game whose mission is to take a strike in a bowling game.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (a4), a state where the Tono-like character throws a bowling ball and goes toward ten pins arranged in a pyramid shape is shown.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (a5), the bowling ball collides with the pins, and all of the 10 pins fall down to strike and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (a6), the preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. . Note that the image RDY in preparation has a green background color and is in a default display mode.

  When the bowling chance game ends, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and out of the frame, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position.

  56 (b1) to FIG. 56 (b8) describe another example of the step-up notice. Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 56 (b1) to (b2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 56 (a1) to (a2), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (b3), the second step-up display unit SUB rises from below the first step-up display unit SUA, and raises the UI unit UI3 and the first step-up display unit SUA. In this way, the display is shown. Specifically, the second step-up display unit SUB has the same width as the UI unit UI3, and the letter “B” indicating the second stage of the step-up notice is displayed on the left side. A mini game display area for performing a mini game as a step-up notice is formed. In this production example, it is easier for the mission to succeed when the mini game is played on the second step-up display unit SUB than when the mini game is played on the first step-up display unit SUA. In addition, when the mini game succeeds in the second step-up display unit SUB, the big hit symbol is likely to be finally determined and displayed, rather than in the case where the mini game succeeds in the first step-up display unit SUA.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (b4) shows a state in which a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the mini game is started, the message “Cup in” is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display indicating that the character of Tono is putting is performed. In other words, this mini game is a golf game whose mission is to cup in with a pad.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (b5), a state where the Tono-sama character puts and the golf ball moves toward the cup is shown.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (b6), the golf ball is cupped in and the mission is achieved.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (b7), the preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. . It is reported that the image RDY in preparation has a red background color and high reliability of the big hit.

  When the bowling chance game ends, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 56 (b8), the first step-up display unit SUA and the second step-up display unit SUB move downward and out of the frame, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position.

  In this example, the example of success in the bowling chance game and the golf game has been described. For example, in the bowling chance game, a message indicating that the pins have not collapsed is displayed to notify the mission failure. Alternatively, in the golf game, a mission failure may be notified by displaying a state in which the player has not cuped in. Also, in this production example, the Tono-sama character appeared in the bowling chance game and the golf game, but other characters may appear. For example, when a princess character appears, the Tono-sama character appeared. It may be suggested that the reliability of the jackpot is higher than the case.

  FIG. 57 is a diagram for explaining another example of the step-up notice effect shown in FIG. Note that the effect shown in FIG. 57 (a1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 56 (a1), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (a2), a state is shown in which the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed so as to lift the UI unit UI3. Yes. At this time, the explanation display and the change icon h0 displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 are deleted. That is, in this effect example, when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, a state in which a certain item in the UI unit UI3 is hidden is shown. The explanation display may be deleted after the first step-up display unit SUA starts displaying, the first step-up display unit SUA may be displayed after the explanation display is erased, The explanation display may be deleted at the timing when the one-step-up display unit SUA starts to be displayed. Thereafter, the effects shown in FIGS. 57 (a3) to (a5) are performed. The effects shown in FIGS. 57 (a3) to (a5) are not shown on the tutorial display section TT1 and the effects shown in FIGS. 56 (a3) to (a5). The description is omitted because it is the same except that the fluctuation icon h0 is not displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (a6), the state in which the mission is achieved is continuously shown.

  When the bowling chance game is over, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (a7), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and out of the frame, and the UI unit UI3 returns to the default position. Note that the explanation display and the change icon h0 remain hidden.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (a8), the change icon h0 is displayed again in a red display mode. That is, it is shown that the change icon h0 is changed to the display mode of the change notice and redisplayed. Note that the image RDY being prepared may be displayed before the display mode of the variation icon h0 is changed and redisplayed, and may be routed through a mini game, a timer notice effect, or the like.

  57 (b1) to 57 (b3) show other display modes of the step-up notice effect. The effect shown in FIG. 57 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 57 (a1), but is different in that the four pedestals in the hold icon display area are not displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 57 (b2), a state is shown in which the first step-up display unit SUA rises from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed so as to lift the UI unit UI3. Yes. At this time, the explanation display and the change icon h0 displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 are deleted. Further, in this effect example, the display position is not changed in spite of the hold icon h11 moving upward in the UI part UI3. Therefore, the hold icon h11 overlaps the mini game display area of the first step-up display part SUA. The situation is shown. That is, when the first step-up display unit SUA appears, it can be said that a certain display (hold icon h11) does not move even if the UI unit UI3 moves.

  In FIG. 57 (b3), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows that the bowling chance game is started in the mini game display area. As described above, since the hold icon h11 overlaps the mini game display area, a part of the character display of “Make Strike” is hidden. That is, it can be said that a part of the mini game is hidden by the hold icon h11.

  FIG. 58 is a diagram showing another example of step-up notice effects applicable to the present embodiment step by step.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 58 (a), since one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode and is the display mode of the change notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and is not displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. Note that the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 58A is in a default display form displayed in blue. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58 (a), the state of transition to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display portion TT1. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 58 (a), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Further, the family crest member 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  FIG. 58B shows a state in which the family crest member 224E has returned to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58 (c), a state is shown in which an animation (UI part FO animation) in which the UI part UI3 is framed out below the display screen is started. When the UI part FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is deleted.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIGS. 58 (d) to (f), the UI unit UI3 frames out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the change icon h0 is not out of frame with the UI unit UI3, and the display state is maintained with the display position lowered as shown in FIG.

  FIG. 58 (g) shows that the swordsman reach has been started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58 (h), a state is shown in which the first step-up display unit SUA is lifted and displayed so as to lift the variation icon h0. That is, in this production example, since the UI part UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but the variation icon h0 is displayed, so that only the variation icon h0 is moving. Can do.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58 (i) shows a state where the above-described bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, the message “Strike Strike” is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display showing how the Tono-sama character throws a bowling ball is displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58 (j), the Tono-like character throws a bowling ball and faces the ten pins arranged in a pyramid shape.

  After that, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58 (k), the bowling ball collides with the pins, and all the ten pins fall down to strike and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 58 (l), it is notified that the image RDY being prepared appears in the lower right corner of the display screen, and the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. Is done. Note that the image RDY in preparation has a green background color and is in a default display mode. FIG. 58 (l) shows a state in which the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and goes out of the frame. At this time, the image RDY in preparation is overlapped with the first step-up display unit SUA, and as shown in FIG. 58 (m), at least one image is displayed until the frame out of the first step-up display unit SUA is completed. The part is difficult to see.

  FIG. 59 is a diagram showing another example of the step-up notice effect applicable to the present embodiment step by step.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 59 (a1), since one variable display of FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the fluctuation icon h0 has a red display mode and is the display mode of the notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 59 (a1), the first image RDY1 in preparation is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 has a green background color and is in a default display mode. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 59 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (a1), a state of transition to super reach (swordsman reach) is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an effect display (super reach transition display) for shifting to the super reach is performed, and the family crest character 224E rises and rotates to lower the center of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It overlaps with the front side. Therefore, it is difficult to visually recognize the fluctuation icon h0 and some of the hold icons (for example, the hold icon h11) by being overlapped by the family crest member 224E. The family crest character 224E also overlaps a part of the tutorial display portion TT1. It is informed that the movement to the super reach is caused by the rising / rotating operation of the family crest member 224E. In this production example, an example is shown in which the first in-preparation image RDY1 is already displayed when shifting to super reach.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 59 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  Further, the family crest member 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  FIG. 59 (a2) shows a state in which the family crest member 224E returns to the initial position.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (a3), a state is shown in which an animation (UI part FO animation) in which the UI part UI3 frames out below the display screen is started. When the UI part FO animation is started, the hold icon displayed in the hold icon display area is deleted.

  After that, as shown in FIGS. 59 (a4) to (a6), the UI unit UI3 frames out by the UI unit FO animation. At this time, the variation icon h0 and the first image RDY1 in preparation are not out of frame together with the UI unit UI3, and as shown in FIG. 59 (a6), the display state of the variation icon h0 is lowered and the display position is lowered. The first display image RDY1 is maintained, and the display state is maintained without changing the display position.

  FIG. 59 (a7) shows a state in which the swordsman reach is started.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (a8), the first step-up display unit SUA is lifted up and displayed so as to lift the variation icon h0. That is, in this production example, since the UI part UI3 is not displayed, there is nothing to lift, but the variation icon h0 is displayed, so that only the variation icon h0 is moving. Can do. Further, the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed without overlapping the first step-up display SUA without changing the display position. Note that the first image RDY1 in preparation may be overlapped with the first step-up display SUA. The first step-up display unit SUA may be lifted, and the first preparing image RDY1 may also be moved upward.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (a9) shows a state in which the above-described bowling chance game as a mini game is started in the mini game display area. When the bowling chance game is started, the message “Strike Strike” is displayed in the mini game display area, and a display showing how the Tono-sama character throws a bowling ball is displayed. However, the mini game display area of the first step-up display SUA is overlapped with the first image RDY1 being prepared, and is more difficult to see than when not overlapped. The same applies to the following effects.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (a10), the Tono-like character throws a bowling ball and faces the ten pins arranged in a pyramid shape.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (a11), the bowling ball collides with the pins, and all the ten pins fall down to strike and the mission is achieved. .

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (a12), the third preparing image RDY3 appears in the upper left corner of the display screen, and the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. Is notified. That is, when a certain number of images in preparation are displayed in a certain area and a new image in preparation is displayed, the new image in preparation is displayed in another area. Can do. Note that the third preparatory image RDY3 has a green background color and is in a default display mode. Further, as shown in FIGS. 59 (a12) to (a13), the first step-up display unit SUA moves downward and out of the frame.

  FIGS. 59 (b1) to (b2) are diagrams showing another display mode of the UI unit FO animation. Note that FIG. 59 (b1) is an effect following FIG. 59 (a3). Also, the effect shown in FIG. 55 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 59 (a4), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 59 (b2), a state in which the swordsman reach is started after the UI part FO animation is completed is shown. In this production example, the UI unit UI3 is out of frame by the UI unit FO animation, but it is shown that only the pedestal on which the change icon h0 is placed is maintained in a manner in which the display position is lowered. That is, even if the UI unit UI3 is out of frame, a part of the UI unit UI3 is displayed.

  FIG. 60 is a diagram illustrating an example of a pseudo-continuous effect applicable to the present embodiment in a stepwise manner.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 60 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 60 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. 60 (a1), the image RDY being prepared is displayed. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Note that the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 60A1 has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 53A, “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight-generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 60 (a2), the decorative symbols are sequentially stopped and displayed in the order of the left symbol and the right symbol, with “decoration 6” on the left symbol and “decoration 7” on the right symbol. The state of being stopped is shown. Note that the middle symbol is being displayed in a variable manner.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 60 (a3), the middle symbol fluctuates at a low speed, and the pseudo continuous symbol composed of Tono-sama's symbols is scrolled in from the upper part of the display screen. ing.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 60 (a4), a state in which the pseudo-continuous symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed on the middle symbol is shown.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 60 (a5), a pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation for producing whether or not to start the pseudo-ream is started. When the quasi-continuous symbol stop animation is started, the UI part UI3 leaves the frame by the UI part FO animation, leaving the change icon h0 and the image RDY being prepared. Here, the UI part FO animation may be started after the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is started, the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation may be started after the UI part FO animation is started, or the pseudo-continuous symbol design is started. The UI part FO animation may be started at the timing when the stop animation starts. Moreover, the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation may be started after the UI part FO animation is completed. As described above, in this production example, the UI unit UI3 is not displayed in a certain state such as when performing pseudo-continuous production or when a pseudo-series is established. When the pseudo continuous symbol stop animation is started, the pseudo continuous symbol expands in the horizontal direction as shown in FIGS. 60 (a5) to (a7).

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 60 (a6), the pseudo-continuous symbol further expands, overlaps the left symbol and the right symbol, and the left symbol and the right symbol are difficult to visually recognize. ing.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 60 (a7), the pseudo-continuous symbols further expand, and the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N Is displayed. At this time, the pseudo-continuous pattern is also expanded in the vertical direction, and a part thereof is overlapped by the image RDY being prepared. The pseudo-continuous symbols are also overlapped with the stage name display portion ST1, the reception count display 850, and the stock button image 852 displayed on the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device. It is also overlapped with the Tono-sama character displayed at 208N and the second reserved number display. At this time, the family crest character 224E starts to rise and overlaps a part of the pseudo-continuous pattern.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 60 (a8), the family crest member 224E rotates, and a sound “don” is output from the speaker 120 to notify that a pseudo-ream is performed.

  FIG. 60 (a9) shows a state in which the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation is finished and the pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in the original display mode, and the UI unit UI3 is framed in by the frame-in animation (UI unit FI animation). Has been. It should be noted that the UI part FI animation may be started after the quasi-continuous symbol stop animation has ended, the UI part FI animation may be started before the quasi-continuous symbol stop animation ends, or the pseudo-continuous symbol stop animation. The UI part FI animation may be started at the timing when the animation ends. Note that the decorative symbols are temporarily stopped due to fluctuations in the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-pseudo-continuous symbols-decoration 7”, and then the second variation of the decorative symbols is displayed by the pseudo-ream. The

  FIGS. 60 (b1) to 60 (b3) show examples of the display before and after the Stechen effect performed at the time of mode transition or stage change. The effect shown in FIG. 60 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 60 (a1), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In FIG. 60 (b2), the Stechen effect is started, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N are dark-displayed, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L It shows a state in which the approximate center shines and light rays extend from there to the left and right. At this time, the light beam is displayed across the second decorative symbol display device 208M and the third decorative symbol display device 208N. In this effect example, it is shown that the UI unit UI3 is not displayed during the dark display by the stechen effect. In addition, in this effect example, a state in which the image RDY being prepared is not displayed in the dark display by the stechen effect is also shown. In addition, during the dark display, the image RDY being prepared may end and a mini game or a timer notice effect may be started.

  FIG. 60 (b3) shows a state in which the stechen effect is finished. In this effect example, after the Stechen effect is ended, the same display as before the Stechen effect is started is performed. That is, it is shown that it was a fake Stechen effect in which neither mode transition nor stage change was performed.

  FIG. 61 is a diagram showing an example of a button notice effect applicable to the present embodiment step by step.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 61 (a), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 61 (a), since one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 has a red display mode and is the display mode of the change notice, but the hold icon h11 has a default display mode. A tutorial display portion TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and is not displayed in the tutorial display portion TT1 shown in FIG. In addition, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. 61A has a notice display mode displayed in gold. Further, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 61 (a), a state in which the swordsman reach is started is shown. Specifically, the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L is displayed small above the second decorative symbol display device 208M, and the variable display is continued, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L. "Decoration 4" forming a reach state is displayed at the left and right corners of the display screen. Thereby, it may be possible to easily recognize that the “decoration 4” is in the reach state. This production example shows an example in which the UI part UI3 is displayed even during execution of the swordsman reach.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, all of the stage name display portion ST1, the reception count display 850, and the stock button image 852 are deleted, and the background display is also the background display of the swordsman reach.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, but the Tono-sama character is not displayed. The background display is also the background display of Swordsman Reach.

  Further, the family crest member 224E emits red light in accordance with the display color of the variation icon h0. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 61 (b), a united animation is started, and a pair of semi-transparent button images 136q are displayed from the upper left and right of the display screen, and they approach each other while approaching each other. Is moving. Note that the operation of the effect button 136 is not yet accepted during the display of the combined animation.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 61 (c), a state immediately before the pairing of semi-transparent button images 136q comes close to each other and the combination is completed is shown. In the effect example shown in FIG. 61 (c), when the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q come close to each other, the effect EF6 overlaps at least part of the pair of semi-transparent button images 136q, rather than the state where they do not overlap. The translucent button image 136q is difficult to visually recognize. Therefore, the player may have a sense of expectation as to whether or not the combined animation is successful. Further, FIG. 61 (c) shows that the UI unit UI3 is out of frame by the UI unit FO animation. It should be noted that the effect EF6 may be displayed after the UI unit UI3 is out of frame, the effect EF6 may be displayed before the UI unit UI3 is out of frame, or the effect at the timing when the UI unit UI3 is out of frame. EF6 may be displayed.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 61 (d), the coalesced animation is successful, the deca button image 136aL is materialized, and the button notice effect is started, and the remaining time meter MT is also displayed and the operation acceptance state is displayed. It shows how it started. As described above, in this effect example, an example is shown in which the UI unit UI3 is not displayed during a period in which the button notice effect is performed by at least the button image 136a (deca button image 136aL).

  FIG. 62 is a diagram showing an example of effects that can be applied to this embodiment in stages.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 62 (a1), since two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h11 and h12 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 62 (a1), “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed. And the relationship between Tono-sama's character. In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 62 (a1), the first special symbol display device 212 is stopped and displayed as a losing symbol, and the first decorative symbol display device 208L displays a loss of “decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 6”. Stopped display with a combination of decorative symbols. In addition, the special figure 1 4th pattern 284a1 is also lit in a display mode of loss. In addition, UI part UI3 shown to FIG. 60 (a1) is set as the notification display aspect displayed in red.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 53A, “Castle Town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight-generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  FIG. 62 (a2) shows a state where the symbols are being stopped and displayed. At this time, the variation icon h0 is deleted in the first decorative symbol display device 208L.

  Thereafter, when the symbol variation in the first special symbol display device 212 is started, the UI decorative wipe display unit WP4 that covers the entire UI unit UI3 is displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a3). The Tono-sama character riding on the motorcycle enters the frame from the left side of the UI part wipe display part WP4, and as shown in FIGS. 62 (a3) to (a5), is shown to sprint toward the right end. . That is, in this production example, the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is displayed in order to return the display mode of the UI unit UI3 from the preview display mode to the default display mode, and the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 displays the production. In some cases, the display mode of the UI unit UI3 can be naturally changed. For example, when the display is lost due to the super reach effect and the display is returned to the original display, the entire display screen may be covered with the wipe display unit and the effect display may be performed on the wipe display unit.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (a6), the appearance by the Tono-sama character in the UI part wipe display part WP4 is ended, and the UI part wipe display part WP4 is deleted. When the UI unit wipe display unit WP4 is deleted and the UI unit UI3 is displayed, the hold icon corresponding to the display position of the first hold icon h11 is placed on the base on which the change icon is displayed and the change icon is displayed. The hold icon that was at the display position of the second hold icon h12 becomes h1 and becomes the first hold icon h11 and moves onto the corresponding pedestal. In the tutorial display section TT1, the display “Tosama is Yatsushiro Shogun” is displayed, and the explanation display is changed before and after the display of the UI section wipe display section WP4.

  In this example, the UI part wipe display unit WP4 may not be displayed or may be performed in the state where the image RDY being prepared is displayed. If the UI wipe display unit WP4 is displayed while the image RDY being prepared is displayed, the image RDY being prepared is not displayed during that time, and as a result, the image RDY being prepared is displayed soon. The mini-game or timer notice effect may be started after finishing.

  62 (b1) to 62 (b4) show examples of display on the tutorial display unit TT1.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 62 (b1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the lower part of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has the variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed in which four pedestals are arranged so that four hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 62 (b1), since one variable display in FIG. 1 is held, one hold icon h11 is displayed in the hold icon display area. Note that the change icon h0 is displayed in gold and is in the display mode of the change notice, but the hold icon h11 is in the default display mode. The family crest member 224E also emits light in gold according to the display color of the variation icon h0. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0, and is not displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 62 (b1). In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Note that the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 62 (b1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 62 (b1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed.

  In addition, a family crest character 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and an eight-generation character 224Fa, which is one of the effect movable bodies, is arranged above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. And a general character 224Fb are arranged.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIGS. 62 (b2) to (b4), in the tutorial display unit TT1, a swordsman character scrolls in from below and continuously moves his / her line of sight from the top of the head to the feet. It shows how the swordsman character is scrolled. Also, as shown in FIG. 62 (b4), after the swordsman character's feet are displayed, the swordsman character is scroll-displayed in such a manner that the line of sight is continuously moved from the feet to the top of the head. That is, a continuous scroll display between the top of the swordsman character and the feet is displayed in a reciprocating manner. In this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT1 shows an example in which the entire character is displayed by displaying a part of the character while continuously scrolling.

  In this production example, for example, when the explanation display is not resumed or when only the hold icon is hidden (the UI unit UI3 is displayed), a certain display using the UI unit UI3 is used. It can be said that an example of performing is shown.

  FIG. 63 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of effects applicable to the present embodiment. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 to which the example of production shown in FIG. 63 can be applied can be divided into, for example, a first special figure start opening and a second special figure start opening per start opening, and in a normal gaming state There are so-called MAX 8 machines (sometimes referred to as 8 storage order machines) that can hold 8 variable displays. Here, a description will be given using a MAX8 machine as an example.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (a1), the UI unit UI3 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen, and the UI unit UI3 has a variation icon h0 placed on the pedestal at the center thereof. On the left side of the variation icon h0, a hold icon display area is formed on the left side of the change icon h0. Four hold icons are arranged in front and back in a staggered arrangement so that eight hold icons can be displayed. At the timing shown in FIG. 63 (a1), a total of seven variable displays in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 are held, so seven hold icons h1 to h7 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h7 are all in the default display mode. Further, a tutorial display section TT1 is arranged on the right side of the variation icon h0. In the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 63 (a1), “Panda is a master of the lord” is displayed and an explanation display is provided. It has been broken. In this example effect, the decorative symbol is moved above the second decorative symbol display device 208M and displayed in a reduced size. Also, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 63 (a1) has a default display mode displayed in blue.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a stage name display unit ST1 is disposed at the lower part of the display screen. In the stage name display section ST1 shown in FIG. 63 (a1), “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town. The second decorative symbol display device 208M also displays a reception count display 850 and a stock button image 852.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is displayed. According to the second number-of-holds display, at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (a1), it is notified that four special figures 1 are held and three special figures 2 are held.

  In addition, a family crest member 224E is arranged below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In addition, above the first decorative symbol display device 208L, an Yatsushiro character 224Fa and a general character 224Fb, which are one of the effect movable bodies, are arranged.

  FIG. 63 (a2) shows a state in which a game ball has won a prize at the second special figure starting port and a total of eight suspensions of special figure 1 and special figure 2 have been made. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the eighth hold icon h8 is displayed, the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7 and the change icon h0 that are already displayed. It is shown that the display mode is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the heel imitating the face of the heel. The UI unit UI3 also changes from the default display mode to a special display mode displayed in gold. In addition, the speaker 120 outputs a sound “pong” to notify that the hold is full. In this effect example, an example of an effect that changes the UI unit UI3, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 all at once when the reserve is full is shown. In this example effect, the number of symbol variation displays corresponding to the hold icon indicating the display mode of the bag may be notified.

  FIG. 63 (b1) shows a situation where a swordsman reach is being performed. In the third decorative symbol display device 208N shown in FIG. 63 (b1), the second hold number display is displayed. According to the second hold number display, the special figure 1 is displayed at the timing shown in FIG. 63 (b1). It is informed that four are reserved and three special figures 2 are reserved.

  FIG. 63 (b2) shows a state in which a game ball has won a prize at the second special figure starting port and a total of eight suspensions of special figure 1 and special figure 2 have been made. Specifically, in the second number-of-holds display in the third decorative symbol display device 208N, it is notified that four special figures 1 are held, four special figures 2 are held, and the speaker 120. Will output a voice “Pong” to notify that the hold is full.

  FIG. 63 (b3) shows a situation where the super reach is lost, the swordsman reach is finished, and the display returns to the castle town stage display. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the production of the swordsman reach is completed and the castle town stage is returned, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4” is displayed and shaken. Temporary stop display due to fluctuation is performed. In addition, since the swordsman reach became full during the performance of the swordsman reach, the UI part UI3 was changed from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold, and all of the change icons h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 Changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the bag. In this production example, when the UI unit UI3 is hidden by the super reach, the UI unit UI3, the change icon, and the hold icon are displayed when the UI unit UI3 is redisplayed. The example of the effect which changes a display mode is shown.

  FIGS. 63 (c1) to (c4) are diagrams for explaining another aspect of the effects shown in FIGS. 63 (b1) to (b3). Note that the effects shown in FIGS. 63 (c1) to (c2) are the same as the effects shown in FIGS. 63 (b1) to (b2), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 63 (c3) shows a situation in which the super reach is lost, the swordsman reach is finished, and the display is returned to the castle town stage display. Specifically, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, when the production of the swordsman reach is completed and the castle town stage is returned, the combination of the decorative symbols of “decoration 4-decoration 5-decoration 4” is displayed and shaken. Temporary stop display due to fluctuation is performed. Moreover, in this production example, while the execution of the production of the swordsman reach has become full, the display of the UI unit UI3, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 is not changed, and the full fill is achieved. A character “MAX” indicating that it has been displayed is displayed above the change icon h0. Thereafter, the symbols are fixedly displayed in a state where the display modes of the UI unit UI3, the change icon h0, and the hold icons h1 to h8 are not changed.

  Thereafter, when symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 is started, as shown in FIG. 63 (c4), the UI unit UI3 changes from the default display mode to the special display mode displayed in gold, and changes. All of the icon h0 and the hold icons h1 to h8 are changed from the default display mode to the bag display mode. Thereafter, the hold icons h1 to h8 are respectively moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the first hold icon h1 is placed on the pedestal on which the change icon is displayed to become the change icon h0. The hold icons at the display positions of the second hold icon h2 to the eighth hold icon h8 become the first hold icon h1 to the seventh hold icon h7, respectively, and move to the corresponding pedestals. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 63 (c4), the decorative symbol variation display is started. In the tutorial display section TT1, “Panda is the master of the lord” is displayed and the explanation is displayed.

  FIG. 64 is a diagram showing step by step another example of effects that can be applied to the present embodiment.

  64 (a1) to FIG. 64 (a3) and FIG. 64 (b1) to FIG. 64 (b2), the UI unit UI4 includes a variable icon display region, a hold icon display region, a tutorial display unit TT4, and a stage name. The display unit ST2 is integrally displayed on the lower part of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. In this production example as well, when the super reach is reached, the UI portion frames out below the first decorative symbol display device 208L. It may be left. When the notice icon is stocked, the explanation display in the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2 is deleted. Further, in this effect example, the image being prepared can be displayed on the tutorial display section TT4 and the stage name display section ST2.

  As shown in FIG. 64 (a1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a UI unit UI4 surrounded by a square frame is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. The UI unit UI4 shown in FIG. 64 (a1) has a hold icon display area in the center. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed at the upper center of the UI unit UI4, and the variation icon is displayed in a manner of being placed on a frame formed by the UI unit UI4. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 64 (a1), two variable displays in FIG. 1 are held, so two hold icons h11 and h12 are displayed in the hold icon display area. The change icon h0 and the two hold icons h11 and h12 are both in the default display mode. A tutorial display section TT4 as an explanation display section is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area, and a stage name display section ST2 is arranged on the left side of the hold icon display area. Since the functional configurations of the tutorial display unit TT4 and the stage name display unit ST2 are the same as those of the tutorial display unit TT1 and the stage name display unit ST1 described above, description thereof is omitted here. In the tutorial display section TT4 shown in FIG. 64 (a1), “With notice icon digestion ...” is displayed, and in the stage name display section ST2, “Castle Town Stage” is displayed. It is reported that the current stage is a castle town. In addition, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, variable display of the first decorative symbol is performed.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, a variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed on the upper part of the display screen of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown, and various actions are performed according to the progress of the game. In addition, in the upper part of the display screen of the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of special figure 1 and special figure 2 is also displayed.

  Further, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224F and the general character are above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. 224Fb is arranged.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (a2) shows a state in which the explanation display displayed on the tutorial display unit TT4 is switched to the first preparing image RDY1. The first preparing image RDY1 has a green background color and is in a default display mode.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (a3), the stage name displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 is switched to the fourth image RDY4 being prepared. The fourth preparatory image RDY4 has a green background color and is in a default display mode. Thus, in this effect example, an example in which an image in preparation is displayed in each of a plurality of explanation display portions is shown.

  FIG. 64 (b1) to FIG. 64 (b2) are diagrams showing another effect example following FIG. 64 (a1). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 64 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 64 (a2), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (b2), the fourth preparation image RDY4 is displayed in the display frame of the stage name display unit ST2 while the stage name displayed on the stage name display unit ST2 is continuously displayed. A state of being displayed at a position shifted upward is shown. That is, a state where the image being prepared overlaps with a part of the area where the explanation display is displayed is shown. Such a display mode can also be applied to the tutorial display unit TT4.

  Further, as shown in FIG. 64 (c1), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, a balloon part TT3 as a third tutorial display part (explanation display part) is displayed on the right side of the display screen together with a spear character GY1. ing. The samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 are displays that may be displayed when a conversation effect (or a speech effect) is performed, such as a tutorial display (description display) or a notice display. At the timing shown in FIG. 64 (c1), in response to the line display by Princess Chibi's character CH1, the line display “here is” is displayed in the speech balloon TT3, and the conversation notice continues. Here, the samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 are overlapped by the first decorative symbol, but the samurai character GY1 and the speech balloon TT3 may be overlapped by the first decorative symbol. Further, the frog character GY1 and the balloon portion TT3 may be arranged at a position that does not overlap the first decorative symbol. The spear character GY1 and the balloon part TT3 may be displayed at the same timing, or after the spear character GY1 is displayed, the balloon part TT3 may be displayed, or the balloon part TT3 is displayed. A spear character GY1 may be displayed later. Further, the conversation announcement by the princess Chibi character CH1 and the samurai character GY1 may be performed by operating the effect button 136. In the tutorial display portion TT1, it is not displayed. Note that the timing at which the tutorial display portion TT1 is not displayed may be the timing after the spear character GY1 is displayed, or the timing before the spear character GY1 is displayed. Also good. Further, the timing at which the explanation display on the tutorial display portion TT1 is erased may be the same as the timing at which the frog character GY1 is displayed. In this case, it may be configured to always be performed at any timing, or may be configured so that the timing differs depending on the case. Further, the plurality of arrows are displayed so as to pierce the right side of the second decorative symbol display device 208M.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 64 (c2), the crest character 224E is lifted from the initial position and overlapped with the front side of the first decorative symbol display device 208L. More specifically, the crest character 224E completely covers the hold display frame FL1 after movement, and also includes a part of the first hold icon h11, a part of the tutorial display part TT1, and one of the balloon parts TT2. Each part is covered.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 64 (c3), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the extended animation (extended animation) of the hold display frame FL1 is performed, the hold display frame FL1 is expanded upward, and the family crest actor 224E. A state of appearing above is shown. That is, it can be said that the portion where the hold display frame FL1 is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E appears. Further, the expanded hold display frame FL1 overlaps the balloon part TT2 and overlaps the balloon part TT2, but does not overlap the balloon part TT3 and does not overlap. That is, in this effect example, there is a case where the speech notice (balloon portion TT3) displayed later does not overlap even if the hold display frame FL1 is expanded. As described above, the display mode of the extended hold display frame FL1 may be referred to as an extended display mode. In this production example, the hold display frame FL1 before expansion and the hold display frame FL1 after expansion are shown, but the extended animation includes one in which the hold display frame FL1 expands in stages.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 64 (c4), the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows the appearance of the ninja character NJ1 in the upper part of the hold display frame FL1. Note that the ninja character NJ1 is partially overlapped with the family crest character 224E, and is more difficult to view than when the crest character 224E is not partially overlapped.

  FIG. 64 (c5) shows a state in which the family crest member 224E is lowered toward the initial position. As a result, a portion of the ninja character NJ1 that is not overlapped with the family crest member 224E is enlarged, so that the visual recognition is easy. Further, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shows a state where the ninja character NJ1 is throwing the shuriken SH1. The shuriken SH1 is moving toward the tutorial display section TT1.

  Thereafter, in FIG. 64 (c6), the crest character 224E is returned to the initial position. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the shuriken SH1 overlaps the tutorial display portion TT1, and the effect EF2 is displayed in which a part of the tutorial display portion TT1 explodes. This effect EF2 makes it difficult to visually recognize a part of the tutorial display portion TT1. Thereby, a notice may be displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and the player may have a sense of expectation that the reliability of the jackpot may be increased.

  Then, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 64 (c7), the preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the corresponding mini game or timer notice effect is started. . This in-preparation image RDY has a green background color and is in a default display mode. In this effect, instead of the image RDY in preparation, a timer notice display may be displayed and the timer notice effect may be started, a mini game may be started, or a notice display may be performed. .

  FIG. 65 is a diagram showing step by step an example of the extended display effect of the hold display frame.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 65 (a1), the UI unit UI2 is arranged at the bottom of the display screen. The UI unit UI2 in this effect example has a hold icon display area on the left side. The hold icon display area is partitioned by four frames, each forms a hold display frame, and one hold icon is displayed in each frame. At the timing shown in FIG. 65 (a1), four hold icons are accommodated in each frame in the hold icon display area, and the second of the first hold icons h11 to fourth hold icons h14. The hold icon h12 is a display mode of a pre-reading notice (for example, a display mode that lights up in blue), and the other hold icons are set as default display modes. In addition, a variation icon display area is formed above the frame in which the first hold icon h11 is accommodated, and the variation icon h0 is displayed in the variation icon display area during symbol variation display. Here, the area where the change icon h0 is displayed may also be included in the UI unit UI2. A tutorial display section TT7 is arranged on the right side of the hold icon display area. At the timing shown in FIG. 65 (a1), the preparing image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display portion TT7. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. Note that neither the fluctuation icon h0 nor the first hold icon h11 to the fourth hold icon h14 overlap the decorative symbol.

  In the second decorative symbol display device 208M, the variable display of the second decorative symbol is performed at the top of the display screen. In this production example, none of the stage name display section ST1, the reception count display 850, and the stock button image 852 is displayed.

  In the third decorative symbol display device 208N, the second reserved number display of Special Figure 1 and Special Figure 2 is displayed at the upper part of the display screen, but the Tono-sama character is not displayed. The background display is also the background display of Swordsman Reach.

  In addition, the above-mentioned family crest character 224E is disposed below the first decorative symbol display device 208L, and the above-mentioned eight-generation character 224Fa and the general character character 224Fb are disposed above the first decorative symbol display device 208L. Has been. Note that at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (a1), the family crest member 224E emits blue light in accordance with the display color of the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 65 (a2), the hold icon display area is shown in an enlarged manner. The enlarged display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually increases. At the timing shown in FIG. 65 (a2), the hold display frame that accommodates the second hold icon h12, which is the display mode of the pre-reading notice, is enlarged and displayed at the center of the display screen. In other words, in this effect example, it can be said that the hold display frame in which the second hold icon h12 is accommodated is displayed in an expanded manner. Further, in this effect example, the tutorial display unit TT7 is outside the display screen due to the enlarged display of the hold display frame, but the image RDY being prepared displayed in the tutorial display unit TT7 does not change the display position. The tutorial display part TT7 is separated and displayed in the lower right part of the display screen. At this time, the image RDY in preparation may overlap with a part of the hold display frame or the hold icon. Note that, at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (a2), the first decorative symbol is variably displayed on the third decorative symbol display device 208N.

  Thereafter, at the timing shown in FIG. 65 (a3), the emission color of the family crest member 224E that has emitted blue light changes to green. That is, it can be said that the display color of the second hold icon h12 is foreseeing a change from blue to green.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (a4), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the display color of the enlarged second hold icon h12 is changed from blue to green. Thereby, the player may be able to increase a sense of expectation for the big hit with respect to the symbol variation display related to the hold corresponding to the second hold icon h12.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 65 (a5), in the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the hold icon display area is reduced to return to the default display mode. The reduced display of the hold icon display area can be performed by, for example, an animation display that gradually reduces. In this effect example, the hold display frame can be expanded in this way, and the display mode of the hold icon can be changed with the expanded hold display frame. Further, in this effect example, the ready image RDY is displayed in a manner in which it is accommodated in the tutorial display portion TT7 that appears by the reduced display of the hold icon display area.

  65 (b1) to FIG. 65 (b2) show other forms of the production examples shown in FIG. 65 (a1) to FIG. 65 (a5). Note that the effect shown in FIG. 65 (b1) is the same as the effect shown in FIG. 65 (a1), and thus the description thereof is omitted.

  The first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 65 (b2) shows a state where the hold icon display area is enlarged and displayed in the manner described above with reference to FIG. 65 (a2). At this time, the hold icon display area is displayed below the display screen, and is overlapped by the ready image RDY together with the enlarged hold icon. In the effect example shown in FIG. 65 (b2), the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and it relates to the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 65 (b1). The display (main display) is displayed. In the display in the sub window WP3, the UI unit UI2 is not displayed, but may be displayed. Further, the sub-window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged hold icon display area. As described above, in this effect example, there is a case where the state of the symbol variation display can be grasped in the background before a certain effect is executed.

  Next, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs will be described with reference to FIGS. 66 is a diagram showing a display example of a ball removal error display, FIG. 67 is a diagram showing a display example of a ball removal error display, and FIG. 68 shows a display example of a ball removal error display. FIG. The display position of the warning message for the ball removal error (hereinafter referred to as “ball removal error display”) is a fixed location, but it is possible to appropriately set which position is the display position. is there. In the following description, a display example including a variation of the display position of the ball removal error display is shown below. Note that this ball removal error display is erased when the ball removal button 130 is operated and the lower pan full state is eliminated and the ball removal error is eliminated. Moreover, although the example of an effect shown below shows about the example of a ball removal error display, it is applicable also to the door open error etc. which generate | occur | produce when the front frame door 106 is opened, for example. Further, when a ball removal error display is being performed, an error sound may be output together or may not be output.

  66 (a1) to FIG. 66 (a2) show, for example, display examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects shown in FIG. 35 (c) to FIG. 35 (d). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (a1), a state in which the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed overlapping the part of the tutorial display portion TT1 that is closed by the shutter image is shown. ing. In the ball removal error display ERR1, a message “please remove the ball” is displayed, and it is urged to produce a game ball stored in the lower plate and cancel the full state of the lower plate.

  In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (a2), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the tutorial display portion TT1 in which the shutter image is opened and the image RDY being prepared is displayed. The state of being displayed is shown. Thereby, it may become possible to notice the image RDY in preparation by looking at the ball removal display. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the image RDY being prepared. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. Further, it may be possible to give a chance to remove the ball when the ball removal error display ERR1 and the image RDY in preparation are simultaneously viewed and the display of the image RDY in preparation is completed.

  66 (b1) to FIG. 66 (b2) show an example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects shown in FIG. 37 (c1) to FIG. Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (b1), a state in which a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the remaining time display meter MT4 is shown. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that one of the timer notices composed of a plurality of displays is overlapped by the ball removal error display ERR1.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (b2), when the remaining time display meter MT4 becomes shorter as the remaining time of the timer display becomes shorter, the overlap state due to the ball removal error display ERR1 is eliminated, and the remaining time display meter MT4. Is easily visible. Thereby, the remaining time display meter MT4 may be noticed by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the remaining time display meter MT4. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. Further, when the ball removal error display ERR1 and the remaining time meter MT4 are viewed at the same time, the display of the remaining time meter MT4 may be finished to give a chance to remove the ball.

  66 (c1) to FIG. 66 (c2) show, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the presentation examples shown in FIGS. 38 (b4) to (b5). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (c1), the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the enemy swordsman character, but does not overlap the translucent button image 136q related to the united animation. No appearance is shown. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 may overlap with the translucent button image 136q in the combined animation.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (c2), when the semi-transparent button image 139q approaches, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps. Thereby, it may become possible to notice the united animation by looking at the display without the ball. In some cases, it is possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the combined animation. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, there may be a case where the ball removal error display ERR1 and the combined animation are viewed at the same time, and when the combined animation is displayed, a chance to remove the ball is given.

  66 (d1) to FIG. 66 (d2) show, for example, a display example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects shown in FIG. 45 (f) to FIG. 45 (g). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (d1), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed so as to overlap the right symbol of the decorative symbol and the remaining time meter MT. The UI unit UI3 including TT1 is not overlapped.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (d2), the ready image RDY is displayed again on the tutorial display unit TT1, and it is notified that the second timer notice effect is started, but the ready image RDY is displayed again. Sometimes, the enlarged image RDY is displayed compared to when the first preparing image RDY is displayed. Therefore, the preparatory image RDY is overlapped by a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 that has not overlapped the tutorial display portion TT1 until now. Thereby, it may become possible to notice the enlarged image RDY being prepared by looking at the ball-free display. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the image RDY being prepared. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, there may be a case where the ball removal error display ERR1 and the enlarged image RDY being prepared are simultaneously viewed, and when the display of the image RDY being prepared is completed, a chance to remove the ball may be given.

  66 (e1) to FIG. 66 (e2) show, for example, display examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects shown in FIG. 46 (a5) to FIG. 46 (a6). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (e1), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 partially overlaps the area where the character of the swordsman is drawn, but a Tono-like character is drawn. There is no overlap in the area.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 66 (e2), as a result of the player's long pressing operation of the effect button 136, the area where the character of the lord placed above is drawn is enlarged. A part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the area where the character is drawn. Thereby, it may become possible to notice the superiority or inferiority of the Tono-sama character and the enemy swordsman character who see the ball-free display. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by observing the superiority or inferiority of the Tono-sama character and the enemy swordsman character. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 and the superiority and inferiority of the Tono-sama character and the enemy swordsman character are simultaneously observed. May be possible.

  66 (f1) to FIG. 66 (f2) show an example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects shown in FIG. 48 (e) to FIG. 48 (f), for example. Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (f1), a state in which a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the second image RDY2 being prepared is shown. On the other hand, there is no overlap with the display area in which the characters “Go” are displayed (the display area in which the first image RDY being prepared is displayed).

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 66 (f2), the characters “Go” are erased together with the display area, the second image RDY2 being prepared for sliding is moved downward, and the position of the tutorial display portion TT1 is displayed. An image moving animation is being prepared. In addition, a notice effect (preceding start notice effect) corresponding to the completion of the timer display countdown by the timer notice effect corresponding to the first image RDY1 in preparation is started, and a state where the ninja character NJ4 appears is shown. Has been. At this time, the overlap state between the ball removal error display ERR1 and the second image being prepared RDY2 is eliminated. On the other hand, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the ninja character NJ4. Further, the ball removal error display ERR1 may not overlap the ninja character NJ4. Accordingly, it may be possible to notice the display of the second ready image RDY2 and the display of the ninja character NJ4 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the second preparing image RDY2 or the ninja character NJ4. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1, the second image RDY2 being prepared, and the ninja character NJ4 can be seen simultaneously, and when the second image RDY2 and the ninja character NJ4 are displayed, a chance to remove the ball can be given. There is a case.

  67 (a1) to FIG. 67 (a2) show, for example, display examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects shown in FIG. 51 (a3) to FIG. 51 (a4). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (a1), a ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette wheel RR. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (a2), the first preparing image RDY1 is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 with the princess character HME added to the upper right portion thereof, and is displayed on the upper left of the display screen. Is displayed such that the third preparing image RDY3 is adjacent to the frog character GII, and the Chibi princess character CHM is displayed below the third preparing image RDY3. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the princess Chibi character CHM. That is, in this effect example, it can be said that at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps a part of the plurality of images in preparation. Thereby, it may be possible to notice at least one of a plurality of images in preparation (including characters) by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at a plurality of images in preparation. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, there may be a case where the ball removal error display ERR1 and the plurality of images in preparation are simultaneously viewed, and when the display of the image in preparation is finished, a ball removal is given.

  67 (b1) to FIG. 67 (b2) show an example of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects shown in FIG. 51 (b1) to FIG. 51 (b2), for example. Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (b1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the left side of the roulette wheel RR. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (b2), the third preparing image RDY3 is displayed so that the character GII of the spider is adjacent. In other words, a spear character GII appears at a position corresponding to the spear character GII, and an image that is being prepared to appear along with the spear character GII is also displayed at a position adjacent to the spear character GII. In this case, unlike the example of the effect shown in FIG. 67 (a2), the image being prepared corresponding to the certain effect (Chibi princess character CHM) is not displayed. There is no overlap.

  67 (c1) to FIG. 67 (c2) show, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects shown in FIG. 53 (b) to FIG. 53 (e). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (c1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed in the approximate center of the left notice display area CUL in the effect shown in FIG. 53 (b). Yes. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (c2), in the effect shown in FIG. 53 (e), the mini game is executed based on the image RDY being prepared displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. As a result of the success, it is shown that the chance up cut-in image WCI is displayed in the left notice display area CUL. At this time, it is shown that a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the chance up cut-in image WCI. Thereby, it may be possible to notice the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In some cases, the ball removal error display ERR1 may be noticed by looking at the chance-up cut-in image WCI. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, there may be a case where the ball removal error display ERR1 and the chance-up cut-in image WCI are simultaneously viewed, and when the display of the chance-up cut-in image WCI is finished, the ball removal is given.

  67 (d1) to FIG. 67 (d2) show, for example, display examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects shown in FIG. 55 (b1) to FIG. 55 (b2). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (d1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display section TT1 in the effect example shown in FIG. 55 (b1). . At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (d2), the chasing effect described above is started. When the chase effect is started, the sub window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and the display related to the variable display of the decorative symbols displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 67 (d2) (main display). Is displayed. The first preparing image RDY1 and the third preparing image RDY3 are continuously displayed without changing the display position. In this case, only the first image RDY1 displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 of the two images RDY1 and RDY3 is displayed on the subwindow WP3 in the subwindow WP3, and the third image RDY3 is prepared. Is not displayed in the sub-window WP3. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub-window WP3, and is continuously displayed without changing the display position. At this time, at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 may be overlapped with the sub window WP3.

  67 (e1) to FIG. 67 (e2) show, for example, display examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects shown in FIG. 55 (d1) to FIG. 55 (d2). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (e1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed in the upper right corner of the display screen in the effect example shown in FIG. 55 (d1). . At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (e2), the background display is reduced to about 3/4, and the reduced background image is tilted about 10 degrees counterclockwise, and a shake vision effect is performed. The state of being broken is shown. In this case, the in-preparation image RDY displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display mode or the display position. That is, it is shown that the image RDY being prepared does not tilt with the background display. At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is maintained in the display state without changing the display position or tilting even when the shake vision effect is performed. At this time, since the background image is inclined, the blank portion is represented in black. Then, a part of the sphere removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with this blank portion. For example, when the sphere removal error display ERR1 is displayed in black characters, it is assimilated with the color of the blank portion, and a part thereof It may be difficult to see.

  67 (f1) to FIG. 67 (f2) show, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects shown in FIG. 56 (a1) to FIG. 56 (a2). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (f1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed above the tutorial display portion TT1 in the effect example shown in FIG. 56 (a1). . At this time, the ball removal error display ERR1 is not overlapped with any display.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 67 (f2), the first step-up display unit SUA is raised from below the UI unit UI3 and is displayed as being lifted up from the UI unit UI3. Has been. At this time, at least a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps with the tutorial display unit TT1 due to the rise of the UI unit UI3. That is, since the display area of the UI part UI3 is enlarged, the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the UI part UI3. Thereby, it may be possible to notice the occurrence of the effect in the first step-up display unit SUA by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by watching the UI unit UI3 rise. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. Further, it may be possible to give a chance to remove the ball when the display of the first step-up display unit SUA is finished by simultaneously viewing the effects of the ball removal error display ERR1 and the first step-up display unit SUA.

  68 (a1) to FIG. 68 (a2) show, for example, display examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects shown in FIG. 58 (d) to FIG. 58 (e). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (a1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 58 (d), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the upper part of the tutorial display portion TT1. It is shown. That is, in this effect example, before the UI part UI3 is out of frame by the UI part FO animation, the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the UI part UI3.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (a2), the UI unit UI3 is shown out of frame by the UI unit FO animation. In this effect example, it is shown that the overlap state of the ball removal error display ERR1 to the UI part UI3 is canceled while the UI part UI3 is out of the frame by the UI part FO animation.

  68 (b1) to FIG. 68 (b2) show, for example, display examples of warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the effects shown in FIG. 62 (a3) to FIG. 62 (a5). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (b1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 62 (a3), a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the UI part wipe display part WP4. It is shown. At this time, the character does not overlap the character on the motorcycle displayed on the UI part wipe display part WP4.

  Thereafter, in the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (b2), a state where the character on the motorcycle moves to the right end portion of the UI portion wipe display portion WP4 is shown. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 is overlapped with the character on the motorcycle together with the UI part wipe display part WP3. Thereby, it may be possible to notice the effect display on the UI part wipe display part WP3 by looking at the ball removal error display ERR1. In some cases, the ball removal error display ERR1 can be noticed by looking at the effect display on the UI portion wipe display portion WP3. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. Further, it may be possible to give a chance to remove the ball when the ball display error display ERR1 and the effect display on the UI part wipe display unit WP3 are simultaneously viewed and the effect display on the UI unit wipe display unit WP3 is finished.

  The production examples shown in FIGS. 68 (c1) to (c2) are, for example, display examples of a warning display when a ball removal error occurs in the production examples shown in FIGS. 65 (b1) to (b2). Has been. In the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (c1), in the effect example shown in FIG. 65 (b1), the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed on the right side of the display screen, and a part thereof exceeds the decorative symbol. The wrapping is shown. Note that there is no overlap with other displays.

  Thereafter, the first decorative symbol display device 208L shown in FIG. 68 (c2) shows a state in which the hold icon display area is displayed in an enlarged manner. At this time, the hold icon display area is displayed below the display screen, and is overlapped by the ready image RDY together with the enlarged hold icon. In the effect example shown in FIG. 68 (c2), the sub-window WP3 appears in the upper right part of the display screen, and it relates to the variable display of the decorative symbol displayed on the first decorative symbol display device 208L in FIG. 68 (c1). The display (main display) is displayed. In the display in the sub window WP3, the UI unit UI2 is not displayed. Further, the sub-window WP3 overlaps a part of the enlarged hold icon display area. At this time, a part of the ball removal error display ERR1 overlaps the sub-window WP3, and the other part overlaps the hold icon display area. Note that the ball removal error display ERR1 is not displayed in the sub-window WP3, and the display position is maintained. Thereby, it may be possible to notice the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area enlarged by viewing the ball removal error display ERR1. Further, it may be possible to notice the ball removal error display ERR1 by looking at the change effect of the display mode of the hold icon in the hold icon display area. In addition, by removing the ball early and erasing the ball removal error display ERR1, it may be possible to entertain the effect display performed there. In addition, the ball removal error display ERR1 and the hold icon display area change effect in the hold icon display area are simultaneously viewed, and when the change effect of the hold icon display form in the hold icon display area is finished, an opportunity to remove the ball is given. May be possible.

  68 (d1) to FIG. 68 (d3) show variations of the display mode of the ball removal error display ERR1.

  The ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 68 (d1) is a display mode in which the display of “Please remove the ball” is surrounded by a square frame, and the background is transparent. Therefore, even when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the display of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be made conspicuous and the influence of the visibility of the display on the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 can be reduced. There is a case.

  The ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 68 (d2) has the same form as the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 68 (d1), but the background is opaque. Therefore, when the ball removal error display ERR1 is displayed, the visibility of the ball removal error display ERR1 is improved, but the back side of the ball removal error display ERR1 may be difficult to see.

  The ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 68 (d3) is another display mode of the ball removal error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 68 (d2), and the display of “Please remove the ball” is outlined on the black background. It is set as the aspect represented by these.

  In the embodiment described above, the three decorative symbol display devices, the first decorative symbol display device 208L, the second decorative symbol display device 280M, and the third decorative symbol display device 208N have been described. Needless to say, even the pachinko machine 100 having only one is applicable. Further, the present invention can be applied to a pachinko machine provided with two decorative symbol display devices, or can be applied to a pachinko machine provided with four or more decorative symbol display devices.

  As described above, the example in which the present invention is applied to a pachinko machine (bullet ball game machine) has been described in detail. However, the game table of the present invention is not limited to this example. For example, a medal or a game ball (pachinko ball) is used. The present invention can also be applied to a spinning machine (slot machine) to be used. That is, the pachinko machine 100 described so far is a pachinko (1 type + 1 type), but other pachinko (eg, 1 type, 2 types, 3 types, 1 type + 2 types, etc.), slot etc. Parrot, jade ball). More specifically, when a medal (game medium) is inserted and the start lever is operated to rotate the reel, the winning combination is determined internally by internal lottery, and the stop button is operated to stop the reel In addition, if a combination of symbols predetermined according to the internal decision is displayed on the symbol display window, a winning combination is established, and if a winning combination with a medal payout is established, a prescribed number of medals are paid out, etc. It may be a spinning machine (slot machine) that gives a privilege to the player. Alternatively, a predetermined number of game balls are encapsulated as encapsulated balls, the encapsulated spheres are fired into a game area to play a game, and a predetermined game value is given to a player based on the fact that the encapsulated balls win a predetermined entry area. It is also possible to use an enclosed ball game table that can be circulated by launching the enclosed ball that has won the predetermined entry area or the enclosed ball that has not won the prize into the game area.

  As described above, the present invention can be applied to various types of game machines, and will be described more specifically with reference to the drawings.

  FIG. 69 is a front view of a sealed pachinko machine to which the present invention is applicable.

  In a sealed pachinko machine 900 shown in FIG. 69, a predetermined number of game media (for example, game balls) are circulated inside the game table. That is, the game medium launched from the launching means 901 to the game area 902 can be discharged from the game area 902 and supplied to the launching means 901 again. In addition, a display means 903 for displaying information on the number of game media (award balls, rental balls, total number of balls, etc.) and other information is disposed below the game area 902 on the front of the game table. The upper plate 126 and the lower plate 128 shown in FIG.

  FIG. 70 is an external perspective view of a slot machine to which the present invention can be applied as viewed from the front side (player side).

  The slot machine 1000 includes a main body 1001 and a front door 1002 that is attached to the front surface of the main body 1001 and can be opened and closed with respect to the main body 1001. Inside the center of the main body 1001 (not shown in FIG. 70), three reels (left reel 1010, middle reel 1011 and right reel 1012) having a plurality of types of symbols arranged on the outer peripheral surface are stored. It is configured to rotate inside. These reels 1010 to 1012 are rotationally driven by driving means such as a stepping motor.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 70, an appropriate number of symbols are printed on the belt-like member at equal intervals, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are configured by attaching the belt-like member to a predetermined circular cylindrical frame material. . When viewed from the player, the symbols on the reels 1010 to 1012 are generally displayed in the vertical direction from the symbol display window 1013 so that a total of nine symbols can be seen. Then, by rotating each of the reels 1010 to 1012, the combination of symbols that can be seen by the player varies. That is, each of the reels 1010 to 1012 functions as a display unit that displays a combination of a plurality of types of symbols in a variable manner. In addition to the reel, an electronic image display device such as a liquid crystal display device can also be used as such a display means. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 70, three reels are provided in the center of the slot machine 1000. However, the number of reels and the installation position of the reels are not limited to this.

  Backlights (not shown in FIG. 70) for illuminating individual symbols displayed on the symbol display window 1013 are arranged on the rear surfaces of the reels 1010 to 1012. It is desirable that the backlight is shielded for each symbol so that the individual symbols can be illuminated evenly. In the slot machine 1000, an optical sensor (not shown) including a light projecting unit and a light receiving unit is provided in the vicinity of each reel 1010 to 1012. The light projecting unit and the light receiving unit of this optical sensor are provided. A light shielding piece of a certain length provided on the reel passes between the two. Based on the detection result of this sensor, the position of the symbol on the reel in the rotation direction is determined, and the reels 1010 to 1012 are stopped so that the target symbol is displayed on the winning line.

  The winning line display lamp 1020 is a lamp indicating a winning line 1014 that is valid. The effective pay line is determined in advance by the number of medals bet as a game medium. There are 5 winning lines 1014. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line is valid, and when two medals are betted, the upper horizontal winning line and the lower horizontal winning line are added. If three are valid and three medals are bet, five lines including a right-down winning line and an upper-right winning line are valid as winning lines. The number of winning lines 1014 is not limited to five. For example, when one medal is bet, the middle horizontal winning line, the upper horizontal winning line, the lower horizontal winning line, the right Five lines, the down line and the upper right line, may be valid as the winning lines.

  The notification lamp 1023 is, for example, a lamp that informs the player that a specific winning combination (specifically, a bonus) has been won internally in the internal lottery or that a bonus game is in progress. The game medal insertable lamp 1024 is a lamp for notifying that the player can insert a game medal. The replay lamp 1022 informs the player that the current game is replayable (the medal need not be inserted) when winning a replay that is one of the winning combinations in the previous game. It is a lamp. The reel panel lamp 1028 is an effect lamp.

  The bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are buttons for inserting a predetermined number of medals (referred to as credits) stored electronically in the slot machine 1000. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 70, every time the bet button 1030 is pressed, a maximum of three cards are inserted. When the bet button 1031 is pressed, two cards are inserted, and when the bet button 1032 is pressed. Three cards are inserted. Hereinafter, the bet button 1032 is also referred to as a MAX bet button. The game medal insertion lamp 1029 turns on the lamps corresponding to the number of inserted medals, and when a prescribed number of medals are inserted, the game start is informed that a game start operation is possible. The lamp 1021 is turned on.

  The medal slot 1034 is an slot for the player to insert a medal when starting a game. In other words, medals can be inserted electronically using the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, or actual medals can be inserted (insertion operation) from the medal insertion slot 1034. is there. The stored number display 1025 is a display for displaying the number of medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000. The game information display 1026 is a display for displaying various types of internal information (for example, the number of medals paid out during a bonus game) as numerical values. The payout number display unit 1027 is a display for displaying the number of medals to be paid out to the player as a result of winning a winning combination.

  The start lever 1035 is a lever type switch for starting the rotation of the reels 1010 to 1012. That is, when a desired medal number is inserted into the medal insertion slot 1034 or when the bet buttons 1030 to 1032 are operated and the start lever 1035 is operated, the reels 1010 to 1012 start to rotate. The operation on the start lever 1035 is referred to as a game start operation. In this slot machine 1000, based on the operation of the start lever 1035, an internal lottery process for performing a lottery to determine which of the plurality of roles is won is executed. It is determined whether the player is in a relatively advantageous state or a relatively unfavorable state.

  The stop button unit 1036 is provided with stop buttons 1037 to 1039. Stop buttons 1037 to 10310 are button-type switches for individually stopping the reels 1010 to 1012 that have started rotating by operating the start lever 1035, and are associated with the reels 1010 to 1012. Hereinafter, the operation on the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 is referred to as a stop operation, the first stop operation is referred to as a first stop operation, the next stop operation is referred to as a second stop operation, and the last stop operation is referred to as a third stop operation. Note that a light emitter may be provided inside each of the stop buttons 1037 to 1039. When the stop buttons 1037 to 1039 can be operated, the light emitter can be turned on to notify the player.

  The medal return button 1033 is a button that is pressed to remove a medal when the inserted medal is clogged. The settlement button 1043 is a button for adjusting the medals electronically stored in the slot machine 1000 and the bet medals and discharging them from the medal payout exit 1055. Door key hole 1040 is a hole into which a key for unlocking front door 1002 of slot machine 1000 is inserted. The medal payout exit 1055 is a payout exit for paying out medals.

  In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 70, the same operation key unit 1090 as the operation key unit 181 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1 is provided between the MAX bet button 1032 and the medal slot 1034. ing. This operation key unit 1090 also has a cross key, an OK button, and a cancel button. Further, next to the operation key unit 1090, the same effect button 1091 as the chance button 136 provided in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG.

  The sound hole 1060 is a hole for outputting the sound of a speaker provided inside the slot machine 1000 to the outside. Side lamps 1044 provided on the left and right portions of the front door 1002 are decorative lamps for exciting games. A rendering device 1080 is disposed above the front door 1002. This rendering device 1080 includes a door (shutter) member 1063 including two right doors 1063a and 1063b that can be opened and closed in a horizontal direction, and a liquid crystal display device 1057 (illustrated) disposed on the back side of the door member 1063. When the two right doors 1063a and 1063b are opened in the horizontal direction in front of the liquid crystal display device 1057, the display screen of the liquid crystal display device 1057 (not shown) is displayed in front of the slot machine 1000 (player). Side). In addition, even if it is not a liquid crystal display device, it should just be comprised so that various effect images and various game information can be displayed, for example, it consists of a dot matrix display, an organic EL display, a plasma display, or a projector and a screen. A display device or the like may be used. Further, the display screen has a rectangular shape and is configured so that the player can visually recognize the entire display screen. In the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 70, the display screen is a rectangular flat surface, but may be a square flat surface. In addition, a decorative object (not shown) may be provided on the periphery of the display screen, and a part of the peripheral edge of the display screen may be hidden by the decorative object, so that the display screen looks irregular. Furthermore, the display screen may have a curved surface.

  In the slot machine 1000 described above, as operation means, in addition to the bet buttons 1030 to 1032, the start lever 1035, the stop buttons 1037 to 1039, etc., the operation key unit 1090 (an example of the first operation means and the third operation means). ) And effect buttons 1091 (an example of second operation means). Furthermore, in the slot machine 1000 shown in FIG. 70, a display panel 1070 displaying a device title and the like can project toward the front side. Further, a light emitting diode (LED) is built in the display panel 1070. The display panel 1070 shown in FIG. 70 is in the initial position. When the display panel 1070 protrudes toward the front side, the display panel 1070 can perform a push-in operation, and functions as an operation unit (button) in the same manner as the transmission unit 191. This corresponds to an example of one operating means, and also corresponds to an example of a movable means. Further, each button of the operation key unit 1090, the effect button 1091, and the display panel 1070 can vibrate. However, the buttons of the operation key unit 1090 may not vibrate.

In the above description,
“A game machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is a first display [for example, a change effect display (holding change) of the display mode of the holding icon by the ninja character NJ4 shown in FIGS. 35 (f) to (g). Etc.)
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display [for example, a holding icon in a red display mode shown in FIG.
One display of the plurality of types of display is a third display [for example, a ready image RDY shown in FIG.
The first display is a display of a character related to the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon in a display mode of a prefetch notice,
The third display is a display indicating that it is waiting for the display start of a certain notice display [for example, the display of the mini game shown in FIG. 35 (o) to FIG. 35 (p)],
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started [for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (f) to FIG. 35 (h), a ninja character NJ4 The display mode of the first hold icon h11 is changed from the default display mode to the red display mode after the hold change pre-effect display is performed by
The third display may start in the first state [For example, as shown in FIG. 35 (d), the UI unit UI3 displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is being prepared. The display of the image RDY has started, etc.]
In some cases, the third display started in the first state may end in the second state [for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (d) to FIG. 35 (n), the UI The preparation-in-progress image RDY that has been displayed in the state in which the part UI3 is displayed has been displayed in the state in which the UI part UI3 is not displayed, etc.]
After the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state [for example, FIG. 35 (n) to FIG. As shown in (o), after the display of the in-preparation image RDY is finished, the display of the mini game is started in a state where the UI unit UI3 is hidden],
After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect [for example, display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 35 (q)] may be started [for example, FIG. 35 (o) to FIG. As shown in (q), when the display result of the mini game is a great success, the iron plate image TP is displayed],
The certain effect is a notice relating to the symbol variation display being executed [for example, the notice image indicating that the iron plate image TP shown in FIG.
There is a case where the second state is entered after the first state [for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (l) to FIG. UI unit UI3 is hidden, etc.]
The first state is one of states where a hold icon can be displayed,
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, the state in which the UI unit UI3 is hidden in the swordsman reach, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Although the conventional game table has room for improvement in the display means, according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having features in the display means.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, it is easy to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays that are displayed in advance of the notice display, is a notice display other than the hold icon, and it is possible to concentrate on the fluctuation. You may be able to entertain.

  In addition, according to this game machine, for beginners, it is possible to entertain and entertain whether it is the advance notice or the look-ahead notice by displaying the preparation in progress. In some cases, it is easy to understand if the display is about, and it is possible to clarify the expectation.

  In addition, according to this game table, it may be easy to understand which notice is to be given depending on the timing of completion of the preparation display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  In addition, the first display may be a character display related only to the second display, or may be a character display related to a display other than the second display. The first display may be a character display that is always related to the second display, or may be a character display that may not be related to the second display.

  Further, only the third display may be started in the first state, or a display other than the third display may be started in the first state. In addition, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

  Further, the third display may be started only in the first state, or the third display may be started in a state other than the first state.

  In addition, the third display that is started in the first state may end only in the second state, or the third display that is started in the first state. However, the display may end even in a state other than the second state. In addition, the third display that has started display in the first state may necessarily end in the second state, and the third display that has started display in the first state may be The display may not end in the state of.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, only the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state. After the display of the display is completed, the display of a display other than a certain notice display may be started in the second state. In addition, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may always be started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state. After the process is completed, there may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is not started in the second state.

  Further, only after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state. In addition to the end of the display of the display, there may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is started in the second state.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started only in the second state. After the display of the display is completed, the display of a certain notice may be started even in a state other than the second state.

  Further, only a certain effect may be started after a certain notice display is displayed, or an effect other than a certain effect is also started after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be cases. Also, after a certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect may be always started, or after a certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect may not be started.

  Further, a certain effect may be started only after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may be started even after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be.

  Further, a certain effect may be a notice relating only to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice relating to a display other than the symbol variation display being executed. In addition, a certain effect may be a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display, or may be a notice that is not related to the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In addition, the second state may be entered only after the first state, or the second state may be entered even after a state other than the first state. In addition, the second state may be necessarily set after the first state, or the second state may not be set after the first state.

  The first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which a display other than the hold icon can be displayed. . The first state may be one of the states where the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states where the hold icon may not be displayed.

  The second state may be one of the states where only the hold icon is not displayed, or may be one of the states where no display other than the hold icon is displayed. The second state may be one of the states where the hold icon is not always displayed, or may be one of the states where the hold icon may be displayed.

  Here, the first display may be a display of a character relating to a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect display in the calibration of a character (navigator character) that is always displayed. .

  The second display may be a display that changes from a hold icon in the default display mode to a hold icon in the pre-read notice display mode.

  In addition, the third display may be a character display in preparation, a character display, a notification item display, or a timer display countdown in the timer notification display. It may be a display during execution.

  Further, a certain notice display may be a display during the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display, a mini game, or a notice effect.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a sixth display [for example, the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 35A],”
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
The hold icon can be displayed in the state where the sixth display is displayed [for example, the hold icon can be displayed in the state where the UI unit UI3 is displayed, etc.]
The hold icon is configured not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. [For example, as shown in FIG. 35 (m), when the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, the hold icon is not displayed. Icon is not displayed, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the hold icon can be made conspicuous.

  Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of only the hold icon, or may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of a display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be a display of an image that is always displayed at least on the back of the hold icon, or may be a display of an image that is not displayed at least on the back of the hold icon.

  Further, it may be configured such that only the hold icon can be displayed in the state where the sixth display is displayed, or a display other than the hold icon can be displayed in the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be. In addition, the hold icon may be displayed without fail when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is displayed. It may be configured.

  In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be displayed only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be.

  Further, it may be configured not to display only the hold icon when the sixth display is not displayed, or to display no display other than the hold icon when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. In addition, the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, and the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

  Also, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon is not displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

In the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed overlapping the third display [for example, FIG. As shown in d), the image RDY in preparation is displayed superimposed on the tutorial display part TT1 in the UI part UI3, etc.]
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [for example, the image RDY in preparation shown in FIG. 35 (d) And the display position of the image RDY in preparation shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, by displaying the third display around the hold icon that is often seen, it is strongly impressed that the third display is not a pre-reading notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon. At the same time, there are cases where it is possible to prevent an oversight by notifying that a notice other than a change in the display mode of the hold icon is being made.

  Here, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to overlap only the third display. The display of at least a part of the six displays may be displayed so as to overlap the display other than the third display. Further, at least a part of the display of the sixth display in the first state may be displayed so as to be always overlapped with the third display. It may be configured such that at least a part of the display overlaps with the third display and may not be displayed.

  Further, at least a part of the sixth display in the first state may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display. In the first state, the sixth display A display other than at least a part of the display may be displayed so as to overlap the third display.

In addition, the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of kinds of aspects is a first aspect [for example, a default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 35 (a), etc.]
One aspect of the plurality of kinds of aspects is a second aspect [for example, a golden display aspect shown in FIG. 35 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the symbol variation display, the jackpot symbol is likely to be confirmed and displayed [for example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 35 (e) is displayed in a golden display mode, the display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, and accordingly , The jackpot symbol is likely to be fixed and displayed in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon that is the target of prefetching]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the sixth display may be able to be displayed only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayed in an aspect other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode. Good.

  In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the symbol variation display is more effective than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the jackpot symbol may be confirmed and displayed in the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to a mode, symbols other than the jackpot symbol may be more easily displayed in the symbol variation display. In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the symbol variation display is more effective than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The jackpot symbol may always be confirmed and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In the case of changing to, the big hit symbol may not be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

  Further, only when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display, or the sixth display is the first mode. Even in cases other than the case of changing from the second mode to the second mode, the big hit symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

In addition, the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of kinds of aspects is a first aspect [for example, a default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 35 (a), etc.]
One aspect of the plurality of kinds of aspects is a second aspect [for example, a golden display aspect shown in FIG. 35 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display is likely to start [For example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 35 (e) is displayed in a gold display mode, a red display mode hold icon is easily displayed. etc],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the sixth display may be able to be displayed only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayed in an aspect other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode. Good.

  In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the second display is more likely to be the second than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the display of the display may be easily started, or the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, compared to the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display display other than the second display may be easier to start when the change is made. In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the second display is more likely to be the second than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the display may be started without fail, and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. There may be a case where the display of the second display does not start when the change has occurred.

  In addition, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display may be easily started even in cases other than the case where the mode is changed.

In addition, “at least a part of the first display is configured to overlap the sixth display [for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (f), the ninja character NJ4 is placed in the UI unit UI3. Etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, if attention is paid to the sixth display, various information can be obtained, and the game can be easily understood.

  Here, at least a part of the first display may be configured to overlap only with the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display may overlap with a display other than the sixth display. It may be configured to. Further, at least a part of the first display may be configured to always overlap the sixth display, and at least a part of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. May be configured.

  Further, only a part of the first display may be configured to overlap with the sixth display, or the entire first display may be configured to overlap with the sixth display. .

“The first display and the sixth display are configured so as not to overlap. [For example, as shown in FIG. 50 (b1), the ninja character NJ4 overlaps the UI part UI3. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, if attention is paid to the sixth display, it may seem that the third display seems to be a display related to the change display of the hold icon, but it is not so.

  Here, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap, or the display other than the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap. Good. In addition, the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap each other, or the first display and the sixth display may be configured to overlap. .

In addition, “a certain reach production [for example, super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIG. 35 (m) to FIG. 35 (q), etc.]” can be executed,
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect is started [for example, the super reach (swordsman reach shown in FIGS. 35 (m) to (q)). The state before) is started]
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed [for example, a state in which a super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIG. ,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be easy to notice whether or not a certain reach state is reached.

  Here, only a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable, or a reach effect other than a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable. Further, a certain reach effect may be executed without fail, or a certain reach effect may not be executed.

  Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of only a certain reach effect, or before the execution of a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is started. It may be one of the states. Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is always started, or one of the states where the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in a state.

  Further, the second state may be a state where only a certain reach effect is being executed, or may be a state where a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is being executed. Further, the second state may be a state where a certain reach effect is always executed, or may be a state where a certain reach effect is not executed.

In addition, “one display among the plurality of types of display is a fourth display [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIG. 35 (o) to FIG. 35 (p)],
One display of the plurality of types of display is a fifth display [for example, display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 35 (q), etc.]
The certain notice display is a notice for notifying that the certain effect is started [for example, in the mini game shown in FIG. 35 (o) to FIG. 35 (p), the arrow released by Tono-sama mini character MC1. Etc. foreseeing the display of the iron plate image TP by piercing the area around the target TGT],
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain notice display,
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, a certain notice display may be for notifying only that a certain effect is started, or may be for notifying that a certain effect is started. In addition, a certain notice display may be a notice that a certain effect is started, or may not be a notice that a certain effect is started.

  Further, only the fourth display may be displayed as a certain notice display, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain notice display. Further, the fourth display may always be displayed as a certain notice display, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain notice display.

  In addition, only the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect. Further, the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

In addition, “the third display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may continue to be displayed after the next symbol variation display is started [for example, FIG. i) to the image RDY being prepared is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays as shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this gaming machine, the third display can give a sense of expectation over a plurality of variations, and the goal is also easy to understand.

  Here, there may be a case where the third display that has started display in a certain symbol variation display is continuously displayed only after the next symbol variation display to be started. There may be a case where the third display that is started in the symbol variation display is continuously displayed other than after the next symbol variation display is started. In addition, the third display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may always be continuously displayed after the next symbol variation display is started, or in a certain symbol variation display. There may be a case where the third display from which display has started is not continuously displayed even after the next started symbol variation display is started.

In addition, “the first display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display is erased before the next symbol variation display is started [for example, FIG. 35 (f) to FIG. As shown in h), the ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.]. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be deleted only before the next symbol variation display is started, or the display may be displayed in a certain symbol variation display. The first display that is started may be erased other than before the next symbol variation display that is started. In addition, the first display that has started display in a certain symbol variation display may be necessarily deleted before the next symbol variation display is started, or the display starts in a certain symbol variation display. The displayed first display may not be erased before the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

In addition, “the certain effect may be executed in the area where the third display is displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 41 (a4), the letters“ hot ”in the tutorial display portion TT1. Etc.) may be displayed, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, there may be a case where only a certain effect is executed in the area where the third display is displayed, and an effect other than the certain effect is also executed in the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases. In addition, a certain effect may always be executed in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.

  Further, a certain effect may be executed only in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect is executed in an area other than the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases.

In addition, “the operation means [for example, the production button 136 etc.] that can be operated by the player,
One display of the plurality of types of display is a seventh display [for example, a decabutton image 136aL shown in FIG. 38 (b6)],
The seventh display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that is started after the third display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 38 (b1) to (b6), the decabutton image 136aL is prepared. The middle image RDY is displayed after the display is started, etc.]
When the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started. [For example, when the effect button 136 is operated while the deca button image 136aL shown in FIG. Image TP is displayed]
The third display is a display that is terminated before the display of the seventh display is started [for example, as shown in FIGS. 38 (b1) to (b6), the image RDY in preparation Is displayed before the display of the big button image 136aL is started, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the operation means may be capable of being operated only by the player, or may be operable by a person other than the player. The operation means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operation means, or may prompt other than the operation of the operation means. Further, the seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operation means, or may not prompt the operation of the operation means.

  The seventh display may be started only after the third display is started, or the display is started even after the third display is started. There may be. The seventh display may be one that always starts after the third display is started, or one that does not start after the third display starts. Also good.

  Also, an effect may be started whenever the operating means is operated during display of the seventh display, and an effect is not started when the operating means is operated during display of the seventh display. There may be cases. Further, if the operating means is operated only during the display of the seventh display, a certain effect may be started. If the operating means is operated other than during the display of the seventh display, a certain effect is generated. May be started. An effect may be started when the operating means is operated during the display of only the seventh display, and when the operating means is operated while a display other than the seventh display is also displayed, May be started.

  The third display may end only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display is ended other than before the display of the seventh display is started. You may do. In addition, the third display may always end before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts. There may be.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is an eighth display [for example, the combined animation shown in FIG. 38 (b4) to FIG. 38 (b5)],
The eighth display is a display for notifying that the display of the seventh display is started [For example, as shown in FIG. 38 (b4) to FIG. For example, the display of the deca button image 136aL is forewarned],
The third display is a display that ends during the display of the eighth display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the eighth display may be a notice that only the start of the display of the seventh display is started, or a notice that other than the start of the display of the seventh display is started. It may be. In addition, the eighth display may always give notice that the display of the seventh display will start, or may not give notice that the display of the seventh display will start. There may be.

  Further, the third display may end only during display of the eighth display, or may end during display of a display other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during display of the eighth display, or may not end during display of the eighth display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a ninth display [for example, the variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 45 (a)],
The ninth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
There are cases where two of the third displays are displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 48A, two images RDY1 and RDY2 being prepared may be displayed]
After the display of one of the two third displays is completed, the display mode of the other is changed [for example, as shown in FIG. 45G, the image RDY being prepared is displayed in an enlarged manner. etc],
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps the ninth display [For example, as shown in FIG. 45 (g), the enlarged image RDY in preparation overlaps the fluctuation icon h0. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be easy to notice that two third displays are displayed.

  Here, only two third displays may be displayed, three or more third displays may be displayed, and only one third display is displayed. It may be done.

  In addition, after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, only the display mode of the other may change, or after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, Display modes other than the above display modes may also be changed. In addition, after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, the display mode of the other may be changed, or after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, There may be a case where the display mode of does not change.

  In addition, the display mode of the other may change only after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, or even after the display of one of the two third displays is finished. The other display mode may change.

  Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap only the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap other displays than the ninth display. Good. In addition, the third display whose display mode has changed may necessarily overlap the ninth display, and the third display whose display mode has changed may not overlap the ninth display. .

  In addition, only the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap the ninth display, and displays other than the third display whose display mode has changed may also overlap the ninth display. .

In addition, when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays ends in one symbol variation display [for example, FIG. 45 (b) to FIG. 45 (k) As shown, the two images in preparation RDY are all digested in the same symbol variation display etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when two third displays are displayed, only the display of all the third displays may be completed in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. The display of all the displays other than the third display may be ended in one symbol variation display. In addition, when two third displays are displayed, all the third displays may be terminated in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. The display of all the third displays may not end in one symbol variation display.

  In addition, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may end only in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. In the symbol variation display other than the one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may be terminated. Moreover, only when the third display is displayed, the display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, or other than when the third display is displayed. In this case, all the third display may be ended in one symbol variation display.

“One of the plural types of displays is a tenth display [for example,“ Panda is a master of the panda ”displayed in the tutorial display section TT1 shown in FIG. 35 (a)”. Explanation display etc.]
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display displayed in the first display area in the display means when displayed [for example, as shown in FIG. 35 (a), the explanation display is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1. Etc.]
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area. [For example, as shown in FIG. 35 (d), the image RDY in preparation is displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1. etc],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or the first display area in the display means when displayed. Other than that, it may be displayed. In addition, when displayed, it may be displayed in the first display area of the display means. When displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may be.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Also good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In addition, “the game machine is a pachinko machine [for example, pachinko machine 100, etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In the above description,
“A game machine equipped with display means capable of displaying a plurality of types of displays [for example, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, etc.]
One of the plurality of types of display is the first display [characters related to the change icon display mode of the hold icon display (hold change prior effect display), for example, FIG. 35 (f) to FIG. Ninja character NJ4 etc.]
One display of the plurality of types of display is a second display [a hold icon in a display mode of a prefetch notice, for example, a hold icon in a red display mode shown in FIG. 35 (h),
One of the plurality of types of display is a third display [preparing display, for example, an image RDY being prepared shown in FIG. 35 (d), etc.]
The first display is a display of a character related to the second display,
The second display is a display of a hold icon in a display mode of a prefetch notice,
The third display is a notice display [mini game or timer notice, for example, the mini game shown in FIG. 35 (o) to FIG. 35 (p), or FIG. 37 (b3) to FIG. 37 (b4). Is a display indicating that it is waiting for the start of display of the timer notice effect, etc.
The display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started [the hold icon after the hold change prior effect display by the character is started. Is displayed in a pre-read notice display mode. For example, as shown in FIGS. 35 (f) to (h), the first hold icon is displayed after the hold change pre-effect display by the ninja character NJ4 is performed. The display mode of h11 has changed from the default display mode to the red display mode, etc.]
The third display may be started in the first state. [Preparation display starts in the state where the hold icon is displayed. For example, FIG. 35 (d) As shown, the display of the image RDY in preparation is started in a state where the UI unit UI3 displaying the hold icons h11 and h12 is displayed]
The third display that has started displaying in the first state is configured so that the display may end in the second state. [The display is started in the state in which the hold icon is displayed. The display is completed when the hold icon is not displayed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 35D to 35N, the display is started when the UI unit UI3 is displayed. The ready image RDY has been displayed in a state where the UI unit UI3 is not displayed, etc.]
After the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of the certain notice display may be started in the second state. After the display of the display in preparation in the display state is finished, a mini game or a timer notice is started. For example, as shown in FIGS. 35 (n) to (o), the display of the image RDY in preparation is displayed. After finishing, the mini-game display is started with the UI unit UI3 being hidden, or as shown in FIGS. 37 (b1) to (b4), the image RDY being prepared is displayed. After the display is finished, the timer notice effect is started in a state where the UI unit UI3 is hidden, etc.],
After the certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect [the notice, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 35 (q), the button notice effect by the deca button 136aL shown in FIG. 38 (c4), etc.] [When the display result of the mini game becomes a great success or the countdown is completed by the timer notice, the notice is started. For example, as shown in FIG. 35 (o) to FIG. 35 (q) As shown in FIG. 38, when the display result of the mini game is very successful, the iron plate image TP is displayed. As shown in FIGS. 38 (c1) to (c4), when the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display is completed. Button announcement effect by deca button 136aL is started],
The certain effect is a notice regarding the symbol variation display being executed,
The second state may be entered after the first state [the transition from the state where the hold icon can be displayed to the state where the hold icon is not displayed may be made, for example, FIG. 35. As shown in (l) to (m) in the figure, when shifting to the swordsman reach, the displayed UI unit UI3 is hidden, and the hold icon can be displayed to the hidden state. Etc.],
The first state is one of the states in which the hold icon can be displayed (for example, the state where the UI unit UI3 before the transition to the swordsman reach is displayed),
The second state is one of the states in which the hold icon is not displayed [for example, the state in which the UI unit UI3 is hidden in the swordsman reach, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Explained.

  Although the conventional game table has room for improvement in the display means, according to this game table, it is possible to realize a game table having features in the display means.

  In addition, according to this gaming machine, it is easy to understand that the third display, which is one of the displays that are displayed in advance of the notice display, is a notice display other than the hold icon, and it is possible to concentrate on the fluctuation. You may be able to entertain.

  In addition, according to this game machine, for beginners, it is possible to entertain and entertain whether it is the advance notice or the look-ahead notice by displaying the preparation in progress. In some cases, it is easy to understand if the display is about, and it is possible to clarify the expectation.

  In addition, according to this game table, it may be easy to understand which notice is to be given depending on the timing of completion of the preparation display.

  Here, the display means may be capable of displaying only a plurality of types of displays, or may be capable of displaying displays other than a plurality of types of displays. Further, the display means may always display a plurality of types of displays, or may not display a plurality of types of displays.

  In addition, the first display may be a character display related only to the second display, or may be a character display related to a display other than the second display. The first display may be a character display that is always related to the second display, or may be a character display that may not be related to the second display.

  Further, only the third display may be started in the first state, or a display other than the third display may be started in the first state. In addition, the third display may always be started in the first state, or the third display may not be started in the first state.

  Further, the third display may be started only in the first state, or the third display may be started in a state other than the first state.

  In addition, the third display that is started in the first state may end only in the second state, or the third display that is started in the first state. However, the display may end even in a state other than the second state. In addition, the third display that has started display in the first state may necessarily end in the second state, and the third display that has started display in the first state may be The display may not end in the state of.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, only the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state. After the display of the display is completed, the display of a display other than a certain notice display may be started in the second state. In addition, after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may always be started in the second state, or the display of the third display in the second state. After the process is completed, there may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is not started in the second state.

  Further, only after the display of the third display is completed in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started in the second state. In addition to the end of the display of the display, there may be a case where the display of a certain notice display is started in the second state.

  In addition, after the display of the third display is finished in the second state, the display of a certain notice display may be started only in the second state. After the display of the display is completed, the display of a certain notice may be started even in a state other than the second state.

  Further, only a certain effect may be started after a certain notice display is displayed, or an effect other than a certain effect is also started after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be cases. Also, after a certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect may be always started, or after a certain notice display is displayed, a certain effect may not be started.

  Further, a certain effect may be started only after a certain notice display is displayed, or a certain effect may be started even after a certain notice display is displayed. There may be.

  Further, a certain effect may be a notice relating only to the symbol variation display being executed, or may be a notice relating to a display other than the symbol variation display being executed. In addition, a certain effect may be a notice regarding the currently displayed symbol variation display, or may be a notice that is not related to the currently displayed symbol variation display.

  In addition, the second state may be entered only after the first state, or the second state may be entered even after a state other than the first state. In addition, the second state may be necessarily set after the first state, or the second state may not be set after the first state.

  The first state may be one of the states in which only the hold icon can be displayed, or may be one of the states in which a display other than the hold icon can be displayed. . The first state may be one of the states where the hold icon is always displayed, or may be one of the states where the hold icon may not be displayed.

  The second state may be one of the states where only the hold icon is not displayed, or may be one of the states where no display other than the hold icon is displayed. The second state may be one of the states where the hold icon is not always displayed, or may be one of the states where the hold icon may be displayed.

  Here, the first display may be a display of a character relating to a change effect of the display mode of the hold icon, or may be an effect display in the calibration of a character (navigator character) that is always displayed. .

  The second display may be a display that changes from a hold icon in the default display mode to a hold icon in the pre-read notice display mode.

  In addition, the third display may be a character display in preparation, a character display, a notification item display, or a timer display countdown in the timer notification display. It may be a display during execution.

  Further, a certain notice display may be a display during the countdown of the timer display in the timer notice display, a mini game, or a notice effect.

Note that the third state is one of the states where the hold icon can be displayed,
The fourth state is one of the states where the hold icon is not displayed,
The third state is a state different from the first state,
The fourth state is a state different from the second state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It may be.

In addition, “the third display that has been started in the first state may end in the first state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It may be.

In addition, the third display that has been started in the first state may end in the third state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It may be.

In addition, the third display that has been started in the first state may end in the fourth state.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It may be.

  Further, the first state may include a state in which the symbol variation display (decorative symbol, special symbol) is being executed.

In addition, “a certain presentation may be started after the certain notice display is displayed,
A game stand characterized by that. ]
It may be.

  A certain notice display is not limited to a true notice display, and may be a false notice display in which a certain effect is not started.

  Further, when a certain notice display is a mini game, a certain effect may be a display indicating the result of the mini game.

  The character is not limited to a person but may be a mini-item display such as a notice item.

  Further, “the display of the second display may be started after the display of the first display is started” is “the display of the second display is started after the display of the first display is started”. In some cases, the display for starting the display of “is sometimes made”. Here, the first display may or may not be displayed in another scene. The second display may or may not be displayed in another scene.

  Further, “it is configured to be in the second state after the first state” means “may be in the second state following the first state” It may be configured as described above.

  Further, there may be a case where the first state is followed by the second state without passing through another state (for example, the fourth state). Moreover, after passing through another state (for example, a 3rd state or a 3rd state) after a 1st state, you may transfer to a 2nd state. Moreover, in the state where one symbol variation display is made, the first state may be shifted to the second state.

  In addition, a certain effect may fade in while a certain notice display fades out.

In addition, “one display among the plurality of types of display is a sixth display [display of an image including a hold icon display area, such as the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG.
The sixth display is a display of an image displayed at least on the back of the hold icon,
The hold icon is configured to be displayed in a state where the sixth display is displayed [the hold icon is enabled to be displayed in a state where an image including a hold icon display area is displayed, for example, The hold icon can be displayed while the UI part UI3 is displayed.]
The hold icon is configured not to be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed [the hold icon is not displayed when the image including the hold icon display area is not displayed, for example, FIG. ), The hold icon is not displayed when the UI unit UI3 is hidden, as shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, there is a case where the hold icon can be made conspicuous.

  Here, the sixth display may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of only the hold icon, or may be a display of an image displayed on the back side of a display other than the hold icon. Further, the sixth display may be a display of an image that is always displayed at least on the back of the hold icon, or may be a display of an image that is not displayed at least on the back of the hold icon.

  Further, it may be configured such that only the hold icon can be displayed in the state where the sixth display is displayed, or a display other than the hold icon can be displayed in the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be. In addition, the hold icon may be displayed without fail when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is displayed. It may be configured.

  In addition, the hold icon may be configured to be displayed only when the sixth display is displayed, or the hold icon may be displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is displayed. It may be.

  Further, it may be configured not to display only the hold icon when the sixth display is not displayed, or to display no display other than the hold icon when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured. In addition, the hold icon may not be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed, and the hold icon may be displayed when the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

  Also, the hold icon may be configured not to be displayed only when the sixth display is not displayed, or the hold icon is not displayed even in a state other than the state where the sixth display is not displayed. It may be configured.

  Note that the sixth display may be a display that does not overlap with the decorative pattern being changed.

  In addition, in a configuration in which a part of the sixth display is overlapped with a part of the third display, a part of the display different from the part of the third display is overlapped with the decorative design. May be.

  The sixth display may include a display of a pedestal of a holding icon.

  The sixth display may include a display of a pedestal of a variation icon.

  The sixth display may be a display different from the display of the background image.

Further, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be overlapped with the third display and displayed [the hold icon is displayed. In this state, a part of the image including the hold icon display area is displayed so as to overlap with the preparation display. For example, as shown in FIG. 35 (d), the preparation image RDY is a tutorial in the UI unit UI3. Etc. displayed on the display unit TT1]
The display position of the third display in the first state and the display position of the third display in the second state are the same display position [the display of the ready display in the state where the hold icon is displayed The position and the display position of the preparation display in the non-display state of the hold icon are the same. For example, the display position of the preparation image RDY shown in FIG. 35D and the preparation image shown in FIG. The display position of RDY is the same, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, by displaying the third display around the hold icon that is often seen, it is strongly impressed that the third display is not a pre-reading notice due to a change in the display mode of the hold icon. At the same time, there are cases where it is possible to prevent an oversight by notifying that a notice other than a change in the display mode of the hold icon is being made.

  Here, in the first state, at least a part of the display of the sixth display may be displayed so as to overlap only the third display. The display of at least a part of the six displays may be displayed so as to overlap the display other than the third display. Further, at least a part of the display of the sixth display in the first state may be displayed so as to be always overlapped with the third display. It may be configured such that at least a part of the display overlaps with the third display and may not be displayed.

  Further, at least a part of the sixth display in the first state may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the third display. In the first state, the sixth display A display other than at least a part of the display may be displayed so as to overlap the third display.

In addition, the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is the first aspect [default display aspect, for example, the default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 35 (a), etc.]
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is the second aspect [preliminary notice or prefetch notice display form, for example, a golden display form shown in FIG. 35 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display is configured to be easier to start [the display of the hold icon than when the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display form to the display form of the pre-reading notice. When the image including the area is changed from the default display mode to the display mode of the pre-reading notice, the hold icon of the display mode of the pre-reading notice is more easily displayed. For example, the UI unit UI3 illustrated in FIG. If it is displayed in a golden display mode, a red display mode hold icon is likely to be displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the sixth display may be able to be displayed only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayed in an aspect other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode. Good.

  In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the second display is more likely to be the second than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the display of the display may be easily started, or the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, compared to the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display display other than the second display may be easier to start when the change is made. In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the second display is more likely to be the second than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the display may be started without fail, and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. There may be a case where the display of the second display does not start when the change has occurred.

  In addition, the display of the second display may be started only when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect, and the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display may be easily started even in cases other than the case where the mode is changed.

  In addition, “when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth mode does not change from the first mode to the second mode. Is configured so that display of the second display is easier to start ”means that in a certain state, the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect. The display of the second display is more easily started when the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than when the sixth display does not change. It may be.

In addition, the sixth display is a display that can be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is the first aspect [default display aspect, for example, the default display aspect displayed in blue shown in FIG. 35 (a), etc.]
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is the second aspect [preliminary notice or prefetch notice display form, for example, a golden display form shown in FIG. 35 (e), etc.]
The case where the sixth display changes from the first aspect to the second aspect than the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the symbol variation display, the jackpot symbol is configured to be confirmed and displayed more easily [the hold icon display than when the image including the hold icon display area does not change from the default display mode to the display mode of the pre-reading notice. When the image including the area changes from the default display mode to the display mode of the pre-reading notice, it is more likely to be a big hit, for example, when the UI unit UI3 shown in FIG. 35 (e) is displayed in the gold display mode The display mode of the hold icon is likely to change, and therefore, the big hit symbol is easily displayed in the symbol variation display based on the hold corresponding to the hold icon to be prefetched. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the sixth display may be able to be displayed only in the first aspect and the second aspect, or may be displayed in an aspect other than the first aspect and the second aspect. May be. Further, the sixth display may be always displayed in the first mode and the second mode, or may not be displayed in the first mode and the second mode. Good.

  In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the symbol variation display is more effective than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. Only the jackpot symbol may be confirmed and displayed in the case where the sixth display does not change from the first aspect to the second aspect. In the case of changing to a mode, symbols other than the jackpot symbol may be more easily displayed in the symbol variation display. In addition, when the sixth display is changed from the first aspect to the second aspect, the symbol variation display is more effective than when the sixth display is not changed from the first aspect to the second aspect. The jackpot symbol may always be confirmed and the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth display is not changed from the first mode to the second mode. In the case of changing to, the big hit symbol may not be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

  Further, only when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode, the jackpot symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display, or the sixth display is the first mode. Even in cases other than the case of changing from the second mode to the second mode, the big hit symbol may be fixedly displayed in the symbol variation display.

  In addition, “when the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode than when the sixth mode does not change from the first mode to the second mode. Is configured so that the jackpot symbol is easier to be confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display ”means“ in a certain state, the sixth display changes from the first mode to the second mode. The case where the sixth display is changed from the first mode to the second mode is configured so that the big hit symbol is more easily confirmed and displayed in the symbol variation display than when the sixth mode is not changed. It may be.

Further, “at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to overlap the first display [at least part of the image including the hold icon display area is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 35 (f), a part of the UI part UI3 is overlaid on the ninja character NJ4, as shown in FIG. 35 (f). Wrapped etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, if attention is paid to the sixth display, various information can be obtained, and the game can be easily understood.

  Here, at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to overlap only the first display, or at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed. You may be comprised so that it may be overlapped and displayed also on displays other than a 1st display. Further, at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be always overlapped with the first display, or at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed. It may be configured such that it may be overlapped with one display and not displayed.

  In addition, at least a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to be overlapped with the first display, or other than at least a part of the sixth display. The display may be configured to be overlapped with the first display.

  Further, a part of the sixth display may be displayed so as to overlap the first display, or the entire display of the sixth display may be changed to the first display. You may be comprised so that it may be displayed by overlapping.

  Further, at least a part of the first display may be configured to overlap only with the sixth display, or at least a part of the first display may overlap with a display other than the sixth display. It may be configured as follows. Further, at least a part of the first display may be configured to always overlap the sixth display, and at least a part of the first display may not overlap the sixth display. May be configured.

  Further, only a part of the first display may be configured to overlap with the sixth display, or the entire first display may be configured to overlap with the sixth display. .

In addition, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. In the state where both the configured image [character including the hold icon display area and the character related to the change effect display of the hold icon display mode (hold change prior effect display) are displayed, the image including the hold icon display area is displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 50 (b1), the UI part UI3 is overlapped with the ninja character NJ4 which is not overlapped with the character related to the change effect display display (hold change prior effect display) of the hold icon. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game stand, if attention is paid to the sixth display, it may seem that the third display seems to be a display related to the change display of the hold icon, but it is not so.

  Here, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped only with the first display. Or, in the state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping with the display other than the first display. May be configured. Further, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be configured to be displayed without necessarily overlapping the first display, In a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may not be displayed without being overlapped with the first display.

  In addition, in a state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, only the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. In addition, when both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the display other than the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display. May be. Further, the sixth display may be displayed without being overlapped with the first display only when both the first display and the sixth display are displayed. In addition, even in a state other than the state where both the first display and the sixth display are displayed, the sixth display may be displayed without overlapping the first display. It may be configured.

  In addition, only the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap, or the display other than the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap. . In addition, the first display and the sixth display may be configured not to overlap each other, or the first display and the sixth display may be configured to overlap. .

In addition, “a certain reach production [specific super reach production, for example, super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIG. 35 (m) to FIG. 35 (q), etc.]” is configured to be executable.
The first state is one of the states before the execution of the certain reach effect [the state before a specific super reach effect is started, for example, FIG. The state before the super reach (swordsman reach) shown in FIG.
The second state is a state in which the certain reach effect is being executed [a state in which a specific super reach effect is being executed, for example, a super reach (swordsman shown in FIGS. 35 (m) to (q)). Reach) is being executed etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be easy to notice whether or not a certain reach state is reached.

  Here, only a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable, or a reach effect other than a certain reach effect may be configured to be executable. Further, a certain reach effect may be executed without fail, or a certain reach effect may not be executed.

  Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of only a certain reach effect, or before the execution of a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is started. It may be one of the states. Further, the first state may be one of the states before the execution of a certain reach effect is always started, or one of the states where the execution of a certain reach effect is not started. It may be in a state.

  Further, the second state may be a state where only a certain reach effect is being executed, or may be a state where a reach effect other than a certain reach effect is being executed. Further, the second state may be a state where a certain reach effect is always executed, or may be a state where a certain reach effect is not executed.

  Note that the first state may be a reach state before developing to SP reach in a certain change, and the second state may be a state during execution of SP reach in the certain change.

  In addition, the first state is a state before the SP reach in a certain fluctuation and further reaches a reach state, and the second state is an SP in the certain fluctuation. It may be in a state where the reach is being executed.

  That is, the first state and the second state may be one set.

Further, the certain notice display is a timer notice display [for example, display of a timer notice effect shown in FIG. 38 (b3) to FIG. 38 (b5), etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that the timer notice display may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

  Further, when there are a plurality of types of timer notice displays, a certain kind of timer notice display may be used.

In addition, the certain notice display is a display of a mini game [for example, a display of a mini game shown in FIG. 35 (o) to FIG. 35 (q)].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  The mini game may have a plurality of modes. Here, the aspect includes at least one of color, time, size, and the like.

  Further, when there are a plurality of types of mini-games, it may be a certain type of mini-game.

In addition, one of the plural types of displays is a fourth display [one of the notices, for example, a button notice effect display by the big button 136aL shown in FIG. 38 (b6), etc.]
The fourth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, only a fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fourth display may be displayed as a certain effect. May be. Further, the fourth display may be always displayed as a certain effect, or the fourth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is a fifth display [one of the notices, for example, the display of the iron plate image TP shown in FIG. 35 (q), etc.],
The fifth display may be displayed as the certain effect.
A game stand characterized by that. ”Was also explained.

  Here, only a fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect, or a display other than the fifth display may be displayed as a certain effect. May be. Further, the fifth display may be always displayed as a certain effect, or the fifth display may not be displayed as a certain effect.

  The fourth display and the fifth display may be different displays. Here, when the fifth display is displayed than when the fourth display is displayed, the jackpot symbol may be displayed more easily than when the fifth display is displayed. When the fourth display is displayed, the big hit symbol may be more easily displayed.

  In addition, when the fifth display is a display that appears only under special conditions, it is displayed only when at least one of the third display mode and a certain notice display mode is a certain mode There may be.

Further, “the third display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be continuously displayed even after the next symbol variation display is started. [Preparation display in which display is started in a certain symbol variation display is continuously displayed after the next symbol variation display is started, for example, as shown in FIGS. 35 (i) to (j). In addition, the image RDY in preparation is displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to this gaming machine, the third display can give a sense of expectation over a plurality of variations, and the goal is also easy to understand.

  Here, there may be a case where the third display that has started display in a certain symbol variation display is continuously displayed only after the next symbol variation display to be started. There may be a case where the third display that is started in the symbol variation display is continuously displayed other than after the next symbol variation display is started. In addition, the third display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may always be continuously displayed after the next symbol variation display is started, or in a certain symbol variation display. There may be a case where the third display from which display has started is not continuously displayed even after the next started symbol variation display is started.

In addition, “the first display that has been displayed in a certain symbol variation display may be erased before the next symbol variation display to be started [a certain symbol The character related to the change effect display (hold change prior effect display) of the display mode of the hold icon whose display is started in the variable display is deleted before the next symbol variable display is started. For example, FIG. ) To Ninja character NJ4 is not displayed across a plurality of symbol variation displays as shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the first display that has started display in a certain symbol variation display may be configured to be deleted only before the next symbol variation display to be started, The first display that has been started in a certain symbol variation display may be erased other than before the next symbol variation display is started. In addition, the first display that is started in a certain symbol variation display may be necessarily deleted before the next symbol variation display is started, In the display, the first display that has started to be displayed may not be erased before the symbol variation display to be started next is started.

  It should be noted that a certain notice display and a certain effect may or may not be performed across the symbol variation display. Further, a certain notice display and a certain effect may or may not be performed from the first state to the second state (from the second state to the first state).

In addition, “in the area where the third display is displayed, the certain effect may be executed [the notice is executed in the area where the display in preparation is displayed, For example, as shown in FIG. 41 (a4), there may be a case where a warning display made up of characters of “hot” may be displayed on the tutorial display section TT1 where the image RDY being prepared is displayed]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, there may be a case where only a certain effect is executed in the area where the third display is displayed, and an effect other than the certain effect is also executed in the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases. In addition, a certain effect may always be executed in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect may not be executed in the area where the third display is displayed.

  Further, a certain effect may be executed only in the area where the third display is displayed, or a certain effect is executed in an area other than the area where the third display is displayed. There may be cases.

In addition, it comprises “operating means [buttons and levers, for example, production buttons 136 etc.] that can be operated by the player
One display of the plurality of types of display is a seventh display [display of buttons and lever images, for example, a large button image 136aL shown in FIG. 38 (b6),
The seventh display is a display prompting the operation of the operation means,
The seventh display is a display that is started after the third display is started [the display of images of buttons and levers is started after the preparation display is started, For example, as shown in FIG. 38 (b1) to FIG. 38 (b6), the decabutton image 136aL is displayed after the preparation-in-progress image RDY is displayed.
When the operation means is operated during the display of the seventh display, the certain effect is started. [When the button (or lever) is operated during the display of the image of the button or lever, the notice is given. For example, the iron plate image TP is displayed when the effect button 136 is operated while the deca button image 136aL shown in FIG.
The third display is a display that is terminated before the display of the seventh display is started. [Preparation display is completed before the button or lever image is displayed. For example, as shown in FIGS. 38 (b1) to (b6), the image RDY being prepared is displayed before the display of the decabutton image 136aL is started.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the operation means may be capable of being operated only by the player, or may be operable by a person other than the player. The operation means may be always operated by the player, or may not be operated by the player.

  Further, the seventh display may prompt only the operation of the operation means, or may prompt other than the operation of the operation means. Further, the seventh display may always prompt the operation of the operation means, or may not prompt the operation of the operation means.

  The seventh display may be started only after the third display is started, or the display is started even after the third display is started. There may be. The seventh display may be one that always starts after the third display is started, or one that does not start after the third display starts. Also good.

  Also, an effect may be started whenever the operating means is operated during display of the seventh display, and an effect is not started when the operating means is operated during display of the seventh display. There may be cases. Further, if the operating means is operated only during the display of the seventh display, a certain effect may be started. If the operating means is operated other than during the display of the seventh display, a certain effect is generated. May be started. An effect may be started when the operating means is operated during the display of only the seventh display, and when the operating means is operated while a display other than the seventh display is also displayed, May be started.

  The third display may end only before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display is ended other than before the display of the seventh display is started. You may do. In addition, the third display may always end before the display of the seventh display is started, or the display does not end before the display of the seventh display starts. There may be.

  The seventh display may be a big button image of the normal button image and the big button image. Here, in the case where the normal button image is displayed and the case where the big button image is displayed, the case where the big button image is displayed may make it easier to confirm and display the big hit symbol.

  The seventh display may be a button image of a special color of the normal color of the button image and the special color of the button image. Here, when the normal color button image is displayed and when the special color button image is displayed, the special color button image is displayed more easily when the big hit symbol is more easily displayed. Good.

  Further, the seventh display may be an image of another operation means among the images of the operation means (second button, lever, etc.) different from the normal button image and the button. Here, in the case where the normal button image is displayed and the case where the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed, the case where the image of the operation means different from the button is displayed is the jackpot symbol. The confirmation display may be easy.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is an eighth display [for example, the combined animation shown in FIG. 38 (b4) to FIG. 38 (b5)],
The eighth display is a display for notifying that the display of the seventh display is started [For example, as shown in FIG. 38 (b4) to FIG. For example, the display of the deca button image 136aL is forewarned],
The third display is a display that ends during the display of the eighth display.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the eighth display may be a notice that only the start of the display of the seventh display is started, or a notice that other than the start of the display of the seventh display is started. It may be. In addition, the eighth display may always give notice that the display of the seventh display will start, or may not give notice that the display of the seventh display will start. There may be.

  Further, the third display may end only during display of the eighth display, or may end during display of a display other than the eighth display. Further, the third display may always end during display of the eighth display, or may not end during display of the eighth display.

In addition, “one of the plurality of types of display is a ninth display [for example, the variation icon h0 shown in FIG. 45 (a)],
The ninth display is a display of a fluctuation icon,
There are cases where two of the third displays are displayed [two preparation displays may be displayed. For example, as shown in FIG. 48A, two preparation images RDY1 and RDY2 are displayed. Etc.],
After the display of one of the two third displays is finished, the display mode of the other changes, and after the display of one of the two preparation displays is finished, the other display is being prepared. The display mode of the display changes, for example, as shown in FIG. 45G, the image RDY under preparation is enlarged and displayed]
The third display whose display mode has changed overlaps with the ninth display [the display in preparation whose display mode has changed overlaps with the fluctuation icon. For example, as shown in FIG. The displayed image RDY being prepared overlaps the fluctuation icon h0, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  According to this game table, it may be easy to notice that two third displays are displayed.

  Here, only two third displays may be displayed, three or more third displays may be displayed, and only one third display is displayed. It may be done.

  In addition, after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, only the display mode of the other may change, or after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, Display modes other than the above display modes may also be changed. In addition, after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, the display mode of the other may be changed, or after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, There may be a case where the display mode of does not change.

  In addition, the display mode of the other may change only after the display of one of the two third displays is finished, or even after the display of one of the two third displays is finished. The other display mode may change.

  Further, the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap only the ninth display, or the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap other displays than the ninth display. Good. In addition, the third display whose display mode has changed may necessarily overlap the ninth display, and the third display whose display mode has changed may not overlap the ninth display. .

  In addition, only the third display whose display mode has changed may overlap the ninth display, and displays other than the third display whose display mode has changed may also overlap the ninth display. .

In addition, “when two of the third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays is completed in one symbol variation display [two displays in preparation are displayed. In the same symbol variation display, for example, as shown in FIGS. 45 (b) to 45 (k), the two images RDY in preparation are all digested in the same symbol variation display. Etc.],
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, when two third displays are displayed, only the display of all the third displays may be completed in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. The display of all the displays other than the third display may be ended in one symbol variation display. In addition, when two third displays are displayed, all the third displays may be terminated in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. The display of all the third displays may not end in one symbol variation display.

  In addition, when two third displays are displayed, the display of all the third displays may end only in one symbol variation display, or when two third displays are displayed. In the symbol variation display other than the one symbol variation display, the display of all the third displays may be terminated. Moreover, only when the third display is displayed, the display of all the third displays may be ended in one symbol variation display, or other than when the third display is displayed. In this case, all the third display may be ended in one symbol variation display.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is a tenth display [explanation display, for example,“ Panda is a master of the lord ”displayed on the tutorial display unit TT1 shown in FIG. Displayed explanation display etc.]
The tenth display is an explanatory display,
The tenth display is a display that is displayed in the first display area of the display means when displayed [the explanatory display is displayed in a specific display area when displayed, for example, As shown in FIG. 35 (a), the explanation display is displayed on the tutorial display section TT1, etc.]
The third display is a display that may be displayed in the first display area [the preparation display is displayed in a specific display area in which an explanation display is displayed. For example, FIG. The ready image RDY is displayed on the tutorial display portion TT1 where the explanation display is displayed as shown in FIG.
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the tenth display may be displayed only in the first display area of the display means when displayed, or the first display area in the display means when displayed. Other than that, it may be displayed. In addition, when displayed, it may be displayed in the first display area of the display means. When displayed, it may not be displayed in the first display area of the display means. It may be.

  Further, the third display may be displayed only in the first display area, or may be displayed in a display area other than the first display area. Also good. Further, the third display may be always displayed in the first display area, or may not be displayed in the first display area.

In addition, “a display indicating that the display of a certain notice display is waiting” is “a character display in preparation [for example,“ in preparation ”in the image RDY in preparation shown in FIG. Character display etc.] ”
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “one of the plural types of displays is an eleventh display [ball-free display, such as a ball-free error display ERR1 shown in FIG. 66 (a1)],
The eleventh display is a display prompting the player to discharge the game ball [for example, in the ball removal error display ERR1, the character display “Please remove the ball” prompts removal of the ball, etc.]
In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. [In the state where both the preparation display and the ball removal display are displayed, at least a part of the preparation display overlaps the ball removal display. For example, as shown in FIG. 66 (a2) In addition, the image RDY in preparation is overlapped with the ball removal error display ERR1, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, the eleventh display may be a display prompting only to discharge the game ball, or may be a display prompting anything other than discharging the game ball. In addition, the eleventh display may be a display that always prompts the player to discharge the game ball, or a display that may not prompt the user to discharge the game ball.

  In addition, the eleventh display may be a display that prompts the player to discharge only the game ball, or a display that prompts the player to discharge other than the game ball.

  In addition, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap only the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display overlaps with the display other than the eleventh display. It may be configured to be. In addition, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is always overlapped with the eleventh display. In a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed without being overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured so that there may be cases.

  In addition, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, only at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. In the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the third display is also overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. In addition, only in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. Even in a state other than the state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the third display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

  In addition, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, a part of the third display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. Alternatively, in a state where both the third display and the eleventh display are displayed, the entire display of the third display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. May be.

Further, in the state where both the certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. [In the state where both the mini game and timer notice and the ball removal display are displayed, at least a part of the mini game and timer notice is overlapped with the ball removal display. 66 (b1), the remaining time display meter MT4 is overlapped with the ball removal error display ERR1, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Here, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is overlapped with only the eleventh display. It may be configured, and in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display overlaps with a display other than the eleventh display. And may be configured to be displayed. Further, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is surely overlapped with the eleventh display. In a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is displayed without being overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured so that there may be cases.

  In addition, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. In the state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, the display other than at least a part of the certain notice display is also overlapped with the eleventh display. It may be configured to be displayed. Further, only in a state where both a certain notice display and an eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of a certain notice display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. Even in a state other than the state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, at least a part of the display of the certain notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. May be configured to be displayed.

  In addition, in a state where both a certain notice display and an eleventh display are displayed, a part of the notice display is overlapped with the eleventh display. Alternatively, in a state where both a certain notice display and the eleventh display are displayed, the whole display of the certain notice display is displayed so as to overlap the eleventh display. May be.

In addition, “the game stand is a pachinko machine [a ball game machine such as a pachinko machine 100, etc.]
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

In addition, “The game machine is a slot machine [rotating-type game machine].
A game stand characterized by that. ]
Also explained.

  Note that the hold icon may be used in a display indicating that the start of a certain effect in the slot machine is being held, but this can be realized according to this game machine.

  Next, other specific examples of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 71 to 90 are used only for the explanation of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 71 to 90 in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, The reference numerals 71 to 90 are given priority.

  First, the effect display on the decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of this example will be described with reference to FIG. At the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, there are a special figure 1 hold number aa1, a special figure 4 aa2 figure, a special figure 2 hold number aa3, a special figure 2 figure aa4, and a general figure hold number aa5. The normal 4th symbol aa6 is displayed. The special figure 1 hold number aa1 is a display that expresses the hold number of the special figure 1 with a number, the special figure 2 hold number aa3 is a display that shows the hold number of the special figure 2 with a number, and the general figure hold number aa5 is a normal figure. It is the display which shows the number of hold of the number. Further, a variation icon display area c capable of displaying a variation icon is provided at the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area c is a hold icon display area. In the example shown in FIG. 71 (1), the special figure 1 hold icons a1, a2, a3, a4 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1, b2, b3 Are displayed side by side in this order so as to alternate from the left. The pachinko machine 100 of this example is a winning order variation machine in which a mechanism for alternately winning game balls is provided in the special figure 1 starting opening and the special figure 2 starting opening in the game board, and the suspension is digested in the winning order. . In addition, a horizontally long rectangular display area d is provided at the lower right corner of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the display area d, tutorial display, message display, and the like are displayed. When there is no content to be displayed in particular, a character string image of “in preparation” is displayed.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 71 (1) to (38). 71 (1) to (38) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. FIG. 71 (1) shows a state in which the special figure variable game is not being executed. In the symbol display areas 208a to 208c, “decoration 3—decoration 4—decoration 8”, which is the off symbol mode, is stopped and displayed.

  FIG. 71 (2) shows a state in which the variation display of the decorative symbol and the variation display of the fourth symbol are started in accordance with the special symbol 1 display device 212 (not shown) being started. Yes. Also, with the start of the special figure 1 variable game, the hold icon reduction animation is executed, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 displayed in the hold icon display area becomes the change icon c1 and moves to the change icon display area c. Then, the special figure 1 hold icons a2 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icons b1 to b3 move to the left.

  FIG. 71 (3) shows a state in which a button image f1 simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 indicating an operation effective period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displays that prompt the player to operate the chance button 136.

  FIG. 71 (4) shows a state in which the operation valid period is started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 71 (5) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the display of the conversation notice display is started. When the chance button 136 is not pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display may be started, or the conversation notice display may not be started with a predetermined probability.

  FIG. 71 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, first, a character image (2) (hereinafter referred to as “爺”) g2 is displayed.爺 g2 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 71 (7) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 71 (8) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 71 (9) shows a state in which 爺 g2 changes to a character image (hereinafter referred to as “dono”) g1 while 爺 g2 moves to the left. The shrine g1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 71 (10) shows a state where the gutter g1 is stopped. As shown in FIGS. 71 (6) to (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display a moving animation of a character. The moving animation of the character in this example is a display including the gutter g1 and 爺 g2.

  FIG. 71 (11) shows a state in which the display of the character name display (hereinafter referred to as “character name display”) h1 including the character image of “Tono” has started. The character name display h1 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 71 (12) shows a state where the balloon display i1 has started to be displayed. The balloon display i1 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 71 (13) shows a state in which the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moved to the left.

  FIG. 71 (14) shows a state where the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moved to the left.

  FIG. 71 (15) shows a state where the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are stopped. The character name display h1 stops above the shrine g1, and the balloon display i1 stops near the right side of the shrine g1.

  FIG. 71 (16) shows a state in which the display of the dialogue that is the dialogue (sentence) of the gutter g1 is started in the balloon display i1. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 71 (16), a character image of “noon” is displayed.

  FIG. 71 (17) shows a state where a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 71 (17), a character string image of “AM” is displayed.

  FIG. 71 (18) shows a state in which a dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 71 (18), a character string image of “Morning in the morning” is displayed.

  FIG. 71 (19) shows a state where the display of the speech display in the balloon display i1 is completed. In the balloon display i, a character string image of “morning weather” and a symbol of “sun mark” are displayed as a speech display.

  FIG. 71 (20) shows a state in which a button image f1 simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 indicating an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed.

  FIG. 71 (21) shows a state in which the operation valid period is started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 71 (22) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. FIG. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display is continuously started. When the chance button 136 is not pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display may be continuously displayed, or the conversation notice display may be terminated without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

  FIG. 71 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, 爺 g2 is displayed.爺 g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 71 (24) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 71 (25) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 71 (26) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 71 (27) shows a state where 爺 g2 is stopped.

  FIG. 71 (28) shows a state in which the display of the character name h2 including the character image “爺” is started. The character name display h2 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h2 has moved to the right.

  FIG. 71 (29) shows a state where the balloon display i2 has started to be displayed. The balloon display i2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i2 has moved to the right.

  FIG. 71 (30) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moved to the right.

  FIG. 71 (31) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moving to the right.

  FIG. 71 (32) shows a state where the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are stopped. The character name display h2 stops above 爺 g2, and the balloon display i2 stops near the left side of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 71 (33) shows a state in which the display of the speech display, which is the speech (diagram) of 爺 g2, is started in the balloon display i2. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 71 (33), a character image of “O” is displayed.

  FIG. 71 (34) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 71 (34), a character string image of “noon” is displayed.

  FIG. 71 (35) shows a state where a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 71 (35), a character string image of “noon weather” is displayed.

  FIG. 71 (36) shows a state where the display of the speech display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, a character image of “noon weather” and a symbol of “cloudy mark” are displayed as a speech display.

  FIG. 71 (37) shows a state where “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a after the conversation notice display is completed.

  FIG. 71 (38) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c after the conversation notice display is completed. Although the subsequent illustration is omitted, in this example, the reach effect at “decoration 7” is started thereafter. Note that the reach effect may not be started after the end of the conversation notice display.

  The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present example includes a first display (first serif notice display shown in FIG. 71 (19)) and a second display (second serif shown in FIG. 71 (36)). (Notice display) can be displayed. The first display includes the gutter g1, the balloon display i1, the dialogue display in the balloon display i1, and the character name display h1 displayed in FIG. 71 (19). The second display includes 爺 g2, the balloon display i2, the dialogue display in the balloon display i2, and the character name display h2 displayed in FIG. 71 (36). The first conversation notice display is displayed by the first display and the second display. In addition, the first display and the second display in this example are the notices of the change. In this example, the first display is displayed after 爺 g2 is displayed in FIGS. 71 (6) to (8).爺 g2 may be displayed before the first display. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, the player can expect that the second display may be displayed by notifying that the second display including 爺 g2 is displayed, There are cases where the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 72 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 72 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to (5), description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 72 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, first, the hall g1 is displayed. The gutter g1 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  72 (7) to 72 (10) show a state in which the gutter g1 is moving to the left.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 72 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (10) to (38), description thereof will be omitted. In this example, before the dialogue display of Tono in FIG. 72 (19) is displayed, Tono g1 is displayed from the beginning, and other characters such as 爺 g2 are not displayed. As described above, 爺 g2 may not be displayed before the display of the first display.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 73 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 73 (1) to (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to (22), description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 73 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, a princess character image (hereinafter referred to as “princess”) g3 is displayed. The princess g3 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 73 (24) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving rightward.

  FIG. 73 (25) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving rightward.

  FIG. 73 (26) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to 爺 g2 while the princess g3 is moving rightward.爺 g2 has moved to the right.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 73 (27) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (27) to (38), description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the princess g3 is a character that does not appear in the second display shown in FIG. 73 (36). According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, the character is different when the second display is displayed by performing a gusset notice to display the princess g3 that does not appear in the second display shown in FIG. 73 (36). In some cases, the player's intention can be struck and the player's interest can be improved.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 74 (1) to (38). 74 (1) to 74 (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 74 (1) to (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to (5), description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 74 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the princess g3 is displayed first. The princess g3 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 74 (7) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 74 (8) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 74 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to the lord g1 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. The shrine g1 has moved to the left.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 74 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (10) to (38), description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the princess g3 is a character that does not appear in the first display shown in FIG. According to the pachinko machine 100 of the present example, the character is different when the first display is displayed by performing the gusset notice that displays the princess g3 that does not appear in the first display shown in FIG. 74 (10). In some cases, the player's intention can be struck and the player's interest can be improved.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 75 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 75 (1) to (25) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to (25), description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 75 (26) shows a state in which 爺 g2 changes to princess g3 while 爺 g2 moves to the right. Princess g3 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 75 (27) shows a state where the princess g3 is stopped.

  FIG. 75 (28) shows a state in which the display of the character name h3 including the character image “Princess” has started. The character name display h3 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h3 has moved to the right.

  FIG. 75 (29) shows a state where the balloon display i3 has been displayed. The balloon display i3 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i3 has moved to the right.

  FIG. 75 (30) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moving to the right.

  FIG. 75 (31) shows a state in which the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moving to the right.

  FIG. 75 (32) shows a state where the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are stopped. The character name display h3 stops above the princess g3, and the balloon display i3 stops near the left side of the princess g3.

  FIG. 75 (33) shows a state in which the display of the dialogue that is the dialogue (sentence) of the princess g3 is started in the balloon display i3. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 75 (33), the character image “PM” is displayed.

  FIG. 75 (34) shows a state in which a dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 75 (34), a character string image “Afternoon weather is” is displayed.

  FIG. 75 (35) shows a state where a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 75 (35), the character string image “Afternoon weather is” is displayed.

  FIG. 75 (36) shows a state where the display of the speech display in the balloon display i3 is completed. In the balloon display i3, a text image of “afternoon weather” and a symbol of “rain mark” are displayed as a speech display.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 75 (37) and (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (37) and (38), description thereof will be omitted. The decorative symbol display device 208 of the pachinko machine 100 of the present example includes a first display (first line notice display shown in FIG. 75 (19)) and a second display (second line shown in FIG. 75 (36)). (Notice display) can be displayed. The first display includes the gutter g1, the balloon display i1, the dialogue display in the balloon display i1, and the character name display h1 displayed in FIG. 75 (19). The second display includes the princess g3, the balloon display i3, the dialogue display in the balloon display i3, and the character name display h3 displayed in FIG. 75 (36). The first conversation notice display is displayed by the first display and the second display. In addition, the first display and the second display in this example are the notices of the change. In this example, 爺 g2 is displayed in FIGS. 75 (23) to (25) after 爺 g2 is displayed in FIGS. 75 (6) to 75 (8). ) Is a Gase notice that does not appear in the conversation notice display shown in FIG. According to the pachinko machine 100 of this example, it is possible to poke the player's intention by changing the character when the conversation notice display is displayed by performing the gasse notice that displays 爺 g2 that does not appear in the conversation notice display. In some cases, the interest of the player can be improved.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 76 (1) to (38). 76 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 76 (1) to 76 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to (5), description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 76 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, 爺 g2 is first displayed.爺 g2 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 76 (7) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 76 (8) shows a state in which 爺 g2 changes to princess g3 while 爺 g2 moves to the left. Princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 76 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to the lord g1 while the princess g3 is moving leftward. The shrine g1 has moved to the left.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 76 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (10) to (38), description thereof will be omitted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 76 (6) to (10), the character image changes twice during the movement animation (moving display) of the character, and the moving display of the three character images is displayed. In this example, 爺 g2, princess g3, and lord g1 are displayed in this order, but may be displayed in the order of princess g3, 姫 g2, and lord g1. Further, four or more character images may be displayed during the moving display of the character image.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 77 (1) to (38). 77 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. The states shown in FIGS. 77 (1) to 77 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to 71 (5), and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 77 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, first, the hall g1 is displayed. The gutter g1 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 77 (7) shows a state where the gutter g1 is changed to 爺 g2 while the gutter g1 is moving to the left.爺 g2 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 77 (8) shows a state in which 爺 g2 changes to princess g3 while 爺 g2 moves to the left. Princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 77 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to the lord g1 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. The shrine g1 has moved to the left.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 77 (10) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (10) to (38), description thereof will be omitted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 77 (6) to (10), during the character's moving animation display, the character image makes a round of three characters in the order of lord g1, fox g2, princess g3, and lord g1. Is displayed. It should be noted that four or more characters may be displayed so as to make one round or half of the movement animation display of the character. Also, a plurality of character images may be displayed in a circle during the character movement animation display shown in FIGS. 77 (23) to (27).

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 77 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. The states shown in FIGS. 77 (1) to 77 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to 71 (5), and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 78 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation advance notice display of this example, first, the hall g1 is displayed. The gutter g1 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 78 (7) shows a state in which the gutter g1 is changed to 爺 g2 while the gutter g1 is moving to the left.爺 g2 has moved to the left. Note that the gutter g1 may change to 爺 g2 at the time when the entire gutter g1 shown in FIG. 78 (6) is not displayed.

  FIG. 78 (8) shows a state in which 爺 g2 changes to princess g3 while 爺 g2 moves to the left. Princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 78 (9) shows a state in which the princess g3 is changed to 爺 g2 while the princess g3 is moving to the left. The shrine g1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 78 (10) shows a state in which the gutter g1 stops after the gutter g2 changes to the gutter g1 while the gutter g2 moves to the left. It should be noted that it may be changed to g1 after heel g2 stops or simultaneously with the stop.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 78 (11) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (11) to (38), description thereof will be omitted. In this example, as shown in FIGS. 78 (6) to (10), during the character moving animation display, the character image is a round of three characters in the order of lord g1, 爺 g2, princess g3, 爺 g2, and lord g1. Is displayed. The character may change in the reverse order, like princess g3, 爺 g2, and lord g1, after changing in the order of lord g1, 爺 g2, and princess g3. In addition, during the character movement animation display, four or more characters may make a round and may be displayed so as to change in the reverse direction. In addition, during the character movement animation display shown in FIGS. 78 (23) to (27), a display in which the characters change as shown in FIGS. 78 (6) to (10) may be displayed.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 79 (1) to (38). 79 (1) to 79 (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. The states shown in FIGS. 79 (1) to 79 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS.

  FIG. 79 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, 爺 g2 is first displayed.爺 g2 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 79 (7) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of 爺 g2 changes is displayed while 爺 g2 moves to the left. Thus, an animation in which the aspect of 爺 g2 changes during the movement animation of 爺 g2 may be displayed.

  FIG. 79 (8) shows a state where 爺 g2 is changed to 殿 g1 while 爺 g2 is moving to the left. The shrine g1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 79 (9) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of the lord g1 changes while the lord g1 is moving to the left is displayed. In this way, an animation in which the mode of the hall 1 changes during the movement animation of the hall g1 may be displayed.

  FIG. 79 (10) shows a state in which the gutter g1 stops after the expression of the gutter g1 changes. It should be noted that an animation in which the facial expression of the glute g1 changes after the glaze g1 stops or at the same time as the stop may be displayed. In this example, in the character movement animation, the display period of the gutter g1 displayed in the conversation notice shown in FIG. 79 (19) is longer than the display period of 爺 g2. Thus, in the character movement animation, the character display period displayed in the conversation notice display may be the longest.

  79 (11) to (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (11) to (22), and the description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 79 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, 爺 g2 is displayed.爺 g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 79 (24) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of 爺 g2 changes is displayed while 爺 g2 moves to the right. Thus, an animation in which the aspect of 爺 g2 changes during the movement animation of 爺 g2 may be displayed.

  FIG. 79 (25) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of 爺 g2 changes is displayed while 爺 g2 moves to the right. Thus, an animation in which the aspect of 爺 g2 changes during the movement animation of 爺 g2 may be displayed.

  FIG. 79 (26) shows a state in which an animation in which the expression of 爺 g2 changes is displayed while 爺 g2 moves to the right. In this way, an animation in which the mode of the hall 1 changes during the movement animation of the hall g1 may be displayed.

  FIG. 79 (27) shows a state where 爺 g2 is stopped. An animation in which the facial expression of 爺 g2 changes after 表示 g2 stops or simultaneously with the stop may be displayed.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 79 (28) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (38) to (38), description thereof will be omitted. As in this example, a display in which the character aspect (for example, facial expression) changes may be displayed during the display of the movement animation of the character.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 80 (1) to (40). 80 (1) to (40) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. The state shown in FIG. 80 (1) is the same as the state shown in FIG. 74 (36), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 80 (2) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a.

  FIG. 80 (3) shows a state in which “decoration 8” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 80 (4) shows a state where a pseudo-continuous decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208a. The pseudo-ream decorative pattern is displayed when the pseudo-ream effect display is performed. The pseudo-ream is an effect of performing pseudo-variation as if the decorative symbol variation display was performed a plurality of times during one special figure variation game, and is a notice effect of the variation. After the decoration pattern of the pseudo ream is displayed, the second display of the variable display of the decoration ream (second time of the pseudo ream) is started.

  FIG. 80 (5) shows a state in which the second pseudo-ream starts. Moreover, the movable body 700 shown in FIG. 17 has moved upward and stopped. In addition, during the second execution of the pseudo-continuous, “× 2” is displayed in the display area d to notify that the second time of the pseudo-continuous is being executed.

  FIG. 80 (6) shows a state in which a button image f1 simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 indicating an operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displays that prompt the player to operate the chance button 136.

  FIG. 80 (7) shows a state in which the operation valid period is started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 80 (8) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the second conversation notice display is displayed. Note that the first conversation notice display is the conversation notice display shown in FIG. When the chance button 136 is not pressed once during the operation valid period, the second conversation notice display may be displayed, or the second conversation notice display is not started with a predetermined probability. May be.

  FIG. 80 (9) shows a state in which the second conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the princess g3 is displayed first. The princess g3 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 80 (10) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 80 (11) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 80 (12) shows a state where the princess g3 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 80 (13) shows a state where the princess g3 is stopped. The character movement animations shown in FIGS. 80 (9) to (13) are shown in FIGS. 71 (6) to (10), FIGS. 73 (6) to (10), FIGS. 74 (6) to (10), and FIG. 75 (6) to (10), FIGS. 76 (6) to (10), FIGS. 77 (6) to (10), FIGS. 78 (6) to (10), and FIGS. 79 (6) to (10). An animation similar to the animation may be displayed.

  FIG. 80 (14) shows a state where the display of the character name display h3 is started. The character name display h3 appears from the upper right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h3 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 80 (15) shows a state where the balloon display i3 has been displayed. The balloon display i3 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i3 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 80 (16) shows a state where the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moved to the left.

  FIG. 80 (17) shows a state where the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are moved to the left.

  FIG. 80 (18) shows a state where the character name display h3 and the balloon display i3 are stopped. The character name display h3 stops above the princess g3, and the balloon display i3 stops near the right side of the princess g3.

  FIG. 80 (19) shows a state in which the display of the dialogue that is the dialogue (sentence) of the princess g3 is started in the balloon display i3. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 80 (19), a character image of “noon” is displayed.

  FIG. 80 (20) shows a state in which a dialogue display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 80 (21), a character string image of “afternoon” is displayed.

  FIG. 80 (21) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i3. In FIG. 80 (21), a character string image of “Afternoon weather is” is displayed.

  FIG. 80 (22) shows a state where the display of the speech display in the balloon display i3 is completed. In the balloon display i3, a character string image of “afternoon weather is” and a symbol of “rain mark” are displayed as a speech display.

  FIG. 80 (23) shows a state in which a button image f1 simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 indicating the operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed.

  FIG. 80 (24) shows a state in which the operation effective period is started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 80 (25) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display is continuously started. When the chance button 136 is not pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display may be continuously displayed, or the conversation notice display may be terminated without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

  FIG. 80 (26) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, 爺 g2 is displayed.爺 g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 80 (27) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 80 (28) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 80 (29) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the right.

  FIG. 80 (30) shows a state where 爺 g2 is stopped.

  FIG. 80 (31) shows a state in which the display of the character name h2 including the character image “爺” is started. The character name display h2 appears from the center of the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h2 has moved to the right.

  FIG. 80 (32) shows a state where the balloon display i2 has been displayed. The balloon display i2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i2 has moved to the right.

  FIG. 80 (33) shows a state where the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moved to the right.

  FIG. 80 (34) shows a state in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are moved to the right.

  FIG. 80 (35) shows a state where the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are stopped. The character name display h2 stops above 爺 g2, and the balloon display i2 stops near the left side of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 80 (36) shows a state in which the display of a dialogue display which is a dialogue (diagram) of 爺 g2 is started in the balloon display i2. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 80 (36), a character image of “O” is displayed.

  FIG. 80 (37) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 80 (37), a character string image of “noon” is displayed.

  FIG. 80 (38) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i2. In FIG. 80 (38), a character string image of “noon weather” is displayed.

  FIG. 80 (39) shows a state where the display of the speech display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, a character image of “noon weather” and a symbol of “cloudy mark” are displayed as a speech display. In addition, the mode of the balloon display i2 changes from white to blue, and the mode of the character name display h2 changes from white to blue. The big hit reliability is set higher in blue than in white. In this way, in the second conversation notice display, a display with high jackpot reliability may be displayed.

  FIG. 80 (40) shows a state in which “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left and right symbol display areas 208a and 208c after the conversation notice display ends. Although the subsequent illustration is omitted, in this example, the reach effect at “decoration 7” is started thereafter.

  In this example, after the first conversation notice display (first conversation notice display) shown in FIG. 80 (1) is displayed, the second conversation notice display (second conversation notice display shown in FIG. 80 (39)) is displayed. (Conversation notice display) is displayed. As described above, a plurality of conversation notice displays may be displayed in one special figure variable game. Note that the greater the number of conversation announcements displayed, the higher the jackpot reliability may be set.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 81 (1) to (38). FIGS. 81 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 81 (1) to (15) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to (15), description thereof will be omitted.

  FIGS. 81 (16) to 81 (18) show a state in which the movement display (movement animation) of the dialogue display is displayed. The serif display moves from the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the left balloon display h1. In this way, the movement animation of the serif display may be displayed.

  FIG. 81 (19) shows a state where the speech display is stopped in the balloon display h1.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 81 (20) to (32) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (20) to (32), description thereof will be omitted.

  81 (33) to (35) show a state in which the movement display (movement animation) of the dialogue display is displayed. The serif display moves from the left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 toward the left balloon display h2. In this way, the movement animation of the serif display may be displayed.

  FIG. 81 (36) shows a state where the speech display is stopped within the balloon display h1.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 81 (37) and (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (37) and (38), description thereof will be omitted. In this example, a moving animation with a dialogue display is displayed. In this way, the movement animation of the serif display may be displayed.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 82 (1) to 82 (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. Since the states shown in FIGS. 82 (1) to 82 (5) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to 71 (5), description thereof is omitted.

  FIG. 82 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, 爺 g2 is displayed.爺 g2 appears from the lower right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 82 (7) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 82 (8) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the left.

  FIG. 82 (9) shows a state in which 爺 g2 changes to a character image (hereinafter referred to as “dono”) g1 while 爺 g2 moves to the left. The shrine g1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 82 (10) shows a state where the gutter g1 is stopped. As shown in FIGS. 82 (6) to (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display a moving animation of a character. The moving animation of the character in this example is a display including the gutter g1 and 爺 g2.

  FIG. 82 (11) shows a state in which the display of the character name display (hereinafter referred to as “character name display”) h1 including the character image “Tono” has started. The character name display h1 appears from the center of the right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The character name display h1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 82 (12) shows a state where the balloon display i1 has started to be displayed. The balloon display i1 appears from the lower right end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The balloon display i1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 82 (13) shows a state where the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moved to the left.

  FIG. 82 (14) shows a state where the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are moved to the left.

  FIG. 82 (15) shows a state where the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 are stopped. The character name display h1 stops above the shrine g1, and the balloon display i1 stops near the right side of the shrine g1.

  FIG. 82 (16) shows a state in which the display of the dialogue that is the dialogue (sentence) of the gutter g1 is started in the balloon display i1. The dialogue display starts from the left side of the character string image. In FIG. 82 (16), a character image of “noon” is displayed.

  FIG. 82 (17) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 82 (17), a character string image of “AM” is displayed.

  FIG. 82 (18) shows a state in which a speech display is displayed in the balloon display i1. In FIG. 82 (18), a character string image of “Morning in the morning” is displayed.

  FIG. 82 (19) shows a state where the display of the speech display in the balloon display i1 is completed. In the balloon display i, a character string image of “morning weather” and a symbol of “sun mark” are displayed as a speech display. In this example, as compared with FIG. 71 (19), the shrine g 1, the character name display h 1, the balloon display h 1, and the speech display are displayed below the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 82 (20) shows a state in which a button image f1 simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 indicating the operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 and the meter image f2 are displayed so as to overlap a part of the balloon display h1 (a part of the first display).

  FIG. 82 (21) shows a state in which the operation valid period is started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 82 (22) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display is continuously started. When the chance button 136 is not pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display may be continuously displayed, or the conversation notice display may be terminated without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

  FIG. 82 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, 爺 g2 is displayed.爺 g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Simultaneously with the appearance of 爺 g2, an animation is displayed in which the gutter g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward. The start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of 爺 g2 or after the appearance of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 82 (24) shows a state in which 爺 g2 moves to the right, and lord g1, character name display h1, balloon display h1, and speech display move upward. In addition, 爺 g2 is displayed so as to overlap part of the gutter g1 and the balloon display h1.

  FIG. 82 (25) shows a state in which 爺 g2 moves to the right, and the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward.

  FIG. 82 (26) shows a state in which 爺 g2 moves to the right, and the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward.

  FIG. 82 (27) shows a state in which 爺 g2 is stopped, and the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display are stopped.

  Since the states shown in FIGS. 82 (28) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (28) to (38), description thereof will be omitted. In this example, an animation is displayed in which the first display of the shrine j1 etc. moves at the start of the display of the second display such as 爺 g2 in the conversation preview display.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 83 (1) to (38). 83 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. The states shown in FIGS. 83 (1) to (22) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 82 (1) to (22), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 83 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, 爺 g2 is displayed.爺 g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Simultaneously with the appearance of 爺 g2, an animation is displayed in which the gutter g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward. The start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of 爺 g2 or after the appearance of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 83 (24) shows a state in which 爺 g2 moves to the right, and the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward. In addition, 爺 g2 is displayed so as to overlap part of the gutter g1 and the balloon display h1.

  FIG. 83 (25) shows a state in which 爺 g2 moves to the right, and the lord g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display move upward.

  FIG. 83 (26) shows a state in which 爺 g2 moves to the right, and the gutter g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display are stopped.

  FIG. 83 (27) shows a state where 爺 g2 is stopped.

  In the states shown in FIGS. 83 (28) to (32), an animation in which the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 move to the left is displayed as in the states shown in FIGS. 71 (28) to (32). In this example, the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are displayed overlapping the character g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display. In the present example, the moving animation of the second display such as 爺 g2 in the conversation notice display is displayed overlapping the first display such as the shrine j1.

  83 (32) to (35) show a state in which a line display is displayed in the balloon display h2, similarly to the states shown in FIGS. 71 (32) to (35).

  FIG. 83 (36) shows a state where the display of the speech display in the balloon display i2 is completed. In the balloon display i2, a character image of “noon weather” and a symbol of “cloudy mark” are displayed as a speech display. In this example, the speech balloon display h2 and the speech display in the speech balloon display h2 are displayed overlapping the speech balloon display h1 and the speech display in the speech balloon display h1.

  The states shown in FIGS. 83 (37) and (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 83 (37) and (38), and a description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the second display such as 爺 g2 in the conversation notice display is displayed so as to overlap the first display such as the shrine j1.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 84 (1) to (38). 84 (1) to 84 (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. The state shown in FIGS. 84 (1) to 84 (5) is the same as the state shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to 71 (5), and the description thereof will be omitted.

  84 (6) to (10) show a state in which the character movement animation is displayed as in FIGS. 71 (6) to (10). In this example, the display size of 爺 g2 and 殿 g1 is larger than the example shown in FIGS. 71 (6) to (10).

  84 (11) to (19) show a state where the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display are displayed as in FIGS. 71 (11) to (19). In this example, the display size of the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display is larger than the example shown in FIGS. 71 (11) to (19).

  FIG. 84 (20) shows a state in which a button image f1 simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a meter image f2 indicating the operation valid period during which the operation of the chance button 136 is valid are displayed. The button image f1 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the balloon display h1 (a part of the first display).

  FIG. 84 (21) shows a state in which the operation valid period is started. The remaining time of the operation effective period indicated by the meter image f2 is reduced.

  FIG. 84 (22) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136. In this example, the chance button 136 is pressed once. In this example, when the chance button 136 is pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display is continuously started. When the chance button 136 is not pressed once during the operation valid period, the conversation notice display may be continuously displayed, or the conversation notice display may be terminated without continuing with a predetermined probability. Good.

  FIG. 84 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, 爺 g2 is displayed.爺 g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. Simultaneously with the appearance of 爺 g2, an animation in which the display size of the shrine g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display is reduced is displayed. The start timing of the animation may be before the appearance of 爺 g2 or after the appearance of 爺 g2.

  FIG. 84 (24) shows a state in which 爺 g2 moves to the right and an animation in which the display size of the shrine g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display is reduced is displayed.

FIG. 84 (25) shows a state in which 爺 g2 moves to the right and an animation in which the display size of the shrine g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display is reduced is displayed.

  FIG. 84 (26) shows a state in which 爺 g2 moves to the right and an animation in which the display size of the shrine g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display is reduced is displayed.

  FIG. 84 (27) shows a state where 爺 g2 is stopped and the animation in which the display size of the shrine g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display is reduced is finished. The display sizes of the shrine g1, the character name display h1, the balloon display h1, and the speech display are the same as the examples shown in FIGS.

  The states shown in FIGS. 84 (28) to (38) are the same as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (28) to (38), and a description thereof will be omitted. In this example, the first display of the gutter g1 etc. in the conversation preview display is enlarged until the second display such as 爺 g2 starts to be displayed. The first display is reduced. In the state shown in FIG. 84 (36), a part of the balloon display h1 may be displayed so as to overlap with a part of the balloon display h2. In this case, the display size of the balloon display h1 is the balloon display. The display size may be overlapped with a part of h2.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 85 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. 85 (1) to (38), the same effects as the conversation notice display shown in FIGS. 82 (1) to (38) are performed. For this reason, detailed description of the conversation notice display in this example is omitted.

FIG. 85 (1) shows the same state as FIG. 82 (1).
FIG. 85 (2) shows a state in which the timer notice display j has been displayed. In the timer notice display j, a character string image of “attention!” Is displayed in a horizontally long rectangular frame. The timer notice display j performs a countdown display for a predetermined time, and when the countdown reaches 0 seconds, a predetermined effect (for example, operation of a movable body or a predetermined notice display) is performed. Before the countdown starts, a character string image of “attention!” Is displayed in the timer notice display j.

FIGS. 85 (3) and 85 (4) show the same state as FIGS. 82 (3) and (4) except that the timer notice display j is displayed.
FIG. 85 (5) shows the same state as FIG. 82 (5).

  FIG. 85 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started as in FIG. 82 (6). In this example, the countdown display of the timer notice display j is also started with the start of the conversation notice display. In this example, a countdown display of 40 seconds is performed.

  In FIGS. 85 (6) to (19), a conversation notice display is displayed as in FIGS. 82 (6) to (19), and in this example, a countdown display of a timer notice display j is also displayed. As shown in FIGS. 85 (6) to (19), the timer notice display j is displayed in an overlapping manner with the characters g1 and 爺 g2, the character name display h1, the balloon display i1, and the speech display. For example, in FIG. 85 (14) and after, the entire character name display h1 is displayed overlapping the timer notice display j, and the character name display h1 is not visible.

85 (20) and (21) show the same state as FIGS. 82 (20) and (21) except that the timer notice display j is displayed.
FIG. 85 (22) shows the same state as FIG. 82 (5).

  FIG. 85 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued as in FIG. 82 (23). In FIG. 82 (23), the remaining time of the countdown display of the timer notice display j is 36.99 seconds.

  85 (24) to (36) display a conversation notice display as in FIGS. 82 (24) to (36). In this example, a countdown display of a timer notice display j is also displayed. As shown in FIGS. 85 (24) to (36), the timer notice display j is displayed overlapping with the character of 爺 g2, the character name display h2, the balloon display i2, and the speech display. For example, in FIG. 85 (30), the entire character name display h2 is displayed overlapping the timer notice display j, and the character name display h2 is not visible.

  85 (37) and (38) show the same state as FIGS. 82 (37) and (38) except that the timer notice display j is displayed. Thus, the timer notice display j may be displayed together with the conversation notice display. Instead of the timer notice display j, other displays (ball removal error display, door opening error display, other notice display, change icon display of hold icon), and the like may be displayed. Also, as shown in the timer notice display j, the length of the display period of the character moving animation shown in FIGS. 85 (6) to (10) is g It is shorter than the display period of the conversation notice display including the display h1, the balloon display i1, and the speech notice display.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 86 (1) to (38). 86 (1) to (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. 85 (1) to (38), the same effects as the conversation notice display shown in FIGS. 82 (1) to (38) are performed. For this reason, detailed description of the conversation notice display in this example is omitted.

FIG. 86 (1) shows the same state as FIG. 82 (1).
FIG. 86 (2) shows a state in which the movable body k has moved to a position in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. In this example, the movable body k is moved before the display of the conversation notice display is started. The movable body k may reciprocate up and down, left and right in front of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, or may perform a vibration operation. In this example, the movable body k is positioned in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 from the start of the symbol variation display to the start of the reach effect.

FIGS. 86 (3) and 86 (4) show the same state as FIGS. 82 (3) and (4) except that the movable body k is positioned in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In FIGS. 85 (3) and 85 (4), the entire button image f1 is hidden by the movable body k.
FIG. 86 (5) shows the same state as FIG. 82 (5).

  In FIGS. 86 (6) to (19), a conversation notice display is displayed in the same manner as FIGS. 82 (6) to (19). In this example, the characters g1 and 爺 g2 and character names are displayed by the movable body k. At least a part of h1, the balloon display i1, and the speech display becomes invisible to the player.

FIGS. 86 (20) and (21) show the same state as FIGS. 82 (3) and (4) except that the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. In FIGS. 86 (20) and (21), the entire button image f1 is hidden by the movable body k.
FIG. 86 (22) shows the same state as FIG. 82 (22).

  FIG. 86 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued as in FIG. 82 (23). 86 (24) to (36) display the conversation notice display in the same manner as FIGS. 82 (24) to (36). In this example, the characters k1 and g2 and the character names are displayed by the movable body k. At least a part of h1, h2, balloon display i1, i2, and line display is invisible to the player.

  Fig. 86 (37) shows the same state as Fig. 82 (37) except that the movable body k is located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. 86 (38) shows a state in which the reach effect is started. When the reach effect is started, the movable body k moves from the position in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and returns to the initial position. Thus, the moving effect of the movable body k may be performed together with the conversation notice display.

  Next, an example of the effect of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described using FIGS. 87 (1) to 87 (38). 87 (1) to (38) show an example of the performance of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. 87 (1) to (38), the same effects as the conversation notice display shown in FIGS. 82 (1) to (38) are performed. For this reason, detailed description of the conversation notice display in this example is omitted.

FIG. 87 (1) shows the same state as FIG. 82 (1).
FIG. 87 (2) shows a state in which the pattern display m is displayed by the light guide plate arranged in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the pachinko machine 100 of this example, a light guide plate is disposed in front of the decorative symbol display device 208 as in the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIGS. 35 to 68, and a pattern display m can be displayed by light emission of the light guide plate. It is. The pattern display m is displayed so as to overlap the display on the decorative symbol display device 208 as shown in FIGS. 87 (2) to 87 (37). For example, as shown in FIG. 87 (36), the pattern display m is displayed so as to overlap the first display such as the gutter g1 and the second display such as 爺 g2. In this way, the pattern display m and the error display (display of the ball removal error or the door opening error) are over the display of at least one of the first display such as 殿 g1 and the second display such as 爺 g2. May wrap,

  FIG. 87 (38) shows a state in which the reach effect is started. When the reach effect starts, the pattern display m is deleted. Thus, the display by the light guide plate may be displayed together with the conversation notice display.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 88 (1) to (38). 88 (1) to 88 (38) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. 88 (1) to 88 (5) show the same state as that shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to 71 (5), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 88 (6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, the character image is displayed in a square frame, and the square frame is displayed in a predetermined color. The colors in the square frame are set to white, blue, and green in descending order of the big hit reliability. In FIG. 88 (6), the inside of the square frame surrounding 爺 g2 is displayed in white. The conversation notice display of this example is the same as the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 71 except that the character is displayed in a square frame.

  FIG. 88 (7) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the left. The square frame surrounding 爺 g2 is displayed in blue.

  FIG. 88 (8) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the left. The square frame surrounding 爺 g2 is displayed in green.

  FIG. 88 (9) shows a state where 爺 g2 changes to 殿 g1 while 爺 g2 moves to the left. The shrine g1 has moved to the left. The square frame surrounding the shrine g1 is displayed in blue.

  FIG. 88 (10) shows a state where the gutter g1 is stopped. As shown in FIGS. 89 (6) to 89 (10), the decorative symbol display device 208 can display a moving animation of a character. The moving animation of the character in this example is a display including the gutter g1 and 爺 g2. The square frame surrounding the shrine g1 is displayed in white. Thus, the inside of the square frame surrounding the character changes in the order of white, blue, green, blue, and white. The order of the color change can be arbitrarily set. This color change is performed during the animation of character movement.

  The states shown in FIGS. 88 (11) to (21) are shown in FIGS. 71 (11) to (21) except that the gutter g1 is surrounded by a square frame and the inside of the frame is white. ), The description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 88 (22) shows a state where the player is operating the chance button 136.

  FIG. 88 (23) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In this example, first, when the conversation notice display is continued, 爺 g2 is displayed.爺 g2 appears from the lower left end of the display area of the decorative symbol display device 208. The square frame surrounding 正方形 g2 is displayed in white.

  FIG. 88 (24) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the right. The square frame surrounding 爺 g2 is displayed in blue.

  FIG. 88 (25) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving rightward. The square frame surrounding 爺 g2 is displayed in green.

  FIG. 88 (26) shows a state where 爺 g2 is moving to the right. The square frame surrounding 爺 g2 is displayed in blue.

  FIG. 88 (27) shows a state where 爺 g2 is stopped. The square frame surrounding 爺 g2 is displayed in blue.

  The states shown in FIGS. 88 (28) to (36) are shown in FIGS. 71 (28) to (36) except that 爺 g2 is displayed surrounded by a square frame and the inside of the frame is blue. ), The description thereof will be omitted.

  88 (37) and (38) show the same state as FIGS. 71 (37) and (38). In this example, a conversation notice display character is displayed in a frame, and the frame is displayed in a predetermined color. The big hit reliability is set by the color in the frame.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 (a1) to (a20). 89 (a1) to (a20) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. 89 (a1) to 89 (a5) show the same state as that shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to 71 (5), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 89 (a6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, display of the character and the character name display is started simultaneously. In FIG. 89 (a6), 爺 g2 and character name display h1 are moved to the left. The character name display is different from the character, and the character name of the conversation notice display is displayed from the beginning.

  FIG. 89 (a7) shows a state where 爺 g2 and character name display h1 are moving to the left. Further, the balloon display i1 is started to be displayed.

  FIG. 89 (a8) shows a state where 爺 g2, character name display h1, and balloon display i1 are moved to the left.

  FIG. 89 (a9) shows a state where 爺 g2 changes to 殿 g1 while 爺 g2 moves to the left. Tono g1, character name display h1, and balloon display i1 have moved to the left.

  FIG. 89 (a10) shows a state in which the patron g1, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are stopped. As described above, in the conversation notice display, the movement animation of the character name display h1 and the balloon display i1 may be displayed during the movement animation of the character.

  89 (a11) to (a13) show the same state as that shown in FIGS. 71 (20) to (22).

  FIG. 89 (a14) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In the conversation notice display of this example, display of the character and the character name display is started simultaneously. In FIG. 89 (a12), 爺 g2 and character name display h2 are moved to the left.

  FIG. 89 (a15) shows a state where 爺 g2 and character name display h2 are moving to the right.

  FIG. 89 (a16) shows a state where 爺 g2 and character name display h2 are moving to the right. Also, the balloon display i2 has started to be displayed.

  FIG. 89 (a17) shows a state in which 爺 g2, character name display h2, and balloon display i2 are moved to the right.

  FIG. 89 (a18) shows a state where 爺 g2, character name display h2, and balloon display i2 are stopped. Thus, in the conversation preview display, the movement animation of the character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 may be displayed during the character movement animation.

  89 (a19) and (a20) show the same state as that shown in FIGS. 71 (37) and (38). As in this example, during the character movement animation, a movement animation of character name display or balloon display may be displayed. The balloon displays i1 and i2 may include a line display from the beginning of display.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 89 (b1) to (b20). 89 (b1) to 89 (b20) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. 89 (b1) to (b5) show the same states as the states shown in FIGS. 71 (1) to (5), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  FIG. 89 (b6) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is started. In the conversation notice display of this example, display of the character and the character name display is started simultaneously. In FIG. 89 (b6), 爺 g2 and character name display h1 are moved to the left. The character name display is different from the character, and the character name of the conversation notice display is displayed from the beginning. In this example, three square images are displayed in the horizontal direction below the character. The three square images are displayed in white, blue, and green, respectively. At the time shown in FIG. 89 (b6), the left square image and a part of the middle square image are displayed. The left square image is white and the middle square image is blue. These square images also move to the left along with the character.

  FIG. 89 (b7) shows a state where 爺 g2 and character name display h1 are moving to the left. At the time shown in FIG. 89 (b7), the left square image, the middle square image, and a part of the right square image are displayed. The left square image is blue, the middle square image is green, and the right square image is white. The display color of these square images changes while moving.

  FIG. 89 (b8) shows a state where 爺 g2, character name display h1, and balloon display i1 are moved to the left. At the time shown in FIG. 89 (b8), the left square image is green, the middle square image is white, and the right square image is blue.

  FIG. 89 (b9) shows a state in which 爺 g2 changes to 殿 g1 while 爺 g2 moves to the left. Tono g1, character name display h1, and balloon display i1 have moved to the left. At the time shown in FIG. 89 (b9), the left square image is white, the middle square image is blue, and the right square image is green.

  FIG. 89 (b10) shows a state in which the lord g1, the character name display h1, and the balloon display i1 are stopped. The gutter g1 is displayed surrounded by a white frame display. As described above, in the conversation preview display, a frame surrounding the character is displayed in any one of the three squares displayed during the character movement animation. The display colors in the frame surrounding the character are white, blue, and green in descending order of jackpot reliability.

  89 (b11) to (b13) show the same state as that shown in FIGS. 71 (20) to (22).

  FIG. 89 (b14) shows a state in which the conversation notice display is continued. In the conversation notice display of this example, display of the character and the character name display is started simultaneously. In FIG. 89 (b12), 爺 g2 and character name display h2 are moved to the left. The character name display h2 is displayed in blue. In this example, three square images are displayed in the horizontal direction below the character. The three square images are displayed in white, blue, and green, respectively. At the time shown in FIG. 89 (b14), the right square image and a part of the middle square image are displayed. The square image on the right is green and the square image in the middle is white. These square images also move to the right along with the character.

  FIG. 89 (b15) shows a state where 爺 g2 and character name display h2 are moving to the right. At the time shown in FIG. 89 (b7), the square image on the right, the square image in the middle, and a part of the square image on the left are displayed. The square image on the right is white, the square image in the middle is green, and the square image on the left is blue. The display color of these square images changes while moving.

  FIG. 89 (b16) shows a state where 爺 g2 and character name display h2 are moving to the right. Also, the balloon display i2 has started to be displayed. The balloon display i2 is displayed in blue. At the time shown in FIG. 89 (b16), the square image on the right is blue, the square image in the middle is white, and the square image on the left is green. The display color of these square images changes while moving.

  FIG. 89 (b17) shows a state where 爺 g2, character name display h2, and balloon display i2 are moving to the right. At the time shown in FIG. 89 (b17), the right square image is green, the middle square image is blue, and the left square image is white.

  FIG. 89 (b18) shows a state where 爺 g2, character name display h2, and balloon display i2 are stopped. Further, 爺 g2 is displayed surrounded by a blue frame display. The character name display h2 and the balloon display i2 are also displayed in blue. These display colors are white, blue, and green in descending order of jackpot reliability.

  89 (b19) and (b20) show the same state as that shown in FIGS. 71 (37) and (38). The three square images displayed during the character movement animation are display color candidate displays within a frame surrounded after the character stops. As in this example, display color candidates in a frame surrounded after the character stops may be displayed during the character movement animation.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 (a1) to (a5) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. 90 (a1) to (a5) show the movement animation of the character shown in FIGS. 71 (6) to (10).

  FIG. 90 (a1) shows a state in which the character movement animation is started.爺 g2 appears and moves to the left.

  FIG. 90 (a2) shows a state where a moving animation of the character is displayed.爺 g2 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 90 (a3) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed. During the movement of 爺 g2 to the left, lord g1 is displayed. The gutter g1 is displayed on the left side of the gutter g2, and a part of the gutter g1 overlaps with the gutter g2. Further, the gutter g1 is displayed with a transmittance of 50%, for example. Both lord g1 and 爺 g2 move to the left.

  FIG. 90 (a4) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed. A part of 爺 g2 is overlapped and displayed on g1. Further, 爺 g2 is displayed with a transmittance of 50%, for example. Both lord g1 and 爺 g2 move to the left.

  FIG. 90 (a5) shows a state in which the character movement animation is completed.爺 g2 is deleted at the end of the moving animation.

  As in this example, the number of characters may increase during the movement animation of the character. In this example, the number of characters is increased by one, but may be two or more. In addition, the character may be displayed with a transmittance of 1 to 99% during the movement animation of the character. Further, one character may be displayed so as to overlap the other characters.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 (b1) to (b5). 90 (b1) to (b5) show an example of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. 90 (b1) to (b5) show the movement animation of the character shown in FIGS. 71 (6) to (10).

  FIG. 90 (b1) shows a state in which the character movement animation is started. Tono g1 and 爺 g2 appear and move to the left. The gutter g1 is displayed on the left side of the gutter g2, and a part of the gutter g1 overlaps with the gutter g2.

  FIG. 90 (b2) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed. The lord g1 and 爺 g2 have moved to the left. A part of 爺 g2 is displayed so as to overlap with the gutter g1.

  FIG. 90 (b3) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed. The lord g1 and 爺 g2 have moved to the left. A part of the shrine g1 is displayed overlapping the gutter g2.

  FIG. 90 (a4) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed. The lord g1 and 爺 g2 have moved to the left. A part of 爺 g2 is displayed so as to overlap with the gutter g1.

  FIG. 90 (a5) shows a state in which the character movement animation is completed.爺 g2 is deleted at the end of the moving animation.

  As in this example, a plurality of characters may be displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation. The overlapping characters may change alternately between one character and another character.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 (c1) to (c5). 90 (c1) to (c5) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. 90 (c1) to (c5) show the movement animation of the character shown in FIGS. 71 (6) to (10).

  FIG. 90 (c1) shows a state in which the character movement animation is started. Tono g1, 爺 g2 and princess g3 appear and move to the left.

  FIG. 90 (c2) shows a state where a moving animation of the character is displayed. Princess g3 has been erased.

  FIG. 90 (c3) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed.爺 g2 is erased.

  FIG. 90 (c4) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed. The shrine g1 has moved to the left.

  FIG. 90 (c5) shows a state in which the character movement animation is completed.爺 g2 is deleted at the end of the moving animation.

  As in this example, a plurality of characters may be displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation, one character may be deleted one by one during the character movement animation, and one character may remain at the end.

  Next, an effect example of the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 90 (d1) to (d5). 90 (d1) to (d5) show examples of effects of the pachinko machine 100 in time series. 90 (d1) to (d5) show the moving animation of the character shown in FIGS. 71 (6) to (10).

  FIG. 90 (d1) shows a state in which the character movement animation is started. Tono g1, 爺 g2 and princess g3 appear and move to the left.

  FIG. 90 (d2) shows a state where a moving animation of the character is displayed. A chibi princess g4 is displayed in place of the lord g1, and a ninja g5 is displayed in place of the princess g3. Note that the character may be entirely changed from the beginning, or may be changed a plurality of times and the original character may be displayed again.

  FIG. 90 (d3) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed. Ninja g5 has been erased.

  FIG. 90 (d4) shows a state in which a character movement animation is displayed.爺 g2 is erased.

  FIG. 90 (d5) shows a state in which the character movement animation is completed. Princess Chibi g4 has stopped.

  As in this example, a plurality of characters are displayed from the beginning of the character movement animation, another character is displayed instead of one character during the character movement animation, then the characters are sequentially deleted, and the last One character may be left on the screen. A plurality of characters may be erased at a time.

  FIG. 90 (e) shows a table used when determining the conversation notice display to be executed in the effect control process (step S409) shown in FIG. For example, the conversation notice shown in FIG. 71 is “conversation notice 1”, and the conversation notice shown in FIG. 72 is “conversation notice 2”. The pachinko machine 100 can select and execute an arbitrary conversation notice from a plurality of conversation notices. Also, for example, a plurality of conversation notices such as “conversation notice 1” and “conversation notice 2” can be executed in combination. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 can display the serif notice display shown in FIG. 16 during the conversation notice display of this example, and displays the conversation notice display of this example and the serif notice display shown in FIG. 16 in combination. Is possible.

  In addition, the pachinko machine 100, when one of a plurality of effects not shown in “***” of the conversation effect determination table in FIG. After the balloon display of any one of FIGS. 16, 19 to 28, 30 to 34, 71 to 90, 412, and 425 to 445 is displayed as the first balloon display, As the balloon display, any one of the balloon displays shown in FIGS. 16, 19 to 28, 30 to 34, 71 to 90, 412, and 425 to 445 can be displayed. In addition, the pachinko machine 100, when one of a plurality of effects not shown in “***” of the conversation effect determination table in FIG. Balloon combining a plurality of balloon display elements shown in FIGS. 16, 19 to 28, 30 to 34, 71 to 90, 412, and 425 to 445 as the first balloon display. After displaying the display, as a second balloon display, a plurality of balloon displays of any one of FIGS. 16, 19 to 28, 30 to 34, 71 to 90, 412, and 425 to 445 are displayed. It is possible to display a balloon display that combines these elements. Further, the pachinko machine 100 has three or more as one conversation notice when one of a plurality of effects not shown in “***” in the conversation effect determination table of FIG. 90 (e) is selected. Can be displayed. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 displays one symbol variation display when any of a plurality of effects not shown in “***” in the conversation effect determination table of FIG. 90 (e) is selected. Two or more conversation notices can be displayed during the period. In addition, the pachinko machine 100 displays the display when the other execution display or error display described in the embodiment or the drawing or the execution condition of the movable body display operation is satisfied during the display of the balloon display or the execution of the conversation notice. Or the operation can be executed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a serif notice display shown in FIG. For example, the conversation notice display shown in FIG. 71 may be displayed while the conversation notice display is being displayed or within the same symbol variation display as the conversation notice display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can execute the preliminary notice effect during preparation shown in FIG. 35 and the timer notice effect shown in FIG. For example, a preliminary notice effect or a timer notice effect may be executed while the conversation notice display is being displayed or within the same symbol variation display as the conversation notice display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can execute the meter increase effect and the item provision effect shown in FIG. For example, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect may be executed while the conversation notice display is being displayed or within the same symbol variation display as the conversation notice display.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 71 is moved. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display in the effect display mode shown in FIG. For example, like the balloon display f4 shown in FIG. 153 (k), the balloons have different display sizes (small display size and large display size) from the balloon displays f1 and f2 shown in FIGS. 153 (b) and (e). A display may be displayed and a conversation notice display may be displayed. Note that the balloon display f1 shown in FIG. 153 corresponds to the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 71, and the balloon display f2 shown in FIG. 153 corresponds to the balloon display i2 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 71 is moved. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display in the effect display mode shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIGS. 153 (b) to 153 (f), in the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward, the movement distance of the balloon display f1 is longer than the movement distance of the balloon display f2. The conversation notice display may be displayed. Note that the balloon display f1 shown in FIG. 153 corresponds to the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 71, and the balloon display f2 shown in FIG. 153 corresponds to the balloon display i2 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 71 is moved. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display in the effect display mode shown in FIG. For example, the moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is terminated at the time shown in FIG. 153 (e), and the conversation announcement is made so that a part of the balloon display f2 is overlapped with another display. An indication may be displayed. Note that the balloon display f1 shown in FIG. 153 corresponds to the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 71, and the balloon display f2 shown in FIG. 153 corresponds to the balloon display i2 shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 may display at least one of the balloon display i1 or the balloon display i2 illustrated in FIG. 71 at a position where it overlaps with another display and displays the notice of conversation.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display a conversation notice display in which the character display in the balloon display i1 shown in FIG. 71 is moved. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display in the effect display mode shown in FIG. For example, as shown in FIGS. 153 (b) to (f), when the display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is started, a moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward is performed, and FIGS. As shown in (t), when the display of the balloon display f1, f2 ends, the balloon display f1, f2 starts moving and the display ends so as to perform a moving animation in which the balloon displays f1, f2 move toward the right. The moving direction of the balloon display may be different depending on the case. The pachinko machine 100 may change the moving direction at the start of display and at the end of display of at least one of the balloon display i1 and the balloon display i2 shown in FIG.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can display the conversation notice display shown in FIG. The pachinko machine 100 according to this example can execute the pseudo-continuous effects shown in (g) to (p) of FIG. For example, the pseudo-continuous effect may be executed while the conversation notice display is being displayed or within the same symbol variation display as the conversation notice display.

  Next, the characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 71 to 90 again.

(B1)
A gaming machine comprising display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first display (for example, a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 71 (19)),
One of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 71 (36)),
The first display is a display including a first line (for example, the morning weather is a “sunny mark”),
The first display is a display including a first character (for example, lord g1),
The second display is a display including a second line (for example, “daytime weather is“ cloudy mark ””),
The second display is a display including a second character (for example, 爺 g2),
The second display may be displayed after the first display is displayed,
The second character may be displayed before the display of the first display,
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming table having such a configuration, by notifying that the second display including the second character is displayed, the player expects that the second display may be displayed. May improve the interest of the player.

(B2)
The game stand according to B1 above,
A third character (for example, princess g3) may be displayed before the display of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming table having the above configuration, by performing a gusset notice to display a character that does not appear in the first display, it is possible to change the character when the first display is displayed and strike the player's intention. In some cases, the interest of the player can be improved.

(B3)
The game stand according to B2 above,
One of the plurality of displays is a third display (for example, a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 80 (39)),
The third display is a display including a third line (for example, the afternoon weather is “rain mark”),
The third display is a display including the third character (for example, princess g3),
The third display may be displayed after the second display is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 80 (39)).
A game stand characterized by that.

By making the third character appear in the third display instead of the second display, the player's intention can be struck, and the player's interest can be improved.

(B4)
The game stand according to B3 above,
One of the plurality of displays is a first conversation notice display (for example, a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 80 (1)),
One of the plurality of displays is a second conversation notice display (for example, a conversation notice display shown in FIG. 80 (39)),
The first conversation notice display is a display including the first display,
The first conversation notice display is a display including the second display,
The second conversation notice display is a display including the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, it is possible to strike the player's intention by making the third character appearing in the first conversation notice display appear in the second conversation notice display. May be improved.

(B5)
The game stand according to B4 above,
In a period during which one certain symbol variation display is displayed, the second conversation notice display may be displayed after the first conversation notice display is displayed (FIGS. 80 (1) to (39). )reference),
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, it is possible to strike the player's intention by making the third character appearing in the first conversation notice display appear in the second conversation notice display. May be improved.

(B6)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B5,
One display of the plurality of displays is a first animation display (for example, a character movement animation shown in FIGS. 71 (6) to (10)),
The first animation display is displayed before the display of the first display,
The first animation display is a display including a movement display of the character,
The first animation display is a display including the first character,
The first animation display is a display that may include the second character.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, since the second character is displayed in the first animation display, the player can expect that the first display may be performed by the second character. There are cases where it is possible.

(B7)
The game stand according to B6 above,
The first character and the second character are simultaneously displayed at a certain timing in the display period of the first animation display (see, for example, FIG. 90 (a3)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the player may be able to entertain and entertain which character the first display is displayed on.

(B8)
The game stand according to B6 or B7 above,
In the first animation display, the display start of the second character is before the display start of the first character.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, when the first display is displayed with the second character, the player may be able to entertain and entertain.

(B9)
The game stand according to any one of B6 to B8 above,
One of the plurality of displays is a second animation display (for example, a character movement animation shown in FIGS. 71 (23) to (27)).
The second animation display is displayed before the display of the second display,
The second animation display is a display including a movement display of the character,
The second animation display is a display including the second character,
The second animation display is a display that does not include the first character.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, there is a case where the character appearing in the first display can appear and the player can play without being awakened.

(B10)
The game table according to B9 above,
The number of characters in the second animation display is less than the number of characters in the first animation display,
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, there are cases where the player can be entertained by reducing the number of character candidates in the second display so as to increase the predictive accuracy of the character expected by the player.

(B11)
The game stand according to B9 or B10 above,
The first displayed character in the second animation display is different from the first character displayed in the first animation display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, there are cases where the player can be entertained by reducing the number of character candidates in the second display so as to increase the predictive accuracy of the character expected by the player.

(B12)
The game stand according to any one of B9 to B11 above,
The length of the display period of the first animation display is shorter than the length of the display period of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(B13)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B12,
The first display is a display including a first color (for example, white),
The second display is a display including a second color (for example, blue),
The reliability in the first color is different from the reliability in the second color,
A display including the second color may be displayed before the display of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having the configuration, the reliability of the second display can be expected by notifying the reliability of the second display, and the interest of the player is improved. May be possible.

(B14)
The game stand according to B13 above,
The reliability in the second color is higher than the reliability in the first color.
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, the player may be expected to display the second display by increasing the reliability of the second display to be displayed later.

(B15)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B14,
The first dialogue is displayed before the display of the first display (for example, the display shown in FIG. 71 (19)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having such a configuration, even if the second character is displayed before the display of the first display, the player can expect that the first character appears by the first line. There are cases where it is possible.

(B16)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B15 above,
The first display is a display including a first name (for example, “dono”),
The first name is the name of the first character,
The first name is displayed before the display of the first display,
A game stand characterized by that.

  According to the gaming machine having this configuration, even if the second character is displayed before the display of the first display, the player can expect that the first character appears by the first name. There are cases where you can.

(B17)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B16,
An operation means (for example, chance button 136) that can be operated by the player is provided,
The second display is displayed when the operation means is operated during the display of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(B18)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B17,
The second display is displayed after the first display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.

(B19)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B18,
A movable body (for example, a movable body k) movable to a position overlapping the display means;
The movable body may overlap at least one of the first display and the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(B20)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B19,
A certain display (for example, pattern display m) may overlap with at least one of the first display and the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.

(B21)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B20 above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

(B22)
The game stand according to any one of B1 to B20 above,
The game machine is a slot machine (for example, slot machines 1000 and 2000).
A game stand characterized by that.

The first display may be overlapped by another display, and the area where the first display is overlapped by the second animation is such that the first display is overlapped by the second display. It may be larger than the area to be wrapped. In this case, during the second animation, it is possible to make the second animation notice by greatly overlapping the first display, and during the second display, the relevance with the first display is ensured. There are cases where it is possible.
The area where the first dialogue is overlapped by the second animation may be larger than the area where the first dialogue is overlapped by the second display. In this case, during the second animation, the second animation can be noticed by greatly overlapping the first dialogue, and the relevance with the first dialogue is ensured while the second display is being displayed. There are cases where it is possible.
There may be cases where the dialogue notice dialogue does not match.
A plurality of characters may be displayed in turn in the first animation, and a certain character may be displayed a plurality of times in the first animation.
A plurality of characters may be displayed in turn in the first animation, and the order may make a round in the first animation.
A plurality of characters may be displayed in order in the first animation, and the order may be rewound at a certain timing in the first animation.
A plurality of characters may be displayed in turn in the first animation, and each character may animate in the first animation.
A plurality of characters may be displayed simultaneously in the first animation, and the number of characters may be increased or decreased in the first animation.
A plurality of characters may be displayed simultaneously in the first animation, and a certain character may change in the first animation.
A plurality of characters may be displayed at the same time in the first animation, and the first display may be displayed after the number of characters has decreased by one or more in the first animation.
You may transfer to the reach | attainment effect corresponding to a 2nd character after the display of a 2nd display.
A conversation notice display is performed for each pseudo-variable display, the first conversation notice display is performed in the first pseudo-variable display, and the second conversation is displayed in the second pseudo-variable display after the first pseudo-variable display. An advance notice may be displayed.
The movable body may operate for each pseudo-variable display, a part of the first conversation notice display may be overlapped with the movable body, and a part of the second conversation notice display may be overlapped with the movable body.
A part of the first conversation notice display may be overlapped with the timer notice display, and a part of the second conversation notice display may be overlapped with the timer notice display.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 91 to 115. It should be noted that the reference numerals shown in FIGS. 91 to 115 are used only in the description of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 91 to 115 in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, The reference numerals 91 to 115 are given priority.

<Item type>
Next, the types of items that the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment has will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 91 is a diagram illustrating an example of an item.

  Here, the item is a general term for benefits, equipment, functions, etc. that can be given to the player by the pachinko machine 100, and the items according to the present embodiment are largely classified into two types: custom items and non-custom items. Can be separated. The custom item is an item that allows the player to modify (customize) the display, sound, function, various probabilities, etc. of the pachinko machine according to his / her preference. Further, the non-custom item cannot be remodeled (customized) on the display, sound, function, various probabilities, etc. of the pachinko machine 100, but is a item that gives a predetermined profit to the player.

  The pachinko machine 100 is configured to give an item to a player when an item granting condition set for each item is satisfied. When a custom item is given, the player performs display operation of the pachinko machine 100 by performing setting operation of the given custom item using an effect customization screen (see FIG. 100 (q) or the like) described later. It is possible to modify (customize) the voice, function, various probabilities, etc. according to one's preference. In addition, when a non-custom item is given, the player can obtain a predetermined profit (for example, profit advantageous to the player such as a notice, a pre-read notice, a tutorial display, etc.) through the item.

  In the example shown in FIG. 91, for example, the item granting condition of item A (normal BGM custom 1), item B (normal BGM custom 2), or item C (normal BGM custom 3) is satisfied, and the item is given. In this case, it is possible to modify (customize) the background sound (BGM) in the normal game in the pachinko machine 100 according to his / her preference. In addition, when the item granting condition of item D (holding pedestal custom 1), item E (holding pedestal custom 2), or item F (holding pedestal custom 3) is established and the item is given, a pachinko machine A part of the display of the hold icon (hold display) in 100 (in this example, the image of the pedestal displayed under the hold icon) can be modified (customized) according to his / her preference.

  In addition, when the item granting condition of “heat” is established and the item is given, a notice 1 indicating that the result of the change is “hot (high expectation)” is performed, so that the player Can obtain information related to the winning result of the change (for example, information indicating that the winning result of the special figure variable game is a win or the possibility of winning is high). In addition, when the item granting condition of “Intense heat” is established and the item is assigned, the notice 2 indicating that the result of the change is “Intense heat (expectation is extremely high)” is performed. Thus, the player can obtain information related to the winning result of the change (for example, information indicating that the winning result of the special figure variable game is a big hit or a possibility of a big hit is high).

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect will be described. Here, the meter increase effect is an effect executed in association with the ball entering the meter increase entrance 227 described with reference to FIG. 3. In this embodiment, a predetermined number (in this example, (10) gauges (scales) are displayed, and one sphere is displayed on the meter increase entrance 227, and each meter gauge is turned off (reduced) one by one (details) Later).

    By executing such a meter increase effect, the player can determine the number of balls that have entered the meter increase entrance 227 and whether the meter gauge is full (predetermined in the meter increase entrance 227). It is possible to grasp whether or not several (10 in this example) balls have entered. The aspect of the meter increase effect is not limited to this example. For example, even if a ball is lit at the meter increase entrance 227 and a meter gauge is lit (increased) each time it enters, the display is increased. Good.

  Further, the item granting effect is an effect executed in relation to the item granting. In this embodiment, when the meter gauge is full (a predetermined number (in this example, the meter increasing entrance 227). In the case of 10 balls), it is determined that the item granting condition has been established, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is used to display that the item has been given, the type of the item, etc. (Details will be described later). By executing such an item provision effect, the player can grasp that the item has been imparted, the type of the item, and the like. Note that the item granting conditions and item granting effects are not limited to this example. For example, the number and type of items already acquired may be displayed, and the item must be special (for rare items). May be displayed.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 1>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to the first embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 92 is a diagram illustrating the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to the first embodiment in time series.

  Example 1 is an example in which an item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the symbol variation (the meter gauge is full). The game state shown in FIG. 92 (a) is a state in which a special figure variable game is being executed (during symbol change). Further, in this example, there is a special figure variable game held, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 variable game hold number is 3, and the special figure 2 variable game hold number is 3. In addition, it is indicated by a number that the holding number of the usual game is 0. In addition, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of hold of special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is 6 by displaying six hold icons PI. 9 gauges are turned off and one gauge GG is turned on, resulting in a meter increase effect that nine balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227 (one more ball is If you enter, the gauge will fill up). Further, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated that the custom item is not set by the player by performing the character display CD1 of “item not set”.

  During such symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 92 (b), when one sphere enters the meter increasing entrance 227, as shown in FIG. After executing the meter increase effect in which all ten gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 92 (d), the character display CD2 of “full” is performed instead of the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enters the meter increase entrance 227 to notify that the item granting condition is satisfied.

  The state shown in FIG. 92 (e) is a state in which the item provision effect is started. In the item granting effect according to the present example, an image CG simulating the appearance of the capsule is stepwise over the period shown in FIG. 92 (e) to FIG. While displaying in an enlarged manner, an animation is displayed that moves from the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the center, and as shown in FIG. 92 (h), information about the item appears from the inside of the image CG simulating a capsule. 92 (i), item information (in this example, item A) IN display and item description IT (in this example, description of item A) are displayed. (The contents are omitted in the figure).

  In this example, by displaying the display related to the item granting effect in front of the variation display of the decorative design, at least part of the display related to the item granting effect is at least one of the variable display of the decorative design. It overlaps with the part. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, so it is possible to accurately notify the player of information about the acquired item, and the visibility of the decorative pattern variation display is improved. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the effect.

  The state shown in FIG. 92 (j) is a state in which the button effect is started in addition to the item giving effect. In this example, the button for the period shown in FIG. 92 (j) to FIG. 92 (m) is triggered by the display of information related to the item (in this example, item name and item description) in the item granting effect. Produce.

  In this example, the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the item effect and the change display of the decorative design, so that at least a part of the display related to the button effect is related to the item grant effect. It overlaps at least a part of the display and the variable display of the decorative pattern. With such a configuration, the visibility of the button effect is not hindered, so it is possible to accurately notify the player of the operation by the operation means and the effective time thereof, and also the decorative display variation item and item There may be a case where the production effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the provided production.

  In this button effect, the appearance of a selection display SG that allows specific selection from a plurality of options (in this example, whether or not to set an acquired item) and the appearance of a chance button 136 that is valid for accepting operations are simulated. The button image BG1 including the displayed image and a character string that prompts the user to press the chance button 136 (PUSH in this example), and the left and right direction keys (not shown) that can accept operations are simulated. The button image BG2 and the operation effective period display TG including the meter display indicating the period during which the operation by the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136 and the left and right keys) is effective are displayed.

  When the “Yes” option is temporarily selected during such a button production, as shown in FIG. 92 (l), when a pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted, as shown in FIG. 92 (m). , By highlighting the “Yes” option, it is notified that the selection of “Yes” has been confirmed (the selection to set the acquired item has been made).

  The state shown in FIG. 92 (n) is a state in which the button effect is ended and the item granting effect is resumed. 92 (n) to FIG. 92 (p) in the item giving effect after restart, triggered by a specific selection from a plurality of options in this button effect (in this example, a selection for setting the acquired item). After displaying the animation including moving the image including the item name step by step from the center of the decorative design display device 208 to the lower display area over the period shown in FIG. By performing the character display CD3 of “setting item A” instead of the character display CD1, it is indicated that the item A is set as a custom item by the player.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 2>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to the second embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 93 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to the second embodiment in time series.

  The second embodiment is an example in which the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the SP (super) reach variation (the meter gauge is full). In the second embodiment, over the period shown in FIG. 93 (a) to FIG. 93 (b), the special figure fluctuation game develops from normal symbol fluctuation to SP reach fluctuation, and continues to FIG. 93 (c) to FIG. The SP reach effect is executed in addition to the SP reach variation over the period shown in FIG.

  During such SP reach fluctuation, as shown in FIG. 93 (d), when one sphere entered the meter increasing entrance 227, it was lit as shown in FIG. 93 (e). After executing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 93 (f), the character display CD2 of “full” is displayed instead of the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect to be performed, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enters the meter increase entrance 227 to notify that the item granting condition is satisfied.

  In addition, since subsequent meter increase production, item provision production, and production mode of button production are the same as the above-mentioned Example 1 except being in SP reach change, while attaching the same numerals in Drawing 93, Although description thereof is omitted, item granting is performed by displaying a display related to the item granting effect in front of the display and meter related to the SP reach effect over the period shown in FIGS. 93 (h) to (q). At least a part of the display related to the effect overlaps the display related to the SP reach effect and at least a part of the meter. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, so it is possible to accurately inform the player of information about the acquired item, and also the SP reach effect and meter visibility. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the effect.

  Moreover, over the period shown in FIG. 93 (k) to FIG. 93 (o), at least a part of the decorative symbol variation display is displayed by displaying the variation variation of the decoration symbol in front of the display related to the item provision effect. Is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the item granting effect. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the variation display of the decorative symbol is not hindered, the progress of the variation game can be accurately notified to the player, and the visibility of the item granting effect is temporarily provided. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by reducing the effect.

  Further, over the period shown in FIG. 93 (l) to FIG. 93 (o), the display related to the button effect and the variation display of the decorative pattern are displayed in front of the display related to the SP reach effect and the item grant effect. In this way, at least a part of the display related to the button effect and the variation display of the decorative design is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the SP reach effect or the item giving effect. With such a configuration, the visibility of decorative symbols and button effects are not hindered, so it is possible to accurately inform the player of the progress of the variable game, the operation by the operation means, and the effective time. In addition, there may be a case where the effect of the presentation can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the SP reach production or the item provision production.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 3>
Next, the meter increase production and the item provision production according to the third embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 94 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 3 in time series.

  The third embodiment is an example in which the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) during non-symbol fluctuation (during symbol stop display). The game state shown in FIG. 94 (a) is a state in which the special-game variable game is not being executed (during non-design change). In this example, there is no reserved special figure variable game, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 variable game hold number is 0, the special figure 2 variable game hold number is 0, The figure shows that the number of suspensions of the variable game is zero. Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon PI is not displayed, so that the number of hold of the special figure variable game (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) may be zero. As shown, nine gauges are turned off and one gauge GG is turned on, resulting in a meter increase effect that nine balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227 (one more ball has entered). If this is done, the gauge will fill up). Further, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated that the custom item is not set by the player by performing the character display CD1 of “item not set”.

  During such non-design fluctuations, as shown in FIG. 94 (b), when one sphere entered the meter increasing entrance 227, it was lit as shown in FIG. 94 (c). After executing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 94 (d), the character display CD2 of “full” is displayed instead of the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect to be performed, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enters the meter increase entrance 227 to notify that the item granting condition is satisfied.

  In addition, since subsequent meter increase production, item provision production, and production mode of button production are the same as those in Example 1 except that the SP reach is being changed, the same reference numerals are attached in FIG. Although description thereof is omitted, item display is performed by displaying the display related to the item providing effect over the period shown in FIGS. 94 (j) to (m) before the stop display of the decorative symbol. At least a part of the display related to the performance is overlapped with at least a part of the stop display of the decorative symbol. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, so it is possible to accurately inform the player of information about the acquired item, and the visibility of the stoppage of the decorative pattern change is also ensured. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the effect.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 4>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to the fourth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 95 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 4 in time series.

  In the fourth embodiment, the item granting effect is started during the symbol fluctuation based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the gauge gauge is full) while the symbol is not changing (while the symbol is stopped). This is an example. During non-design fluctuation shown in FIG. 95 (a), as shown in FIG. 95 (b), one sphere entered the meter increasing entrance 227, and in FIG. 95 (c), it was lit. A meter-increasing effect is performed to turn off one of the two gauges. Subsequently, during the non-design variation shown in FIG. 95 (c), as shown in FIG. 95 (d), based on the fact that the ball has entered the starting port (in this example, the first special figure starting port 230). In FIG. 95 (e), the symbol variation display is started.

  During such symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 95 (f), when one sphere enters the meter increasing entrance 227, as shown in the following FIG. 95 (g), it is lit 1 After performing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are turned off by turning off one gauge, as shown in FIG. 95 (h), the character display CD2 of “full” is performed instead of the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enters the meter increase entrance 227 to notify that the item granting condition is satisfied.

  The state shown in FIG. 95 (e) is a state in which the item provision effect is started. In the item granting effect according to the present example, an image CG imitating the appearance of the capsule is stepwise over the period shown in FIG. 95 (i) to FIG. 95 (k) when the item granting condition is satisfied. While displaying in an enlarged manner, an animation is displayed that moves from the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the center, and as shown in FIG. 95 (l), information about the item appears from the inside of the image CG simulating a capsule. After the animation display to be performed, as shown in FIG. 95 (m), the item image IG including the character display of “heat” is displayed. In this item image IG, the item granting condition of “heat” which is a non-custom item is satisfied, and the result of the special figure variable game is “hot (high expectation)” (the winning result of the special figure variable game is It is a win, or the possibility of a win is high).

  In this example, by displaying the display related to the item granting effect in front of the variation display of the decorative design, at least part of the display related to the item granting effect is at least one of the variable display of the decorative design. It overlaps with the part. With such a configuration, the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, so it is possible to accurately notify the player of information about the acquired item, and the visibility of the decorative pattern variation display is improved. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the effect.

  In the state shown in FIG. 95 (n), the item granting effect is ended and SP reach is started. In this way, if the display related to the item granting effect is erased before the start of SP reach, the visibility of SP reach will not be hindered. You may be able to inform.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 5>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to the fifth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 96 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to Example 5 in time series.

  In the fifth embodiment, the item granting condition is satisfied after shifting to the increasing mode (double mode) based on the ball entering the meter increasing entrance 227 during the symbol change in the state where the number of reserves is full. This is an example of starting the item granting effect based on what has been done (the meter gauge is full).

  The gaming state shown in FIG. 96 (a) is a state in which a special figure variable game is being executed (during symbol fluctuation). In this example, there is a special figure variable game on hold, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 variable game hold number is 3, the special figure 2 variable game hold number is 4, The figure shows that the number of suspensions of the variable game is zero. Also, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the number of reserved special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is 7 due to the display of seven hold icons PI. 6 gauges are extinguished and 4 gauges GG are turned on, and 6 balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227 by the meter increase effect (4 more balls have been added). If you enter, the gauge will fill up). Further, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated that the custom item is not set by the player by performing the character display CD1 of “item not set”.

  During such symbol variation, as shown in FIG. 96 (b), when one sphere enters the meter increasing entrance 227, it was lit as shown in FIG. 96 (c). A meter-increasing effect is performed to turn off one of the gauges. Subsequently, during the symbol variation shown in FIG. 96 (c), as shown in FIG. 96 (d), a ball enters the starting opening (in this example, the first special figure starting opening 230), and the following FIG. As shown in (e), in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated by a number that the number of reserved special figure 1 variable games has been increased from 3 to 4, and the decorative symbol display device 208 is displayed. In the lower display area, the number of holdings of special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable games and special figure 2 variable games) is increased from 7 to 8 due to the display of the eight hold icons PI. It has been shown.

  In this example, when the number of reserved special figure variable games (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) is full (8 in this example), the meter increase effect shifts to the increase mode. It is composed. Here, the increase mode of the meter increase production is a mode in which the gauge of the meter is advanced N times (N is a positive integer of 2 or more) every time one sphere enters the meter increase entrance 227. In this example, N is set to 2 and is referred to as a double mode.

  The state shown in FIG. 96 (f) is a state where the meter increase effect has shifted to the increase mode (double mode). In this increase mode, as shown in FIG. 96 (g), when one sphere enters the meter increase entrance 227, as shown in FIG. A meter increase effect is performed to turn off two of the gauges. Further, as shown in FIG. 96 (i), when one sphere enters the meter increasing entrance 227, as shown in FIG. 96 (j), one lit gauge is turned off. By doing so, while performing the meter increase production in which all 10 gauges are turned off, the right to erase another gauge can be carried over from the next game onward. The subsequent meter increase effects, item provision effects, and button effect effects are the same as in the first embodiment except that the meter increase effect is in the increase mode (double mode), and therefore the same in FIG. A reference numeral is attached and a description thereof is omitted.

  In this example, an example is shown in which the mode shifts to the increase mode (double mode) based on the ball entering the meter increase entrance 227 during the symbol change in the state where the number of reserves is full. When the above condition is satisfied, the mode may be shifted to the increase mode, and the increase mode is not limited to the double mode. Also, when the item granting conditions are met (when the meter gauge is full), the right to erase the meter gauge is carried over after the next game, but it is configured not to carry over. The number of games that can be carried over may be variable.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 6>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to the sixth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 97 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to Example 6 in time series.

    The sixth embodiment starts an item granting effect based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the meter gauge is full), and in this item granting effect, a plurality of items (this example) Then, two types of custom items) are given. In addition, since the production | generation aspect of a meter increase production, an item provision production, and a button production is the same as the said Example 1 except giving a several item in an item provision production, it attaches | subjects the same code | symbol in FIG. A description thereof will be omitted.

  In the item granting effect according to this example, as shown in FIG. 97 (h), after performing an animation display in which information about two types of items appears from the inside of the image CG simulating a capsule, FIG. 97 (i) As shown in the figure, item information (in this example, item A, item B) IN1, IN2 display and item description (in this example, description of item A and item B (contents in the figure) Is omitted)) IT1 and IT2 are displayed. In addition, the item provided in an item provision effect may be three or more types.

  The state shown in FIG. 97 (j) is a state in which the button effect is started in addition to the item giving effect. In the button production according to this example, a selection display SG that allows a specific selection from a plurality of options (in this example, selection of whether or not to set the acquired item A or item B) and operation reception are effective. Of the button image BG1 including an image simulating the appearance of the chance button 136 and a character string (PUSH in this example) that prompts the user to press the chance button 136, and the up / down / left / right direction keys (not shown), the acceptance of the operation is valid. A button image BG2 simulating the appearance of the left and right keys, and an operation valid period display TG including a meter display indicating a period during which the operation means (in this example, the chance button 136 and the left and right keys) is valid. .

  When the option of “item A” is temporarily selected during such a button production, as shown in FIG. 97 (l), when a pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted, as shown in FIG. 97 (m). In addition, the selection of “item A” is confirmed by highlighting the selection of “item A” (the selection of setting item A out of acquired item A and item B has been made). To do.

  The subsequent state shown in FIG. 97 (n) is a state in which the button effect is ended and the item provision effect is resumed. In the item giving effect after resumption, FIG. 97 is triggered by a specific selection from a plurality of options in the button effect (in this example, selection of setting item A out of acquired item A and item B). (N) to animation display for moving from the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower display area while gradually reducing the image including the item name over the period shown in FIG. After that, by performing the character display CD3 of “setting item A” instead of the character display CD1 of “item not set”, it is shown that the item A is set as a custom item by the player.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 7>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to Example 7 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 98 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 7 in time series.

  In the seventh embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the meter gauge is full), and in this item granting effect, a plurality of items (this example) In this example, a custom item and a non-custom item are given. In addition, since the meter increase effect, the item provision effect, and the effect form of the button effect are the same as those in the first embodiment except that a plurality of items are provided in the item provision effect, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. A description thereof will be omitted.

  In the item granting effect according to the present example, as shown in FIG. 98 (h), after performing animation display in which information regarding two types of items appears from the inside of the image CG simulating a capsule, FIG. 98 (i) As shown in the figure, as information on two types of items, an item name (in this example, item A) IN display and item description (in this example, item A description (contents omitted)) IT1 display, The item image IG including the character display of “heat” is displayed. Note that the non-custom item to be given in the item granting effect may be another non-custom item (for example, pending change, model descriptions 1 to 3, lost, etc.) described with reference to FIG.

  The state shown in FIG. 98 (j) is a state in which the button effect is started in addition to the item giving effect. Since the subsequent item provision effects and the effect aspects of the button effects are the same as in the first embodiment, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 98 and the description thereof is omitted.

<Demo screen>
Next, a demonstration screen in the pachinko machine 100 will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 99 is a transition diagram showing an example of screen transition in the pachinko machine 100, FIG. 100 is a diagram showing an example of screen transition in time series, and FIG. 101 is a menu screen where various menus are selected. It is the figure which showed an example of the screen transition at the time of being performed.

  The pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment displays at least a demonstration screen, a menu screen, a volume adjustment screen, a brightness adjustment screen, and a symbol variation display as shown in FIG. 99 (a) using the decorative symbol display device 208. It is configured to be possible. The demonstration screen is a screen that is displayed when a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) has been detected during non-design variation, and in this example, a menu screen, a volume adjustment screen, or a brightness adjustment. Displays a top menu screen that can transition to the screen. When the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is received during the display of the demonstration screen, the display of the menu screen from which various menus can be selected is started.

  Also, when the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the right key) or the third operation means (in this example, the left key) is accepted while the demonstration screen (or brightness adjustment screen) is displayed The display of the volume adjustment screen capable of adjusting the volume of the speaker 120 or the like is started, and the fourth operation means (in this example, the up key) or the fifth volume is displayed while the demonstration screen (or the volume adjustment screen) is displayed. When an operation of the operating means (down key in this example) is received, display of a brightness adjustment screen capable of adjusting the brightness of the various lamps 418, the decorative symbol display device 208, and the like is started.

  When the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the right key) is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, a meter display indicating that the volume has been increased by one level and that the volume has been increased by one level is displayed. When the operation of the third operation means (left key in this example) is accepted while the volume adjustment screen is displayed, the meter display indicates that the volume is lowered by one step and the volume is lowered by one step Execute. When the operation of the fourth operating means (in this example, the up key) is accepted while the brightness adjustment screen is displayed, the meter display is executed to increase the brightness by one level and suggest that the brightness has increased by one level. When the operation of the fifth operating means (in this example, the down key) is accepted during the display of the brightness adjustment screen, the meter display that indicates that the brightness has decreased by one step and the brightness has decreased by one step is executed. To do.

  Furthermore, when the passage of a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) is detected during the display of the menu screen, the volume adjustment screen, or the brightness adjustment screen, the display of the demo screen is started, and the symbol variation display is started. When the start condition is satisfied, the symbol variation display is started.

<Demo screen / menu screen>
FIG. 99B is a transition diagram showing an example of the transition of the menu screen. The menu screen according to this example is composed of four menus: production customization, mobile terminal linked service, initialization, and return to the demonstration screen. When each menu is selected, the production customization screen, mobile terminal It is configured to transition to the linked service screen, initialization confirmation screen, and demo screen.

  For example, in the example shown in FIG. 100, since the elapse of a predetermined time (30 seconds) is detected during the non-design variation shown in FIG. 100A, the demo screen (top menu screen) shown in FIG. Since the display is started and the operation of the fifth operating means (in this example, the lower key 161d) is accepted as shown in FIG. 100 (c) while the demonstration screen is displayed, FIG. 100 (d) The display of the brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, while the brightness adjustment screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 100 (e), the operation of the fifth operation means (in this example, the lower key 161d) is accepted. As shown in the figure, a meter display is performed to suggest that the brightness has decreased by one level and the brightness has decreased by one level, and as shown in FIG. 100 (g), the fourth operating means (in this example, the up key 161c). ) Is received, as shown in FIG. 100 (h), the meter display is executed to increase the luminance by one step and suggest that the luminance has increased by one step.

  Subsequently, during the display of the brightness adjustment screen, as shown in FIG. 100 (i), the operation of the second operation means (in this example, the right key 161a) is accepted. The display of the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. Further, as shown in FIG. 100 (k), since the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the right key 161a) is accepted during the display of the volume adjustment screen, it is shown in FIG. 100 (l). As described above, the meter display is executed to suggest that the volume is increased by one level and the volume is decreased by one level.

  Subsequently, since the passage of a predetermined time (30 seconds) is detected during the display of the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 100 (l), the display of the demonstration screen (top menu screen) shown in FIG. 100 (m) is started. During the display of the demonstration screen, as shown in FIG. 100 (n), the operation of the first operating means (in this example, the chance button 136) is accepted, so the menu screen shown in FIG. 100 (o). Is starting to display.

  Subsequently, as shown in FIG. 100 (p), the operation of the first operation means (in this example, the chance button 136) is accepted in a state where the effect customization menu is temporarily selected on this menu screen. The display of the production customization screen has started. In addition, during the display of the effect customization screen shown in FIG. 100 (q), as shown in FIG. 100 (r), the operation of the second operating means (in this example, the right key 161a) is accepted. As shown in FIG. 100 (t), the light display is moved to the next selectable item (in this example, item P), and the item P is temporarily selected, as shown in FIG. Since the operation of the means (the chance button 136 in this example) is accepted, the customization corresponding to the item P is validated, and the character display “setting item P” is displayed in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208. It is shown that the item P is set as a custom item by the player.

<Demo screen / Menu screen / Mobile device linked service screen>
FIG. 99C is a transition diagram showing an example of transition of the mobile terminal linked service screen. The mobile terminal linked service screen according to this example is composed of six menus: trial play, password input, data storage, data clear, quick start, and return to the menu screen.

  For example, when the menu of the mobile terminal linked service is selected on the menu screen shown in FIG. 101 (b), the mobile terminal linked service screen shown in FIG. 101 (b1) starts to be displayed. When the trial play menu is selected on the screen, the display of the trial play screen shown in FIG. 101 (b1-1) is started, and then new registration is selected on the trial play screen. First, display of the new registration screen shown in FIG. 101 (b1-2) is started.

  When the password input menu is selected on the mobile terminal link service screen shown in FIG. 101 (b2), the password shown in FIG. 101 (b2-1) and FIG. 101 (b2-1-1) is displayed. Display of the input screen is started, and when an incorrect password is entered on this password input screen, a screen for notifying the password input error as shown in FIG. 101 (b2-1-2) is displayed. On the other hand, when a correct password is input, display of a screen for notifying completion of password input as shown in FIG. 101 (b2-1-3) is started.

  When the data storage menu is selected on the mobile terminal link service screen shown in FIG. 101 (b3), display of the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 101 (b3-1) is started. When “Yes” is selected in FIG. 101, the display of the two-dimensional code display screen as shown in FIG. 101 (b3-2) is started, and “End” is selected during the display of the two-dimensional code display screen. In the case of a failure, the display of the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 101 (b3-2-1) is started.

  When the data clear menu is selected on the mobile terminal link service screen shown in FIG. 101 (b4), the confirmation screen as shown in FIG. 101 (b4-1) is displayed. When “Yes” is selected in FIG. 10, the display of the completion screen as shown in FIG. 101 (b 4-1-1) is started. When the quick start menu is selected on the mobile terminal link service screen shown in FIG. 101 (b5), the display of the start screen as shown in FIG. 101 (b5-1) is started. When the menu for returning to the menu screen is selected on the mobile terminal linked service screen shown in b6), the display of the top menu is started.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 8>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 8 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 102 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to the eighth embodiment in time series.

  The eighth embodiment is an example in which the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied while the demo screen (top menu screen) is displayed (the meter gauge is full). The gaming state shown in FIG. 102 (a) is a state in which a demo screen (top menu screen) is displayed during non-design variation. Also, in this example, there is no reserved special figure variable game, and in the display area on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 variable game hold number is 0, and the special figure 2 variable game hold number is 0. In addition, it is indicated by a number that the holding number of the usual game is 0. Further, in the display area below the decorative symbol display device 208, the hold icon PI is not displayed, so that the number of hold of the special figure variable game (special figure 1 variable game and special figure 2 variable game) may be zero. As shown, nine gauges are turned off and one gauge GG is turned on, resulting in a meter increase effect that nine balls have entered the meter increase entrance 227 (one more ball has entered). If this is done, the gauge will fill up). Further, in the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208, it is indicated that the custom item is not set by the player by performing the character display CD1 of “item not set”.

  When such a demonstration screen (top menu screen) is displayed, as shown in FIG. 102 (b), when one sphere enters the meter increasing entrance 227, as shown in FIG. 102 (c). After executing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are extinguished by extinguishing one lit gauge, as shown in FIG. 102 (d), “full tank” is substituted for the meter display. By executing the meter increase effect that performs the character display CD2, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enters the meter increase entrance 227, and notifies that the item granting condition is satisfied.

  The subsequent meter increase effects, item provision effects, and button effects effects are the same as those in the first embodiment except that the demonstration screen (top menu screen) is being displayed. Although the description is omitted, the display related to the item granting effect is displayed before the display related to the demo screen (top menu screen) over the period shown in FIGS. 102 (e) to (n). By displaying the above, at least a part of the display related to the item giving effect is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the demonstration effect (top menu screen). With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been given and information on the given item. There may be a case where the presentation effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the demonstration screen (top menu screen).

  In this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (l), but the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the demonstration screen (top menu screen). , Rather than operations related to the demo screen (top menu screen) (in this example, menu selection, volume adjustment, or brightness adjustment operation), operations related to button effects (in this example, setting of items acquired by the player) To receive the operation) for priority.

  Therefore, when an operation with the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (l) (the timing when the button effect is displayed in front of the demo screen (top menu screen)), the operation related to the button effect (this example) In FIG. 102 (n), the timing (the button menu is not displayed and the demonstration screen (top menu screen) is displayed. When the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing when () is displayed), an operation related to the demo screen (top menu screen) (in this example, an operation for menu selection, volume adjustment, or brightness adjustment) As a result of accepting, the corresponding processing is performed. It should be noted that even when the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 102 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed in front of the demonstration screen (top menu screen)), the demonstration screen (top menu screen) is displayed. ) (In this example, an operation for menu selection, volume adjustment, or brightness adjustment) may be accepted and the corresponding processing may be performed.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 9>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to the ninth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 103 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to the ninth embodiment in time series.

  In the ninth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied while the menu screen described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100 is displayed (the meter gauge is full). It is an example. Note that the meter increase effect, the item grant effect, and the button effect effect are the same as in Example 8 except that the menu screen is being displayed. Although explanation is omitted, in this example, by displaying the display related to the item grant effect over the period shown in FIG. 103 (e) to FIG. 103 (n) before the display related to the menu screen, At least a part of the display related to the item giving effect is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the menu screen. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been given and information on the given item. In some cases, the presentation effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the menu screen.

  Further, in this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 103 (l), but since the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the menu screen, the operation related to the menu screen is displayed. Prioritizes operations related to button effects (in this example, operations for setting items acquired by the player) over operations (in this example, operations for selecting menus such as mobile terminal linked services). It is configured as follows.

  Therefore, when an operation with the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 103 (l) (timing at which the button effect is displayed in front of the menu screen), an operation related to the button effect (in this example, the player) The operation shown in FIG. 103 (n) is performed (the timing at which the menu screen is displayed without the button effect). When an operation with the chance button 136 is accepted, an operation related to the menu screen (in this example, an operation for performing menu selection such as a mobile terminal link service) is accepted, and corresponding processing is performed. Even when the operation by the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 103 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed in front of the menu screen), the operation related to the menu screen (in this example, A corresponding process may be performed on the assumption that an operation for selecting a menu of a mobile terminal linked service or the like has been received.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 10>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to the tenth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 104 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to Example 10 in time series.

  In the tenth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the volume adjustment screen described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100 is displayed. This is an example. In addition, since the meter increase effect, the item giving effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those in Example 8 except that the volume adjustment is being displayed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although explanation is omitted, in this example, by displaying the display related to the item granting effect in front of the display related to the volume adjustment over the period shown in FIGS. 104 (e) to (n), At least a part of the display related to the item giving effect is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the volume adjustment. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been given and information on the given item. There may be a case where the production effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the volume adjustment.

  In this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (l). However, since the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the display related to the volume adjustment, An operation related to button effects (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by a player) is given priority over an operation (in this example, an operation for adjusting the volume). .

  Therefore, when an operation with the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed before the volume adjustment), an operation related to the button effect (in this example, the player) The operation shown in FIG. 104 (n) is performed (the timing at which the volume adjustment is displayed without displaying the button effect). When an operation with the chance button 136 is accepted, an operation related to volume adjustment (in this example, an operation for adjusting the volume) is accepted and corresponding processing is performed. Note that even when an operation with the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 104 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed before the volume adjustment), the operation related to the volume adjustment (in this example, A corresponding process may be performed on the assumption that the operation for adjusting the volume) has been received.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 11>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 11 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 105 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to Example 11 in time series.

  Example 11 starts an item granting effect based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the two-dimensional code display screen described with reference to FIG. 101 is being displayed. It is an example. The meter increase effect, item provision effect, and button effect effects are the same as in Example 8 except that the two-dimensional code display screen is being displayed. In addition, although description thereof is omitted, in this example, the display related to the item granting effect is displayed before the display related to the two-dimensional code display screen over the period shown in FIGS. 105 (g) to (n). By displaying the above, at least a part of the display related to the item granting effect is overlapped with at least a part of the two-dimensional code. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been given and information on the given item. There may be a case where the rendering effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the two-dimensional code.

  In this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (l), but since the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code, the operation related to the two-dimensional code is performed. Prioritize operations related to button effects (in this example, operations for setting items acquired by the player) over operations (in this example, operations for ending the two-dimensional code display screen). It is composed.

  Therefore, when an operation with the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed before the two-dimensional code), an operation related to the button effect (in this example, a game) The corresponding process is performed on the assumption that the user has received the operation for setting the item acquired, but the timing shown in FIG. 105 (n) (the button effect is not displayed and the two-dimensional code is displayed) When an operation with the chance button 136 is received at (timing), a corresponding process is performed assuming that an operation related to the two-dimensional code (in this example, an operation for ending the two-dimensional code display screen) is received. Note that even when an operation with the chance button 136 is received at the timing shown in FIG. 105 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed in front of the two-dimensional code display screen), In this example, it may be configured to perform a corresponding process on the assumption that an operation for ending the two-dimensional code display screen is received.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 12>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to the twelfth embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 106 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to Example 12 in time series.

  Example 12 starts the item granting effect based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100 is displayed. This is an example of setting an item using an effect customization screen. In addition, since the meter increase effect, the item grant effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as in the above-described embodiment 8 except that the effect customization screen is being displayed, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. Although explanation thereof is omitted, in this example, the display related to the item granting effect is displayed before the display related to the effect customization screen over the period shown in FIGS. 106 (e) to (o). Thus, at least a part of the display related to the item giving effect is overlapped with at least a part of the effect customization screen. With such a configuration, since the visibility of the item granting effect is not hindered, it is possible to accurately inform the player that the item has been given and information on the given item. There may be a case where the production effect can be enhanced by temporarily reducing the visibility of the production customization screen.

  In this example, the operation by the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (l). However, since the display related to the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customize screen, the operation related to the effect customize screen is displayed. An operation related to a button effect (in this example, an operation for setting an item acquired by a player) is given priority over an operation (in this example, an operation for determining an item to be set on the effect customization screen). It is configured.

  Therefore, when an operation with the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customization screen), an operation related to the button effect (in this example, a game) 106 (n), the timing (button production is not displayed but the production customization screen is displayed). When an operation with the chance button 136 is received at (timing), an operation related to the effect customization screen (in this example, an operation for determining an item to be set on the effect customization screen) is received, and corresponding processing is performed. It should be noted that even when an operation with the chance button 136 is accepted at the timing shown in FIG. 106 (l) (the timing at which the button effect is displayed in front of the effect customization screen), the operation related to the effect customization screen (this example) Then, on the effect customization screen, it may be configured to perform a corresponding process on the assumption that an operation for determining an item to be set is accepted.

  Further, in this example, in the state where the “Yes” option is temporarily selected during the button production, as shown in FIG. 106 (l), the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted and as shown in FIG. 106 (m). In addition, even when the “Yes” option is highlighted, the process of setting the acquired item immediately is not performed, and the menu screen is displayed again as shown in FIGS. 106 (q) to (u). When the mobile terminal linked service screen is selected and the effect customization screen is displayed as shown in FIG. 106 (v), the item acquired in the item granting effect (item A in this example) can be set. It is configured as follows.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 13>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 13 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 107 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 13 in time series.

  In the thirteenth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100 is displayed. This is an example in which an item is immediately set by an operation in a button effect.

  Since the meter increasing effect, the item giving effect, and the button effect are the same as in Example 12, the same reference numerals are given in FIG. 107 and the description thereof is omitted. In this example, FIG. 107) When the button “Yes” is temporarily selected during the button production shown in FIG. 10 (k) and the chance button 136 is pressed as shown in FIG. As shown in (m), the “Yes” option is highlighted to notify that the selection of “Yes” is confirmed (the selection to set the acquired item A has been made). When an item is acquired while the effect customization screen is displayed, as shown in FIG. 107 (i), item A is additionally displayed as a selectable item on the effect customization screen being displayed.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 14>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 14 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 108 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 14 in time series.

  In the fourteenth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100 is displayed. After that, the point of setting the item using the effect customization screen is the same as that of the twelfth embodiment described with reference to FIG. 106, but in this example, the effect customization screen is displayed in front of the display related to the item grant effect. By displaying, at least a part of the effect customization screen is overlapped with at least a part of the display related to the item giving effect (in this example, all gauges of the meter).

  With such a configuration, the visibility of the effect customization effect is not hindered, so it is possible to accurately notify the player of information about the acquired item, and the visibility of the item granting effect is temporarily In some cases, the effect can be enhanced. In addition, you may comprise so that at least one part of an effect customization screen may not overlap with at least one part of the display regarding an item provision effect.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 15>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 15 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 109 is a diagram showing the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to Example 15 in time series.

  In the fifteenth embodiment, the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied (the meter gauge is full) while the effect customization screen described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100 is displayed. This is an example in which the item giving effect is continued even when the symbol variation display is started during the display of the effect customization screen. In addition, since the meter increase effect, the item grant effect, and the effect mode of the button effect are the same as those in the above-described Example 12 except that the effect customization screen is being displayed, the same reference numerals in FIG. The description is omitted.

  In this example, during the item granting effect shown in FIG. 109 (k), as shown in FIG. 109 (l), a ball enters the starting opening (in this example, the first special figure starting opening 230). In FIG. 109 (m), the symbol variation display is started, but the item giving effect is continued. With such a configuration, the item granting effect is not stopped at an unexpected timing of the player, and the player's willingness to play is not hindered.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 16>
Next, the meter increase effect and the item provision effect according to Example 16 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 16 in time series.

  Example 16 is that the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the meter gauge is full). Although it is the same as 1, in this example, an item is displayed across two fluctuations of the fluctuation and the next fluctuation.

  Specifically, after the change ends during execution of the item granting effect shown in FIG. 110 (k) and the symbol is stopped and displayed, as shown in FIG. Based on this, a new floating game has started. Then, the button effect is continued even in the next symbol variation following the symbol variation in which the item granting condition is satisfied, and the button effect is generated based on the fact that the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted as shown in FIG. 110 (m). , The item granting effect is resumed, and the items acquired by the player are displayed. If the item can be displayed across multiple symbol variations as in this example, the item granting effect will not be interrupted with the stop or start of symbol variation, and the player's willingness to play Can be sustained. In addition, the symbol fluctuation | variation which continues the display of an item is not limited to 2 times, 3 times or more may be sufficient and it may not be a continuous symbol fluctuation | variation.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 17>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 17 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 111 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 17 in time series.

  Example 17 is that the item granting effect is started based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the meter gauge is full). 1, but in this example, it is possible to detect the entry of the ball into the meter increase entrance 227 even during the execution of the item granting effect, and when the entry of the ball is detected, the meter increasing effect is executed. ing.

  Specifically, during the execution of the item granting effect shown in FIG. 110 (j), as shown in FIG. 110 (k), since the entry of the ball to the meter increasing entrance 227 is detected, the following FIG. 110 (l As shown in (2), during the display of the item by the item granting effect, the meter increasing effect for advancing the meter gauge is started. If the meter can be increased during the display of items as in this example, the player's willingness to play may be further enhanced. In addition to allowing the meter to increase while the item is displayed, the item granting condition may be met (the meter gauge may be full) In this case, you may comprise so that the right of item provision can be carried over after the next game.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Example 18>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 18 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 112 is a diagram illustrating a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Example 18 in time series.

  In Example 18, a mini game is executed based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied during the symbol change (the meter gauge is full), and the item granting effect is started after the mini game ends. To do. FIG. 112 (e) shows a state in which the mini game is started. In this example, the display area for displaying the gauge of the meter is enlarged, and the Amida lottery is executed in the enlarged display area. Needless to say, the mini game may be another type of game.

  The start position of the character in the Amida lottery in this example may be a predetermined position, may be determined by lottery, may be determined based on the player's selection operation, or the player's selection operation Regardless, the result may be predetermined. In addition, the sign of “X” in the result of Amidaku is out of place, the image imitating the capsule means that the item has been acquired, and the letter E means that the item E has been acquired. Is configured to notify the item to be acquired. If the pattern or color of the image imitating the capsule is different from the usual, the appearance rate of a specific item may be high, and there may be multiple types of mini games. Depending on the type of mini game, Ease of acquisition and appearance rate of specific items may be different.

  In this example, since the result of the mini game (Amidakuji) was an image simulating a capsule, an item giving effect using the image is started, and items acquired by the player are displayed. With the configuration as in this example, there are cases where the player can be entertained without getting bored of the period from when the item granting condition is satisfied until the item is displayed.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / variation 1>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Modification 1 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 113 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Modification 1 in time series.

  In the above embodiment, “the entry of the ball to the meter increasing entrance 227” is the trigger for the meter increasing production, but the present invention is not limited to this, and “the meter increasing entrance 227 is entered. Conditions other than “entrance of the ball” may be used as triggers for the meter increase effect. Therefore, for example, as shown in FIGS. 113 (a) to (b), the meter increases when a ball enters the starting port (in this example, the first special figure starting port 230) during non-design variation. An effect may be executed, and, as shown in FIGS. 113 (c) to 113 (e), a ball enters the starting port (in this example, the first special figure starting port 230) during symbol variation. In this case, a meter increase effect may be executed.

  Also, as shown in FIGS. 113 (e) to (g), the hold icon PI1 in the first display mode is changed to the hold icon PI2 in the second display mode based on the prefetch result of the variable game. In this case, the meter increase effect may be executed, or as shown in FIGS. 113 (i) to (l), the meter increase effect may be executed when the pseudo-ream is executed.

  Further, as shown in FIGS. 113 (m) to (o), even if the meter increase effect is executed when an operation by the operating means (in this example, the chance button 136) is accepted during the execution of the button effect. Alternatively, as shown in FIG. 113 (p), the meter increase effect may be executed when the reach is executed, or when the SP reach or SP reach effect is executed as shown in FIG. 113 (q). The meter increase effect may be executed when the notice display (in this example, the display of the princess character image) is executed as shown in FIG. 113 (r). .

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Modification 2>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Modification 2 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 114 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Modification 2 in time series.

  The point of starting the item granting effect based on the fact that the item granting condition is satisfied while the volume adjustment screen described with reference to FIGS. 99 and 100 is displayed (the meter gauge is full) is that FIG. In this example, the operation related to the volume adjustment (in this example, even if the display related to the volume adjustment is displayed in front of the display related to the button effect). The operation related to the button effect (in this example, the operation for setting the item acquired by the player) is received with priority over the operation for adjusting the volume.

  More specifically, when one sphere enters the meter increase entrance 227 as shown in FIG. 114 (d) while the volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 114 (c) is being displayed, the following FIG. 114 ( As shown in FIG. 114 (f), after performing the meter increase effect in which all 10 gauges are extinguished by turning off one lit gauge as shown in FIG. Instead, by executing the meter increase effect that performs the character display CD2 of “full tank”, a predetermined number (10 in this example) of balls enters the meter increase entrance 227, and the item granting condition is satisfied. Is notified.

  The state shown in FIG. 114 (g) is a state in which the item provision effect is started. In the item granting effect according to the present example, an image CG simulating the appearance of the capsule is stepwise over the period shown in FIG. 114 (g) to FIG. 114 (i) when the item granting condition is satisfied. While displaying in an enlarged manner, an animation display is performed in which the display is moved from the lower display area of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the center. As shown in FIG. 114 (k), item information (in this example, item A) IN display and item description IT (in this example, description of item A) are displayed. (Contents omitted)) is displayed.

  In this example, the display related to the item granting effect is displayed at the back side of the display of the volume control screen, so that at least part of the display of the volume control screen is at least part of the display related to the item granting effect. It overlaps with a part. With such a configuration, the visibility of the volume adjustment screen is not hindered, so it is possible to accurately notify the player of information related to the volume adjustment, and the visibility of the item provision effect is temporarily provided. In some cases, the effect can be enhanced by lowering.

  Further, in this example, the display related to the volume adjustment is displayed in front of the display related to the button effect, but as shown in FIG. 114 (n), the second operation means (in this example, the right key 161a). When the operation is received, the display for switching between “Yes” and “No” during the button production is executed without performing the process of raising the volume by one step, and the third operation means (this example) Then, when the operation of the left key 161b) is received, a display for switching between “Yes” and “No” temporarily selected during the button production is executed without executing the process of lowering the volume by one step.

  In addition, in the state where the “Yes” option is temporarily selected during the button production, as shown in FIG. 114 (r), when the pressing operation of the chance button 136 is accepted, after the button presentation is ended, FIG. s) to animation display for moving from the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 to the lower display area while displaying the item name in a reduced scale over the period shown in FIG. In place of the character display CD1 “item not set”, the character display CD3 “item A is being set” is performed.

<Meter increase effect and item grant effect / Modification 3>
Next, a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Modification 3 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 115 is a diagram showing a meter increase effect and an item provision effect according to Modification 3 in time series.

  In the above embodiment, “entrance of the ball to the meter increasing entrance 227” is the condition for establishing the item provision, but the present invention is not limited to this, and “the meter increasing entrance 227 is entered. Conditions other than “entrance of a ball” may be used as the conditions for establishing item grant. Accordingly, for example, as shown in FIGS. 115A to 115C, the cumulative number of balls that have entered the variable winning opening 234 (for example, the cumulative number of balls acquired during the big hit game) is a predetermined number (in this example, When the number exceeds 10,000 balls, an item may be given, or when a specific operation is received by the operation means as shown in FIGS. Items may be assigned to the keys 161c → right key 161a → down key 161d → left key 161b.

  As described above, the gaming machine (for example, the pachinko machine 100 shown in FIG. 1) according to the present embodiment is a gaming machine provided with display means (for example, the decorative symbol display device 208 shown in FIG. 3). The display means is means capable of displaying an effect setting display (for example, an effect customization screen shown in FIG. 106, a volume adjustment screen shown in FIG. 104, and a brightness adjustment screen shown in FIG. 100). A display including one or a plurality of settings (for example, an item setting shown in FIG. 106, a volume setting shown in FIG. 103, and a luminance setting shown in FIG. 100). In addition to the effect setting display in the middle, a display (hereinafter referred to as “first display”) including one setting (for example, setting of item A shown in FIGS. 104 and 106). Indication Can be displayed on the display means displays the (item name display and item description IT indication of IN)) suggesting that granted the item, it is the amusement machine characterized by.

  According to the gaming machine according to the present embodiment, during the display of the effect setting display, the first display including one setting can be displayed separately from the effect setting display being displayed. In some cases, the player can be entertained even during display.

  In addition, there is provided count display means (for example, a gauge GG of the meter shown in FIG. 92 (a) or the like) capable of displaying a display in which the number or quantity increases or decreases, and the count display means displays a certain count display (hereinafter referred to as a count display). For example, a display in which all 10 gauges are turned off as shown in Fig. 92 (c), or a character display CD2 of "full" shown in Fig. 92 (d)). In this case, the first display may be displayed on the display unit, and the display by the count display unit may be a display that can be changed during a non-design variation display period.

  With such a configuration, the display of the count display means changes during the non-symbol variation display, so there are cases where the player can be made to play without getting bored. In addition, there is a case where the player is not aroused even if the floating game is no longer held.

  In addition, when the display of the count display means becomes the first count display, a second display different from the first display is displayed on the display means. (For example, display of the item image IG including the character display of “heat” shown in FIG. 95 (m), etc.).

  With such a configuration, it may be possible to improve the interest of the player by displaying a display other than the display including the setting.

  Further, when the display of the count display means becomes the first count display, the first display is displayed on the display means after the mini game (for example, the mini game shown in FIG. 112) is executed. May be.

  With such a configuration, the player may be able to be entertained for a period until the first display is displayed.

  Further, an operation means (for example, a chance button 136 shown in FIG. 92 (l)) is provided, and the display means displays a display related to the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “first operation”) during the display of the first display. For example, it is a means capable of displaying the button effect shown in FIG. 92 (j) and the like, and the first operation display is an effective period display (for example, FIG. 92 (j) and the like). The display including the operation valid period display TG) shown in FIG.

  With such a configuration, when the player can participate by operating the operation means even during the display of the first display, can increase the degree of intervention of the player, and can improve the interest of the player There is.

  Further, when the symbol variation display is started during the display of the effect setting display and the first display, the effect setting display may be deleted.

  With such a configuration, the first display can be displayed longer than the effect setting display to appeal to the player, and the player's willingness to play may be enhanced.

  In addition, when the first display is displayed on the display unit, settings that can be selected in the effect setting display (for example, item settings shown in FIG. 106) may be increased.

  With such a configuration, there are cases where the number of options by the player can be increased and the player's willingness to play can be increased.

  In addition, as shown in FIGS. 115 (o) to (r), when a ball enters a predetermined game area during display of the effect setting display (for example, the effect customization screen) (for example, for meter increase) When the ball enters the entrance, or when the ball enters the start opening or the winning opening), the first display (for example, the player selects item A separately from the effect setting display being displayed). Display indicating that it has been acquired) can be displayed on the display means, and a setting corresponding to the first display (for example, item A) is added to one or a plurality of settings in the effect setting display It may be displayable on the display means.

  Note that the configuration of the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to the configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the above-described embodiment. For example, the symbol variation starts during the display of the item that appears during the non-design variation. Even in this case, it is not necessary to delete the item. Further, even when the change of the symbol starts while displaying the custom display and the item, only the custom display may be deleted without deleting the item. Moreover, even if the meter is difficult to visually recognize (or cannot be visually recognized) during the display of the custom display, an item may appear when the meter is full. In addition, the item may appear after the meter becomes full during non-symbol fluctuation.

  In addition, an item indicating reliability may appear after a meter that has been partially stored during non-design variation becomes full during the design variation. In addition, the item indicating the reliability (heat, intense heat, etc.) may be easier to appear when the symbol changes than when the symbol is not changing, or may not appear when the symbol is changed. Further, a button effective meter (operation effective period display) may be displayed during non-design variation. In addition, you can cancel the display of the demo screen (or without canceling), display the item, cancel the menu display (or without canceling), display the item, The item may be displayed by canceling the display of the two-dimensional code (or without canceling).

  Moreover, a meter may accumulate | store by opportunity other than ball passing. Further, there may be an increase mode in which the amount of increase of the meter is increased from the normal time. In this case, it may be configured to shift to the increase mode when the reserve is full or the electric support is completed. Also, the item may appear after the mini game when the meter is full. Moreover, you may perform the effect that an item appears even during SP reach. Further, the reach button production period may overlap with the customizable button production period, and the button may be effective for the other production rather than one. Further, the appearing item may change depending on the gaming state, each stage, or timing.

  In addition, when an item appears while the customization screen is displayed, the display of “?” On the customization screen may be changed (additional items are displayed), or the customization screen is displayed again without changing In addition, the display of “?” On the customization screen may be changed. Further, a notice of an appearing item may be given, and if the color of the meter is different from the normal time, a specific item may easily appear, or the color may be changed over time. In addition, the items may be displayed over a plurality of variations, the meter may be stored during the display of the items, or the meter may be filled up with one kind of trigger.

  Other display devices other than the decorative symbol display device 208 (for example, other liquid crystal display devices, one or a plurality of single-color or full-color LEDs, dot matrix display devices, 7-segment display devices, organic EL (ElectroLuminescence) display devices, Meter display may be performed only with a reel (drum) display device, leaf display device, plasma display, or projector), or meter display may be performed with the decorative symbol display device 208 and another display device (for example, When the ball enters the meter increasing entrance 227, the meter display of the decorative design display device 208 and the meter display of the other display device are increased by the same increase amount). It is good also as a count display means which performs a meter display.

  Further, the gaming machine according to the present invention is not limited to a pachinko machine, for example, a plurality of reels provided with a plurality of types of symbols, a start lever for instructing rotation of the reels, and each reel. , A stop button for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means for determining whether or not an internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is won by lottery, and reel rotation based on the lottery result of the lottery means Whether the symbol combination displayed by the reel stop control means for performing stop control related to the stop of the reel and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means is a symbol combination determined in advance corresponding to the winning combination internally A determination means for determining whether or not the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, and a payout control unit that performs a game medium payout process for paying out a game medium corresponding to the predetermined winning mode; It is also suitable, such as a slot machine equipped.

  In addition, the gaming machine according to the present invention can be applied to an enclosed gaming machine. Here, the “enclosed game machine” is one that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in the game machine. In addition, the main control unit, the first sub control unit, and the second sub control unit may be configured as a single chip, or the main control unit and the first sub control unit may be configured to allow bidirectional communication. Good. Moreover, while enabling bidirectional communication between the main control unit and the first sub control unit, communication from the first sub control unit to the second sub control unit may be one-way communication.

  Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 169. 116 to 169 are used only in the description of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 116 to 169 in principle, and even if the overlapping reference numerals are shown in other drawings, The reference numerals 116 to 169 are prioritized.

  Next, an effect example using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 will be described with reference to FIGS. 116 to 118.

  FIG. 116 shows staged examples using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 in stages.

  FIG. 116 (a) shows a state where the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps the movable body 2. For this reason, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies that can emit light in various light emission patterns according to production. FIG. 116 (a) shows a state where the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 are not emitting light. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying a variation icon display, and a variation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the display area for the variation icon display. To the left of the display area of the variable icon display is a special figure 1 hold icon display area. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a hold icon ab1 in the merchant character form, and hold icons ab2 and ab3 in the default form are displayed. It is displayed. The hold icon in the form of a merchant character is a hold icon used as a prefetch notice. The right side of the display area of the variable icon display is a special figure 2 hold icon display area, and a hold icon ac1 of a default mode is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area. In FIGS. 116 to 118, when the light emitting means provided in the movable bodies 1 and 2 emit light, the light emitting means is shown in light black, and when the light emitting means does not emit light, it is shown in white.

  The display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the foremost layer, a ball removal error display h111 with a character string “please remove the ball” is displayed. Between the layer in which the decorative symbol is displayed and the layer in which the ball removal error display h111 is displayed, a button notice display imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indicating the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge. A display h112, and a notice display (or tutorial display) h113 by a balloon of “Tonochi” character and a “chance when reaching reach!” H113 are displayed.

  FIG. 116 (b) following FIG. 116 (a) shows a state in which the light emitting units emit light while the movable bodies 1 and 2 remain in the initial position.

  FIG. 116 (c) following FIG. 116 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 1 moves from the initial position to approximately the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable body 2 is positioned at the initial position. Yes. Since the movable body 1 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 is a part of the decorative symbol, the number of reserved symbols aa5, the portion of the fourth symbol aa6 of the common symbol, and the button notice display h110. , Part of the ball removal error display h111, operation expiration date display h112, and part of the advance notice display (or tutorial display) h113. Note that the movable body 1 may be positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 1 may overlap with other displays, or any one of these displays. There may be cases where the display does not overlap.

  FIG. 116 (d) following FIG. 116 (c) shows a state where the movable body 1 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation is being performed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 rotates about 30 ° clockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 rotates about 30 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable portion 14 moves downward.

  116 (e) following FIG. 116 (d) shows a state in which the movable body 1 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation is completed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 rotates about 120 ° clockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 rotates about 120 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable portion 14 moves downward. As the movable body 1 is deformed, a part of the hold icons ab1 to ab3, a part of the change icon ad1, a part of the hold icon ac1, another part of the button notice display h110, and a ball removal error display The other part of h111 is overlapped by the movable body 1. The movable body 1 may be deformed at a position approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 1 may overlap with other displays. There may be cases where there is no overlap in the display.

  In FIG. 116 (f) following FIG. 116 (e), the movable body 1 moves to the initial position after performing the operation of returning to the shape before deformation, and the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 are turned off. Indicates the state.

  Thus, in this production example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 that are positioned in the front-rear direction in the initial position, only the movable body 1 on the front side falls forward of the decorative symbol display device 208. This is an example in which a deforming operation is performed. This production example may be performed as a pre-reading notice or as a notice of the change. When the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed.

  FIG. 117 shows step-by-step examples using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 described in FIGS. 232 to 236 and the like.

  FIG. 117A shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps the movable body 2. For this reason, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies that can emit light in various light emission patterns according to production. FIG. 117A shows a state where the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 are not emitting light. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying a variation icon display, and a variation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the display area for the variation icon display. To the left of the display area of the variable icon display is a special figure 1 hold icon display area. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a hold icon ab1 in the merchant character form, and hold icons ab2 and ab3 in the default form are displayed. It is displayed. The hold icon in the form of a merchant character is a hold icon used as a prefetch notice. The right side of the display area of the variable icon display is a special figure 2 hold icon display area, and a hold icon ac1 of a default mode is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area.

  The display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the foremost layer, a ball removal error display h111 with a character string “please remove the ball” is displayed. Between the layer in which the decorative symbol is displayed and the layer in which the ball removal error display h111 is displayed, a button notice display imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indicating the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge. A display h112, and a notice display (or tutorial display) h113 by a balloon of “Tonochi” character and a “chance when reaching reach!” H113 are displayed.

  117 (b) following FIG. 117 (a) shows a state in which the respective light emitting means emit light while the movable bodies 1 and 2 remain in the initial position.

  FIG. 117 (c) following FIG. 117 (b) shows a state in which the movable body 2 moves from the initial position to approximately the center front of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the movable body 1 is positioned at the initial position. Yes. Since the movable body 2 is positioned substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 2 is a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the special figure 2 holding number aa3, the fourth symbol aa4 of the special figure 2, and a button notice. It overlaps with a part of the display h110, a ball removal error display h111, an operation expiration date display h112, and a notice display (or tutorial display) h113. Note that the movable body 2 may be positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 2 may overlap other displays, or any one of these displays. There may be cases where the display does not overlap.

  117 (d) following FIG. 117 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 2 is positioned substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation is being performed. Each of the pair of movable parts 23 of the movable body 2 is rotated about 70 ° clockwise from the initial posture.

  117 (e) following FIG. 117 (d) shows a state in which the movable body 2 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation has been completed. Each of the pair of movable parts 23 of the movable body 2 is rotated about 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Due to the deformation of the movable body 2, a part of the hold icons ab1 and ab2 and the other part of the button notice display h110 are newly overlapped by the movable body 2. The movable body 2 may be deformed at a position approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 2 may overlap with other displays. There may be cases where there is no overlap in the display.

  117 (f) following FIG. 117 (e), the movable body 2 moves to the initial position after performing the operation of returning to the shape before deformation, and the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 are turned off. Indicates the state.

  Thus, in this production example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 that are located at positions that overlap in the front-rear direction in the initial position state, only the movable body 2 on the rear side is in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. This is an example in which an operation of dropping and deforming is performed. This production example may be performed as a pre-reading notice or as a notice of the change. When the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. When this production example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where the production example shown in FIG. 116 is performed. 116 may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed when the example of the effect shown in FIG. 116 is performed.

  FIG. 118 shows staged examples of effects using the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 described in FIGS. 232 to 236 and the like.

  118A shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are located at the initial position above the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. When each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, the movable body 1 overlaps the movable body 2. For this reason, when each of the movable bodies 1 and 2 is located at the initial position, it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the movable body 2 by the movable body 1. The movable bodies 1 and 2 are movable bodies provided with light emitting means (for example, a plurality of LEDs), and are movable bodies that can emit light in various light emission patterns according to production. FIG. 118A shows a state where the light emitting means of the movable bodies 1 and 2 are not emitting light. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The area below the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 is an area for displaying a variation icon display, and a variation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the display area for the variation icon display. To the left of the display area of the variable icon display is a special figure 1 hold icon display area. In the special figure 1 hold icon display area, a hold icon ab1 in the merchant character form, and hold icons ab2 and ab3 in the default form are displayed. It is displayed. The hold icon in the form of a merchant character is a hold icon used as a prefetch notice. The right side of the display area of the variable icon display is a special figure 2 hold icon display area, and a hold icon ac1 of a default mode is displayed in the special figure 2 hold icon display area.

  The display on the decorative symbol display device 208 is composed of a plurality of layers. In the innermost layer, the decorative symbols are displayed in a variable manner. In the foremost layer, a ball removal error display h111 with a character string “please remove the ball” is displayed. Between the layer in which the decorative symbol is displayed and the layer in which the ball removal error display h111 is displayed, a button notice display imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date indicating the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge. A display h112, and a notice display (or tutorial display) h113 by a balloon of “Tonochi” character and a “chance when reaching reach!” H113 are displayed.

  FIG. 118 (b) following FIG. 118 (a) shows a state in which the respective light emitting means emit light while the movable bodies 1 and 2 remain in the initial position.

  FIG. 118 (c) following FIG. 118 (b) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 start to move from the initial position at the same time and are positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 at the same time. Since the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are part of the decorative symbol, part of the special figure 2 holding number aa3, 4 symbols aa4, ordinary figure holding number aa5, part of ordinary symbol 4th symbol aa6, part of button notice display h110, ball removal error display h111, operation expiration date display h112, and notice display (or tutorial display) h113 It overlaps with a part of. Further, since the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may overlap with other displays. There may be a case where the display does not overlap any one of the above. In addition, the timing of the movement start of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be different. Further, even if the movement start timings of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 are different, the movement end timing may be the same, or the movement start timings of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be the same. However, there may be cases where the timing of the end of movement is different.

  FIG. 118 (d) following FIG. 118 (c) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the deformation operation is being performed. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 is rotated about 30 ° clockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 is rotated about 30 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 14 is moved downward, and a pair of the movable body 2 is moved. Each of the movable parts 23 is rotated about 70 ° clockwise from the initial posture. The start timing of the deformation operation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be different.

  118 (e) following FIG. 118 (d) shows a state in which the movable bodies 1 and 2 are positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and the deformation operations are completed at the same time. The movable portion 11 of the movable body 1 rotates about 120 ° clockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 12 rotates about 120 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, the movable portion 14 moves downward, and a pair of the movable body 2 Each of the movable parts 23 is rotated about 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. As the movable bodies 1 and 2 are deformed, a part of the hold icons ab1 to ab3, a part of the change icon ad1, a part of the hold icon ac1, another part of the button notice display h110, and a ball removal Another part of the error display h111 is overlapped by the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. In addition, the movable bodies 1 and 2 may be deformed at a position approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, so that the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may overlap with other displays. The display may not overlap with any one of the displays. Note that the end timing of the deformation operation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be different.

  FIG. 118 (f) following FIG. 118 (e) shows that the movable bodies 1 and 2 start moving to the initial position and finish moving at the same time after simultaneously performing the operation of returning the movable bodies 1 and 2 to the shape before deformation. 2 shows a state in which the respective light emitting means 2 are turned off simultaneously. In addition, the operation | movement which the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 return to the shape before a deformation | transformation may be started at a separate timing, and may be complete | finished at a separate timing. Further, even if the start timing of the operation of returning the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the shape before deformation is different, the end timing may be the same, or the deformation of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 may be the same. Even when the start timing of the operation of returning to the previous shape is made the same, the end timing may be different. In addition, the timing of starting movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position may be different, and the timing of starting movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position may be different. Also good. Further, even if the timings of starting the movement of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 to the initial position are different, the timing of the movement end may be the same, or to the initial positions of the movable body 1 and the movable body 2. Even if the movement start timing is the same, the movement end timing may be different. The light emitting units of the movable bodies 1 and 2 may be turned off at different timings.

  As described above, in this production example, in the movable body 1 and the movable body 2 that are positioned in the overlapping position in the front-rear direction in the initial position state, both movable bodies fall simultaneously in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. This is an example in which an operation of deforming at the same time is performed. This production example may be performed as a pre-reading notice or as a notice of the change. When the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. In the case where the effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where the effect example shown in FIG. 116 or the effect example shown in FIG. 117 is performed. In addition, the case where the effect example shown in FIG. 116 or the effect example shown in FIG. 117 is performed is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where the effect example is performed. There may be cases.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 119 to FIG. 127, the movable body 90 and an effect example using the movable body 90 will be described.

  The movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 119 (a) is a schematic front view of the movable body 90, and FIG. 119 (b) is a schematic left side view of the movable body 90.

  The movable body 90 includes a movable body 90a, a movable body 90b provided at the lower left of the movable body 90a, a motor m1 and a rotating shaft d1 for operating the movable body 90b, and a movable body 90c provided at the lower right of the movable body 90a. And a motor m2 and a rotating shaft d2 for operating the movable body 90c. The movable body 90a has a plate-like horizontally-long rectangular substrate mounting base portion 90a1, an LED substrate 90a2, and a cover portion 90a3. The movable body 90b includes a plate-shaped fan-shaped substrate mounting base portion 90b1, an LED substrate 90b2, and a cover portion 90b3. The movable body 90c includes a plate-shaped fan-shaped substrate mounting base 90c1, the LED substrate 90c2, and a cover portion. 90c3.

  The LED substrate 90a2 of the movable body 90a is provided with light emitting diodes a11 to a35 arranged in an array of 3 rows and 6 columns (however, 2nd row, 1st column, 3rd row, 1st column, 2nd row, 6th column). , And the third row and the sixth column are not provided with a light emitting diode). The LED substrate 90b2 of the movable body 90b is provided with light emitting diodes b1 to b4 along the outer periphery of the arc portion, and the LED substrate 90c2 of the movable body 90c is provided with the light emitting diode c1 along the outer periphery of the arc portion. -C4 are provided. All of the light emitting diodes (a11 to c4) may be composed of light emitting diodes of a single color (same color or different color), or a part of the light emitting diodes may be a single color light emitting diode and the other part may be a full color LED. All may be composed of full-color LEDs. Moreover, you may use light sources other than a light emitting diode for the light emitting diode (a11-c4) mounted in the movable body 90a.

  The initial operation of the movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 120 (a) to 120 (g) show the initial operation of the movable body 90 performed step by step when the pachinko machine 100 is powered on. 120 to 126, the case where the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off is expressed in white, and the case where the light emitting diode is turned on is expressed in light ink. 120 to 126, the cover portions 90a3, 90b3, and 90c3 are not shown.

  FIG. 120A shows a state where the movable body 90 is located at the initial position and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The movable body 90 can move in the vertical direction by arm portions provided at both ends. The arm portions provided at both ends of the movable body 90 may be transparent, translucent, or colored, or may be capable of emitting light by arranging a light emitting diode. You may arrange | position the cable connected to the movable body 90 behind a arm part so that a player cannot visually recognize. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a character string “in preparation”.

  In FIG. 120 (b) following FIG. 120 (a), the movable body 90 moves and is positioned substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, and is mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c. The state where the light emitting diode is lit is shown. Further, the display of the character string “in preparation” is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 120 (c) following FIG. 120 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated about 60 ° counterclockwise, and the movable body 90c is rotated about 60 ° clockwise. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 120 (d) following FIG. 120 (c) shows a state where the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 are simultaneously rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, all the light emitting diodes a11 to a35 mounted on the movable body 90a are visible.

  In FIG. 120 (e) following FIG. 120 (d), all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c are each returned to their original postures. Indicates the state. The movable body 90b is rotated about 30 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 120 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated about 30 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 120 (d).

  FIG. 120 (f) following FIG. 120 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c has returned to the original posture. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 120 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 120 (d).

  FIG. 120 (g) following FIG. 120 (f) shows a state where the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  An example of the effect example of the movable body 90 will be described with reference to FIG. 121 (a) to 121 (n) show step-by-step examples of effects using the movable body 90. FIG.

  FIG. 121 (a) shows a state in which the movable body 90 is located at the initial position and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 121 (b) following FIG. 121 (a), all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 are moved after the movable body 90 moves and is positioned substantially in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 during the movement of the movable body 90. The diode may be lit, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like) overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a. And a35) may be turned off.

  FIG. 121 (c) following FIG. 121 (b) shows a state where each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated at the same time. The movable body 90b is rotated about 60 ° counterclockwise, and the movable body 90c is rotated about 60 ° clockwise. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 121 (d) following FIG. 121 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Moreover, the light of all the light emitting diodes a11-a35 mounted in the movable body 90a can be visually recognized because the movable bodies 90b and 90c rotate.

  In FIG. 121 (e) following FIG. 121 (d), all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c are each returned to their original postures. Indicates the state. The movable body 90b is rotated about 30 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 121 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated about 30 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 121 (d).

  FIG. 121 (f) following FIG. 121 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c has returned to the original posture. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 121 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 121 (d).

  FIG. 121 (g) following FIG. 121 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  In FIG. 121 (h) following FIG. 121 (g), the movable body 90 moves from the initial position and is positioned substantially in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The state where the diode is lit is shown. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 during the movement of the movable body 90. The diode may be lit, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like) overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a. And a35) may be turned off.

  In FIG. 121 (i) following FIG. 121 (h), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated about 60 ° clockwise. As the movable body 90b rotates, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a32 and a33) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90b can be visually recognized.

  In FIG. 121 (j) following FIG. 121 (i), only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. Moreover, the light of all the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90b is visible by rotating the movable body 90b.

  In FIG. 121 (k) following FIG. 121 (j), only the movable body 90c provided in the movable body 90 is rotated about 60 ° clockwise. By rotating the movable body 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a34 and a35) of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c is visible.

  In FIG. 121 (l) following FIG. 121 (k), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Further, by rotating the movable body 90c, light of all the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a25, a34, a35) among the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c can be visually recognized. The light of all the light emitting diodes provided is visible.

  FIG. 121 (m) following FIG. 121 (l) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is simultaneously returned to the original posture after all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 are turned off. ing. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 121 (l), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 121 (l). In addition, after each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to the original posture at the same time, all the light-emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is returned to the original posture. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off. Moreover, each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture so as to return the operation of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 121 (i) to (l).

  121 (n) following FIG. 121 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position and the reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach production of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, may be started while the movable body 90 moves to the initial position, or the movable body 90 is moved to the initial position. You may start after moving to.

  As described above, this effect example is an effect used as a notice of the change, but may be used as an effect of a prefetch notice. When the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. When this effect example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 122 to 125 is performed.

  An example of an effect using a modification of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 119 will be described with reference to FIG. 122 (a) to 122 (n) show step-by-step production examples using modifications of the movable body 90. FIG. In this modification of the movable body 90, the movable bodies 90b and 90c are configured to move in the vertical direction on the movable body 90a.

  FIG. 122 (a) shows a state in which the modified example of the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variation display.

  In FIG. 122 (b) following FIG. 122 (a), all the light-emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 are moved after the movable body 90 moves and is positioned approximately in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 during the movement of the movable body 90. The diode may be lit, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like) overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a. And a35) may be turned off.

  FIG. 122 (c) following FIG. 122 (b) shows a state where each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 is moved upward simultaneously. As the movable bodies 90b and 90c move, the light of some of the light emitting diodes a32 to a35 of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized. The movable bodies 90b and 90c may move at different timings.

  FIG. 122 (d) following FIG. 122 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 is further moved upward and stopped at the target position. As the movable bodies 90b and 90c move upward, the light emitting diodes a11 to a16 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c, and the light emitting diode a22 mounted on the movable body 90a. The light of ~ a35 is visible.

  FIG. 122 (e) following FIG. 122 (d) shows a state in which all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are turned off and the movable bodies 90b and 90c are simultaneously moving downward. Yes. By the movement of the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light emitting diodes a22 to a25 are overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c, and the light emitting diodes a13 and a14 are visible.

  FIG. 122 (f) following FIG. 122 (e) shows a state in which the movable bodies 90b and 90c are simultaneously returned to the original positions. Each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original position at different timings.

  FIG. 122 (g) following FIG. 122 (f) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  In FIG. 122 (h) following FIG. 122 (g), all of the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 is shown in which the movable body 90 moves from the initial position and is positioned approximately in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. The state where the diode is lit is shown. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 during the movement of the movable body 90. The diode may be lit, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a22, a25, a32, a33, a34, and the like) overlapped by the movable bodies 90b and 90c among the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90a. And a35) may be turned off.

  FIG. 122 (i) following FIG. 122 (h) shows a part of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90 b by moving only the movable body 90 b provided on the movable body 90 upward. Light from the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a32 and a33) can be visually recognized, and the light emitting diodes a11 and a12 are overlapped by the movable body 90b.

  FIG. 122 (j) following FIG. 122 (i) shows a state in which only the movable body 90b provided on the movable body 90 moves upward and stops at the target position. As the movable body 90bc moves upward, the light emitting diodes a11 to a13 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable body 90b, and the light from the light emitting diodes a22 and a23 mounted on the movable body 90a. Is visible.

  In FIG. 122 (k) following FIG. 122 (j), only a movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is moved upward so that a part of the light emitting diodes overlapped by the movable body 90c. Light from the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes a34 and a35) can be visually recognized, and the light emitting diodes a15 and a16 are overlapped by the movable body 90c.

  FIG. 122 (l) following FIG. 122 (k) shows a state in which only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 moves upward and stops at the target position. As the movable body 90c moves upward, the light emitting diodes a14 to a16 mounted on the movable body 90a are overlapped by the movable body 90c, and the light from the light emitting diodes a24 and a25 mounted on the movable body 90a. Is visible.

  FIG. 122 (m) following FIG. 122 (l) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is simultaneously returned to the original position after all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 are turned off. ing. In addition, after each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is simultaneously returned to the original position, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is returned to the original position. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off. In addition, the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to their original positions so that the operations of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 122 (i) to (l) are returned.

  FIG. 122 (n) following FIG. 122 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position and the reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach production of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, may be started while the movable body 90 moves to the initial position, or the movable body 90 is moved to the initial position. You may start after moving to.

  As described above, this effect example is an effect used as a notice of the change, but may be used as an effect of a prefetch notice. When the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. When this production example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more than the case where any one of the productions shown in FIGS. 121 to 125 is performed.

  An example of an effect using a modification of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 119 will be described with reference to FIG. 123 (a) to 123 (n) show step-by-step example effects using a modification of the movable body 90. FIG. In this modification of the movable body 90, the movable bodies 90b and 90c are provided on the rear side of the movable body 90a.

  FIG. 123A shows a state in which the modified example of the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, and the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable bodies 90a, 90b, and 90c are turned off. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variation display.

  FIG. 123 (b) following FIG. 123 (a) shows that all the light-emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 are moved after the movable body 90 moves and is positioned approximately in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the lighted state. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 during the movement of the movable body 90. The diode may be turned on, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1 to b3 and c1 to c3) mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be turned off.

  FIG. 123 (c) following FIG. 123 (b) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated at the same time. The movable body 90b is rotated about 60 ° counterclockwise, and the movable body 90c is rotated about 60 ° clockwise. Further, by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c, the light of some of the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1, b2, c1, and c2) of the light emitting diodes of the movable bodies 90b and 90c can be visually recognized.

  FIG. 123 (d) following FIG. 123 (c) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture, and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Moreover, the light of all the light emitting diodes mounted in the movable bodies 90b and 90c is visible by rotating the movable bodies 90b and 90c.

  In FIG. 123 (e) following FIG. 123 (d), all the light emitting diodes provided on the movable body 90 are turned off, and the movable bodies 90b and 90c are each rotated back to the original posture. Indicates the state. The movable body 90b is rotated about 30 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 121 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated about 30 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 123 (d).

  FIG. 123 (f) following FIG. 123 (e) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90 b and 90 c has returned to the original posture. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 121 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 123 (d).

  FIG. 123 (g) following FIG. 123 (f) shows a state where the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position.

  FIG. 123 (h), which follows FIG. 123 (g), shows that all of the light emitting elements mounted on the movable body 90 are located in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 when the movable body 90 moves from the initial position. The state where the diode is lit is shown. In addition, before the movement of the movable body 90, all the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90 may be turned on, or all the light emission mounted on the movable body 90 during the movement of the movable body 90. The diode may be turned on, or the light emitting diodes (light emitting diodes b1 to b4 and c1 to c4) mounted on the movable bodies 90b and 90c may be turned off.

  In FIG. 123 (i) following FIG. 123 (h), only the movable body 90b provided in the movable body 90 is rotated about 60 ° counterclockwise. As the movable body 90b rotates, the light from the light emitting diodes b1 and b2 mounted on the movable body 90b is visible.

  In FIG. 123 (j) following FIG. 123 (i), only the movable body 90b provided in the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the initial posture. Moreover, the light of all the light emitting diodes b1-b3 of the light emitting diodes mounted on the movable body 90b is visible by rotating the movable body 90b.

  In FIG. 123 (k) following FIG. 123 (j), only the movable body 90c provided on the movable body 90 is rotated about 60 ° clockwise. As the movable body 90c rotates, the light from the light emitting diodes b1 and b2 mounted on the movable body 90c is visible.

  In FIG. 123 (l) following FIG. 123 (k), only the movable body 90c provided in the movable body 90 is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the initial posture. Moreover, the light of all the light emitting diodes c1 to c3 mounted on the movable body 90c is visible by rotating the movable body 90c.

  FIG. 123 (m) following FIG. 123 (l) shows a state in which each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is simultaneously returned to the original posture after all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 are turned off. ing. The movable body 90b is rotated 90 ° clockwise from the posture of FIG. 123 (d), and the movable body 90c is rotated 90 ° counterclockwise from the posture of FIG. 123 (d). In addition, after each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c returns to the original posture at the same time, all the light-emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off, or each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c is returned to the original posture. While returning, all the light emitting diodes provided in the movable body 90 may be turned off. In addition, each of the movable bodies 90b and 90c may return to the original posture so as to return the operation of the movable bodies 90b and 90c in FIGS. 123 (i) to (l).

  FIG. 123 (n) following FIG. 123 (m) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the initial position and the reach effect of the decoration 7 has been started in the decorative symbol display device. The reach production of the decoration 7 may be started before the movable body 90 starts moving to the initial position, may be started while the movable body 90 moves to the initial position, or the movable body 90 is moved to the initial position. You may start after moving to.

  As described above, this effect example is an effect used as a notice of the change, but may be used as an effect of a prefetch notice. When the present effect example is performed, there may be a case where the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the present effect example is not performed. When this production example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more than the case where any one of the productions shown in FIGS. 121 to 125 is performed.

  An effect example using the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 119 will be described with reference to FIG. 124 (a) to (l) show examples of effects using the movable body 90. FIG.

  FIG. 124A shows a decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. Further, a part of the decorative design, a part of the hold icon a1 in the default mode, a part of the hold icon a2 in the prefetch notice mode, and a part of the change icon ad1 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 124 (b) following FIG. 124 (a), a confirmation display of “decoration 5-decoration 6-decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. Further, a part of the decorative symbol, a part of the hold icon a2 in the pre-reading notice mode, and a part of the change icon ad2 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  124 (c) following FIG. 124 (b), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a decorative symbol variation display by digestion of the hold icon a2 in the pre-reading notice mode. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a part of the display of the character string “Press the button!”, A button notice display h110, and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, and a button operation notice effect is performed. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. Further, the movable body 90 includes a part of the decorative pattern, a part of the change icon ad3 of the merchant character mode, a part of the display of the character string “Press the button!”, The button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112. It is overlapped.

  FIG. 124 (d) following FIG. 124 (c) shows that “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208 a when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date. An image is displayed. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. In addition, a part of the decorative design, a part of the merchant character mode variation icon ad1, and a part of the sun image are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 124 (e) following FIG. 124 (d), when the player operates the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date, “decoration 7” is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. Has been started. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. In addition, a part of the decorative design and a part of the merchant character-like variation icon ad <b> 1 are overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 124 (f) subsequent to FIG. 124 (e) shows that the SP reach effect display by the character display of the character displaying the character string “game is won” is started on the decorative symbol display device 208. On the upper right of 208, the decorative symbol variation display is reduced. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. Further, a part of the SP reach effect display by the character display of Tono is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 124 (g) following FIG. 124 (f) shows that the SP reach effect is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the decoration “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is displayed on the upper right of the decorative symbol display device 208. The combination of symbols is reduced and displayed as a temporary stop. In the decorative symbol display device 208, an effect display in which the character string “Win” and the confrontation scene between the character and the enemy character ends and the character of the character wins is displayed. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. In addition, a part of the effect display won by the Tono character is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 124 (h) following FIG. 124 (g), “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped on the ornamental symbol display device 208. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. A part of the decorative design is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  124 (i) following FIG. 124 (h), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the 1R big hit game effect display of the 15R special big hit game. On the upper left of the decorative symbol display device 208, “decoration 7”, which is a big hit stop symbol, is displayed, and on the upper right, a character string “1R” indicating the number of rounds is displayed. A character string “80 balls” indicating the total number of numbers and a character string “number of jackpots: 1” indicating the number of jackpots are displayed on the lower right. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. Further, a part of the 1R big hit game effect display is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 124 (j) following FIG. 124 (i) shows that the 15R special big hit game is ended and the character string “Dito” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. A part of the character string “Dito” is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  FIG. 124 (k) following FIG. 124 (j) shifts to the electric support state after the end of the big hit game. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol variation display, a character string “Right-handed!”, A pattern that clearly indicates right-handedness, a variation icon ad4, and a special symbol 2 hold icon ac1 are displayed. . In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. In addition, a part of the decorative pattern change display, a part of the character string “Please do right-handed!”, A part of the pattern that clearly shows that right-handing is made, a part of the change icon ad4, and the special figure 2 hold A part of the icon ac1 is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  In FIG. 124 (l) following FIG. 124 (k), the electric support state is continued. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a decorative symbol variation display, a character string of “door opening error”, a character string of “sphere full error”, a variation icon ad5, and a special symbol 2 hold icon ac2 of a pre-reading notice mode are displayed. In front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, a movable body 90 in a state where all the light emitting diodes are visible is positioned. Also, a part of the decorative symbol variation display, a part of the character string of “door opening error”, a part of the character string of “sphere full error”, a part of the variation icon ad5, and the special figure 2 hold icon of the pre-reading notice mode A part of ac2 is overlapped by the movable body 90.

  As shown in this example, the movable body 90 may be positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208 in various effects and gaming states. All of the above-described displays may be overlapped by the movable body 90, or the display overlapped by the movable body 90 may not be overlapped.

  An example of an effect using the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 119 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 125 (a) shows a state in which a notice effect is performed by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 121 when the player presses the chance button 136 during the operation valid period of the button button notice effect. Show. Note that even if the player does not operate the chance button 136 within the operation valid period of the chance button 136, a notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 121 may be performed after the operation effective period of the chance button 136 ends. . Note that the series of effects shown in FIG. 125 (a) may be used as a notice of the change or may be used as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the series of effects shown in FIG. 125 (a) is performed, the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 125 (a) is not performed. May be. When this production example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more than the case where any one of the productions shown in FIGS. 121 to 125 is performed.

  FIG. 125 (b) shows a state where the notice effect by the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 121 is performed after the countdown by the notice effect of the countdown is completed. Note that the series of effects shown in FIG. 125 (b) may be used as a notice of the change or may be used as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the series of effects shown in FIG. 125 (b) is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed as compared to the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 125 (b) is not performed. In the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 125 (b) is performed, the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than in the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 125 (a) is performed. If the series of effects shown in FIG. 125 (a) is performed, the jackpot symbol is finally determined as compared to the case where the series of effects shown in FIG. 125 (b) is performed. You may comprise so that it may be displayed easily. When this production example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally easily displayed more than the case where any one of the productions shown in FIGS. 121 to 125 is performed.

  A modification example of how the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 119 looks at the initial position will be described with reference to FIG. The movable body 90 is located behind the game board 125 having game nails.

  FIG. 126A is an example in which the movable body 90 is positioned behind the structure 30a at the initial position. The structure 30a has a flat plate-like shape and includes a horizontally-long rectangular opening at a substantially central portion. The structure 30a is made of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, a part of the movable body 90a, a part of the movable body 90b, and a part of the movable body 90c of the movable body 90 are visually recognized through the opening of the structure 30a. It is possible. In addition, a part of any one of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible and the other movable bodies may not be visible, or any of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible. A part of the two movable bodies may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible.

  FIG. 126B is an example in which the movable body 90 is positioned behind the structure 30b at the initial position. The structure 30b has a flat plate-like shape, and includes a vertically long rectangular cutout at a substantially central portion. The structure 30b is made of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is located at the initial position, a part of the movable body 90a, a part of the movable body 90b, and a part of the movable body 90c of the movable body 90 are provided via the notch portion of the structure 30b. Visible. In addition, a part of any one of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible and the other movable bodies may not be visible, or any of the movable bodies 90a to 90c may be visible. A part of the two movable bodies may be visible and the other movable body may not be visible.

  FIG. 126 (c) is an example in which the movable body 90 is positioned behind the structural body 30 c at the initial position. The structure 30c is made of an opaque member. When the movable body 90 is positioned at the initial position, the movable body 90 is not visible to the player because it is overlapped with the structure 30c. Note that a transmissive liquid crystal device may be arranged in the structure 30c so that the movable body 90 positioned behind the structure 30c is more easily visible during non-display than during display in the transmissive liquid crystal device.

  A modified example of the position and moving operation of the movable body 90 shown in FIG. 119 will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIG. 127 (a) is a schematic view of the liquid crystal display device a208, the movable body 90, and the light emitting panel unit 919 as viewed from the left side. In this example, the movable body 90 moves in the vertical direction in front of the liquid crystal display device a208 and behind the light emitting panel unit 919. Note that the liquid crystal display device a208 and the light-emitting panel unit 919 may be movable in the vertical direction, may be movable in the horizontal direction, and may be rotatable.

  FIG. 127B is a schematic view of the transmissive liquid crystal display device b208 and the movable body 90 as viewed from the left side. In this example, the movable body 90 moves up and down behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device b208. Note that the transmissive liquid crystal display device b208 may be movable in the vertical direction, may be movable in the horizontal direction, or may be rotatable.

  FIG. 127C is a schematic view of the movable liquid crystal display device c208 and the movable body 90 viewed from the left side. In this example, the movable body 90 moves up and down behind and in front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208. The left diagram in FIG. 127 (c) shows the moving direction of the movable body 90 when the movable body 90 and the movable liquid crystal display device c208 are located at the initial position. When the movable body 90 and the movable liquid crystal display device c208 are located at the initial position, the movable body 90 is located behind the movable liquid crystal display device c208, and the movable body 90 can move only in the vertical direction. The middle diagram in FIG. 127 (c) shows a state in which the movable liquid crystal display device c208 has moved downward. The diagram on the right side in FIG. 127 (c) shows a state in which the movable body 90 has moved to the front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208 after the movable liquid crystal display device c208 has moved downward. When the movable body 90 is located in front of the movable liquid crystal display device c208, the movable body 90 can move in the vertical direction. Note that the movable liquid crystal display device c208 may be movable in the left-right direction or may be rotatable.

  Next, an effect example using the structure 247 will be described with reference to FIGS. 128 to 138. The structure 247 used in the production examples in FIGS. 128 to 138 is a structure having a substantially circular front surface and a family crest pattern on the surface, and can be moved in the vertical direction. 128 to 137, the left diagram shows the state of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 247, and the middle diagram shows the decorative symbol display device 208 in the state of the left diagram and the structure 247. The case of seeing through is shown. The diagram on the right side is an outline for determining whether or not a predetermined character display (for example, the Sabohani character display SB or the sun display su1) displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 is visible depending on the angle of the player's line of sight. FIG. In the figure, the line of sight that the player can visually recognize the predetermined character display is indicated by ◯, and the line of sight that the player cannot visually recognize the predetermined character display is indicated by x. Note that the shape and arrangement position of the structure 247 of the present example are determined such that a predetermined character displayed behind the structure 247 has a predetermined eye angle (for example, a general sitting height (for example, a sitting height of 70 cm to 100 cm)). The angle of the line of sight in the player's normal gaming posture) may be calculated and designed so that it cannot be visually recognized. The decorative symbol display device 208 used in this example may be a movable liquid crystal display device or a transmissive liquid crystal display device.

  FIG. 128 shows staged examples using the structure 247 step by step. The left diagram in FIG. 128A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. FIG. 128A shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of decorative symbols.

  FIG. 128 (b) subsequent to FIG. 128 (a) shows that the Sabohani character display SB is displayed on the screen at a position overlapping the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed to appear from below. The Sabohani character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state shown in FIG. 128 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. A part of the display SB can be visually recognized. In the description of the player's line of sight in this example and the example shown below, “substantially front” defines that the angle of the line of sight is within about ± 10 ° when the horizontal direction is 0 °. The substantially oblique upper direction defines an angle of the eyeline of about + 20 ° or more as substantially obliquely upward, and the substantially obliquely downward direction defines the angle of the eyeline of −about 20 ° or less as an approximately obliquely downward direction. Is not necessarily limited to these. In the description of the player's line of sight, it is only necessary that the position of the line of sight is higher than that of the front in the substantially oblique direction, and the position of the line of sight is lower than that in the substantially front direction.

  In FIG. 128 (c) following FIG. 128 (b), the entire sabotani character display SB is displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208. In the state of FIG. 128 (c), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 128 (d) following FIG. 128 (c) shows a state in which an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The upper body portion of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed above the position of the upper end of the structure 247 and is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 holding icon b3. In the state of FIG. 128 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the Sabohani character display SB, and the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character display. The entire SB is visible.

  FIG. 128 (e) following FIG. 128 (d) shows a state in which an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The Sabohani character display SB is displayed in the approximate center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the medium decoration symbol.

  Thus, this example is an example in which the movement display is performed from the position where the Sabohani character display SB used for the notice of the change overlaps the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured such that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 129 to 137 is performed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol display device 208 does not move and display the Sabohani character display SB displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247, and at least one of the upward, downward, leftward, rightward, and rotation is displayed. One or a plurality of movements may be made so that a player viewing from substantially the front may be able to see at least a part of the Sabohani character display SB, or may be overlapped with the structure 247. While the Sabohani character display SB displayed at the position is moved and displayed, the decorative symbol display device 208 is moved in at least one of the upward direction, the downward direction, the left direction, the right direction, and the rotation, or a plurality of movements. Thus, there may be a case where a player who is viewing from substantially the front can visually recognize at least a part of the Sabohani character display SB.

  FIG. 129 shows an example of an effect using the structure 247 step by step. The diagram on the left side of FIG. 129 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. FIG. 129 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the variation of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 129 (b) following FIG. 129 (a) shows that the entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. It appears to appear from the bottom of the screen. The Sabohani character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 129 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 129 (c) following FIG. 129 (b) shows a state in which an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The Sabohani character display SB is displayed in the approximate center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the medium decoration symbol.

  FIG. 129 (d) following FIG. 129 (c) shows a state where an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves downward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower half of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position where it overlaps with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap with the special figure 2 holding icon b3. In the state shown in FIG. 129 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the Sabohani character display SB, and the player who is viewing from substantially diagonally above is the Sabohani character display. The entire SB is visible.

  FIG. 129 (e) following FIG. 129 (d) shows a state in which an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves downward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG. The entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. In the state of FIG. 129 (e), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, while the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  As described above, in this example, after the Sabohani character display SB used for the notice of the change is moved from the position where it overlaps the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap, the structure 247 is overlapped again. This is an example in which moving display is performed at the position to be displayed. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, the big hit symbol may be finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 128 to 137 is performed.

  FIG. 130 shows staged examples using the structure 247 and the structure 50t step by step. The structure 50t is a structure formed of an opaque thin plate, and the title of the game table is displayed on the surface. The diagram on the left side of FIG. 130 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 50t is located in front of the upper part. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. FIG. 130 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 130 (b) following FIG. 130 (a) shows that the entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. It appears to appear from the bottom of the screen. The Sabohani character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 130 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from the substantially oblique upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 130 (c) following FIG. 130 (b) shows a state in which an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The Sabohani character display SB is displayed in the approximate center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the medium decoration symbol.

  FIG. 130 (d) following FIG. 130 (c) shows a state in which an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The upper half of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position where it overlaps with the structure 50t, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the medium decoration symbol.

  FIG. 130 (e) following FIG. 130 (d) shows a state in which an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position where it overlaps the structure 50t, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the interior decoration symbol. In the state shown in FIG. 130 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 50t from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from substantially diagonally below is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  As described above, in this example, the Sabohani character display SB used for the notice of the change is moved from the position where it overlaps with the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap, and then overlapped with the structure 50t. It is an example which performs a movement display to a position. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 128 to 138 is performed. Also good.

  FIG. 131 shows staged examples using the structure 247 step by step. The left side of FIG. 131A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. FIG. 131 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of decorative symbols.

  FIG. 131 (b) following FIG. 131 (a) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire Sabohani character display SB appears from the lower left of the screen while the decorative symbol variation display is being displayed. Yes. The Sabohani character display SB is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variation icon ad1.

  FIG. 131 (c) following FIG. 131 (b) shows a state in which an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower right portion of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247.

  FIG. 131 (d) following FIG. 131 (c) shows a state in which an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. In the state shown in FIG. 131 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from substantially above is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 131 (e) following FIG. 131 (d) shows a state in which an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position that does not overlap the structure 247.

  Thus, in this example, the position where the Sabohani character display SB used for the notice of the change is not overlapped with the structure 247 after being moved from the position where it does not overlap with the structure 247 is displayed. This is an example of moving display. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 128 to 138 is performed. Also good.

  FIG. 132 shows staged examples using the structure 247 step by step. The left side of FIG. 132A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. FIG. 132 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of decorative symbols.

  FIG. 132 (b) following FIG. 132 (a) is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire Sabohani character display SB appears from the lower left of the screen during the decorative symbol variation display. Yes. The Sabohani character display SB is displayed so as to overlap a part of the variation icon ad1. Further, the Sabohani character display SB of this example is larger than the Sabohani character display SB shown in FIG. 131 and the like.

  FIG. 132 (c) following FIG. 132 (b) shows a state in which an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The lower right portion of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position where it overlaps the structure 247, and the upper half of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed so as to overlap a part of the special figure 1 holding icon a3. ing.

  FIG. 132 (d) following FIG. 132 (c) shows a state in which an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A substantially lower half of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. In the state of FIG. 132 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize substantially the upper half of the Sabohani character display SB, and the player who is viewing from substantially above is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 132 (e) following FIG. 132 (d) shows a state in which an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further to the right is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position that does not overlap the structure 247.

  In this way, in this example, the movement display is performed from a position where the Sabohani character display SB used for the notice of the change does not overlap the structure 247 to a position where a part of the Sabohani character display SB overlaps. This is an example in which a movement display is performed at a position that does not overlap with the structure 247 later, and a part of the Sabohani character display SB is an example of an effect that is always visible from a player with a substantially frontal eye. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 128 to 138 is performed. Also good.

  FIG. 133 shows an example of effect using the structure 247 step by step. The left side of FIG. 133 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. FIG. 133 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display is performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 133 (b) following FIG. 133 (a) shows that the entire Sabohani character display SB is overlapped with the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. It appears to appear from the bottom of the screen. The Sabohani character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 133 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, while the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 133C, which is subsequent to FIG. 133B, is displayed in the decorative symbol display device 208 so that the entire sun display su1 appears from the bottom of the screen at a position overlapping the structure 247. ing. The sun display su1 is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 133 (c), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the sun display su1 and the Sabohani character display SB, while the player is viewing from substantially above. Can visually recognize at least a part of the sun display su1 and at least a part of the Sabohani character display SB.

  FIG. 133 (d), which is subsequent to FIG. 133 (c), shows an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB throws the sun display su 1 up on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the sun display su 1 moves upward. This shows a state where an animated display is displayed. The substantially upper half of the sun display su1 is displayed at a position where it does not overlap with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the special figure 1 holding icon a3.

  FIG. 133 (e) following FIG. 133 (d) shows the sun display su 1 on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. The animation display which moves to is shown. The sun display su <b> 1 is displayed at the approximate center of the screen located above the structure 247 and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the interior decoration symbol.

  As described above, in this example, after the Sabohani character display SB and the sun display su1 used for the notice of the change are displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, only the sun display su1 is displayed in the structure 247. It is an example which performs a movement display to the position which is not overlapped. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 128 to 138 is performed. Also good.

  FIG. 134 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 step by step. The diagram on the left side of FIG. 134 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. FIG. 134 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of the decorative symbol.

  FIG. 134 (b) following FIG. 134 (a) shows the entire Sabohani character display SB and the sun at a position overlapping the structure 247 during display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Is displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. Sabohani character display SB and sun display su1 are displays used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 134 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB and the sun display su1, but is the player who is viewing from substantially obliquely above. Can visually recognize at least part of the Sabohani character display SB and at least part of the sun display su1.

  FIG. 134 (c) following FIG. 134 (b) shows a state where an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB and the sun display su 1 move upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The Sabohani character display SB and the sun display su1 are displayed at substantially the center of the screen located above the structure 247, and are displayed so as to overlap a part of the interior decoration symbol.

  FIG. 134 (d) following FIG. 134 (c) shows a state in which an animation display in which only the sun display su 1 moves downward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The substantially lower half of the sun display su1 is displayed at a position where it overlaps with the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap with the special figure 2 holding icon a3. In the state of FIG. 134 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the sun display su1, and the player who is viewing from substantially diagonally above the sun display su1. The whole is visible.

  FIG. 134 (e) following FIG. 134 (d) shows that the sun display su <b> 1 is further lowered on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position not overlapping the structure 247. The animation display which moves to is shown. The sun display su <b> 1 is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. The player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the sun display su1, whereas the player who is viewing from substantially obliquely above can visually recognize at least a part of the sun display su1. .

  In this way, in this example, the Sabohani character display SB and the sun display are displayed after the Sabohani character display SB and the sun display su1 used for the notice of the change are overlapped with the structure 247. In this example, su1 is moved and displayed at a position where it does not overlap the structure 247, and then only the sun display su1 is moved and displayed at a position where it overlaps the structure 247. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 128 to 138 is performed. Also good.

  FIG. 135 shows an example of an effect using the structure 247 step by step. The diagram on the left side of FIG. 135A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. In FIG. 135 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays a variation of the decorative symbol, and the effect image ef1 is displayed so as to protrude radially from the structure 247. The effect image ef1 is an effect image that covers the Sabohani character display SB used as a notice of the change, and is a display accompanying the Sabohani character display SB.

  FIG. 135 (b) following FIG. 135 (a) is an approximately upper half of the Sabohani character display SB at a position overlapping the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. Are displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen, and the effect image ef1 is moved and displayed so as to appear from the bottom of the screen. In the state shown in FIG. 135 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the Sabohani character display SB, but can see a part of the effect image ef1, whereas the player sees the structure 247 from obliquely above. The watching player can visually recognize at least part of the Sabohani character display SB and part of the effect image ef1.

  FIG. 135 (c) following FIG. 135 (b) shows that the entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247 in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the effect image ef <b> 1 is displayed on the screen. It is moved and displayed so as to appear from below. In the state of FIG. 135 (c), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, whereas the player who is viewing from the substantially oblique upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 135 (d) following FIG. 135 (c) shows a state in which an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB and the effect image ef <b> 1 move upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The substantially upper body part of the Sabohani character display SB is displayed above the position of the upper end of the structure 247 and is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 holding icon b3. In the state of FIG. 128 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the Sabohani character display SB, and the player who is viewing from the substantially upper side is the Sabohani character display. The entire SB is visible.

  FIG. 135 (e) following FIG. 135 (d) shows a state in which an animated display in which the Sabohani character display SB and the effect image ef 1 move further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The Sabohani character display SB and the effect image ef1 are displayed at substantially the center of the screen located above the structure 247 and are displayed so as to overlap a part of the interior decoration symbol.

  As described above, this example is an example in which the display of the Sabohani character display SB used for the change notice is moved from the position where the Sabohani character display SB overlaps the structure 247 to the position where it does not overlap. Is displayed at a position where the effect image ef1 associated with the Sabohani character display SB is not overlapped with the structure 247 before being displayed at the position where the structure 247 is overlapped. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 128 to 138 is performed. Also good.

  FIG. 136 shows three examples of effects using the structure 247. The left side of FIG. 136A shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. In FIG. 136 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol fluctuating. The character display h113 and the balloon display h114 of the character string “Chance when you find a character!” It is displayed so as to overlap a part. The balloon display h114 of the character string “Chance when a character is found!” Is a display for notifying that the Sabohani character display SB appears, and the Sabohani character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change.

  FIG. 136 (b) following FIG. 136 (a) shows that the entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. It appears to appear from the bottom of the screen. In the balloon display h114, a character string “Character appears!” Is displayed. The character string “character appears!” May be displayed before the appearance of the Sabohani character display SB, may be displayed simultaneously with the appearance, or may be displayed after the appearance. In the state of FIG. 136 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, while the player who is viewing from the substantially oblique top is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  In FIG. 136 (c) following FIG. 136 (b), the sabotani character display SB displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247 is enlarged and displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the balloon display h114, a character string “Character expanding!” Is displayed. The character string “Character expanding!” May be displayed before the start of the expansion of the character display SB of Sabohani, may be displayed simultaneously with the start of expansion, or may be displayed after the start of expansion. In the state of FIG. 135 (c), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front can visually recognize a part of the Sabohani character display SB.

  Thus, in this example, before displaying the Sabohani character display SB used for the notice of the change at a position overlapping the structure 247, a display for notifying that the Sabohani character display SB is displayed. After the Sabohani character display SB is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, a display notifying that the Sabohani character display SB is displayed is performed, and the position overlapping the structure 247 is displayed. This is an example in which the Sabohani character display SB displayed on the screen is enlarged and displayed to notify that the Sabohani character display SB is enlarged. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 128 to 138 is performed. Also good. Further, it may be configured such that the larger the size of the enlarged Sabohan character display SB, the easier it is to finally display the big hit symbol.

  The left side of FIG. 136 (A) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In FIG. 136A, the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol variation display, and the character display SB1 of the sabotani 1 and the sabotani 2 of the sabotani 2 serving as the advance notice display of the variation are displayed at the position overlapping the structure 247. Character display SB2 is displayed. In the state of FIG. 136 (A), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB1 of the savohani 1 and the character display SB2 of the savohani 2, but is viewed from obliquely above. The player who is present can visually recognize at least part of the character display SB1 of Sabohani and at least part of the character display SB2 of Sabohani 2.

  Thus, this example is an example in which the character display SB1 of Sabohani 1 used for the notice of the change and the character display SB2 of Sabohani 2 used for the notice of the change are displayed at positions overlapping the structure 247. is there. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 128 to 138 is performed. Also good. Further, the larger the number of notice displays displayed at the position overlapping with the structure 247, the easier it may be to finally display the big hit symbol.

  136 (A) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208 and the structure 50t is located in front of the upper portion of the decorative symbol display device 208. Yes. In FIG. 136 (a), the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol variation display, and the character display SB1 of the sabotani 1 serving as a notice display of the variation is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247. A character display SB2 of the savory 2 serving as a notice display of the change is displayed at a position overlapping with the structure 50t. In the state of FIG. 136 (a), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot see the character display SB1 of the savohani 1 and the character display SB2 of the savohani 2, but is viewed from obliquely above. The player who is viewing can view at least a part of the character display SB1 of the Sabohani 1, and the player who is viewing from substantially obliquely below can view at least a part of the character display SB2 of the Sabohani 2.

  In this way, in this example, the character display SB1 of Sabohani 1 used for the notice of the change is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, and the character display SB2 of Sabohani 2 used for the notice of the change is structured. It is an example displayed at a position overlapping with the body 50t. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 128 to 138 is performed. Also good. Further, the larger the number of notice displays displayed at the positions overlapping with the plurality of structures, the easier it is to make the big hit symbol finally displayed.

  FIG. 137 shows an example of effects using the structure 247 step by step. The left side of FIG. 137 (a) shows a state in which the structure 247 is located in front of the lower part of the decorative symbol display device 208. In the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 hold number aa1, the special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, the general figure hold number aa5, The fourth symbol aa6 in the figure is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area for displaying a fluctuation icon display, and a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed in the fluctuation icon display area. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a4 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b4 alternately in this order from left to right. It is displayed. FIG. 137 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol display device 208 is performing variable display of decorative symbols.

  FIG. 137 (b) following FIG. 137 (a) shows that the entire Sabohani character display SB is displayed at the position overlapped with the structure 247 during the display of the decorative symbol variation display on the decorative symbol display device 208. It appears to appear from the bottom of the screen. The Sabohani character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In the state of FIG. 137 (b), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, while the player who is viewing from the substantially oblique upper side is the Sabohani character. At least a part of the display SB is visible.

  FIG. 137 (c) following FIG. 137 (b) shows a state in which an animation display in which the Sabohani character display SB moves further upward is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The Sabohani character display SB is displayed in the approximate center of the screen located above the structure 247, and is displayed so as to overlap a part of the medium decoration symbol.

  FIG. 137 (d) following FIG. 137 (c) shows a state in which the structure 247 moves upward and is positioned so as to overlap the Sabohani character display SB displayed at the approximate center of the screen. Is shown. In the state of FIG. 137 (d), the player who is viewing the structure 247 from substantially the front cannot visually recognize the Sabohani character display SB, but the player who is viewing from substantially diagonally below is the Sabohani character display SB. At least a portion is visible.

  As described above, in this example, after the Sabohani character display SB used for the notice of the change is displayed at a position overlapping the structure 247, the display is moved to a position not overlapping the structure 247, and then the structure is displayed. This is an example in which the body 247 is moved and the Sabohani character display SB is overlapped by the structure 247. Moreover, this example may be performed as a prefetch notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the effect of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 128 to 138 is performed. Also good. In this example, the structure 247 is moved behind the moving display of the Sabohani character display SB, which is a notice display, but the Sabohani character display SB is always displayed in accordance with the moving display of the Sabohani character display SB. The structure 247 may be moved so as to overlap, or the structure 247 may be moved first, and the movement display of the Sabohani character display SB may be delayed.

  FIG. 138 shows an effect example using the structure 247. FIG. 138 (a) shows a state in which the effect image ef1 and the Sabohani character display SB are displayed at positions where they overlap with the structure 247. FIG. The Sabohani character display SB is a display used as a notice of the change. In FIG. 138 (b), the structure 247 is viewed from the upper left to the lower right. A player who is viewing the structure 247 from the front cannot see the Sabohani character display SB, although a part of the effect image ef1 is visible. On the other hand, as shown in FIG. 138 (b), the player who is viewing the structural body 247 from the upper left to the lower right visually recognizes a part of the effect image ef1 and the substantially entire Sabohani character display SB. is made of. Thus, by displaying the effect image ef1, it is possible to change the line of sight of the player who is viewing from the front. In addition, the production in this example may be performed as a pre-reading notice. Moreover, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally easily displayed as compared with the case where the effect of this example is not performed. When the production of this example is performed, it is configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other productions shown in FIGS. 128 to 137 is performed. Also good.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 139 to FIG. 148, an example of an effect using the hold icon and the change icon will be described. Note that the arrows in the drawings of FIGS. 139 to 148 are for explaining the locus and movement direction of the hold icon and the variation icon, but the locus and movement of the hold icon and the variation icon are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It may be displayed as a display showing the direction of.

  FIG. 139 shows two examples of effects using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 139 shows an example of pattern 1 that produces the effects of FIGS. 139 (h) and (i) after FIGS. 139 (a) to (g), and FIG. 139 (j) after FIGS. 139 (a) to (g). The example of the pattern 2 which performs the production of (k) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 1 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 (a) to (i). FIG. 139 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2's reserved number aa3, the special figure 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 139 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 139 (b) following FIG. 139 (a) shows a state in which an increasing animation of the special-type special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 139 (c) following FIG. 139 (b) shows that the special figure 2 holding icon b 3 in the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 139 (d) following FIG. 139 (c) shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 2 holding icon b 3 has been finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 139 (e) following FIG. 139 (d) shows a state in which a temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 139 (f) following FIG. 139 (e) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo-continuous notice, but may be a notice display indicating that a pseudo-continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be. Further, the notice display m1 may be a notice display informing that the operation effect display is performed, or may be a notice display informing that the SP reach effect is performed.

  FIG. 139 (g) subsequent to FIG. 139 (f) shows that the notice display m 1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 139 (h) following FIG. 139 (g) shows a moving animation of a notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  FIG. 139 (i) following FIG. 139 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is ended with the notice display m1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 139 (j) and (k).

  FIG. 139 (j) following FIGS. 139 (a) to (g) shows that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 139 (g) ends, and the notice display m1 disappears. The hold icon reappearance animation in which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 reappears is displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the announcement display m1 is erased, or the ornamental symbol variation display may be resumed when the announcement display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Further, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started at the timing of erasure of the notice display m1, or the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started before the notice display m1 is deleted. Alternatively, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started after the notice display m1 is deleted.

  FIG. 139 (k) following FIG. 139 (j) is the display of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 at the position before the movement after the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is completed on the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows the state that was done.

  In this way, this example is an example in which a pseudo-continuous notice in which the decorative symbol variation display re-variates is performed when a predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a preliminary announcement display during temporary stop display of the off symbol It is. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured such that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 139 to 148 is performed. In addition, when the hold icon used for pseudo continuous notice is not displayed, the change icon may be used as the notice display m1.

  FIG. 140 shows two examples of effects using hold icons in stages. FIG. 140 shows an example of pattern 1 that produces the effects of FIGS. 140 (h) to (j) after FIGS. 140 (a) to (g), and FIGS. 140 (k) to 140 (g) after FIGS. 140 (a) to (g). The example of the pattern 2 which performs the effect of (m) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 1 of the present production example will be described with reference to FIGS. FIG. 140 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 retention number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special symbol 2's retained number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 140 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 140 (b) following FIG. 140 (a) shows a state in which an increased animation of the hold icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 140 (c) following FIG. 140 (b) shows that the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 of the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 140 (d) following FIG. 140 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 has been finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 140 (e) following FIG. 140 (d) shows a state where a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 140 (f) following FIG. 140 (e) shows that the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. The pedestal that has been displaying the special figure 1 hold icon a3 most recently has a vertically long rectangular hold icon (hereinafter referred to as the "going out hold icon" with the character string "going out" displayed as the special figure 1 hold icon a3. Is sometimes displayed.) Is displayed. Instead of the on-the-go hold icon, a hold icon having a default shape with a lighter color may be used.

  FIG. 140 (g) subsequent to FIG. 140 (f) shows that the notice display m 1 displays the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 140 (h) following FIG. 140 (g) shows a moving animation of a notice display m1 for returning to the pedestal where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and “decoration 4- The temporary stop display of “decoration 4 -decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  FIG. 140 (i) following FIG. 140 (h) shows that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice animation m1 is displayed as the special figure 1 hold icon a3, and the movement animation for returning to the pedestal before the movement ends. The hold icon in the same mode as the notice display m1 is displayed so as to overlap the on-going hold icon.

  In FIG. 140 (j) following FIG. 140 (i), the on-going on-hold icon is deleted on the decorative symbol display device 208.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS.

  FIG. 140 (k) following FIGS. 140 (a) to 140 (g) shows that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 140 (g) ends and the notice display m1 is erased. Is done. On the pedestal on which the on-the-go hold icon is displayed, a hold icon re-appearance animation is displayed in which the hold icon in the notice display m1 (default form) overlaps the on-the-go hold icon and reappears. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the announcement display m1 is erased, or the ornamental symbol variation display may be resumed when the announcement display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Further, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed at the timing of the disappearance of the advance notice display m1, or the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed before the advance of the advance notice display m1. Alternatively, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be displayed after the notice display m1 is deleted.

  In FIG. 140 (l) following FIG. 140 (k), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a3 is finished, and the special figure 1 holding icon a3 in the default mode is not moved. The state displayed on the pedestal is shown. FIG. 140 (m) shows a state where the on-going on-hold icon is deleted.

  In this way, this example is an example in which a pseudo-continuous notice in which the decorative symbol variation display re-variates is performed when a predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a preliminary announcement display during temporary stop display of the off symbol In FIG. 5, an example of temporarily displaying a hold icon in another mode instead of the hold icon being moved is shown. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured such that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 139 to 148 is performed.

  FIG. 141 shows two examples of effects using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 141 shows an example of pattern 1 that produces the effects of FIGS. 141 (h) and (i) after FIGS. 141 (a) to (g), and FIG. 141 (j) after FIGS. 141 (a) to (g). The example of the pattern 2 which performs the production of (k) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 1 of the present production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 (a) to 141 (i). 141 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 retention number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special symbol 2's retained number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 141 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 141 (b) following FIG. 141 (a) shows a state in which the increased animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 141 (c) following FIG. 141 (b) shows that the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 in the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 141 (d) following FIG. 141 (c) shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 2 holding icon b 3 has been finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 141 (e) following FIG. 141 (d) shows a state where a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 141 (f) following FIG. 141 (e) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, a hold icon temporary movement animation is displayed in which the special figure 2 hold icon b3 temporarily moves to the pedestal displayed by the special figure 1 hold icon a3. Further, in this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo continuous notice, but may be a notice display suggesting that a pseudo continuous notice is performed, and used as a notice of the change. Display may be used.

  FIG. 141 (g) following FIG. 141 (f) shows the notice symbol m 1 being the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. Further, in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, the hold icon temporary movement animation is continuously displayed, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is temporarily displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 is displayed most recently. Is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 141 (h) following FIG. 141 (g) shows a moving animation of a notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 208ab, the hold icon temporary movement animation is continuously displayed, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is moved to the original pedestal. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  FIG. 141 (i) following FIG. 141 (h) shows that, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice animation m1 is displayed as the special figure 1 hold icon a3, and the movement animation for returning to the position before the movement ends. The hold icon a3 is displayed at the position before the movement. Further, the hold icon temporary movement animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is finished, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is displayed at the position before the movement.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 141 (j) and (k).

  141 (j) following FIGS. 141 (a) to (g), the decorative symbol display device 208 shows that the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 141 (g) ends and the notice display m1 is erased. The reserved icon reappearance animation in which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 reappears on the pedestal on which the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is temporarily displayed, and the hold icon in which the special figure 2 hold icon b3 moves toward the original pedestal A temporary movement animation is displayed. In this example, the hold icon appearing in the hold icon re-appearance animation is displayed so as to overlap the special figure 2 hold icon b3. However, the special figure 2 hold icon b3 becomes the hold icon appearing in the hold icon re-appearance animation. You may display so that it may overlap. In addition, in the decorative symbol display device 208, the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is completed and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. It should be noted that the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the announcement display m1 is erased, or the ornamental symbol variation display may be resumed when the announcement display m1 is erased. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed. Further, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started at the timing of erasure of the notice display m1, or the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started before the notice display m1 is deleted. Alternatively, the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 may be started after the notice display m1 is deleted.

  FIG. 141 (k) following FIG. 141 (j) shows that the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is finished on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed at the position before the movement. Then, the holding icon temporary movement animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is finished, and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 is displayed at the position before the movement.

  In this way, this example is an example in which a pseudo-continuous notice in which the decorative symbol variation display re-variates is performed when a predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a preliminary announcement display during temporary stop display of the off symbol Is a temporary display of the hold icon on the right instead of the hold icon being moved, and when the hold icon being moved returns to the original position, the temporarily displayed hold icon returns to the original position. . When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured such that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 139 to 148 is performed.

  FIG. 142 shows two examples of effects using hold icons in stages. FIG. 142 shows an example of pattern 1 that produces the effects of FIGS. 139 (h) and (i) after FIGS. 142 (a) to 142 (g) and FIG. 139 (j) after FIGS. 142 (a) to (g). The example of the pattern 2 which performs the production of (k) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 1 of the present production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 (a) to 142 (i). 142 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth figure aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 142 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  142 (b) following FIG. 142 (a) shows a state in which an increased animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 142 (c) following FIG. 142 (b) shows that the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 in the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 142 (d) following FIG. 142 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 has been finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 142 (e) following FIG. 142 (d) shows a state where a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 142 (f) following FIG. 142 (e) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4 -decoration 4 -decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display of gas.

  FIG. 142 (g) following FIG. 142 (f) shows that the notice display m 1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 142 (h) following FIG. 142 (g) shows a moving animation of a notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The stop display “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, the character string “in preparation” is still displayed.

  FIG. 142 (i) following FIG. 142 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is ended with the notice display m1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 142 (j) and 142 (k).

  142 (j) following FIGS. 142 (a) to 142 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the collision animation of the notice display m1 shown in FIG. 142 (g) ends, and the notice display m1 is erased. Recently, a hold icon reappearance animation in which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 reappears is displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed, and the character string “in preparation” remains displayed in the tutorial display area tu1.

  FIG. 142 (k) following FIG. 142 (j) shows that the reappearance animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a <b> 3 ends on the decorative symbol display device 208 and the special figure 1 hold icon a <b> 3 is displayed at the position before the movement. It shows the state that was done.

  Thus, in this example, a pseudo-continuous notice that the decorative symbol variation display re-variates is performed when the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a gusset notice display during the temporary stop display of the off symbol. There is no example.

  FIG. 143 shows an example of an effect using the hold icon step by step.

  FIG. 143 (a) shows, in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2's reserved number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 143 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 143 (b) following FIG. 143 (a) shows a state in which an increased animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 143 (c) following FIG. 143 (b) shows that the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 of the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 143 (d) following FIG. 143 (c) shows a state where the increase animation of the special figure 2 holding icon b 3 has been finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 143 (e) following FIG. 143 (d) shows a state in which a temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 143 (f) following FIG. 143 (e) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo-continuous notice, but may be a notice display indicating that a pseudo-continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be.

  FIG. 143 (g) following FIG. 143 (f) shows that the notice display m 1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 143 (h) following FIG. 143 (g) shows a moving animation of a notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  FIG. 143 (i) following FIG. 143 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is ended with the notice display m1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  FIG. 143 (j) following FIG. 143 (i) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 143 (k) following FIG. 143 (j) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  FIG. 143 (l) subsequent to FIG. 143 (k) is a display of the preliminary symbol m1 in the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 143 (m) following FIG. 143 (l) shows a re-moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, The temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 3” indicating that the third pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  FIG. 143 (n) following FIG. 143 (m) shows a state in which the re-moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is completed with the notice display m1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Yes.

  In this way, in this example, during the temporary stop display of the off symbol, a predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a warning display, and the pseudo continuous notice that the decorative symbol variation display re-varies continuously continues multiple times. This is an example. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured such that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 139 to 148 is performed. In addition, when the hold icon used for pseudo continuous notice is not displayed, the change icon may be used as the notice display m1.

  FIG. 144 shows step-by-step examples using the hold icon.

  144 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, in the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 144 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  144 (b) subsequent to FIG. 144 (a) shows a state in which an increased animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 144 (c) following FIG. 144 (b) shows that the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 in the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 144 (d) following FIG. 144 (c) shows a state in which the increasing animation of the special figure 2 holding icon b 3 has been finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 144 (e) following FIG. 144 (d) shows a state where the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 144 (f) following FIG. 144 (e) shows that the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo-continuous notice, but may be a notice display indicating that a pseudo-continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be.

  144 (g) subsequent to FIG. 144 (f) is a display of the preliminary symbol m 1 during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4 -decoration 4 -decoration 5” on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  144 (h) following FIG. 144 (g) shows a moving animation of the notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  144 (i) subsequent to FIG. 144 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is ended with the notice display m1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  FIG. 144 (j) following FIG. 144 (i) shows a state where a temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  In FIG. 144 (k) following FIG. 144 (j), the special symbol 2 hold icon b3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 2 hold icon b3 have the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 2 hold icon b3 of the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  144 (l) following FIG. 144 (k) is a display in which the notice symbol m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  144 (m) subsequent to FIG. 144 (l) shows a re-moving animation of the notice display m1 returning to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 2 holding icon b3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, The temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 3” indicating that the third pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  144 (n) following FIG. 144 (m) shows a state in which the re-moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is completed with the notice display m1 as the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. Yes.

  Thus, this example is an example in which a pseudo continuous notice is performed a plurality of times using two different hold icons as the notice display m1 in one change. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured such that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 139 to 148 is performed. If there are not enough hold icons used for the pseudo-continuous notice, a change icon may be used as the notice display m1.

  FIG. 145 shows an example of an effect using the hold icon step by step.

  FIG. 145 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2's reserved number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 145 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 145 (b) following FIG. 145 (a) shows a state in which the increased animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 145 (c), following FIG. 145 (b), shows that the special figure 2 hold icon b3 in the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 145 (d) following FIG. 145 (c) shows a state where the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 145 (e) following FIG. 145 (d) shows a state in which a temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 145 (f) following FIG. 145 (e) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo-continuous notice, but may be a notice display indicating that a pseudo-continuous notice is performed, or a display used as a notice of the change. It may be.

  FIG. 145 (g) subsequent to FIG. 145 (f) is a display of the preliminary symbol m1 on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5”. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 145 (h) following FIG. 145 (g) shows a moving animation of the notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, the character string “in preparation” is still displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m1. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m1.

  FIG. 145 (i) following FIG. 145 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is ended with the notice display m1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  In FIG. 145 (j) following FIG. 145 (i), a reach effect by “decoration 4” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “reach!” Is displayed.

  In this way, in this example, the predetermined hold icon collides with the middle symbol of the decorative symbol as a notice display during the temporary stop display of the off symbol, so that the decorative symbol variation display is changed again and the reach effect is started. It is an example. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured such that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 139 to 148 is performed.

  FIG. 146 shows step-by-step examples using variation icons.

  FIG. 146 (a) shows in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 146 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 146 (b) following FIG. 146 (a) shows a state in which the increased animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 146 (c) following FIG. 146 (b) shows that the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 in the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 146 (d) following FIG. 146 (c) shows a state where the increase animation of the special figure 2 holding icon b 3 is finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 146 (e) following FIG. 146 (d) shows a state where the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 146 (f) following FIG. 146 (e) shows that the variable icon ad 1 is displayed from the variable icon display area 280 while the temporary display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out and moves as a notice display m2. The notice display m2 and the special variation icon ad1 have the same display mode. Further, no variation icon is displayed on the base of the variation icon display area 280. In this example, the notice display m2 is a notice display used for producing a pseudo-continuous notice, but may be a notice display suggesting that a pseudo-continuous notice is performed, or may be a display used as a pre-reading notice. May be.

  FIG. 146 (g) following FIG. 146 (f) shows that the notice display m 2 is displayed in the middle symbol display area while the temporary stop display “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m2 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 146 (h) following FIG. 146 (g) shows a moving animation of the notice display m2 that returns to the position (pedestal) of the variable icon display area 280 on the decorative symbol display device 208. This shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “Decoration 5” is finished and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again. In the tutorial display area tu1, a character string “× 2” indicating that the second pseudo variation is performed is displayed. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed before the start of the moving animation of the notice display m2, or the decorative symbol variation display may be resumed at the start of the movement animation of the notice display m2. The decorative symbol variation display may be resumed after the start of the moving animation of the notice display m2.

  FIG. 146 (i) following FIG. 146 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is ended with the notice display m2 as the fluctuation icon ad1 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  As described above, this example is an example in which a pseudo continuous notice that the decoration symbol variation display is re-variable is performed when the variation icon collides with the middle symbol of the decoration symbol as a notice display during temporary stop display of the off symbol. . When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured such that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 139 to 148 is performed. Note that not only the change icon in the default form but also a change icon in a form other than the default form may be used as the notice display m2 in this example.

  FIG. 147 shows staged examples using the hold icon step by step.

  FIG. 147 (a) shows in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 147 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 147 (b) following FIG. 147 (a) shows a state in which an increased animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a 3 in the default mode is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 147 (c), which follows FIG. 147 (b), shows that the special figure 2 hold icon b3 of the default mode is displayed in parallel with the end of the increase animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It shows a state where an increase animation is displayed.

  FIG. 147 (d) following FIG. 147 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 holding icon b 3 has been finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 147 (e) following FIG. 147 (d) shows a state in which a temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 147 (f) following FIG. 147 (e) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a 3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed. In this example, the notice display m1 is a display used as a prefetch notice.

  FIG. 147 (g) subsequent to FIG. 147 (f) shows a notice symbol m1 in the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 4” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 5” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 147 (h) following FIG. 147 (g) shows a moving animation of a notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The stop display “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is displayed.

  FIG. 147 (i) following FIG. 147 (h) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is ended with the notice display m1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  FIG. 147 (j) following FIG. 147 (i) shows a state in which the next symbol variation has been executed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, and the hold icon movement animation in which the hold icon moves to the left and the hold / fluctuation icon move animation in which the hold icon moves to the change icon display area 208 are finished. .

  FIG. 147 (k) following FIG. 147 (j) shows a state in which a temporary stop display of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 147 (l) following FIG. 147 (k) shows that the special figure 1 holding icon a3 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  FIG. 147 (m) following FIG. 147 (l) is a display of the preliminary symbol m1 on the decorative symbol display device 208 during the temporary stop display of “decoration 2-decoration 2-decoration 3”. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 2” that is temporarily stopped and displayed in 208b is displayed. The notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 2” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 3” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 147 (n) following FIG. 147 (m) shows a moving animation of a notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The stop display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3” is displayed.

  FIG. 147 (o) following FIG. 147 (n) shows a state in which the moving animation for returning to the position before the movement is ended with the notice display m1 as the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. .

  FIG. 147 (p) following FIG. 147 (o) shows a state in which the next symbol variation has been executed. In the decorative symbol display device 208, the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, and the movement animation of the hold icon in which the hold icon moves to the left and the hold / fluctuation icon movement animation in which the hold icon moves to the change icon display area 208 are finished. Yes.

  FIG. 147 (q) following FIG. 147 (p) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 147 (r) following FIG. 147 (q) is a special figure 1 holding icon a3 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8” is displayed. 2 shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed that jumps out of the on-hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display m1. The notice display m1 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 have the same display mode and are used as a notice of the change. In addition, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab is displayed.

  FIG. 147 (s) following FIG. 147 (r) is a display in which the notice display m1 is displayed in the middle symbol display area during the temporary stop display of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 8” on the ornamental symbol display device 208. A state is shown in which a collision animation that collides with “decoration 7” that is temporarily displayed in 208b is displayed. Note that the notice display m1 may collide with “decoration 7” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, or “decoration 8” temporarily displayed in the right symbol display area 208c. May collide with all the decorative symbols that are temporarily stopped and displayed in the left, middle, and right symbol display areas 208a, 208b, and 208c.

  FIG. 147 (t) following FIG. 147 (s) shows a moving animation of a notice display m1 that returns to the position (pedestal) where the special figure 1 hold icon a3 was displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The temporary stop display of “decoration 2—decoration 2—decoration 3” is finished, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed.

  In FIG. 147 (u) following FIG. 147 (t), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice animation m1 is displayed as the special figure 1 hold icon a3, and the movement animation for returning to the position before the movement ends, and “decoration 7” is displayed. Reach production will be performed.

  As described above, this example is an example in which a predetermined hold icon is used as a notice display during the temporary stop display of the off symbol, and a continuous notice that collides with the middle design of the decorative design is performed over a plurality of fluctuations, thereby developing a reach effect. is there. In this example, the notice display that appears for the first time and the second time is used as a look-ahead notice, and the notice display that appears for the third time is used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the other effects shown in FIGS. 139 to 148 is performed.

  FIG. 148 shows an example of an effect using the hold icon step by step.

  FIG. 148 (a) shows in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab. The special figure 1 hold icon a1 and a2 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 and b2 are alternately arranged in this order from left to right. Is displayed. Further, the special figure 2 hold icon b2 is a hold icon in the form of a character. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 148 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. Note that the hold icon in the form of a character may be used as a prefetch notice.

  FIG. 148 (b) following FIG. 148 (a) shows a state in which an increasing animation of the special figure 1 hold icon a <b> 3 in the form of a character is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 148 (c), which follows FIG. 148 (b), is a special figure 2 in the form of a character in parallel with the end of the increasing animation of the special figure 1 holding icon a3 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which an increasing animation of the hold icon b3 is displayed.

  FIG. 148 (d) following FIG. 148 (c) shows a state in which the increase animation of the special figure 2 hold icon b 3 has been finished in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 148 (e) following FIG. 148 (d) shows a state in which the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5” is displayed on the ornamental symbol display device 208. FIG.

  FIG. 148 (f) following FIG. 148 (e) shows that the special figure 2 hold icon b <b> 2 is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208 while the temporary stop display of “decoration 4−decoration 4−decoration 5” is displayed. 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab jumps out and moves as notice display c1, special figure 1 hold icon a3 jumps out of special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as notice display c2, and special figure 2 hold icon A moving animation is displayed in which b3 jumps out of the special map 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab and moves as a notice display c3. The notice displays c1 to c3, the special figure 2 hold icon b2, b3, and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 are all in the same display mode. Further, the hold icon is not displayed on the pedestal on which the special figure 2 hold icons b2 and b3 and the special figure 1 hold icon a3 in the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab are displayed. In this example, the notice displays c1 to c3 are displays used as a notice of the change, but may be a notice display used to produce a pseudo continuous notice or suggest that a pseudo continuous notice is performed. It may be a notice display or may be used in combination with a prefetch notice.

  In FIG. 148 (g) following FIG. 148 (f), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display c1 is changed to the notice display c1 ′, the notice display c2 is changed to the notice display c2 ′, and the notice display c3 is changed. The notice display c3 ′ shows a changed state. The notice displays c1 'to c3' are all in the same display mode, and have a display mode in which a large-sized character of Tono is fighting by pulling out a Japanese sword. In the decorative symbol display measure 208, while displaying the temporary stop display of “decoration 4-decoration 4-decoration 5”, the notice display c1 ′ fights against “decoration 4” temporarily displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, A battle animation in which the notice display c2 ′ fights “decoration 4” temporarily stopped in the left symbol display area 208b and the battle animation fights “decoration 5” in which the notice display c3 ′ temporarily stops and displays in the right symbol display area 208c. It is displayed.

  FIG. 148 (h), following FIG. 148 (g), shows a notice in the decorative symbol display device 208 while the notice display c1 ′ changes to c1, the notice display c2 ′ changes to c2, and the notice display c3 ′ changes to c3. The notice c3 was displaying the special figure 2 hold icon b3 at the position where the display c1 was displaying the special figure 2 hold icon b2, the notice display c2 was showing the special figure 1 hold icon a3 The moving animation of the notice displays c1 to c3 returning to the position is displayed, and the temporary stop display of “decoration 4—decoration 4—decoration 5” is completed, and the decorative symbol variation display is displayed again.

  FIG. 148 (i) following FIG. 148 (h) shows that in the decorative symbol display device 208, the notice display c1 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 2 hold icon b2, and the notice display c2 is the special figure 1 hold icon a3. The movement animation is returned to the position before the movement, and the notice display c3 returns to the position before the movement as the special figure 2 hold icon b3. In the decorative symbol display device 208, a reach effect of “decoration 7” is executed.

  In this way, in this example, during the temporary stop display of the off symbol, a plurality of hold icons collide with a plurality of decorative symbols as a plurality of notice displays, so that the decorative symbol variation display re-varies and the reach effect is started. This is an example. When the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the big hit symbol is finally displayed and displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or when the effect of this example is performed May be configured such that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 139 to 147 is performed. In addition, when the number of the hold icons used as the notice display in this example is insufficient, the change icon may be used as the notice display.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIGS. 149 to 169.

  FIGS. 149 (a) to 149 (c) show an example of effects using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 149 (a) shows in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 holding number aa1, the special symbol 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reserved number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 145 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 149 (a), a balloon display f1 is displayed at the center of the screen. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 149 (b) following FIG. 149 (a) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 149 (c) following FIG. 149 (b) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the expiration date of the operation of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed above the balloon display f1. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. The horizontal width of the balloon display f1 and the horizontal width of the balloon display f2 are the same, and the height of the balloon display f1 and the height of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, but the width and height are different from each other. There may be a case where only the width is different, or there may be a case where only the height is different. The same applies to the balloon indications f1 and f2 in the following description.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 150A to 150I show step-by-step example effects using balloon display.

  150 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth figure aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 150 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  FIG. 150 (b) following FIG. 150 (a) is displayed such that a balloon display f <b> 1 by the character of Tono appears from the left end of the screen. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative design, and is overlapped with the general figure reservation number aa5 and the general design fourth symbol aa6.

  FIG. 150 (c) following FIG. 150 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 that appears from the left end of the screen moves from left to right on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. Is displayed. Note that the balloon display f1 does not display the character string displayed in the balloon part and the pattern of the clear mark until the state immediately before being stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen (only the frame of the balloon part is displayed). Then, after stopping and displaying at the approximate center of the screen, the character string and the pattern of the clear mark may be displayed in order from the beginning of the character string, or the character string and the pattern of the clear mark may be displayed all at once. Good. The same configuration may be used for other balloon display.

  FIG. 150 (d) following FIG. 150 (c) shows a button notice display h 110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h 112 on the decorative symbol display device 208 above the balloon display f 1. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  In FIG. 150 (e) following FIG. 150 (d), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button preview display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. , The balloon display f2 by the frog character appears so as to appear from the right end of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. In this example, the balloon display f2 is a display that is given priority over the balloon display f1. For this reason, when the balloon displays f1 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1. In this example, a part of the pattern of the sunny mark in the balloon display f1 may overlap the balloon part of the balloon display f2, but a part other than the pattern of the sunny mark may overlap the balloon display f2. .

  FIG. 150 (e) shows a state in which a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed due to the appearance of the balloon display f2. In this example, the balloon display f1 is performed simultaneously with a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward and a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves toward the left.

  In FIG. 150 (f) following FIG. 150 (e), a balloon animation f 2 that appears from the right edge of the screen is moved to the left, and is displayed in the approximate center of the screen, and the balloon f 1 moves upward. The moving animation to be performed is shown in a state displayed at the upper center of the screen.

  FIG. 150 (g) subsequent to FIG. 150 (f) is a button notice display h 110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display in a position overlapping the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, which indicates a state in which a notice effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 150 (h), which is subsequent to FIG. 150 (g), erases the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 by pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. The balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. In this example, the balloon display f3 is a display that is prioritized over the balloon display f2. For this reason, when the balloon displays f3 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f2. In this example, the character string in the balloon part of the balloon display f2 may overlap the balloon part of the balloon display f3, but a part other than the character string of the balloon part may overlap the balloon display f3. The horizontal width of the balloon display f3 is the same as the horizontal width of the balloon displays f1 and f2, and the height of the balloon display f3 is the same as the height of the balloon displays f1 and f2, but the horizontal width and height are different. There may be a case where only the width is different, or there may be a case where only the height is different. The same applies to the balloon displays f1 to f3 in the following description.

  Further, FIG. 150 (h) shows a state in which the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 are moved upwards due to the appearance of the balloon display f3, and the balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. Is shown. In this example, the movement animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward and the movement animation in which the balloon display f3 moves to the right are performed simultaneously.

  In FIG. 150 (i) following FIG. 150 (h), a balloon animation f3 that appears from the left edge of the screen is moved to the right, and is displayed at the approximate center of the screen, and the balloon f2 moves upward. The moving animation is performed and is displayed at the substantially upper center of the screen, and the balloon display f1 indicates a state where it is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. Further, after this frame, the balloon display f2 of the samurai character and the balloon display f3 of the princess character may be deleted after the balloon display f2 is deleted, or the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be deleted. The balloon display f2 may be erased at the same time or after the balloon display f3 is erased. In addition, at least one of the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be deleted before the reach symbol in the decorative symbol variation display is displayed, or the nth (n is an arbitrary number) of pseudo continuous display ) May be deleted before starting, or may be deleted before displaying the temporary stop display. The balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be erased immediately on the spot, or may be erased so as to fade out on the spot, or the same as the balloon display f1 of the character. After displaying the moving animation that moves upward, the animation may be erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen, or may be erased so as to exit from the direction of each appearance. The same applies to the balloon display described in the subsequent drawings.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 149 to 169 is performed. Note that the balloon display described in this example and the following drawings includes each component of the balloon display (weather mark (sunny mark, cloudy mark, rain mark) pattern, character string display, frame, character name display, character In each face image), at least a part of each component may be displayed as an animation, only a part thereof may be displayed as an animation, or all may be displayed as an animation. For example, an animation display in which the symbol of the clear mark rotates may be displayed, an animation display in which the character string display blinks may be displayed, or an animation display in which the character kisses may be displayed. The whole balloon display may be moved and displayed while displaying one or more of an animation display in which the pattern of the clear mark rotates, an animation display in which the character string display blinks, and an animation display in which the character kisses. Alternatively, the character string display may be displayed in order from the first character, and an animation display in which the character pokes up during the period when the number of characters displayed in the character string is increasing may be displayed. The animation display of each component of the balloon display may be a repeatable animation display in which operations from the beginning to the end of the animation display are connected. For example, one animation display that rotates and returns to the original posture may be repeated, one animation display that returns to the original size after enlargement or reduction may be repeated, or the original animation display after moving the position One animation display returning to the position may be repeated, one blinking animation display may be repeated, or one animation display in which the gloss display moves or changes may be repeated. Moreover, a part of at least one animation display of each component of the balloon display may overlap a part of another animation of each component of the balloon display. In addition, the balloon display is not limited to this example, and a part of each component of the balloon display may be transparent or translucent, only a part may be transparent or translucent, or all may be translucent.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  151 (a) to 151 (m) show an example of an effect using a balloon display step by step.

  151 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 151 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 151 (b) following FIG. 151 (a), a balloon display f <b> 1 is displayed from the left end of the screen. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative design, and is overlapped with the general figure reservation number aa5 and the general design fourth symbol aa6.

  FIG. 151 (c) following FIG. 151 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 that appears from the left end of the screen moves from left to right on the decorative symbol display device 208 and stops at the approximate center of the screen. Is displayed.

  FIG. 151 (d) following FIG. 151 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  151 (e) following FIG. 151 (d), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, and the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are deleted. Then, a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is started.

  In FIG. 151 (f) following FIG. 151 (e), the moving animation that moves above the balloon display f 1 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f 1 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen.

  In FIG. 151 (g) following FIG. 151 (f), the balloon display f2 by the frog character appears from the right end of the screen after the movement animation of the balloon display f1 is interrupted. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part.

  FIG. 151 (h) following FIG. 151 (g) shows a state in which a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 appearing from the right end of the screen moves to the left is performed and displayed at the approximate center of the screen.

  151 (i) following FIG. 151 (h) is a button notice display h110 that imitates the chance button 136 at the position overlapping the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 and the operation expiration date display on the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, which indicates a state in which a notice effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  151 (j) following FIG. 151 (i), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, and the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are deleted. The balloon displays f1 and f2 show a state where a moving animation is performed in which the balloons move upward at the same speed. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 151 (k) following FIG. 151 (j), the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, the moving animation moving above the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f2 is stopped at the upper part of the screen. It is displayed.

  In FIG. 151 (l) following FIG. 151 (k), the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part.

  FIG. 151 (m) following FIG. 151 (l) shows a state in which a balloon animation f3 that has appeared from the left end of the screen moves to the right and is displayed at the approximate center of the screen.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 149 to 169 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  152 (a) to 152 (m) show step-by-step effects using balloon display.

  FIG. 152 (a) shows in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth figure aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 152 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  152 (b) following FIG. 152 (a) is displayed such that a balloon display f1 by the character of Tono appears from the left end of the screen. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap with the decorative design, and is overlapped with the general figure reservation number aa5 and the general design fourth symbol aa6.

  152 (c) following FIG. 152 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 that has appeared from the left end of the screen moves from left to right on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. Is displayed.

  FIG. 152 (d) following FIG. 152 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 152 (e) following FIG. 152 (d) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. , The balloon display f2 by the frog character appears so as to appear from the right end of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. In this example, the balloon display f2 is a display that is given priority over the balloon display f1. For this reason, when the balloon displays f1 and f2 overlap, the balloon display f2 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 152 (f) following FIG. 152 (e) shows a state in which a balloon animation f 2 that has appeared from the right end of the screen moves to the left and is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. . The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is a position where the balloon part of the balloon display f2 exactly overlaps the balloon part of the balloon display 1. The balloon display f2 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f1, and therefore, the character string of “Morning weather” displayed in the balloon part of the balloon display f1, the pattern of the sunny mark, and the frame part of the balloon part. Is hidden in the balloon portion of the balloon display f2, but the face image of the character and the character image of “don” are not hidden in the balloon display f2.

  In FIG. 152 (g) following FIG. 152 (f), a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is started after the movement animation moving toward the left of the balloon display f2 ends. In FIG. 152 (g), the balloon display f1 moves upward, so that the character string of “morning in the morning” and the pattern of the clear mark and the frame of the balloon part hidden by the balloon part of the balloon display f2 The upper half of is visible. It should be noted that at a certain timing between FIG. 152 (f) and FIG. 152 (g), the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 is in a state where a part of the fine mark pattern is displayed and no character string is displayed. Become.

  In FIG. 152 (h) following FIG. 152 (g), the moving animation that moves above the balloon display f1 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen.

  FIG. 152 (i) following FIG. 152 (h) is a button notice display h 110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display in a position overlapping the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, which indicates a state in which a notice effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 152 (j) following FIG. 152 (i) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, thereby deleting the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. The balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the left end of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. In this example, the balloon display f3 is a display that is prioritized over the balloon display f2. For this reason, when the balloon displays f2 and f3 overlap, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap the balloon display f2.

  FIG. 152 (k) following FIG. 152 (j) shows a state in which a balloon animation f3 that has appeared from the left edge of the screen moves to the right and is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. . The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed is a position where the balloon part of the balloon display f3 is exactly overlapped with the balloon part of the balloon display 2. The balloon display f3 is a display that has priority over the balloon display f2. Therefore, the character string “morning weather” displayed in the balloon part of the balloon display f2, a cloudy mark pattern, and a frame part of the balloon part. Is hidden in the balloon portion of the balloon display f3, but the face image of the frog character and the character image of “爺” are not hidden in the balloon display f3.

  FIG. 152 (l) following FIG. 152 (k) shows a state where a moving animation is performed in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed. In FIG. 152 (l), when the balloon display f2 moves upward, the character string “morning in the morning” and the cloudy mark pattern and the frame part of the balloon part hidden by the balloon part of the balloon display f3. The upper half of is visible. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 151 (m) following FIG. 152 (l), the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, the moving animation that moves above the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen. Has been.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 149 to 169 is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 153, two examples of balloon display effects will be described. FIG. 153 shows an example of pattern 1 in which the effects of FIGS. 153 (n) to (q) are performed after FIGS. 153 (a) to (m), and FIGS. 153 (r) to (m) after FIGS. 153 (a) to (m). The example of the pattern 2 which performs the production of (t) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
FIG. 153 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 153 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 153 (b) following FIG. 153 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 153 (c) following FIG. 153 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 that appears from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown.

  FIG. 153 (d) following FIG. 153 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 153 (e) following FIG. 153 (d) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part.

  FIG. 153 (f) following FIG. 153 (e) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 153 (g) following FIG. 153 (f) is a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button preview display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed, indicating a state in which a preview effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 153 (h), following FIG. 153 (g), shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen.

  FIG. 153 (i) following FIG. 153 (h) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state of being stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f2 was stopped before. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

  FIG. 153 (j) following FIG. 153 (i) is a button notice display h110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display in a position overlapping the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, which indicates a state in which a notice effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 153 (k) following FIG. 153 (j), the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, and the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are deleted. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f2 and f3 move upward at the same speed, the balloon display f4 by the Sabohani character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f4, a character image of “honey” displayed at a position where the character image of Sabohani and the character image of Sabohani overlap, and a character string and a pattern of “Lance when reach” are displayed. It is a display that includes a speech balloon. In addition, the height of the balloon part of the balloon display f4 is configured to be approximately half that of the balloon part of the balloon display f1 or the like.

  FIG. 153 (l) following FIG. 153 (k) shows a state where the scroll display of the balloon displays f2 to f4 is temporarily interrupted. The balloon part f4 that has appeared from the lower part of the screen is stopped and displayed at the position where it has appeared, and the movement above the balloon display f3 is also temporarily stopped and displayed. The substantially lower half of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 153 (m) following FIG. 153 (l), a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed at the position overlapping the balloon display f2 on the decorative symbol display device 208. , A state in which a notice effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 153 (n) following FIG. 153 (m) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f2 to f4 is resumed and the balloon display f5 is displayed from the bottom of the screen. The balloon display f5 is a balloon section in which a face image of a gale character, a character image of “gaze” displayed on the face image of a gale character, a character string and a pattern of “hot” are displayed. It is a display including. Further, the height of the balloon part of the balloon display f5 is configured to be approximately twice that of the balloon part such as the balloon display f1.

  In FIG. 153 (o) following FIG. 153 (n), scroll display of balloon displays f3 to f5 is performed, and the balloon display f3 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen.

  In FIG. 153 (p) following FIG. 153 (o), scroll display of the balloon displays f4 and f5 is performed, and the balloon display f4 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen.

  FIG. 153 (q) following FIG. 153 (p) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f5 is interrupted or terminated and the balloon display f5 is stopped. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the entire balloon display f5. Thereafter, the balloon display f5 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed.

<Example of pattern 2>
FIG. 153 (r) following FIGS. 153 (a) to 153 (m) is displayed so that the balloon display f5 appears from the left end of the screen, and the balloon display f2 which has been stopped in FIG. 153 (m). A moving animation for simultaneously moving f3 in the right direction is shown. That is, this example is an example in which an effect of scrolling the balloon displays f2 to f5 to the right is performed after the effect of scrolling the balloon displays f1 to f4 upward.

  In FIG. 153 (s) following FIG. 153 (r), scroll display is performed toward the right of the balloon displays f2 to f5, and the balloon displays f2 to f3 are erased so as to come out simultaneously from the right end of the screen. .

  FIG. 153 (t) following FIG. 153 (s) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f5 is interrupted or terminated and the balloon display f5 is stopped. The decorative symbol display device 208 displays the entire balloon display f5. Thereafter, the balloon display f5 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 149 to 169 is performed. Further, when the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the example of pattern 2 of this example is performed. When the example of the pattern 2 is performed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than when the example of the pattern 1 of the present example is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 154, two examples of effect examples of balloon display will be described. FIG. 154 shows an example of pattern 1 that produces the effects of FIGS. 154 (k) and (l) after FIGS. 154 (a) to (j), and FIG. 154 (m) after FIGS. 154 (a) to (j). The example of the pattern 2 which performs the production of (n) is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
FIG. 154 (a) shows in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 retention number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2's retained number aa3, The usual figure hold number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 154 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 154 (b) following FIG. 154 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 154 (c), which follows FIG. 154 (b), shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 that appears from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown.

  FIG. 154 (d) following FIG. 154 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 154 (e) following FIG. 154 (d) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. The moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part.

  FIG. 154 (f) following FIG. 154 (e) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward and a balloon animation f2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 154 (g) following FIG. 154 (f) shows a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button preview display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed, indicating a state in which a preview effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 154 (h) following FIG. 154 (g) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, and the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are deleted. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen.

  FIG. 154 (i) following FIG. 154 (h) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state of being stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f2 was stopped before. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different.

  FIG. 154 (j) following FIG. 154 (i) is a button notice display h110 that imitates the chance button 136 at the position overlapping the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 and the operation expiration date display in the decorative symbol display device 208. h112 is displayed, which indicates a state in which a notice effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 154 (k), which follows FIG. 154 (j), deletes the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 by pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. The erased balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon displays f1 to f3 are scrolled and displayed downward.

  FIG. 154 (l) following FIG. 154 (k) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is once interrupted or terminated. The balloon display f1 reappearing from the upper part of the screen is stopped and displayed at a position near the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the substantially center of the screen. Thereafter, the balloon displays f1 and f2 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed.

<Example of pattern 2>
FIG. 154 (m), following FIGS. 154 (a) to (j), shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, so that the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. Is displayed so that the balloon display f1 ′ appears from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon displays f1 ′, f2, and f3 are scrolled and displayed downward. The balloon display f1 ′ is a balloon in which the face image of the lord character, the character image of “dono” displayed on the face image of the lord character, the character string and the pattern of “pseudo chance!” Are displayed. It is a display including a part.

  FIG. 154 (n) following FIG. 154 (m) shows a state where the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 ′ and f2 is once interrupted or terminated. The balloon display f1 'appearing from the upper part of the screen is stopped and displayed at a position near the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the substantial center of the screen. Thereafter, the balloon indications f1 ′ and f2 may be erased, and a pseudo continuous notice effect or reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed. Good.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 149 to 169 is performed. Further, when the example of pattern 1 of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally displayed more easily than when the example of pattern 2 of this example is performed. When the example of the pattern 2 is performed, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than when the example of the pattern 1 of the present example is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 155 (a) to 155 (i) show an example of an effect using a balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 155 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 retention number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2's retained number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 155 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 155 (b) following FIG. 155 (a), a balloon display f1 ′ by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed. The balloon display f1 ′ is a balloon in which the face image of the lord character, the character image of “dono” displayed on the face image of the lord character, the character string and the pattern of “pseudo chance!” Are displayed. It is a display including a part. The balloon display f1 'is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 155 (c) following FIG. 155 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 ′ appearing from the bottom of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. Is displayed.

  FIG. 155 (d) following FIG. 155 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 ′ on the decorative symbol display device 208. This shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 155 (e) following FIG. 155 (d) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The moving animation in which the balloon display f1 ′ moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the frog character appears so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part.

  FIG. 155 (f) following FIG. 155 (e) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 ′ moves upward, and the balloon display f2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 ′ is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f1 'was stopped before. In addition, the movement speed of the balloon display f1 'and the movement speed of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, but may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 155 (g) following FIG. 155 (f) shows that the scroll display of the balloon display f 1 ′ and the balloon display f 2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f 1 ′ and the balloon display f 2. A button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed at the positions to be displayed, indicating a state in which a notice effect for urging the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 155 (h) following FIG. 155 (g) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. While the balloon display f1 ′ is stopped, a moving animation in which f2 moves upward is performed, and at the same time, a balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. Further, the balloon display f2 is erased without being displayed above the position where the balloon display f1 'is displayed. Further, by displaying the speech balloon display f1 ′ with priority over the speech balloon display f2, when the speech balloon display f2 is moving behind the speech balloon display f1 by scroll display, the speech balloon display f1 of the speech balloon display f2 is displayed. It may be configured not to display a portion where 'is overlapped. In this case, the face image of the frog character and the character image of the heel in the balloon display f2 are not overlapped with the balloon display f1 ', and are thus scroll-displayed to the upper end of the screen. Thus, in this example, when a balloon display with high jackpot reliability appears, the balloon with higher reliability is prioritized and deleted, so that a balloon display with high reliability remains on the screen. It is configured.

  FIG. 155 (i) following FIG. 155 (h) shows a balloon display in which a balloon animation f3 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward while the balloon display f1 ′ is stopped and displayed. f3 shows a state in which it is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f2 was stopped before. Thereafter, the balloon displays f1 'and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 149 to 169 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 156 (a) to (i) show step-by-step example effects using balloon display.

  FIG. 156 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 156 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 156 (b) following FIG. 156 (a), a balloon display f1 ′ by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 156 (c) following FIG. 156 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown.

  FIG. 156 (d) following FIG. 156 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 156 (e), following FIG. 156 (d), shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. After the balloon display f2 by the frog character appears so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, the moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. In this example, since the balloon display f2 is displayed so that it appears from the lower part of the screen and the balloon display f1 moves upward, the balloon display f2 is substantially below the balloon display f1. It appears to overlap in half.

  FIG. 156 (f) following FIG. 156 (e) shows a moving animation in which the lower half of the balloon display f1 is overlapped with the balloon display f2 and both move upward. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 156 (g) following FIG. 156 (f) shows the chance that the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily interrupts the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 and at a position where it overlaps the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button advance notice h110 imitating the button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, which shows a state in which the advance notice effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 156 (h), which follows FIG. 156 (g), erases the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 by pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. The balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen while the balloon displays f1 and f2 are stopped. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. Also, the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to overlap the substantially lower half of the balloon display f2. In this example, a part of the balloon part of the balloon display 1 (a character string “Today's weather is”, a fine mark pattern or a frame part of the balloon part) is part of the balloon part of the balloon display f2 (“Today's weather is” It overlaps with a part of the character string, cloudy mark pattern and balloon part), and the balloon part of the balloon display 2 ("Today's weather" character string, cloudy mark picture and balloon part frame part) ) Overlaps with a part of the balloon part of the balloon display f3 ("Today's weather is a character string", a rain mark pattern, or a part of the balloon part frame). There may be cases. For example, the face images of each character may overlap, the character images of each character's name may overlap, or the character's face image overlaps the balloon There may be a case where the balloon part overlaps the face image of the character, or there may be a case where the character image of the character name overlaps the balloon part.

  FIG. 156 (i) following FIG. 156 (h) shows the position where the upper end of the balloon part f1 and the lower end of the balloon part f3 fit on the screen when the moving animation of moving the balloon displays f1 to f3 upward is performed. The state where the movement animation of the balloon displays f1 to f3 is interrupted or terminated is shown. Thereafter, the balloon displays f1 to f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed. In this example, two balloon displays are overlapped. However, two or more balloon displays may be overlapped. For example, the greater the number of overlapped balloon displays, the higher the reliability of the big hit. It may be. Further, in this example, the overlapping state of each balloon display is configured to be equal, but the overlapping state of each balloon display may be configured not to be equal. For example, the area where the balloon displays f1 and f2 overlap may be smaller or larger than the area where the balloon displays f2 and f3 overlap. The balloon displays f1 and f2 may overlap and the balloon displays f2 and f3 may not overlap, or the balloon displays f1 and f2 may not overlap and the balloon displays f2 and f3 may overlap.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 149 to 169 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 157 (a) to 157 (i) show an example of an effect using a balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 157 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2's reserved number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 157 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 157 (b) following FIG. 157 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 157 (c) following FIG. 157 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown.

  FIG. 157 (d) following FIG. 157 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 157 (e) following FIG. 157 (d) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. The balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation that moves upward after the balloon display f1 is reduced is displayed. The balloon display f1 may be gradually reduced while moving upward. In addition, the reduction degree of the balloon display is not limited to this example, and a part of each of the balloon display components (weather pattern, character, frame, character name, character face image) may be reduced, Only a part may be reduced, the whole may be reduced, or the reduction rate may be different for each configuration.

  FIG. 157 (f) following FIG. 157 (e) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 157 (g) following FIG. 157 (f) is a chance that the decorative symbol display device 208 temporarily interrupts the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2, and takes a chance to overlap the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button advance notice h110 imitating the button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, which shows a state in which the advance notice effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 157 (h) following FIG. 157 (g) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. The balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 move upward is displayed. Further, the balloon display f2 is configured to be reduced and displayed before moving upward, but the balloon display f2 may be gradually reduced while moving upward. The reduction degree of the balloon display f2 may be the same as or different from the reduction degree of the balloon display f1. Further, either one of the balloon indications f1 and f2 may be reduced larger or smaller than the other, and the configuration of reducing one and the other may be different.

  FIG. 157 (i) following FIG. 157 (h) shows a state in which the animation moving toward the balloon displays f2 and f3 is interrupted or terminated and stopped. Thereafter, the balloon displays f2 and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 149 to 169 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 158 (a) to 158 (k) show an example of effect using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 158 (a) shows in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 158 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 158 (b) following FIG. 158 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 158 (c) following FIG. 158 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown.

  FIG. 158 (d) following FIG. 158 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 158 (e), following FIG. 158 (d), shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. A balloon display f1 ′ by the character of Tono is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed. The balloon display f1 ′ is a balloon in which the face image of the lord character, the character image of “dono” displayed on the face image of the lord character, the character string and the pattern of “pseudo chance!” Are displayed. It is a display including a part.

  FIG. 158 (f) following FIG. 158 (e) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward and the balloon display f1 ′ that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f1 ′ indicates a state where it is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f1 'is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 'are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 158 (g) following FIG. 158 (f) shows a position where the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f1 ′ is temporarily interrupted and the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f1 ′ overlap in the decorative symbol display device 208. A button preview display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed, indicating a state in which a preview effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 158 (h), which follows FIG. 158 (g), erases the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 by pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. The animation in which only the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed, and the balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. Further, an animation in which the balloon display f1 'is changed to the balloon display f1a is performed. In the animation, the balloon part of the balloon display f1 'expands, and the character string of the balloon part of the balloon display f1a floats instead as the character string of the balloon part gradually disappears. . The balloon display f1a is a balloon displaying a character image of “Tono”, a character image of “SP reach” displayed on the face image of the character, and a character string and a pattern of “SP reach confirmation”. It is a display including a part. The height of the balloon part of the balloon display f1a is approximately twice the height of the balloon part of the balloon display f1. In this example, the old balloon display f1 is configured to move up and be erased in response to a change in the new balloon display f1 ′. Or may be overlapped by the changed balloon display f1a without moving, or may be erased so as to fade out on the spot.

  In FIG. 158 (i) following FIG. 158 (h), the balloon display f1a is stopped and displayed so as to be within the frame of the screen.

  In FIG. 158 (j) following FIG. 158 (i), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f1a. , A state in which a notice effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  In FIG. 158 (k) following FIG. 158 (j), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. , The character string “SP reach confirmation” is deleted and the character string “all rotation reach confirmation” is displayed. The character string “confirm all rotation reach” is displayed so as to protrude from the balloon portion of the balloon display f1a. The character string “confirm all rotation reach” includes a decorative pattern, a character image of the shrine, a hold icon, a change icon, a special figure 1 hold number aa1, a special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, a special figure 2 hold number aa3, a special figure The display may be overlapped with the display of the second 4th symbol aa4, the number of common figure hold aa5, the 4th symbol aa6 of the normal diagram, the display of the character string in the tutorial display area tu1, or the like.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 149 to 169 is performed. Thereafter, the balloon display f1a may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 149 to 169 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 159 (a) to (i) show step-by-step effects using balloon display.

  FIG. 159 (a) shows in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 159 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 159 (b) following FIG. 159 (a), a balloon display f 1 by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208 ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. In addition, a princess character display m3 is displayed from the left end of the screen. The princess character display m3 is overlapped with the 4th symbol aa2 of the special figure 1, the special figure 2 hold number aa3, the 4th symbol aa4 of the special figure 2, the universal figure hold number aa5, and the 4th figure aa6 of the normal figure. Yes.

  FIG. 159 (c) following FIG. 159 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 that appears from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown. The princess character m3 is displayed with an animation of moving to the right, and the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the face image of the character in the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 159 (d) following FIG. 159 (c) shows that a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown. In addition, the princess character m3 displays an animation that moves to the right, and the princess character m3 overlaps with substantially the entire face image of the character in the balloon display f1 and substantially the entire character image of “dono”. It is displayed to do. If the balloon display f1 is stopped until the player presses the chance button 136, the princess character m3 may also be configured to stop moving in the right direction.

  FIG. 159 (e) following FIG. 159 (d) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. In addition, the princess character m3 displays an animation of moving to the right, and the princess character m3 is displayed on the left character portion of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 and on the left character portion of the balloon portion of the balloon display f2. It is displayed to overlap.

  FIG. 159 (f) following FIG. 159 (e) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, the princess character m3 displays an animation of moving to the right, and the princess character m3 overlaps the middle character portion of the balloon portion of the balloon display f1 and the middle character portion of the balloon portion of the balloon display f2. It is displayed to do.

  FIG. 159 (g) following FIG. 159 (f) shows a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button preview display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed, indicating a state in which a preview effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, the princess character m3 displays an animation of moving to the right, and the princess character m3 includes a character part on the right side of the balloon part of the balloon display f1, a pattern part of a clear mark, and a balloon part of the balloon display f2. It is displayed so as to overlap the character part on the right and the pattern part of the cloudy mark. The princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap with a part of the button notice display h110 and a part of the operation expiration date display h112.

  FIG. 159 (h) following FIG. 159 (g) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. In addition, the princess character m3 displays an animation of moving to the right, and the princess character m3 has a rain mark on the right side of the balloon part of the balloon display f3 and a cloudy mark pattern part on the right side of the balloon part of the balloon display f2. It is displayed so as to overlap the pattern portion of the mark and a part of the face image of the frog character.

  FIG. 159 (i) following FIG. 159 (h) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state of being stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f2 was stopped before. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. The princess character m3 displays an animation that moves to the right and is erased so as to exit from the right end of the screen. A part of the princess character m3 is displayed so as to overlap a part of the face image of the samurai character. Thereafter, the balloon displays f2 and f3 may be erased and the reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 149 to 169 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 160A to 160I show step-by-step examples using balloon display.

  FIG. 160 (a) shows in the leftmost area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth figure aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 160 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 160 (b) following FIG. 160 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Moreover, the state which the structure 247 has moved to the approximate center front of the decorative design display apparatus 208 is shown. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 160 (c) following FIG. 160 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, and part of the fine mark pattern.

  FIG. 160 (d) following FIG. 160 (c) shows a button notice display h 110 that imitates the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h 112 on the decorative symbol display device 208 above the balloon display f 1. Shows a state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 160 (e) following FIG. 160 (d) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, thereby erasing the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. The moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, and part of the fine mark pattern.

  FIG. 160 (f) following FIG. 160 (e) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 moves upward and a movement animation in which the balloon display f 2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, and part of the pattern of the clear mark and the cloudy mark.

  FIG. 160 (g) following FIG. 160 (f) shows a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f 1 and the balloon display f 2. A button preview display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed, indicating a state in which a preview effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon indications f1 and f2, the character string portion, part of the pattern of the clear mark and the cloudy mark, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112.

  FIG. 160 (h), which follows FIG. 160 (g), erases the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame part of the balloon display f2, the character string part, a part of the cloudy mark pattern, and the part of the frame part of the balloon display f3.

  FIG. 160 (i) following FIG. 160 (h) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state of being stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f2 was stopped before. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, a structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The structure 247 makes it difficult to visually recognize the frame portions, the character string portions, the cloudy marks, and the rain marks of the balloon displays f2 and f3.

  In this example, the balloon display is configured to move while the structure 247 is positioned approximately in front of the center of the decorative symbol display device 208, while the structure 247 is positioned at the initial position. In other words, the balloon display may be configured to move, or the balloon display may be moved while the structure 247 overlaps the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 149 to 169 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  161 (a) to (i) show step-by-step effects using balloon display.

  161 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2's reserved number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 161 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 161 (b) following FIG. 161 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. In addition, a smiling character is displayed on the light-emitting panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion, the character string portion, and part of the fine mark pattern of the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 161 (c) following FIG. 161 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 that appears from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion, the character string portion, and part of the fine mark pattern of the balloon display f1.

  In FIG. 161 (d) following FIG. 161 (c), in the decorative symbol display device 208, a button notice display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed above the balloon display f1. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portion of the balloon display f1, the character string portion, a part of the clear mark pattern, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112.

  FIG. 161 (e) following FIG. 161 (d) shows that the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 to erase the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112. The moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portions, character string portions, clear marks, and cloudy marks of the balloon indications f1 and f2.

  FIG. 161 (f) following FIG. 161 (e) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 moves upward, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f 2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portions, character string portions, clear marks, and cloudy marks of the balloon indications f1 and f2.

  161 (g) following FIG. 161 (f) is a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button preview display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed, indicating a state in which a preview effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portions of the balloon displays f1 and f2, the character string portion, part of the pattern of the clear mark and the cloudy mark, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112.

  In FIG. 161 (h) following FIG. 161 (g), when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame parts of the balloon displays f2 and f3, the character string part, the cloudy mark, a part of the pattern of the rain mark, the button notice display h110, and the operation expiration date display h112.

  FIG. 161 (i) following FIG. 161 (h) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a moving animation in which the balloon display f3 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state of being stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f2 was stopped before. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, light emission display is performed by a light emission panel in front of the decorative symbol display device 208. Due to the light emission, it is difficult to visually recognize the frame portions, character string portions, cloudy marks, and rain marks of the balloon displays f2 and f3.

  In this example, the balloon display is configured to move when the light emission display is performed by the light emission panel located in front of the decorative symbol display device 208, but only while the light emission display by the light emission panel is not performed. The balloon display may be configured to move.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 149 to 169 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  162 (a) to 162 (i) show step-by-step effects using balloon display.

  162 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2's reserved number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 162 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c.

  In FIG. 162 (b) following FIG. 162 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display overlaps the frame portion of the balloon display f1.

  FIG. 162 (c) following FIG. 162 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 that appears from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is over part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, all of the character string part, part of the pattern of the weather mark, part of the face image of the Tono character, and all of the characters of Tono. Wrapping.

  FIG. 162 (d) following FIG. 162 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is over part of the frame part of the balloon display f1, all of the character string part, part of the pattern of the weather mark, part of the face image of the Tono character, and all of the characters of Tono. Wrapping.

  FIG. 162 (e) following FIG. 162 (d) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are erased. The moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is resumed, and the balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. The balloon display f2 displays a face image of the frog character, a character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the frog character, a character string of “noon weather” and a cloudy mark pattern. It is a display including a balloon part. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display overlaps substantially all of the balloon part of the balloon display f1, part of the face image of the lord character, part of the character “dono”, and part of the frame part of the balloon display f2. .

  FIG. 162 (f) following FIG. 162 (e) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f 1 moves upward, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f 2 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame portion of the balloon display f1, a part of the pattern of the clear mark, a part of the face image of the character, the substantially whole part of the balloon part of the balloon display f2, and the face of the samurai character. It overlaps part of the image.

  FIG. 162 (g) following FIG. 162 (f) shows a position where the scroll display of the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2. A button preview display h110 and an operation expiration date display h112 simulating the chance button 136 are displayed, indicating a state in which a preview effect for prompting the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display includes a part of the frame portion of the balloon display f1, a part of the pattern of the clear mark, a substantially whole part of the balloon part of the balloon display f2, a part of the face image of the frog character, and a button notice display. h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 all overlap.

  FIG. 162 (h), which follows FIG. 162 (g), erases the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 by pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. At the same time as the moving animation in which the balloon displays f1 and f2 move upward at the same speed is performed, the balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In the balloon display f3, a character image of “princess” displayed on the face image of the princess character, a character image of “afternoon weather”, and a rain mark pattern are displayed on the face image of the princess character. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display overlaps substantially the entire balloon part of the balloon display f2, part of the face image of the frog character, part of the frame part of the balloon display f3, and part of the character image of “princess”. Yes.

  FIG. 162 (i) following FIG. 162 (h) shows a movement animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward, and a movement animation in which the balloon display f3 that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. The balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f3 shows a state of being stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f3 is stopped is the position where the balloon display f2 was stopped before. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. In addition, a first display is performed in the approximate center of the decorative symbol display device 208. The first display is a part of the frame part of the balloon display f2, a part of the cloud mark pattern, a part of the face image of the frog character, a part of the frame part of the balloon display f3, the entire character string, the rain mark A part of the picture of the princess character and a part of the face image of the princess character overlap all the character images of the “princess”.

  In this example, the balloon display is configured to move when the first display is displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208, but the balloon display is performed only while the first display is not displayed. May be configured to move. In addition, the first display is hold display, hold icon, change icon, notice icon, icon area display, decorative design, 4th design, mini decorative design, notice display, pre-reading notice display, tutorial display, pseudo-continuous display, reach Display, right-handed display, left-handed display, character display, background display, jackpot display, round display, big bonus display, AR display, RT display, consecutive game count display, acquired number of balls display, acquired number display, volume adjustment display, It may be at least one of light amount adjustment display, button press display, error display, ball removal display, door open display, and abnormality occurrence display.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 149 to 169 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 163 (a) to 163 (h) show an example of an effect using a balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 163 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special symbol 2's fourth symbol aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 163 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 163 (b) following FIG. 163 (a), a balloon display f 1 ′ by a character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special icons 1 and 2 holding icon display area 208 ab and the effect display area). Is displayed. In the balloon display f1 ′, the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, and the character string and the pattern of “Pseudo chance!” Are displayed. It is a display that includes a speech balloon. The balloon display f1 'is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 163 (c) following FIG. 163 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 ′ appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. Is displayed. Also, the special figure 1 hold icon a4 is newly displayed in the special figure 1 and hold icon display area 280ab.

  FIG. 163 (d) following FIG. 163 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 ′ on the decorative symbol display device 208. This shows a state in which a notice effect for prompting the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 163 (e), following FIG. 163 (d), erases the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 by pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. The balloon display f2 ′ by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f1 ′ moves upward is displayed. In the balloon display f2 ′, the face image of the moth character, the character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the moth character, the character string “Holding change” and the cloudy mark pattern are displayed. It is a display including a balloon part.

  FIG. 163 (f) following FIG. 163 (e) is a movement animation in which the balloon display f1 ′ moves upward, and the balloon display f2 ′ that appears from the bottom of the screen moves upward. Animation is performed, and the balloon display f1 ′ is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and the balloon display f2 ′ is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 'is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1' was stopped before. The movement speed of the balloon display f1 'and the movement speed of the balloon display f2' are configured to be the same, but may be configured to be different.

  FIG. 163 (g) subsequent to FIG. 163 (f) shows a state in which the cloudy mark image displayed in the balloon display f2 ′ is moving toward the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab. Yes.

  In FIG. 163 (h) following FIG. 163 (g), the cloudy mark image displayed in the balloon display f2 ′ is displayed as a special figure 1 hold icon a4 in place of the default figure special hold icon a4. Has been. Thereafter, the balloon displays f1 ′ and f2 ′ may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed. Also good.

  The effect in this example is an example in which a continuous notice is given by the balloon display f1 'and the balloon display f2'. The balloon display f1 'is used for the advance notice of the change, and the balloon display f2' is used for the prefetch notice. Also, in this example, the cloudy mark image that was displayed inside the balloon part of the balloon display is moved and displayed as a hold icon, but the fluctuation or prefetching displayed outside the balloon part is also an example. The notice icon used may be moved and displayed inside the balloon part, or the icon displayed inside the balloon part may be overwritten with the notice icon. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 149 to 169 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 164 (a) to 164 (i) show step-by-step effects using balloon display. In FIGS. 164 to 166, a sub liquid crystal a 208 is provided on the left side of the decorative symbol display device 208, and a sub liquid crystal b 208 is provided on the right side.

  FIG. 164 (a) shows that the sub liquid crystal a208 has a special figure 1 reservation number aa1, a special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, a special figure 2 reservation number aa3, a special figure 2 design aa4, a general figure reservation number aa5, The usual 4th symbol aa6 is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 164 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 164 (b) following FIG. 164 (a) is a balloon display by a character from the lower part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the border between the special figure 1, the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). At the same time that a part of f1 appears, a balloon is blown out from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal a208 (part of the same height as the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). Another part of the display f1 is displayed so as to appear. A part of the balloon display f1 is a balloon part in which a character string “Morning is in the morning” and a pattern of a fine mark are displayed, and another part of the balloon display f1 is a face image of the character and the temple. This corresponds to the character image of “dono” displayed on the face image of the character and a part of the balloon.

  FIG. 164 (c) following FIG. 164 (b) shows a part of the balloon display f1 in the decorative symbol display device 208 and the other part of the balloon display f1 in the sub liquid crystal a208 facing upward simultaneously. The moving animation which moves is displayed and it has shown the state stopped and displayed in the screen center of the decoration symbol display apparatus 208 or the sub liquid crystal a208.

  FIG. 164 (d) following FIG. 164 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 164 (e) following FIG. 164 (d) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the expiration date of the operation of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation valid are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The deadline display h112 is deleted, and a part of the balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which a part of the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, another part of the balloon display f2 appears from the lower part of the screen of the sub liquid crystal b208 (part of the same height as the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed to do. A part of the balloon display f2 is a balloon part in which a character string “morning weather is” and a cloudy mark pattern are displayed, and another part of the balloon display f2 is a face image of the frog character The character image of “爺” displayed on the face image of the character and a part of the speech balloon correspond to this.

  FIG. 164 (f) following FIG. 164 (e) shows a moving balloon animation in which a part of the balloon display f1 moves upward in the decorative symbol display device 208, and a balloon display f2 that appears from the bottom of the screen. A part of the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. ing. The position where a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is a position where a part of the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed before this. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Further, in the sub liquid crystal a208, a moving animation in which another part of the balloon display f1 moves upward is performed and stopped at the upper part of the screen, and another part of the balloon display f2 is displayed in the sub liquid crystal b208. A moving animation that moves upwards is performed and stopped at the bottom of the screen.

  FIG. 164 (g) following FIG. 164 (f) shows that the button notice display h 110 and the operation expiration date display h 112 are displayed at the position overlapping the part of the balloon display f 1 and the part of f 2 in the decorative symbol display device 208. It is displayed.

  FIG. 164 (h) following FIG. 164 (g) shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the operation validity period of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation valid are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The deadline display h112 is deleted, an animation in which a part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed, and a part of the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, another part of the balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen, and the balloon display f3 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen. In addition, in the sub liquid crystal c208, an animation in which another part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed. A part of the balloon display f3 is a balloon part displaying a character string “Afternoon weather is” and a rain mark pattern, and another part of the balloon display f3 is a face image of the princess character and the princess. This corresponds to the character image of “Princess” displayed on the face image of the character and a part of the balloon.

  FIG. 164 (i) following FIG. 164 (h) shows a moving animation in which a part of the balloon display f2 moves upward in the decorative symbol display device 208, and a balloon display f3 that appears from the bottom of the screen. A part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the top of the screen, and a part of the balloon display f3 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. ing. The position where a part of the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is a position where a part of the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed before this. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f3 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Further, in the sub liquid crystal b208, a moving animation in which another part of the balloon display f2 moves upward is performed and stopped at the top of the screen, and another part of the balloon display f3 is displayed in the sub liquid crystal a208. A moving animation that moves upwards is performed and stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 149 to 169 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 165 (a) to 165 (i) show an example of an effect using a balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 165 (a) shows that the sub liquid crystal a208 has a special figure 1 reservation number aa1, a special figure 1 figure 4 aa2, a special figure 2 reservation number aa3, a special figure 2 figure 4 aa4, an ordinary figure reservation number aa5, The usual 4th symbol aa6 is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 165 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 165 (b) following FIG. 165 (a) is a balloon display by a character from the lower part of the screen of the decorative symbol display device 208 (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed so that f1 appears. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 165 (c) following FIG. 165 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown.

  FIG. 165 (d) following FIG. 165 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating a chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 165 (e), following FIG. 165 (d), deletes the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 by pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. The balloon display f2 by the frog character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed.

  FIG. 165 (f) following FIG. 165 (e) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward in the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloon display f2 that appears from the bottom of the screen is displayed upward. The moving animation which moves toward is performed, the balloon display f1 is stopped and displayed at the upper part of the screen, and the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed at the approximate center of the screen. The position where the balloon display f2 is stopped and displayed is the position where the balloon display f1 was stopped and displayed previously. Further, although the speed of movement of the balloon display f1 and the speed of movement of the balloon display f2 are configured to be the same, they may be configured to be different. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In the decorative symbol display device 208 following FIG. 165 (f), in FIG. 165 (g), in the decorative symbol display device 208, the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is temporarily interrupted, and the balloon display f1 and the balloon display f2 are displayed. A button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 are displayed at positions overlapping each other, indicating a state in which a notice effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136 is performed.

  FIG. 165 (h), following FIG. 165 (g), shows that when the player presses the chance button 136 within the expiration date of the operation of the chance button 136, the button notice display h110 and the operation valid are displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. The deadline display h112 is deleted, and a balloon display f3 by the princess character is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the balloon display f2 moves upward is displayed. Further, from the upper end of the sub liquid crystal b208, the already erased balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear reduced in accordance with the size of the sub liquid crystal b208.

  FIG. 165 (i) following FIG. 165 (h) is an animation in which the moving toward the balloon displays f2 and f3 is continuously performed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and the balloon display f1 is displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208. Is moved downward, and a balloon display is displayed in the lower part of the sub liquid crystal b208. Thus, the effect of this example is an effect of storing the balloon display erased in the decorative symbol display device 208 in the sub liquid crystal b208. When the sub liquid crystal b208 is filled with the balloon display, the old balloon display may be deleted, the new balloon display may be deleted, or all the balloon displays may be deleted. You may make it erase a half balloon display.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 149 to 169 is performed. In this example, the balloon display f1 displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208 is configured to be smaller than the balloon display f1 displayed on the decorative symbol display device 208. However, the balloon display f1 displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208 is decorated. You may comprise so that it may become larger than the balloon display f1 displayed on the symbol display apparatus 208, and you may comprise so that it may become the same magnitude | size.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 166 (a) to 166 (m) show examples of effects using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 166 (a) shows that the sub-liquid crystal a208 has a special figure 1 holding number aa1, a special figure 1 fourth figure aa2, a special figure 2 holding number aa3, a special figure 2 FIG. 4 aa4, an ordinary figure holding number aa5, The usual 4th symbol aa6 is displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 166 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  FIG. 166 (b) following FIG. 166 (a) is based on the character from the bottom of the screen of the sub liquid crystal b208 (the same height as the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part.

  FIG. 166 (c) following FIG. 166 (b) shows a state in which a moving animation is displayed on the sub liquid crystal b208 in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward.

  FIG. 166 (d) following FIG. 166 (c) shows a state in which “decoration 3—decoration 8—decoration 4” is stopped on the ornamental symbol display device 208. Further, during the display of the stop display, the movement of the balloon display f1 of the sub liquid crystal b208 is also stopped.

  In FIG. 166 (e) following FIG. 166 (d), the next variation is started, and the decorative symbol display device 208 displays the decorative symbol variation display. In the sub liquid crystal b208, a moving animation of the balloon display f1 is started.

  In FIG. 166 (f) following FIG. 166 (e), in the sub liquid crystal b 208, a moving animation in which the balloon display f 1 moves upward is performed, and the balloon display f 2 that appears from the bottom of the screen faces upward. A moving animation that moves is performed. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  In FIG. 166 (g) following FIG. 166 (f), the balloon displays f1 and f2 are continuously scrolled on the sub liquid crystal b208.

  In FIG. 166 (h) following FIG. 166 (g), scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is continuously performed in the sub liquid crystal b208.

  FIG. 166 (i) following FIG. 166 (h) shows a state in which “decoration 2-decoration 8-decoration 9” is stopped on the ornamental symbol display device 208. In FIG. 166 (h), the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 and f2 is continuously performed on the sub liquid crystal b208 even during the stop display of the decorative symbols, and the balloon display f3 is displayed from the bottom of the screen. .

  In FIG. 166 (j) following FIG. 166 (i), the next change is started, the decorative design change display is displayed on the decorative design display device 208, and the balloon displays f1 to f3 are scrolled on the sub liquid crystal b208. Is ongoing.

  In FIG. 166 (k) following FIG. 166 (j), in the sub liquid crystal b208, the balloon displays f1 to f3 are continuously scrolled and displayed so that the balloon display f6 appears from the lower part of the screen. Yes. The balloon display f6 is a character image of “Chibi princess” displayed on the face image of the Chibi princess character and the face image of the Chibi princess character, and a character string of “evening weather” and “reach?” It is a display including a balloon part on which a pattern of clear marks is displayed. The balloon display f6 in this example is a display used as a notice that the reach will be performed in the fluctuation.

  In FIG. 166 (l) following FIG. 166 (k), in the sub liquid crystal b208, the scroll display of the balloon displays f1 to f3 and f6 is continuously performed, the balloon display f1 is erased from the upper end of the screen, and the lower part of the screen is displayed. The scroll display of the balloon displays f2, f3, and f6 is interrupted or terminated at the stage where the entire balloon display f6 that appeared from is displayed.

  FIG. 166 (m) following FIG. 166 (l) shows a state where the reach effect of “decoration 4” is being performed on the decorative symbol display device 208. Thus, this example is an example in which the balloon display continues to be displayed across a plurality of variations. Even when the decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, the sub-liquid crystal may continue to produce the balloon display effect.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 149 to 169 is performed.

  FIG. 167 shows two examples of effects using the hold icon in stages. FIG. 167 shows an example of pattern 1 that produces the effects of FIGS. 167 (i) to (k) after FIGS. 167 (a) to (h) and FIG. 167 (i ′) after FIGS. 167 (a) to (h). The example of the pattern 2 which performs production | production of-(l ') is shown.

<Example of pattern 1>
Hereinafter, an example of pattern 1 of the present production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 (a) to 167 (k).

  FIG. 167 (a) shows, in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 retention number aa1, the special symbol 1's fourth symbol aa2, the special figure 2's retained number aa3, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 167 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 167 (b) following FIG. 167 (a), a balloon display f1 by the character of the character appears from the lower part of the screen (the border between the special figure 1 and the hold icon display area 208ab and the effect display area). It is displayed. The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design.

  FIG. 167 (c) following FIG. 167 (b) shows a moving animation in which the balloon display f1 appearing from the lower part of the screen moves upward on the decorative symbol display device 208, and stops at the approximate center of the screen. The displayed state is shown.

  FIG. 167 (d) following FIG. 167 (c) shows a button notice display h110 imitating the chance button 136 and an operation expiration date display h112 displayed above the balloon display f1 on the decorative symbol display device 208. A state in which a notice effect that prompts the user to operate the chance button 136 is performed is shown.

  FIG. 167 (e), following FIG. 167 (d), erases the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 by pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. A second balloon display f1 is displayed so as to appear from the lower part of the screen, and an animation in which the two balloon displays f1 move upward is displayed. Note that three or more of the same balloon display may continue.

  In FIG. 167 (f) following FIG. 167 (e), a moving animation is performed in which both balloon displays f1 move upward. Thus, in this example, the balloon display that appears is configured to be scrolled upward.

  FIG. 167 (g) following FIG. 167 (f) shows the chance button 136 at a position where the scroll display of the two balloon displays f1 is temporarily interrupted in the decorative symbol display device 208 and overlaps the both balloon displays f1. The button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 are displayed, and a notice effect that prompts the player to operate the chance button 136 is shown.

  FIG. 167 (h), which follows FIG. 167 (g), erases the button notice display h110 and the operation expiration date display h112 by pressing the chance button 136 within the operation expiration date of the chance button 136. The animation in which the balloon display f1 moves upward is displayed, and immediately before the balloon display f1 is erased so as to exit from the upper end of the screen. Also, a balloon display f1b appears from the bottom of the screen. The balloon display f1b includes the face image of the Tono character and the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character. It is a display that includes a speech balloon that displays a character string and a pattern that are visible and below are wisdom but foolish. The balloon portion of the balloon display f1b is a size that does not fit on one screen of the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 167 (i) following FIG. 167 (h) shows a state where the upper end of the balloon display f1b is located at the upper end of the screen.

  FIG. 167 (j) following FIG. 167 (i) shows a state in which the balloon display f1b is being scrolled.

  FIG. 167 (k) following FIG. 167 (j) shows a state where the scroll display of the balloon display f1b is performed until the lower end of the balloon display f1b is visually recognized.

<Example of pattern 2>
Hereinafter, an example of the pattern 2 of this production example will be described with reference to FIGS. 167 (i ′) to (l ′).

  FIG. 167 (i ′) following FIGS. 167 (a) to 167 (h) shows a state where the scroll display of the balloon part f1b is temporarily stopped. The scroll display of the balloon part f1b may stop once or a plurality of times.

  FIG. 167 (j ′) following FIG. 167 (i ′) shows a button notice display h110 that imitates the chance button 136 on the decorative symbol display device 208, and an operation expiration date display that represents the operation expiration date of the chance button 136 with a gauge. The state where h112 is displayed is shown.

  FIG. 167 (k ′), following FIG. 167 (j ′), resumes the scroll display of the speech balloon f1b that has been stopped when the player presses the chance button 136 within the expiration date of the operation of the chance button 136. The

  FIG. 167 (l ′) following FIG. 167 (k ′) shows a state in which the scroll display of the balloon display f1b is performed until the lower end of the balloon display f1b is visually recognized. Thereafter, the balloon display f1b may be erased and the SP reach effect or the full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed. Further, the button notice effect may be performed every time the scroll display of the balloon display f1b is stopped, or the button notice effect may not be performed. In the scrolling display of the balloon display f1b, all of the character strings “when all are placed on a person look stupid but wisdom and what is below is wisdom but stupidly look.” There may be a case where is scroll-displayed and a case where all are not scroll-displayed. When all the character strings are scroll-displayed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when all the character strings are not scroll-displayed.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 149 to 169 is performed.

  Next, an example of a balloon display effect will be described with reference to FIG.

  FIGS. 168 (a) to 168 (g) show an example of effect using balloon display step by step.

  FIG. 168 (a) shows in the left end area of the decorative symbol display device 208, the special figure 1 reservation number aa1, the special figure 1 fourth figure aa2, the special figure 2 reservation number aa3, the special figure 2 fourth figure aa4, The usual figure holding number aa5 and the fourth figure aa6 of the usual figure are displayed. The lower left area of the decorative symbol display device 208 is a fluctuation icon display area 280 for displaying a fluctuation icon display. In the fluctuation icon display area 280, a fluctuation icon ad1 having a default mode is displayed. The right side of the fluctuation icon display area 280 is the special figure 1 and 2 hold icon display area 280ab, and the special figure 1 hold icon a1 to a3 and the special figure 2 hold icon b1 to b3 alternately from left to right in this order. Is displayed. The right side of the special map 1 and the hold icon display area 280ab is the tutorial display area tu1, and the character string “in preparation” is displayed. In the tutorial display area tu1, there are cases where the contents of an effect that is currently being performed or the contents of an effect that is not currently being performed is displayed. FIG. 168 (a) shows a state in which the decorative symbol variation display is displayed in the left symbol display region 208a, the middle symbol display region 208b, and the right symbol display region 208c.

  In FIG. 168 (b) following FIG. 168 (a), two balloon displays f1 are displayed so as to appear simultaneously from the upper right and lower right of the screen, and an animation that moves to the left at the same speed is displayed. . The balloon display f1 displays the face image of the Tono character, the character image of “Tono” displayed on the face image of the Tono character, the character string “The weather in the morning”, and the pattern of the fine mark. It is a display including a balloon part. The balloon display f1 is displayed so as to overlap the decorative design. Three or more same balloon displays may appear at the same time.

  FIG. 168 (c) following FIG. 168 (b) shows an animation in which the balloon displays f2 and f3 appear at the same time from the right end of the screen on the decorative symbol display device 208 and move to the left at the same speed. It is displayed. Two or more different balloon displays may appear at the same time. In the upper and lower balloon displays f1, an animation that moves to the left at the same speed is started.

  FIG. 168 (d) following FIG. 168 (c) shows an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 168 (e) following FIG. 168 (d) shows an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed in the decorative symbol display device 208.

  FIG. 168 (f) following FIG. 168 (e) shows an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and exit from the left end in the order of appearance. The state immediately before being erased. Further, in this example, an animation in which all the balloon displays move in the same direction at the same speed is performed, but an animation in which each balloon display moves in a different direction at a different speed may be performed. In addition, the balloon display used for the change notice or the prefetch notice may be moved in a different direction from the notice that is not used for the change notice or the prefetch notice, or moved at a different speed. There may be cases.

  FIG. 168 (g) following FIG. 168 (f) shows an animation in which the balloon displays f1 to f3 move to the left at the same speed on the decorative symbol display device 208, and exit from the left end in the order of appearance. The state after being erased is shown. Thereafter, an SP reach effect or a full rotation reach effect may be started, or an animation in which the hold icon or the change icon is changed may be performed. In this example, the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 that have started to be displayed at the same time have ended simultaneously, but one of the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 precedes the other. The display may end at the end, or one of the upper balloon display f1 and the lower balloon display f1 may move faster than the other. In addition, the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 that have started to be displayed at the same time are ended simultaneously. However, one of the balloon display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be ended before the other, or the balloon may be displayed. One of the display f2 and the balloon display f3 may be faster than the other.

  The effect of this example may be used as a prefetch notice or may be used as a notice of the change. In addition, when the effect of this example is performed, it may be configured so that the jackpot symbol is finally finally displayed more easily than when the effect of this example is not performed, or the effect of this example is performed. In such a case, the jackpot symbol may be finally displayed more easily than in the case where any one of the effects shown in FIGS. 149 to 169 is performed.

  Next, with reference to FIG. 169, two examples of effects of balloon display will be described.

  FIG. 169 (a) is an effect example when the balloon display f2 is displayed in a state where the balloon display f1 is displayed. The right side of FIG. 169 (a) is an example in which the balloon display f1 is not moved when the balloon display f2 is displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f1. In this example, since the balloon display f1 is overlapped with the balloon display f2, it is impossible to visually recognize the character lines displayed in the balloon display f1 and the character lines displayed in the balloon display f2.

  FIG. 169 (b) is an effect example when the balloon display f2 is displayed in a state where the balloon display f1 is displayed. The right side of FIG. 169 (b) is an example in which the balloon display f1 is moved upward when the balloon display f2 is displayed at a position overlapping the balloon display f1. By moving the balloon display f1 upward, there may be a case where the character lines displayed in the balloon display f1 and the character lines displayed in the balloon display f2 can be simultaneously viewed.

  Next, a characteristic configuration of the pachinko machine 100 according to the embodiment described above will be described with reference to FIGS. 1 to 169 again.

(E1)
First movable means (for example, movable body 90a) (for example, see FIG. 119),
A second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) (for example, see FIG. 119),
First light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) (for example, see FIG. 119),
A second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) (for example, see FIG. 119),
A game machine equipped with
The first movable means is means having the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 119),
The first movable means is means having the first light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 119),
The first movable means is means having the second light emitting means (for example, see FIG. 119),
In the first state, one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 120 (b)),
In the second state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap with the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 120 (d)),
The light emission mode of the first light emitting means is the same light emission mode in both the first state and the second state (see, for example, FIGS. 120 (b) and (d)),
The light emitting mode of the second light emitting means is the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state (for example, see FIGS. 120 (b) and (d)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(E2)
The game table according to e1,
In the first state, the first light emitting means can emit light (for example, see FIG. 120 (b)),
In the first state, the first light emitting means is overlapped with the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 120 (b)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(E3)
The game table according to e1 or e2,
The first light emitting means is a means that may be overlapped with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (for example, see FIG. 126 (c)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(E4)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e3,
In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 120 (a)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(E5)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e4,
The first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting from the initial state to the second state through at least the first state (for example, see FIGS. 120 (a) to (d)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(E6)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e5,
The first movable means is means having third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34),
The first movable means is means having third movable means (for example, movable body 90c) (for example, see FIG. 119),
In the first state, the third light emitting means overlaps with the third movable means (for example, see FIG. 120 (b)),
In the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap with the third movable means (for example, see FIG. 120 (d)),
A game stand characterized by that.
(E7)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e6,
The second movable means is means having a light emitting substrate (for example, LED substrate 90b2) (for example, see FIG. 119),
In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 120 (a)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(E8)
A gaming machine according to e7,
In the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 120 (d)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(E9)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e8,
The first movable means is means having a cover (for example, a cover portion 90a3) (for example, see FIG. 119 (b)),
In the initial state, the first light emitting means is means for overlapping the cover (for example, see FIG. 120 (a)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(E10)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e9,
The first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (for example, see FIG. 120 (b)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(E11)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e10,
The second state is a state during non-operation of the first movable means (see, for example, FIGS. 120 (c) to (e)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(E12)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e11,
A substrate (for example, LED substrate 90a2) (see, for example, FIG. 119 (b)),
The substrate is a substrate having both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (for example, see FIG. 119 (b)),
The first movable means is means having the substrate (for example, see FIG. 119 (b)),
A game stand characterized by that.
(E13)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e12,
A game board having game nails (for example, game board 125),
The first movable means is means operable behind the game board (for example, see FIG. 126).
A game stand characterized by that.
(E14)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e13,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(E15)
The game stand according to any one of e1 to e13,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1000).
A game stand characterized by that.

The light emitting mode of the first light emitting unit may be the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting unit may be the first state and the second state. The same light emission mode may be used in both states.
The first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit may be a unit covered with the first cover.
In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable unit and the second movable unit may be overlapped with the structure.
In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable unit and the second movable unit may be overlapped with the structure.
-The light emission aspect of a 1st light emission means may be a light emission aspect different in a 1st state and a 2nd state, and one may be non-light emission.
-The light emission aspect of a 2nd light emission means may be a light emission aspect different in a 1st state and a 2nd state, and one may be non-light emission.
-A 1st light emission means and a 2nd light emission means may be covered by a separate cover.
The first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit may be included in the second movable unit.
-A 2nd movable means may be located back rather than a 1st movable means.
The second light emitting unit may be a unit that does not overlap the second movable unit in the initial state, the first state, and the second state.
-Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full color LEDs, both may be single color LEDs, one may be a single color LED and the other may be a full color LED, A high-intensity LED and the other may be a normal LED.
A movable display unit may be provided, and the first movable unit may move from the rear to the front of the display unit after the display unit has moved.
A transmissive liquid crystal display device may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device.
A transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count notice is counted.
-At least one of a 1st movable means and a 2nd movable means may operate | move according to digestion of the holding | maintenance icon which suggests operation | movement of a movable object.
-At least one of a 1st movable means and a 2nd movable means may operate | move after the preliminary announcement which suggests operation | movement of a movable object.
The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means, and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a preliminary announcement, or may be performed as a pre-reading preliminary announcement. Good.

(F1)
First movable means (for example, movable body 90a) (for example, see FIG. 119),
A second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) (for example, see FIG. 119),
First light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) (for example, see FIG. 119),
A second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) (for example, see FIG. 119),
A game machine equipped with
The first movable means is means having the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 119),
The first movable means is means having the first light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 119),
The first movable means is means having the second light emitting means (for example, see FIG. 119),
In the first state, one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 120 (b)),
In the second state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap with the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 120 (d)),
The first light emitting means is a means covered with a first cover (for example, cover portion 90a3) (for example, see FIG. 119 (b)),
The second light emitting means is a means covered with the first cover (for example, see FIG. 119 (b)),
A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(F2)
A gaming machine according to f1,
In the first state, the first light emitting means can emit light (for example, see FIG. 120 (b)),
In the first state, the first light emitting means is overlapped with the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 120 (b)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(F3)
A gaming machine according to f1 or f2,
The first light emitting means is a means that may be overlapped with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (for example, see FIG. 126 (c)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(F4)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f3,
In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 120 (a)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(F5)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f4,
The first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting from the initial state to the second state through at least the first state (for example, see FIGS. 120 (a) to (d)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(F6)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f5,
The first movable means is means having third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34),
The first movable means is means having third movable means (for example, movable body 90c) (for example, see FIG. 119),
In the first state, the third light emitting means overlaps with the third movable means (for example, see FIG. 120 (b)),
In the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap with the third movable means (for example, see FIG. 120 (d)),
A game stand characterized by that.
(F7)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f6,
The second movable means is means having a light emitting substrate (for example, LED substrate 90b2) (for example, see FIG. 119),
In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 120 (a)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(F8)
A gaming table according to f7,
In the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 120 (d)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(F9)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f8,
The first movable means is means having a second cover (for example, a cover portion 90b3) (for example, see FIG. 119 (b)),
In the initial state, the first light emitting means is a means that overlaps the second cover (for example, see FIG. 120 (a)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(F10)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f9,
The first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (for example, see FIG. 120 (b)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(F11)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f10,
The second state is a state during non-operation of the first movable means (see, for example, FIGS. 120 (c) to (e)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(F12)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f11,
A substrate (for example, LED substrate 90a2) (see, for example, FIG. 119 (b)),
The substrate is a substrate having both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (for example, see FIG. 119 (b)),
The first movable means is means having the substrate (for example, see FIG. 119 (b)),
A game stand characterized by that.
(F13)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f12,
A game board having game nails (for example, game board 125),
The first movable means is means operable behind the game board (for example, see FIG. 126).
A game stand characterized by that.
(F14)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f13,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(F15)
The game stand according to any one of f1 to f13,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1000).
A game stand characterized by that.

The light emitting mode of the first light emitting unit may be the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting unit may be the first state and the second state. The same light emission mode may be used in both states.
The first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit may be a unit covered with the first cover.
In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable unit and the second movable unit may be overlapped with the structure.
In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable unit and the second movable unit may be overlapped with the structure.
-The light emission aspect of a 1st light emission means may be a light emission aspect different in a 1st state and a 2nd state, and one may be non-light emission.
-The light emission aspect of a 2nd light emission means may be a light emission aspect different in a 1st state and a 2nd state, and one may be non-light emission.
-A 1st light emission means and a 2nd light emission means may be covered by a separate cover.
The first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit may be included in the second movable unit.
-A 2nd movable means may be located back rather than a 1st movable means.
The second light emitting unit may be a unit that does not overlap the second movable unit in the initial state, the first state, and the second state.
-Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full color LEDs, both may be single color LEDs, one may be a single color LED and the other may be a full color LED, A high-intensity LED and the other may be a normal LED.
A movable display unit may be provided, and the first movable unit may move from the rear to the front of the display unit after the display unit has moved.
A transmissive liquid crystal display device may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device.
A transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count notice is counted.
-At least one of a 1st movable means and a 2nd movable means may operate | move according to digestion of the holding | maintenance icon which suggests operation | movement of a movable object.
-At least one of a 1st movable means and a 2nd movable means may operate | move after the preliminary announcement which suggests operation | movement of a movable object.
The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means, and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a preliminary announcement, or may be performed as a pre-reading preliminary announcement. Good.

(G1)
First movable means (for example, movable body 1);
A second movable means (for example, movable body 1);
A game machine equipped with
The first movable unit is a unit capable of executing a first operation (for example, an operation of moving downward) (for example, see FIG. 116 (c)),
The second movable unit is a unit capable of executing a second operation (for example, an operation of moving downward) (for example, see FIG. 117 (c)),
The initial position of the second movable means is located behind the initial position of the first movable means (for example, see FIG. 116 (a)),
The position of the second movable means that has performed the second operation is located behind the first movable means that has performed the first operation (see, for example, FIG. 118C).
A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the appearance of the second movable means can be changed depending on the positional relationship with the first movable means, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(G2)
a gaming table according to g1,
The direction in which the first movable means moves in the first operation is the same as the direction in which the second movable means moves in the second operation (see, for example, FIG. 118C).
A game stand characterized by that.

  There are cases where the appearance of the second movable means can be changed during execution of the second operation.

(G3)
A gaming machine according to g1 or g2,
In a state where at least a part of the first movable unit and a part of the second movable unit overlap in the front-rear direction, another part of the second movable unit is visible from the front.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the appearance of the second movable means can be changed.

(G4)
The game stand according to any one of g1 to g3,
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The position of the display means is located behind the position of the second movable means that has executed the second operation (see, for example, FIG. 118 (c)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the appearance of the display means can be changed.

(G5)
a gaming table according to g4,
The display means is means capable of displaying a first error display (for example, display of a character string “please remove the sphere”) (see, for example, FIG. 118B),
At least a part of the first error display may be overlapped by at least one of the first movable means and the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 118 (c)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the appearance of the first error display can be changed.

(G6)
a gaming table according to g5,
The first error display is a ball removal display (see, for example, FIG. 118 (b)),
A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the appearance of the ball-free display can be changed.

(G7)
The game stand according to any one of g1 to g6,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(G8)
The game stand according to any one of g1 to g5,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1000).
A game stand characterized by that.

The direction in which the first movable means moves in the first motion may be upward, leftward, rightward, or downward, and the first motion may be falling, the front-rear direction component or the left-right direction The orientation may include at least one of the above components and the vertical component.
The direction in which the second movable means moves in the second operation may be upward, leftward, rightward, or downward, and the first operation may be falling, the front-rear direction component or the left-right direction The orientation may include at least one of the above components and the vertical component.
-Both a 1st operation | movement and a 2nd operation | movement may be performed simultaneously, the other may be performed after one is performed, and only one or the other may be performed.
After both the first operation and the second operation are performed, both the first movable means and the second movable means may return to the initial position at the same time, and after one returns, the other returns Also good.
-While one of the first movable means and the second movable means operates and returns to the initial position, the other may operate.
-During the first operation, the LED of the second movable means may perform a light emission effect, or may perform the same light emission effect as the LED of the first movable means.
-During the second operation, the LED of the first movable means may perform a light emission effect, or may perform the same light emission effect as the LED of the second movable means.
-Even if the first movable means is located in front of the second movable means, the LED of the second movable means may perform a light emission effect, or even if it performs the same light emission effect as the LED of the first movable means Good.

(H1)
First movable means (for example, movable body 90a) (for example, see FIG. 119),
A second movable means (for example, movable body 90b) (for example, see FIG. 119),
First light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a22, a32, a33) (for example, see FIG. 119),
A second light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a11 to a16, a23, a24) (for example, see FIG. 119),
A game machine equipped with
The first movable means is means having the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 119),
The first movable means is means having the first light emitting means (see, for example, FIG. 119),
The first movable means is means having the second light emitting means (for example, see FIG. 119),
In the first state, one of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 120 (b)),
In the second state, both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means do not overlap with the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 120 (d)),
In an initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable unit and the second movable unit is overlapped with a structure (for example, the structure 30a) (for example, see FIG. 126 (a)). ,
A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the appearance of the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(H2)
The game table according to h1,
In the first state, the first light emitting means can emit light (for example, see FIG. 120 (b)),
In the first state, the first light emitting means is overlapped with the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 120 (b)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(H3)
A gaming machine according to h1 or h2,
The first light emitting means is a means that may be overlapped with a structure (for example, the structure 30c) (for example, see FIG. 126 (c)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(H4)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h3,
In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the second movable means (for example, see FIG. 120 (a)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(H5)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h4,
The first light emitting means is a means capable of shifting from the initial state to the second state through at least the first state (for example, see FIGS. 120 (a) to (d)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(H6)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h5,
The first movable means is means having third light emitting means (for example, light emitting diodes a25, a33, a34),
The first movable means is means having third movable means (for example, movable body 90c) (for example, see FIG. 119),
In the first state, the third light emitting means overlaps with the third movable means (for example, see FIG. 120 (b)),
In the second state, the third light emitting means does not overlap with the third movable means (for example, see FIG. 120 (d)),
A game stand characterized by that.
(H7)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h6,
The second movable means is means having a light emitting substrate (for example, LED substrate 90b2) (for example, see FIG. 119),
In the initial state, the first light emitting means overlaps the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 120 (a)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(H8)
The game table according to h7,
In the first state, the first light emitting means may overlap the light emitting substrate (see, for example, FIG. 120 (d)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(H9)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h8,
The first movable means is means having a cover (for example, a cover portion 90a3),
In the initial state, the first light emitting means is means for overlapping the cover (for example, see FIG. 120 (a)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(H10)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h9,
The first state is a state at a certain timing during the operation of the first movable means (for example, see FIG. 120 (b)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(H11)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h10,
The second state is a state during non-operation of the first movable means (see, for example, FIGS. 120 (c) to (e)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(H12)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h11,
A substrate (for example, LED substrate 90a2) (see, for example, FIG. 119 (b)),
The substrate is a substrate having both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means (for example, see FIG. 119 (b)),
The first movable means is means having the substrate (for example, see FIG. 119 (b)),
A game stand characterized by that.
(H13)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h12,
A game board having game nails (for example, game board 125),
The first movable means is means operable behind the game board (for example, see FIG. 126).
A game stand characterized by that.
(H14)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h13,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(H15)
The game stand according to any one of h1 to h13,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1000).
A game stand characterized by that.

The light emitting mode of the first light emitting unit may be the same light emitting mode in both the first state and the second state, and the light emitting mode of the second light emitting unit may be the first state and the second state. The same light emission mode may be used in both states.
The first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit may be a unit covered with the first cover.
In the initial state, at least a part of one of the first movable unit and the second movable unit may be overlapped with the structure.
In the initial state, at least a part of the other of the first movable unit and the second movable unit may be overlapped with the structure.
-The light emission aspect of a 1st light emission means may be a light emission aspect different in a 1st state and a 2nd state, and one may be non-light emission.
-The light emission aspect of a 2nd light emission means may be a light emission aspect different in a 1st state and a 2nd state, and one may be non-light emission.
-A 1st light emission means and a 2nd light emission means may be covered by a separate cover.
The first light emitting unit and the second light emitting unit may be included in the second movable unit.
-A 2nd movable means may be located back rather than a 1st movable means.
The second light emitting unit may be a unit that does not overlap the second movable unit in the initial state, the first state, and the second state.
-Both the first light emitting means and the second light emitting means may be full color LEDs, both may be single color LEDs, one may be a single color LED and the other may be a full color LED, A high-intensity LED and the other may be a normal LED.
A movable display unit may be provided, and the first movable unit may move from the rear to the front of the display unit after the display unit has moved.
A transmissive liquid crystal display device may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transmissive liquid crystal display device.
A transparent panel capable of emitting a pattern may be provided, and the first movable means may operate behind the transparent panel.
-At least one of the first movable means and the second movable means may operate after the count notice is counted.
-At least one of a 1st movable means and a 2nd movable means may operate | move according to digestion of the holding | maintenance icon which suggests operation | movement of a movable object.
-At least one of a 1st movable means and a 2nd movable means may operate | move after the preliminary announcement which suggests operation | movement of a movable object.
The operation of the first movable means, the operation of the second movable means, the light emission of the first light emitting means, and the light emission of the second light emitting means may be performed as a preliminary announcement, or may be performed as a pre-reading preliminary announcement. Good.

(I1)
Display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208);
A structure (eg, structure 247);
A game machine equipped with
The display means is a means capable of displaying a first display (for example, Sabohani character display SB) at a first position (for example, lower center of the display area) (see, for example, FIG. 128 (c)).
At least a part of the structure is located at a position overlapping with a part of the display means (for example, see FIG. 128),
The first display displayed at the first position is a display that may be overlapped with the structure (for example, see FIG. 128 (c)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the player can be provided with the pleasure of playing by changing the direction of viewing the game platform, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(I2)
A gaming machine according to i1,
The structure is a movable structure (see, for example, FIG. 137),
The first display displayed at the first position is a display that does not overlap the structure after the structure is moved.
A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the appearance of the first display can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(I3)
A gaming machine according to i1 or i2,
The display means is a movable display means (for example, see FIGS. 385 to 391), and the first display displayed at the first position is over the structure after the display means is moved. The display is not wrapped,
A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the appearance of the first display can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(I4)
The game stand according to any one of i1 to i3,
The display means is a means capable of displaying the first display at a second position (for example, the center of the display area),
The first display displayed at the second position is a display that does not overlap the structure (see, for example, FIG. 128 (e)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the appearance of the first display can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(I5)
The game table according to i4,
The first display may be displayed at the second position after being displayed at the first position (see, for example, FIG. 128).
A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the appearance of the first display can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(I6)
The game stand according to any one of i1 to i5,
The first display is a notice display (see, for example, FIG. 128).
A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the appearance of the notice display can be changed, and the interest of the player can be improved.

(I7)
The game stand according to any one of i1 to i6,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(I8)
The game stand according to any one of i1 to i6,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1000).
A game stand characterized by that.

The first display may be a pre-reading notice display, a display including characters, an icon display, a hold icon display, or a variable icon display It may be a character display or an error display.
The first display displayed at the second position may be overlapped with the structure.
The first display displayed at the second position may be overlapped with the structure after the display means is moved.
-A structure may be provided with a display means, may be provided with a LED board, and may be movable.
-The display means may be movable.
The structure may be a transmissive liquid crystal device, and the first display may be performed behind the display of the transmissive liquid crystal display.
-The light emitting panel may be sufficient as a structure, and a 1st display may be performed back during the light emission display of a light emission panel.
(Drawing)
・ Example where the notice display moves from the first position where it overlaps the structure to the second position where it does not overlap ・ The second position where the notice display does not overlap from the first position where it overlaps the structure Example of moving to the first position again after moving to the third position ・ The notice display is moved from the first position where it overlaps the structure to the second position where it is not overlapped. Move to a position ・ Example of moving to a fifth position that does not overlap after moving from the fourth position that overlaps the structure to the first position that overlaps with the structure An example in which the notice display is displayed at the first position where it overlaps the structure and the other notice display moves to the second position where it does not overlap. Example where the other notice display moves to the first position and the notice display moves from the first position where it overlaps the structure to the second position where it does not overlap, and the effect display is first The example of the notice display is shown before the notice display is displayed at the first position overlapping the structure. The example of the notice display is enlarged. The notice display is displayed at the second position. An example of hiding the notice of the second position by moving the structure or moving the display means

(J1)
A gaming machine comprising display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208) capable of displaying a decorative symbol variation display,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of icons,
One of the plurality of icons is a hold icon,
During the display of the decorative symbol variation display, an animation by the icon (hereinafter referred to as “first animation” (for example, a moving animation of the notice display m1)) may be displayed.
In some cases, after the first animation is displayed, a first effect display (for example, an effect of pseudo continuous variation) is performed in the decorative symbol variation display (see, for example, FIG. 139).
A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the player's attention can be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display, and the player's interest can be improved.

(J2)
A gaming machine according to j1,
The display means is means capable of displaying the hold icon as a variable icon.
A game stand characterized by that.

  You may be able to enjoy the behavior of hold icons and variable icons.

(J3)
A gaming machine according to j1 or j2,
The first animation is an animation including a change display of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. 148 (f) and (g)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J4)
The game stand according to any one of j1 to j3,
The first animation is an animation including a moving display of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. 139 (f) to (i)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J5)
The game stand according to any one of j1 to j4,
The first animation is an animation including a reduced display of the icon (see, for example, FIGS. 139 (f) and (g)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J6)
The game stand according to any one of j1 to j5,
The first animation is an animation including an increased display of the icons (see, for example, FIGS. 139 (j) and (k)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  You may be able to enjoy the behavior of the icon.

(J7)
A gaming table according to j6,
In some cases, an increase display in one icon is displayed a plurality of times (for example, see FIG. 143).
A game stand characterized by that.

  There are cases where the behavior of one icon can be more enjoyed.

(J8)
The game stand according to any one of j1 to j7,
The first effect display is a pseudo continuous variation display in the decorative symbol variation display (see, for example, FIG. 139 (h)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the player's attention can be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display.

(J9)
The game stand according to any one of j1 to j8,
The first effect display is a reach variation display in the decorative symbol variation display (see, for example, FIG. 145 (j)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the player's attention can be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display.

(J10)
The game stand according to any one of j1 to j9,
The gaming table according to claim 1, wherein the first effect display is an operation effect display in the decorative symbol variation display.

  In some cases, the player's attention can be drawn to the decorative symbol variation display.

(J11)
The game stand according to any one of j1 to j10,
The first animation is displayed when the icon is displayed in an icon display area (for example, special figure 1, hold icon display area 208ab) (for example, see FIG. 140 (f)),
In at least a part of the display period of the first animation, another display (for example, an icon displaying a character string “in preparation”) may be displayed in the icon display area (for example, 140 (g)),
A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the player's attention can be gathered in the display of the icon display area.

(J12)
The game stand according to any one of j1 to j11,
During the display of the decorative symbol variation display, an animation by two or more icons (hereinafter referred to as “second animation”) may be displayed (for example, see FIG. 148 (f)).
In some cases, the first effect display is performed in the decorative symbol variation display after the second animation is displayed (for example, see FIG. 148 (h)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  There are cases where the behavior of two or more icons can be more enjoyed.

(J13)
The game stand according to any one of j1 to j12,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

-The icon may move and nothing may be displayed in the original icon display area, a temporary icon display may be displayed instead, or other icons may be moved (packed) and displayed. May be.
-When the icon is moved and displayed again (returned display) in the original icon display area, it may be displayed in an increased manner, may be displayed so as to overlap other icon displays, or another icon display May be displayed to dismiss.
・ The decorative design may change after the first animation, it may be erased (destroyed), the display may change from shaking display to change display, or the special design is temporarily stopped on the middle design. Also good.
-The 1st production display does not need to be performed after the 1st animation.
-The first animation may be performed a plurality of times during one decoration symbol variation display.
-A plurality of first animations may be performed with one icon during a plurality of decorative symbol variation displays.
-An icon with high expectation may be easier to perform the first animation than an icon with low expectation, or vice versa.
The first animation may be easier in the case of the reserved full tank than in the case of the reserved non-full tank, or vice versa.
-A notice display may be made to suggest that the first animation will be performed.
-A count notice display (timer effect) indicating the start time of the first animation may be performed.
The first animation may be performed when an icon (mini item) different from the hold icon or the fluctuation icon is digested.
The first animation may be performed when the result of the mini game is the first result.
(Drawing)
FIG. 139 to FIG. 148 are examples in which the decorative icon variation display is re-variable (pseudo-continuous) when the hold icon hits the middle symbol of the decorative symbol during fluctuation variation of the off symbol.
FIG. 140 is an example in which a temporary icon is displayed on a holding base while the holding icon is moving. FIG. 141 is an example of returning to the original position when the back hold icon is packed back while the hold icon is moving.
FIG. 142 is an example of a gaze effect that does not develop even if the hold icon hits.
FIG. 143 is an example in which the same hold icon performs the first animation multiple times with one change.
FIG. 144 is an example in which different hold icons perform the first animation with one change.
FIG. 145 is an example of reaching after the first animation of the hold icon.
FIG. 146 is an example in which the variation icon hits the middle symbol of the decorative symbol.
FIG. 147 is an example in which the same hold icon collides with a plurality of variations and develops to reach.
FIG. 148 is an example in which a plurality of hold icons collide with a decoration symbol at the same time and reach.

(K1)
A game machine provided with a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (see, for example, FIG. 150 (f)).
One of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (see, for example, FIG. 150 (f)).
While the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area, the second balloon display may start to be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 150 (e)).
In some cases, at least a part of the first display area and at least a part of the second balloon display overlap (for example, see FIG. 150 (e)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  Since the player can visually recognize the second balloon display without changing his / her line of sight, the player can concentrate on the game and improve the interest of the player.

(K2)
a gaming table according to k1,
The display means is means capable of displaying a movement animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “first movement animation” (for example, upward movement animation)) (for example, FIG. 150 (d). ), (E))
The first moving animation may be displayed after the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area (see, for example, FIGS. 150D and 150E).
A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to the destination of the first balloon display.

(K3)
a gaming table according to k2,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a movement animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “second movement animation” (for example, a movement animation that moves to the left)).
After the second moving animation is displayed, the second balloon display is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 150 (f)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the player can be attracted to the destination of the second balloon display.

(K4)
A gaming table according to k2 or k3,
After displaying another movement animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “third movement animation” (for example, a movement animation that moves to the right)), the first balloon is displayed in the first display area. A display is displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 150 (b) and (c)).
The first movement animation and the third movement animation may have different movement directions of the first balloon display (for example, see FIG. 150).
A game stand characterized by that.

  There are cases in which the player's expectation can be enhanced by changing the direction of movement by moving animation.

(K5)
The game stand according to any one of k1 to k4,
In some cases, at least a part of the first balloon display overlaps at least a part of the second balloon display (for example, see FIG. 150 (e)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to both the first balloon display and the second balloon display.

(K6)
The game stand according to any one of k1 to k5,
There is a case where at least a part of the first balloon display overlaps at least a part of the second balloon display (for example, see FIG. 150 (e)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  There are cases where the player's interest can be attracted to the second balloon display in front.

(K7)
The game stand according to any one of k1 to k6,
The first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of Tono),
The second balloon display is a display including a character (for example, Tono character),
The first balloon display character and the second balloon display character may be the same (for example, see FIGS. 167 (f) and (g)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, a balloon display of the same character is continuously displayed, so that a player's expectation can be enhanced.

(K8)
The game stand according to any one of k1 to k7,
Operating means (for example, a chance button 136),
When the operation means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 150 (d) and (e)). A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

(K9)
The game stand according to any one of k1 to k8,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(K10)
The game stand according to any one of k1 to k8,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1000).
A game stand characterized by that.

The balloon display may be moved and displayed while being overlapped with another display (for example, a notice, an error display, a ball removal display).
-A part of the balloon display may disappear after moving display, two or more balloon displays may disappear, or two or more balloon displays may be simultaneously or in sequence.
The size of the balloon display may be the same as the first balloon display, may be double, or may be half.
-It may be displayed again after the balloon display disappears (the erase animation may be reversely played and the appearance animation may be performed after the erase animation is performed).
A part of the redisplayed balloon display may be changed (the color may be changed to red, gold, or rainbow, or the character may be changed to a character with high expectation).
When displaying a new balloon display, a balloon display with a high expectation level may remain and other balloon displays (a balloon display with a low expectation level) may disappear preferentially.
A display in which the balloon display is enlarged may be performed, or a display in which the balloon display characters protrude from the frame of the balloon display may be performed.
-The balloon display may disappear regardless of the operation of the operating means.
-You may animate a character during the movement animation of a balloon display.
-A balloon display may be displayed over a plurality of variations.
-A prefetch notice may be performed in a balloon display.
The balloon display may be performed by the second display means, the balloon display may be performed across the display means and the second display means, or one of the display means and the second display means to the other The balloon display may be displayed in a moving manner, or the balloon display may be displayed on one of the display means and the second display means, and the character corresponding to the other may be displayed.
(Drawing)
FIG. 149 is an example of a conversation notice.
FIG. 150 shows an example of a conversation notice. The appearance animation moves horizontally, and the animation when a new speech balloon appears is vertical movement (a new speech balloon animation and an old speech balloon animation simultaneously).
FIG. 151 is an example of a conversation notice / animation when the appearance animation moves horizontally and the animation when a new balloon appears, moves vertically (an example of timing variation / an animation of a new balloon after an animation of an old balloon).
FIG. 152 is an example of a conversation notice / animation when the appearance animation moves horizontally, and when the new balloon appears, the animation moves vertically (an example of timing variation / an animation of an old balloon after animation of a new balloon).
FIG. 153 shows an example of a conversation notice, an example in which the appearance animation is vertically moved, and the size of the balloon is different from normal, half, and double.
FIG. 154 shows an example of a conversation notice, an example in which a disappeared character returns, or an example in which the content changes after returning.
FIG. 155 is an example in which a specific notice balloon (for example, a balloon with high expectation) is not erased.
FIG. 156 is an example in which conversation announcements and speech balloons overlap.
FIG. 157 is an example of conversation notice / an old balloon is reduced.
FIG. 158 is an example of a conversation notice, an example in which speech balloons of the same character continue, an example in which the speech balloon expands, and an example in which the content of the speech balloon protrudes from the speech balloon.
FIG. 159 shows an example of a conversation notice / an example in which a balloon moves while the notice character is moving.
FIG. 160 is an example of a conversation notice / an example in which a balloon moves while the movable body is operating.
FIG. 161 is an example of a conversation announcement / an example in which a balloon moves while the light emitting panel in front of the display device emits light.
FIG. 162 shows an example of a conversation announcement / an example in which a balloon moves while the first display is displayed.
FIG. 163 is an example of a conversation advance notice and an example in which a speech balloon is prefetched in advance (the hold icon is changed to a prefetch icon).
FIG. 164 is an example of a conversation notice / character and a balloon displayed on separate display means. FIG. 165 is an example of a conversation notice / balloon moving to another display means.
FIG. 166 is an example in which a speech announcement example / balloon is displayed over a plurality of variations.

(L1)
A game machine provided with a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One of the plurality of displays is a first balloon display (for example, balloon display f1) (see, for example, FIG. 150 (f)).
One of the plurality of displays is a second balloon display (for example, balloon display f2) (see, for example, FIG. 150 (f)).
While the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area, the second balloon display may start to be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 150 (e)).
While the second balloon display is being displayed, the first balloon display may be displayed in the second display area (for example, see FIGS. 150 (e) and (f)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  By displaying the first balloon display in a separate display area while the second balloon display is displayed, it becomes easier for the player to grasp the relationship between the two balloon displays, so that he can concentrate on the game, Can be improved.

(L2)
The gaming table according to l1,
The display means is means capable of displaying a movement animation of the first balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “first movement animation” (for example, upward movement animation)) (for example, FIG. 150 (d). ), (E))
The first moving animation may be displayed after the first balloon display is displayed in the first display area (see, for example, FIGS. 150D and 150E).
A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to the destination of the first balloon display.

(L3)
A gaming machine according to l1 or l2,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a movement animation of the second balloon display (hereinafter referred to as “second movement animation” (for example, a movement animation that moves to the left)).
After the second moving animation is displayed, the second balloon display is displayed (see, for example, FIG. 150 (f)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the player can be attracted to the destination of the second balloon display.

(L4)
The game stand according to any one of l1 to l3,
In some cases, at least a part of the first balloon display overlaps at least a part of the second balloon display (for example, see FIG. 150 (e)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the player's interest can be attracted to both the first balloon display and the second balloon display.

(L5)
The game stand according to any one of l1 to l4,
There is a case where at least a part of the first balloon display overlaps at least a part of the second balloon display (for example, see FIG. 150 (e)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  There are cases where the player's interest can be attracted to the second balloon display in front.

(L6)
The game stand according to any one of l1 to l5,
The first balloon display is a display including a character (for example, a character of Tono),
The second balloon display is a display including a character (for example, Tono character),
The first balloon display character and the second balloon display character may be the same (for example, see FIGS. 167 (f) and (g)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, a balloon display of the same character is continuously displayed, so that a player's expectation can be enhanced.

(L7)
The game stand according to any one of l1 to l6,
Operating means (for example, a chance button 136),
When the operation means is operated after the first balloon display is displayed, the second balloon display may be displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 150 (d) and (e)). A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the player's willingness to participate in the game can be increased.

(L8)
The game stand according to any one of l1 to l7,
One of the plurality of displays is a third balloon display (for example, balloon display f5) (for example, see FIG. 153 (q)),
While the first balloon display is being displayed in the first display area, the third balloon display may start to be displayed (see, for example, FIG. 153 (n))
The width of the first balloon display and the width of the second balloon display are the same,
The width of the first balloon display and the width of the third balloon display are different (see, for example, FIG. 153 (q)).
A game stand characterized by that.

  In some cases, the player's expectation can be enhanced by varying the width of the balloon display.

(L9)
The game stand according to any one of l1 to l8,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.
(L10)
The game stand according to any one of l1 to l8,
The gaming table is a slot machine (for example, slot machine 1000).
A game stand characterized by that.

The balloon display may be moved and displayed while being overlapped with another display (for example, a notice, an error display, a ball removal display).
-A part of the balloon display may disappear after moving display, two or more balloon displays may disappear, or two or more balloon displays may be simultaneously or in sequence.
The size of the balloon display may be the same as the first balloon display, may be double, or may be half.
-It may be displayed again after the balloon display disappears (the erase animation may be reversely played and the appearance animation may be performed after the erase animation is performed).
A part of the redisplayed balloon display may be changed (the color may be changed to red, gold, or rainbow, or the character may be changed to a character with high expectation).
When displaying a new balloon display, a balloon display with a high expectation level may remain and other balloon displays (a balloon display with a low expectation level) may disappear preferentially.
A display in which the balloon display is enlarged may be performed, or a display in which the balloon display characters protrude from the frame of the balloon display may be performed.
-The balloon display may disappear regardless of the operation of the operating means.
-You may animate a character during the movement animation of a balloon display.
-A balloon display may be displayed over a plurality of variations.
-A prefetch notice may be performed in a balloon display.
The balloon display may be performed by the second display means, the balloon display may be performed across the display means and the second display means, or one of the display means and the second display means to the other The balloon display may be displayed in a moving manner, or the balloon display may be displayed on one of the display means and the second display means, and the character corresponding to the other may be displayed.

Each event (each production) may be executed in series or in parallel.
Each event (each effect) can be a combination of a part or all of a certain event (a certain effect) and a part or all of another event (an other effect).
Each event (each effect) may be executed in series or in parallel.
Each event (each effect) may only be executed in series.
Each event (each effect) may only be executed in parallel.
Here, serial execution means that an event (an effect) starts after an event (an effect) ends, and execution in parallel means an event (or an effect) And other events (other effects) may be performed at the same time, the start timing and end timing of an event (certain effect), the start timing of another event (other effects) A combination of the end timing and the end timing is possible as appropriate.

In addition, each event (each production) may be configured to be executable in parallel and / or serial only in a certain state, or may be configured to be executable without being distinguished by the state. .
The certain state may be a state that is shifted by a player operation, or may be a state that is shifted regardless of the player operation (for example, a transition is performed regardless of the player operation after the player operation). In this case, it may be a final opportunity or an initial opportunity.)
Here, “transition without player operation” may be a transition based on a lottery, a transition state corresponding to a control state, or a combination of both. It may be.
Here, the “lottery” may be a lottery related to the advantage to the player or may be a lottery not related to the advantage to the player.
Here, the “control state” may be a state related to the advantage for the player or a state not related to the advantage for the player (for example, the control state 1 and the control state 2). And the player's advantage may be different or not different.)
The state where the advantage for the player is different will be described in detail. In the case where there are the control state 1 and the control state 2, if the advantage is different due to staying in the control state N, staying itself In, there is no difference in advantage, there may be a difference in advantage in the state after stay, any of which may be.

The image used in the explanation of each figure (each event (each effect)) is an image for explanation. Of course, other images may be used, for example, an image of Tono-sama (male character). It is also possible to replace the image with a princess (female character).
In addition, even if an image explaining a certain effect and an image explaining another effect are the same image, the image explaining the other effect is replaced with another image, It is also possible to perform other effects in parallel and / or in series.
In addition, when an image explaining a certain effect and an image explaining another effect are the same image, it is not possible to execute them in parallel and / or in series, but as an alternative. Also good.
In addition to the case where the images are the same, there are cases where the timing is the same (for example, both are in super reach production) and the location is the same (for example, both are on hold display areas).
Specifically, even if the timing is the same, for example, the first half and the second half of super reach may be executed in series, and even if the locations are the same, they may be executed in parallel at different locations. Or in series with the first half of Super Reach at the same location.

Each event (each effect) is realized by a certain means (effect means).
A certain means (production means) may be composed of a plurality of devices (plural production devices).
Each event (each effect) performed by each of a plurality of devices (a plurality of effect devices) may be performed by one device (effect device).
Each event (each effect) performed by one device (effect device) may be performed by a plurality of devices (a plurality of effect devices).
In addition, as a device (production device), a display device such as a decorative symbol display device 208, a first decorative symbol display device 208L, a second decorative symbol display device 208M, a third decorative symbol display device 208N, a movable body 700, 702, or the like. The movable body is mentioned.
In addition, each event (each production) may be described by taking one device (production device) as an example. For example, if it is a notification, it is applied to another device (a production device) capable of notification. Is possible.
Further, for example, in the case of notification, it may be configured to be realized by a plurality of devices (a plurality of rendering devices).
Further, in a case where it can be realized by a plurality of devices (a plurality of rendering devices), part or all of a certain notification characteristic may be applied to each of the plurality of devices (a plurality of rendering devices).

Each configuration in each event (each production) may only be illustrated, and even if only one of each event (each production) has a configuration, the other configuration May be combined with each other, or may be combined after deleting a configuration provided only on one side.
Further, the combination may be denied due to the difference in configuration.

Next, another specific example of effects executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment will be described with reference to FIGS. 170 to 185. The reference numerals shown in FIGS. 170 to 185 are used only in the description of the embodiment shown in FIGS. 170 to 185 in principle. The reference numerals 170 to 185 are prioritized.
<Direction using the second decorative design>

170 to 185, as one of the embodiments of the present invention, a part of the configuration is appropriately extracted for an effect example using the second decorative symbol executed in the pachinko machine 100 according to the present embodiment. This will be described with reference to an enlarged view.
<Example A>

  FIG. 170 is a diagram showing an example of effects centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine according to this embodiment.

  First, the timing shown in FIG. 170 (a) indicates a state in which the variation of the first decorative symbol is stopped (the state in which the variation is stopped). In the first image display device 2081, “decoration 3” is displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. The combination (decoration symbol combination) of the decoration symbol (first decoration symbol) of “decoration 1-decoration 4” is stopped and displayed.

  In addition, a white variation icon h0 is displayed at the right end of the icon display area 800, and four suggestion displays (in this example, pedestals) are displayed on the left side, and the hold icons h11, h12 and h13 are displayed to notify that the hold in FIG. On the other hand, the hold icons h12 and h13 are displayed in white (default), whereas the hold icon h11 is displayed in blue and a pre-reading notice is executed. In the explanation display area TT1, a tutorial display “Panda is a master of the lord” is executed.

  In the second image display device 2082, a meter (button image) is displayed, but at this timing, all the meters are filled with white to notify that the meter is zero. In the stage name display area, “castle town” is displayed, and it is notified that the current stage is a castle town.

  In the third image display device 2083, a state where the Tono-sama character is on the stage is shown. In the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the hold of the special figure 1 is “3”. Special figure 1 and special figure 2 indicating the number of holdings in special figure 2 are “0”.

  The 4th symbol display device 284 displays both the special figure 1 (rectangle) and the special figure 2 (round shape) in gray, indicating that the off state is stopped. In addition, the chance buttons 136 and 137 have the built-in LEDs lit white. In the family crest member 224, the built-in LED emits blue light in conjunction with the pre-reading notice of the hold icon h11, and is waiting (stopped) at the initial position (in this example, below the first image display device 2081). In the Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 244C, the built-in LED emits white light, and is waiting (stopped) at the initial position (in this example, above the first image display device 2081). Audio output from the speaker 120 is not performed at this timing.

  In the following description, the description will mainly focus on effects that have changed from previous effects with the passage of time.

  The timing shown in FIG. 170 (b) is a state in which one hold (hold corresponding to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 170 (a)) has been consumed, and symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) has started. In the 4th symbol display device 284, the special figure 1 (square) is displayed in white and the special figure 2 (round) is displayed in gray, indicating that the variable game of the special figure 1 is being executed. .

  At this timing, in the first symbol display area 208X (symbol display areas 208a to 208c) of the first image display device 2081, the variation display (first variation display) of the first decorative symbol is performed. In the present embodiment, the decorative symbol variation display (first variation display and second variation display) is represented by a downward white arrow (hereinafter, the same applies to other examples). Moreover, the white arrow shown to the same figure (b) is an elongate arrow, and shows that the decoration design is fluctuating at high speed in the aspect which has permeability | transmittance in this case. On the other hand, when the white arrow is displayed as a short (thick) arrow (for example, (e) in the same figure), it indicates that the decorative symbol fluctuates at a low speed. In the case of low-speed fluctuation, the speed may be such that the decorative symbol can be recognized.

  In addition, with the suspension of the hold, in the icon display area 800, the hold icons h11, h12, and h13 are moved and displayed by moving animations, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the right end of the icon display area 800. Is displayed as a blue fluctuation icon h0, and a pre-reading notice is made. In addition, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h12 becomes the hold icon h11 on the left side of the change icon h0, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h13 becomes the hold icon h12, and the left of the change icon h0. The white hold icons h11 and h12 are respectively displayed on the two pedestals to notify that the hold in FIG.

  In the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the special figure 1 hold is "2" and the special figure 2 hold is "0". Number display is performed.

  In the explanation display portion TT1, the characters “Panda is a master of the panda” are still displayed. Thus, the explanation display in the explanation display unit TT1 may be performed across a plurality of symbol variation displays.

In the timing shown in FIG. 170 (c), in the left symbol display area 208a of the first image display device 2081, the decorative symbol (here, “decoration 6”) fluctuates (temporarily stops), and FIG. The timing shown is a state in which the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) has been shaken (temporarily stopped) in the right symbol display area 208c of the first image display device 2081, and is pretending to be reach (tempered pie). .
The timing shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which the decorative symbol (“decoration 6”) that has been subjected to fluctuation fluctuation (temporary stop) in the right symbol display area 208c starts to fluctuate again. Note that the fluctuation of “decoration 6” in the right symbol display area 208c at this timing is a low-speed fluctuation as indicated by a white short (thick) arrow. In addition, the state in which the decorative symbol starts to fluctuate (temporarily stop) and then starts low-speed fluctuation may be referred to as “decorative symbol slips” or “decorative symbol is slell”.

  In the present embodiment, when the decorative design (first decorative design) shifts, a continuous effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) may be started. In this example, the case where the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) shifts as one of the start conditions of the pseudo-continuous effect will be described. However, other start conditions may be used as the start condition of the pseudo-continuous effect. The design (first decorative design) may always be misaligned, may or may not be misaligned, or may not be misaligned. The same applies to the pseudo-continuous effects described below. It is.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6F is a state in which the decorative symbol (here “decoration 7”) is changing in the right symbol display area 208c (temporarily stopped). In this way, when a certain decorative design (here “decoration 6”) is shifted and another (next) decorative design (here “decoration 7”) is shaking (temporarily stopped), The stopped decorative pattern (“decoration 7”) may be referred to as a “shift eye”.

  In the present embodiment, the occurrence of misalignment of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) is one of notifications that the pseudo-continuous effect may be started. Note that the notification that the pseudo-continuous effect may be started may be other notifications, and may not be the occurrence of misalignment.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G is a state in which the first animation has started in the middle symbol display area 208b where high-speed fluctuation has been performed. In this example, the first animation is an animation with a special symbol (first symbol). Here, the special symbol is a symbol of a different type from the decorative symbol representing a number, for example, one symbol among the symbols related to the execution of the continuous effect (first effect). The special symbol is also one of the decorative symbols (the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol of the present embodiment). Specifically, the special symbol refers to a symbol in which a continuous effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect or a continuous notice effect) is started when the symbol is stopped and displayed.

  As an example, the first animation of the present embodiment is an animation (a special symbol stop animation) that indicates whether or not a special symbol is stopped and displayed in at least one of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c. In the present embodiment, as an example, a case where the first animation is an animation (middle symbol beat animation) that indicates whether or not the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b will be described as an example. Here, the stop display of the special symbol may be a shaking fluctuation stop display (temporary stop display), which is the same in the following embodiments.

  When the middle symbol beat animation ends, the special symbol may be stopped and displayed, and when the special symbol is stopped and displayed, the continuous effect may be executed.

  Here, the special symbol is a symbol of the character (dono) as shown in FIG. 5G, and when this special symbol (the symbol of the character (donor)) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, for example, The pseudo-continuous production is executed as the continuous production. Thus, the special symbol related to the start of the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect may be referred to as a pseudo-continuous symbol.

  The continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is started when a certain symbol (three symbols) is stopped and displayed in the left symbol display area 208a, the middle symbol display area 208b, and the right symbol display area 208c. In this case, the animation that beats (first animation) may be an animation that beats whether or not the last symbol of the three symbols is stopped and displayed. In addition, the stop display in this case refers to a stop display other than the fixed display such that at least one of the three symbols includes a fluctuation fluctuation.

  That is, the timing shown in FIG. 5G is the first animation (whether the middle symbol is turned on) whether or not the pseudo-continuous design (which is a start condition) related to the start of the pseudo-continuous effect is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. (Animation) is being performed.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 11 (h), the pseudo continuous symbol temporarily stops in the middle symbol display area 208b, and at the timing shown in FIG. ing. That is, the pseudo-continuous symbol in FIG. 11H has the same display size as the decorative symbols (“decoration 6” and “decoration 7”) in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208c. The width of the pseudo continuous pattern (i) is increased. As a result, the right end of “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and the left end of “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208a start to overlap with the left end and the right end of the pseudo-continuous symbol, respectively.

  In addition, at the timing shown in FIG. 5I, the second symbol display area 208Y for displaying the second decorative symbol is displayed on the upper part of the second image display device 2082. At this timing, only the second symbol display area 208Y (the frame portion indicated by a white square in the drawing) starts displaying, and the second decorative symbol is not displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6J shows a state in which the horizontal width of the pseudo-continuous symbol is further enlarged. At this timing, the “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and the “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208a are completely overlapped by the pseudo-continuous symbols, and cannot be visually recognized by the player (left symbol display). The decorative symbols of the area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are both difficult to be visually recognized by the player as compared to the pseudo-continuous symbols.

  In addition, at this timing (at least a part of the state in which the first animation display (medium symbol beat animation) is displayed), the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. Change, temporary stop display). The second decorative symbol at this timing is stopped and displayed in the symbol combination shown in FIG. 171 (o), for example. In other words, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208k as a swing variation (temporary stop), and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 7”) is displayed in the right symbol display region 208g. ) And a pseudo-continuous symbol (in this case, the symbol of the same character (dono) as in Fig. 11H) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208l.

  In addition, as shown in the figure (i), as shown in the figure (j), without displaying "only the frame" of the 2nd design display area 208Y as a display plan area of the 2nd decoration design, as shown in the figure (j). The second decorative symbol may be displayed in the symbol display area 208Y (the second symbol display area 208Y can be recognized by the player by the start of the display of the second decorative symbol).

  At this timing, the first decorative symbol is invisible to the player due to the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous symbol (for example, more difficult to see than the pseudo-continuous symbol or the displayed second decorative symbol), and the first animation The first decorative symbol after the end of (the state of the first decorative symbol variation stop) is unconfirmed, but the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped by the second decorative symbol (the middle symbol display region 208l of the second symbol display region 208Y). The presence or absence of the display can be recognized by the player. In other words, for advanced users, by gazing at the second decorative symbol, at this timing, the state of the first decorative symbol is stopped, that is, the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is stopped and displayed continuously. It becomes possible to recognize whether or not (pseudo-continuous production) has been started. In this way, the state of the first decorative symbol change stoppage is unconfirmed, but the second decorative symbol can be recognized by the player as to whether or not the special symbol is stopped (the presence or absence of the continuous performance) (first state). In the present specification, the “first barre” is a state in which the state is notified in place of the first decorative symbol that is invisible (difficult to see) to the player in the symbol display area 208X.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (k) shows a state in which the horizontal width of the pseudo-continuous symbol is further enlarged and displayed. At this timing, the “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and the “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208a are completely overlapped by the pseudo-continuous symbols, and cannot be visually recognized by the player (left symbol display). The decorative symbols of the area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are both difficult to be visually recognized by the player as compared to the pseudo-continuous symbols. Further, the left and right end portions of the enlarged pseudo-continuous pattern are displayed in part of the display area of the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083, respectively. That is, one pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed over (spanning) a plurality of image display devices 208 ′ (first image display device 2081, second image display device 2082, and third image display device 2093).

  More specifically, in the second image display device 2082, the enlarged left end of the pseudo-continuous design overlaps the second decorative design, the meter, and the stage name display area. For example, the left end of the pseudo-continuous design is at least the first (In this example, the left end portion of the pseudo-continuous symbol is overlapped with the second decorative symbol, the meter, and the stage name display area). In the second decorative symbol, the stop display of the symbol combination in FIG. 171 (o) continues.

  In the third image display device 2083, the enlarged right end portion of the pseudo-continuous pattern is overlapped with a part of the display in the third image display device 2083 (in this example, a character on the stage, And overlapped with the second hold number display in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2).

  At this timing, a part of the movable body (in this example, the family crest member 244A) starts to rise and overlaps a part of the first image display device 2081 (overlaps with the first image display device 2081). . Thereby, a part of the display displayed on the first image display device 2081 is overlapped with the family crest character 224A and cannot be visually recognized by the player (or the second decorative design or movable body (family crest character 224A or the like). ) Is more difficult to see). Specifically, a pseudo-continuous pattern (a part), a part of the display of the icon display area 800 (in this example, the fluctuation icon h0 (all), the hold icon h11 and a part of the pedestal), and an explanation display A part of the tutorial display in the area TT1 is invisible to the player (or more difficult to see than the second decorative symbol or movable body (family crest character 224A, etc.)).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 11 (l), the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous pattern is finished (the enlargement is stopped at the same size as the pseudo-continuous pattern shown in FIG. 10 (k)), and the elevated family crest character 244A is raised. , And a sound effect “don” is output from the speaker 120.

  At this timing, the symbol combination of the first decorative symbols is not visually recognized (difficult to visually recognize) by the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous symbols, but the first decorative symbol is determined to be in a variable stop state. That is, at this timing, the player can recognize the stop display state of the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) and the start of execution of the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect). The second decorative design is the same as (k) of the same figure (state of FIG. 171 (o)).

  Therefore, even if the player does not notice the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display (first ballet) in the second symbol display area 208Y at the timing of FIG. It can be recognized that the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display and the execution start of the pseudo-continuous effect are confirmed by the operation (here, the rotation operation) of the family crest actor 244A) and / or the sound effect from the speaker 120.

  For example, the family crest character 244A starts rotating after the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display and the execution start of the pseudo-continuous rendering are confirmed. Note that the family crest member 224A may rise after starting rotation at the initial position (the position below the first image display device 2081 shown in FIG. 6 (j)). After the stop display and the start of execution of the pseudo-continuous production are confirmed, the display moves to the stop position after the ascent (position (l) in the figure).

  Note that the family crest member 244A performs movements such as ascending and descending and rotating operations even during other effects. In addition, the family crest character 244A may be configured not to perform operations such as movement and rotation such as ascending and descending during other effects, or to perform movement and rotation such as ascending and descending during other effects. Some of the operations may be performed, or only some of the operations may not be performed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (m) shows a state where the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol in the first symbol display area 208X is visible to the player after the first animation display is completed. Although illustration is omitted, an animation of a reduced display of an enlarged pseudo-continuous pattern is executed between FIG. 1 (l) and FIG. 1 (m), and as shown in FIG. (Display size equivalent to “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208c). As a result, “decoration 6” that is fluctuated (temporarily stopped) in the left symbol display area 208a of the first symbol display area 208X, and a special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) that is fluctuated (temporarily stopped) in the middle symbol display area 208b. In addition, “decoration 7” that fluctuates (temporarily stops) in the right symbol display area 208c becomes visible to the player, and the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is confirmed. The second decorative design is the same as (k) of the same figure (state of FIG. 171 (o)). That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 5 (m), the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are visible to the player at the same time in the same display mode ((temporary) stop display of the same symbol combination). Yes.

  It should be noted that the animation of the pseudo-continuous symbol reduction display executed between FIG. 1 (l) and FIG. 1 (m) is the animation display of the pseudo-continuous symbol enlarged display (for example, FIG. The execution time may be the same as that in FIG. (K)), may be short, or may be long. Moreover, the animation of the reduced display of pseudo-continuous symbols may not be executed.

  In general, as shown in FIG. 6 (m), the player stops and displays a special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first image display device 2081 (first symbol display area 208X). This makes it possible to recognize that the start of the execution of the continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) has been confirmed. Alternatively, the player who is used to the game cannot visually recognize the state of the first decorative symbol (whether the symbol combination or (temporary) stop display is present) by the first animation display as shown in FIG. Even if it is difficult to visually recognize), it may be possible to recognize that the start of the continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) has been confirmed by the operation (in this case, the rotation operation) of the movable body (family crest actor 224A). .

  In the present embodiment, the state of the first symbol display area 208X is invisible (difficult to see) by the first animation display at a timing before those (FIG. (M), (l)). However, as shown in FIG. 6 (j), the player recognizes that the execution of the continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) has been confirmed by the second decorative symbol that is not overlapped in the first animation display. There is a case that can be made.

  In this example, the timing at which the display of the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) shown in FIG. 5G is set as the start timing of the first animation, but the start timing of the first animation is limited to this timing. Absent. For example, the start timing of the first animation may be the timing at which the player can visually recognize the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) shown in FIG. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the timing at which the pseudo-simultaneous symbols are temporarily stopped may be used, or the display mode of the special symbols changes at a timing later than (h) in the same figure (in this example, the pseudo-simulation as shown in (i) in the same figure). It may be the timing when the enlarged display of the continuous symbols is started).

  Also, the end timing of the first animation is, for example, until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in (m) of the first animation, or until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in (m) of FIG. When the special symbol reduction animation is executed during the same figure (m), until the reduced animation is completed, until the reduced animation is started, or until the enlarged animation is completed in the same figure (l). , And so on.

  That is, the display period of the first animation is a period defined as any combination of the start timing and the end timing of the above-mentioned first animation, but as an example, before the figure (m) When the special symbol reduction animation is executed, the first animation is displayed until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the same figure (g) to (m). Before the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the figure (m), or before the special symbol is stopped and displayed in the figure (i) to (m). In addition, if the special symbol reduction animation is not executed before (m) in the same figure (when ending with the enlarged display), the display period of the first animation is from (g) to (l) in the same figure. (H) to FIG. (L), or (i) to (l), etc., and the same applies to the following embodiments.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9 (n) shows a state in which display of a second animation different from the first animation is started in the display area of the first image display device 2081.

  The second animation that is displayed at this timing (after the quasi-continuous symbol is stopped) is an animation that is displayed during the period until the quasi-continuous production starts, and here, it continues multiple times (for example, twice). This is an animation indicating that the execution of the pseudo-continuous production is confirmed.

  In this example, the second animation displays the character (dono) from the center to the left as shown in (n) of the figure, and the character (dono) moves to the center as shown in (o) of the figure. However, this is an animation in which the display size expands and the text “Still More !!” is displayed. In this example, the second animation is displayed only on the first image display device 2081. However, the second animation may be displayed over a plurality of image display devices 208 ′.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (p) shows a state in which execution of a pseudo-continuous effect that continues multiple times is started, and there is no change in the display of the icon display area and the digestion of the hold.

  At this timing, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (first symbol display area 208X) of the first image display device 2081, the combination of the first decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7” is stopped and displayed. . In addition, it overlaps with a part of the first decorative design (in this example, a part of “decoration 6”) and is referred to as a display relating to the number of pseudo-continuous effects (hereinafter referred to as “pseudo continuous display”). “× 2”) indicating the number of times is displayed.

  Further, in the symbol display areas 208k to 208g (second symbol display area 208Y) of the second image display device 2082, the second decoration in the state of FIG. 171 (o) similar to FIGS. The display of symbols (decorative symbols including pseudo-continuous symbol stop display) continues to be displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, even when the display of the first image display device 2081 is changed, accurate information (in this example, simulated information) is displayed according to the second decorative symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. The player can recognize that the rendition effect is being executed. In other words, the second decorative symbol displayed on the second image display device 2082 (second symbol display area 208Y) is a decorative symbol in which some information is notified to the player by displaying the decorative symbol (a combination of decorative symbols). It can be said that it is a symbol that is displayed so as to exhibit its original function. In other words, the second decorative symbol is the first decorative symbol even when the state of the first decorative symbol (whether the symbol combination or (temporary) stop display is present) is not visible or difficult for the player to see. Guarantee of information notification by.

  In this way, when a continuous effect (for example, a pseudo-continuous effect) is executed, a special symbol (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol) is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b after the first animation (medium symbol beat animation) is displayed. Is stopped. Thereafter, when the variable display of the decorative symbol is resumed, a symbol other than the special symbol (for example, the decorative symbol of the same number as the right symbol display region 208c (here, “decoration 7”)) is displayed in the middle symbol display region 208b. indicate. That is, at this timing, the symbol combination of the second decorative symbol (“decoration 6-special symbol-decoration 7”) is different from the symbol combination of the first decorative symbol (“decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7”). It is a combination.

  In this example, in the state where the variable display of the first decorative symbol is resumed, the numerical decorative symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. However, in the state where the variable display of the first decorative symbol is restarted. In the middle symbol display area 208b, the same symbol as the second decorative symbol (that is, a special symbol) may be displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11 (q) is the same for the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol and first decorative symbol in the first symbol display region 208X of the first image display device 2081 and the second symbol display region 208Y of the second image display device 2082, respectively. This shows a state in which the variation display (high-speed variation) of the second decorative design has been resumed. Further, with the start of the decorative symbol variation display, an animation in which the pseudo-continuous number display (in this example, “× 2”) is reduced and displayed is executed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 7 (r), the first symbol display area 208X continues to display the first decorative symbol (high-speed variation), while the second symbol display area 208Y (second decorative symbol) It is hidden.

  In the above example, after the timing shown in (i) in the figure, after displaying the variation display of the second decorative symbol as shown in (q) in the second symbol display area 208Y, ) May be temporarily stopped (stop display of pseudo-continuous symbols).

  Further, the second decorative symbol stop display (the second decorative symbol (FIG. 171 (o) shown in FIG. 171 (j)) including the special symbol stop symbol on the second image display device 2082 is the first image display device. It is only necessary for the player to be able to see the first decorative symbol including the special symbol 2081 before the stop display (FIG. (M)). For example, at the timing shown in FIG. The stop display of the second decorative symbol including the display (FIG. 171 (o)) may be displayed, or the second decorative symbol including the stop display of the special symbol may be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. A stop display of two decorative symbols (FIG. 171 (o)) may be displayed.

  In the same figure (j), the timing (first timing) when the right symbol (“decoration 6”) and the left symbol (“decoration 7”) are overlapped with the enlarged middle symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol), The display timing of the second decorative symbol (second timing) may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing is after the second timing. It may be.

  In addition, in the same figure (p), even if the display timing (first timing) of the pseudo continuous display is the same timing as the display start timing (resume timing, second timing) of the first decorative symbol. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.

  In addition, in the same figure (q), the start timing (first timing) of the variable display of the first decorative symbol and the start timing (second timing) of the variable display of the second decorative symbol are the same timing. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.

  In addition, the pseudo continuous number display may be started from (q) in the same figure. In this case, the display timing of the pseudo continuous number display (first timing) and the start timing of the second decorative symbol variation display (first timing). The second timing may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.

Also, in FIG. 8 (r), the timing at which the pseudo continuous display is reduced from the size shown in (q) (first timing) and the timing of erasing the second decorative symbol (second timing) are as follows. The same timing may be used, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.
<Matters common to each embodiment>
Matters common to the embodiments shown in FIGS. 170 to 185 including this embodiment are described.

  First, in the decorative symbol state (decorative symbol combination), which is the condition that the pseudo-continuous effect starts (may be), a shift occurs in the left symbol or right symbol (there is a special symbol in the middle symbol after that) Stop), the left symbol and the right symbol become a template (when stopped at the same symbol), the special symbol stops in the middle symbol, or the special symbol stops in the middle symbol regardless of the left symbol and right symbol Whether or not (only), etc.

  In addition, in a configuration in which a pseudo-continuous effect may be started when a misalignment occurs in the left symbol or the right design, if there is no misalignment, it becomes a tempered, and then the decorative pattern of the tempered number If the decorative pattern of the number added with 1 passes, it will develop to reach. On the other hand, when the pseudo-continuous effect is not started, if a misalignment does not occur, it becomes a temper, and thereafter, it is stopped and displayed with a numeral decorative symbol obtained by adding 1 to the tempered numeral decorative symbol.

  Also, in the configuration where the pseudo-continuous effect may be started when the left symbol and the right symbol are tempered, there is a state whether the pseudo-simultaneous symbol is stopped first, and then the number of the tempered number is displayed. If the decorative pattern of the number which added 1 to the decorative pattern passes, it will develop to reach. On the other hand, when the quasi-continuous effect is not started, the display is stopped with the numeral decoration symbol obtained by adding 1 to the numeral decoration symbol that has been tempered, and the display is lost.

  Also, for example, the left symbol is “decoration 6”, the middle symbol is “special symbol”, and the right symbol is “decoration 7” (the symbol combination “decoration 6-special symbol-decoration 7” is stopped). When the continuous production starts, the left symbol “decoration 6”, the middle symbol “special symbol”, and the right symbol “decoration 7” are stopped and displayed in the next pseudo-series production. “Decoration 6”, the right design is “decoration 6”, and it is configured to be a temperament (referred to as “decoration 6 temper”). In this case, “decoration 6 temper” is configured to have a higher probability of jackpot than reach other than “decoration 6 temper”.

  Accordingly, in the second decorative symbol, for example, as shown in FIG. 17 (j) and FIG. 171 (o), among the symbol combinations “decoration 6-special symbol-decoration 7”, “decoration 6” on the left symbol is the player. When it becomes visible, the player may be able to recognize whether or not it will become a “decoration 6 tempered” when developed into a super reach, and may increase the player's expectation.

  Some temperament designs have different expectations of jackpots. For example, the left design is “decoration 7”, the right design is “decoration 7”, and the tempering (referred to as “decoration 7 tempering”) is followed by “hot” development. Become. In such a case, it becomes possible to visually recognize that the symbol combination of “decoration 7-special symbol-decoration 8” is stopped and displayed by the second ornament symbol, so that the subsequent development is “hot” to the player. May be recognized.

  In addition, the first animation (stopping animation of special symbol) includes an enlarged display, but it may also include a rotation display, and is attached to the symbol rather than an enlarged display of the symbol itself. The effect display may include a display that gradually expands. Moreover, the display other than the second decorative pattern may be overlapped by the enlarged display of the first animation.

  In addition, the second decorative symbol will be described by taking as an example a configuration in which it may be displayed or hidden, but the second decorative symbol is excluded except for a configuration in which a third decorative symbol to be described later is displayed (FIG. 179). May be displayed constantly.

  In addition, in one of the roaring animations of the special symbols (first animation, special symbol stop-spinning animation, middle symbol roaring animation), the second decorative symbol may occur, There is no decorative symbol corresponding to the special symbol, and there may be a symbol that is caused by a stop display of the second decorative symbol by a symbol other than the special symbol.

  In addition, the stop display (redisplay) of the decorative symbol (first decorative symbol) that occurs after the pseudo-continuous effect does not include a special symbol in order to prevent the false continuous symbol from being falsely recognized again. Is desirable.

  In addition, when there are a plurality of pseudo-continuous times, the display mode of the change icon h0 changes (or can change) as the number advances (increases) increases. In this configuration, the hold icon and the fluctuation icon may be hidden at a certain timing.

Moreover, although the case where there are a plurality of pseudo-continuous times is described as an example, the number of pseudo-continuous times may be one. The greater the number of pseudo-continuations (the longer the pseudo-continuous productions are), the higher the degree of expectation for jackpots. In addition, in each production example described in this specification, there may be a production having a higher degree of jackpot expectation than a pseudo-continuous production, or a production having a lower jackpot expectation than a pseudo-continuous production. May be.
<Example B>

  Next, other examples of effects will be described. FIG. 171 is a diagram showing stepwise another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  This effect example is an example in which the special symbol is not stopped and displayed after the first animation display is finished (that is, the continuous effect is not started). FIGS. 171 (a) to (i) are diagrams. Since the timings are the same as those shown in 170 (a) to 170 (i), description thereof will be omitted. In other cases, the description of the same configuration as the effect example A shown in FIG. 170 may be omitted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 171 (j) shows a state in which the horizontal width of the pseudo-continuous symbol is further enlarged. At this timing, the “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and the “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208a are completely overlapped by the pseudo-continuous symbols, and cannot be visually recognized by the player (left symbol display). The decorative symbols of the area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are both difficult to be visually recognized by the player as compared to the pseudo-continuous symbols.

  In the second image display device 2082, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y in which only the frame portion (white square frame) has started to be displayed at the timing shown in FIG. Is done. The second decorative design in this case is displayed in the state shown in FIG. In other words, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208k as a swing variation (temporary stop), and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 7”) is displayed in the right symbol display region 208g. )Is displayed. On the other hand, in the middle symbol display area 208l, the variation display (high-speed variation) of the decorative symbol (second decorative symbol) is being performed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6 (k), an animation of the reduced display of the enlarged pseudo-continuous symbols is executed in the first symbol display area 208X. As shown in FIG. The display is reduced to “decoration 6” of 208a and the display size equivalent to “decoration 7” of the right symbol display area 208c), and an animation (middle symbol scrolling display) that descends from above in the middle symbol display area 208b is executed. It shows the state.

  At this timing, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. The second decorative design in this case is displayed in the state shown in FIG. That is, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208k in a swinging manner (temporarily stopped), and the decorative symbol (second symbol, here “decoration 8”) is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208l. Is displayed in a stopped state, and a decorative symbol (in this case, “decoration 7”) is displayed in the right symbol display area 208g. That is, at this timing, both the first symbol variation area 208X and the second symbol variation area 208Y are visible to the player, but the state of the first decorative symbol (whether there is a symbol combination or (temporary) stop display) And the state of the second decorative symbol (whether or not there is a symbol combination or (temporary) stop display) is different. Hereinafter, simply “decorated symbol state” refers to a state (display mode) such as a combination of decorative symbols and the presence or absence of (temporary) stop display.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11 (l) shows a state in which a numerical decoration symbol (here, “decoration 8”) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b after the first animation display in the first symbol variation area 208X. Show. That is, after the first animation display, it is determined that the special symbol (in this case, the pseudo-continuous symbol) is not stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b, and the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) due to the stop of the special symbol is not executed. It is in the state. Here, the first animation display refers to an animation with pseudo-continuous symbols (character (donor) symbols) in FIG.

  Further, at this timing, the stop display (swing fluctuation display) of the second decorative symbol shown in (q) of the same figure is continued in the second symbol display area 208Y. That is, at this timing, the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are visible to the player in the same state (a temporary stop state where the combination of decorative symbols is “decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 7”).

  Thus, in this example, the case where the execution of the continuous effect (for example, the pseudo-continuous effect) does not start after the first animation display is shown, and in this case, the middle symbol display of the first symbol display area 208X In the area 208b, a special symbol (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol) is not displayed in a stopped state, and a symbol of a different type from the special symbol (for example, a decorative symbol of a number) is displayed in a stopped state (a fluctuation variation display or a temporary stop display). Further, in this case, the decoration symbol (here “decoration 8”) that is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b is a numeral decoration symbol (FIG. 170 (p)) that is displayed when the continuous effect is executed. This is a decorative symbol (third symbol) with a number different from the decorative symbol ("decoration 7") that is stopped and displayed in the symbol display area 208b.

  The timing shown in (m) of FIG. 6 shows a state in which the second decorative symbol is erased in the second image display device 2082, and the timing shown in (n) of FIG. The decorative symbol is stopped and displayed (here, the second decorative symbol (the combination of the decorative symbols “decoration 6-decoration 8—decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed.

  In general, as shown in FIG. 1 (l), after the first animation has been displayed, the player can display a special image in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first image display device 2081 (first symbol display area 208X). Since the symbols (pseudo-continuous designs) are not stopped and displayed, it is possible to recognize that it has been determined that the continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) will not be executed. Alternatively, the player who is used to the game can move the movable body even when the state of the first symbol display area 208X is not visually recognized (difficult to visually recognize) by the first animation display as shown in FIG. It may be possible to recognize that the start of continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) has been confirmed by the operation (in this case, the rotation operation) of (family crest actor 224A).

  In the present embodiment, even if the stop display of the first decorative symbol is not fixed at the timing before that (the first animation display is being executed), as shown in FIG. It is determined that the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is not executed by the second decorative symbol (FIG. 171 (q)) in which the decorative symbols (numeric decorative symbols) other than the pseudo-continuous symbols are stopped and displayed in the display area 208l. In some cases, the player can recognize this.

  Alternatively, even when the first animation display is being executed at a timing prior to the timing shown in FIG. 10L, as shown in FIG. (The pseudo-continuous design is not stopped and displayed) The second decorative design (FIG. 171 (p)) can make the player recognize that it has been determined that the continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) will not be executed. There is a case.

  In addition, in the same figure (k), if the pseudo-continuous symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b moves downward (shifts), it may return to the upper side and stop displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Is the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol shown in FIG. 170 (m), and the pseudo-continuous effect is started as in FIGS. 170 (n) to (r). In this case, if the player has previously viewed the second decorative symbol with the special symbol stopped on the middle symbol, the first symbol is displayed with the special symbol stopped on the middle symbol of the second decorative symbol. If the middle symbol of the decorative symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b) is shifted downward, the player may recognize that it is shifted and can recognize that it returns upward (becomes a first ball).

  Note that the method of the case where the special symbol is stopped and displayed in a normal stop mode may be configured such that the expectation degree of jackpot is higher in the method in which the special symbol is shifted downward and then returned to the upper position and stopped.

  As described above, during the execution of the first animation ((j) and (k) in the figure), the first decorative symbol after the end (the state in which the variation of the first decorative symbol is stopped) is undetermined. Due to the second decorative symbol (the pseudo-continuous symbol is not stopped and displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y), the fact that the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is not performed is prejudice. That is, for example, an advanced user, etc., pays attention to the second decorative symbol, so that the state of the stop display of the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) and the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) before the stoppage of the variation of the first decorative symbol. ) Can be recognized.

  For example, the second decorative symbol (FIG. 171 (q)) in which the middle symbol is stopped may be displayed at the display timing of the second decorative symbol shown in FIG.

  In addition, when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed as shown in FIG. 170, no prior ball is generated due to the display of the second decorative symbol, and only when the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed as shown in FIG. You may do it.

  In addition, it is also possible to cause a prior ballet both when the pseudo-continuous effect is executed as shown in FIG. 170 and when the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed as shown in FIG.

In FIG. 171 (k), the timing at which the animation of the scroll display of the pseudo-continuous symbol (first timing) and the timing at which the second decorative symbol is displayed (second timing) are the same. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be later than the second timing.
<Example C>

FIG. 172 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of effects centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Example C-1)

  FIGS. 7B to 7F show that the first image display device 2081 has a second symbol display area 208 </ b> Y for executing the variation display (second variation display) of the second decorative symbol. It is an example of production when there is.

  That is, (b) to (f) in the figure correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 170 (h) to 170 (l), respectively, and in FIGS. 170 (h) to 170 (l), The second decorative symbol displayed on the two-image display device 2082 is displayed on the second symbol display area 208Y provided on the first image display device 2081.

  Specifically, at the timing shown in FIG. 172 (b), the pseudo-continuous symbols temporarily stop in the middle symbol display area 208b, and at the timing shown in FIG. The right end of “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and the left end of “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208a start to overlap the left end and right end of the pseudo-continuous symbol, respectively. For example, on the upper left side of the one-image display device 2081, only the second symbol display area 208 </ b> Y for displaying the second decorative symbol (the frame portion indicated by a white square in the drawing) starts displaying (first symbol). 2 decorative symbols are not displayed).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6D, the horizontal width of the pseudo-symbol pattern is further enlarged, and “decoration 6” in the left symbol display area 208a and “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208a are both pseudo-continuous. The symbols are completely overlapped with each other and cannot be visually recognized by the player (both decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are more difficult for the player to see than the pseudo-continuous symbols).

  Further, at this timing (at least a part of the state in which the first animation display (medium symbol beat animation) is displayed), the state shown in FIG. 171 (o) is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. A second decorative symbol is displayed. In other words, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208k as a swing variation (temporary stop), and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 7”) is displayed in the right symbol display region 208g. ) Is displayed, and the second decorative symbol is displayed in a state in which a pseudo-continuous symbol (here, the symbol of the same character (donor) as in Fig. 11H) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208l. That is, before the end of the first animation, the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol in the middle symbol display area 208l is in the state of the first ballet, and at this timing (or later timing), the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect is performed. Confirmation may be recognizable to the player.

  At this timing, at least a part of the second decorative symbol or the second symbol display area 208Y overlaps a part of the first animation.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5E, the width of the first decorative symbol pseudo-continuous pattern is further expanded, and one pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed on a plurality of image display devices 208 ′ (first image display device 2081, second image display). The image is displayed across the device 2082 and the third image display device 2093). The second decorative symbol (FIG. 171 (o)) including the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display is being displayed, and overlaps the pseudo-continuous symbol of the first decorative symbol. Also, the family crest character 244A starts to rise and overlaps a part of the first image display device 2081 (overlaps with the first image display device 2081).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5F, the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous pattern of the first decorative design is finished, the raised family crest member 244A rotates at the raised position, and a sound effect “don” is heard from the speaker 120. The output status is shown. The second decorative symbol (FIG. 171 (o)) including the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display is being displayed.

  As described above, in this embodiment (production example), the pseudo-continuous design of the first decorative design to be enlarged first overlaps the second decorative design (overlapped by the second decorative design), and then the second image display device. Display is started at 2082.

Even if the player is unaware of the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol in the second symbol display area 208Y shown in FIG. 4D, the player operates the movable body (family crest object 244A) shown in FIG. It can be recognized that the stop display of the pseudo-continuous symbol and the start of execution of the pseudo-continuous production thereby have been confirmed by the sound effect (here, rotating operation) and / or the speaker 120. Other configurations are the same as those in FIG.
(Example C-2)

  FIG. 172 (h) to FIG. 17 (l) are diagrams showing other examples of effects, and are examples of effects in which a part of the first decorative symbol is hidden during the execution of the first animation.

  FIGS. 172 (h) to (l) correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 170 (h) to 170 (l), respectively.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 172 (h), the pseudo continuous symbol temporarily stops in the middle symbol display region 208b of the first symbol display region 208X, and the horizontal width of the pseudo continuous symbol gradually increases at the timing shown in FIG. Start displaying. At this timing, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbols) in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are not displayed. In addition, for example, at the upper part of the second image display device 2082, only the second symbol display area 208Y (the frame portion indicated by a white square frame in the figure) for displaying the second decorative symbol starts displaying. (The second decorative design is not displayed).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6J, the horizontal width of the pseudo-continuous symbol is further enlarged and the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. This second decorative design is in the state of FIG. 171 (o). In other words, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208k as a swing variation (temporary stop), and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 7”) is displayed in the right symbol display region 208g. ) And a pseudo-continuous symbol (in this case, the character (donor) symbol) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208l. Thereby, before the end of the first animation, the stop display of the pseudo-symbol symbols in the middle symbol display area 208l is in the state of the first barre, and at this timing (or later timing), the pseudo-sequential effects are executed. May be recognized by the player.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5 (k), the width of the first decorative symbol pseudo-continuous pattern is further expanded, and one pseudo-continuous symbol is displayed in a plurality of image display devices 208 ′ (first image display device 2081, second image display). The image is displayed across the device 2082 and the third image display device 2093). The second decorative symbol (FIG. 171 (o)) including the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display is being displayed. At least a part of the second decorative symbol or the second symbol display area 208Y overlaps a part of the first animation displayed on the second image display device 2082.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 11 (l), the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous pattern of the first decorative design is finished, the raised family crest member 244A rotates at the raised position, and a sound effect “don” is heard from the speaker 120. The output status is shown. The second decorative symbol including the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display is being displayed. Other configurations are the same as those in FIG.

  As described above, in this embodiment (production example), the pseudo-continuous design of the first decorative design to be enlarged is first displayed on the second image display device 2082, and then the second decorative design (FIG. 171 (o)). ) (Overlapped by the second decorative pattern).

  In this production example, the decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a that are not displayed in FIG. 10 (i) are at least the second animation (pseudo) shown in FIG. 170 (n). In the state before the non-display at the timing (for example, the animation executed in the period until the start of the continuous production) (for example, the timing shown in FIG. 170 (m)), in the left symbol display area 208a, “ The decoration symbol “decoration 6” and the decoration symbol “decoration 7” are redisplayed in the right symbol display area 208a.

As described above, when the first decorative symbol is not displayed during the execution of the first animation, the player can recognize the state of the decorative symbol by displaying the second decorative symbol. Note that the display start timing of the second decorative symbol is the same as in the case of the effect example in FIG.
(Example C-3)

  FIG. 172 (n) to FIG. 17 (o) are diagrams showing other examples of effects, which are examples of effects in the case of becoming a temper (reach) in FIG. 170 (d).

  FIG. 172 (n) corresponds to the timing shown in FIG. 170 (d). In FIG. 170 (d), an effect that makes it look like a temper (not actually a temper) is performed, but the timing shown in FIG. 172 (n). Shows the state of becoming a temperament.

  The timing shown in FIG. 172 (o) indicates a state in which a tempering (reach) effect is being executed. In this example, the decorative symbols (first decorative symbols, for example, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a). , “Decoration 6”) are displayed in an enlarged manner, and the decorative symbol (eg, “decoration 6”) is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b as compared to the decorative symbols in the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a. An animation that is displayed in a poorly visible state is being executed.

  Further, since the left symbol and the right symbol which are enlarged are overlapped, the high-speed fluctuation of the middle symbol itself is difficult for the player to see compared to the left symbol and the right symbol.

  Here, “animation displayed in a poorly visible state for a player” means an animation that is less visible than the left and right symbols due to high-speed fluctuation of the middle symbol, For example, an animation displayed in a state where the transmittance is higher than that of the right symbol (a state where the decorative symbol is displayed lightly).

  In this case (in the case of a template), the second decorative design is not displayed on any of the image display devices 208 ′. In other words, in this embodiment, the animation display with the right symbol and / or the left symbol is in a state where the visibility of the scroll display of the middle symbol is hindered (the state where the information notification by the first decorative symbol is hindered). However, the display of the second decorative symbol (notification of the information) is not performed.

In FIG. 4D, the display of the second decorative symbol is started, but the pseudo continuous symbol is overlapped with the second decorative symbol by the display start timing of the second decorative symbol and the expansion of the pseudo continuous symbol. The timing may be simultaneous, or may be such that after the second decorative symbol starts displaying, the pseudo continuous symbol is overlapped with the second decorative symbol by expanding the pseudo continuous symbol, After the continuous symbols are enlarged, the display may be started so that the second decorative symbols overlap the pseudo continuous symbols. The same applies to FIG.
<Example D>

  FIG. 173 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of effects centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 17A, for example, the first decorative symbol variation display as shown in FIGS. 170B to 170C is executed, and the timing shown in FIG. 173B is followed by the left symbol. For example, the decorative pattern “decoration 6” in the display area 208a and the decorative symbol “decoration 7” in the right symbol display area 208a are fluctuated (temporarily stopped), and the decorative symbol is changing at high speed in the middle symbol display area 208b. Is shown.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10C corresponds to the timing shown in FIG. 170G, and is the state where the first animation has started in the middle symbol display area 208b where high-speed fluctuation has been performed. In this example, the first animation is an animation with a special symbol (first symbol), but is a special symbol (in this case, the character (princess) symbol) different from the pseudo-continuous effect stopped and displayed? This is an animation that sings about how to do it. For example, when a special symbol different from the pseudo-continuous effect (here, the character (princess) symbol) is stopped and displayed, it is the same type as the pseudo-continuous effect but another continuous effect (for example, a mini character MC described later). For example, a continuous production by a program, a continuous announcement production, etc.).

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6C, the middle symbol scrolling animation in which the special symbol of the character (princess) descends from above is executed in the middle symbol display area 208b.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 4D, in the middle symbol display area 208b, the special symbol of the character (princess) is stopped and displayed, and then, for example, a rotating animation (second position) is left unchanged. Running animation).

  In the middle symbol display area 208b, the timing shown in FIG. 5E is determined as the execution of the continuous performance is determined as the special symbol of the character (princess) is stopped and displayed in FIG. The state (for example, before a continuous production start) (2nd animation) regarding the continuous production is shown. Here, the second animation is an animation including an image in which an image of a character (princess) is displayed and a character “chance !!” is displayed.

  That is, in this production example, the display period of the first animation is, for example, until the special symbol is stopped and displayed in FIG. 4D (until the character (princess) symbol is rotated in FIG. ) Period.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (f) is the stop display of the first decorative symbol (here, “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7” symbol combination stop display (swing fluctuation, temporary change) in the first symbol display area 208X. Stop)) is being executed.

  At this timing, a small character (mini character MC) is displayed above the explanation display area TT1. In this example, the mini character MC is a mini character (princess), and this display is a continuous effect (an effect display constituting at least a part of the continuous effect).

  In this example, the special symbol is a different symbol from the pseudo-continuous symbol. However, after the animation after the special symbol is stopped and displayed (second animation) is finished, the decorative symbol is displayed (stop display). In the case of redisplaying, the left symbol display area 208a and the right symbol display area 208a are displayed in the decorative pattern ("decoration 6") of the left symbol display area 208a when the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in FIG. ) And the same decorative symbol as the decorative symbol (“decoration 7”) in the right symbol display area 208a are displayed.

  In such a case, the decorative symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b is the same as the decorative symbol ("decoration 7") in the right symbol display area 208a (or the same as the decorative symbol in the left symbol display area 208a ("decoration 6")). Decorative symbols may be stopped. That is, at this timing, the special symbol (character (princess)) is stopped and displayed, and the display of the first decorative symbol resumed after the animation (second animation) is displayed, as shown in FIG. For example, the decoration display of the decoration combination of “decoration 6—decoration 7—decoration 7” is stopped (fluctuation fluctuation, temporary stop).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6G indicates that the special symbol 1 (rectangle) and the special diagram 2 (round) are both displayed in gray in the fourth symbol display device 284, and are in a state in which the disconnection is stopped. Show. In the first symbol display area 208 </ b> X of the first image display device 2081, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (stopped with the symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7”, which is a combination of the symbols that are out of place).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 11H, one hold (hold corresponding to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 11G) has been consumed, and symbol variation in the first special figure display device 212 (not shown) has started. In the 4th symbol display device 284, the special figure 1 (square) is displayed in white and the special figure 2 (round) is displayed in gray, indicating that the variable game of the special figure 1 is being executed. .

  At this timing, in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first image display device 2081, the variation display (first variation display) of the first decorative symbol with high-speed variation is performed.

  In addition, with the suspension of the hold, in the icon display area 800, the hold icons h11 and h12 are moved and displayed by the moving animation, and the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h11 moves to the right end of the icon display area 800. It is displayed as a white variation icon h0. Further, the hold icon at the display position of the hold icon h12 becomes the hold icon h11 on the left side of the change icon h0, and the white hold icon h11 is displayed on the left base of the change icon h0. Is informed that the hold of 1 is 1.

  In the upper part of the display area of the third image display device 2083, the special figure 1 hold is "1" and the special figure 2 hold is "0". Number display is performed.

  Note that the mini character (princess) of the information in the explanation display part TT1 continues to be displayed (display is continued (carried over) until the next change). The number (display number) of mini characters (princesses) is increased by a special symbol (here, character (princess)) is stopped (see (d) in the figure)) during the subsequent games, As the number of displays increases, for example, the expectation degree of jackpot increases, and the player's expectation degree increases. That is, the effect of increasing (appearing) the display number of the mini character (princess) can be said to be the same kind of effect as the pseudo-continuous effect in terms of continuous effect.

  On the other hand, the pseudo-continuous production is a continuous production within one variation, while the production in which the mini character (princess) of the present embodiment appears is a continuous production (continuous production called a horizontal series) that spans multiple variations. It can be said that it is a different kind of continuous production.

Further, the effect of increasing (appearing) the display number of the mini character (princess) can be referred to as an effect display similar to the meter display in that the player's expectation level increases as the display number increases. Therefore, instead of the effect of increasing (appearing) the display number of the mini character (princess), an effect of meter display (display in which the meter increases (or decreases)) may be used.
Further, the display number of the mini character (princess) may correspond to the number of continuous effects.

  In this example, the display of the second decorative symbol is not performed on the image display device 208 ′ (no prior blurring occurs).

Further, in this example, the case where the special symbol of the character (princess) rotates in the second animation display has been described.
<Example E>

FIG. 174 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of effects centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Example E-1)

  Since the timings shown in FIGS. 7A to 7C are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 173A to 173C, description thereof will be omitted.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 174 (d), in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X, the special symbol of the character (princess) is stopped and displayed, and then, for example, the vertical position is left as it is. Running, rotating animation.

  At this timing, the second decorative symbol is displayed (stopped) in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082. The second decorative symbol in this case is the state shown in the right figure of FIG. Specifically, in the left symbol display area 208j of the second symbol display area 208Y, a numerical decorative pattern (for example, “decoration 6”) is displayed with fluctuation (temporarily stopped), and in the middle symbol display area 208k, a numerical decoration is displayed. A symbol (for example, “decoration 7”) is stopped and displayed, and in the right symbol display area 208l, a numerical ornament symbol (for example, “decoration 7”) is displayed with fluctuation (temporary stop).

  The timings shown in FIGS. 11E to 11H are the same as the timings shown in FIGS. 173E to 173H except that the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. It is.

  That is, in the same figure (e), the second animation (an animation including an image in which an image of the character (princess) is displayed and a character “chance !!”) is executed is executed, and (f) in FIG. Is executed in the first symbol display area 208X by the stop display of the first decorative symbol (here, stop display of the symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7” (fluctuation fluctuation, temporary stop)). At the same time, a mini character (princess) is displayed above the explanation display area TT1. The second decorative design maintains the state shown in the right diagram of FIG.

  In addition, the timing shown in FIG. 6G is a state in which the special symbol 1 (square) and the special diagram 2 (round) are both displayed in gray in the fourth symbol display device 284, and the deviation is stopped. It is shown that. In the first symbol display area 208 </ b> X of the first image display device 2081, the decorative symbols are stopped and displayed (stopped with the symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7”, which is a combination of the symbols that are out of place). The second decorative design maintains the state shown in the right diagram of FIG.

  Thus, in the same figure (d) and the same figure (e), the 2nd decoration symbol of the combination of the same decoration design as the 1st decoration design displayed in the figure (f) and the same figure (g) is stopped and displayed. There is a tip-up.

  In this way, in this embodiment, even if the symbol is a special symbol other than the pseudo-continuous symbol, the second decorative symbol causes a tip-up, but the symbol displayed in the second decorative symbol does not include a special symbol ( There is no special symbol), and there is a tip-barre due to the combination of all decorative symbols that do not include special symbols.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 11H, one hold (hold corresponding to the hold icon h11 in FIG. 11G) is consumed, and the symbol display areas 208a to 208c of the first image display device 2081 have high-speed fluctuation. The first decorative symbol variation display (first variation display) is performed, and also in the symbol display areas 208j to 208l of the second image display device 2082, the high-speed variation second ornament symbol variation display (second variation). Display). Since other configurations are the same as those in FIG. 173, description thereof is omitted.

  In this example, the display timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol that starts display in FIG. 4D may be the same as the stop timing (second timing) of the special symbol. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.

  In addition, the display timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol for starting display in FIG. 9 (d) and the rotation start timing (second timing) of the special symbol may be the same, The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.

In addition, the start timing (first timing) of the variable display of the second decorative symbol starting in FIG. 11 (h) is the same as the start timing (second timing) of the variable display of the first decorative symbol. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the first timing may be after the second timing.
(Example E-2)

  FIGS. 174 (m) to (o) are diagrams showing other examples of effects, and examples of effects when other special symbols are displayed.

  The timings shown in (m) and (n) are the same as the timings shown in (a) and (b). The timing shown in FIG. 10 (o) is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 10 (c), but is different from the special symbol of the character (princess) in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X. (A) An animation in which a special symbol is scroll-displayed (first animation) is being executed. The special symbol in this example is, for example, a special symbol related to the high-speed pseudo-ream (for example, a special symbol displayed as “continue”), and when the special symbol related to the high-speed pseudo-ream is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b. A high-speed pseudo-ream effect is executed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (p) shows a state in which the special symbol related to the high-speed pseudo-ream is stopped and displayed (swing fluctuation, temporary stop) in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area. In the timing shown in (q), when the special symbol related to the high-speed pseudo-ream is stopped and displayed, the first decorative display variation display (first variation display) starts in the first symbol display area 208X, and the high-speed pseudo-ream starts. This shows a state in which the production is executed. In this case, for example, the number of executions of the high-speed pseudo-ream (in this example, “second shot”) is displayed above the icon display area 800. In the production of the high-speed pseudo-ream, a special symbol (for example, a special symbol displayed as “continue”) is scrolled, stopped (temporarily stopped), and first changed (re-changed) is displayed at a high speed, for example 100. Repeated (until the display of the number of executions of the high-speed pseudo-ream is “100th”).

  In this effect example, the special symbol may include a special symbol related to the high-speed pseudo-ream, a pseudo-continuous symbol (character (dono) symbol) as shown in FIG. 170, and a symbol in another effect mode. .

  Further, in this effect example, the second decorative symbol is not displayed and no prior ball is generated, but the second decorative symbol may be displayed. In this case, the display start timing of the second decorative symbol may be any timing from (n) to (p) in FIG. In addition, the second decorative symbol may be displayed in the figure (q). In this case, for example, the same stop display as the first decorative symbol in FIG. Display similar to the display in the first symbol display area 208X in FIG.

170 may be developed after the normal pseudo-continuous production shown in FIG. 170, or only one of them may be executed.
<Example F>

  FIG. 175 is a diagram showing step by step another example of an effect (for example, an effect of a high-speed pseudo-ream) centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B to FIG. 6C is the second decorative symbol variation display (second variation display, FIG. 8F) in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082. ) Is the same as the timing shown in FIGS. 174 (n) to (o) except that the display is performed, and the description thereof will be omitted.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 4D, a special symbol (for example, a special symbol displayed as “continue”) related to the high-speed pseudo-ream is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display region 208b of the first symbol display region 208X. , Temporarily stopped). Even at this timing, the second decorative symbol variation display (second variation display) continues to be displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082 (not stopped).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6E, when the special symbol related to the high-speed pseudo-ream is stopped and displayed, the first decorative symbol variation display (first variation display) starts in the first symbol display area 208X, and the high-speed pseudo-ream starts. A state in which a pseudo-ream effect is being executed is shown. Also at this timing, the second decorative symbol variation display (second variation display) continues to be displayed (not stopped) in the second symbol display area 208Y. Other configurations are the same as those in FIGS. 174 (n) to 174 (q).

  In this example, the variation display (second variation display) of the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082 during the period of FIGS. 175 (b) to (e). continuing. And in the period of Drawing 175 (b)-the figure (d), the 1st decoration design and the 2nd decoration design are in a different state. As described above, when the effect of the high-speed quasi-continuation is executed (even if a break (such as a temporary stop of a special symbol) may be provided during the performance of the high-speed quasi-continuation, the second variation display is continued. It may be.

In this example, since there is no stop display (temporary stop display) of the second decorative symbol, there is no prior blurring. However, if the way of viewing is changed, there is no stop display (temporary stop display) of the second decorative symbol (the display of variation of the second decorative symbol (second variation display) continues to be displayed), so that the normal pseudo-continuation is displayed. It can also be said that the player may be able to recognize whether it is an effect or a high-speed pseudo-ream effect (for example, it can be recognized by an advanced player).
<Example G>

FIG. 176 is a diagram showing another example of the effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and is an example of the effect when the button effect is executed.
(Example G-1)

  The timing shown in FIG. 10B is the same as that in FIG. 170J except that the second decorative symbol is displayed in the state shown in FIG. That is, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) is displayed in the left symbol display region 208j of the second symbol display region 208Y, and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 7”) is displayed in a stopped manner (swaying fluctuation) in the right symbol display region 208l. , Temporarily stopped), and the middle symbol variation display (high-speed variation) is executed in the middle symbol display area 208k.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5C, the pseudo continuous symbol that has been enlarged and displayed in the first symbol display area 208X stops its enlarged display. The display size of the pseudo-continuous symbols at this timing is, for example, the same display size as in FIG. 10B, and more specifically, the display of the pseudo-continuous symbols (FIG. 170 (g), etc.) that are scroll-displayed. The size is larger than the size and does not exceed the display area of the first image display device 2081 (a level where pseudo-continuous symbols are not displayed on the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083).

  At this timing, an effect related to the operation means (button effect) is executed. That is, an animation related to the button effect is displayed in front of the enlarged pseudo-continuous pattern (overlapping a part of the pseudo-continuous pattern). The animation related to the button effect includes, for example, a display that prompts the operation of the operation means (for example, the chance button 136) and a display that indicates a valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. The display for prompting the operation of the operation means is, for example, an image imitating the chance button 136 (button image BG), a character “arrow!” And an arrow, and a display indicating a valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 ( The elapsed time notification image TG) displays, for example, the entire reception valid period as a colored (other than white) painted image, and the filled image becomes smaller as the reception valid period elapses (the meter subtracts (decreases)). This is the display that executes the animation. In accordance with this, the chance button 136 notifies that the built-in LED is lit red and that the operation is possible.

  In this example, the button image BG and the elapsed time notification image TG are overlapped on the front of the enlarged pseudo-simulated symbol. Although the example in which the image BG and the elapsed time notification image TG overlap each other is shown, at least the elapsed time notification image TG in which a meter is subtracted and displayed on at least a part of the front of the enlarged pseudo-simultaneous symbol is shown. You may be comprised so that a part may overlap.

  Further, at this timing, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the state of FIG. 171 (p) continues for the second decorative symbol, as in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D shows a state in which the chance button 136 is operated within the valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. In this embodiment, until the chance button 136 is operated in the button effect, the animation of the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous pattern is stopped, and the chance button 136 is operated within the valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. If this happens, the animation of the enlarged display of pseudo-continuous symbols is resumed.

  Further, at this timing, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the state of FIG. 171 (p) continues for the second decorative symbol, as in FIG.

  That is, in the figure (b)-the figure (d), the state of the 1st decoration design and the 2nd decoration design differs.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E shows a state in which the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous symbols of the first decorative symbol is resumed by the operation of the chance button 136 and the width is further enlarged. At this timing, the left and right ends of the pseudo-continuous pattern are displayed in part of the display area of the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083, respectively. That is, one pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed over (spanning) a plurality of image display devices 208 ′ (first image display device 2081, second image display device 2082, and third image display device 2093).

  Further, in the middle symbol display area 208k of the second symbol display area 208Y by the operation of the chance button 136, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. (Provisional stop display) with the symbol combination of “pseudo-symbol-decoration 7”, and thus, the start of the pseudo-continuous effect has been confirmed (not visible in the first symbol display area 208X (difficult to see) (Instead of the first decorative symbol), a stop display of pseudo-continuous symbols is informed). In the second image display device 2082, the enlarged left end portion of the pseudo-continuous symbol overlaps the second decorative symbol, the meter, and the stage name display area. For example, the left end portion of the pseudo-continuous symbol is at least the second decorative symbol. (In this example, the left end of the pseudo-continuous symbol is overlapped with the second decorative symbol, the meter, and the stage name display area).

  In the third image display device 2083, the enlarged right end portion of the pseudo-continuous pattern is overlapped with a part of the display in the third image display device 2083 (in this example, a character on the stage, And overlapped with the second hold number display in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2).

  At this timing, the family crest member 244A starts to rise and overlaps a part of the first image display device 2081.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 6 (f), the enlarged display of the first decorative symbol pseudo-continuous pattern is finished (enlargement is stopped at the same size as the pseudo continuous symbol shown in FIG. 5 (e)), and the family crest character that has risen 244A rotates at the raised position, and a sound effect “don” is output from the speaker 120. In the state where the button image is not displayed ((e) and (f) in the figure), the first image display device 2081 and the second image display device 2082 (and the third image display device 2083) are spread over. A pseudo-continuous pattern of the first decorative design is displayed. In the second decorative design, the state shown in FIG.

  The other configuration is the same as the configuration described with reference to FIGS. 170 (k) to 170 (n), and a description thereof will be omitted.

  In this example, the button effect is executed during the execution of the first animation (stopping animation of special symbols, animation of middle symbols). That is, the first animation includes an animation related to the button effect (button effect animation). In this case, the button effect animation is displayed only on the first image display device 2081. The button effect animation may be displayed only on the second image display device 2082 (or the third image display device 2083), or may be displayed on each of the plurality of image display devices 208 ′. One button effect animation may be displayed over the image display device 208 ′.

  When the button effect is executed, until the button effect starts (for example, until the button effect animation shown in FIG. 10C starts displaying), the first symbol display device 2081 displays an enlarged display of pseudo-continuous symbols. When (enlarged animation) is executed and the button effect starts, the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous pattern is temporarily stopped. Then, when the chance button 136 is operated within the acceptance valid period of the operation of the chance button 136, the enlarged display of the pseudo continuous symbols is resumed.

  Also, from the start of the button effect until the chance button 136 is operated, the decorative symbol is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k of the second image display device 2082 (the second decorative symbol is shown in FIG. 171 (p)). ), The decorative symbol (in this case, the pseudo-continuous symbol) is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k of the second image display device 2082 by the operation of the chance button 136 (the second decorative symbol is shown in FIG. 176 (e)). In the first image display device 2081, the enlarged display of pseudo-continuous symbols is resumed.

  That is, when the chance button 136 is operated at the time t1 from the start of the button effect, the second time is earlier than when the chance button 136 is operated after the time t2 (t2> t1) from the start of the button effect. The decorative symbol can be stopped and displayed, and the presence or absence of execution of a continuous effect (here, a pseudo-continuous effect) can be recognized at an early stage (a leading ball is generated by the second decorative symbol).

  In this example, after the operation of the chance button 136, the second image display device 2082 performs the stop display of the second decorative symbol (first timing), and the first image display device 2081 displays the pseudo-continuous symbol. The timing at which the enlarged display resumes (second timing) may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing is earlier than the first timing. It may be early.

Note that even when the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 10D, the second decorative symbol (medium symbol) is not stopped and the variable display may be continued in FIG.
(Example G-2)

  FIGS. 11 (h) to 11 (l) show a case where the button effect is executed during the execution of the first animation, and the operation is not performed within the valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. The timings shown in FIGS. 1H to 1L correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 1B to 1F, respectively, and therefore redundant description is omitted. To do.

  Even in the case where the button effect is started in (i) in the same figure, as shown in (j) and (k) in the same figure, the operation is not performed within the valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. In this case, the stop display of the second decorative symbol (middle symbol) is not performed, and the variable display is continued (state shown in FIG. 171 (p)).

  The timing shown in FIG. 11L indicates a state in which the acceptance period for the operation of the chance button 136 has ended. In this case, when the time expires, the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed, and in this example, the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k (the state shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 176 (e)).

Further, since the operation of the chance button 136 is not performed, and the enlarged display animation of the pseudo-continuous pattern in the first image display device 2081 cannot be resumed, at the timing shown in FIG. The maximum size pseudo-continuous pattern is displayed.
(Example G-3)

  FIGS. (N) to (r) are cases where the button effect is executed during the execution of the first animation, and the operation is performed within the valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136. This is an example of the case where the pseudo-continuous symbol of the first decorative symbol is not stopped and displayed, and the timings shown in (n) to (r) of the same figure are shown in (b) to (f) of FIG. Since it corresponds to the timing shown, overlapping description is omitted.

  The timing shown in FIG. 7 (p) shows a state where the chance button 136 is operated. Then, at the timing shown in (q) in the figure, the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous design of the first decorative design is completed, and the display size before enlargement (in the initial state) in the middle design display area 208b of the first image display device 2081 is displayed. The display size) pseudo-continuous pattern shows a state where scroll display is started. Further, in the second image display device 2082, stop display (swing fluctuation, temporary stop) of the second decorative symbol is executed. The second decorative symbol in this case is the state shown in the lower diagram of (q) in the figure, and is a (temporary) stop display of a symbol combination of a numerical decorative symbol (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 7”). . Thereby, the fact that the pseudo-continuous symbols of the first decorative symbols are not stopped and displayed (the execution of the pseudo-continuous effects does not start) is prejudice.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 7 (r), the first decorative symbol (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 8-decoration 7”) having the same symbol combination as the second decorative symbol is stopped and displayed in the first symbol display area 208X. Fluctuating, temporarily stopping), and notifying that the execution of the pseudo-continuous effect does not start.

  In the present embodiment, the pseudo-continuous pattern in the first symbol display area 208X is shown in the figure (q) from the display size shown in the figure (p) between the figure (p) and the figure (q). An animation that is reduced to the display size may be executed, or after the chance button 136 is operated in FIG. 10 (p), the enlarged display is temporarily resumed and enlarged to a predetermined size (for example, the maximum size). An animation that is later reduced to the display size shown in FIG.

  When the pseudo-continuous effect is not executed, when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 8 (p), the second image display device 2082 displays a second decorative pattern of numbers (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 8- That the decorative combination of the symbol combination “decoration 7” is stopped (temporarily stopped) and the first image display device 2081 executes the animation of the reduced display of the pseudo-continuous symbols, and then the pseudo-continuous effect does not start to be executed. The suggested pseudo-continuous symbols are scrolled ((p) in the figure).

Note that the scroll display of the middle symbol (special symbol) of the first decorative symbol does not start execution of the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) because the special symbol does not stop at a predetermined position and the scroll display starts. There is also a configuration in which a special symbol is stopped and displayed in a false manner (a continuous effect (a pseudo-continuous effect) is executed), and the present embodiment can be applied even with this configuration. In that case, for example, at the timing shown in FIG. 14 (q), in the second symbol display area 208Y, the second decorative symbol including the pseudo-continuous symbol stop display is stopped and displayed in the middle symbol so that the first barre occurs. Alternatively, at the timing shown in FIG. 7 (r), the first decorative design and the second decorative design (decoration of the same design combination) including the stop display of the pseudo-continuous design in the middle design as shown in FIG. (Design) may be stopped and displayed.
<Example H>

  FIG. 177 is a diagram showing another example of the effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, and is an example of the effect performed after the big hit temporary stop display.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B is a state where reach is formed, and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) fluctuates (temporarily stops) in the left symbol display region 208c of the first symbol display region 208X. In the right symbol display area 208c, the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) fluctuates (temporarily stops), and in the middle symbol display region 208b, the middle symbol fluctuates at high speed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5C, the middle symbol changes to low speed fluctuation in the middle symbol display area 208b. In this low-speed fluctuation, for example, when the middle symbol passes “decoration 7”, other than the deviation is determined. Further, when the middle symbol stops before “decoration 5”, or when the middle symbol stops at “decoration 7”, the deviation is determined.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D is a state in which an effect (notice effect) indicating that there is a possibility of developing into a super reach (for example, a swordsman reach) has been started. That is, in the first image display device 2081, a reduced display animation is executed in which the left symbol and the right symbol are gradually reduced while temporarily stopped. In addition, at a certain timing during the execution of the animation of the reduced display, the second image display device 2082 starts displaying the variation display of the second decorative symbol. In the icon display area 800, a pedestal appears below the change icon h01.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which the animation of the reduced display of the left symbol and the right symbol is further advanced in the first image display device 2081, and the first image is displayed while the left symbol and the right symbol are reduced. An animation that moves so as to be spaced apart from each other in the upper left and upper right of the display area of the device 2081 is executed. The variation display of the second decorative symbol is continued.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6F is a state in which a display (notice effect) for notifying that the super reach (for example, swordsman reach) effect is started is executed, and the first image display device 2081 cuts the swordsman. An in-image (here, a character (swordsman) and an image on which characters “swordsman see !!”) are displayed.

  In the icon display area 800, the pedestal of the change icon h0, the other hold icons h11 and h12, and the pedestal of the hold icon are deleted, and only the change icon h0 is displayed. The variation display of the second decorative symbol is continued.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6G shows a state in which the scene changes in the first image display device 2081, the confrontation scene between the character (dono) and the character (swordsman) is displayed, and the super reach production has started. Yes.

  Further, in the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device 2082, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 5G, the left symbol display area 208j and the right symbol display area 208l each have a decorative symbol (both in this example). “Decoration 6”) is temporarily displayed. As described above, in the present embodiment, the display starts with the second decorative symbol in the variable display state in the reach effect ((d) in the figure), and after the notice effect (super (f) in the figure) of the super reach effect is executed. When the super reach production is started, a temporary stop of the left symbol and the right symbol of the second decorative symbol is displayed ((g) in the figure).

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H shows a state where a special effect (special display EX) is being executed in the second symbol display area 208Y. The special effect is, for example, one of the notice effects informing that the promotion effect is executed. The special effect is an effect that is not executed in the first symbol area 208X, and is, for example, a display that reduces the visibility of the second symbol display area 208Y. In this example, the character display “CHANCE” is displayed (special display EX) on the front side of the second decorative symbol shown in the right diagram of FIG. 5G, that is, over the symbol display areas 208j to 208l. )It is carried out. The special effects may or may not be executed, and the ratio of execution (appearance) varies. In other words, the probability that the special effect is executed differs depending on the super reach effect being executed. Another production having a higher jackpot expectation than a certain production is configured such that the execution probability of the special production is higher when other conditions are the same. The probability that this special effect is executed (appearance) is 0%, 5%, 10%, 30%, 50%, 70%, 100%, and the like.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6I is a state in which the scene immediately after the confrontation is displayed on the first image display device 2081. At this timing, the special display EX in the second symbol display area 208Y is erased, and the second decorative symbol in the state shown in the right diagram of FIG.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6J, the scene where the character (dono) wins is displayed on the first image display device 2081 and the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) fluctuates in the middle symbol display area 208b. It shows the state of being (temporarily stopped). Also, in the second symbol display area 208Y, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 8 (j), the decorative symbol (here “decoration 6”) fluctuates (temporarily stops) in the middle symbol display area 208k, and the big hit The second decorative design fluctuates (temporarily stops) in the symbol combination (in this example, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”).

  The timing shown in FIG. 10 (k) shows a state where the button effect has started to be executed. This button effect is, for example, a jackpot symbol promotion effect, and a large button image BG that makes the first decorative symbol invisible or difficult to be viewed by the player is displayed overlapping the first decorative symbol. A display prompting an operation of 136 (in this example, a character “press!” And an image of an arrow) and an elapsed time notification image TG indicating a valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  The display of the button image BG makes it difficult to visually recognize the first decorative symbol in the first symbol display area 208X, but the second decorative symbol is the same jackpot symbol combination as the first decorative symbol (in this example, the same symbol (J) Fluctuation fluctuation (temporary stop) by the symbol combination “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6” shown in the right figure is visible to the player.

  When the chance button 136 is operated at this timing (within the operation acceptance period indicated by the elapsed time notification image TG), the first symbol display area 208X and the second symbol display are displayed as shown in FIG. In any of the areas 208Y, the jackpot symbol combination after the promotion (here, the decoration symbol of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” sways and fluctuates (temporarily stops) and becomes visible to the player. If the opportunity button 136 is not operated during the acceptance valid period and time is up, the promotion may be promoted and the display shown in FIG.

  In this effect example, when the button effect shown in FIG. 5K is executed, it is difficult to visually recognize the first decorative symbol in the first symbol display area 208X, and the second decorative symbol is visually recognized by the player in the second symbol display area 208Y. Although it is possible, the first ballet in the second decorative symbol (the first ballet of the combination of the decorative symbols after promotion shown in FIG. 1 (l)) does not occur.

  Thus, even in the case of developing into a super reach effect, the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y at least at any timing before the development.

  For the player, the most interesting point is the result of the success or failure of the super reach production. Therefore, even if it is difficult for the player to visually recognize the first symbol display area 208X in the super reach effect, it is necessary to convey the state of the decorative symbol to the player by the second decorative symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y. The nature is low. Therefore, when the second decorative symbol is displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y during execution of the super reach effect, the special effect related to the second decorative symbol (for example, the visibility of the second decorative symbol is reduced). Such as production). This special effect is executed with a certain probability (0%, 5%, 10%, 30%, 50%, 70%, 100%, etc.) depending on the situation.

  In FIG. 4D, the timing at which the display of the second decorative symbol starts (first timing) and the timing at which the reduced display of the first decorative symbol starts (second timing) are the same timing. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  Also, in the same figure (g), the timing when the left symbol and the right symbol of the second decorative symbol temporarily stop (first timing) and the timing when the super reach production starts (second timing) are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  Moreover, the timing at which the special effect (special display EX) of the second decorative symbol starts is not limited to the timing in FIG.

  Also, in FIG. 6 (j), notification is made of the timing at which the middle symbol of the second decorative symbol temporarily stops (first timing) and the result of whether or not the super reach effect is achieved (in this example, the character (donor) has won). The display timing (second timing) to be displayed may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing. Good.

In FIG. 1L, the timing at which the first decorative symbol after promotion is displayed (first timing) and the timing at which the second decorative symbol after promotion is displayed (second timing) are the same. It may be timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
<Example I>

  FIG. 178 is a diagram showing another example of effects centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in stages, and is another effect example performed after the big hit temporary stop display.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B is the same as the timing shown in FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C shows a state in which the button effect has started to be executed. This button effect is, for example, an extra ball effect, and a button image BG on the first image display device 281 and a display urging the user to operate the chance button 136 (in this example, the text “Add extra ball!”) An arrow image) and an elapsed time notification image TG representing a valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136 are displayed.

  At this timing, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the jackpot symbol combination after promotion (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7” shown in the right figure of FIG. 10C) is temporarily stopped and displayed. Barre is occurring.

  That is, as a result of the determination of success / failure, it is assumed that 16R jackpot is actually won, but in FIG. 4B, for example, a 4R jackpot symbol combination (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”) is temporarily stopped and displayed. In this case, as shown in FIG. 5C, the ball-out effect is executed, and in the second symbol display area 208Y, the 16R jackpot symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped. As a result, the player may be able to recognize that the 16R jackpot has been won (first ballet by the second decorative symbol).

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6D, when the chance button 136 is operated at the timing shown in FIG. 5C, the number of extra balls is displayed (out of ball display TT2). This is a state in which an effect of notifying that the player has been added is being executed. Here, the extra ball display TT2 is a display of an image of “+600”, thereby notifying that 600 balls have been added. The state of the second decorative design is the same as the right diagram of FIG.

  In addition, the player who has visually recognized the number of extra balls displayed TT2 may be able to predict the number of rounds actually won from the number of extra balls displayed. That is, if the maximum number of balls (prize balls) in the case of 16R big hit is 2400 balls (= 15 balls × 10 counts × 16R) as an example, for example, as shown in FIG. The number of balls obtained by a combination (for example, “decoration 6-decoration 6-decoration 6”) is 600 balls (= 15 balls × 10 counts × 4R).

  In other words, the player who has visually recognized the display of the number of extra balls shown in (d) of the figure can actually use this number (or its addition) (even if the actual number of winning rounds by the second decorative symbol is unknown). Can predict how many R jackpots are. In other words, the display of the number of extra balls in this case is a notification relating to the jackpot (notification regarding how many R jackpots the actual jackpot is (the number of rounds actually won)).

  In (e) to (i) in the figure, the button effect (progress on the ball appearance) (chance button 136 operation by the player) and the display number TT2 on the ball appearance on the ball are repeated several times. At the timing shown, an extra ball number display TT2 (in this example, “MAX”) indicating that the extra ball number has reached the maximum number is executed.

  Then, at the timing shown in FIG. 10 (k), the 16R big hit symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped and displayed in the first symbol display area 208X. It is notified that the number of balls (the number of prize balls) is a big hit of 2400 balls). During the period from FIG. 10C to FIG. 10K, the temporary stop display of the 16R jackpot symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) continues in the second symbol display area 208Y. (The first ballet with the second decorative pattern is continuing).

  In this example, the maximum number of balls (prize balls) in the case of 16R big hit (for example, 2400 balls) and the number of balls that are added in the same figure (d), figure (f) and figure (h) Depending on the display TT2 (total), the player may be able to recognize that the player has won the 16R jackpot at the timing shown in FIG. In other words, it can be said that the tip ball is generated by the extra ball number display TT2 shown in FIG.

  In FIG. 8C, the timing at which the display of the second decorative symbol on the second image display device 2082 starts (first timing), and the timing at which the button effect on the first image display device 2081 starts (second). May be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

In this way, in one effect (for example, the jackpot symbol promotion effect shown in FIGS. 177 (k) to 177 (l)) performed after the jackpot temporary stop display, the second decorative symbol is displayed before the chance button 136 is operated. In the other effects (for example, effects such as the appearance of adding a ball as shown in FIG. 178 or the effect of adding a bonus R number shown in FIG. 178), the second decorative design is not generated. The first ballet (FIG. 178 (c)) may occur.
<Example J>

FIGS. 179 (a) to 179 (g) are diagrams showing another example of the effects centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in stages, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. In addition to the above, it is an effect example in which the third decorative symbol is displayed.
(Example J-1)

  FIGS. 179 (a) to 179 (f) are the same as the example effects of FIGS. 172 (a) to 172 (f) except that the third decorative symbol is displayed in the third symbol display area 208Z. Therefore, it demonstrates centering around a different point mainly and abbreviate | omits description other than that.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, the third decorative symbol is a decorative symbol displayed in the third symbol display area 208Z separately from the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol. As an example, the image display device One of 208 ′ (in this example, the first image display device 2081) is always displayed at least during the decorative symbol variation game (timing during execution of the decorative symbol variation display or stop display) (first display). 2 is a decorative symbol (displayed even if no decorative symbol is displayed). In addition, the display size of each of the third decorative symbols is at least smaller than the display size of each of the first decorative symbols, and the overall display size of the third decorative symbol is at least larger than the entire display size of the first decorative symbol. It is a small decorative design (mini decorative design). In the following description, when “the third decorative symbol is always displayed” is described, it means “the third decorative symbol is always displayed during the period in which the decorative symbol is displayed”. .

  The display of the third decorative symbol is continued during the period of FIG. 10 (a) to FIG. 10 (g). During the display, for example, as shown in FIG. You may comprise so that the position of 208Z may move.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5G, for example, after the timing shown in FIG. 5F, the other movable bodies (the eight generations 224B and the generals 224C) descend from the initial position, and the first image display device 2081 is displayed. It is in the state which overlaps with the upper front. At this timing, a part of the pseudo-continuous symbol and a part of the second decorative symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y are covered by the Yatsushiro character 224B and the general character 224C so that it can be visually recognized by the player. It is difficult (not visible).

  In the example shown in FIGS. 179 (a) to 179 (g), the first image display device 2081 is provided with the third symbol display area 208Z and is always displayed during the variable game of FIG. Yes. In this example, since the period shown in FIGS. 179 (b) to 179 (g) is during the variable game shown in FIG. 1 (timing during decorative display of the decorative symbol), the first decorative symbol is not visible to the player. Even at the timing ((d) to (g) in the figure), the second decorative symbol is not displayed (difficult to see) (the timing (b), (c), (g) in the figure) The third decorative symbol is always displayed. Note that even if a special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is stopped and displayed on the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol, the third decorative symbol does not have a special symbol and is displayed in a stopped state. There is no.

Further, the third symbol display area 208Z is configured to be movable. As shown in FIGS. 9E to 9F, for example, a movable body or the like moves to the front of the image display device 208 ′, and Even when at least part of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is difficult to visually recognize by the movable body, the third decorative symbol is always visible to the player by the movement of the third symbol display area 208Z. .
(Example J-2)

  FIGS. (N) to (r) are diagrams showing another example of effects centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in stages. This is another example of the effect in which the third decorative symbol is displayed in addition to the decorative symbol.

  FIGS. (N) to (o) are the same timings as the production examples in FIGS. 177 (c) to 177 (d), but the second graphic display is displayed on the upper left of the first image display device 2081, for example. An area 208Y is provided to display a second decorative symbol, and a third symbol display area 208Z is provided above the explanation display area TT1 to constantly display the third decorative symbol. That is, there is a case in which a plurality of mini decorative symbols may be displayed (simultaneously) on one image display device (first image display device 2081). However, the states of the second decorative symbol and the third decorative symbol are different.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 11 (n), the right symbol and the left symbol (for example, “decoration 6”, respectively) of the second decorative symbol are stopped and displayed, and the middle symbol is changing at high speed (FIG. 177 (g) right). Figure state). In addition, the third decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 10 (o), a reach effect is started and a reduced movement animation of a first decorative symbol (for example, a right symbol and a left symbol in which “decoration 6” is temporarily stopped, respectively) is being executed. It is. The second decorative symbol continues the state shown in the right diagram of FIG. 177 (g), and the third decorative symbol performs variable display.

  In the figure (p) and the figure (q), the first decorative symbol approaches the second decorative symbol due to the reduced movement animation, and a part of the first decorative symbol overlaps the second decorative symbol. Is in a state where it is difficult for the player to visually recognize (not visible). The second decorative symbol continues the state shown in the right diagram of FIG. 177 (g), and the third decorative symbol performs variable display.

  FIG. 7 (r) shows a state where one (the first decorative symbol in this example) is not displayed after the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are substantially overlapped. The second decorative symbol continues the state shown in the right diagram of FIG. 177 (g), and the third decorative symbol performs variable display.

  In addition, in the example of production shown in (n) to (r) in the figure, the second decorative design is displayed on, for example, the second image display device 2082, and the first decoration is shown in (p) to (q) in the figure. The left symbol and the right symbol of the symbol move to the left and right respectively, the left symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the right symbol of the first decorative symbol is displayed on the third image display device 2083. You may comprise. In this case, it may be configured such that the left symbol of the first decorative symbol moves in the direction of the second decorative symbol in the second image display device 2082, and is erased (not displayed) when it overlaps.

  In this example, the second decorative symbol is a decorative symbol that is displayed only for a certain period when a certain condition is satisfied, whereas the third decorative symbol is a decorative symbol that is always displayed.

  In addition, although each Example (production example) described in this specification can be applied in appropriate combination, when applied in combination with the present Example, the second decorative design in each Example is always displayed. It will never be done.

  Further, the design of the third decorative design may be different from the design of the first decorative design and the second decorative design. Even in this case, the third decorative design is always displayed.

  Also, as shown in (g), (p), and (q) in the figure, the second decorative symbol is overlapped by the first decorative symbol, a movable body, etc., and it becomes difficult for the player to visually recognize (not visible). However, the third decorative symbol (which is configured to be able to move and display) is always displayed even if the first decorative symbol or the movable body moves.

On the other hand, the third decorative symbol is configured to be visible to a player whose decorative symbol is mainly displayed in a variable manner, and it is difficult to specify the symbol compared to the second decorative symbol. Further, since the third decorative symbol is not provided with a special symbol, the combination (state) of the decorative symbol is not notified to the player as an alternative to the first decorative symbol unlike the second decorative symbol.
<Example of production K>

FIG. 180 is a diagram showing another example of effects centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in stages, a second image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082, a third image display. It is an effect example related to the operation of the device (right sub liquid crystal) 2083.
(Example of production K-1)

  FIGS. 9A to 10B show an example of effects produced by the second image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082 and the third image display device (right sub liquid crystal) 2083. In this example, the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 2081 is provided with a second symbol display area 208Y for displaying a second decorative symbol.

  FIG. 18A shows timing corresponding to the timing shown in FIG. 173B, but the second image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082 and the third image display device (right sub liquid crystal) 2083 are background images. Only displayed. At this timing, the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 are in the initial positions and are farthest from each other, and the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 overlaps with the left end portion of the main liquid crystal 2081 and is arranged on the left of the main liquid crystal 2081. The right sub liquid crystal 2083 overlaps the right end portion of the main liquid crystal 2081 and is arranged on the right side of the main liquid crystal 2081.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B shows a state in which one special symbol (for example, a pseudo-continuous symbol) is divided and displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 at the initial position. At this timing, only the frame portion of the second symbol display area 208Y starts displaying on the main liquid crystal 2081. In this embodiment, when the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are moved to predetermined positions, the pseudo continuous symbols are stopped and the execution of the pseudo continuous effect is confirmed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6C is a state in which the second decorative symbol starts to be displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 and a part thereof is overlapped by the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and cannot be visually recognized by the player. In this example, the middle symbol display area 208k of the second decorative symbol is not overlapped with the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 at the timing shown in FIG. In the state shown in j), a special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is temporarily stopped and displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k. Therefore, the player who has visually recognized this may be able to recognize the temporary stop of the pseudo-continuous symbol (execution of the pseudo-continuous effect) (the first decorative symbol has occurred).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D is a state in which the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 start moving (sliding) in front of the main liquid crystal 2081 so as to be close to each other. Due to the movement of the left sub liquid crystal 2082, the second decorative pattern of the main liquid crystal 2081 is completely overlapped, and the whole is not visible to the player.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are in contact (adjacent) at the front center of the main liquid crystal 2081 and stopped. When the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 are in contact with each other, the pseudo continuous images that are divided and displayed on both the sub-liquid crystals 2082 and 2083 are integrated (strand) over both the sub-liquid crystals 2082 and 2083. Is displayed. Thereby, it becomes the state of the stop display of a pseudo | simulation continuous symbol, and execution of the pseudo | simulation continuous effect is started after this. The first decorative design of the main liquid crystal 2081 is overlapped with the two sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083, and most of them cannot be recognized by the player.

  On the other hand, the second decorative design once overlapped by the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 is exposed from the left side of the left sub-liquid crystal 2082, and is again visible to the player. The second decorative symbol is in the state shown in FIG. 6 (j). Similar to the display of the pseudo decorative symbol of the first decorative symbol by the two sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083, the pseudo decorative symbol is temporarily displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k. Stop is displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6F is a state in which the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 again start moving in directions away from each other toward the initial position. At this timing, the first decorative symbol of the main liquid crystal 2081 that has been overlapped by the two sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083 is again visible to the player. In this example, in the state where the special symbols are continuously displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083, another symbol (in this case, “decoration”) is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b of the main liquid crystal 2081. 7 ”is temporarily stopped and the combination of the first decorative symbols“ decoration 6-decoration 7-decoration 7 ”is stopped and displayed in the symbol display areas 208a to 208c (first symbol display area 208X). Has been. Further, a pseudo continuous number display (in this example, “× 2” indicating two times) is displayed.

  At this timing, the second decorative design of the main liquid crystal 2081 is again overlapped with the left sub-liquid crystal 2082.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G is a state in which the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 are moved to the initial positions, and the special symbols displayed on both the sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083 are not displayed. Further, at this timing, a part of the second decorative design (FIG. (J)) of the main liquid crystal 2081 is not visible to the player by overlapping with the left sub-liquid crystal 2082.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H shows a state in which the second symbol display area 208Y and the second decorative symbol of the main liquid crystal 2081 are not displayed. The timing shown in FIG. It shows a state in which the variation display (first variation display) of the first decorative symbol is resumed.

  Note that the display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol and the start timing of movement of the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 (second timing) in FIG. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  In addition, the second decorative symbol non-display timing (first timing) and the completion timing (end of movement) of the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 to the initial positions in FIG. 2) may be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  In this production example, at least one sub liquid crystal is displayed in at least one of the states in which a continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) is executed (a state corresponding to a stop display of a special symbol (pseudo-continuous design)). (At least one of the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083) is configured to move to a certain position.

The second decorative pattern is overlapped by the moving sub liquid crystal in at least a part of the period when the sub liquid crystal moves.
(Example of production K-2)

  FIG. 180 (m) to FIG. 180 (r) show other examples of effects by the moving left sub liquid crystal 2082 and right sub liquid crystal 2083. In this example, one of the movable sub liquid crystals (for example, the left sub liquid crystal 2082) is provided with a second symbol display area 208Y for displaying a second decorative symbol.

  (M) to (r) in the same figure, except that the second symbol display area 208Y and the second decorative symbol are displayed on the left sub-liquid crystal 2082, respectively (b) to (g). Since the configuration is the same as that shown, only different portions will be described and redundant description will be omitted.

  That is, as in the same figure (b) to (g), in this production example, in a state of notifying that a continuous production (pseudo-continuous production) is executed (a special symbol (pseudo-continuous design) is stopped) In at least one of the corresponding states, at least one of the sub liquid crystals (at least one of the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083) is configured to move to a position.

  At this time, since the second decorative symbol (FIG. (J)) is displayed on the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 after the timing of FIG. 9 (n), the second decorative symbol is displayed while the second decorative symbol is being displayed. (N) to (r)) are not overlapped by other configurations and are always visible to the player.

  The second decorative design slides in front of the main liquid crystal 2081 in the left-right direction as the left sub liquid crystal 2082 moves.

  In this way, the (auxiliary) second decorative symbol that is an alternative to the first decorative symbol is always visible to the player during the display, and is moved and displayed, so that the decorative symbol can be changed or displayed. The player can easily recognize the state such as a temporary stop display.

In the example of production shown in FIG. 180, an example in which one special symbol is displayed by two sub liquid crystals 2082 and 2083 has been described, but a plurality of liquid crystals including at least one sub liquid crystal (image display device 208 ′) Two special symbols may be displayed. For example, the main liquid crystal 2081 and the left sub liquid crystal 2082 may be configured to display one special symbol, the main liquid crystal 2081 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 may be configured to display one special symbol, or all the liquid crystal display devices 208 may be configured. A configuration may be used in which one special symbol is displayed by '
<Example of production L>

  FIG. 181 is a diagram showing another example of the effect centering on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine according to the present embodiment in a stepwise manner. The operation of the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 is shown in FIG. It is another related production example.

  The second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 may be arranged above and below the first image display device 208, respectively. As an example, the image display device arranged on the upper side of the first image display device 2081 is the second image display device 2082, and the image display device arranged on the lower side is the third image display device 2083.

  As an example, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 have a length in the vertical (height) direction that is shorter than a half of the length of the first image display device 2081, and also have a length in the width direction. Slightly short. Further, at the initial position, the second image display device 2082 has at least the lower end side portion thereof overlapping the front side of the upper end side portion of the first image display device 2081, and the third image display device 2083 has at least the upper end side thereof. The portion overlaps the front side of the lower end side portion of the first image display device 2081.

In this example, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 are arranged so that the front of the first image display device 2081 is close to or separated from each other along the display surface of the first image display device 2081. It is configured to be movable in the vertical direction (sliding movement).
(Example L-1)

  First, in the effect example shown in FIGS. 181 (a) to 181 (c), the second image display device 2082 and the second symbol display area 208Y for displaying the second decorative symbol are provided.

  The timing shown to (a) of the figure is the state which has started the variable display of the 1st decoration symbol. As described above, in this embodiment, the first symbol display area 208X is provided on a plurality of image display devices 208 ′ (in this example, the first image display device 2081, the second image display device 2082, and the third image display device 2083). The variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed across the three image display devices 208 ′.

  In addition, in the case of stop display (determined display), the first decorative symbol may be configured not to straddle the three image display devices 208 ′, or the first decorative design may be displayed on the first image display device 2081. A part of the decorative design may be configured to straddle the second image display device 2082 (or the third image display device 2083), and among the first decorative symbols displayed on the first image display device 2081 Only the middle symbol may be configured to straddle the second image display device 2082 (or the third image display device 2083).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6B is the first animation (special symbol) in the first image display device 2081 that is visible to the player from between the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083. Is a state in which a stop-swing animation and a medium-scheming animation) are being executed. Further, the first animation in this case is an animation including a button effect animation, and a button image BG on the front of the special symbol (so as to overlap), an image suggesting button operation (here, “Press!”) And an elapsed time notification image TG are displayed.

  At this timing, the first animation is executed on the first image display device 2081 so that the player cannot visually recognize the first decorative symbol. On the other hand, in the second image display device 2082, at this timing, the second decorative symbol in the state shown in FIG. 171 (o) starts to be displayed, and the decorative symbol (in this example, “decoration 6”) is displayed in the left symbol display area 208j. ), A special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) is displayed in the middle symbol display area 208k, and a decorative symbol (in this example, “decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped and displayed in the right symbol display region 208l, and the execution of the continuous effect (pseudo-continuous effect) is started. Is informed of the decision. In FIG. 181, all the second decorative symbols are in the state shown in FIG.

  In this example, the first animation is executed only on the first image display device 2081, but a part thereof may be executed on the second image display device 2082 and / or the third image display device 2083.

  At the timing shown in FIG. 5C, in response to the operation of the chance button 136, an effect of notifying that a continuous effect (here, a pseudo-continuous effect) is performed (in this example, a long scroll “ The notice effect in which the characters “continue” are displayed is executed. Behind the notice effect, a temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol is performed, and the left symbol (“decoration 6”) and the right symbol (“decoration 7”) are visible to the player. The symbol is overlapped with the notice effect and is not visible to the player.

  This notice effect is displayed across the three image display devices 208 ′. That is, a part of the notice effect (in this example, a part of the scroll) is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, but the second decorative design is displayed overlapping the notice effect. The decorative design is visible to the player. In other words, the first decorative symbol (particularly the middle symbol) of the first image display device 2081 is not visible to the player, but the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped by the second decorative symbol (the pseudo-continuous symbol is stopped and displayed). Is recognized by the player.

  In this embodiment, the variable display of the first decorative symbol is displayed across a plurality of image display devices 208 ′, but the special symbol or button image does not straddle the plurality of image display devices 208 ′. The image is displayed on the one-image display device 2081. Here, in this embodiment, “displayed over a plurality of image display devices 208 ′” includes “displayed over a plurality of all image display devices 208 ′”. In other words, as shown in FIG. 5A, the first image display device 2081, the second image display device 2082, and the third image display device with the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 separated from each other. This means that the first decorative symbol is displayed in a variable manner across 2083.

In addition, although illustration is abbreviate | omitted, the structure by which the scroll display of the symbol (for example, middle symbol) with a 1st decoration symbol is displayed ranging over several image display apparatus 208 'may be sufficient. The configuration for performing the button effect shown in FIG. 176 may be replaced with this embodiment.
(Example L-2)

  The effect examples shown in (d) to (e) of the figure are examples in which the notice effect is executed by the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6D, the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 slide and move toward each other, abut (adjacent up and down), and the first decorative design is visually recognized by the player. It is a disabled state. Even at this timing, it is possible for the player to recognize the temporary stop state of the decorative symbol (the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped and displayed) by the second decorative symbol.

The timing shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which the second image display device 2082 and the third image display device 2083 are separated and return to the initial position. At this timing, the same display as in FIG.
(Example L-3)
FIGS. 181 (g) to (h) show other examples of effects.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5G corresponds to the timing shown in FIG. 4C, and a continuous effect (here, a pseudo-continuous effect) is performed in response to the operation of the chance button 136. This is a state in which an effect of notifying that (in this example, a notice effect in which the characters “continue” are displayed on the scroll) is being executed. The notice effect is executed only by the first image display device 2081, and behind that, a temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol is performed, and the left symbol (“decoration 6”) and the right symbol (“decoration 7”) are displayed. Although it is visible to the player, the middle symbol is overlapped by the notice effect, and is not visible to the player.

  At this timing, the second decorative symbol is displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the player recognizes that the decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (the pseudo continuous symbol is stopped) by the second decorative symbol. It is possible.

  The timing shown in FIG. 11H is a state in which the second image display device 2082 slides downward and overlaps a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 (above the scroll). . In this case, a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the entirety of the notice effect is visible to the player.

The second decorative symbol also moves relatively downward as the second image display device 2082 moves, but does not overlap with the notice effect displayed on the two-image display device 2082, and is visually recognized by the player. It is possible.
(Example L-4)

  FIGS. 181 (i) to (j) show other examples of effects. In this example, the second decorative symbol is displayed above the first decorative symbol of the first image display device 2081.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5I is a state in which the first decorative design is displayed on the first image display device 2081 and a notice effect is executed overlapping with a part thereof. Behind the notice effect, a temporary stop display of the first decorative symbol is performed, and the left symbol (“decoration 6”) and the right symbol (“decoration 7”) are visible to the player. The symbol is overlapped with the notice effect and is not visible to the player.

  On the other hand, it moves to the 1st image display apparatus 2081, a 2nd decoration symbol is displayed above the 1st decoration symbol, and it can be visually recognized by a player.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6J is a state in which the second image display device 2082 slides downward and overlaps a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 (above the scroll). . In this case, a part of the announcement effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the entire announcement effect is visible to the player.

  On the other hand, the second decorative symbol displayed on the first image display device 2081 is overlapped by the movement of the second image display device 2082, and a part of the second decorative symbol is not visible to the player.

(Production example L-5)
FIGS. 181 (k) to (l) show other examples of effects. The timing shown in FIG. 10 (k) is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 10 (i), and the second decorative symbol moves to the first image display device 2081 and is displayed above the first decorative symbol. .

  The timing shown in FIG. 6L is a state in which the second image display device 2082 slides downward and overlaps a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 (above the scroll). . In this case, a part of the announcement effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the entire announcement effect is visible to the player.

  At this timing, the second decorative symbol displayed on the first image display device 2081 moves to the second image display device 2082 and is visible to the player.

  The timing at which the second decorative symbol moves may be before the second image display device 2082 is overlapped, may be at the same time as the overlap, or overlaps the second image display device 2082. It may be after.

  Thus, in the present embodiment (FIG. (A) to (c), FIG. (D) to (e), (g) to (h)), there are a plurality of special symbols. Displayed on each of the image display devices (here, the first image display device 2081 and the second image display device 2082), and the other image (here, the image of the notice effect) is displayed only on the front of one of the special symbols. The notice effect is displayed across a plurality of image display devices 208 ′ by the movement of the second image display device 2082 (or the third image display device 2083).

  In this embodiment (FIG. (K) to (l)), the image display device (here, the second image display device 2082) is moved and another image display device (here, the first image display device is here). In the case of overlapping the second decorative symbol displayed in 2081), the second decorative symbol moves to the second image display device 2082 and maintains a state that can be recognized by the player. In this case, the other display (for example, the first decorative design) does not move to the second image display device 2082, but the other display (for example, the image of the notice effect) that is overlapped by the movement of the second image display device 2082 (Part of the image) is displayed on the second image display device 2082 (moved to the second image display device 2082).

Further, as shown in FIGS. (I) to (j), the second decorative design may not move even if it is overlapped by the moving second image display device 2082.
<Example M>

FIG. 182 is a diagram showing in a stepwise manner another example of effects centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment.
(Example of production M-1)
The same figure (b)-the same figure (e) are the example of effects during a big hit.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5B is a state before the big hit game is started, and a jackpot symbol combination (for example, “1” is displayed as the first decorative symbol in the first symbol display area 208X of the first image display device (main liquid crystal) 2081. “Decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped and the built-in LED of the chance button 136 is rainbow-colored. In the second symbol display area 208Y of the second image display device (left sub liquid crystal) 2082, a second decorative symbol having the same contents as the first decorative symbol is displayed as shown in the lower diagram of FIG.

  The timing shown in FIG. 5C is a state of a big hit game (for example, during a round game), and an effect during a big hit is executed in the main liquid crystal 2081 (including the left sub liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub liquid crystal 2083). Yes. During the big hit game, in principle, the second decorative symbol is not displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 4D is a state in which the big hit game is continued, but is a state in which the error is notified by the occurrence of an error (for example, a lower pan full tank error). The error notification is, for example, an error display E1 on the main liquid crystal 2081 (in this example, display of characters “please remove the ball”). In this case, for example, the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 displays the second decorative symbol (decorative symbol in which the big hit symbol combination (for example, “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”) is temporarily stopped and displayed).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5E is a state in which the error display E1 in the main liquid crystal 2081 is not displayed due to the cancellation of the error. At this timing, the second decorative symbol is also not displayed again.

  In this case, in FIG. 4D, the timing at which the second decorative symbol is displayed (first timing) and the timing at which the error display E1 is displayed (second timing) may be the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

In FIG. 9E, the timing at which the second decorative symbol is not displayed (first timing) and the timing at which the error display E1 is not displayed (second timing) may be the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Example of production M-2)

  Next, (g) to (l) in the figure are examples of effects in the case of performing effects using the middle symbol of the first decorative symbol.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5G, in the first symbol display area 208X of the main liquid crystal 2081, the same symbol (for example, “decoration 1”) is temporarily stopped for the right symbol and the left symbol, and the middle symbol is changing. Thus, the reach production has been started. In this case, for example, in the second symbol display area 208Y of the left sub liquid crystal 2082, the second decorative symbol having the same symbol combination as the first decorative symbol (the state shown in FIG. 5F) is displayed.

The timing shown in FIGS. 11H to 11L is a state in which the middle symbol countdown display is executed in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X. On the other hand, in the second symbol display area 208Y, the second decorative symbol continues to be displayed in the state shown in FIG. 5F (the countdown display is not performed). Thus, in the case of performing an effect using the middle symbol in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X (not limited to the countdown display), the middle symbol fluctuates in the second symbol display area 208Y. The display may be continued.
(Example of production M-3)

  Next, (m) to (o) in the figure are examples of effects when a triple line reach effect is performed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (m) is a state in which a triple line reach effect by the first decorative symbol is being executed, and in this case, the second decorative symbol is not displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9 (n) is a state in which the turning effect of the line with the first decorative symbol (in this example, “decoration 7”) is being executed. In this case, as shown in the lower diagram of FIG. 9 (n), the second decorative symbol is displayed in the same symbol combination as the decorative symbol of the line (in this example, “decoration 7”).

  The timing shown in FIG. 5 (o) is a state in which the turning effect of another line of the first decorative design (in this example, “decoration 8”) is being executed. In this case, the second decorative symbol is not displayed. Is displayed.

  In this example, the second decorative design may be displayed when a certain line is produced in the ripple line reach, and the second decorative design may be hidden in the case of double line reach.

  In addition, in the same figure (n), the timing (1st timing) at which a 2nd decoration symbol is displayed, and the start timing (2nd timing) of the roaring effect of a 1st decoration symbol are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Also, in FIG. 5 (o), the timing at which the second decorative symbol is not displayed (first timing) and the start timing (second timing) of the turnover effect of the first decorative symbol are the same timing. Alternatively, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Example of production M-4)

  FIG. 183 (b) to FIG. 183 (e) are examples of effects when the second decorative symbol is displayed between FIG. 170 (g) and FIG. 170 (h), for example.

  The timing shown in FIG. 10B is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 170G, and the main liquid crystal 2081 is in a state where the scroll display of the middle symbol (special symbol) is being executed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 5C, in the main liquid crystal 2081, the first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped (the special symbol is stopped), and the second decorative symbol is also in the same state as the first decorative symbol (FIG. 171 (o) state). At this timing, the main liquid crystal 2081 performs an effect (hereinafter, referred to as “display group integrated effect”) in which the display mode is integrally changed for a plurality of displays (display group G) in the display area. As an example of the display group integrated production, the display group G can be integrally enlarged, reduced, tilted, and rotated (production of one or a combination of these), or the display group can be shaken integrally. An effect to be displayed (shake vision effect) or an animation effect including these scenes. In this example, as shown in FIG. 5C, a display group integrated effect is performed to incline the display group G integrally.

  Specifically, a plurality of displays in the display area of the main liquid crystal 2081 (a plurality of display groups G including a background display) are integrally tilted with respect to an outer frame (physical frame) of the main liquid crystal 2081 ( Scene). In such a display group integrated production, a plurality of display groups G including a background display are slightly reduced and tilted integrally, so that a space is generated in the actual display area, and the space is filled with, for example, black. Is displayed.

  In this example, the second decorative design is displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 even while the display group integrated effect is being executed. In this example, the second decorative design is not inclined and is displayed in a predetermined area. The display content (symbol combination) of the second decorative symbol is the same as the display content (symbol combination) of the first decorative symbol displayed in the display group integrated production. In this example, “decoration 6-special symbol ( It is a symbol combination of a decorative symbol of "Pseudo-continuous symbol)-Decoration 7".

  The second decorative design is displayed so as to overlap a space (black filled display) generated by the inclination of the display group G over at least a part of the inclined display group G. The second decorative symbol may be displayed so as to overlap only in the space (black fill display) generated by the inclination of the display group G, or overlap only in the inclined display group G. It may be displayed. Further, the second decorative design may be displayed with an inclination at the same angle as the display group G.

  Even if the display group integrated effect may make it difficult for the player to visually recognize the first decorative design, the combination of the decorative design (its state) may be recognized by the player using the second decorative design (second). It is possible to make a ballet with decorative designs).

  The timing shown in FIG. 6D is a state in which the display group integrated production is finished. At this timing, the display group G displayed in an inclined manner returns to the normal display state, and the second decorative symbol continues to be displayed at the same position. In this example, a part of the first decorative symbol (“decoration 6” on the left symbol) that has returned to the normal display is overlapped with the second decorative symbol. The state of the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol is the same.

  The timing shown in FIG. 9E is the same as the timing shown in FIG. 170H, and the second decorative symbol is not displayed.

In addition, in the same figure (c), the timing which the display start of the 2nd decoration symbol (1st timing) and the start timing (2nd timing) of a display group integrated production may be the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Example of production M-5)

  (G) to (i) in the figure are examples of effects when the design of the decorative symbols changes in, for example, the special figure 1 variable game and the special figure 2 variable game.

  For example, the maximum number of reserves is 8, and the specifications differ between the special figure 1 variable game and the special figure 2 variable game (for example, the special 1 variable game has a probability variation of 50% and the special 2 variable game has a probability variation of 100%, or 16R big hit In other cases, the design of at least a part of the decorative symbol may be different between the decorative symbol that performs the variable display of the special figure 1 and the decorative symbol that performs the variable display of the special symbol 2. The present embodiment is a display example of the second decorative symbol in such a case.

  Specifically, in this example, the floating game of the special figure 2 has a higher advantage than the floating game of the special figure 1, and for example, the special figure 2 has a symbol combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. 16R is a big hit in the case of the symbol combination of “decoration 3-decoration 3—decoration 3”, whereas FIG. 1 shows 16R only in the case of the symbol combination of “decoration 7-decoration 7-decoration 7”. It will be a big hit.

  Further, it is assumed that the design for the 16R jackpot is different in design from at least a part of other decorative designs. For example, the mark M indicating the 16R big hit symbol is given to the right symbol (“decoration 7”) in FIG. That is, in the variable game of the special figure 1, the mark M is given only to the decoration symbol “decoration 7”, and in the special game of the special figure 2, the mark M is given to the decoration symbols “decoration 3” and “decoration 7”. Is done.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (g) is a combination of symbols shifted to the first symbol display area 208X of the main liquid crystal 2081 as a result of the variable game shown in FIG. 1 (for example, the symbol combination “decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 7”). The first decorative symbol is temporarily stopped and displayed.

  Since it is the variable game of special figure 1, the mark M is given only to the right design ("decoration 7") of the first decorative design, and the mark M is not given to the left design ("decoration 3").

  At this timing, the special figure 1 hold is 2, the special figure 2 hold is 2 (the total of the hold is 4), and the icon display area 800 displays the change icon h0 at the right end thereof, and the change icon On the left of h0, hold icons h11 and h12 corresponding to the hold in FIG. 1 and hold icons h21 and h22 corresponding to the hold in FIG. 2 are alternately displayed.

  In the right sub-liquid crystal 2083, the second reserved number display ("2 2" in this example) shown in FIG. 1 and FIG. 2 is performed.

  In the left sub-liquid crystal 2082, as shown in the right diagram of FIG. 10G, the second decorative symbol in the same state as the first decorative symbol is (temporarily) stopped and displayed.

  In the timing shown in FIG. 6H, the variable game of the special figure 1 is stopped, and the first decorative symbol and the second decorative symbol are out of combination (for example, the symbol combination “decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 7”). Are stopped and displayed.

  The timing shown in FIG. 6 (i) is a state in which one hold in FIG. 2 has been consumed and the variable game in FIG. 2 has started. In the first symbol display area 208X of the main liquid crystal 2081, the decorative symbol fluctuation display (first fluctuation display) of the special figure 2 is started, and in the icon display area 800, the fluctuation icon h0 corresponding to the fluctuation is displayed at the left end. On the left, hold icons h11, h22, and h12 are displayed. In the right sub liquid crystal 2083, the second reserved number display (in this example, “2 1”) of the special drawings 1 and 2 is performed.

  Further, in the left sub-liquid crystal 2082, as shown in the right diagram of (i), the second decorative symbol of the symbol combination (for example, the symbol combination of “decoration 3-decoration 8-decoration 7”) is continuously stopped and displayed. However, since the variable display of the special symbol 2 is being executed, the mark M is given to the “decoration 3” of the left symbol and the “decoration 7” of the right symbol of the second decorative symbol. That is, the mark M is added to “decoration 3” of the left symbol of the second decorative symbol as compared with the state of FIG.

  When the floating game of the special figure 1 is changed to the floating game of the special figure 2, the mark M is also given to the “decoration 3” which is the 16R jackpot symbol and is notified to the player, but in the first symbol display area 208X, the high speed is displayed. It is very difficult to recognize the decorative design to which the mark M has been given since the fluctuation has started.

  Even in such a case, if the corresponding decorative design (in this example, “decoration 3”) is included in the second decorative design that is stopped and displayed, the mark M is added to the decorative design. Thus, it is possible to notify the player of the 16R jackpot symbol.

It should be noted that, in the first decorative design and the second decorative design, the manner in which the design is switched (the manner in which the mark M is applied and erased) and the timing in which the design is switched (the timing in which the mark M is applied and erased) are made different. It may be the same or the same.
(Example of production M-6)

  FIG. 5M is another example of the second decorative design, for example, a display during execution of the super reach effect.

  In general, for example, a player is often not interested in a combination of decorative symbols (which symbol is used as a template) during execution of a super reach effect. In such a case, since it is less necessary to report accurate information in the second decorative symbol, an effect using the second decorative symbol may be performed.

  In this example, for example, a special display EX (here) is used as a notice effect so that it overlaps with the second decorative symbol (the same state as the right diagram in FIG. 177 (g)) and the second decorative symbol is difficult for the player to visually recognize. Then, an effect of displaying “CHANCE” is displayed.

Further, in addition to the second decorative symbol, another decorative symbol (third decorative symbol whose display size is smaller than the first decorative symbol) may be displayed, which makes it difficult for the player to visually recognize (notice effect is provided). Instead of the second decorative symbol (executed), the state of the decorative symbol may be displayed in the third decorative symbol. In this example, in the third symbol display area 208Z provided in the first image display device 2081, the third decorative symbol shown in the left diagram of FIG. Status) is displayed.
<Example N>

  FIG. 184 is a diagram showing another example of the effect centered on the image display device 208 ′ of the pachinko machine of the present embodiment in a stepwise manner, in the case where the ball removal display E2 and the second decorative design are displayed. It is a production example.

  In addition, in FIG. 184, the example of production | presentation in the case of performing the ball removal display E2 in the structure demonstrated so far is demonstrated, The description is abbreviate | omitted about the structure mentioned above.

Here, the ball removal display E2 is a display that is displayed on the image display device 208 ′ when the lower pan full error has occurred, and notifies the player of the occurrence of the error, and is one of the error displays. The lower plate full tank error is an error that occurs when the lower plate 128 is full. When the lower plate full state is resolved by operating the ball discharge lever 132, the lower plate full tank error is cleared and the ball removal display E2 is displayed. Is also hidden.
(Example N-1)

  The timings shown in FIGS. 1B and 1C correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 170I and 170J, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 6B, at the timing when the width of the special symbol (pseudo-continuous symbol) gradually starts to be enlarged, for example, a part of the first decorative symbol of the main liquid crystal 2081 (in this example, the left symbol The ball removal display E2 is displayed so as to overlap with (part).

  On the other hand, at this timing, the pseudo continuous symbol does not overlap with the ball removal display E2. Further, neither the icon display area 800 nor the explanation display area TT1 overlaps the ball removal display E2.

  Although the second symbol display area 208Y is displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082, the display start timing (first timing) and the display start timing (second timing) of the ball removal display E2 are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  As shown in FIG. 6C, when the enlarged display of the pseudo-continuous symbols proceeds, a part of the pseudo-continuous symbols is overlapped by the ball removal display E2. At this timing, the second decorative design (the state shown in FIG. 171 (o)) is displayed on the left sub-liquid crystal 2082.

The display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol in the state shown in FIG. 171 (o) and the timing at which a part of the pseudo-continuous symbol is overlapped by the ball removal display E2 (second timing) The same timing may be used, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Example N-2)

  The timings shown in FIGS. 9E and 9F correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 173D and 173F, respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 4E, in the middle symbol display area 208b, the special symbol (character (princess)) is stopped and displayed (temporarily). A ball removal display E2 is displayed above the display area TT1. In this case, the ball removal display E2 does not overlap with any display.

At the timing shown in FIG. 5F, the mini character (princess), which is a display related to the continuous performance, starts displaying and overlaps the ball removal display E2.
(Example N-3)

  The timings shown in (h) and (i) in the figure correspond to the timings in FIGS. 176 (d) and 176 (e), respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 11H, at the timing when the chance button 136 is operated (or just before the operation) within the valid reception period of the operation of the chance button 136, the ball removal display E2 is displayed below the special symbol. At this timing, the ball removal display E2 does not overlap with any display.

  The display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol (here, the state shown in FIG. 171 (p)) and the display start timing (second timing) of the ball removal display E2 are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

Also, at the timing shown in FIG. 5I, the special symbol resumes the enlarged display by the operation of the chance button 136, and the ball removal display E2 overlaps the enlarged display. The second decorative symbol at this timing is the state shown in FIG. In this case, the display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative design (FIG. 171 (o)) and the timing at which a part of the pseudo-continuous design is overlapped by the ball removal display E2 (second timing). May be the same timing, the first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.
(Example N-4)

  The timings shown in (k) to (m) in the figure correspond to the timings in FIGS. 180 (c) to 180 (e), respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (k), at the timing when the second decorative pattern (the state shown in FIG. 171 (o)) starts displaying on the main liquid crystal 2081 and a part thereof is overlapped by the left sub-liquid crystal 2082. The ball removal display E2 is performed below the first decorative symbol (for example, the left symbol). At this timing, the ball removal display E2 does not overlap with any display.

  The display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol (the state shown in FIG. 171 (o)) and the display start timing (second timing) of the ball removal display E2 are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  Further, at the timing shown in FIG. 6L, the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 slide and move so that the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 overlaps the ball removal display E2. In this case, at least a part of the ball removal display E2 is difficult for the player to visually recognize.

  In addition, the timing shown in FIG. 6M is a state where the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and the right sub-liquid crystal 2083 are in contact (adjacent) and stopped. Are overlapped, and at least a part of it is difficult for the player to see. Note that at least the different parts of the ball removal display E2 are overlapped by the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 between the timing shown in FIG. That is, at the timing shown in FIG. 11L, at least the left end of the ball removal display E2 is overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082 (the right end is not overlapped), and at the timing shown in FIG. At least the right end portion of the blank display E2 is overlapped by the left sub liquid crystal 2082 (the left end portion is not overlapped). The second decorative design (FIG. 171 (o)) is exposed from the left sub-liquid crystal 2082, and is visible to the player.

Further, there may be a timing at which both ends of the ball removal display E2 are not overlapped by the left sub-liquid crystal 2082 and are visible to the player at the timing between FIG. .
(Example N-5)

  The timings shown in (o) and (p) correspond to the timings shown in FIGS. 181 (i) and 181 (j), respectively.

  As shown in FIG. 10 (o), the first image display device 2081 displays the first decorative design, and overlaps a part of the first design symbol at the timing when the notice effect is executed. The ball removal display E2 is performed below. At this timing, the second decorative symbol (the state shown in FIG. 171 (o)) is also displayed below the second image display device 2082 (the ball-free display E2 is substantially symmetrical with the notice effect (display) in between. .

  The display start timing (first timing) of the second decorative symbol (the state shown in FIG. 171 (o)) and the display start timing (second timing) of the ball removal display E2 are the same timing. The first timing may be earlier than the second timing, or the second timing may be earlier than the first timing.

  In addition, the timing shown in FIG. 6 (p) is a state in which the second image display device 2082 slides downward and overlaps with a part of the notice effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 (above the scroll). It is. In this case, a part of the announcement effect displayed on the first image display device 2081 is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the entire announcement effect is visible to the player. Further, the second image display device 2082 that has moved partially overlaps the ball removal display E2, but the overlapped portion is also displayed on the second image display device 2082, and the ball removal display E2 is It becomes visible to the player as a whole.

  On the other hand, the second decorative symbol (the state shown in FIG. 171 (o)) displayed on the first image display device 2081 is overlapped by the movement of the second image display device 2082, and a part thereof is a player. Is invisible.

  As described above, in this production example (production example N), the display example of the ball removal display E2 has been described. However, the ball removal display E2 is hidden when the ball removal operation is performed and the lower dish full tank error is resolved. (Erased).

  In addition, when the ball removal display E2 is performed, a notification sound may be output from the speaker 120 together.

  Further, instead of the ball removal display E2, another error display (for example, a door opening error) may be displayed.

  Moreover, in the production example N-1 to the production example N-5, the ball removal display E2 is displayed at a different position, but as an example of the ball removal display E2 being displayed, the production example N-1 to the production example N- The display positions of 5 are listed. Actually, the ball removal display E2 is displayed at one predetermined location. For example, in the pachinko machine 100 configured to display the ball removal display E2 at the positions shown in FIGS. 5E and 5F, when the effects shown in FIGS. The ball removal display E2 is displayed above the explanation display area TT1 in FIGS.

  Thus, by displaying the ball removal display E2 in accordance with the second decorative symbol, the special symbol, the continuous effect (display about the continuous effect, a part of the continuous effect), etc. of the present embodiment, the player However, by focusing on the ball removal display E2, it may be possible to easily recognize the second decorative symbol, the special symbol, the continuous effect, and the like of the present embodiment.

  Alternatively, the player can display the ball removal display E2 in accordance with the second decorative symbol, the special symbol, the continuous effect (display related to the continuous effect, a partial display of the continuous effect), and the like. 2 In some cases, it is possible to make it easier to recognize the ball removal display E2 by paying attention to decorative symbols, special symbols, continuous effects, and the like.

  Further, by displaying the ball removal display E2, the user is motivated to erase the ball removal display E2 at an early stage and enjoy the effect display performed on the image display device 208 ′, and eliminate the lower plate full tank error (ball removal) ) May be prompted.

In addition, by displaying the ball removal display E2, it is possible to focus attention on an effect display that is important when attention is paid to the ball removal display E2. is there.
<Example of image control>

  FIG. 185 is a schematic diagram illustrating an example of image control related to the display of the second decorative symbol of the present embodiment.

  FIG. 4A is a schematic diagram showing the configuration of the VRAM 436, and FIG. 4B is a schematic diagram showing the image display device 208 ′ (left sub liquid crystal 2082, main liquid crystal 2081, and right sub liquid crystal 2083). .

  FIGS. 7C and 7D are schematic diagrams for explaining general image control, and FIGS. 9E to 11H are adopted for partial display of the present embodiment. It is the schematic explaining the image control performed.

  As shown in FIGS. 4A and 4B, the VRAM 436 includes frame buffers A, B, and R corresponding to the left sub liquid crystal 2082 (B), the main liquid crystal 2081 (A), and the right sub liquid crystal 2083 (C), respectively. C and a work area W (for example, an area in which image data compressed in the ROM 408 is expanded and stored). Actually, two sets of frame buffers A, B, and C are provided in order to switch the display alternately (for swapping).

  For example, as shown in FIGS. 184 (g) and (h), when a second decorative symbol having the same symbol combination as the first decorative symbol displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 is displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082, for example, Then, image control as shown in FIGS. 185 (c) and (d) is performed.

  First, as shown in FIG. 185 (c), the VDP 434 reads out the image data of the decorative design (for example, the decorative design variation display shown in FIG. 184 (g)) stored in the ROM 406, and uses the work area W of the VRAM 436. Then, the image data is temporarily stored while being decompressed to generate a display image. Then, the display image is developed in the first set of frame buffers A1 and B1 designated in the drawing area. At this time, for example, the frame buffer A1 is expanded at the same magnification, and the frame buffer B1 is expanded and contracted in accordance with the size of the second decorative symbol.

  By swapping the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffers A1 and B1 and the second set of frame buffers A2 and B2, the images stored in the frame buffers A1 and B1 that are not designated as the drawing areas become the main liquid crystal 2081 and It is displayed on the left sub liquid crystal 2082.

  On the other hand, for example, in the productions such as FIGS. 170 (h) to (j), the first decorative symbol (the decorative symbol including the middle symbol animation display (first animation display)) and the second decorative symbol (middle symbol). The display is different from the decorative design including the temporary stop display of the symbol.

  In this case, the VDP 434 reads the image data of the decorative design (for example, the first decorative design shown in FIG. 170 (h)) stored in the ROM 406 as shown in FIG. The image data is used and temporarily stored while being decompressed to generate a display image.

  Then, as shown in (f) of the figure, the generated display image is reduced (or kept as it is) to generate another set.

  Thereafter, as shown in FIG. 5G, a part of one display image (which becomes the first decorative design) is processed (in this case, the image of the middle design is enlarged), and the other ( The display image that becomes the second decorative design is processed as necessary (for example, reduction of the image).

  The first set of frame buffers A1 in which the display image of the first decorative design after processing and the display image of the second decorative design (after processing) are designated as the drawing area as shown in FIG. , B1 respectively (with the same size), and swapping the designation of the drawing areas of the frame buffers A1, B1 and the second set of frame buffers A2, B2, so that the frame buffer A1, which is not designated as a drawing area, The image stored in B1 is displayed on the main liquid crystal 2081 and the left sub liquid crystal 2082. Thereafter, the same processing is continuously performed in accordance with the progress of the production (animation).

  As described above, the gaming table (for example, pachinko machine 100) according to the embodiment of the present invention includes display means (for example, the image display device 208 ′, the first image display device 2081, the second image display device 2082, A gaming machine equipped with a third image display device 2083), wherein the display means is a means capable of displaying a plurality of types of display, and one of the plurality of types of display is a first decoration. This is a variation display (hereinafter referred to as “first variation display”) of a symbol (for example, a decorative symbol displayed in the first symbol display region 208X (the symbol display regions 208a to 208c)), One of the displays is a variation display (hereinafter referred to as “second variation display”) of a second decoration symbol (for example, a decoration symbol displayed in the second symbol display area 208Y (the symbol display areas 208k to 208g)). .)so The second decorative symbol (for example, the second decorative symbol at the time of fixed display, at least one second decorative symbol at the time of fixed display, the middle symbol shown in FIG. 170 (m), FIG. 171 (o), etc.) The first decorative symbol (for example, the first decorative symbol at the time of finalizing display, at least one first decorative symbol at the time of finalizing, FIG. 170 (m), etc., than the decorative symbol displayed in the display area 208k) The display size of the decorative symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b shown in FIG. 5 is larger, and in the first variable display, the first animation display (for example, special symbols in at least one of the symbol display areas 208a to 208c). An animation may be displayed that indicates whether the symbol is stopped (temporarily stopped) (for example, a special symbol stop animation or a middle symbol animation). Thus, the gaming machine is characterized in that the second variation display is displayed in at least a part of the states in which the first animation display is displayed.

  Note that “the first animation display may be displayed in the first variation display” means that “the first animation display is started in the first variation display. Yes. In addition, the first variation display and the first animation display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

  In addition, “the second variation display is displayed in at least a part of the state where the first animation display is displayed” means “the first animation display is displayed. In at least some of the states, a display in which the second variable display is started may be made. " Further, the second variation display and the first animation display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

  According to such a configuration, for example, when the first animation display is started, the contents of the first variation display (the type of decorative symbol) and the state (the presence or absence of the fixed display) are unconfirmed. Even if the content or state of the first variation display may be difficult for the player to see compared to the first animation or the second variation display, the first variation display causes the first variation display to The player may be able to recognize (guess) the content and state of the display, or the subsequent effects (for example, effects related to the jackpot expectation level) May be). Thereby, the interest of a player may be able to be improved.

  In addition, there are cases where the state of symbol variation can be accurately conveyed to the player by displaying the second decorative symbol.

  In addition, for advanced players who are accustomed to the game, the result of the presentation can be recognized at an early stage by displaying the second decorative symbol (first ballet), and the motivation for the game may be increased.

  In addition, the first animation display is one of the animation displays indicating whether or not the first symbol is stopped and displayed, and after the first animation display ends, the first symbol is displayed. The first symbol may be displayed in a stopped manner, and the first symbol is a first effect (for example, a continuous effect, a pseudo-continuous effect, a continuous notice effect, an effect shown in FIGS. 170 (p) to 170 (r), FIG. 173). (F) to a symbol related to the start of execution of the effects shown in FIG. 173 (h) (hereinafter referred to as “first effect symbol (for example, special symbol, pseudo-continuous symbol, middle symbol in FIG. 170 (h), FIG. d) a middle symbol, a middle symbol of FIG. 174 (p), etc.) ”).

  The first symbol may be one of the symbols displayed in the first variable display.

  In addition, “the first symbol may be stopped after the first animation display is finished” means that “the first symbol is stopped after the first animation display is finished”. Display may be made ".

  In addition, the first animation display and the first symbol stop display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

  According to such a configuration, for example, when the first animation display is started, the first effect symbol related to the start of the execution of the first effect is stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display. Even if it is undecided or it may be difficult for the player to see compared to the first animation or the second variation display, the first effect design is displayed by the second variation display. In some cases, the player may be able to recognize (guess) the first performance (for example, performance related to the big hit expectation) whether or not the display is stopped (the second variation display may cause the first May be possible). Thereby, the interest of a player may be able to be improved.

  In addition, for example, there may be a case where the state of the symbol variation can be accurately conveyed to the player by displaying the second decorative symbol while enhancing the player's interest by performing a continuous effect based on the stop display of the special symbol. .

  In addition, for advanced players who are accustomed to the game, the result of the presentation can be recognized at an early stage by displaying the second decorative symbol (first ballet), and the motivation for the game may be increased.

  In addition, the first symbol may not be stopped after the first animation display, and the first symbol may be stopped after the first animation display. Before the end of the animation display, the second symbol (eg, special symbol, pseudo-continuous symbol, middle symbol in the second symbol display area 208Y shown in FIG. 170 (j), FIG. 171 (o ) And the second symbol display area 208Y of FIG. 174 (d) are stopped and displayed, and the second symbol is the first symbol of the first effect symbols. It may be a separate design.

  The second symbol may be one symbol among symbols displayed in the second variable display.

  In addition, “After the first animation display ends, the first symbol may not be stopped and displayed” means that “the first symbol does not stop and display after the first animation display ends. , May be made. "

  Further, “before the end of the first animation display, the second symbol is stopped and displayed in the second variation display” means “the second variation display before the end of the first animation display”. The display in which the second symbol is stopped and displayed may be made. Further, the first animation display and the second symbol stop display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

  According to such a configuration, for example, when the first effect design is stopped and displayed after the first animation display is finished, the first animation display is started, whereby the first animation display is started. After the end, even if it is uncertain whether or not the first effect symbol is displayed in a stopped state, or it may be difficult for the player to visually recognize the first animation or the second variation display, Whether or not the first effect symbol is stopped and displayed by the second symbol that is stopped and displayed in the second variation display, the player recognizes the first effect (for example, an effect related to the jackpot expectation). In some cases, it may be possible to make a (guess) (the second symbol of the second variation display may enable a first ballet). Thereby, the interest of a player may be able to be improved.

  In addition, for example, there may be a case where the state of the symbol variation can be accurately conveyed to the player by displaying the second decorative symbol while enhancing the player's interest by performing a continuous effect based on the stop display of the special symbol. .

  In addition, for advanced players who are accustomed to the game, the result of the presentation can be recognized at an early stage by displaying the second decorative symbol (first ballet), and the motivation for the game may be increased.

  Further, in the first variation display, a display (for example, display as shown in FIGS. 170 (i) to 170 (l)) in which the first symbol is enlarged may be displayed. In the variable display, the display in which the second symbol is enlarged may not be displayed, and the first animation display may be a display including a display in which the first symbol is enlarged.

  In addition, after the first animation display is finished, a third symbol (for example, a decorative symbol different from the special symbol displayed in the middle symbol display area 208b of the first symbol display area 208X, as shown in FIG. 171 (l)). In the second variation display, when the third symbol is stopped and displayed after completion of the first animation display, the middle symbol “decoration 8” or the like of the middle symbol shown in FIG. A fourth symbol (for example, a decorative symbol different from the special symbol displayed in the middle symbol display region 208k of the second symbol display region 208Y, a symbol such as “decoration 8” of the middle symbol shown in FIG. 171 (q)) Is stopped and displayed, the third symbol is one symbol different from the first effect symbol, and the fourth symbol is one symbol different from the first effect symbol. Separate from the third design of It may be a symbol.

  Note that “the third symbol may be stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display” means that “the third symbol is stopped and displayed after the end of the first animation display”. , May be made ". In addition, the first animation display and the third symbol stop display may be displayed at different timings, or may not be displayed at different timings.

  In addition, “the fourth symbol is stopped and displayed in the second variation display” means “the fourth symbol may be stopped and displayed in the second variation display”. It is.

  One of the plural types of displays is a display that prompts the player to discharge the game ball (hereinafter referred to as “ball discharge display (for example, error display E1 shown in FIG. 182 (d))”). Yes, at least a part of the first animation display displayed in a state where the ball discharge display is displayed may be overlapped with the ball discharge display.

  In addition, during the display of the first animation display, at least a part of the display of the second variation display may be overlapped by the first animation display.

  Further, during the display of the first animation display, at least a part of the display of the first animation display may be overlapped by the second variation display.

  Further, during the display of the first animation display, at least a part of the display of the first variation display may be overlapped by the first animation display.

  Further, in the first variation display, a second animation display (for example, an animation display before the start of a continuous effect, an animation display shown in FIGS. 170 (n) and (o), an animation display shown in FIG. 173 (e), etc.) ) May be displayed.

In addition, a first display unit (for example, the first image display device 2081) and a second display unit (for example, the second image display device 2082) are provided, and the display unit is the first display unit. Yes, the first variation display may be displayed on the first display means, and the second variation display may be displayed on the second display means.
The game machine may be a pachinko machine.

  In addition, for example, the term “first x xx” such as “first display” and “second display” is merely named to improve readability, and “first x xx” is used. "Is not a special term.

  In addition, what was called a lamp | ramp and illumination until now is an example of a light emission means, and if a lamp | ramp emits light, such as LED and a cold cathode tube, it can replace.

  For example, the above embodiment can also be applied to an enclosed game machine that circulates and uses game balls enclosed in a game machine. For example, the pachinko machine may be an enclosed pachinko machine that encloses a sphere and circulates the enclosed sphere in the pachinko machine, and this enclosed pachinko machine uses the enclosed sphere as a launch ball, The ball payout may be executed by electronic display.

  Note that the items described in the above detailed description, in particular, the items described in the examples and the modifications can be combined.

In the above embodiment, a pachinko machine is used as an example of a game table, but the present invention is not limited to this. The present invention is also applicable to a slot machine 2000 as shown in FIG.
The game table according to the present invention corresponds to each reel shown in FIG. 186, “a plurality of types of symbols 2002, a plurality of reels 2002 that are rotationally driven, a start lever 2004 for instructing rotation of the reels”, and each reel. A stop button 2006 for individually stopping the rotation of the reels, lottery means for determining whether or not an internal winning of a plurality of types of winning combinations is won by lottery (winning prize internal lottery), and based on the lottery result of the lottery means The combination of symbols displayed by the reel stop control means (reel stop control processing) that performs stop control for stopping the rotation of the reels and the reels stopped based on the lottery result of the lottery means corresponds to the winning combination. And determining means (winning determination process) for determining whether or not the symbol combination is predetermined, and when the symbol stop mode is a predetermined winning mode, In addition to payout control means (medal payout process 2008) for performing game medium payout processing for paying out game media to be played, the effect means 2010 for executing effects based on the lottery result of the lottery means is provided. A launching device 2014 that launches a ball into the game area 2012, a winning port 2016 configured to be able to enter a ball launched from the launching device, a detection means 2018 that detects a ball that has entered the winning port 2016, A payout means 2020 for paying out a ball when the detection means 2018 detects a ball, a variable display device 2022 for variably displaying a predetermined symbol (identification information), and a shutter 2024 movable to a position where the variable display device 2022 is shielded. And a movable body 2026 that operates in a predetermined operation mode, and the variable display device 2022 is designed to be triggered by a game ball entering the winning opening. And in is stopped and displayed after the change, it is also suitable to the slot machine 2000 ", which is the effect device 2010, such as to produce a game.

  The game table according to the present invention is shown in FIG. 187 (a). “Insert a bill into the bill insertion slot 3002, execute a lottery based on the bet 3004 and the start 3006 operation, and display the lottery result on the lottery result display device 3008. Then, at the time of winning, the number of bonus coins is added to the remaining credit number, and when cashout 3009 is selected, a casino machine 3000 that issues a receipt with a code corresponding to the remaining credit number from the receipt issuing machine 3010. It may be.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5B, the cellular phone 4000 having a storage unit for storing the electronic data for realizing the present invention, and the electronic data for realizing the present invention as shown in FIG. The present invention may be applied to a portable game machine 5000 provided with a storage unit for storing the image data and a home video game machine 6000 provided with a storage unit for storing electronic data for realizing the present invention.

  More specifically, the cellular phone 7000 in FIG. 5B includes an operation unit operated by the player, a data acquisition unit that acquires game-related data through a mobile phone line, and acquired game-related data (this book And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  The portable game machine 5000 in FIG. 6C includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data related to the game (the present invention). And a control unit for controlling the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit. The home video game machine 6000 in FIG. 6D includes an operation unit operated by a player, a data acquisition unit that acquires data related to the game from a predetermined storage medium (DVD or the like), and acquired data about the game ( And a control unit that controls the game based on the data stored in the storage unit and the operation of the operation unit.

  Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 5E, the present invention may be applied to a data server 7000 that stores electronic data for realizing the present invention. In some cases, the electronic data for realizing the present invention is downloaded from the data server 7000 to the home video game machine 6000 shown in FIG.

  In addition, a game can be executed by applying the present invention to a game program that simulates the operation of a real machine such as a pachinko machine for a home game machine. In that case, a DVD-ROM, CD-ROM, FD (flexible disk), or any other recording medium can be used as a recording medium for recording the game program.

  Furthermore, the present invention has been described by taking a pachinko machine and a slot machine as examples of game machines, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be applied to an arrangement ball game machine, a ball ball game machine, a smart ball, and the like.

The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.
(Appendix a1)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a certain type of line notice display,
The certain type of notice notice display is a display that may include a character display of contents related to a certain character,
A mini-game may be started in connection with the certain type of dialogue notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a2)
A game machine according to appendix a1,
With operating means,
The result of a certain mini game can be derived without operation of the operation means,
When a certain result (hereinafter referred to as “first result”) is derived as a result of a certain mini game, display of a certain effect display is started.
When a certain result (hereinafter referred to as “second result”) different from the first result is derived as a result of a certain mini game, the display of a certain effect display is not started. And
The variation display in which the display of a certain effect display is started by the derivation of the first result is more final than the variable display in which the display of a certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result. It is configured to be confirmed and displayed in a big hit mode.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a3)
A game machine according to appendix a2,
The certain type of dialogue notice display is a display including a speech bubble,
The balloon may be displayed in a plurality of types,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a second aspect,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
Rather than a certain mini-game in which the balloon mode is started in connection with the certain type of serif notice display of the first mode, the balloon mode is the certain type of serif of the second mode. A certain mini-game started in connection with the notice display is configured such that the first result is more easily derived.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a4)
A gaming machine according to appendix a3,
A mini game is configured to be played in the balloon.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a5)
The game stand according to appendix a3 or a4,
A certain type of character display representing a character's speech can be displayed in the balloon,
A plurality of types of character display can be displayed as the certain type of character display,
One character display of the plurality of types of character display is a first character display,
One character display of the plurality of types of character display is a second character display,
The first character display and the second character display are different character displays,
The variable display in which the second character display is displayed is finally displayed in the big hit mode rather than the variable display in which the first character display is displayed without displaying the second character display. Is structured easily,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a3 to a5,
Prior to the start of the display of the certain type of notice notice display, the display suggesting the mode of the speech balloon is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a2 to a6,
A certain effect display is a display of the certain type of line notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a2 to a7,
The display for a certain mini-game may be erased after a certain mini-game is started and before the result is derived.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a2 to a8,
Provided with a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The display means is configured to be able to display a decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the symbol variation display,
The symbol display means is configured to be able to display a symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “losing symbol variation display”) in which the final symbol pattern is finally displayed.
The symbol display means is configured to be able to display a symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as a “hit symbol variation display”) in which the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed.
The display means is configured to be able to display a decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as a “loss variation variation display”) displayed in correspondence with the loss symbol variation display.
The display means is configured to be able to display a decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as a “hit variation variation display”) displayed corresponding to the jackpot symbol variation display.
The loss variation display is a variation display that finally displays a fixed display of a certain combination of decorative symbols (hereinafter referred to as “first fixed display”).
The jackpot variation display is a variation display that finally displays a certain combination of decorative symbols different from the first confirmation display (hereinafter referred to as “second confirmation display”).
The display of the first fixed display is started in response to the end of the loss symbol variation display,
In response to the end of the jackpot symbol variation display, the display of the second confirmation display is started,
“Variable display in which display of a certain effect display is started by derivation of the first result, rather than a variable display in which the display of a certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result” Is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in a big win mode in the end ”means that“ the display of a certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result ”than the variation display of the decorative pattern. The decorative display variation display in which the display of a certain effect display is started by derivation of the first result is configured such that the second fixed display is more easily displayed.
That is,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a2 to a9,
It is configured to be able to display a display suggesting that a certain effect display is displayed before a certain mini game is started.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a11)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a2 to a10,
It is configured to be able to execute the timer notice effect,
In relation to the timer notice effect, the certain effect display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a12)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a2 to a11,
A certain effect display is a display whose display is started only by derivation of the first result.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a13)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a12,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display representing a plurality of types of certain characters,
One of the displays representing the plurality of types of characters is a first character display,
One of the displays representing the plurality of types of characters is a second character display,
The first character display and the second character display are separate displays,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of decorative symbols,
One of the plurality of types of decorative symbols is a decorative symbol including the first character display (hereinafter referred to as “certain decorative symbol”).
Among the certain types of serif notice displays, the serif notice display is a display including the second character display (hereinafter referred to as “certain notice display”).
A certain chance including the certain decorative design (hereinafter referred to as “certain chance”) is configured to be displayed,
After the certain chance stop is displayed, the certain line notice display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a14)
A game machine according to appendix a13,
Before the certain chance eye is stopped and displayed, a display of a combination of decorative symbols that are not chance eyes (hereinafter referred to as “non-certain chance eyes”) may be stopped and displayed.
An effect that changes the non-certain chance to the certain chance is configured to be executable.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a15)
A gaming machine according to appendix a13 or a14,
In a certain production state among a plurality of types of production states, the certain chance eyes are configured to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a16)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a15,
The certain type of dialogue notice display is a display including any one of a plurality of types of characters,
Before the display of the certain type of line notice display is started, the display suggesting the character included in the certain type of line notice display can be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a17)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a16,
“A certain mini-game may be started in connection with the certain kind of line notice display” described in the appendix a1 means “after the display of the certain kind of line notice display is started” , A certain mini-game may be started before the display of the certain type of notice notice display is ended. "
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a18)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a17,
A certain type of serif notice display (hereinafter referred to as “second type serif notice display”) is different from the certain type of serif notice display (hereinafter referred to as “first type serif notice display”). Configured to be viewable,
There is a state in which both the first type serif notice display and the second type serif notice display are displayed,
A configuration in which a certain mini-game is not started when only the second type serif notice display of the first type serif notice display and the second type serif notice display is displayed. Being
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a19)
A game machine according to appendix a18,
With operating means,
As the response display of the operation of the operation means, the display of a certain serif notice display of the second type serif notice display is started,
When an operation of the operation means is performed in a state where a display indicating the appearance of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation display”) is displayed, a response display of the second type serif notice display It is configured to start the display of a certain dialog notice display,
At least a part of the display of the first type of dialogue notice display is overlapped by the operation display,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a20)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a19,
Some minigames contain variable displays,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a21)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a20,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a22)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a20,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

(Appendix b1)
A game machine having a display means capable of displaying a plurality of displays,
One display of the plurality of displays is a first display;
One display of the plurality of displays is a second display;
The first display is a display including a first line,
The first display is a display including a first character,
The second display is a display including a second line,
The second display is a display including a second character,
The second display may be displayed after the first display is displayed,
The second character may be displayed before the display of the first display,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b2)
A game machine according to appendix b1,
A third character may be displayed before the display of the first display,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b3)
The game stand according to appendix b2,
One display of the plurality of displays is a third display,
The third display is a display including a third line,
The third display is a display including the third character,
The third display may be displayed after the second display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b4)
The game stand according to appendix b3,
One display of the plurality of displays is a first conversation notice display,
One display of the plurality of displays is a second conversation notice display,
The first conversation notice display is a display including the first display,
The first conversation notice display is a display including the second display,
The second conversation notice display is a display including the third display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b5)
The game stand according to appendix b4,
The second conversation notice display may be displayed after the first conversation notice display is displayed in a period during which one certain symbol variation display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b6)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices b1 to b5,
One display of the plurality of displays is a first animation display,
The first animation display is displayed before the display of the first display,
The first animation display is a display including a movement display of the character,
The first animation display is a display including the first character,
The first animation display is a display that may include the second character.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b7)
A gaming machine according to appendix b6,
The first character and the second character are simultaneously displayed at a certain timing in the display period of the first animation display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b8)
A gaming table according to appendix b6 or b7,
In the first animation display, the display start of the second character is before the display start of the first character.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b6 to b8,
One display of the plurality of displays is a second animation display,
The second animation display is displayed before the display of the second display,
The second animation display is a display including a movement display of the character,
The second animation display is a display including the second character,
The second animation display is a display that does not include the first character.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b10)
A game machine according to appendix b9,
The number of characters in the second animation display is less than the number of characters in the first animation display,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b11)
A gaming machine according to appendix b9 or b10,
The first displayed character in the second animation display is different from the first character displayed in the first animation display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b12)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b9 to b11,
The length of the display period of the first animation display is shorter than the length of the display period of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b13)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b12,
The first display is a display including a first color,
The second display is a display including a second color,
The reliability in the first color is different from the reliability in the second color,
A display including the second color may be displayed before the display of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b14)
A gaming machine according to appendix b13,
The reliability in the second color is higher than the reliability in the first color.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b15)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b14,
The first dialogue is displayed before the display of the first display,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b16)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b15,
The first display is a display including a first name;
The first name is the name of the first character,
The first name is displayed before the display of the first display,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b17)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b16,
It has operating means that can be operated by the player,
The second display is displayed when the operation means is operated during the display of the first display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b18)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b17,
The second display is displayed after the first display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b19)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b18,
Comprising a movable body movable to a position overlapping the display means;
The movable body may overlap at least one of the first display and the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b20)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b19,
There may be a case where a display overlaps at least one of the first display and the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b21)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b20,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix b22)
The game stand according to any one of appendices b1 to b20,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

100 Pachinko machine 136 Chance button 208 Decoration symbol display device 224 Production movable body 226 General winning opening 228, 229 General drawing starting opening 230 Special drawing 1 starting opening 232 Special drawing 2 starting opening 232a Blade member 234 Variable winning opening 234a Door member 300 main Control unit 400 First sub control unit 500 Second sub control unit

The above purpose is
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a certain type of line notice display,
One line notice display of the certain kind of line notice display is a first line notice display,
One line notice display of the certain kind of line notice display is a second line notice display,
The first serif notice display and the second serif notice display are different notice displays,
The first serif notice display is a serif notice display including a character display of contents relating to a certain character,
A mini-game is started in connection with the first serif notice display ,
A mini-game is not started in connection with the second serif notice display,
After a display indicating a certain result (hereinafter referred to as “first result”) is displayed as a result of a certain mini game, display of a certain effect display is started.
The certain effect display is a notice display related to the change display being executed,
The second serif notice display is a prefetch notice display of one of a plurality of prefetch notice displays.
This is achieved by a game stand characterized by that.

(A22)
The game stand according to any one of A1 to A20 above,
The game machine is a slot machine (for example, slot machines 1000 and 2000).
A game stand characterized by that.
(1A1)
A game machine provided with a display means (for example, a decorative symbol display device 208),
The display means is means capable of displaying a certain type of line notice display,
One of the lines of the certain kind of notice notice display is a first notice notice display (for example, a notice notice display k1, k4),
One line notice display of the certain kind of line notice display is a second line notice display (for example, a line notice display k3),
The first serif notice display and the second serif notice display are different notice displays (for example, when the first serif notice display (serif notice display k1) is displayed in a certain variable display, The second serif notice display (serif notice display k3) is not displayed in a certain fluctuation display (see FIGS. 19 and 20))
The first serif notice display is a serif notice display including a character display of contents relating to a certain character,
A mini-game (for example, a mini-game based on the mini-game display o1) is started in connection with the first dialog notice display,
A mini-game is not started in connection with the second line notice display (see, for example, FIGS. 16 (18) to (25)),
After a display indicating a certain result (hereinafter referred to as “first result (for example, win)”) is displayed as a result of a certain mini-game, a certain effect display (for example, serif notice display k2, k5) is displayed. Display starts,
The certain effect display is a notice display (for example, notice display of the change) regarding the change display being executed,
The second serif notice display is a prefetch notice display of one of a plurality of prefetch notice displays.
A game stand characterized by that.
(1A2)
The gaming machine according to 1A1 above,
Operating means (for example, a chance button 136),
The result of a certain mini game can be derived without operation of the operation means,
One of the lines of the certain kind of notice notice display is a third notice notice display (for example, the notice notice display k2, k5),
The first serif notice display and the third serif notice display are different notice displays,
The third dialog notice display may be displayed as the certain effect display (for example, FIG. 16 (10) to (17), FIG. 22 (14) to (20), FIG. 30 (13) to ( 19))
A game stand characterized by that.
(1A3)
A gaming machine according to 1A1 or 1A2 above,
The first serif notice display is a serif notice display including a certain image (hereinafter referred to as “first image (for example, speech balloon)”),
In a display area of the display area where the first image is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “first display area (center part in a balloon display)”), a character display representing a line is displayed,
A display of a certain mini game is displayed in a certain display area (for example, the right side in the balloon display) different from the first display area in the display area where the first image is displayed,
The first image is an image different from a background image displayed over the display area of the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(1A4)
The gaming machine according to 1A3 above,
The first image (for example, a balloon) may be displayed in a plurality of types.
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect (for example, aspect 3),
One aspect of the plurality of kinds of aspects is a second aspect (for example, aspect 4),
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
Rather than a certain mini-game in which the first image mode is started in connection with the first serif notice display of the first mode, the first image mode is the second mode. The first result is more likely to be derived for a mini-game that starts in connection with the first serif notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(1A5)
The gaming machine according to 1A4 above,
Before the display of the certain type of notice notice display is started, a display (for example, display j1, j4) suggesting the aspect of the first image is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(1A6)
The game table according to 1A4 or 1A5 above,
The second serif notice display is a serif notice display including an image (hereinafter referred to as “second image (for example, balloon display)”) different from the first image;
In a certain display area of the display area where the second image is displayed, a character display representing a line is displayed,
The external shape of the first image (for example, a horizontally long rectangular shape) and the external shape of the second image (for example, a horizontally long rectangular shape) are the same external shape (for example, a horizontally long rectangular shape),
The color of the first image (for example, blue and green) and the color of the second image (for example, white) are different colors.
A game stand characterized by that.
(1A7)
The gaming machine according to any one of 1A1 to 1A6 above,
The certain effect display starts after a display indicating a certain result different from the first result (hereinafter referred to as “second result (for example, losing)”) is displayed as a result of a certain mini game. (See, for example, FIG. 16 (9)),
A game stand characterized by that.
(1A8)
The gaming machine according to 1A7 above,
The display of the certain effect display by the derivation of the first result (for example, hit) rather than the variable display in which the display of the certain effect display has not started by the derivation of the second result (for example, disparity). The fluctuation display that started is easier to be finalized and displayed in a big hit mode.
A game stand characterized by that.
(1A9)
The gaming machine according to 1A8 above,
A symbol display means (for example, special figure 1 display device 212 or special figure 2 table device 214) capable of displaying a symbol variation display is provided,
The display means is capable of displaying a decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the symbol variation display,
The symbol display means can display a symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “losing symbol variation display”) in which the losing symbol aspect is finally displayed.
The symbol display means can display a symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as a “hit symbol variation display”) in which a jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed.
The display means is capable of displaying a decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “losing variation display”) displayed in correspondence with the loss symbol variation display.
The display means can display a decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as a “hit variation display”) displayed in correspondence with the jackpot symbol variation display.
The loss variation display is a variation display that finally displays a fixed display (hereinafter referred to as a “first fixed display”) of a decorative symbol of a certain combination (for example, a combination in the case of a loss).
The big hit variation display is finally referred to as a fixed display (hereinafter, “second fixed display”) of a decorative pattern of a certain combination (for example, a combination in the case of winning) different from the first fixed display. ) Is a variable display,
In response to the end of the lost symbol variation display, the display of the first fixed display is started,
In response to the end of the jackpot symbol variation display, the display of the second confirmed display is started,
The display of the certain effect display has been started by the derivation of the first result, rather than the variable display in which the display of the certain effect display has not been started by the derivation of the second result described in 1A8 above. The variation display is more likely to be finalized and displayed in the big hit mode, "means that" the variation display of the decorative design whose display of the certain effect display was not started by the derivation of the second result, The second fixed display is easier to display in the decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the certain effect display is started by derivation of the first result. "
That is,
A game stand characterized by that.
(1A10)
The gaming machine according to any one of 1A1 to 1A9 above,
The display means can display a timer notice effect display (for example, timer notice display u9),
In some cases, the timer notice effect display is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the first serif notice display (see, for example, FIGS. 34 (6) to (8)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(1A11)
The gaming machine according to any one of 1A1 to 1A10 above,
A plurality of displays representing a character can be displayed,
One display of the plurality of displays is a first display (for example, a princess),
Multiple decorative designs can be displayed,
One of the plurality of decorative symbols is a decorative symbol including the first display (hereinafter referred to as “a certain decorative symbol (for example, decoration 3)”).
A certain line notice display (for example, a line notice display k6) of the certain kind of line notice display is a line notice display including the first display (for example, a line notice display k6 shown in FIG. 30 (10)). ) And
A certain chance item (hereinafter referred to as “certain chance item (for example, decoration 3-decoration 5-decoration 7)”) including the certain decorative design can be displayed;
After the certain chance is stopped and displayed, the certain line notice display is displayed (see, for example, FIGS. 30 (7) to (10)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(1A12)
The gaming machine according to 1A11 above,
One display of the plurality of displays is a second display (for example, Tono),
The first display and the second display are different displays,
Before a certain chance is stopped and displayed, a display of a combination of decorative symbols that are not chances (hereinafter referred to as “non-certain chance (for example, decoration 2-decoration 5-decoration 7)”) is stopped and displayed. May be
A change effect that changes the non-certain chance to the certain chance can be executed,
The change effect is an effect including the second display (see, for example, FIG. 30 (5)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(1A13)
The gaming machine according to any one of 1A1 to 1A12 above,
The first serif notice display is a display including any one of a plurality of types of characters (for example, Tono, Hime, Rin),
Before the display of the first serif notice display is started, a display (for example, a character image g2 shown in FIG. 71) suggesting a character included in the first serif notice display can be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(1A14)
The gaming machine according to any one of 1A1 to 1A13 above,
The display means is means capable of displaying a tutorial display (for example, tutorial display u1),
In some cases, the first serif notice display is displayed so as to overlap at least a part of the tutorial display (for example, FIG. 31B).
A game stand characterized by that.
(1A15)
The game stand according to any one of 1A1 to 1A14 above,
The display means is means capable of displaying meter display (for example, meter (gauge) images g1, g2, g3),
When the certain effect display is displayed, an increase display of the meter display may be displayed (see FIGS. 22 (19) to (27)).
A game stand characterized by that.
(1A16)
The game stand according to any one of 1A1 to 1A15 above,
A pre-read notice display that displays the hold icon in a certain mode (for example, modes 3 to 7) can be displayed;
According to claim 1, "the second serif notice display is a prefetch notice display of one of a plurality of prefetch notice displays" means "the second serif notice display is the certain prefetch notice display". It is a notice display related to the notice display. "
A game stand characterized by that.
(1A17)
The game stand according to any one of 1A1 to 1A16 above,
“A certain mini-game is started in connection with the first serif notice display” described in 1A1 above means “after the display of the first serif notice display is started, A certain mini-game is started before the display of the notice display is ended. "
A game stand characterized by that.
(1A18)
The game stand according to any one of 1A1 to 1A16 above,
Different types of the above-mentioned certain type of serif notice display (hereinafter referred to as “first type serif notice display (for example, serif notice display k1, k2, k3, k4, k5, k6, k7)”). Serif notice display (hereinafter referred to as “second type of notice notice display (for example, serif notice display s1)”) can be displayed,
There is a state in which both the first type serif notice display and the second type serif notice display are displayed,
When only the second type of dialogue notice display is displayed among the first type of dialogue notice display and the second type of dialogue notice display, a mini-game is not started (for example, (See FIG. 25 (18))
A game stand characterized by that.
(1A19)
The game machine according to 1A18 above,
Operating means (for example, a chance button 136),
As the response display of the operation of the operation means, the display of a certain serif notice display of the second type serif notice display is started,
When an operation of the operation means is performed in a state where a display indicating the appearance of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation display (for example, button image)”) is displayed, the second type of response display is performed. The display of a certain notice notice display in the notice notice display is started,
At least a part of the display of the first type of dialogue notice display is overlapped by the operation display,
A game stand characterized by that.
(1A20)
The gaming machine according to any one of 1A1 to 1A19 above,
Some mini-games include variable displays (eg, moving arrow images)
A game stand characterized by that.
(1A21)
The gaming machine according to any one of 1A1 to 1A20 above,
The game machine is a pachinko machine (for example, a pachinko machine 100).
A game stand characterized by that.

The present invention according to the above embodiment can be summarized as follows.
(Appendix a1)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a certain type of line notice display,
The certain type of notice notice display is a display that may include a character display of contents related to a certain character,
A mini-game may be started in connection with the certain type of dialogue notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a2)
A game machine according to appendix a1,
With operating means,
The result of a certain mini game can be derived without operation of the operation means,
When a certain result (hereinafter referred to as “first result”) is derived as a result of a certain mini game, display of a certain effect display is started.
When a certain result (hereinafter referred to as “second result”) different from the first result is derived as a result of a certain mini game, the display of a certain effect display is not started. And
The variation display in which the display of a certain effect display is started by the derivation of the first result is more final than the variable display in which the display of a certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result. It is configured to be confirmed and displayed in a big hit mode.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a3)
A game machine according to appendix a2,
The certain type of dialogue notice display is a display including a speech bubble,
The balloon may be displayed in a plurality of types,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a second aspect,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
Rather than a certain mini-game in which the balloon mode is started in connection with the certain type of serif notice display of the first mode, the balloon mode is the certain type of serif of the second mode. A certain mini-game started in connection with the notice display is configured such that the first result is more easily derived.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a4)
A gaming machine according to appendix a3,
A mini game is configured to be played in the balloon.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a5)
The game stand according to appendix a3 or a4,
A certain type of character display representing a character's speech can be displayed in the balloon,
A plurality of types of character display can be displayed as the certain type of character display,
One character display of the plurality of types of character display is a first character display,
One character display of the plurality of types of character display is a second character display,
The first character display and the second character display are different character displays,
The variable display in which the second character display is displayed is finally displayed in the big hit mode rather than the variable display in which the first character display is displayed without displaying the second character display. Is structured easily,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a6)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a3 to a5,
Prior to the start of the display of the certain type of notice notice display, the display suggesting the mode of the speech balloon is performed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a7)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a2 to a6,
A certain effect display is a display of the certain type of line notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a8)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a2 to a7,
The display for a certain mini-game may be erased after a certain mini-game is started and before the result is derived.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a9)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a2 to a8,
Provided with a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The display means is configured to be able to display a decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the symbol variation display,
The symbol display means is configured to be able to display a symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “losing symbol variation display”) in which the final symbol pattern is finally displayed.
The symbol display means is configured to be able to display a symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as a “hit symbol variation display”) in which the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed.
The display means is configured to be able to display a decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as a “loss variation variation display”) displayed in correspondence with the loss symbol variation display.
The display means is configured to be able to display a decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as a “hit variation variation display”) displayed corresponding to the jackpot symbol variation display.
The loss variation display is a variation display that finally displays a fixed display of a certain combination of decorative symbols (hereinafter referred to as “first fixed display”).
The jackpot variation display is a variation display that finally displays a certain combination of decorative symbols different from the first confirmation display (hereinafter referred to as “second confirmation display”).
The display of the first fixed display is started in response to the end of the loss symbol variation display,
In response to the end of the jackpot symbol variation display, the display of the second confirmation display is started,
“Variable display in which display of a certain effect display is started by derivation of the first result, rather than a variable display in which the display of a certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result” Is more likely to be confirmed and displayed in a big win mode in the end ”means that“ the display of a certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result ”than the variation display of the decorative pattern. The decorative display variation display in which the display of a certain effect display is started by derivation of the first result is configured such that the second fixed display is more easily displayed.
That is,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a10)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a2 to a9,
It is configured to be able to display a display suggesting that a certain effect display is displayed before a certain mini game is started.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a11)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a2 to a10,
It is configured to be able to execute the timer notice effect,
In relation to the timer notice effect, the certain effect display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a12)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a2 to a11,
A certain effect display is a display whose display is started only by derivation of the first result.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a13)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a12,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display representing a plurality of types of certain characters,
One of the displays representing the plurality of types of characters is a first character display,
One of the displays representing the plurality of types of characters is a second character display,
The first character display and the second character display are separate displays,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of decorative symbols,
One of the plurality of types of decorative symbols is a decorative symbol including the first character display (hereinafter referred to as “certain decorative symbol”).
Among the certain types of serif notice displays, the serif notice display is a display including the second character display (hereinafter referred to as “certain notice display”).
A certain chance including the certain decorative design (hereinafter referred to as “certain chance”) is configured to be displayed,
After the certain chance stop is displayed, the certain line notice display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a14)
A game machine according to appendix a13,
Before the certain chance eye is stopped and displayed, a display of a combination of decorative symbols that are not chance eyes (hereinafter referred to as “non-certain chance eyes”) may be stopped and displayed.
An effect that changes the non-certain chance to the certain chance is configured to be executable.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a15)
A gaming machine according to appendix a13 or a14,
In a certain production state among a plurality of types of production states, the certain chance eyes are configured to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a16)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a15,
The certain type of dialogue notice display is a display including any one of a plurality of types of characters,
Before the display of the certain type of line notice display is started, the display suggesting the character included in the certain type of line notice display can be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a17)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a16,
“A certain mini-game may be started in connection with the certain kind of line notice display” described in the appendix a1 means “after the display of the certain kind of line notice display is started” , A certain mini-game may be started before the display of the certain type of notice notice display is ended. "
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a18)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a17,
A certain type of serif notice display (hereinafter referred to as “second type serif notice display”) is different from the certain type of serif notice display (hereinafter referred to as “first type serif notice display”). Configured to be viewable,
There is a state in which both the first type serif notice display and the second type serif notice display are displayed,
A configuration in which a certain mini-game is not started when only the second type serif notice display of the first type serif notice display and the second type serif notice display is displayed. Being
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a19)
A game machine according to appendix a18,
With operating means,
As the response display of the operation of the operation means, the display of a certain serif notice display of the second type serif notice display is started,
When an operation of the operation means is performed in a state where a display indicating the appearance of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation display”) is displayed, a response display of the second type serif notice display It is configured to start the display of a certain dialog notice display,
At least a part of the display of the first type of dialogue notice display is overlapped by the operation display,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a20)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a19,
Some minigames contain variable displays,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a21)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a20,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix a22)
The game stand according to any one of appendices a1 to a20,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1a1)
A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a certain type of line notice display,
One line notice display of the certain kind of line notice display is a first line notice display,
One line notice display of the certain kind of line notice display is a second line notice display,
The first serif notice display and the second serif notice display are different notice displays,
The first serif notice display is a serif notice display including a character display of contents relating to a certain character,
A mini-game is started in connection with the first serif notice display,
A mini-game is not started in connection with the second serif notice display,
After a display indicating a certain result (hereinafter referred to as “first result”) is displayed as a result of a certain mini game, display of a certain effect display is started.
The certain effect display is a notice display related to the change display being executed,
The second serif notice display is a prefetch notice display of one of a plurality of prefetch notice displays.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1a2)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1a1,
With operating means,
The result of a certain mini game can be derived without operation of the operation means,
One line notice display of the certain kind of line notice display is a third line notice display,
The first serif notice display and the third serif notice display are different notice displays,
The third dialogue notice display may be displayed as the certain effect display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1a3)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1a1 or 1a2,
The first serif notice display is a serif notice display including a certain image (hereinafter referred to as “first image”),
In a display area of the display area where the first image is displayed (hereinafter referred to as “first display area”), a character display representing a line is displayed,
A display of a certain mini game is displayed in a certain display area different from the first display area in the display area where the first image is displayed,
The first image is an image different from a background image displayed over the display area of the display means.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1a4)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1a3,
The first image may be displayed in a plurality of types,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a second aspect,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
Rather than a certain mini-game in which the first image mode is started in connection with the first serif notice display of the first mode, the first image mode is the second mode. The first result is more likely to be derived for a mini-game that starts in connection with the first serif notice display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1a5)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1a4,
Before the display of the certain type of line notice display is started, a display suggesting an aspect of the first image is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1a6)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1a4 or 1a5,
The second serif notice display is a serif notice display including an image different from the first image (hereinafter referred to as “second image”),
In a certain display area of the display area where the second image is displayed, a character display representing a line is displayed,
The external shape of the first image and the external shape of the second image are the same external shape,
The color of the first image and the color of the second image are different colors.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1a7)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1a1 to 1a6,
The certain effect display is not started after a display indicating a certain result (hereinafter referred to as “second result”) different from the first result is displayed as a result of a certain mini game.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1a8)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1a7,
The variable display in which the display of the certain effect display is started by the derivation of the first result is more preferable than the variable display in which the display of the certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result. Finally, it is easy to confirm and display in a big hit mode.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1a9)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1a8,
Provided with a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The display means is capable of displaying a decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the symbol variation display,
The symbol display means can display a symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “losing symbol variation display”) in which the losing symbol aspect is finally displayed.
The symbol display means can display a symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as a “hit symbol variation display”) in which a jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed.
The display means is capable of displaying a decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “losing variation display”) displayed in correspondence with the loss symbol variation display.
The display means can display a decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as a “hit variation display”) displayed in correspondence with the jackpot symbol variation display.
The loss variation display is a variation display that finally displays a fixed display of a certain combination of decorative symbols (hereinafter referred to as “first fixed display”).
The jackpot variation display is a variation display that finally displays a certain combination of decorative symbols different from the first confirmation display (hereinafter referred to as “second confirmation display”).
In response to the end of the lost symbol variation display, the display of the first fixed display is started,
In response to the end of the jackpot symbol variation display, the display of the second confirmed display is started,
The display of the certain effect display has been started by the derivation of the first result, rather than the variable display in which the display of the certain effect display has not been started by the derivation of the second result described in appendix 1a8 The variation display is more likely to be finalized and displayed in the big hit mode, "means that" the variation display of the decorative design whose display of the certain effect display was not started by the derivation of the second result, The second fixed display is easier to display in the decorative symbol variation display in which the display of the certain effect display is started by derivation of the first result. "
That is,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1a10)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1a1 to 1a9,
The display means can display a timer notice effect display,
The timer notice effect display may be displayed overlapping at least a part of the first serif notice display,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1a11)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1a1 to 1a10,
A plurality of displays representing a character can be displayed,
One display of the plurality of displays is a first display;
Multiple decorative designs can be displayed,
One of the plurality of decorative symbols is a decorative symbol including the first display (hereinafter referred to as “certain decorative symbol”).
A certain notice notice display of the certain kind of notice notice display is a notice notice display including the first display,
A certain chance including the certain decorative pattern (hereinafter referred to as “a certain chance”) can be displayed;
After the certain chance stop is displayed, the certain line notice display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1a12)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1a11,
One display of the plurality of displays is a second display;
The first display and the second display are different displays,
Before the certain chance eye is stopped and displayed, a display of a combination of decorative symbols that are not chance eyes (hereinafter referred to as “non-certain chance eyes”) may be stopped and displayed.
A change effect that changes the non-certain chance to the certain chance can be executed,
The change effect is an effect including the second display.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1a13)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1a1 to 1a12,
The first serif notice display is a display including any one of a plurality of types of characters,
Before the display of the first serif notice display is started, a display suggesting a character included in the first serif notice display can be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1a14)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1a1 to 1a13,
The display means is means capable of displaying a tutorial display,
The first serif notice display may be displayed overlapping at least part of the tutorial display,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1a15)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1a1 to 1a14,
The display means is means capable of displaying a meter display,
When the certain effect display is displayed, an increase display of the meter display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1a16)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1a1 to 1a15,
A pre-reading notice display that displays the hold icon in a certain manner can be displayed.
“The second serif notice display is a prefetch notice display of one of a plurality of prefetch notice displays” described in appendix 1a1 means “the second serif notice display is the certain prefetch notice display”. It is a notice regarding the display. "
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1a17)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1a1 to 1a16,
“A certain mini-game is started in connection with the first serif notice display” in appendix 1a1 means “after the first serif notice display starts, A certain mini-game is started before the display of the notice display is ended. "
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1a18)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1a1 to 1a16,
A certain type of serif notice display (hereinafter referred to as “second type serif notice display”) is different from the certain type of serif notice display (hereinafter referred to as “first type serif notice display”). Can be displayed,
There is a state in which both the first type serif notice display and the second type serif notice display are displayed,
A mini-game is not started when only the second type serif notice display of the first type serif notice display and the second type serif notice display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1a19)
A gaming machine according to appendix 1a18,
With operating means,
As the response display of the operation of the operation means, the display of a certain serif notice display of the second type serif notice display is started,
When an operation of the operation means is performed in a state where a display indicating the appearance of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation display”) is displayed, a response display of the second type serif notice display The display of a certain line notice display starts,
At least a part of the display of the first type of dialogue notice display is overlapped by the operation display,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1a20)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1a1 to 1a19,
Some minigames contain variable displays,
A game stand characterized by that.
(Appendix 1a21)
The gaming machine according to any one of appendices 1a1 to 1a20,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

Claims (22)

A gaming machine equipped with a display means,
The display means is means capable of displaying a certain type of line notice display,
The certain type of notice notice display is a display that may include a character display of contents related to a certain character,
A mini-game may be started in connection with the certain type of dialogue notice display.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 1,
With operating means,
The result of a certain mini game can be derived without operation of the operation means,
When a certain result (hereinafter referred to as “first result”) is derived as a result of a certain mini game, display of a certain effect display is started.
When a certain result (hereinafter referred to as “second result”) different from the first result is derived as a result of a certain mini game, the display of a certain effect display is not started. And
The variation display in which the display of a certain effect display is started by the derivation of the first result is more final than the variable display in which the display of a certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result. It is configured to be confirmed and displayed in a big hit mode.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 2,
The certain type of dialogue notice display is a display including a speech bubble,
The balloon may be displayed in a plurality of types,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a first aspect,
One aspect of the plurality of types of aspects is a second aspect,
The first aspect and the second aspect are different aspects,
Rather than a certain mini-game in which the balloon mode is started in connection with the certain type of serif notice display of the first mode, the balloon mode is the certain type of serif of the second mode. A certain mini-game started in connection with the notice display is configured such that the first result is more easily derived.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 3,
A mini game is configured to be played in the balloon.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 3 or 4,
A certain type of character display representing a character's speech can be displayed in the balloon,
A plurality of types of character display can be displayed as the certain type of character display,
One character display of the plurality of types of character display is a first character display,
One character display of the plurality of types of character display is a second character display,
The first character display and the second character display are different character displays,
The variable display in which the second character display is displayed is finally displayed in the big hit mode rather than the variable display in which the first character display is displayed without displaying the second character display. Is structured easily,
A game stand characterized by that. A game table according to any one of claims 3 to 5,
Prior to the start of the display of the certain type of notice notice display, the display suggesting the mode of the speech balloon is performed.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 2 to 6,
A certain effect display is a display of the certain type of line notice display.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 2 to 7,
The display for a certain mini-game may be erased after a certain mini-game is started and before the result is derived.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 2 to 8,
Provided with a symbol display means capable of displaying a symbol variation display,
The display means is configured to be able to display a decorative symbol variation display corresponding to the symbol variation display,
The symbol display means is configured to be able to display a symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as “losing symbol variation display”) in which the final symbol pattern is finally displayed.
The symbol display means is configured to be able to display a symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as a “hit symbol variation display”) in which the jackpot symbol mode is finally displayed.
The display means is configured to be able to display a decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter, referred to as a “loss variation variation display”) displayed in correspondence with the loss symbol variation display.
The display means is configured to be able to display a decorative symbol variation display (hereinafter referred to as a “hit variation variation display”) displayed corresponding to the jackpot symbol variation display.
The loss variation display is a variation display that finally displays a fixed display of a certain combination of decorative symbols (hereinafter referred to as “first fixed display”).
The jackpot variation display is a variation display that finally displays a certain combination of decorative symbols different from the first confirmation display (hereinafter referred to as “second confirmation display”).
The display of the first fixed display is started in response to the end of the loss symbol variation display,
In response to the end of the jackpot symbol variation display, the display of the second confirmation display is started,
3. The variation in which the display of a certain effect display is started by the derivation of the first result, rather than the variable display in which the display of the certain effect display is not started by the derivation of the second result. “The display is configured so that it is easier to be finalized and displayed in a big win mode” means that “the display of a certain effect display was not started by the derivation of the second result” Also, the decorative symbol variation display in which display of a certain effect display is started by derivation of the first result is configured such that the second fixed display is more easily displayed.
That is,
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 2 to 9,
It is configured to be able to display a display suggesting that a certain effect display is displayed before a certain mini game is started.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 2 thru | or 10, Comprising:
It is configured to be able to execute the timer notice effect,
In relation to the timer notice effect, the certain effect display may be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. It is a game stand as described in any one of Claims 2 thru | or 11,
A certain effect display is a display whose display is started only by derivation of the first result.
A game stand characterized by that. A gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 12,
The display means is a means capable of displaying a display representing a plurality of types of certain characters,
One of the displays representing the plurality of types of characters is a first character display,
One of the displays representing the plurality of types of characters is a second character display,
The first character display and the second character display are separate displays,
The display means is means capable of displaying a plurality of types of decorative symbols,
One of the plurality of types of decorative symbols is a decorative symbol including the first character display (hereinafter referred to as “certain decorative symbol”).
Among the certain types of serif notice displays, the serif notice display is a display including the second character display (hereinafter referred to as “certain notice display”).
A certain chance including the certain decorative design (hereinafter referred to as “certain chance”) is configured to be displayed,
After the certain chance stop is displayed, the certain line notice display is displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. The game table according to claim 13,
Before the certain chance eye is stopped and displayed, a display of a combination of decorative symbols that are not chance eyes (hereinafter referred to as “non-certain chance eyes”) may be stopped and displayed.
An effect that changes the non-certain chance to the certain chance is configured to be executable.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to claim 13 or 14,
In a certain production state among a plurality of types of production states, the certain chance eyes are configured to be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. The game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 15,
The certain type of dialogue notice display is a display including any one of a plurality of types of characters,
Before the display of the certain type of line notice display is started, the display suggesting the character included in the certain type of line notice display can be displayed.
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 16,
“A certain mini-game may be started in connection with the certain kind of serif notice display” according to claim 1, means that “the display of the certain kind of notice notice is started. After that, a certain mini-game may be started before the display of the certain type of notice notice display is ended. "
A game stand characterized by that. A game stand according to any one of claims 1 to 17,
A certain type of serif notice display (hereinafter referred to as “second type serif notice display”) is different from the certain type of serif notice display (hereinafter referred to as “first type serif notice display”). Configured to be viewable,
There is a state in which both the first type serif notice display and the second type serif notice display are displayed,
A configuration in which a certain mini-game is not started when only the second type serif notice display of the first type serif notice display and the second type serif notice display is displayed. Being
A game stand characterized by that. The game machine according to claim 18, wherein
With operating means,
As the response display of the operation of the operation means, the display of a certain serif notice display of the second type serif notice display is started,
When an operation of the operation means is performed in a state where a display indicating the appearance of the operation means (hereinafter referred to as “operation display”) is displayed, a response display of the second type serif notice display It is configured to start the display of a certain dialog notice display,
At least a part of the display of the first type of dialogue notice display is overlapped by the operation display,
A game stand characterized by that. The game machine according to any one of claims 1 to 19,
Some minigames contain variable displays,
A game stand characterized by that. 21. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 20,
The game machine is a pachinko machine,
A game stand characterized by that. 21. The gaming table according to any one of claims 1 to 20,
The gaming table is a slot machine,
A game stand characterized by that.

Images